# AXL — Knowledge Base

> Guides and instructions for the AXL education platform.

Index: https://docs.axl.tech/llms.txt

---

# Getting Around AXL

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-getting-around

> A five-minute tour for new users: the home page, the menu, the top bar, turning sections on, and inviting a colleague.

This first lesson shows where everything lives in AXL, so the next lessons are easy to follow. It takes about five minutes.

## The Home Page

After you sign in, AXL opens the home page. In the middle is the **AI Assistant**: type what you want to do in plain words, or pick a suggestion such as **Create a Landing Page** or **Write an Email**. Above it are three shortcuts: connect your own AI agent, open the support chat, and go to this knowledge base.

![AXL home page with the left menu, the top bar, the Welcome to Northstar Academy shortcuts and the AI Assistant box with suggestions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3e1a617bc4074b5cbf42ba4fab8ce888de7f6a2ce0568657727ecb9a46852f08.png)

## The Left Menu

The menu on the left opens every part of AXL. Click a section to expand it:

- **Sites**: websites, forms and quizzes, widgets, domains and website analytics.
- **Webinars**: live webinars, templates and automated webinars.
- **Content** and **Memberships**: videos and files, courses, libraries and community.
- **Sales**: products, promo codes, orders and payments.
- **CRM**: contacts, tasks and deals.
- **Communications** and **Email**: chat, chatbots, channels, telephony, email broadcasts and templates.
- **Settings**: your account, team, payment gateways, automations and more.

The menu button at the left end of the top bar collapses the menu to icons. The top bar has the support chat, email, chat and phone icons and notifications; your account name and your own name open their menus on the right. See "[Top Bar and Sidebar](https://docs.axl.tech/toolbar)".

## Turn Sections On

**Account Features** at the bottom of the menu lists the parts of AXL your account uses. Turn on the switch for what you need, for example **Calls** for telephony; if a section is missing from the menu, check here first. This page is available to team members with full account rights.

![Account Features with switches for Websites, Videos, Webinars, Memberships, Calls, Pipelines, Tasks, Communications, Email & Broadcasts, Affiliate Program, Meetings and Marketing.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/454550ce3becfdd8c8b058093711ccdec9b7b0a5174fa3697d1a237a4238e1db.png)

## Invite a Colleague

1. Open **Settings → Team & Departments** and click **Create Invite**.
2. Enter their **Email** and **Job Title**, then choose a role or tick the **Permissions** they need.
3. Click **Create**. They receive an email with a link to set up their login; someone who already has an AXL account gets an invitation to join yours.

![New Invitation panel with an example email and job title, Roles, the Permissions list, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/95762fc3ec4e0b27f042ef6066eaac19cae11f1cc8723c4657992736a636bbda.png)

More in "[Team and Departments](https://docs.axl.tech/team-and-departments)".

## Next Lesson

[Add Your First Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-add-contacts)

---

# Add Your First Contacts

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-add-contacts

> Add a contact by hand, import a list from a file, open a contact card and tag contacts.

Contacts are the people you work with: leads, customers and students. All of them live in **CRM → Contacts**. Here is how to get your first ones in.

## Add a Contact

1. Open **CRM → Contacts** and click **Add Contact**.
2. Enter the **Email** (required), the first and last name. **Show Full Form** adds the phone, tags and other fields.
3. Click **Create**.

![CRM contact list with the Add Contact and Import Contacts buttons, search and filters, and demo contacts.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c1e03adaf1c25b014f5d17d4c19d37822e7882c59c310af0801b8811bbba9386.png)

![Add Contact panel with an example email, first name Emma and last name Clark, Show Full Form, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/da8b3acd1041beac34c0f3dfea7532e7bfd5e96f664163c3b7092f3e0c118558.png)

## Import a List

1. Click **Import Contacts**.
2. Upload a TXT, CSV or XLSX file up to 25 MB, or paste the list as text. **Download Sample File** shows the expected layout.
3. Click **Next**, match the columns to contact fields, then check the result on the **Validation** step and start the import.

A row whose email or phone matches an existing contact updates that contact instead of creating a duplicate. See "[Importing Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/importing-contacts)".

![Import Contacts dialog on the Data Source step with File and Text, the upload area, Download Sample File and Session Name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/593b8c7c705f716428b586efc1c41f628ed0fe4a94533500a841620b67a02b2d.png)

## Open a Contact Card

Click a name to open the contact card. Its tabs collect everything about the person: learning, tasks, orders, webinars, automations and forms. The buttons under the tabs add a note, start a chat, send an email or place a call.

![Contact card of Olivia Bennett with the General Information tab, the Add note, Chat, Email and Call buttons, the Contact Profile, Access & Products and Deals.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b1ab7128081a039ab214f0295601d2dcc35614ab97463b52a4c6aea748acbc93.png)

## Tag Contacts

Tags help you sort contacts and target broadcasts. In the **Contact Profile**, click **more** and pick a tag in the **Tags** field; **Manage Tags** creates new ones.

**Important:** adding a tag can start automations that react to tags. Check your automations before tagging many contacts at once.

![Tags field of a contact with the tag list open: Masterclass engaged, Northstar welcome sequence and Manage Tags.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e10b67a6d8d537d9af17ced9b2c84c56a3466d68d1e2379d572182b05816ae94.png)

Contacts also arrive on their own, for example when someone submits a form with an email or phone on your website. More in "[Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/contacts)".

## Next Lesson

[Make Your First Page](https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-first-page)

---

# Make Your First Page

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-first-page

> Create a website, add a page with the AI editor, publish it and check that its form brings in contacts.

A website in AXL is a set of pages under one address. You create the website once, then add pages to it.

## Create a Website

1. Open **Sites → Sites** and click **Add Website**.
2. Enter the **Name** and the **Default Subdomain**, the address where the website opens. You can connect your own domain later.
3. Click **Create and Open**.

![Add Website panel with an example name and subdomain, Domain, Website enabled, Cancel, Create and Create and Open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/20d0b21c40eb27f58d3dcc371cb533619c66bd90c6486660d1f399a94c4c0f55.png)

## Add a Page

On the website's **Pages** tab, click **New Page**. In **Create with AI**, pick a starting point (**Landing Page**, **About Us**, **Pricing**, **Contact** or **FAQ**) or describe the page in your own words. **Create from Scratch** starts from an empty page instead.

![New page dialog on Create with AI with the Landing Page, About Us, Pricing, Contact and FAQ starting points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/81f3598bacb7ec414d1fe37e49a29c37c6cb3f2f2fa313e409c8f056508d8fd2.png)

## Edit the Page and Add a Form

The page opens in the editor. In **Chat**, ask for changes in plain words, for example "Add a sign-up form with name and email under the first section". In **Design**, click any element in the preview to change it by hand. The **Contact** starting point already includes a contact form.

![Page editor of Light & Shadow: portrait lighting workshop with Page Status Available, the Chat, Design and Code modes and the page preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c80dcf1306b9e9deda0eb181e9c7e992e187c23b831889162d6c542a76cc16f4.png)

## Publish and Test

1. Your edits are saved as a draft. When the editor shows unpublished changes, click **Publish**; visitors see only the published version.
2. Make sure the **Page Status** switch is on (**Available**) and the website is enabled.
3. Open the page address under its name, fill in the form with your own email and send it.
4. Open **CRM → Contacts**: a form sent with an email or phone creates or updates a contact.

More in "[Site Pages](https://docs.axl.tech/site-pages)" and "[Forms and Quizzes](https://docs.axl.tech/forms-and-quizzes)".

## Next Lesson

[Send Your First Email Campaign](https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-first-email-campaign)

---

# Send Your First Email Campaign

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-first-email-campaign

> Create a broadcast, choose who receives it, write the email, send a test and send or schedule it.

A broadcast sends one email to many contacts at once: a newsletter, an announcement or an offer.

## Create a Broadcast

Open **Email → Broadcasts** and click **Create Broadcast**. The list also shows how your earlier broadcasts went: how many emails were sent, opened and clicked.

![Broadcasts tab with Create Broadcast and earlier Northstar broadcasts with sending stats, progress, opens and clicks.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/809d253b38fce1879c20241da2ad5e73bf80ef08416b7eba91b75b910c53627f.png)

## Choose the Audience and the Time

1. Enter a **Title** for the broadcast.
2. Under **Audience Source**, choose a **Mailing List** or build a **Contact Filter**, for example everyone with a certain tag.
3. Under **When to Send**, choose **Send Now** or **Send Later** and set the date and time in the account's time zone.
4. With **Email** on, click **Use Template** to pick a saved email, or **Create Email** to write a new one, with AI or from a ready-made design.

![New Broadcast panel with the title November cohort: last seats, Mailing List Newsletter subscribers, Send Later with date and time, the Email switch, No Template, Use Template and Create Email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e71d3ea2d3537fa971657e05f93ab9894e5a14a13b18424f8f8b4155a6aca17c.png)

## Test and Send

1. In the email editor, use **Send Test Email** with an address you control and check the email there.
2. Click **Create**. With **Send Now** the broadcast starts sending; with **Send Later** it waits for the time you set.

Contacts without an email, unsubscribed contacts and banned contacts are skipped automatically. More in "[Broadcasts](https://docs.axl.tech/broadcast)" and "[Mailing Lists](https://docs.axl.tech/mailing-lists)".

## Next Lesson

[Chat with Website Visitors](https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-website-chat)

---

# Chat with Website Visitors

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-website-chat

> Set up the website chat, put it on your sites and answer visitors in the AXL inbox.

The website chat adds a chat button to your pages. Visitors write to you, and you answer from AXL.

## Set Up the Chat

Open **Communications → Website Chat**. Set the title and colors; the **Preview** on the right updates as you type and shows the chat's screens: **Home**, **Offline**, **Form** and others.

![Website chat channel Northstar Academy with AXL sites: 0, Embed on Site, the General Settings and Appearance fields and the chat preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/63b2d9710f7fea7e7e091c9ead2725a9bc14dbefeccdd739c7092182528b3890.png)

## Put It on Your Sites

1. Click **Embed on Site**.
2. Under **AXL Sites**, choose the websites built in AXL; the chat is on there with nothing else to set up.
3. For a website outside AXL, copy the code and paste it into the <head> of that site's HTML. Add **Allowed Sites** if the chat should open only on certain addresses.
4. Click **Save**.

![Embed Chat dialog with the AXL Sites selector, the embed code with Copy, Allowed Sites with Add Site, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e89d5c999cc06951a8c29d24bc1ddce8c1efec26bdd91f0fb33fe6ff49bb9865.png)

## Answer Visitors

New messages appear in **Communications → Chat** and under the chat icon in the top bar, together with conversations from your other channels. See "[Chat](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-room)". To connect messengers such as WhatsApp, Telegram or Instagram, see "[Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels)".

![Full-size Chat with the conversation list, an open conversation with Olivia Bennett, and her profile panel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dbb84434f9bc1b1ca47718a47c2196e4a01865599fe8264f2f917ca04ae32cdb.png)

## Next Lesson

[Your First Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-first-automation)

---

# Your First Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-first-automation

> Build an automation that reacts to a form submission and tells your team, then turn it on.

An automation does routine work for you: when something happens (an **event**), AXL runs the **actions** you chose. In this lesson, your team gets a notification every time someone submits a form.

## Create the Automation

1. Open **Settings → Automations** and click **Create Automation**.
2. Enter a **Title**, for example "New form request", and click **Create**.
3. Open the new automation and go to its **Automation** tab.

![Automations list with Create Automation, search, the Type filter and Northstar automations with their status and step counts.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f7fe60311d1bbc2588663efc8dff51f1596b39d9574a0a26a8ab0a8005ac60f.png)

## Add an Event and an Action

1. In the panel on the left, find **Form Submitted** and drag it onto the canvas, or double-click it. Leave **Form Name** empty to react to any form.
2. Add the **Notification** action the same way. Write the **Notification Text** and choose **Admin** as the type and the admins to notify.
3. Connect the cards: drag from the circle on the right of the event to the circle on the left of the action.
4. Switch the toggle at the top of the panel to **Active**.

![Automation canvas: the step palette with Form Submitted, and the Form Submitted event for any form connected to a Notification for admins. The automation is Active.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/54774187e84cfb8414e43ada1e079f3a37422b0c30f9e9a85e6c99b9158bda08.png)

Add more actions to the chain the same way, for example **Send Email** to thank the person or **Add Tags** to mark them. Event cards are blue, action cards are green. More in "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)", "[Automation Event Types](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)" and "[Automation Action Types and Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".

## Next Lesson

[Start Accepting Payments](https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-get-paid)

---

# Start Accepting Payments

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-get-paid

> Connect a payment gateway, create a product and start selling it.

To take money in AXL, you need two things: a payment gateway that charges the customer, and a product to sell.

## Connect a Payment Gateway

1. Open **Settings → Payment Gateways** and click **Add Payment Gateway**.
2. Choose a provider, for example **Stripe**. The form shows which keys to copy from the provider's account and where to find them.
3. Check **Show on Website** to offer this method on your website, then save.

![Connect a Payment Gateway picker with Stripe (recommended), PayPal, Square, Revolut Pay, Affirm, NMI, Mercado Pago, BitPay, Cash and Bank Transfer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08adb14eca8d69d5217675d14ce15668565b7d66c61caf2c6e419c9c8689e20c.png)

Connected gateways appear in the list with the payments they took. Drag the rows to change the order of payment methods at checkout. See "[Payment Gateways](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)" and "[Stripe Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings)".

![Payment Settings list with Stripe, Cash, NMI, PayPal, Revolut Pay and Bank Transfer, their currency, website visibility and payments.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/41b12683882ae34b7090b55ca3eb2591d9eaef641c3d7806a468d297fff3b2c2.png)

## Create a Product

Open **Sales → Products & Services** and click **Add Product**. Enter the public name and the price, and choose what the buyer gets, for example access to a course. See "[Products and Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".

![Products & Services list with Add Product and two Northstar products with their price, content and orders.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/940a5f83f6affdcce4124f8b15050d3244d9f9f22adf4d08627329ecae77f9bf.png)

## Sell It

The quickest way to sell is a payment form for the product on a page of your website: see "[Site Pages](https://docs.axl.tech/site-pages)". You can also create an order for a specific contact and send them its payment link: see "[Create an Order](https://docs.axl.tech/create-order)".

When the order is paid in full, it is completed and the buyer gets access to what the product includes automatically. Paid orders appear in **Sales → Orders** and on the contact's card.

## Next Lesson

[Let the AI Assistant Do It](https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-ai-assistant)

---

# Let the AI Assistant Do It

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quick-start-ai-assistant

> Ask the AI Assistant to build pages, emails, courses and automations for you, and review what it made.

Everything in the previous lessons can also be done by asking. The AI Assistant works in your account: it can find data and create pages, broadcasts, courses, quizzes and automations from a request in plain words.

## Open the Assistant

Click **AI Assistant** in the menu, or type in the box on the home page. Start a new chat or continue an earlier one.

![AI Assistant start screen with a question about Northstar Academy masterclass registrations typed in the message field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bee8029ae978b200ae2e34fdba36e40623180f0be51afa7886fea829a6bb3b5a.png)

## Describe the Result

Say what you want to get, not which buttons to press. Mention the goal, the audience, dates and the status you want, for example: "Create a landing page for a leadership consultation with a booking form. Keep it as a draft." If something is missing, the assistant asks.

![Request to create a Northstar landing page for a leadership consultation, kept as a draft.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d5737beeb91f57faee108fbbbb95b1e8d4946e29c8faf95ce0b49fe02e3672d0.png)

## Review What It Made

The assistant answers with a summary and cards for everything it created. Open each card, check the content and settings, and publish or turn things on only when they are right.

![Assistant summary of the created draft page with links and cards for the page and its automation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4c65a9090a47f1d0fa2d5c5ebec62c32f214132b567d5f176e5a217f89e5b4eb.png)

**Important:** the AI Assistant is a paid feature; its usage is billed to your account. More in "[AI Assistant](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-assistant)".

That's the end of the Quick Start. To go further, open any section of this knowledge base from the menu on the left.

---

# AI Features Overview

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/overview-of-the-platform-s-ai-capabilities

> A tour of AXL's AI features: the AI Assistant, AI page editor, email and quiz tools, AI Tutor, Chat Agent, MCP, and how AI usage is billed.

AXL includes AI tools for account administration, pages, emails, quizzes, assignment review, and customer conversations. You can also connect an external AI client through MCP.

Jump to a section:

Built-In AXL AI Assistant

New AI-Powered Page Editor

A New Approach to Email Campaigns

Creating Quizzes with AI

AI Tutor

Chat Agent

Connecting External AI Services via MCP

Access and Pricing

## Built-In AXL AI Assistant

**AXL now includes a built-in AI Assistant**. You can give it tasks in plain language, pull information from your account, and create or configure items in the platform without moving between sections.

The AI Assistant does more than answer questions. It can also take action in your account.

For example, you can ask it to:

- Find contacts, orders, pages, and other data
- Create a page, form, course, webinar, email, or promo code
- Update the content, design, settings, or status of an existing item
- Prepare an email campaign for a selected audience
- Set up registration, notifications, or a schedule
- Connect forms, emails, CRM tools, and events in an automation

If the assistant needs more information to finish a task, it asks follow-up questions. When the task is done, it shows the items it created or updated in the chat and links to their settings.

To get started, open **AI Assistant** in the left-hand AXL menu and describe the result you want in the prompt composer. In an existing conversation, start a new chat when you want a separate task.

For best results, include this in your prompt:

- The goal of the task
- The item or account section it relates to
- Any constraints and parameters
- The status you want for the result: draft, published, active, or a plan only

Before you publish pages, launch email campaigns, or complete other important operations, review the final settings.

Learn more about the built-in AI Assistant: https://docs.axl.tech/ai-assistant.

![Current AI Assistant landing with an empty prompt composer, Popular, Content, Students and Billing categories, and suggested tasks.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1ba2f47d78e6f1b6b0fd8cf6987bbd0e0531fd1e8f23691fffc91183d8ca1722.png)
Open **AI Assistant** in the main menu. Describe your goal in the composer or choose a suggestion to start. This is the current entry screen, before a request is sent.

## New AI-Powered Page Editor

In the new page editor, you can manage content and design through a text chat. Describe the change you want, and AI helps apply it to the page.

Key capabilities include:

- Creating and editing pages with text prompts
- Changing page structure, content, and design
- Converting pages from the previous editor to the new format

Pages are built with HTML and CSS plus additional AXL-specific instructions. This format works with a variety of AI agents and external tools.

To start a new page, open the site and choose **New Page → Create with AI**. Describe the purpose, audience, content and desired style. Review the generated draft and its settings before publication.

![Create with AI page dialog with five page suggestions, Page Style set to Let AI choose, and an unsent Northstar Academy landing-page prompt.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/db278dda6aa102f8a6950f44e53409286076e33070288a7f20682f02101f9146.png)
In your site, choose **New Page → Create with AI**. Describe the page and choose a style if needed. The example prompt is unsent; it does not show a generated or published page.

## A New Approach to Email Campaigns

Emails in AXL are now standalone items that you can manage much like website pages.

The updated editor includes:

- Email HTML editing
- Design and style controls
- Previews
- New templates
- AI-assisted email editing

This lets you manage an email’s content and design in one place and prepare campaign materials faster.

Learn more: https://docs.axl.tech/email-templates.

![Email Create with AI dialog with Welcome Email, Promo Offer, Newsletter and Event Invite suggestions, an empty composer and the AI billing notice.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5f29e2ebff00ed5f76f03abec8a0998d00d04a6c1ed116d54dce0685f5fae32c.png)
Start from **Email Templates → Create Template → Create with AI**. Include the topic, goal and audience in your request, then review the email content and preview before use. This screen shows the entry point, not an AI-generated result.

## Creating Quizzes with AI

**You can use AI to create and update quizzes**. The chat interface helps you prepare questions, answer choices, outcomes, and branching logic.

For example, you can ask the assistant to:

- Create a quiz for a specific purpose
- Revise the wording of questions
- Set up different outcomes based on a respondent’s answers
- Adapt an existing quiz for a new audience or product

Learn more: https://docs.axl.tech/forms-and-quizzes.

![Form Create with AI dialog with Registration Form, Knowledge Quiz, Funnel Quiz and Form from Google Sheet suggestions and an unsent Northstar Academy registration prompt.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9a43252dc3e41848f6db1596a797cae9093bcf2d4a093a05ef36b6f4b6e1c7bc.png)
Open **Forms & Quizzes** and choose **Create with AI** when creating a form. Specify the questions, required fields and outcome. This example is an unsent prompt, before generation.

## AI Tutor

When enabled for the selected courses and assignments, the AI Tutor automatically reviews submissions. It analyzes students’ answers, compares them with the course materials, and gives a reasoned evaluation.

The AI Tutor can use this information in its analysis:

- A description of the correct answer
- Its own knowledge base
- The lesson content
- Supported images and documents when **Analyze attached files** is enabled, and transcribed voice messages the student submits

You can set up the AI Tutor for specific courses and individual assignments, and choose its instructions, feedback tone, analysis strategy, and minimum confidence threshold. If the AI Tutor’s confidence falls below the threshold, the submission is automatically sent for manual review.

Before launch, you can test the AI Tutor on a selected course, lesson, and assignment. The test results show the AI Tutor’s decision, reasoning, and confidence score.

Usage is billed by the number of tokens consumed. It depends on the strategy you choose, the amount of course material, and the complexity of each review.

Learn more: https://docs.axl.tech/application-ai-curator.

![AI Tutor General Settings showing Northstar Academy course selection, instructions, Balanced strategy, knowledge-base upload, comment and attachment controls, and confidence threshold 95.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dd77a85734e97ec91171554a20ad4e75ffb548b7304e4c3a2f78ee56f83dadd6.png)
Configure an AI Tutor under **Settings → AI Agents**. The example shows its settings while the agent is disabled; it is not a completed assignment review. Choose the courses and review rules before enabling the tutor.

## Chat Agent

The Chat Agent communicates with customers and users automatically. Unlike the built-in AI Assistant, which helps admins manage the platform, the Chat Agent works as a virtual agent in both external and internal chats.

The Chat Agent can:

- Answer questions using an uploaded knowledge base
- Keep track of the conversation context
- Ask follow-up questions
- Qualify inquiries and leads
- Analyze images, documents, and voice messages
- Hand off complex conversations to a team member
- Work in your connected communication channels
- Take part in AXL automations

Each Chat Agent can have its own name, instructions, communication style, knowledge base, strategy, and list of channels. Before you connect it to live chats, you can test it in the built-in conversation simulator.

In automations, the Chat Agent works as a standalone step. Configure its exit conditions to route a contact to a human, a spam branch, or a custom branch when the corresponding condition is met. A completion timeout can end the AI step after the configured period.

Usage is billed based on the number of tokens consumed, including tests you run in the simulator.

Learn more: https://docs.axl.tech/application-ai-assistant.

![Chat Agent General Settings with an unsaved Northstar Admissions example, instructions, Balanced strategy, presets, knowledge-base upload, attachment control, channels and meeting selection.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b2fb46ab5627b3f07898f86fe5b68f68f89be60b1c0abe4310aeff0d4ab18464.png)
Example Chat Agent settings under **Settings → AI Agents**. The name and instructions shown are an unsaved illustration. Review the knowledge base, channel selection and other settings before saving; the screenshot does not show a live customer conversation.

## Connecting External AI Services via MCP

AXL supports the Model Context Protocol (MCP), which lets you connect compatible AI apps to your account and use AXL features from those apps’ interfaces.

Once connected, you can give tasks through Claude, ChatGPT, Codex, Cursor, and other MCP-compatible tools. The AI agent gets access to the AXL features you’ve authorized and acts within your permissions.

Example prompts:

- "Build a course from the uploaded videos. Add a course structure, learning materials, questions, and tests."
- "Create a page on my website that presents this course, and add a registration form."
- "Prepare an email campaign for webinar attendees who registered but haven’t purchased the course yet."

With MCP, you can create websites, courses, forms, emails, quizzes, and automations, and work with your account data, all in the chat of the external AI service.

Learn more: https://docs.axl.tech/mcp.

![AXL MCP panel with the server URL and Copy button, supported AI-client choices, and Sign In with AXL button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bdf24b88eb81fed7a9b876fe1a8c4c36dba87ffc3e4935fd6ca59dc349b063a9.png)
Open **Settings → MCP** for your account’s connection details and client instructions. Authorize only the access you intend to grant. The setup screen does not confirm a completed external connection.

## Access and Pricing

AI features in AXL can consume your account’s AI credits. The charge depends on the feature’s usage and your account’s billing plan. Open **Settings → Billing → AI Functions** to see usage, spending, and the limits that apply to your account.

**Limits by Category** separates spending for **Team Members**, **Calls**, **AI Agents**, and **Automation**. When limits are available for editing, an empty amount leaves that category unlimited. Each limit resets at the start of the billing period. After changing a limit, click **Save changes**. If the account is using a limited trial allowance, follow the explanation shown in the card; do not assume every account has the same allowance or limit.

Your external AI service’s subscription or model charges are separate from AXL charges. Connecting through MCP does not make billable AXL tools free: for example, generating or regenerating images through AXL’s MCP tools uses the AXL AI balance. Review the proposed operation and its charge before confirming it, and check the resulting usage in **AI Functions**.

![Current AI Functions card with spending, credits, usage breakdown and limits for Team Members, Calls, AI Agents and Automation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d61fac85bc55cc201f020c101dcd6dd556d85baf561a55c6fd07ec8d2865c3e9.png)
Check **Settings → Billing → AI Functions** for your account’s actual usage and limits. The values shown are an example; your plan and usage can differ.

## Summary

AXL’s AI tools support several kinds of work:

- The built-in AI Assistant helps admins manage their accounts
- The page, email, and quiz editors speed up content creation
- The AI Tutor automates course assignment reviews
- The Chat Agent handles inquiries from customers and users
- MCP lets you manage the platform through external AI services

---

# AI Assistant

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/ai-assistant

> Use the built-in AI Assistant to find data, build pages, courses, emails, and automations, and manage your account by chatting in plain language.

The AXL AI Assistant turns a plain-language request into a clear plan and actions in your account. It can find data, create and configure items in the platform, and return the result in the chat with explanations, links, and cards that open the item for editing. You chat with the assistant, work with your data, and do what the platform allows without moving from one section of your account to another.

The AI Assistant combines guidance and task execution in a single conversation. It helps you pull up data quickly, prepare a marketing campaign, build a webinar funnel, edit a page or email, and set up appointment booking. You get the best results when your request includes a specific goal, context, constraints, and the status you want for the result, and when you review the final settings before launch.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

What Is the AXL AI Assistant?

Where to Find the Assistant and How to Get Started

How a Request Is Processed

What You Can Ask the Assistant to Do

How to Write Requests for Predictable Results

Examples of Tasks for the AI Assistant

## What Is the AXL AI Assistant?

The AI Assistant is a work assistant built into the AXL admin panel. It acts on your account based on your request. It can check how many contacts are in your CRM, create a promo code and an email campaign, build a webinar with landing pages and automated emails, set up a consultation booking page, and much more.

Unlike a regular chatbot, the assistant does more than give advice. If you describe a task precisely enough, it can set up the items you need in AXL and show what it created right in the conversation. You stay in control: you can open the result, review it, edit it by hand, or refine it with another request. You describe the business outcome, and the assistant turns it into specific AXL items and automations.

## Where to Find the Assistant and How to Get Started

1. Open "AI Assistant" in the left-hand AXL menu.
2. Click "New Chat" or continue an existing conversation.
3. Describe your goal in plain language: ask a question, request an item, or ask the assistant to build an entire process. You don't need to know the exact name of a setting or hunt for the section where it lives in AXL. Just describe the result you want, and the assistant works out which actions are needed.
4. Answer any clarifying questions. For example, tell it the audience, date, time, time zone, channel, link, or the status you want for the result.
5. Review the result in the chat, and open the related cards or links to go to the settings.

![AI Assistant start screen with a question about Northstar Academy masterclass registrations typed in the message field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bee8029ae978b200ae2e34fdba36e40623180f0be51afa7886fea829a6bb3b5a.png)

Your chats are saved in the list on the left. You can pin, rename, search, archive, and delete them, which is handy when you keep different projects in different conversations.

![Saved AI Assistant chats filtered by the search term Northstar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dbc3ebffb185695f50ab4f359a52b3d7c8aa075b21c052835b2235580234ba32.png)

## How a Request Is Processed

1. The assistant looks at the context of your account: your existing contacts, websites, webinars, and other items.
2. If it needs more information: it asks clarifying questions and suggests a plan.
3. While it works: the chat shows statuses such as "Figuring this out…" or "Working on it…".
4. When it finishes: the assistant lists what it created or changed, gives the status, and suggests next steps. Cards and direct links to the matching AXL sections appear for the items it created.

![The assistant proposes a plan for a Northstar email campaign and asks about the audience, cohort details, call to action, and campaign type.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e8958aa9b3986e0852c3470fdce0df3da0dd455b478d0d4b77528d1fa8c792c4.png)

## What You Can Ask the Assistant to Do

You can give the assistant tasks across AXL, from looking up information in your account to creating items and setting up complex automations. The assistant is a single entry point: if a feature is available in your account, you can describe the task in plain language without searching for the right section or configuring each step by hand.

For example, the assistant can:

- Find and verify: contacts, students, orders, pages, and other data.
- Create: a page, form, course, webinar, email, or promo code.
- Edit: the content, settings, design, or status of an existing item.
- Configure: an email campaign, registration, notifications, or a schedule.
- Connect into a process: combine forms, emails, CRM, and events into an automation.

The result depends on the features, data, and integrations available in your account. If an action isn't possible, for example because the required channel isn't connected, the assistant explains why and suggests an alternative.

## How to Write Requests for Predictable Results

A good request has four parts:

- Goal: what to create, find, or change.
- Context: the website, webinar, CRM segment, or other item the task relates to.
- Constraints: the audience, date, time zone, channel, duration, form fields, style, and links.
- Result status: create a draft, publish, activate, postpone, or only suggest a plan.

Example: "Create a consultation booking page: 30-minute sessions on weekdays from 12:00 p.m. to 4:00 p.m., over Zoom, with Name, Email, Phone, and Comments fields. Send a confirmation and a reminder 30 minutes before each appointment. Publish the page, but show me the final settings first."

![A consultation booking page request with session length, hours, Zoom, form fields, reminders, and the result status.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/655f89400e366afc350c1c08aae5249c77dc27f3b2fe8ca9e289730e8d2bd90f.png)

AI can make mistakes, and its use is billed to your account. For critical operations, ask it to save a draft or hold off until you've reviewed it.

**Important:** the assistant does real work in your account. A broadcast it creates is scheduled to send, so if you only want to review the text, ask for an email template first. Check pages, courses and automations through the links it returns before you publish or turn them on.

## Examples of Tasks for the AI Assistant

The examples below aren't a complete list of what the assistant can do. They show the general approach with a few common tasks. If your use case isn't covered here, describe the result you want in plain language. The assistant will ask for any missing details and tell you whether the task can be done with the features, data, and integrations in your account.

Websites and Landing Pages

The AI Assistant can build a website from a text description. It prepares pages, adds the blocks and forms you need, and connects a payment gateway already set up in your account to the payment form.

Your request can be short, such as "Create a landing page to sell a consultation," or detailed, with a description of the audience, structure, offer, and customer journey.

This gets you from idea to finished page faster, so you can focus on your product's content instead of assembling each element by hand.

![Request to create a Northstar landing page for a leadership consultation, kept as a draft.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d5737beeb91f57faee108fbbbb95b1e8d4946e29c8faf95ce0b49fe02e3672d0.png)

![Assistant summary of the created draft page with links and cards for the page and its automation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4c65a9090a47f1d0fa2d5c5ebec62c32f214132b567d5f176e5a217f89e5b4eb.png)

Online Courses

The AI Assistant can turn source materials into structured courses.

The AI Assistant can:

- Plan a course curriculum
- Organize the material into modules and lessons
- Write the lesson theory
- Add quizzes
- Create practical assignments
- Build a step-by-step learning path

For example, a set of notes and an original guide can become a complete course with lessons, review questions, and student assignments.

![Request to build an unpublished Northstar course from notes, with modules, lessons, quizzes, and an assignment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5293bd96165b261fcea330699e5c8394a69e7ea19b4f95b543967e97e82bf127.png)

![Course structure the assistant created: two modules with lessons, theory, quizzes, and a final assignment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b78d6f27c0e5f42b713387926280e1647b4f7a7800182e22fa8a9836c9ced2e5.png)

Forms and Quizzes

The AI Assistant can create forms and interactive quizzes for a specific business goal, such as a participant questionnaire, an application form, an audience-segmentation test, or a quiz that guides people to the right product.

The assistant helps you write the questions, branching logic, and final results. That makes a form more than a way to collect contact details. It becomes a full part of your marketing process.

![Request to create a Northstar quiz that recommends one of three leadership programs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/438402bdd9b06b9ca640405618da8183ff8484dc4b66eec7252575b3652ba215.png)

![The generated quiz open in the form editor, with its question pages and answer options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f5fe3df156af2fdb9e40afab465fa4f00ce731075249c65b0b42314c324d4683.png)

Email Campaigns

Using the AI Assistant, you can create branded email templates, build campaigns, and schedule emails for specific audience segments.

For example, you can ask:

"Tomorrow at 10:00 a.m., send a reminder to everyone who registered for the webinar but hasn't purchased the course yet."

The assistant can prepare the copy, format the email, and schedule delivery when you explicitly request it. Review the audience, timing, and sending settings before launching the campaign. You manage the campaign with plain-language requests instead of configuring each step by hand.

![Email campaign request and the assistant summary of the unsent draft broadcast, its audience, and content.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b2d96d3c88575bdd1658fb0d056035ddfc5a8795c1c720ec4db2126476a16bc8.png)

![Draft broadcast with contact filters: Masterclass webinar registration, no access to the certificate course, and no certificate purchase.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/90789aeb93b0e321e571876766ab7950008687ee27291d69763101c18bb4503e.png)

Automations

One of the AI Assistant's key capabilities is creating multi-step automations.

The AI Assistant can connect these elements into a single process:

- Forms and registrations
- Emails and notifications
- CRM pipeline stages
- Conditions and triggers
- Time delays
- User actions

For example, after someone registers for a webinar, the system can send them a link, remind them when the live stream is about to start, and then segment the audience by behavior. People who watched most of the stream can receive a special offer.

You describe the logic you need in plain language, the assistant builds the automation, and AXL runs it automatically.

![Request to set up a webinar automation with a registration email, a reminder, and engagement tagging.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/23cb3769fa65ec04031b8e6dc0d596cea538af01a74a496361ec02a6074cd111.png)

![Assistant summary of the webinar automation steps, kept turned off for review.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/278c3fc9991d26bbfd49f15a90390d70de2d9417dac0c77cd6e92cf6608e3bc5.png)

## With the AI Assistant, you handle routine tasks right in the chat using plain-language requests. That cuts down manual work and gets you to the result faster.

## Review a result before launch

1. For a new campaign, name the audience, product, time zone, and intended status in your request. For example: “Draft a webinar reminder for Northstar Academy. Use the registered contacts who have not purchased. Do not send it yet.”
2. When the assistant finishes, read the summary and open each result card or link. Check the email copy, recipient rules, dates, and links in the corresponding AXL settings.
3. If something is wrong, identify the item and the exact change in a follow-up request. Review the updated item again before asking for publication, activation, or sending.

Open **AI Assistant** from the left navigation and type your request in the message field. Press **Enter** to send, or **Shift + Enter** to add a new line. Starter prompts are grouped under **Popular**, **Content**, **Students**, and **Billing**.

---

# MCP

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/mcp

> Connect AXL to Claude, ChatGPT, Cursor, and other AI tools with MCP, and build sites, courses, forms, emails, and automations from prompts.

AXL MCP connects your AXL account to an AI client such as Claude, ChatGPT, Cursor or VS Code. After you connect, you describe a task in the chat ("Create a landing page for the photography webinar with a registration form") and the AI agent creates it in your account: pages, courses, forms and quizzes, emails and automations.

To connect, you copy one address into your AI client and sign in with your AXL account. Choose your client below and copy the ready-made setup.

## What Is AXL MCP?

MCP (Model Context Protocol) is an open standard that lets AI applications use tools in other services. AXL runs an MCP server, so any MCP-compatible client can work with your account after you sign in. The agent acts on your behalf and has exactly your permissions in AXL: it cannot do what your own role does not allow.

## How to Connect AXL MCP

The AXL MCP server address is the same for every account:

```
https://app.axl.tech/mcp
```

The same address and per-client instructions are in your account under **Settings → MCP**: pick your client, and step 2 of the panel changes to match it.

![Settings → MCP connection panel with Cursor selected: step 1 Copy the AXL MCP URL with https://app.axl.tech/mcp and the Copy button, step 2 the Cursor instructions, step 3 Connect and Sign In.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/49c452b40161d2e4a7cc3981a45adff682ffeecc60de0c312762bb52b44cc29c.png)

### Set up your AI client

Open the section for your client and follow its steps. Every client signs in the same way: after you add the server, it opens an AXL sign-in page in the browser. Sign in, approve the connection, and return to the client.

Claude (web and desktop app)
1. In Claude, open **Customize → Connectors** and click **Add custom connector**.
2. Paste the address and click **Add**:

    ```
    https://app.axl.tech/mcp
    ```
3. Click **Connect** next to the new connector and sign in with your AXL account.

Shortcut: in AXL, open **Settings → MCP**, select **Claude** and click **Connect to Claude**. Claude opens with the connector details already filled in; confirm adding it and sign in.

Claude Code (terminal)
Run this command in your terminal, in any project:

```
claude mcp add axl --transport http https://app.axl.tech/mcp
```

The next time Claude Code uses AXL, it opens the browser for sign-in.

ChatGPT
1. In ChatGPT, open **Settings → Plugins → MCP** and click **Add server**.
2. Paste the address:

    ```
    https://app.axl.tech/mcp
    ```
3. Save the server and sign in with your AXL account when ChatGPT asks.

Codex
Add AXL through `mcp-remote`, which handles the browser sign-in. Add this server to your MCP configuration:

```
{
  "mcpServers": {
    "axl": {
      "command": "npx",
      "args": ["mcp-remote", "https://app.axl.tech/mcp"]
    }
  }
}
```

`npx` needs Node.js installed on your computer.

Cursor
In Cursor, open **Settings → Tools & MCP → New MCP Server**, name the server `axl`, set the type to **HTTP**, and paste the address. Or add this to `~/.cursor/mcp.json` (all projects) or `.cursor/mcp.json` (one project):

```
{
  "mcpServers": {
    "axl": {
      "url": "https://app.axl.tech/mcp"
    }
  }
}
```

VS Code
1. Open the command palette and run **MCP: Add Server**.
2. Choose **HTTP** and paste the address:

    ```
    https://app.axl.tech/mcp
    ```
3. Name the server `axl` and choose **Workspace** or **Global**.

Windsurf
Windsurf has no dialog for remote servers. Open **Settings → Cascade → MCP Servers**, open `mcp_config.json` and add the `axl` entry:

```
{
  "mcpServers": {
    "axl": {
      "serverUrl": "https://app.axl.tech/mcp"
    }
  }
}
```

Cline
In Cline, open **MCP Servers → Remote Servers**, enter the name `axl` and the address below, and click **Add Server**:

```
https://app.axl.tech/mcp
```

Another MCP client
If your client supports remote HTTP servers, give it the address `https://app.axl.tech/mcp`. If it only starts local servers (for example, Claude Desktop through a configuration file), connect through `mcp-remote`:

```
{
  "mcpServers": {
    "axl": {
      "command": "npx",
      "args": ["mcp-remote", "https://app.axl.tech/mcp"]
    }
  }
}
```

Menu names in AI clients change between versions. If a menu above looks different, look for "custom connector", "MCP server" or "remote server" in your client's settings and use the same address.

### Check the connection

Start with a request that changes nothing, for example:

```
List my AXL courses without changing anything.
```

If the agent answers with your courses, the connection works and the agent sees the right account. If it asks you to sign in again, repeat the sign-in from the client.

## What You Can Ask the Agent to Do

Describe the result in your own words; the agent asks for missing details. A few examples of what works well:

- **Websites and landing pages**: "Create a landing page to sell a consulting session for $149 with a Stripe payment form."
- **Courses**: "Turn these notes into a course with modules, lessons, a test after each module and a practical assignment."
- **Forms and quizzes**: "Build a quiz that asks about experience level, sends each answer down its own path and tags the contact."
- **Emails**: "Create a reminder email template for webinar registrants."
- **Automations**: "After registration for the webinar, send the join link, remind an hour before the start, then send the offer to people who watched more than 10 minutes."

**Important:** the agent does real work in your account.

- A created email broadcast is scheduled to send. If you only want to review the text, ask for an email template first.
- Open the links the agent returns and check the result before you publish a page or course or turn on an automation.
- Before the agent sends anything to contacts, check the audience, the text and the time.

---

# Chat Agent

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/application-ai-assistant

> Set up a Chat Agent that answers customers in your chat channels around the clock, uses your knowledge base, and hands off to a team member when needed.

The Chat Agent is a full-featured virtual team member powered by advanced large language models (LLMs). It works in your account around the clock. It chats with users and customers, answers questions from your materials, qualifies leads, handles requests, and steers each conversation toward the outcome you want, with handoff to a team member when needed.

The agent works like a live support rep: it understands context, keeps the conversation coherent, asks clarifying questions, and offers ready-to-use solutions, instantly and at any hour.

All management tools, conversation history, and analytics are in AXL. You can create 20 or more independent agents for different tasks.

Select a section below to jump to its description:

How to Create and Configure a Chat Agent

How It Works

Testing

Instructions

Prebuilt Behavior Presets

Knowledge Base

Analyzing Attached Files

Handoff to a Live Team Member

Built-In Spam Protection

Using the Chat Agent in Automations

Choosing a Strategy and Understanding Costs

## How to Create and Configure a Chat Agent

Go to Settings → AI Agents. The page lists all the AI agents in your account.

Click "Create Agent".

![AI Agents list with the Create Agent button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d417f05b076d0701e4a2aea0435c3997b7e6b3042f416aacb3b27df6c649e625.png)

In the "What should this agent do?" window, select "Chat Agent". AXL creates the agent and opens its settings page. The new agent starts out turned off.

![What should this agent do? window with the Chat Agent option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e2c0e91acaa34a7d0eee7d4616df9e3c68baa75e68532ce8cb70bb336c894a1.png)

On the settings page, complete the following fields in the General Settings card:

1. Name. Enter a name for the Chat Agent so you can find it easily. Only you can see this name.
2. Enabled. Use the switch at the top of the page. If it's off, the Chat Agent won't reply to messages in connected chat channels.
3. Display Name. Enter the name users will see in chats, such as “Anna from Support” or “Course Assistant.”
4. Instructions. Enter instructions for the agent’s tone, role, and any extra rules.
5. Strategy. Choose how the Chat Agent balances speed, cost, and quality of analysis.
6. Presets. Add ready-made prompt add-ons that change the agent’s behavior in specific situations.
7. Knowledge Base. Add text or attach files (TXT, PDF, DOCX, or JSON) with information the Chat Agent should use in its replies.
8. Analyze attached files. Turn this on so the Chat Agent can analyze images and documents that users attach. Turning this on may increase usage costs.
9. Chat Channels. Select the chat channels where the Chat Agent will reply to incoming messages.
10. Meetings the Agent Can Book. Select the booking pages the agent can use to check available times and schedule appointments for contacts. Add several booking pages to cover several people’s calendars, and the agent picks the right page by name. Each page’s own settings control availability, buffer times, and appointment slots.

Click "Save Changes" in the bar at the bottom of the page.

![Chat Agent settings for the Northstar Admissions Assistant: name, description, display name, instructions, strategy, presets, knowledge base, chat channels, and the Save Changes bar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e6253f800c9842bb7145e623cc94ee2aef728ece1dcdb353c1261d8268c32dc6.png)

## How It Works

Customer (guest) experience:

- Familiar interface: Customers keep messaging through the platform’s built-in chat or a messaging app, just as before.
- Real-time presence: While a reply is being generated, a “typing…” status appears, so it feels like talking to a real person.
- Response quality: Check the agent’s answers against your own materials during testing, including questions it should hand off to a team member.
- **Handoff to a team member:** The agent can transfer a conversation when a customer asks for human support. Describe other situations that should be handed over in the agent’s instructions and test them before enabling customer replies.

Admin experience:

- One-time setup: Set the name and instructions (prompt), then upload your knowledge base once.
- Flexible distribution: Choose which connected communication channels, such as Telegram or built-in chats, each agent uses. You can connect an agent to any chat channel in the system and set up a separate, independent agent for each channel.
- Everything included: Spam protection, automatic conversation handoff, message history, and analytics.

![Chat inbox, AI assistant tab: the Chat Agent answers Ryan Cooper's questions about programs in a website chat, with his website details on the right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0bdf34934d4b0712abd62aeaeeaf04dd54352fb41d188ea9d00f6832472f1254.png)

## Testing

Go to Settings → AI Agents. The page lists the agents you've already added. Click an agent’s name to open its settings.

![A Chat Agent in the AI Agents list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d417f05b076d0701e4a2aea0435c3997b7e6b3042f416aacb3b27df6c649e625.png)

The Chat Agent settings page includes a **Testing** card for previewing replies before you enable the agent in customer chats. The simulator shows the token cost of each reply. It does not verify delivery through a connected channel or run the live spam check.

The tool works in real time, so you can fine-tune the Chat Agent’s behavior without risking a wrong reply reaching a customer. If the agent uses the wrong tone or misses an important detail, edit its instructions, turn behavior presets on or off, and send the request again right away.

![Testing conversation: a new manager asks which program to start with and the Chat Agent recommends the Leadership Masterclass.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3fa1995c799601160ae802ebd203f1ca4f98e4ed44a19f3b370daf8ef966e424.png)

## Chat Agent Instructions

You can give each agent its own instructions that define the style and rules for its messages.

Examples include:

- How to communicate with customers
- Message tone: formal, neutral, or friendly
- Whether humor or informal explanations are appropriate
- Any other instructions

![Instructions field defining the Chat Agent's role, tone, recommendations, and handoff rule.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ee94f8416d3e317aa48f3313d3304663c6ee753dd0b874b4ccb369d581c6a581.png)

Instructions guide the agent’s replies. Test both ordinary questions and exceptions; refine the instructions when a reply misses a requirement.

## Prebuilt Behavior Presets

You can combine ready-made behavior templates for the agent by selecting them in the Presets field:

- Avoid Sensitive Topics: The agent politely steers clear of politics, religion, territorial disputes, and other sensitive subjects.
- Format Replies Neatly: The agent structures its replies with lists, paragraphs, and spacing to make them easier to read.
- Collect Data Step by Step: The agent runs the conversation like an interview and asks one question at a time instead of overwhelming the customer with several at once.

![Chat Agent Strategy dropdown with Faster and Cheaper, Balanced selected, and Smarter but Pricier.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/43e76afa334f77751b9c955cb0729ce157d2673dd89bf4d8382ad0214b594f01.png)
Choose the strategy that fits the agent’s task and budget. This example shows Balanced selected; opening the list does not change the saved setting.

## Chat Agent Knowledge Base

In the Chat Agent settings, you can upload your own knowledge base for the agent to use when replying to customers. It can include course, webinar, and intensive-program materials; frequently asked questions (FAQs) and internal account policies; and price lists, instructions, pricing tiers, and installment-payment terms.

The platform supports several content formats:

- TXT (text files)
- PDF
- DOCX
- JSON

![Knowledge Base upload area and the Analyze attached files switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d78bb88b610949c9c548072371f2240c76f965e7eb748347b7f2f96ea80f804b.png)

A knowledge base lets the agent reply in your terminology and follow your internal standards instead of using generic language.

## Analyzing Attached Files

The Chat Agent can work with much more than plain text:

- Images: It analyzes images and understands what they show.
- Documents: It reads and interprets files that users attach to a conversation and uses the information in them.
- Voice messages: It transcribes voice messages into text, understands what they say, and replies in the chat.

![Chat Agent test composer with the Attach Files, Emoji, and Voice Recording controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b06fc9151282ae389315da55c11170457fa8d854d3eef7b6116ea78503172fb8.png)

## Handoff to a Live Team Member

The built-in **Human Handoff** output lets the agent transfer a conversation to a team member. It is intended for requests to speak with a person and strong dissatisfaction or confusion.

In **Instructions**, describe other situations that should be escalated, such as questions outside the knowledge base. In **Testing**, try those situations and a direct request for a person, then check the selected response or handoff. Handoff is an AI decision, so an unanswered question or an instruction alone does not guarantee a transfer.

![A request to talk to a person about a billing problem and the Chat Agent's handoff reply.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b936c7c4cbe3113da95bf2bcb399c9485b9d6c0faeb67d4ea4073b8312ad2a0a.png)

## Built-In Spam Protection

When at least five contact messages are available, AXL can run a separate lightweight spam check before the main language model. If spam is detected, the main reply is skipped and AI replies in that conversation pause for 15 minutes. The spam check itself can use credits; this is not a guarantee of zero AI usage. Spam checking is not run in the Testing simulator.

![Guest conversation with several spam messages and the system note AI Assistant detected spam. Responses are paused for 15 minutes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aa2805d33d2c9a0206452dca081b392256e940d2a83e336be3ca6d85141f9ff7.png)

## Using the Chat Agent in Automations

The Chat Agent is built into AXL automations and works as a step of its own:

- You can add a Chat Agent step to any automation.
- The conversation inside the step continues in a loop until the goal is reached.
- You can set up conversation outputs based on user intent. The agent decides how the conversation ended, such as “Request Submitted,” “Issue Resolved,” “Declined,” or “Ready for the Next Step.” It then ends the loop and routes the contact to the matching branch of the automation.
- An automation can include a sequence of several different agents.

![Chat Agent automation step with Human Handoff, Spam, Chat Ended, and a custom Ready to apply output.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a5c0553f1de22b6228d36b7880287878a38b8233446536a87af86ebd2c66f280.png)

Chat Agent step settings:

1. Step Name. Enter a name for the step. You can name automation steps however you like.
2. Chat Agent. Select one of the Chat Agents you've already created.
3. Additional Instructions. Enter extra guidance that supplements or temporarily adjusts the agent’s main instructions (system prompt) for this step of the automation.
4. End Chat After. Set how long a customer can be inactive before the chat ends, counted from the last message. If the customer stops replying, the chat closes automatically after this period (five minutes in this example), and the contact leaves the step through the built-in "Chat Ended" output.
5. Outputs. Set up smart routing by adding custom outputs based on customer intent. Each output has a name and a condition. The name identifies the output on the automation diagram. The condition is a plain-language rule the Chat Agent uses to decide that the goal has been reached.
6. Testing. Use the conversation simulator to preview replies and see their token cost before enabling the agent in customer chats. Channel delivery and live spam checking need separate checks.

![Chat Agent step settings: step name, agent, additional instructions, End Chat After 5 minutes, and a custom output.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4461b31904735be5c3e6cafa053a651a26d6d60cd30933812920340a12340baa.png)

## Choosing a Strategy and Understanding Costs

You can manage your budget by choosing a strategy for each agent based on its tasks:

- Faster and Cheaper: A lightweight model with instant replies at the lowest cost.
- Balanced: A balance of quality and cost that suits most tasks.
- Smarter but Pricier: A top-tier model for complex conversations and sales.

Changing the strategy can significantly affect the price per conversation, so choose the option that fits your use case.

![Strategy options: Faster and Cheaper, Balanced, Smarter but Pricier.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bda71fb2dfa1f19ac74145546c04834241cf2c0a86db8719c89cae9db3baf36f.png)

## Usage Cost

Chat Agent usage is billed based on the tokens actually used.

![Chat Agent test reply with the tokens it used.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/df369a4709e69e0ea6a0c14e52b6c00e0db8565619ff57be68d67b5d8749f7a1.png)

## Test before enabling customer replies

1. Keep the new agent turned off while you select its chat channels, add the knowledge base, and write its instructions.
2. In **Testing**, ask a question answered by your materials, a question whose answer is missing, and a direct request to speak with a person. Check the answer, tone, and handoff behavior.
3. If appointment booking is part of the task, select the permitted booking pages and test a request that clearly names the appointment.
4. Save the settings with **Save Changes**. Enable the agent only after reviewing the selected channels and the test results.

---

# AI Tutor

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/application-ai-curator

> Set up the AI Tutor to review student assignments automatically, using your instructions, knowledge base, and confidence threshold.

The AI Tutor automatically reviews students’ assignments, and you can configure it to follow your course methodology. It analyzes each answer, compares it with the reference answer and your course materials, and makes a reasoned decision using logic similar to that of a human instructor.

The AI Tutor reduces manual grading, speeds up feedback, and keeps grading standards consistent across all your courses.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

How to Set Up the AI Tutor

Testing

How the AI Tutor Works

Flexible Review Settings

Instructions for the AI Tutor

AI Tutor Knowledge Base

Comments for Students

Analyzing Attached Files

Confidence Threshold

Analysis Strategy

Usage Costs

Business Impact

## How to Set Up the AI Tutor

Go to Settings → AI Agents. The page lists all the AI agents in your account.

Click "Create Agent".

![AI Agents list with the Create Agent button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d417f05b076d0701e4a2aea0435c3997b7e6b3042f416aacb3b27df6c649e625.png)

In the "What should this agent do?" window, select "AI Tutor". AXL creates the agent and opens its settings page. The new agent starts out turned off.

![What should this agent do? window with the AI Tutor option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e2c0e91acaa34a7d0eee7d4616df9e3c68baa75e68532ce8cb70bb336c894a1.png)

On the settings page, complete the following fields in the General Settings card:

1. Name. Enter a name for the AI Tutor so you can find it easily. Only you can see this name.
2. Description. Describe what this agent is for.
3. Display Name. Enter the name students will see.
4. Courses. Select the courses whose assignments the AI Tutor will review. To have it skip a specific assignment, select "Disable AI tutor review" in that assignment’s settings.
5. Instructions. Describe the AI Tutor’s tone, role, and any extra rules.
6. Analysis Strategy. Choose how the AI Tutor balances speed, cost, and quality of analysis.
7. Knowledge Base. Add text or attach TXT, PDF, DOCX, or JSON files with information the AI Tutor should use when reviewing assignments.
8. Leave a comment for the student. The AI Tutor can leave detailed feedback after every review, automatically: it explains what went wrong and suggests where the student can find more information. Turning this on may increase usage costs.
9. Analyze attached files. The AI Tutor considers the images and documents that students attach to their answers. Turning this on may increase usage costs.
10. Use lesson content (theory) only when needed. When this option is on, the tutor skips the published lesson theory if the assignment has a reference answer or the tutor has knowledge-base files. If neither is provided, it still uses the published theory. When this option is off, available published theory is included.
11. Confidence Threshold. If the AI Tutor's confidence is below this threshold, the assignment is automatically sent for manual review.

Click "Save Changes" in the bar at the bottom of the page.

![AI Tutor General Settings with the Save Changes bar at the bottom of the page.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e6e6f63f7d3d697b4d68ff8ddeff1b5f1d7d533a960a2463829f735c40e449a6.png)

These controls are at the top of the page:

1. Enabled. If this switch is off, the AI Tutor won't review student submissions.
2. AI Tutor Reviews. Shows the history of assignments the AI Tutor has reviewed.
3. Delete (trash can icon). Deletes the agent. Results from previous reviews are kept.

![AI Tutor header with the Enabled switch, AI Tutor Reviews, and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7986eee3849771d0e832f3f4c12f068198109ca2fbd5a8ec47842cddfb9c40aa.png)

Here's a closer look at each section.

## Testing

Go to Settings → AI Agents. Your AI Tutor appears in the list. Click its name to open its settings.

![Northstar Academy Leadership Tutor in the AI Agents list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d417f05b076d0701e4a2aea0435c3997b7e6b3042f416aacb3b27df6c649e625.png)

The AI Tutor's settings page includes a Testing card where you can see how the agent reviews answers.

To test the AI Tutor, choose the following:

1. Select course. Choose the course you want to use for testing.
2. Select a lesson. Choose a suitable lesson in that course.
3. Select an assignment. Choose the assignment whose answers you want the AI Tutor to review during the test.

![Testing card with the course, lesson, and assignment selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b66b0b1ebeefaa12cd5e83377dc41a4f40a14abc20b0f4643e2dd78fb0e876d4.png)

In the Test Answer field, enter a sample answer to the assignment for the AI Tutor to review.

![Test Answer field with a sample student answer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/acf76a230ab8ee35e9d7f94d1052aa1a2996ed3a74126255869c656378b5a3fd.png)

After you submit a test answer, the AI Tutor previews its analysis using the selected task and tutor settings. The test does not change a real student’s answer or post feedback to a student.

Based on its analysis, the AI Tutor determines whether the assignment was completed correctly, shows its confidence level as a percentage, and gives detailed feedback on how well the test answer matches the expected answer.

Use Testing to assess the suggested result, confidence and feedback. Live reviews also have safeguards for repeated rejections and unreadable attachments, so a test result does not guarantee the same automatic outcome for a real submission.

![AI Tutor test result: Manual Review Required, confidence, and a comment for the student.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fef2f084cb9d24b14889c48c9099fc14406a35d15eae3ef0fa59515637c3a46b.png)

You can run the same test from the settings of a specific assignment in Memberships → Courses. Click "Test with AI Tutor".

![AI Tutor Test window opened from assignment settings, with the tutor selector and a Test Answer field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7a655ea2b57cf8b9c6f5d5698972b4059e6f7c631b7ce2b9bd13bcbc76ea47e3.png)

## How the AI Tutor Works

When reviewing an assignment, the AI Tutor analyzes the student’s answer and compares it with several sources:

- The description of the correct answer in the assignment settings
- The AI Tutor's knowledge base, if you uploaded one
- The published lesson theory, according to the Use lesson content (theory) only when needed setting described below
- The student's attachments, including audio messages, images, and documents

The AI Tutor considers the context of the assignment. It doesn't just mark an answer correct or incorrect; it also explains the reasoning behind its decision.

## Flexible Review Settings

You can adapt the AI Tutor to different course formats and learning models.

These settings are available:

- Turn AI Tutor reviews on or off for a specific assignment

![Assignment settings with the Disable AI tutor review option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/015bf5d3c94433b97dd89186f384c16fe52a0dccad14ff5dd3a487c8a81c815d.png)

- Choose all courses or only specific ones

![AI Tutor settings with Northstar Learning Coach as Display Name, Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate selected in Courses, and the review instructions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cf258a70b18d1c39cb94b661208811b0916e0eb0d91759a75b4a2b69df8d3bf1.png)
Search in Courses and select the courses whose assignments this tutor should review. This example shows Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate.

- Test the AI Tutor on individual assignments before launch

![Assignment settings with the Test with AI Tutor link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/015bf5d3c94433b97dd89186f384c16fe52a0dccad14ff5dd3a487c8a81c815d.png)

With these settings, you can roll out AI-assisted reviews gradually and monitor their quality along the way.

## Instructions for the AI Tutor

You can give each AI Tutor its own instructions to define its review style and rules.

Examples include:

- How the AI Tutor should communicate with students
- The tone of its comments: strict, neutral, or friendly
- Whether humor or informal explanations are allowed
- Any other instructions

![Instructions field describing how the AI Tutor reviews answers.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/077c6c252449d407b3f8e45cce19a98c0877057eac1e5180b8d868d7310f45e1.png)

The AI Tutor follows these instructions closely when it reviews assignments and writes comments.

## AI Tutor Knowledge Base

You can upload your own knowledge base in the AI Tutor settings. The AI Tutor uses it when reviewing assignments.

Supported upload formats are:

- TXT (text files)
- PDF
- DOCX
- JSON

![Knowledge Base upload area in the AI Tutor settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0be3e2f9bbb41f4acf95cd2b8f1681f3e6eb5bb24cb0842e7582a7a6e2f622ad.png)

A knowledge base lets the AI Tutor review answers using your terminology, methodology, and internal standards instead of generic criteria.

## Comments for Students

After reviewing an assignment, the AI Tutor can automatically leave a detailed comment for the student that:

- Points out errors
- Explains why the answer was accepted or rejected
- Recommends materials for the student to review

![Leave a comment for the student switch turned on.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/357d306ca7cd70ec7e05a5590f1cdb9f5415d3686a938795d2658a6490a1ed8c.png)

Comments are generated right after the assignment is reviewed, with no instructor involvement.

## Analyzing Attached Files

The AI Tutor can review assignments that include attachments such as:

- Images, including screenshots and photos
- Documents
- Audio messages

![Analyze attached files switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/357d306ca7cd70ec7e05a5590f1cdb9f5415d3686a938795d2658a6490a1ed8c.png)

This is especially useful for hands-on exercises, homework, and assignments with visual results.

## Confidence Threshold

To help maintain review quality, you can set a minimum confidence threshold for the AI Tutor.

Here's how it works:

- If the AI Tutor's confidence is equal to or above the threshold, the result can be applied automatically. For example, 80% meets an 80% threshold.
- If its confidence is below the threshold, the assignment is automatically sent for manual review.

A real submission can still require manual review at a higher confidence level: the tutor does not automatically reject the same answer repeatedly, or reject it based on an attached file it could not read.

![Confidence Threshold set to 95.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/27085ae7704113ce10c723bf99a05b5bb53dc441d2a5c87d3584b6fab0807172.png)

This reduces the risk of errors on complex or ambiguous assignments.

## Analysis Strategy

You can choose a strategy for the AI Tutor based on your priorities:

- Review speed
- Quality of analysis
- Processing cost

![Analysis Strategy options: Faster and Cheaper, Balanced, Smarter but Pricier.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3d112e4ff48670342f6864752ca801c08a643f94d8bd814e57d280b412346a49.png)

This setting works well for both small courses and large learning programs with many students.

## Usage Costs

AI Tutor usage is billed based on the tokens actually used.

![AI Tutor test result with the total tokens used.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/22f0b83f3b8841cea986fbca79ed86fa788e853ea176c32bfd83b9ede48234ed.png)

Token usage depends on your settings and the complexity of each review.

Review the usage cost when testing different strategies and attachment settings.

## Business Impact

The amount of work the AI Tutor can handle depends on the assignments, reference answers, source materials, and review settings. Measure the results on your own course before expanding its scope.

As a result, you get:

- Less repetitive manual work
- Faster assignment reviews
- Consistent grading standards

Use test results and manual-review outcomes to decide which assignments are suitable for automated review.

Keep ambiguous or high-impact assignments in the manual-review workflow until the results meet your course standards.

## Roll out reviews for a course

1. Create the AI Tutor and leave it disabled while you set the course scope, reference materials, instructions, and confidence threshold.
2. In **Testing**, select the course, lesson, and assignment. Try a correct answer, an incomplete answer, and an answer that needs human judgment.
3. Review the decision, confidence, and student-facing feedback for each test. Adjust the instructions or reference answer if the result does not match the grading criteria.
4. Save with **Save Changes**, then enable the tutor for the intended courses. Use **AI Tutor Reviews** to review its decisions after launch.

The confidence setting determines when an answer is sent for manual review; it does not guarantee that every automatic decision is correct.

---

# Dashboards

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/dashboards

> Build your own dashboards from widgets: numbers, charts, pie charts, tables and text over contacts, orders, payments, deals and other data.

A dashboard puts the numbers you watch on one screen: new contacts, payments, deals, website visits and more. You build it yourself from widgets, and every widget counts its data for the period you pick at the top. Open **Dashboards** at the top of the menu.

![Northstar Sales Overview dashboard for the last 30 days with three widgets: New contacts 41, Deals by stage as a pie chart, and Payments by day as a bar chart.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b9c837613be13f14c94973b87e2788f16c8e155b713f429d6c6900dd8c1683f2.png)

## Create a Dashboard

1. Click **Create Dashboard**.
2. Enter the **Title** and, if you like, a **Description**.
3. Under **Privacy Settings**, choose **Public** to show the dashboard to everyone on your team who can open Dashboards, or **Private** to keep it for yourself.
4. Click **Save**. The new dashboard opens empty, ready for widgets.

![Dashboards page with No dashboards yet and the Create Dashboard button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8b10d64d07503f66557c775124c206699bfa09a04c80618fe85e1ab3d08434c7.png)

![Create Dashboard panel with the title Northstar Sales Overview, a description, and the Public and Private privacy types.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/218a16aef40c839e2b2e405cd4a0e53cae7ee49e80e25f81a0f22498cb01bfb0.png)

## Add a Widget

1. Click **Add Widget**.
2. Choose the **Type**: **Number**, **Chart**, **Pie Chart**, **Table** or **Text**, and enter the **Title**.
3. Choose the **Data Source**: **Contacts**, **Orders**, **Payments**, **Deals**, **Tasks**, **Conversions**, **Website Visits**, **Webinar Attendees** or **Emails**.
4. **Date Field** decides which date the dashboard period applies to, for example the date a contact was created. Clear it to count all rows regardless of the period.
5. **Add Filter** narrows the rows, for example to contacts with a certain tag. **Go to Source** opens the same rows in their usual list.
6. Under **Parameters**, choose what to count. For a number, pick the **Field**, for example **Number of Contacts**, or a money field with its **Field Type**: **Sum** or **Average**.
7. Check the **Preview** on the right and click **Save**.

![Add Widget dialog with the Number type, the title New contacts, the Contacts data source, the Created Date date field and a preview showing 41.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0791f074e354bd322af8048985619c711e6503aa69353e8395b740af98fa3f68.png)

For a chart, the **X-Axis** sets how rows are grouped, for example by **Payment Date** per **Day**, and the **Y-Axis** sets what is counted for each group, for example the sum of **Payment Amount**. Under **Appearance**, you can hide the widget title and change its colors.

![Add Widget dialog for a chart: Grouping Field Payment Date, Group By Day, Field Payment Amount, Field Type Sum, and a bar chart preview of payments by day.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4d3c685ce5b4d68fa6771a138022b0469dcc484b1292c29ad2b1b7a955731d35.png)

## Work with the Dashboard

- **Period**: **Today**, **Yesterday**, **Last 7 Days**, **Last 30 Days** or **Custom** applies to every widget at once.
- **Unlock** lets you drag widgets around and resize them. Lock the dashboard again when the layout is right.
- The buttons in a widget's header copy the widget, open its source list, edit it or delete it.
- **Manage Dashboards** switches between your dashboards. The star sets the one that opens first when you open Dashboards, the pencil next to the list edits the title and privacy, and the trash can deletes the dashboard.

![Unlocked dashboard: the Lock button, the layout grid around the widgets, and resize handles in the widget corners.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9d871ebe02b60434c0913b8c6d9956cd59af7e7517e72a298c904314e670b87f.png)

## Your Own Data

To show numbers that are not in AXL, click **Manage Data Sources** in the widget dialog and create your own data source. Add its fields, then add rows by hand or send them from another system through the API: **How to manage data via API** shows the requests. Your data source then appears in the **Data Source** list like the built-in ones.

Ready-made reports for specific areas are described in "[Sales Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/sales-analytics)" and "[Website Traffic Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/website-traffic-analytics)".

---

# My Profile

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/profile

> Update your personal details, view Partner Program info, and manage notification settings on the My Profile page.

The **My Profile** page holds your personal details: name, email address, phone number, password, and more. Review these details and update the editable fields as needed.
To open it, click your name in the upper right corner of the page and select **My Profile**.

![User menu with My Profile, Partner Program, Appearance, current language and Sign Out.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/74ba2f714d7d07011382d11c7126f6839e7061b3751338061b048a032345be54.png)

This article covers the sections below. Click a section name to jump to its description:

General

Partner Program

Notifications

## General

Enter your details:

1. Email. The email you provided when you signed up for AXL. A verified email is read-only in this form.
2. Phone Number. Click "Connect" and follow the steps. If a number is already linked, click "Change" (or "Verify" if it isn't verified yet). From the phone you want to link, text the one-time code shown in the window. When the code arrives, the phone is verified and linked to your account.
3. Job Title. Enter your position. This field is optional.
4. First Name. Enter your first name.
5. Last Name. Enter your last name.
6. Birthday. Enter your date of birth.
7. Enter new password. Use this field to change the password you use to sign in.
8. Gender. Select your gender from the list: male or female.
9. Display Time Zone. Choose the time zone used to display dates. Each admin can pick the one that fits their location in their own profile. Select "Local (Computer Time)" to use your computer's time, or "Account" to use the account's time zone. The selected time zone and its current time appear below.
10. Avatar. Click to choose an image for your profile avatar.
11. Support Code. A Support Code grants an authorized support team member access to your account to help resolve your issue. Create and share a code only when the support team requests access while helping you. The control is at the top of My Profile, next to the page title. Click "Create Code" when the code is needed.

Click **Save** after changing your editable profile fields. Click **Discard Changes** to undo changes before saving. Reopen **My Profile** to check saved values.

![Unsaved My Profile example with phone and assistant connections, a Learning Coordinator job title, personal fields, Display Time Zone, Discard Changes and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f388ff3beb784e409fa3a21cd31655122ede2b3b5f5805695fa5716e969b2f70.png)
Example before saving: enter your own details, then click Save. Use Discard Changes to return to the previously saved values.

On the right, you can upload your photo or another picture.

**Assistant Channels** shows the channels available for connecting to the AXL assistant, such as Telegram. Click **Connect** beside a channel and follow its connection instructions. Once connected, you can message the assistant from that channel to work in your account.

## Partner Program

Here you can see information about your Partner Program:

- **Info**. Shows your current status, commission terms, and personal landing-page and sign-up links. Use the copy button beside a link to copy it. Share the appropriate personal link when referring someone, so their sign-up can be attributed to you. Check the terms displayed in your account; amounts and conditions may differ.
- Balance. Shows the amount available to withdraw and the pending amount.
- Referrals & Accounts. Shows the list of referrals who signed up through your link.
- Transactions. Shows the payments for your Partner Program.

![Partner Program Balance card showing separate Available to Withdraw and Pending Amount values.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/27ee6a291ca34f241cd5a366895c2626ff4ee9587e43cfe5edbefd7e3337e282.png)
Balance separates the amount available to withdraw from the amount still pending.

![Partner Program Referrals & Accounts and Transactions tables with their column headings and empty states.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/84b618366893fa3d694f7d85e49104ecb99994d679c0099b42df9eec2cafdd71.png)
Referrals & Accounts and Transactions show activity recorded for your Partner Program. This example has no activity yet.

## Notifications

Notifications keep you informed about important events and updates on the platform. You can adjust the settings to receive only what's relevant to you.
Open the "Notifications" tab to manage them:

1. **Settings**. Choose where notifications are sent: email, Telegram, your browser and desktop, or SMS.
2. Notification Types. Choose which events you want to hear about, such as activity related to courses or users, so you can focus on what matters most. Select the types of notifications you want and the channels for each.
3. Subscriptions. Lists your notification subscriptions.

For more information about this section, see the article "[Notifications](https://docs.axl.tech/notifications)".

![Notifications with email, Telegram, browser and desktop, and SMS channels, and the full list of notification types with their channel checkboxes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c642521fc791e6a116702bea6e640bb535b78cf3ecf046f18386ad9eae51cab3.png)

**You can change the interface language**. Click your name in the upper right corner, open the language item in the menu (it shows your current language), and select a new one.

![User menu showing English and a language submenu with the eight other available interface languages.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fe81dadfd9b4ae31a16fe5530b4d76732c5a09723f63fe842bef3841642d52c1.png)

To sign out of your AXL account, click your name in the upper right corner and select "Sign Out".

---

# Top Bar and Sidebar

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/toolbar

> A quick tour of the AXL top bar and sidebar: what each icon and menu section does.

The top bar and the sidebar are how you move around AXL: the sidebar opens every section, and the top bar holds account-wide tools such as tech support, email, chat and notifications.

Click a section name to jump to its description:

Top Bar

Sidebar

## Top Bar

The top bar provides account-wide tools while the sidebar opens AXL sections. The controls you see depend on your access rights and the account you are currently using.

![Desktop header with sidebar toggle, support, setup guide, email, loading chat control, phone, notifications and online counters.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/614549c02f9370752f6e14eed9f05bbd85aeb68af71d4daa6cdd4f7b9dcd12ca.png)
Account-wide tools in the desktop header. Controls depend on access and connection status; the chat control is loading in this example.

1. **Sidebar menu.** On a desktop, click the menu button to collapse the sidebar to icons or expand it again. On a phone, the same button opens or closes the navigation panel.
2. Tech Support. Contact our specialists here. Tech Support is designed to help your team members with technical issues related to how the platform works and how to configure and maintain it.
3. **Email.** Click the envelope to open your assigned email inboxes. The badge shows unread incoming messages for the inboxes assigned to you.
4. Chat. Use this section to communicate on the AXL platform. Click the icon to open the chat window.
5. Notifications. Shows notifications about activity in your account.
6. Users Online. Shows how many users are currently online in the Membership Portal.
7. Team Members Online. Shows how many of your account's team members are currently online on the AXL platform.
8. **Account**. Open the account menu to find **Account Settings**, **Switch Account**, **Add Account** and the **Membership Portal** link. You can add more accounts to your project and configure each one: set or change its name, and add a description, an email address, and a language. Added accounts must be separate from each other, with different website addresses and customer databases. For details on settings, see the article "[Account Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/account-settings)".
9. Profile. On a desktop, click your avatar or name to open the profile menu. Under "My Profile" you can change personal details such as your first name, last name, password, email, phone number, job title, and birthday. The menu also includes **Partner Program**, **Appearance**, the current language (for example, **English**) and **Sign Out**. Use Appearance to switch themes and the language submenu to change the interface language.

On a phone, tap your avatar to open the combined **Account** and **Profile** menu. The panel shows the current account and your personal profile options. Some desktop controls, including email and the online counters, are not shown in the mobile top bar.

The header can also include the setup guide and phone controls, depending on your account features and access. A loading indicator means that control is still connecting; wait for it to load before using it.

![Profile menu with My Profile, Partner Program, Appearance, English and Sign Out.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/74ba2f714d7d07011382d11c7126f6839e7061b3751338061b048a032345be54.png)
Personal settings and appearance are in the profile menu.

1. Click **Tech Support** in the top bar to open the support conversation.
2. Describe what you were trying to do, which page you were on, what happened, and what you expected.
3. Use the paperclip to attach a screenshot, file, or short recording that shows the problem.

![Support panel titled Message us with the team avatars, the note Ask us anything and a message composer with emoji and paperclip controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/453b058743d64c5a937d42f37fc13bf68291d5673f3ae316ea77b0f54fb3abe3.png)
Describe the problem in the support composer and use the paperclip to attach supporting material.

Follow the instructions and recommendations from the tech support team. They may ask follow-up questions to find the cause of the problem or suggest a solution. Once the issue is resolved, review the information they gave you so you can avoid similar problems in the future.

## Sidebar

The AXL sidebar is on the left side of the page. Each section is described below.

Dashboards. Shows the key indicators for your account.

Sites. Create websites for selling your products. See the article "[Websites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)" for details.

Webinars. Create and run webinars and automated webinars. See the article "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)" for details.

Content. Store the videos and files you upload and use for teaching. For details, see the articles "[Video](https://docs.axl.tech/video)" and "[File Manager](https://docs.axl.tech/file-manager)".

Memberships. Tools for building courses and libraries: create lectures, assignments, and tests, and assess your users' knowledge. This section also gives you access to learning materials, user progress, and course editing. See the article "[Courses](https://docs.axl.tech/courses)" for details.

Sales. Covers everything related to attracting and retaining users and growing their number. Here you can create and set up sales of your products, such as courses and Membership Portals. See the article "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)" for details.

CRM. CRM stands for Customer Relationship Management. In this section, your team members can manage user contacts, track their activity, and add tasks for working with customers. See the article "[Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/contacts)" for details.

Communications. Create chats to communicate with your users and website visitors, and work with telephony: phone numbers, call settings, call analytics, and call history. See the articles "[Chat Room](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-room)", "[Call Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/call-settings)", and "[Calls Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-analytics)" for details.

Email. Create and manage email broadcasts. See the article "[Email Section](https://docs.axl.tech/mail-section)" for details.

Settings. The general settings of your account. Here you can update your account information, add team members and manage their access to the AXL platform, handle payments, and more. For details, see the article "[Account Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/account-settings)".

Knowledge Base. Learn how to use the AXL platform. You'll find instructions and guides for users and teachers here. It's a handy resource for answers about the platform's features and capabilities.

**AI Assistant**. Open the assistant to work with AXL through a conversation.

**Community**. Open the community section for your Membership Portal.

**Meetings**. Open the meetings area. Its availability depends on your permissions, enabled features and whether you host meetings.

**Marketing**. Open the social-network, advertising and analytics tools available to your account.

**Account Features**. Open the account feature settings from the bottom of the sidebar when you have full account rights.

On a desktop, click the menu icon at the left end of the top bar to collapse the sidebar to icons. Click it again to restore the section names. On a phone, use the menu icon to open or close the navigation panel.

Before changing account settings or opening customer records, check the current account in the top bar. Use the profile menu for your personal details, language, appearance, and sign-out options.

---

# Conversations

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/dialogues

> Use the floating Chat window to answer conversations from any page: start a conversation, reply with templates, and open the full chat.

The Chat window lets you answer conversations from any page of AXL without leaving it. It is the same inbox as **Communications → Chat**, in a smaller window; see "[Chat](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-room)" for everything the inbox can do.

Two message icons are in the top bar:

- **Email** (envelope) opens the email messages sent to you. See "[Email Client and Incoming Email Setup](https://docs.axl.tech/email-client-and-incoming-mail-settings)".
- **Chat** (speech bubble) opens the Chat window. Its badges show the number of your conversations with unread messages and the number of new requests.

![Top bar with the Email and Chat icons; the Chat icon has a badge with 1 new request.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/970b8909575113e1d54fe7b49c94780c44daf4b46c2db9aab7463800d21a4951.png)

The window opens over the current page. Drag it by the strip at the top and resize it from the corner; AXL remembers its position and size. In a narrow window, only the conversation list is shown until you select someone. Click the X to close the window.

![Floating Chat window over the Contacts page with the conversation list and an open conversation with Olivia Bennett.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c2aaa36ed35d0dba900edaa7f035a07c4c5306f0350a32dad9e784fb507534e5.png)

## Conversation List

With support access, the list has the **My**, **New**, **Open** and **Closed** tabs, plus **AI assistant** when the AI assistant is connected. Other team members see only **My**, the conversations they take part in. Use the search field to find a person by name, phone or message text.

![Chat list header with search, channel filter, New conversation, Settings and Actions, the My, New, Open, Closed and AI assistant tabs, and two conversations.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4d0cb632c68552782e849011e3fad2e5453e7b92a681aebd77bbfbb76ad1822c.png)

## Start a Conversation

1. Click **New conversation** (+) above the list.
2. Search for a team member or a contact by name or email.
3. Click **Write** next to the person. The conversation opens, and you can type the first message.

A conversation with a team member is a separate row in the list, apart from your conversations with customers.

![New conversation panel searched for Olivia, with one result: Olivia Bennett, olivia.bennett@example.test, and Write.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/093719b4a40277184483f33af8069dae1a73bc10a63b18b644a8f477d5281781.png)

## Reply and Use Templates

Type the reply at the bottom of the conversation. You can attach a file, add an emoji or record a voice message. If the person writes through several channels, the channel icons next to the message field show where the reply goes; click them to choose.

Click **Manage templates** next to the message field to open your saved replies. Search or filter by tags, then select a template. Its text and attached files are placed in the message field; a voice template inserts its voice file. Check the text and links for this person before sending.

To save a new reply, click **Create Template**. Give it a name, optionally add a description and tags, and enter its text or voice content. If you can choose **Access to template**, pick **Private** or **Public**. Click **Save**. Editing and deleting existing templates depends on your permissions.

![Message field buttons with the Manage templates tooltip over the templates button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9bf4858ba0fe28369e2a4f09efeabe6ca9c492c04a76f7f7a3a1d57354be2470.png)

Right-click a message to **Reply**, **Copy**, **Edit** or **Delete** it. Edit and Delete appear only for your own or your account's messages and only if the channel supports them.

![Message menu with Reply, Copy and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/660ef18f438b966617037acc70f0b75fb3a610b324db5393fd3d8f3d921ec99a.png)

## Conversation Header

The buttons on the right of the conversation header:

- **Profile** (i) shows the person's contact details, your team's follow-up data (owners, priority, reply deadline, tags and notes) and their channels.
- The three dots open the conversation menu: **Open the CRM card**, **Copy link to chat**, **Join** or **Leave**, **Mark as read**, **Close the conversations** and **Hide bot messages**. The items depend on your role and the conversation.
- **Open the full chat** (four corners) opens the full **Communications → Chat** page.
- The X closes the window.

![Conversation header in the Chat window with Profile, the three-dot menu, Open the full chat and Close buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c78fd01d95075fa8a625b2f5ceff88fc73a2a1d6d65087bbe048b7618dac519a.png)

![Conversation menu with Open the CRM card, Copy link to chat, Leave, Close the conversations and Hide bot messages.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e745a2f4a585cc70c640671106c6e4a781b844de6d68578a41ebf8b8382e71d3.png)

## Settings and Actions for Many Conversations

The gear above the list opens **Settings**: **Text size** from 100% to 200%, **Hide bot messages** and the **Microphone** for voice messages. Click **Save** to apply.

![Chat Settings with Text size from 100% to 200%, Hide bot messages, Microphone selector, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1dce050412576e4f4217120e90581b6b3d8f816e6e3877be3a2603d16958d7b8.png)

The three dots next to the gear (**Actions**) run **Mark as Read**, **Leave Conversations** or **Close Conversations** for **My Conversations** or, with the permission to manage conversations, for **All Conversations**. Click **Confirm** to run the action, or **Cancel**.

![Actions menu with My Conversations and All Conversations groups, each with Mark as Read, Leave Conversations and Close Conversations.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/db72be85f87a1abeddba9568c870e06fa8178d4bf3fd5a98d51253fa0eff3e08.png)

---

# Notifications

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/notifications

> Choose how you get notified about events in your account, and how users manage notifications in the Membership Portal.

Notifications alert you to events that happen in your account on the AXL platform. You choose the delivery channels and the event types in your profile; new notifications also appear under the bell icon in the top bar. Users of your Membership Portal set up their own notifications in their profile.

## How to Set Up Notifications

Click your name in the upper right corner and select **My Profile**. You can also open the notification panel (the bell icon) and click the gear icon next to **Mark All as Read**; it opens the same settings.

![Account menu opened from Alex Morgan in the top bar: My Profile, Partner Program, Appearance, English and Sign Out; the bell on the left shows 53 notifications.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dcd5e22be386991006dcdccf9c5e665a1849838533b57872507277b5baa770c5.png)
Click your name in the top bar, then **My Profile**.

On the profile page, open the **Notifications** tab on the left.

![My Profile with the Notifications tab open: Get notifications by email checked, Telegram, Browser and Desktop Notifications and SMS unchecked, and the first rows of Notification Types.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/57570682812709fe29ad8fd01ebbab18599c948e2992b79669e0c947ed97aae2.png)
The **Notifications** tab: delivery channels under **Settings** and the **Notification Types** table below. Here only email is turned on.

Under **Settings**, choose the delivery channels you need: **Get notifications by email**, **Get notifications in Telegram**, **Browser and Desktop Notifications**, and **Get notifications by SMS** where available. **Show Connected Devices** next to browser notifications opens the **Devices** list of browsers that receive them; use **Add This Device** there to add the browser you are working in.

As soon as you change a checkbox, **Discard Changes** and **Save** appear below the list. Click **Save** to apply the change, or **Discard Changes** to return to the saved settings.

![Settings with Get notifications by SMS newly checked and the Discard Changes and Save buttons below the channel list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c8f1e3fe1f75498d3854b57fdb5101a7bb51c08518c7e470366bc8b0de911388.png)
After a change, the **Discard Changes** and **Save** buttons appear. This example is not saved.

Next, in **Notification Types**, choose which events you want to hear about and through which channel. Each row has a checkbox per channel: **Email**, **Telegram**, **Desktop** and **SMS**. A channel column stays grey until you turn that channel on under **Settings**; point at the info icon to see the hint, for example *Turn on Telegram notifications first*.

**Receive All** appears for events that can also be followed for a single contact. With **Receive All** you get the event for every contact; without it, you can subscribe to it for a single CRM contact. Your current subscriptions are listed in the **Subscriptions** table at the bottom of the tab, where you can delete one with the trash icon.

1. Task Status Changed. Tells you when the status of a task in CRM changes.
2. New Task. Tells you when a new task is created.
3. Assignment Submitted. Tells you when a user submits an answer to an assignment in a course in your Membership Portal.
4. Assignment Comment. Tells you when a user leaves a comment on an assignment in your course.
5. Internal Notification. Tells you about events within your account and messages from your team.
6. New Order. Tells you when a new order is created.
7. Order Payment. Tells you when payment for an order is received.
8. Password Changed. Tells you when the password for your account on the AXL platform changes.
9. Deals: New Deal. Tells you when a new deal is added. You get these only for deals you own.
10. Deals: Won or Lost. Tells you when a deal moves to a won or lost stage. You get these only for deals you own.
11. Comment on Course Step. Tells you about a new comment on a course step.
12. Library Step Comment. Tells you about a new comment on a library step.
13. Successful Sign-In. Tells you about a successful sign-in to your account.
14. Blocked Sign-In Attempt. Tells you about a blocked attempt to sign in to your account.
15. Task Reminder. Sends you a reminder about the tasks you've subscribed to.
16. New Chat Message. Tells you when a new chat message arrives.
17. New Email. Tells you when a new email arrives.
18. Affiliate Program: Payout Request. Tells you about requests to pay out commissions under the Affiliate Program.
19. Community: Comment on Post and Community: Reply to Comment. Tell you about new comments and replies in Community.
20. New Booking on My Calendar. A client booked a meeting you're hosting.
21. Booking Canceled and Booking Rescheduled. A booking on your calendar was canceled or moved.
22. Did the client show up?. After a meeting with no sign of the client, reminds you to mark the booking as No-show or Held.

Checkboxes in this table save as soon as you click them; there is no separate Save button for the table. Wait for the update to finish. If an error appears, reload the page and check the setting before retrying.

![Lower part of the Notification Types table from Comment on Course Step to Did the client show up?, with Email checked for most events and the Telegram, Desktop and SMS columns greyed out.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2861c8727b7520a7bc09bdf50ebdcb8573d53f896e8d3794b5e0bae8db333964.png)
The rest of the table: Community and booking events are at the end. Telegram, Desktop and SMS stay grey because those channels are turned off under **Settings**.

## Notifications in the Membership Portal

Users can also set up their own notifications. To do this, a user signs in to their account in your Membership Portal and opens the "Profile" section.

![Membership Portal profile menu under Olivia Bennett with My Profile, English, Bonus Balance, QR Code Sign-In and Sign Out.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/31786af3119073e17e1806b08ffbf332003d08a0a1a964bddf368e0060112cba.png)

The user then opens the "Notifications" tab and chooses how to get notifications: by email, in Telegram, or both. Then they pick the notification types:

1. Password Changed. The user is notified when the password for their account in your Membership Portal changes.
2. Internal Notification. The user is notified about changes within the account.
3. Assignment Comment. The user is notified about a new comment on their submitted assignment in your Membership Portal.
4. Assignment Review Status Changed. The user is notified that their assignment has been reviewed and its status changed (accepted, sent for revision, or not accepted).
5. Comment on Course Step. The user is notified about a new comment on a course step.
6. Library Step Comment. The user is notified about a new comment on a library step.
7. Affiliate Program Credit/Debit. The user is notified about credits and debits under the Affiliate Program.
8. New Referral Sign-Up. The user is notified when a new user (a referral) signs up through their affiliate link.
9. Bonus Account Credit/Debit. The user is notified about credits and debits on their bonus account.
10. Community: Comment on Post and Community: Reply to Comment. The user is notified about new comments and replies in Community.

As in your own settings, the Telegram column stays grey until the user turns on **Get notifications in Telegram**.

![User Profile Notifications tab in the Membership Portal: Get notifications by email checked, Telegram unchecked, and the Notification Types table with Email and grey Telegram columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dded3a9195cea68f20437bb3b6b2537d7c913b1a92adab3f06ab2e9aa2771321.png)

## New Notifications

New notifications appear in the upper right corner of the AXL platform as a bell icon with a red badge. The number on the badge shows how many notifications are new (43 on the account menu screenshot above).

Users also see new notifications in your Membership Portal, in the upper right corner, as a red icon. The number shows how many are new.

![Membership Portal header of Olivia Bennett with the notification bell showing 6 new notifications.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7a2cf29827b2f7e58bac5bba070d88983e1e74618bbfe38c893f4be9a6d764b9.png)

Click the bell to open the **Notifications** panel with the latest events, newest first. Point at a notification to show **mark as read** and **hide**. **Mark All as Read** at the top clears the badge for all of them; the gear icon opens your notification settings, and **×** closes the panel.

![Notifications panel with Mark All as Read, the gear and close icons; the first New sign-in to the account notification shows mark as read and hide, followed by a New message in chat from a website guest.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e41af0015ee2d90db9dfaa87623d849853d820d79a1e6e74b521474140419682.png)
Point at a notification to see **mark as read** and **hide**.

## Save delivery channels and check a notification

1. Open **My Profile → Notifications** and choose the delivery channels you need: email, Telegram, browser/desktop, or SMS where available.
2. If you turn on Telegram, follow the connection steps that appear and confirm that the settings show the successful connection.
3. After changing the delivery-channel checkboxes, click **Save**. Use **Discard Changes** if you want to return to the saved settings.
4. Choose the event types relevant to your work in the **Notification Types** table. These checkboxes save automatically. Then check a controlled event, such as a reminder for a task you follow, in the notification panel and the selected delivery channel.

A saved preference confirms the setting was stored. Seeing the event in the bell panel and receiving it through Telegram, email, SMS, or browser notification are separate checks.

---

# Tech Support

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/technical-support

> How to contact AXL tech support, what to prepare first, and how to get your Support Code.

Tech support helps your team with technical issues: how the platform works and how to configure and maintain it. Below is how to describe a problem so it can be solved quickly, and how to let a support specialist into your account when they ask.

## Prepare the Details

Include the page where the issue occurs, the exact steps you took, what you expected, what happened instead, and any visible error text. If the problem depends on a record, include its name or number so support can find the same item.

Before you contact tech support, gather the information you'll need, including details about your problem and anything else that might help.
To reach tech support, click the "Tech Support" icon in the top bar. In the chat window that opens, describe your problem or question in as much detail as you can, and include the information you gathered. You can also attach files, screenshots, or videos: click the paperclip icon and upload the file from your device.

![AXL top bar with the Tech Support headphone icon beside the menu toggle on the left.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/60eab968eaf03592262947bf9718b6facd5054e138f9c70b7e0c98629068c635.png)
Open support using the headphone icon beside the menu toggle.

![Support window titled Message us with the team avatars, the note Ask us anything, a blank Message composer, the emoji control and the paperclip attachment button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/453b058743d64c5a937d42f37fc13bf68291d5673f3ae316ea77b0f54fb3abe3.png)
Describe the issue in the message field. The paperclip opens the attachment picker; this example contains no sent message.

## Share Your Support Code

A **support code** lets authorized AXL support staff sign in to your account to investigate an issue. Create and share a code when support asks for access. To create it, click your name in the upper-right corner, choose **My Profile**, and click **Create code** at the top of the page.

![My Profile page header with Support Code and the Create Code button before a support code is generated.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e37ce86b8ed660c04c792453620efb8dbe6b517098cdfc644840e5e7b869a03a.png)
Open My Profile and use Create Code only when support asks for account access.

Use the copy icon beside the code and share it with AXL support in your ongoing support conversation. To create another code, click the refresh icon beside the displayed code.

Follow the instructions and recommendations from the tech support team. They may ask follow-up questions to find the cause of the problem or suggest a solution. Once the issue is resolved, review the information they gave you so you can avoid similar problems in the future.

---

# Sites

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/sites

> Create a website in AXL and manage it from the Sites list.

Use **Sites → Sites** to create and manage websites. Each website has an address, shared settings, and a set of pages. Create a website first, then add and design the pages visitors will open.

## Creating a Website

To create a website, open the "Sites" section in the menu, go to "Sites", and click "Add Website".

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Name. Enter a name for the website.
2. Short Description. Visitors can see this description. It can be up to 300 characters.
3. Default Subdomain. Enter a subdomain using lowercase Latin letters, digits, or hyphens (4–63 characters, starting with a letter). AXL adds it to the domain shown next to the field, so you can build your website without buying your own domain. When you work with clients, we recommend connecting their own domain. Follow the instructions at: https://docs.axl.tech/domains
4. Website enabled. Select this checkbox to make the website available to visitors. It is selected by default.

Click **Create** to create the website and return to the list, or **Create and Open** to continue directly to its settings.

After you create the website, it appears in the list as a card.

The site card shows:

1. Status. Shows whether the website is enabled or disabled.
2. Name. The name of the website.
3. Address. The website's address. Click it to open the website.
4. Site statistics. The number of visits in the last 30 days ("Visits / 30D"), with a trend line and percentage, plus the number of visits today and in the last 7 days.
5. Actions. At the bottom of the card, there are three buttons: open the website, edit it, and a three-dot icon. Click the three-dot icon and select:

    - Enable. Click to make the website available to visitors. If the website is already enabled, this option is "Disable" instead.
    - Delete. Click to delete the website.

![Northstar Academy website card showing Disabled status, its northstar.example.com address, visit statistics and the Enable/Delete menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aed18115709e01fd68c135e066cbb69f8b670553409281c2d0eedf3e351d524d.png)
Open the card’s three-dot menu for Enable or Disable and Delete. Click the website name or pencil icon to manage its pages and settings.

Click the website name to open it. On **Pages**, create the first page and add its content. See [Site Pages](https://docs.axl.tech/site-pages) for the next steps.

![Northstar Academy Account Settings with Name, Short Description, the onaxl.com Default Subdomain, the connected northstar.example.com Domain and Manage Domains.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a41f8089fd99a4930c8cbe871cf7cc03883351ccf1f2ad2336e08878f238701.png)
After creating the website, open Account Settings to review its name, description and address.

To check the result, open the website address from its card. If the site is disabled, use its three-dot menu to enable it when ready. Each page also needs to be available and have a published design.

---

# General Site Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/general-site-settings

> Learn what each tab of your website's settings does, from pages and domains to forms, code, headers, footers, and files.

Website settings apply to the whole site: its pages, domains, shared headers and footers, integrations and files. Use them for everything the pages of one website share; a single page's title, URL and design are set on the page itself.

Open **Sites**, select your website, and use its tabs to manage pages, domains, shared headers and footers, integrations, and files. These settings apply to the website; open an individual page to change that page’s title, URL, or design.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Website Card

Pages

Account Settings

Integrations & Code

Headers and Footers

Files

## Website Card

After you create a website, it appears in the list as a card. To learn how to create a website, read "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".

On the website card, you can see:

1. Status. Shows whether the website is enabled or disabled.
2. Name. The name of the website.
3. Address. The address of the website. Click it to open the website in a new tab.
4. Website statistics. The number of visits in the last 30 days, shown with a trend line, plus the number of visits today and in the last 7 days.
5. Actions. In the bottom-right corner of the card, click the three-dot icon and select:

    - Enable (or Disable). Click to make the website available to visitors (or unavailable).
    - Delete. Click to delete the website.

![Northstar Academy website card showing Disabled status, its northstar.example.com address, visit statistics and the Enable/Delete menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aed18115709e01fd68c135e066cbb69f8b670553409281c2d0eedf3e351d524d.png)
The card shows the website status, address and visit statistics. Open its three-dot menu for Enable or Disable and Delete; click the website name to open its settings.

After you create a website, set it up and add pages to it. Click the website name to open it.

The website opens with these tabs at the top:

1. Pages. Create and edit your website's pages. You can add text, images, videos, and other elements and customize page layouts. This is the main tool for building your website's content.
2. Account Settings. Set the general characteristics of your website, such as its name, description, and domain, along with other settings that affect how it works and looks.
3. Integrations & Code. Add third-party code and integrations. Use it to add features the platform doesn't offer out of the box.
4. Headers and Footers. Edit the top (header) and bottom (footer) of your website. Add logos, navigation menus, contact information, and other reusable elements, then assign the header and footer in each page’s settings.
5. Files. Manage the files you upload to your website, such as images, documents, and videos. Upload new files, manage existing ones, and organize them into folders.

Each tab is described in detail below.

## Pages

Open the **Pages** tab and click **New Page**. Choose **Create from Scratch** to enter a page title, internal name, description, and URL, then choose its initial availability. See [Site Pages](https://docs.axl.tech/site-pages) for the complete creation form and editing steps.

Use **Search** to find a page, or **All**, **Live**, and **Draft** to filter the list. **Collapse All** and **Expand All** control nested page rows. Open the page name to edit its content.

To learn more about filling a page with content, read "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

## Account Settings

In the "Account Settings" tab, you can change your website's settings:

1. Name. Change the name of your website.
2. Short Description. Add an optional summary of your website.
3. Default Subdomain. The subdomain of your website's default address. It's used when you haven't connected your own domain. Enter 4-63 lowercase Latin letters, digits, or hyphens, starting with a letter.
4. Domain. Connect your own domain. Choose a domain from the list or click "Manage Domains" to add a new one. To learn how to add a domain, read "[Domains](https://docs.axl.tech/domains)".
5. 404 Page. A 404 page is what visitors see when they try to open a page that doesn't exist on your website. The name comes from HTTP status code 404, which means the requested resource wasn't found. The page tells visitors they've reached a page that doesn't exist, and it can include an error message or suggestions for what to do next. A good 404 page reduces confusion and makes your website easier to navigate. Choose from the list the page to show when a visitor opens a page that doesn't exist.
6. **Cookie notification.** Turn on the cookie notification option, then enter the message in the text field that appears. The message is required while the option is on.
7. **Website chat.** When your account has Communications, turn on the site chat option and select a **Website chat**. A chat must be selected before you can save this setting. The selected chat is used across the website pages.
8. **Form Settings.** Select **Show a terms acceptance checkbox on all forms** and enter the terms visitors should see. If you need visitors to make an explicit choice, leave **The checkbox is checked by default** off. Configure checkout-form terms separately below.
9. **Checkout Form Settings.** Select **Show a terms checkbox on checkout forms** and enter the checkout terms. The **The checkbox is checked by default** option controls the initial state. Use terms and consent wording appropriate to your business; adding a checkbox alone does not establish legal compliance.
10. Domain Verification Settings. Some third-party services require you to confirm domain ownership before enabling domain-specific features. Follow the verification instructions from the service you want to connect. To learn how to add the verification details in AXL, read "[Domain Confirmation for Third-Party Services](https://docs.axl.tech/domain-confirmation-for-third-party-services)".
11. **robots.txt File.** Use this file to tell compliant crawlers which URLs they may request. `User-agent` selects the crawler; `Allow` and `Disallow` permit or restrict crawling of paths; `Sitemap` points to a sitemap. A `Disallow` rule does not make content private and does not guarantee that a URL disappears from search results.
12. **Sitemap.** Turn on the switch to publish a sitemap, then open the link shown below it. A sitemap helps search engines discover your pages; it does not guarantee that they will be indexed.
13. Website Logo. Add your website logo. PNG is recommended, at least 256x256 pixels. A logo helps visitors recognize and remember your brand and sets you apart from your competitors.
14. Browser Tab Icon (Favicon). Add a favicon, the icon for your website. It appears in the browser tab before the page title. A favicon improves the look of your website, builds brand recognition, and helps visitors find your tab. PNG is recommended, at least 128x128 pixels.

![Account Settings for Northstar Academy, showing its name, description, onaxl.com default subdomain, the connected northstar.example.com domain, Manage Domains and 404 Page controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a41f8089fd99a4930c8cbe871cf7cc03883351ccf1f2ad2336e08878f238701.png)
Open Account Settings to edit the site identity and default address. Use Manage Domains when you are ready to connect a custom domain.

### Use the default robots.txt or edit a custom file

1. Leave the robots.txt field empty to use the AXL default.
2. To edit a copy of that default, click **Fill with AXL Default**. If the field already contains your own text, confirm replacement only if you want to replace it.
3. Review the rules, click **Save**, and open the robots.txt link shown in the settings to check the served file.

### Set up llms.txt

The **llms.txt** field provides a Markdown index for AI agents. Leave it empty to use an automatic list of published pages, or enter your own content.

1. To draft a summary with AI, click **Generate with AI** and review the confirmation. Generation reads the published homepage and lists other published pages; it uses AI tokens billed to the account.
2. Review the generated draft in the field and edit it if needed.
3. Click **Save**, then open the llms.txt link in the settings to check the result.

![Website settings with the robots.txt and llms.txt editors, their default and AI controls, and Sitemap enabled for the northstar.example.com address.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/595b8bf560e5bab77df903c5f471143cfbafa6ac5e933af0979a8716feec8413.png)
The file links sit beside their settings. Empty robots.txt and llms.txt fields use the defaults described above; Generate with AI is a separate action.

1. After editing the website settings, click **Save** at the bottom of the page. The save controls appear when you have unsaved changes. If a field is highlighted, correct it and save again.
2. To make the website available, turn on the website-status switch at the top right and check that its status reads **Enabled**.
3. Open the website’s address and check the page you expect visitors to reach. The website status and each page’s availability are separate settings.

![Northstar Academy Pages with New Page, search, All/Live/Draft filters, Leadership and its nested Admissions page, and the Admissions row actions; the website is Disabled and the three pages are Draft.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fde5290bc0a84702a148e443c3ae500fcbb507858504d18e726ec910033f1b34.png)
Website Status and its switch are at the top right. Each page has its own Live or Draft status in Pages; the website and page controls are separate.

## Integrations & Code

Open **Integrations & Code** to add code for the whole website, such as an integration supplied by a service you use.

1. Paste code intended for the document head into **Code in the <head> Tag**. Put code intended for the document body into **Code in the <body> Tag**.
2. After you change either field, click **Save** to keep the changes.
3. To abandon unsaved edits, click **Discard Changes**.

Follow the integration provider's instructions for the correct field. These fields affect the website rather than only one page.

![Northstar Academy Integrations & Code with separate website-wide head and body code fields and the complete Discard Changes and Save controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/afe15eae8a3d6bfb0ee585acc764f3f822a9e54155fd580c00dff9b0bb3238a7.png)
Place the integration code in the field required by its provider. Save keeps the changes; Discard Changes restores the saved values.

## Headers and Footers

A header is the block at the top of a website page. It appears on the pages where you select it in the page settings. You can place a logo, the website menu, contact information, a language switcher, and a shopping cart in it.
A footer is the block at the bottom of a page. Select it in the settings of each page that should use it. You can place contact information, company details, links to other pages, and a copy of the website menu in it.
To learn how to create headers and footers, read "[Header and Footer](https://docs.axl.tech/header-and-footer)".

To assign an existing header or footer, open **Sites**, select your website, then open **Headers and Footers**. Open the component and choose **Settings**. In **Pages**, select the pages that should use it, then click **Save**. Save and Discard Changes appear when you change the name or selected pages. This saves the assignment; publishing the component design is a separate action.

![Northstar header Settings with Name, Pages showing one selected page, Discard Changes and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/df49489a51ae40f0e1a3fe76934422ca521f21eb25be5e49cc72768dc69dc878.png)
Select the pages in Settings → Pages, then save the assignment. The same settings are available for footers.

## Files

Open the website's **Files** tab to store and organize its files. Click **Upload** and choose files from your computer, or drag files into this area. Wait for the upload to finish before using a file link.

In **List** view, find the file and click the three-dot **Actions** menu at the right end of its row:

- **Download** downloads the file. **Copy Link** copies its link.
- **Make Private** or **Make Public** changes the file's access setting. Check the resulting Public or Private status in the list.
- **Replace** opens a file picker. Choose a replacement with the same file extension as the original.
- **Rename** lets you edit the name. Press Enter or click outside the field to save; press Escape to cancel.
- **Delete** asks for confirmation before removing the item.

To move files or folders, select their checkboxes, open **Bulk Actions** and choose **Move**. Open the destination folder in the picker, then click **Select**. Moving is a selection action; it is separate from the file's three-dot menu.

Open the view selector above the file list and choose **Grid**, **Large Grid** or **List**. Use List when you need to inspect file details and its Public or Private status.

![Northstar Academy Files inside Program resources, showing the Leadership - November 2026 subfolder, Upload, Create Folder, search, and the Grid, Large Grid and List menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1319fdaff665dd3dff3a37de847572c141aa1e93bf22d926fa11d87b1daa114c.png)
Open a folder to see its breadcrumb path. Use Create Folder for a subfolder and the view menu for Grid, Large Grid or List.

To organize files, click **Create Folder**. In **New Folder**, enter a **Title** and click **Create**. The folder appears in the current directory.

In List view, double-click a folder to open it. From inside, use Create Folder again to add a subfolder, or Upload to add files there. The breadcrumb path appears above the controls after you enter a folder. Click a folder name in that path to return to it, or click **Files** to return to the top level.

---

# Site Pages

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/site-pages

> Create site pages and manage their general settings: design, account settings, automation, integrations, A/B testing, and analytics.

A site page has its own URL, design, settings, automation, and analytics. Create it inside a website, then configure and publish the content visitors should see.

Select a section to jump to its description:

Creating a Website Page

Page Settings

Design

Account Settings

Automation

Integrations & Code

A/B Testing

Analytics

## Creating a Website Page

Go to Sites in the left menu. Open a site you created earlier or create a new one. To learn how to add a site, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".

![Northstar Academy website card showing Disabled status, its northstar.example.com address, visit statistics and the Enable/Delete menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aed18115709e01fd68c135e066cbb69f8b670553409281c2d0eedf3e351d524d.png)
In Sites, click the website name to open its Pages tab and create or manage pages.

On the Pages tab, you can add one or more pages to your website. To add a page, click "New Page".

![Northstar Academy Pages with New Page, search, All/Live/Draft filters, Leadership and its nested Admissions page, and the Admissions row actions; the website is Disabled and the three pages are Draft.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fde5290bc0a84702a148e443c3ae500fcbb507858504d18e726ec910033f1b34.png)
New Page, search and status filters are above the page tree. Hover over a row for its actions, or use Collapse All and Expand All to control nested pages.

Next, choose how to create the page: from scratch or with the AI assistant.

![Create with AI dialog: page type suggestions, Page Style set to Let AI choose, and a typed brief with the audience, sections, price, and call to action.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5092310b0067340501a01eb6d3f901fe288086064e5261115347a4fe29a510f7.png)
Describe the audience, offer, sections and call to action. Choose a Page Style or leave Let AI choose, then review the brief before sending it.

On **Create with AI**, choose a prompt suggestion or describe the page you need. In **Page Style**, select a style or leave it for AI to choose. Include the purpose, audience, sections and important content in your instructions, then click **Send** to create the page and continue in the AI editor.

Check AI usage before sending: your plan may include credits, and additional usage may be billed. Review the generated page and its links before publishing it.

In the AI editor, open the usage indicator labelled **AI Usage This Period** to check the usage information available to you. Depending on your permissions and plan, the panel shows your own usage, account totals, included credits and billed usage. Use the amounts shown in your account; a zero billed amount does not necessarily mean no credits were used.

![Page editor with the AI Assistant chat and the AI usage this period popover open: your credits, account credits, billed amounts, monthly spending limit, and remaining amount.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ac83b431dec210e884769aadf9f9dce217519f2fc69722a308a1f36297ae0434.png)

If you select Create from Scratch, fill in these fields:

1. Title. Enter the page title.
2. Internal Name. Enter an internal name that only you can see. Visitors don't see it.
3. Short Description. Visitors to the website see this description. This field is optional.
4. Page URL. Enter the page address. The full address of the page appears below the field.
5. Redirect. To redirect visitors to another website, select the checkbox and enter the address they should be sent to in the field that opens.

 Choose a temporary redirect for a destination that may change, or a permanent redirect only when the old address is being retired.
6. **Hide from search engines.** Use this to request that search engines exclude the page from search results. It does not restrict who can open the page or protect confidential content.
7. **Create in the legacy editor (v1).** The page opens in the old block editor instead of the AI editor. You can switch it to the AI editor later on the Design tab.
8. Make Available. Select the checkbox to make the page available to visitors.

![Create from Scratch page dialog for Strategic Leadership Certificate, with an onaxl.com address, legacy editor unchecked, and Make Available off.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4f8fc3545490517cd21b581d90c3875856d62215f1611418dddb836557c3d208.png)
Create a page in the current editor with Create in the legacy editor (v1) left unchecked. This example keeps Make Available off while the page is being prepared.

Click "Create". The new page appears in the list, which shows the following for each page:

1. **Move.** Drag the handle to reposition the page.
2. **Number.** The page's ordinal number.
3. Page name and its web address.
4. "Collapse/Expand" button. Click to collapse or expand the list of subpages in the section. It appears when you have a hierarchy of pages.
5. Number of subpages in the section. It appears when you have a hierarchy of pages.
6. **Add Child Page.** Click to add a subpage.
7. "Edit" button. Click to open the page for editing or adding content.
8. **Preview.** Open the page address in a new tab. This is separate from previewing an unpublished design inside the editor.
9. **Make Available / Make Unavailable.** Change whether visitors can open the page. Page availability and publishing its design are separate controls; the website must also be enabled.
10. "Copy" button. Click to copy the page.
11. "Delete" button. Click to delete the page.

On a desktop, drag a page using the handle at the left of its row. Follow the highlighted drop position to place it before another page or nest it inside a parent. The homepage cannot be moved, and reordering is disabled while Search is active.

Click **Collapse All** to hide child rows or **Expand All** to show them. To add a new child directly, hover over the parent row and click **Add Child Page** (the plus button).

Use the search bar at the top of the section to find a page quickly.

## Page Settings

After you create a page, configure it and add content. Click the page title or the "Edit" button to open it.

At the top of the page, you'll see these tabs:

1. **Design.** This tab controls the appearance of the page and its content. Here you can edit design elements and add text, images, videos, and other media.
2. Account Settings. This tab holds the page's main parameters, such as its name, address, and language, plus other general settings that affect how the page works.
3. Automation. This tab lets you create an automation for the page. An automation defines the sequence of events and actions between you and your potential customer, the visitor to the page.
4. Integrations & Code. This tab has settings for embedding third-party code.
5. **A/B Test.** Prepare page variations, allocate traffic when ready, and compare their recorded results.
6. **Analytics.** Review page metrics and the scroll map for a selected period.

Each tab is described in detail below.

## Design

Use **Design** to edit the page content and layout. A new page normally opens in the AI editor. If you created it with **Create in the legacy editor (v1)**, it opens in the legacy block editor.

In the AI editor, saving a draft and publishing the design are separate actions. Use Publish when the design is ready, then check the page address. The website must be enabled and the page must be available for visitors.

For details, see [AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor).

![Northstar Academy page in the AI Design editor with the Publish menu open, showing Save Without Publishing and Preview Without Publishing.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a6c2e17276d50108b204011ad17ac20f8a66de4794a79122f7021f56165abe2b.png)
The AI editor separates draft saving from publishing and lets you preview without publishing.

## Account Settings

On the "Account Settings" tab, you can change the page settings:

1. Site. Move the page to another site by selecting it from the list.
2. Title. Shows the page title. You can change it.
3. Internal Name. The internal name is visible only to you, not to visitors.
4. Short Description. Add a brief description. This field is optional.
5. Language. Select the language for the page content. If you don't select a language, the account's default language is used.
6. Page URL. Shows the page address. You can change it.
7. Redirect. To redirect visitors to another site, select the checkbox and enter the address they should be sent to.
8. **Hide from search engines.** Use this to request that search engines exclude the page from search results. It does not restrict who can open the page or protect confidential content.
9. **Preview Image.** Click the image box to open the file manager. Select an existing image and confirm the selection, or use **Upload** there to add an image from your device. Click **Save** in the page settings to save the change. This image is used as the preview when the page is shared on social media.
10. Header. The header is a reusable block at the top of a page. It appears on this page when you select it here. You can place a logo, site menu, contacts, language switcher, shopping cart, and more in it. Select a header from the list. Click "Manage" to go to the site's "Headers and Footers" tab. For details on creating and customizing a header, see the "[Headers and Footers](https://docs.axl.tech/header-and-footer)" article.
11. Footer. The footer is a reusable block at the bottom of a page. Select the footer that this page should use. You can place contacts, details, links to other pages, and a copy of the site menu in it. Click "Manage" to go to the site's "Headers and Footers" tab. For details on creating and customizing a footer, see the "[Headers and Footers](https://docs.axl.tech/header-and-footer)" article.

![Leadership page Account Settings with Site, Title, Internal Name, Short Description, Language, Page URL on northstar.example.com, Redirect and Hide from search engines.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5e022424c63cb978b8b513e454a1b91eb3d5a617b7724afa7e5f75eb3d72bd11.png)
Use Account Settings for the page identity, address and search visibility. The internal name helps you identify the page in the admin list.

![Lower page Account Settings with Page URL, Redirect, Hide from search engines, Preview Image empty, Northstar Main Navigation selected as Header, Footer unselected and Manage links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d78bbfb0fbc5e7ba92c2076a8dcd8718290881f87b693fc24240f66aa007363b.png)
Select a Preview Image, Header and Footer as needed. Manage opens the shared component library. After you change a setting, Save and Discard Changes appear below the form.

## Automation

On this tab, you set up what happens when a visitor submits a form on this page, creates or pays an order through its payment form, or triggers a custom event: for example, send an email or create a task. A form submission with an email or phone number creates or updates the contact in your CRM. For the triggers and their rules, see "[Website Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario)".

![Page Automation tab: Form Submitted → Delay (1 day) → Send Email, and a Custom Event branching to Send Email, Update Contact Attribute, Webhook and Add Owner.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c2fd6cf0a984dda710597be91fa3f434f47ef717cd4b480134e87db9a4c12a12.png)

## Integrations & Code

Use **Integrations & Code** to add code for this page. Paste the code into **Code in the <head> Tag** or **Code in the <body> Tag**, following the integration provider's instructions. Click **Save** to keep changes, or **Discard Changes** to restore the saved code. Check the page where the code should run.

![Leadership page Integrations & Code with separate page-specific head and body fields, Discard Changes and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/742a97d0df04f27ec684f0117f496fe36a56ff02c9b9f55b09659d801335d483.png)
These fields apply to this page. Use Save to keep changes or Discard Changes to return to the saved code.

## A/B Testing

A/B testing compares different versions of a page to find out which one performs best.

A/B testing lets you:

1. Compare page versions with different designs and content.
2. Analyze test results.
3. Identify the best-performing version based on those results.

Use the test results to guide changes to your page:

1. Open the page's **A/B Test** tab and click **Create Variation**. Enter a **Name** and optional **Short Description**, then click **Create**. Creating the variation prepares the test; it does not start traffic allocation.
2. Use **General Info** on the variation card to edit its name and description. Open **Design** to edit its content. Prepare and publish the intended designs before sending visitors to them.
3. When you are ready to begin, adjust the **Traffic** slider. Releasing the slider saves the split immediately and starts a test that has not started yet. There is no separate Start button. A 100/0 split sends traffic to only one version.
4. After the test starts, open **View Full Analytics** to compare recorded results. Allow real visits to accumulate before deciding which version to keep.
5. When you decide to finish, use **Declare Winner**, select the intended version, and review the confirmation. Confirming applies the winning design to the page and ends the test; it is a change to what visitors see.

![Leadership page A/B Test marked Not Started, with Current design and Leadership Benefits First variation cards, both at zero percent traffic, the Traffic slider, and disabled analytics and winner controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/43ecd80ecf21e85dbcd6c5d4624bb347cea4656d7ab3eafc222701112175f34f.png)
The variation is prepared, but the test has not started. Both versions have 0% traffic in this example. Moving the Traffic slider starts allocation; do this only after preparing the intended designs.

## Analytics

Open the page's **Analytics** tab and select **Page Metrics**. Set the **Period**, then review recorded page views, form activity, orders and sales.

Open **Add Filter** to choose **Device**, **Traffic Source** or **UTM**. Use UTM to narrow the report to a tagged campaign. The selected period also applies when you switch to **Scroll Map**.

![Leadership page Analytics with the selected period, Add Filter and Scroll Map controls, and complete views, forms, orders and sales metrics, including sales per view.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2c7ab3de38bfc2a294c5bd90992d6f74b9166c341ff03cc6b9c47b98fb78310f.png)
Page Metrics for the selected reporting period. This example shows 2,347 views, 1,608 unique visitors, 112 orders and 72 sales.

Scroll Map

A scroll map shows how far recorded visits reached down the page. In **Analytics**, select **Scroll Map** beside Page Metrics, then choose the **Period**. Open **Add Filter** for **Device**, **Traffic Source** or **UTM**; a **Variation** filter is available when the page has variations.

Review the depth chart and block information to see whether visitors reach the offer, form or next-step button. If the panel says **No scroll data yet**, check the selected period and filters and allow recorded visits to accumulate before drawing conclusions about the page.

With a scroll map, you can:

1. See which sections of the page visitors reach.
2. Find where visitors tend to stop scrolling.
3. Check whether visitors reach important page elements, such as buttons, forms, and offers.
4. Use the data to improve the page structure.

![Page Analytics on Scroll Map: 2,347 views, 63.8% average depth, 1.4% reached the end, with the depth bars from 0% to 100%.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/68841c165e0322d72bf36cf045271ca56f82d304bab754cd585986d34f400d41.png)

**Check the page before sharing it.** Open its address, confirm that the site is enabled and the page is available, then test links, navigation, and any form on a test copy. After changing the URL, update links that point to the previous address.

---

# AI Page Editor

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor

> Build and edit website pages with the AI assistant, fine-tune them by hand in the Design and Code tabs, and see how AI usage is billed.

With AXL’s new page editor, you can create and edit pages with AI and make smaller changes by hand.

The AI assistant can change the text, structure, and design of a page based on your written request. For small edits, use the manual editing tools instead. AI assistant usage is billed separately.

This article shows you how to use the page editor.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Open the Editor

Edit a Page with AI

Edit Manually

Work with Code

Preview a Page

Pricing

## Open the Editor

Go to Sites → Sites and open the website you want to edit. Open the Pages tab, then open the page you want to change. The page editor opens.

In the editor, make changes by hand in the Design tab or use the AI assistant in the Chat tab.

![Northstar Academy landing page open in the page editor, with the AI Assistant panel on the left and the Chat, Design, and Code tabs above the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/81bf1b5b78ee468eaf753ac59356d20a78b7495f4a6ff780370ad30cb396ec31.png)

## Edit a Page with AI

To use the AI assistant, open the Chat tab in the editor and describe what you want to change on the page. Write your request in plain language.

For example:

- “Change the button color to purple.”
- “Add a contact form to the page.”
- “Update the hero section and add a course description.”
- “Make this section more compact.”
- “Update the page copy and design for a new product.”

The AI assistant analyzes the page and makes changes based on your request. You can include several changes in one request. The more clearly and thoroughly you describe what you want, the more accurately the AI can deliver it.

When the assistant finishes, review the changes. If the result needs adjusting, send another request or make the changes by hand.

![An AI Assistant request to make the button deep purple and the hero more compact, the assistant's reply, and the updated page preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ead245b27a4d69f8e26fb56024baa57667d7fc1a43fc07a96c02b573182ecb5f.png)

## Edit Manually

You don’t need the AI assistant for small changes. You can edit page elements directly in the Design tab of the editor.

For example, you can:

- Edit text
- Adjust individual page elements
- Change the design
- Set up links and buttons
- Make other small changes

Use the AI assistant to create pages or make larger changes, and make smaller edits by hand. The editor saves your changes automatically as a draft. When you’re ready, click Publish to make them live.

To save explicitly without changing the public page, open the arrow next to **Publish** and choose **Save Without Publishing**. Wait for the **Draft saved** confirmation before leaving the editor.

![Northstar Academy page in the Design editor with the Publish menu open, showing Save Without Publishing and Preview Without Publishing.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a6c2e17276d50108b204011ad17ac20f8a66de4794a79122f7021f56165abe2b.png)
Open the arrow next to Publish to save or preview the draft without publishing it.

## Work with Code

Pages in the new editor are built with HTML and CSS, plus AXL-specific markup for interactive elements.

If you need to, you can work directly with the page code in the Code tab. Use it when you need precise control over the page or want to change settings that are easier to set in the code.

If you’re editing the code yourself and aren’t sure how to add a specific element, click Download Guide at the top of the Code tab, open the file in a text editor on your computer, and read it.

If an AI agent is helping you edit the code, give the guide to the agent.

After editing the code, review the result. Your changes stay in draft until you click Publish.

![Page HTML in the Code tab with the Download Guide button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2e0e131aac062b0bd589c8f3cd7ef671798700b9065154cb928d9801e174c690.png)

## Preview a Page

Before you publish, use the **Desktop view**, **Tablet view**, and **Mobile view** buttons above the preview. Scroll through the entire page in each view. To open the draft in a separate tab, open the arrow next to **Publish** and choose **Preview Without Publishing**. Check:

- Text
- Element placement
- Design
- Buttons and links
- How newly added sections look

If you need to make changes, go back to the editor. You can update the page by hand or describe the changes to the AI assistant.

When you’re done, click Publish to make the page live.

The new editor lets you combine both approaches: use AI to create pages and make larger changes, and handle smaller edits by hand.

![Mobile preview of the Northstar Academy page with the mobile device control selected and the full phone viewport visible.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/596299dfc0a6e384c164d58090bc6b12f750dbb573fbc361b25ed658d8ab6fde.png)
The device buttons change the preview width. Scroll inside the preview to check the sections below the first screen.

## Pricing

Editing a page by hand doesn’t incur any AI charges.

AXL measures AI usage in credits. The amount charged depends on your plan’s included credits and pricing. Check **Settings → Billing → AI Functions** for usage in credits and the amount spent.

AI use started manually in the editor counts toward the **Team Members** limit. To check the amount currently set for your account, open **Settings → Billing → AI Functions → Limits by Category**. The account owner can change an editable limit; an empty amount means no limit for that category. **Calls**, **AI Agents**, and **Automation** have separate limits. Each limit resets at the start of the billing period.

The number of credits used depends on the scope and complexity of the task. For example, a small change to a single page element typically uses fewer credits than creating or significantly redesigning an entire page.

![AI Functions in Billing: Limits by Category with the Team Members limit, and AI spending this period.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/26d3db83ac1014b017e970bef03e117bb5964029d6087ee1c5f79db30cc37948.png)

## Finish and verify a page change

1. Open the intended site and page, then make the change in **Chat**, **Design**, or **Code**. Confirm that you are editing the correct page before requesting a large redesign.
2. Open the arrow next to **Publish**, choose **Save Without Publishing**, and wait for **Draft saved**.
3. Review the draft on desktop, tablet, and mobile. Check the complete page, including content below the first screen, form fields, button labels, and link destinations. Use **Preview Without Publishing** for a separate draft preview.
4. Use **Publish** when the draft is ready to become public. Open the published page separately and check the same content and links there.

A draft preview checks your working changes; the published URL confirms what visitors can see.

---

# Domain Verification for Third-Party Services

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/domain-confirmation-for-third-party-services

> Verify your domain with third-party services such as Facebook Business Manager by adding a verification file in AXL.

Third-party services often ask you to verify that you own a domain before they let you use it. Domain verification confirms your ownership, authorizes the service to work with your domain, and helps protect users' personal data.

If you connect a third-party service (such as a mail client) to your domain, the service may ask you to verify the domain. You can usually do this by uploading a file to your website server.

Verification shows that the domain owner has the right to give the service access to the domain. It also stops bad actors from taking over other people's domains and using them for fraud.

That makes domain verification an important security measure: only legitimate domain owners can use their domains with third-party services.

Let's walk through domain verification using Facebook Business Manager as an example.

## Adding the Domain to Facebook Business Manager

For all cases where Facebook may require domain verification, see the [Facebook guide](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/245311299870862).

Sign in to your Business Manager account using this [link](https://business.facebook.com/). Go to "Business Settings".

**About the Facebook screenshots.** The images in steps 1 and 3 are reference screenshots of the earlier Facebook Business Manager interface, with the customer's details blurred. Meta changes names and menu placement over time, so follow the current [Facebook guide](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/245311299870862) if your screen looks different. The verification method stays the same: choose HTML file upload and download the file.

![Facebook All Tools menu with Business Settings highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/KWBl4Az59Uqbtnm2ydMs2Q.png)
Reference: earlier Facebook Business Manager interface.

Go to "Brand Safety" and open the "Domains" tab. To add a new domain, click "Add".

![Facebook Business Settings with Brand Safety, Domains, and Add highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/T3mlyo6L2UWNTKRUZJ7Rkg.png)
Reference: earlier Facebook Business Manager interface.

In the pop-up window, enter your domain name, for example example.com (without http:// or https://). Click "Add Domain".

![Add a domain dialog with a Domain name field and Add Domain button.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qr9ZHa_rTk-TG5cCDAiugw.png)
Reference: earlier Facebook Business Manager interface.

On the next step, you'll see the domain verification options. Select "HTML file Upload".

![Domain verification page with the HTML file upload method selected and a Verify button.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/fMAHlxAoE0S3m9Qa2I09eA.png)
Reference: earlier Facebook Business Manager interface.

**Download the HTML file and don't modify it**. You'll need this file in step 2.

![HTML file upload verification instructions with the download link highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/4xzgTTJbPUaL38ob0revgg.png)
Reference: earlier Facebook Business Manager interface.

Keep the verification file exactly as the service supplied it. Use the original filename from the verification instructions, including its extension. If your browser added a duplicate-download suffix such as `(1)`, remove that suffix when entering the filename in AXL.

![Downloaded HTML domain-verification file opened in a browser, showing matching filename and page text.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pwahnvO_CU2ZL3Jza0D6Jw.png)
Reference: the downloaded verification file opened in a browser; its name and text match.

## Adding Domain Verification in AXL

**Keep the Facebook page open and go back to AXL**. Open **Sites → Sites** in the left menu. Open the site that uses this domain, or click **Add Website** to create a new one. To learn how to add a site, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)."

Open the site's **Account Settings** tab and scroll down to **Domain Verification Settings**. Until you add a file, the section says **No verification files yet**. Click **Add Verification**.

![Site Account Settings with the Domain Verification Settings section, No verification files yet and the Add Verification button, between Checkout Form Settings and robots.txt File.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fe19497b225e62a1a7ac0c3e392b34812423f146a2b8040021de084c24f98f40.png)
**Domain Verification Settings** on the site's **Account Settings** tab.

The **Add Verification** panel opens on the right. Fill in the fields:

1. Name. Enter the file name from step 1, for example `k3x9p2v7f1qd8m4t.html`.
2. Type. Select **File** to upload the file the service gave you, or **Content** to paste its text instead. For the Facebook HTML file, choose **File**.
3. File or Content. For **File**, click the upload area or drag the file onto it (one file, up to 5 MB). To replace the file, delete it and upload a new one. For **Content**, paste the text into the **Content** box.
4. Path. Enter the address where the service expects the file. Facebook asks for the root of your site, so the path is a slash followed by the file name, for example `/k3x9p2v7f1qd8m4t.html`. Other services use their own paths, for example `/.well-known/apple-developer-merchantid-domain-association`.

![Add Verification panel with Name k3x9p2v7f1qd8m4t.html, Type File selected, an empty file upload area and Path /k3x9p2v7f1qd8m4t.html.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/15d926b49a398c8cdcaddf2b41e9d5253fe7055b25e7a6d31db8efeff9220b7f.png)
An unsaved example with the name and path filled in. Upload the file from step 1 into the **File** area before clicking **Add**.

Click **Add** at the bottom of the panel (**Cancel** closes it without saving).

Before asking the third-party service to verify the domain, open the verification URL it provides and check that the required file or text is available there. The path must match the service’s instructions exactly.

## Verifying the Domain

Go back to the Facebook Business Manager page and click "Verify" to start verification.

![Domain-verification instructions with the Verify button highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3jE2T0M3OEKJIOBidxwhFg.png)
Reference: earlier Facebook Business Manager interface.

Once your domain is verified, a green dot appears next to the domain name in Facebook Business Manager. Hover over the dot to see a black tooltip saying the domain has been verified.

![Domain details with the green verification indicator highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XojRg34MM0iOMBz0apuKNw.png)
Reference: earlier Facebook Business Manager interface.

---

# Widgets

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/widgets

> Create a widget in the page editor, set up its automation, and embed it on your AXL pages or on an external website.

Widgets are embeddable elements for websites. A registration form is a typical example: you create the form once and use it on different websites or in webinar rooms. You build a widget in the page editor, the same way you build a website page, and it can perform a variety of functions.

## Creating a Widget

Go to **Sites**, then **Widgets**. Click the **Create Widget** tile.

Enter a title that describes the widget, such as **Corporate Training Inquiry**. Add an optional description so your team knows where to use it.

![New Widget dialog with Northstar Corporate Training Inquiry title, a description for a 12-week leadership program, and Cancel, Create and dropdown controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f4432e86fb6bbe6dca8adef31f2fa03eed0ac9b325eb8531014f10dac3a3b154.png)
Name the widget so your team can recognize it. Create returns to the library; Create and Open is available from the dropdown.

Click "Create" to return to the widget library, or choose "Create and Open" from its dropdown to open the widget immediately. Here you can see the following information and options:

1. Title. The name of the widget.
2. Date Created. The exact date and time the widget was created. You can see it at the top of the widget's page.
3. Modified. The date the widget was last changed. In the list, it appears under the widget's title; the widget's page shows it as Date Updated.
4. View Count. The number of times the widget has been viewed.
5. Preview. Open the Actions menu on the widget and choose "Preview" to see how your widget will look on a website.
6. Edit. Open the Actions menu and choose "Edit" to open the widget, customize its appearance, and set up its automation.
7. Copy. Open the Actions menu and choose "Copy" to make a copy of the widget.
8. Delete. Open the Actions menu and choose "Delete" to delete the widget.

![Current Widgets library with Create Widget, the Northstar Corporate Training Inquiry card, and its Preview, Edit, Copy and Delete menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e8d2602fba9642d7d6c0466f120a4718176c60d94d9a7d391e669c4e91b639c.png)
Open the three-dot Actions menu on the widget card to preview, edit, copy or delete it.

## Widget Design

These instructions apply to the built-in legacy editor currently available for widgets. After you create a widget, click its card or open the Actions menu (the three dots) and choose **Edit**. The widget opens on **Account Settings**, with Title and Description beside its design area on a desktop. The linked editor guides below describe this widget editor; new site pages normally use the separate AI editor.

The page editor opens. Here you build the widget, which is usually a form, the most common widget element.

Click "Create New Block".

![Northstar widget editor with Title and Description beside the canvas, a complete inquiry form, and Form Name, completion message, redirect, JavaScript and layout settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1894b6ccd60d6b198050f110d1c4a64a0d4c4068b80250155aa9e649141cace9.png)
The widget editor contains the title, description and design canvas. This draft example already has a heading, explanatory text and a form; Create New Block remains below the canvas.

Click "Add Element" and select the "Form" element.

![Complete Add Element palette with Text, Heading, Button, Columns, media, Form, Timer, Form/Quiz, Meeting, Payment Form, Menu, Markdown, HTML Code, Group and Other.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e4e7a8b87556160154e948d6235df6704c559b6c0b353b76899f4c352f316d56.png)
Choose Form for a built-in registration or inquiry form. Form/Quiz is a separate element.

Choose a form template and drag it onto the page.

![Widget editor with all four Form presets visible beside an existing Corporate Training Inquiry draft.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/02cc8287a7b999d1a2b58c81a28efbfb44937294c1acef0265d9b7642feb4555.png)
Choose the arrangement of labels, fields and button, then drag the preset into a block.

Select the entire form to open its settings. Set the form name and completion message under **Element Settings**. Under **Fields**, edit labels, placeholders and required values. Open the main menu and choose **Save Without Publishing** to keep a draft. **Save** publishes the widget design and can change an already embedded widget. Use the editor's **Preview** control to inspect the draft before publishing.

![Widget editor main menu showing Save and Save Without Publishing as separate actions, with the complete form and its layout settings visible.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ee4a6b9338c781584def4bed660ddddc1fb4dfbdb7cb870e2f59668697e5abce.png)
Use Save Without Publishing to keep a draft. Save publishes the widget design. The example remains a draft.

## Widget Automation

Open the **Automation** tab. AXL creates an inactive automation the first time you open it. Add a trigger and an action step, configure them, and connect their ports. For a registration form, use **Form Submitted** and select the form name used in the editor. You can then add the required follow-up, such as **Send Email**, and configure its recipients and email template. See [Site Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario) for details. Keep the automation inactive while preparing it; when its configuration is ready to handle real submissions, turn on the switch so the label reads **Active**.

![Inactive widget automation with Form Submitted for Corporate Training Inquiry connected to a one-day Delay, beside the event and action palette.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a5e60838603309e24c3508f0f5c1b3044ceea64efbfb923f2ef020ad98e445da.png)
This draft example connects Form Submitted to a one-day Delay. The automation remains Inactive; it has not been run or used to send a message.

## How to Embed a Widget on an External Website

1. Open the widget in AXL and click **Embed Widget** at the top right.
2. Select your school **Domain**. Click the **Copy** icon at the lower right of the generated code box.
3. On the external website, paste this code where the widget should appear, between the opening and closing `<body>` tags. Use the code generated for your own account and widget, not an example copied from a screenshot.

The following Tilda screenshots show an earlier example of the same embedding workflow. Use the code copied from your own widget, including its own account and widget identifiers. Tilda's [current HTML embed guide](https://help.tilda.cc/html) describes the T123 block and publication requirement.

Open the page of your website in Tilda. Choose the spot on the page where you want to place the widget. Click "+".

![Third-party page editor showing a hero section and the add-block control.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6dea069e0bca1757e705845f16d938237473915f01819a8c5e7e16df33011052.png)

In the **Block Library**, open **Other** and add **T123 — Embed HTML Code**.

![Third-party block library with Other selected and Embed HTML code highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4e8eb845e9753c42ebcf310212868f74a024eb1cacf1b4a81be5da2b525a575f.png)

Click the "Content" button.

![Third-party page editor with an HTML block and its Content control highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fcacef411f38a1825951241cc634836e9b9c0f39d6420872c2e6e73f6e86b513.png)

A window opens. Paste the widget code you copied into the field and click "Save and close".

![Third-party HTML editor containing the AXL widget embed script and Save and close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7d66f7032add40fc9dd7210220b921a893c1aa790447fd0e05a57bcfe2d4ccc1.png)

Tilda displays the code as text in its editing and preview modes. Click **Publish**, then open the public page to check the running widget. See Tilda's [HTML embed guide](https://help.tilda.cc/html) for its current instructions.

![Third-party page editor with an embedded script and Publish highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19f1326d6017583ab578e9fa8c88a82f7a182ce50aa91804285f6893e0c8218b.png)

After publishing, open the page. The form appears on the website page.

![Third-party page displaying an embedded First Name and Email form below its hero.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76d5513c664f39ae083ebc844fedbff12d0f182391b6ab3bff12d0682b32bc02.png)

To update an embedded widget, edit it in AXL and click Save in its legacy editor. Open the external page again to check the result. Its container controls the available width, so automatic width is a useful starting point.

Check the widget height after interactions such as validation messages and completion. Content changes may need a new size calculation; do not assume that every state resizes correctly.

![Selected inquiry form with Width set to 60 percent, Center alignment, automatic left and right margins, and 20-pixel padding.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/467f05f59e93acaccd17f1498dfdc83b0ebe12dd456e92d89d70b40cd672dbca.png)
Select the form and open Positioning to change its width and alignment. This example uses 60% width and Center alignment.

For example, a form set to 60% width occupies 60% of its available container width. Check the draft with the editor's **Preview** and device controls. When the change is ready, **Save** publishes it; then check the actual external page at desktop and mobile widths.

![Preview inside the widget editor showing a centered inquiry form with First Name, Email and Request Program Details, with Exit Preview and device controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7bcacb22fb24f1c12145d7fcd015d5caf8ad7207ae820a7abc613aac10c521bd.png)
Preview inside the editor lets you inspect the draft at different device widths. This is not the embedded public page and does not publish the design.

![Third-party page displaying the narrower centered embedded form.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d064609ba34c13851c60132d32c2a4d28ac6df71cef92306a3c37f0a0a0c0b81.png)

---

# Widgets for the Webinar Room

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/widgets-for-webinar-room

> Show a widget, such as a payment form, in the webinar room so attendees can use it without leaving the live stream.

You can use widgets during webinars. For example, you can show a payment form on screen during the broadcast. Attendees can fill out the form or pay right on the webinar page, without going to another page.

To do this, first create a widget in the "Widgets" section. For instructions, see the "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)" article.

Next, go to the "Webinars" section and choose or create a webinar. For instructions, see the "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)" article.

![Webinars list with a webinar highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

Open the webinar's Settings tab, then choose the Content & Slides section. Click the "Select Widgets" button.

![Content &amp; Slides with the Select Widgets control.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d865787f43c3d58572b06ca2e52df092b33afb375e2286fe7de7dfa3a37eb911.png)

The widget picker opens. Select the widget you need, then click the Select button in the footer; it includes the number of selected items. The button is unavailable until you select an item.

![Widgets picker with the account's widgets.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08397d9c7bb88b1a39ac246e257636f890c467b216606b4c8c7cfffe9f8affe1.png)

The widget is added to the webinar and appears under **Widgets** in Content & Slides. Click the eye icon to preview it. Use the trash icon and confirm if you need to remove its link to this webinar. Adding or removing a linked widget updates the list directly; there is no separate Save step.

![Widgets list in Content &amp; Slides with Select Widgets and the Northstar · Corporate Training Inquiry widget, its view count, and the eye and trash icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5889375e83a7735df164a72f1f7d94f12d0c368383bb0fe5921a19f11ebc483a.png)

![Preview of the Northstar · Corporate Training Inquiry widget: heading, description, First Name and Email fields, and the Request Program Details button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b90b3be96e74d62ab8508e61462541cb6d6aa674d3a2c4cf41c9f65c12ee7e4c.png)

Adding the widget to the webinar makes it available in the room; you still need to put it on the stage there. Open **Links → Sign In As → Host**.

![Room menu with the Guest, Moderator, and Host sign-in links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd5364edcbaaf9305fd81bb1b89880caa9569db5d9356045205891ae45a2d18a.png)

In the webinar room, click "+" (**Add to the stage**) in the header and choose "Widget".

![Room add menu with Widget highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebfa760d8074090ddff7827640157df7a5a917be4459054dc6b19e9f7ae2a64e.png)

The "Share Widget" window opens with the widgets you added to this webinar. Find the widget you need and click "Select This Widget". If you need a new widget instead, click "Create Widget"; the admin opens in a new tab.

![Share Widget panel with the Northstar Corporate Training Inquiry widget and Select This Widget.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b24fff6ecf72ea347b2d5542dae54fd1726a2c7ddf90a512647de2ad76289361.png)

The widget appears over the stage in the webinar room, in the bottom-left corner by default. Attendees can fill out the form during the live stream without leaving the webinar page.

Check the widget's position and size in the room, then check its contents from a guest view. If it contains a form or payment button, confirm that the intended fields and destination are visible before using it in a live session. A widget with a transparent background shows the stage through it, so give the widget's page a background color if its text is hard to read over the picture.

On a desktop, drag the widget by its handle and resize it from its inner corner so it does not hide important content. On a phone, the widget appears below the broadcast picture. Use **Replace** to choose another widget or **Clear Content** to remove it from the stage. Removing it from the stage is separate from removing it from the webinar settings.

---

# Headers and Footers

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/header-and-footer

> Create site headers and footers, design them in the page editor, and choose which pages use them.

Create a shared header or footer once, then assign it to the pages that should use it. You can keep several headers or footers for different page groups.

A header usually contains a logo and navigation at the top of the page. A footer usually contains contact details, useful links, and company information at the bottom. They appear on the pages you assign; creating one does not attach it to every page automatically.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

How to Create a Website Header

How to Create a Website Footer

## How to Create a Website Header

Go to Sites and open your site.

Open the "Headers and Footers" tab.

![Headers and Footers tab with the Header section, Search and Create controls, and Northstar Main Navigation with edit, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/351670a7e43842f0257e3d2ddae1ab559b3f39123e94bbb7629729330b8f19b9.png)
In Header, click Create to add a shared header. Open an existing header by clicking its name or the pencil icon.

1. In the **Header** section, click **Create**.
2. In **New Header**, enter a name such as **Main Navigation**.
3. Click **Create**. The header appears in the list.

Your header is created. Click its name or the pencil icon in the Actions column.

The Design tab opens the AI page editor for your header. For more about page design, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)."

Open the "Settings" tab. It contains these fields:

- Name. The name of the header. You can change it.
- Pages. All pages of this site. Select the pages you want to attach the header to. A header usually appears on every page, which keeps the site consistent and easy to navigate. On the home page, the header can be larger and contain more elements, such as a slider or a banner.

After changing the name or selected pages, click **Save**. The Save and Discard Changes buttons appear only while there are unsaved settings. This saves the settings and page assignments; publishing the design is a separate action.

![Northstar header Settings with Name, Pages showing one selected page, Discard Changes and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/df49489a51ae40f0e1a3fe76934422ca521f21eb25be5e49cc72768dc69dc878.png)
Open Settings, choose the pages in Pages, then save the assignment. The same settings are available for footers.

## How to Create a Website Footer

Return to **Headers and Footers**. In the **Footers** section, click **Create**. On a wide screen, this section is to the right of **Header**.

In **New Footer**, enter a name such as **Company Links**, then click **Create**. The new footer appears in the Footers list.

Your footer is created. Click its name or the pencil icon in the Actions column.

The Design tab opens the AI page editor for your footer. For more about page design, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)."
Open the "Settings" tab. It contains these fields:

- Name. The name of the footer. You can change it.
- Pages. All pages of this site. Select the pages you want to attach the footer to.

After changing the name or selected pages, click Save. This saves the settings and page assignments; publishing the design is a separate action.

When you are ready to make the component visible, publish its intended design and save its page assignments. Open a page that uses it and check the logo, links, and layout at desktop and mobile widths. If the component is missing, check that the website and page are available, then return to **Settings → Pages** and confirm that this page is selected.

---

# Forms & Quizzes

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/forms-and-quizzes

> Learn what forms and quizzes are, how to create them with AI or from scratch, and how to manage pages, rules, and responses.

Use a form or quiz to collect information across one or more pages. Visitors answer questions, follow the navigation rules you configure, and submit their responses. You can share a direct form link or embed the form on a website.

Click a section name to jump to its description:

How to Create a Quiz Form

Form Settings

Form Page Content

List of Form Pages

Automation

Responses

## How to Create a Quiz Form

Go to **Sites → Forms & Quizzes**. Click **Create with AI**.

![Forms and Quizzes searched for Northstar, with Create with AI, the unpublished Northstar Executive Program Intake form, its dates, zero submissions, and edit, preview, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ab109fe420163b817d7d1636e7a647c523b13aaccc554c6a50c049ce7296a5c2.png)
Open Forms & Quizzes to create a form or manage an existing one. This example form has not been published.

Choose how to build the form: **Create with AI** starts with a prompt; **Create from Scratch** starts with a title, description, and template.

![Create with AI dialog with four suggested form types and an unsent Northstar leadership-program registration prompt.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5a13703678c73f662cd98effb2341f4951361b5429da95556ea0ea5e3e119062.png)
Describe the questions, required fields and completion message before sending the prompt. The example prompt shown here has not been sent.

If you choose "Create from Scratch," fill in the fields:

1. **Title.** Enter a name for the form.
2. Description. Add a description of the form.
3. **Template.** Choose one of the available templates. You can modify the template you pick in the settings.
The templates include:

    - Blank. A clean slate. You start from scratch and add all the fields, questions, answer types, and logic yourself.
    - Feedback. A simple form for collecting feedback, suggestions, questions, or complaints from users. For example, you can send it as a feedback form after an online course.
    - Quiz. A set of questions that assess a user's knowledge, skills, or interests in a specific area.
    - Test. A form that collects information about the user and their needs, so you can segment your audience or check whether someone meets certain criteria. You can also use it to assess skills, abilities, or personality traits. For example, an English test that determines the user's level.
    - Questionnaire. A form for collecting information about the user. For example, a questionnaire for new platform users that asks about their education, work experience, and interests.
    - Survey. A form for collecting opinions, views, and ratings on a specific topic. It contains multiple-choice questions, so you can gauge how much respondents agree or disagree with a statement.

![Create from Scratch dialog for Northstar Executive Program Intake, with title, description, six templates and Create/Create and Open buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9dfbe5b958dfe43dcb7640502aa02caa8368013794586647840ac4a049fb10f5.png)
Choose a template and enter the form details. Create and Open takes you directly to the editor.

If you choose "Create with AI," describe the form you want in the prompt box, or pick one of the suggestions:

- Registration Form
- Knowledge Quiz
- Funnel Quiz
- Form from Google Sheet

Click "Create" if you're building the form from scratch (or "Create and Open" to go straight to the editor), or send a prompt to the AI assistant if you're using AI. New forms appear in the Forms & Quizzes list, which shows the following information:

1. **Name.** The name of the form.
2. **Date Created.** The exact date and time the form was created.
3. **Publish Date.** The exact date and time the form was published. If the form hasn't been published yet, the column shows "Not Published Yet."
4. **Submissions.** The number of times the form has been submitted.
5. **Edit button (pencil icon).** Opens the form editor.
6. **Preview button (eye icon).** Opens a preview of the form.
7. **Copy button.** Creates a copy of the form and its automation.
8. **Delete button.** Deletes the form from the list after you confirm.

Click the form's name or its Edit button to open the form. At the top of the page, you'll see the "Published" switch and buttons for working with the form.

**Check the Published switch before editing.** A new form is created with this switch on. If you want to prepare it privately, turn the switch off before adding questions. The word **Published** stays beside the switch even when it is off; check the switch position.

1. **Published and Publish New Version.** The switch controls whether the form is published. With the switch off, you can continue editing and previewing. Turn it on when the form is ready to share. For a form that is already published, use **Publish New Version** after editing to update the version respondents receive; saving a field setting is a separate action.
2. **Share Form.** Copy the direct link or embed code to use the form on an AXL page or another website.
3. **Preview Form.** Open the form preview to check its questions and navigation before sharing it. Previewing and submitting a response are separate steps.

![Complete Form Preview with the fictional name Jordan Reyes, an example.com email, a team size of 48, and the Submit button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3a1f9cd8bdcc8c2ebc807f94f2ca140132e9829d19629546dc388094975d3503.png)
Use Preview Form to check required fields, help text and the Submit button before sharing the form.

## Form Settings

On the Form Settings tab, you can change the form's settings, add and remove pages, and add and remove form elements. The tab has three blocks:

1. Editor tabs. Use the Chat, Design, and Settings tabs to switch between the chat with the AI assistant, the quiz design, and the settings of the selected item.
2. **List of form pages.** This block gives you an overview of all the pages of your form or quiz and lets you manage their order.
3. Form page content. This is the main block, where you create and edit the content of each page of your form or quiz. Here you add questions, text, and other elements.

Each section is described in detail below.

**AI Assistant.** On the Chat tab, you can talk to the AI assistant and edit your quiz with text commands. Each request is billed separately, and the cost is calculated case by case.

In **Chat**, open the **AI usage this period** indicator beside the message controls to review recorded consumption and the limits available to your account. The details depend on your access to account billing information.

**Quiz Design.** The Design tab contains the quiz design settings. The first section, General Settings, includes:

1. Title. You can change the name of the form.
2. Description. You can add a description of the form.
3. Use Additional HTML. You can add your own HTML to the form. Scripts don't run in preview mode.

Changes in the **Design** settings are saved automatically. If you edit Additional HTML, leave the code field to apply the change, then wait for the saved confirmation. **Item Settings** and **Page Settings** have their own **Save** button. For an already published form, these saves do not replace **Publish New Version**.

![Unpublished Northstar form with General Settings for title, description and additional HTML, all design sections, page controls, and the full form canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/73433ba5edf0986db75ee787c44e4ac003960e5fc9ef74e6a1c890aa20b753d9.png)
Open Design to change the form appearance. General Settings contains the title, description and Additional HTML control.

Form Completion. In this section, you can set the message and image that users see after they submit the form.

1. Completion Message. The message users see after they submit the form.
2. Enable redirect. The redirect happens right after the form is submitted, regardless of which page it was submitted from and that page's rules. Turn the switch on to show more redirect settings. Enter the redirect URL, and users are sent to that page after they complete the form. Select "Open in a new tab" to open the page in a new tab.
3. Redirect URL. Enter the redirect URL in this field.
4. Select "Open in a new tab" to open the redirect page in a new tab.
5. Turn on the "Show image after submission" switch to show an image on the completion page after the form is submitted.
6. **Image.** Click the image area to open the file manager. Select an existing image and confirm your selection, or click **Upload** there to add an image from your device. The selected image is saved with the completion settings.
7. Run code after submission. Runs JS code on the completion page after the form is submitted. Turn the switch on and paste the JS code into the field.

![Form Completion settings with a thank-you message, redirect disabled, completion image enabled, and post-submission code disabled beside the complete form canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7303b8e6961bd871af9425f58699cba8d28e2ed85dd6fc37b62f991c3f6f57cd.png)
Set the completion message and optional image. Redirect and post-submission code are disabled in this example.

Progress Bar. The progress bar appears as a colored line above the form questions and fills as the user answers them.

Turn on the "Show progress bar" switch to set up the progress bar. You can change its height, fill color, and background color.
Turn on the "Show progress percentage" switch to show visitors what percentage of the form they've completed. You can change the font size, color, and placement of the percentage (left, center, or right).

![Quiz Design → Progress Bar with Show progress bar on, Height 6 px, fill and background colors, and Show progress percentage with font size, color and Right placement.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/670c9bf01a2c8e9a41a5cfcfdc2ad7d9be4a56a2db731c931e3963f1de4e6f69.png)

**Text.** You can change the text size and color.

![Quiz Design → Text with Text Size 14 px and Text Color #262626.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/98a1adb421c581edba4027a9c11e14edd29ec94d2b601ef8e0ebee30c6768da0.png)

**Background.** Choose the background color of the form. You can also add a background image.

![Quiz Design → Background with a Background Image picker and Background Color #FFFFFF.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e3853a03eda7ce2eb51825b42ed6c824c5fd61ddb0259668c18bf397161b1b9f.png)

**Fields.** Here you can change the size and color of the question labels. You can also set the corner radius of the answer fields (in pixels) and the width and color of their borders.

![Quiz Design → Fields with label size, color and weight, alignment, description size, color and margin, corner radius, border color and thickness.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/435f0433de53a6e0026955b262546270caa32f26de1554bc8ae4863731764767.png)

Navigation Buttons. In this section, you can customize the text and style of the navigation buttons.

1. Next Button Text and Submit Button Text. You can rename the "Next" and "Submit" buttons.
2. Show the Back button. The Back button returns the user to the previous page of the form. Select this option to make the button available to users.
3. You can also change the style of the navigation buttons: the size, background color, font size and color, border width, color, and style, and the corner radius.

![Navigation Buttons settings with Next and Submit labels, Back button option, size, background, font, text and border colors, border style and corner radius beside the form canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7a47022106fd82ff9621e8fc0f9e8ea13b8720d8d12931cf2b0fb2d0d5b6c6c6.png)
Review the full button settings, including the corner radius at the bottom. The canvas shows the Submit button for this one-page form.

**Choice Buttons.** These settings apply to choice fields displayed as buttons. You can change the style of the buttons: the size, background color, font size and color, border width, color, and style, and the corner radius.

![Quiz Design → Choice Buttons with size, alignment, font size, text color, border thickness, color and style, corner radius and columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8bd475b392d6c8e138ced4450a5528cb2ce523b60871a8caa119b70f6d9b4781.png)

**Settings.** The Settings tab shows the settings for the selected element or page.

## Form Page Content

This section contains the pages of the form and their content. You can add and remove form elements and customize each one.

The upper corner of the page content section has three buttons:

1. The "Delete" button. Deletes the form page after you confirm.
2. The "Set up navigation rules" button. Opens Page Settings, where you can add a rule for moving to the next page or for submitting the form. Navigation rules are described below.
3. The "Duplicate page" button. Copies the page and adds the copy to the form.

Select a page and open **Settings**, or use the page's settings icon. The **Page Settings** panel contains navigation rules. Each rule has an **If** part (conditions) and a **Then** part (actions).

To add the "If" part, click "Add 'AND' Condition Group" and choose the condition, or several conditions, that trigger the action. To add the "Then" part, click "Add Action" and choose the action: "Go to Page" (a page of this form), "Redirect to URL," or "Submit Form." To create another rule, click "Add Rule."

This way, you can set the user's path through the questions and answers of the quiz form. Based on the answers a user selects, they go to the next page, whose question matches their previous answer.

![Page Settings for Page 1 with an empty IF part, the default THEN action, Remove Rule, Add Rule, Close and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/019c461182c43ae3a919d1fecbadc1601791e0e7c9485ffeb0da68c3e0eb7180.png)

The "Form Answer" condition is available for forms and quizzes. It segments users based on their responses in forms.
Filter conditions:

1. Form field selection. Select a specific field in the chosen form, such as name, email, a question, or any other value you collect.
2. Condition:

    - Equals. Selects users whose response in the field exactly matches the value you enter. For example, "Name equals Ivan" finds users who entered the name Ivan.
    - Does Not Equal. Excludes users with the specified response. For example, "Age does not equal 25" excludes everyone who entered 25.
    - Contains. Finds users whose response contains the text you enter. For example, "Comment contains help" finds everyone who mentioned "help" in a comment.
    - **Does Not Contain.** Excludes users whose response contains the text you enter. For example, "Review does not contain negative" excludes everyone who left a negative review.
    - Is Not Empty. Finds users who answered in the field. For example, "Email is not empty" shows everyone who provided an email.
    - Is Empty. Finds users who left the field blank. For example, "Phone is empty" shows everyone who didn't provide a phone number.
3. **Value field.** Enter the value to compare with users' responses.

![Navigation rule condition: Form Answer for How many people are on your team?, with the comparison menu open (Equals, Does Not Equal, Less Than, Greater Than).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/563c1f2157a938ba7ef11f2f04edd3fbc3aca46c83768518804a9ed1e1d4d080.png)

Example: create a **Corporate Training Inquiry** form with two paths.

1. On the first page, ask who is requesting training: **Business owner** or **Team member**.
2. For **Business owner**, add a rule that opens the page asking for the number of employees.
3. For **Team member**, add a rule that opens the contact-details page and skips the employee-count question.
4. Preview both answer paths before publishing.

![Navigation rule: if the team size answer is Greater Than 20, Redirect to URL https://northstar.example.com/team-programs in a new tab.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c26664488f5bc047598c8731a72fdd6ab263686d30ce2a0eecaa29a8f68b0fb8.png)

When you finish setting up the navigation rules, click **Save** to apply them.

Each element on a form page has four buttons in its upper-right corner. Hover over the element to display them.

1. The "Delete" button. Deletes the form element after you confirm.
2. The "Configure item" button. Opens Item Settings for the selected element.
3. The "Duplicate item" button. Copies the element and adds the copy to the form.
4. The "Click and hold to drag" button. Hold this button to drag the item up or down in the list.

![Northstar form editor with the selected team-size question, Required Field checked, minimum 1, maximum 5000 and Save, alongside the complete form canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fa8b669edf3f5f7dbd4c8831193f84fe2392e0fcc6e8913fe60929ed37a1d357.png)
Select the question and open Settings. Save the required-field and value limits; the form remains unpublished while its Published switch is off.

Select an element on the form canvas and open **Settings**. The **Item Settings** panel shows the options available for that element:

1. **Question.** Enter the text of the question that the user sees. The question is also used as the field name in tables and filters.
Click "Use a short name instead" to add a short name. Respondents won't see it. By default, it's used in the responses table and in filters.
2. **Don't show the question text (label) in the form.** Select the checkbox to hide the question text in the form.
3. **Placeholder.** The text shown inside the answer field. It helps users understand what to enter.
4. **Description.** Add a description of the question. To format it with Markdown, click "Formatting Help."
5. **Contact Attribute.** Select an attribute from the list, such as name, city, or comment. The selected attribute is saved to (or updated on) the contact who fills out the form.
6. **Required Field.** The system won't accept the user's response unless this field is filled in. Select the checkbox to make the element required.
7. **Option Type.** Choose the default element type or buttons.
8. Go to the next page as soon as an answer is selected (based on page rules). Select the checkbox so the user moves to the next page right after answering this question. This works only if the page has exactly one "Single Choice" element. Visual elements are ignored, and the navigation buttons are hidden.
9. **Answer Options.** Click "Add Option" and add the answer options the user can choose from.

![Single Choice settings: question What is your main goal for the program?, placeholder, required field, option type and three answer options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/15d3269210497e8b6890b536f07a8aefaeeebfc81770642475eff2cf6a611dfd.png)

Click **Save** to apply the element settings. To check the saved values, select another item and then reopen this one.

Click "Add Element," and a list of all available elements opens.

Add new elements from the list. The AXL platform offers a wide range of elements in three groups: Contact Info, Form Fields, and Visual Elements.

![Complete Add Element menu with Contact Info, Form Fields and Visual Elements, including Single Choice, Multiple Choice, File Upload and Video.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5343223a66736bb71f8074a514a0806ca870fd27ee5bf1bdc5a21fe45e3c2cb8.png)
Use Add Element to choose a contact field, form input or visual element.

## List of Form Pages

This section shows all the pages of the form. To add a page, click "Add Page."

## Automation

On the Automation tab, you set up the form's automation. Its trigger, **Form Completed**, fires when someone submits the form or quiz, wherever it is embedded. Connect the steps that should follow, for example a **Condition** on the answers and an email with the result. A submission with an email or phone number creates or updates the contact in your CRM. To learn how to build an automation, see "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)."

![Form Automation tab with the step palette, Form Completed connected to Send Email, and the Inactive toggle.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b6d77dff5dd7186119807fc3ec473ee97fa45ff4bbc69b548510d0cbd3cdb7b0.png)

## Responses

Open **Responses** to review submitted answers. Start with an individual response to check what the visitor entered, then use the table and filters to compare responses. Previewing a form and submitting a response are separate steps.

The list of responses shows the following information:

1. Contact. The linked CRM contact, when available. Click the name to open the contact card if your account has CRM access. A dash means no contact is linked to that response.
2. Date Submitted. The exact date and time the user submitted the form.
3. Form Questions. These appear as several columns, one for each question in the form. Each column shows the user's answer to that question, so you can see how every user answered each question. This is the main source of data for understanding how users answered.
4. Actions:

    - Preview button. Opens the filled-out form as the user saw it, including all their answers.
    - Delete button. Deletes a specific user's response from the table after you confirm. Use it to remove spam, test, or incorrect responses.

![Responses for Northstar Executive Program Intake with twelve completed answers, name and email columns, team sizes from 48 to 420, and preview and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8bf88d10319452c509fe35ec297fe006176e08c21fc7428666a552e63205a323.png)
Read each question column alongside Date Submitted. Use the eye action to open a completed response.

At the top of the page, you'll find a search bar and filters. Use them to find a response quickly.

1. Search. Search free text by keyword.
2. Click "Add Filter" and select a filter from the list:

    - Contact. Shows only the responses from the selected contact.
    - Advanced Filter. Build combinations of conditions to select responses. A "Filter Conditions" panel opens, where you define the conditions for the list of responses. For more about filter conditions, see "[Filters & Search Criteria](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)."
    - Deleted. Includes columns for questions that were removed from the form, so you can read their earlier answers. It does not restore deleted response records.
    - **Response Date.** Shows responses submitted within a date range. Select the range.
    - **Course.** Show responses associated with the selected course.
    - **Course Steps.** After selecting a course, narrow the responses to its selected steps. Choose a course first to enable this filter.

![Northstar Responses table with Add Filter open: Advanced Filter, Contact, Course, Course Steps, Deleted and Response Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5654fe0887cf6fbce066ebf8cd232b8ffaac3ae669d585c67ff537cc5f049cb9.png)
Choose a course before Course Steps. Deleted adds removed question columns; Response Date limits the response period.

In the upper-right corner, open **Export Responses to…** and choose **XLSX** or **CSV**. This starts an export of the responses so you can analyze them outside AXL.

Wait for the export notification to finish. When the file is ready, open **Action** in that notification and choose **Download**.

**Check the complete form.** Preview every answer path, required-field rule, and completion message. Publish the version you intend to share, open its direct link, and submit a test response. Return to **Responses** and check that the answers and linked contact are correct. If you changed an already published form, publish the new version before repeating this check.

---

# Website Traffic Analytics

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/website-traffic-analytics

> See where your website visitors come from and what they do, and build funnels to track conversions and drop-offs.

Use **Website Analytics** to review recorded traffic and selected conversion events. Set the reporting period and scope before comparing websites or traffic sources; counts from different periods or filters are not directly comparable.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Website Traffic Analytics

Site Funnels

## Website Traffic Analytics

1. Open **Sites → Website Analytics**.
2. Set the **Date Range** and choose **Group by Period**.
3. Choose a tab such as **Traffic Sources** or **Devices**. Use **Group By** to organize the table by the dimensions you want to compare, then read the chart together with the table.

![Website Analytics General tab with a daily visits chart for October 14–20, 2026 and the date, period, affiliate, conversion, and grouping controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a1000ac4331cb4bd97335a4bb74b60daaec55a9867e0c9838b19a3931d236423.png)
Choose the reporting period and grouping before comparing the chart and table.

Tabs at the top of the page:

- General. Overall traffic analytics.
- Traffic Sources. Where visitors come from.
- Geography. The countries and cities your visitors come from.
- Devices. The devices visitors use to open your websites.
- UTM Parameters. Visit sources by the UTM parameters you add to the page address. UTM parameters show exactly which ad or link brought a visitor to your website, so you can evaluate individual campaign elements (such as banners and email broadcasts).
- Site Funnels. Create funnels for website analytics and track visitor behavior to increase conversions to leads. You can see at which step of the order process or form completion visitors most often drop off. This tab is described in more detail below.

The filter bar has these options:

- Date Range. Set the period you want to see data for.
- Group by Period. Choose "Day," "7 Days," or "30 Days." This sets how data is grouped within the selected date range. Instead of showing every individual record, the data is grouped by the period you choose.
- Affiliate Program. View traffic by affiliate program. Choose "Yes" to analyze only affiliate program traffic, "No" to exclude it, or "Any" to see all traffic.
- Conversion. Choose an action from the list: Form Submitted, Webinar Registration, Added to Cart, Chatbot Registration, Purchase, Order Created, Contact Created, or Order Paid. This focuses analytics on the actions you treat as goals (conversions) and shows how many visitors performed a specific action on your website.
- Group By. Select one or more dimensions to organize the table, such as page, traffic source, country, or UTM parameter. Change their order to change the grouping hierarchy, then expand a group to inspect the next level. Grouping changes how the recorded data is broken down; it is not a separate website or page selector.

Below is a table with the traffic numbers:

- Date. The date of the visitor's action. The values in this column change depending on the grouping you select, such as traffic sources, geography, or devices.
- Visits. A visit is a session on your website. The session cookie lasts 30 minutes and is extended when AXL receives tracking activity. This column counts sessions, so one visitor can generate several visits.
- Page Views. A page view is a page a visitor opens during a single session. This column shows the number of page views, including repeat views.
- Visitors. This column counts unique visitor identifiers, rather than page views. AXL uses a browser cookie that lasts 30 days to recognize a returning visitor. Another browser or device, or cleared cookies, can make the same person count as a different visitor.
- New Visitors. A new visitor is a browser that arrives without an existing AXL visitor identifier. This includes a first visit, another browser or device, or a visit after the identifying cookie has expired or been cleared. The column shows new visitors for the selected period and their percentage of all visitors.
- Bounces. A bounce is a short, single-page visit with a recorded duration under 15 seconds. Opening another page in the same visit removes the bounce. This column shows the number of bounces and their percentage of visits.
- Avg. Load Time. The average time it takes a page to load.
- Avg. Time. The average time a visitor spends on your website.

![Website Analytics table with seven date rows and the visits, page views, visitors, new visitors, and bounces totals: 838 visits, 1,746 page views, 818 visitors.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/611eaa89e8b2674f85bef5ee5e6d66f4df1811ce44d32e8596d9b2d8d8df303d.png)
Example traffic table. The report also includes average load time and average time columns to the right.

## Site Funnels

A site funnel compares a sequence of visitor events, such as visiting an offer page, creating an order, and paying for it. Use it to locate the stage where progression falls; the numbers show where to investigate, not why a visitor left.

Open **Site Funnels** and click **Create Funnel**.

![Site Funnels list showing Northstar Enrollment Funnel with three stages, Create Funnel, Edit, and Delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/44a4146a936d394d21efcd39da6491cd2b213f21d48db6736fc57941623f056f.png)
The saved example has three stages. Open its name to view the funnel report.

Enter a descriptive name, such as **Northstar Enrollment Funnel**, then click **Add Stage**. Define the stages in the order you want to analyze.

![New Funnel form with a Northstar name, a complete Program page visit stage with the Northstar Academy website, the Leadership page and the Page Visited event, and Add Stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cb55a89e9fb5bd96a986a7c6e09950151440ba6c70452b09431f085a45b2c656.png)
One-stage setup example. Use Add Stage to add the order and purchase stages before creating the three-stage funnel shown below.

A form for the stage appears below. Fill out the fields:

1. Name. Enter a name for the funnel stage.
2. Website. Select the website where you want to track visitor actions. To learn how to create a website on the AXL platform, read "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
3. Page. Select a page from the list.
4. Event. Select the event the visitor performs on the page.

    - **Page Visited.** A visitor opens a specific page on your website (for example, the homepage, a product page, or a contact page).
    - **Form Submitted.** A visitor fills out and submits a form on your website (for example, a contact form or a newsletter signup form).
    - **Registered for Webinar.** A visitor registers to attend a webinar.
    - **Added to Cart.** A visitor adds a product or service to the shopping cart of an online store. This is an important step toward a purchase. If many people add items to their cart but don't complete the purchase, there may be a problem in the checkout process.
    - **Signed Up via Chatbot.** A visitor signs up to interact with your chatbot.
    - **Purchase.** A visitor completes a purchase.
    - **Order Created.** A visitor creates an order in an online store but hasn't paid for it yet. This is the step before payment, and it lets you analyze where visitors stop.
    - **Contact Created.** A visitor leaves contact information, and their details are added to your CRM.
    - **Order Paid.** A visitor successfully pays for an order.
    - **Order Refunded.** A recorded order-payment refund event. Use this stage to compare refunds with the other events in your funnel; it does not represent merely opening or requesting a return.
    - **Form or Quiz Submitted.** A visitor fills out and submits a form or quiz on your website.
    - **Deal Won.** A deal with a customer is closed successfully.
    - **Deal Lost.** A deal with a customer wasn't closed (for example, the customer declined the service).
    - **Affiliate Link Clicked.** A visitor clicks a link placed by your affiliate and lands on your website.
    - **Trial Subscription Purchased.** A recorded paid-order event marked as a subscription trial. A trial may be free or paid according to the product settings; this event name does not promise a free trial.
    - **Meeting Booked.** A recorded meeting booking event.

Add as many stages as you need. When you're done, click "Create."

The funnel you created appears in the list. The list shows:

1. Name. The name of the funnel. Click it to open the funnel details.
2. Stages. The number of stages in the funnel.
3. Actions. Two icon buttons are available:
Edit (pencil icon). Click it to make changes to the funnel.
Delete (trash icon). Click it to delete the funnel.

Click a funnel name to open its details. On the page that opens, you'll see:

1. Filters at the top:

    - Date. Set the period you want to see data for.
    - Group By. Choose how to group data over time: "Days," "Weeks," "Months," or "No Grouping."
    - Same Session. Turn this on to restrict every later funnel step to visitors who also appear in the first step for the selected filters and period. The report counts distinct visitors at each step. This setting does not establish that their actions happened in one session or in the displayed step order.
    - Entry UTM Parameters. Filter the data to events from contacts who first came to your website through a particular UTM parameter. Choose a value from the list of entry UTM parameters.
2. Charts with visual statistics for each stage of the funnel.
3. A table with:

    - **Sessions**. In this funnel table, the number is the count of distinct visitor identifiers recorded for the stage within the selected filters and period. It differs from the session count in the general traffic report.
    - **Conversions**. The percentages compare the stage count with the first stage and the preceding stage. Hover over each percentage to identify its comparison. These ratios compare recorded counts; they do not prove that individual visitors completed the stages in order.
    - **Drop-Offs**. When the next stage has fewer visitors, the report shows the difference and its percentage of the current stage. A zero difference does not prove that everyone followed the same path, and a positive difference does not establish why someone left.
    - **Avg. Order/Sales**. For a **Purchase** stage, the report shows the average recorded payment amount and the total payment amount. Other event types, including **Order Paid**, show a dash in these amount columns.

![Northstar Enrollment Funnel report for October 2026 with date and Same Session controls, a three-stage chart, and a table showing 1,285 page visit sessions, 78 order sessions, and 48 purchase sessions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/78a2da59122e15c5b076286fe69572779381dd2ee37dac00714b9fdeb06b5ca8.png)
The three-stage example reports Page Visited, Order Created, and Purchase for the selected period.

**Check the funnel.** Open its details, set the date range, and check the selected grouping and **Same Session** option. A useful starting example is **Page Visited → Order Created → Purchase** for the same sales journey. Compare the stage counts before changing the page, then repeat with the same settings after the change.

---

# Conversions and Advanced Website Tracking

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/conversions-and-advanced-work-with-websites

> Use the built-in AXLWebsite events to send conversions to Facebook Pixel when visitors submit a form or pay.

Use `window.AXLWebsite` to listen for form and checkout events on AXL pages. This is an advanced integration task: start by logging the events on a test page before sending anything to your analytics service.

Select a section to jump to its description:

Description of the AXLWebsite Object

Example 1: Conversion When a Form Is Submitted

Example 2: Conversion at the Start of Payment (Click the "Pay" Button)

Example 3: Conversion on Successful Payment

## Description of the AXLWebsite Object

The object is available as `window.AXLWebsite`. Add listeners after it has been initialized on the page. To inspect events, add `?debug=true` to an address with no query string, or `&debug=true` if the address already has one, then open the browser console.

Place listeners in the page or site integration code, depending on whether they should run on one page or all pages. Register a listener once, and make sure the destination analytics library is loaded before calling it.

## Event Types

- `FormSubmit`: the page form was submitted; receives form data.
- `CheckoutStarted`: the visitor started checkout through a payment control; receives checkout data when available.
- `CheckoutInit`: checkout was initialized.
- `CheckoutSuccess`: the checkout success flow ran; receives checkout data.
- `CheckoutFail`: checkout reported an error; the payload includes `error` and `data`.

Log the payload in your test flow before reading its fields. A click or CheckoutStarted event is not proof of a successful payment.

```
if (window.AXLWebsite) {
  window.AXLWebsite.addEventListener("FormSubmit", function (data) {
    console.log("FormSubmit", data);
  });
}
```

AXL can already send Meta Lead, InitiateCheckout, and Purchase events through its configured integration. Do not add a second sender for the same event without a deliberate deduplication plan. The examples below illustrate listener syntax; confirm the event payload and existing tracking before adapting them.

## Start a Custom Event Automation from Your Code

A page's automation can start from **Custom Event**. To send that event from your own script, for example when a visitor finishes watching an embedded video, call `runCustomEvent` with the same event name you entered in the trigger:

```
window.AXLWebsite.runCustomEvent('video-watched');
```

**Important:**

- The name must match the trigger's **Event Name**; capital letters do not matter.
- The event starts the automation only for a visitor the site already knows as a contact, for example after they submitted a form or signed in. For an anonymous visitor nothing happens.
- The event reaches the automation of the page it was sent from. See "[Website Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario)".

## Example 1: Conversion When a Form Is Submitted

For a custom Lead listener, the narrower `AXLWebsite.disableMetaLead` flag disables AXL’s automatic browser Lead event. Set it before a form can submit. It does not disable server-side Conversions API events.

```
if (window.AXLWebsite) {
  window.AXLWebsite.disableMetaLead = true;
  window.AXLWebsite.addEventListener("FormSubmit", function (data) {
    if (typeof window.fbq !== "function") return;
    window.fbq("track", "Lead");
  });
}
```

### Example 2: Conversion at the Start of Payment (Click the "Pay" Button)

```
if (window.AXLWebsite) {
  window.AXLWebsite.addEventListener("CheckoutStarted", function (data) {
    console.log("Checkout started", data);
    // Inspect this payload and the built-in Meta tracking first.
    // Do not send a second InitiateCheckout event for the same order.
  });
}
```

The built-in Meta InitiateCheckout event uses the order ID for deduplication. CheckoutStarted can occur before an order exists; do not assume this event provides a valid order ID for a replacement sender.

### Example 3: Conversion on Successful Payment

```
if (window.AXLWebsite) {
  window.AXLWebsite.addEventListener("CheckoutSuccess", function (data) {
    console.log("Checkout success", data);
    // Verify payment identity and existing Purchase tracking
    // before adding a custom analytics sender.
  });
}
```

The built-in Meta Purchase helper uses a payment ID as its event ID. A custom replacement must preserve the intended payment-level identity and account for server-side events. Avoid copying an unverified order object into a Purchase call.

**Verify the integration.** On a test page, submit one test form and run the supported checkout test flow. Confirm the listener fires at the intended stage, inspect the payload, and check that the analytics service receives one intended event rather than duplicates.

---

# Block Page Editor Overview

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/page-editor-overview

> Learn how the block page editor works for sites, courses, and libraries: templates, elements, settings, and the toolbar.

AXL has its own website builder, so you don't need third-party services to create web pages.

Click a section below to jump to its description:
Page EditorPage Templates and ElementsElement SettingsToolbar

Page Editor

Go to "Sites" → "Sites". Open a website you created earlier or create a new one. To learn how to add a website, read the article "[How to Create a Website](https://docs.axl.tech/how-to-create-a-website)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/0sTFzMOsBEaRKvMuqGDE-A.png)

Then open the "Pages" tab. Click the page name or the "Edit" button to open the page and add content to it.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QMZTA28RS0K2cfV_KO2QwQ.png)

The page opens on the "Design" tab. This article describes the legacy editor (v1). In it, click "Create New Block".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wEyMPAX2uku8SLd9iitJdA.png)

Page Templates and Elements

Page design matters, and building a page from scratch can be hard. That's why we've prepared many templates to make it easier.
You can use an existing template or build a unique page by adding individual elements.
To start working in the page editor, click "Create New Block". In the window that opens, choose the type of block to create: blank, video, completed order, columns, menu, cover with a title, about the project, and so on. Templates for that type of block appear on the right. Click a template to add it to the page as the first block. You can then edit it.
To learn more about each block template, read the articles "[Block Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-block)", "[Video Block Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/video-block-settings)", "[Column Block Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/columns-block-settings)", "[Cover with Title Block Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/cover-and-titles-block-settings)", and others.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/uSOEpKYv-ku-FqAeSeNClg.png)

You can also add individual elements to the page. To do this, select "Blank Section" and click "Add Element". Choose the element you want. Each element comes in several styles. Click the style you like and drag it onto the page.
To learn more about each element, read the articles "[Elements](https://docs.axl.tech/elements)", "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)", "[Image Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)", "[Video Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-video)", and others.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/c1MzdDw3u0STdY0zO6pkOg.png)

After you add elements to the page, adjust their settings.
Select the whole block to edit it. The block settings panel opens on the right. Here you can change the size, background, layout, and more. For more information about block settings, read the article "[Column Block Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/columns-block-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ON_xcpxMp0icu7VDAxdF0g.png)

Then click an individual element inside the block to select it. Its settings open on the right, so you can edit every element on the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QNwTXHzMp0mC1rw2AKO8rw.png)

The panel on the right is a toolbox for editing each element on the page. It contains common settings (such as text color, size, and padding) and settings specific to the element. Each element has its own article. For more information, read the articles "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)", "[Video Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-video)", "[Image Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)", and others.

# 
Element Settings

In the right sidebar, under "Settings", you can see the element's name and its path if the element is nested inside another element.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/FRnnQ9faqkiG7IWL0rfqtA.png)

The settings are grouped into tabs:

1. Element Settings. General settings for the element. They are different for each element.
2. Fields. Customize each field of the element.
3. Positioning. Adjust the size, alignment, and margins of the element. For more information, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
4. Style. Choose the background, color, field style, and more.
5. Conditional Show/Hide. Set the conditions under which the element is hidden from page visitors. For more information, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
6. Advanced Settings. Insert custom code. For more information, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/F4a2M3vBvkSazDL14AIvlQ.png)

For detailed descriptions of the settings, read the article for each element, such as "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)", "[Image Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)", and "[Video Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-video)".

# 
Toolbar

Next to the name of the "Design" tab, a switch lets you choose the page editor:

- v1. The legacy editor. You build the page from ready-made templates and elements, as this article describes.
- v2. The AI editor. You build the page with AI, or write your own code to create a unique page.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/MGMnXLoM8kOAKuB_LPHK3g.png)

At the top of the editor, there is a toolbar:

1. Text menu. Click the menu icon (three horizontal lines) to open a text menu. It repeats the toolbar buttons as text items.
2. Save. After you change the page, save your changes.
3. Preview. Preview the page before you publish it.
4. "Undo" button. Click it to go back one step and cancel your last action.
5. "Redo" button. Click it to go forward one step and apply the action you canceled.
6. "Copy" button. Select an element and click the button to copy it. Shortcut: Ctrl+C (Cmd+C on a Mac).
7. "Paste" button. Select where you want to paste the copied element, then click the button. Shortcut: Ctrl+V (Cmd+V on a Mac).
8. "Delete" button. Select an element on the page and click the button to delete it.
9. "Duplicate" button. Select an element on the page and click the button to create a copy of it. Shortcut: Ctrl+D (Cmd+D on a Mac).

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/giXVYstUS0mZ0M5tGLI00Q.png)

The toolbar also has these buttons:

1. "Desktop" button. Switch to the view for computers and laptops.
2. "Tablet" button. Click it to switch to the view for tablets.
3. "Mobile" button. Click it to switch to the view for mobile devices.
4. "Popups" button. Create popups on your page.
5. "Add Element" button. To add a specific element, click this button and choose an option from the list. Each element has its own article that describes its functions.
6. Settings. Select an element and click "Settings" to change it. For details, read the articles about page elements.
7. "Enter Full Screen" button. Click it to expand the page editor to full screen. Click it again ("Exit Full Screen") to return to the normal view.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/cET1ACVihUqaHydI6F7vVw.png)

---

# Elements

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/elements

> Learn how to add elements to a page in the page editor and where to find each element's settings.

A page element is a component of a web page. Elements include text and graphics, as well as videos, images, icons, and buttons. Add the elements you need to the page and customize them in the menu on the right.

# 
How to Add an Element

To add an element, click "Add Element" in the top right corner of the page editor.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/z79WyoA4b0ept4jQEgnDyw.png)

In the pop-up window, choose the element you want from the 16 available options.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5XwvP_MKmkKJ8jNMEK_zoA.png)

Click an element to see several variations of it in different styles.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/8CDFNimTmECiSCQ8TFzt-A.png)

Click and hold the variation you want, then drag it onto the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/lxWH9P1DhEisA0lzZAcwZg.png)

After you add an element to the page, set it up.
Select the entire block, or click an element inside the block, to edit it. A toolbar opens on the right with the settings for that element. Settings are specific to each element, but some repeat. For example, text-based elements (text, heading, form, button) share settings such as text color, font, and padding.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VhJb0rd_oEma-nfUeHOmHA.png)

Interactive elements are the form, button, and icon. They differ from other elements because visitors can click them. These elements have a "Click Actions" setting: the action that happens on the page when a visitor clicks the button, icon, or form. A click action can take the visitor to another page, to checkout for a product, submit a form, and so on.

Each element and its settings are described in detail in its own article. See the "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)" section.

---

# Block Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-block

> Learn what blocks are, how to create one in the page editor, and which block types are available.

The Block element is a universal container for other elements, such as text, images, videos, and buttons. Blocks organize the content on your page and make it more structured and easier to use.
A website page is made up of several blocks. Blocks can differ in design and in the number of elements they contain. The first block on a page usually looks brighter and grabs more attention than the rest. Blocks split your content into logical parts, which makes the page easier to navigate and understand.
You can combine different elements inside a block to create a variety of layouts and designs. Blocks are easy to move, copy, or delete, which makes editing the page simpler.

Click a section to jump to its description:
Page EditorHow to Create a BlockBlock Types

# 
Page Editor

You create blocks in the page editor. The page editor is available in the "Sites" and "Memberships" sections.

Open the "Sites" section and choose one of the websites you've already created. Click the website name.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pvg3655UB0OYGyDcD9W_cA.png)

# 
How to Create a Block

Open the page editor and click "Create New Block".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vJuP6JhFL0WgFomrJUDjug.png)

A window opens. Choose a block from the options provided: Blank Section, Text, Cover and Titles, Columns, Video, or Other.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/mY_c6BBSuESIne_W9K-TJA.png)

Next, edit the elements and set up the block. Select the entire block, or click an element inside the block, to edit it. A toolbar opens on the right with the settings for that element.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_D6c_6Ss0k-uXJtRiRlmjQ.png)

# 
Block Types

There are several types of blocks on the AXL platform:

1. Blank Section. A block with no content, where you add elements to the page yourself. It lets you set up the page layout manually and combine other blocks as you like. Use it when you need to leave space for future content or build a unique design.
2. Video. A block for video content, such as tutorial videos or webinars. Video helps visitors take in information visually and understand the topic better. Use it on course pages, in program descriptions, or in promotional materials.
3. Order Complete. A block that tells the customer their order went through. It confirms that the transaction or order is complete. Use it on the page customers see after a successful payment.
4. Columns. A block that splits content into several columns, which makes it better structured and easier to scan. It lets you present several pieces of information in a compact format. Use it whenever you need multiple columns on a page.
5. Menu. A block with a navigation menu for moving between the pages of your site. It helps visitors find the information they need. Place it at the top or side of the site to navigate courses, sections, and additional materials.
6. Cover and Titles. A block with a large image and a title at the start of the page. It creates a first impression and grabs visitors' attention. Use it on the home page of a course or site to showcase your product.
7. About Project. A block with information about your educational platform or project. It tells visitors about your goals, mission, and values. Use it on "About Us" pages or in a project description to tell the story of your company.
8. Advantages. A block that lists the key benefits of your project. It helps visitors understand what value they get by choosing this course. Use it on course pages and in promotional materials.
9. Page Dividers. A block that visually separates content on the page. It improves navigation and makes the content easier to read. Use it on long pages to separate topics or sections.
10. Text. A block for text content: information, instructions, descriptions, and so on. Use it anywhere on the page where you need to provide text.
11. Timer. A block that adds a countdown timer to the page. It's one of the editor's interactive features. A timer creates urgency, which can encourage purchases. Use it for promotional events or special offers.
12. Forms. A block for forms that collect data, such as course registrations. It lets you collect details like name and email from visitors. Use it on registration pages, newsletter subscription pages, or feedback forms.
13. Payment Forms and Upsell Forms. A block that lets customers pay and also offers additional products or services. It increases the average purchase amount by suggesting extra courses or products. Use it on order confirmation or payment pages.
14. Footers. The footer is the area at the bottom of every page, below the main content. It can contain company information, links, and contact details. It gives visitors important information and links to pages such as the privacy policy and terms of use, which makes navigation easier.
15. AXL Trademark. A symbol that identifies a company or brand. A trademark helps your audience recognize your products and services and tell them apart from other companies. It helps you establish your brand and protect it from counterfeiting or use by other companies. It also builds trust, because customers recognize a trademark and associate certain qualities with it.
16. Product Sale Cards. Visually designed blocks with information about selling a specific product or service. They usually include the product name, image, price, description, and a button to buy or learn more. Product sale cards present your products clearly, help visitors quickly get information and make a choice, and boost conversions by turning website visitors into buyers.
17. Direct Message. A block for posting customer reviews. It builds trust in your product through social proof. Use it on course pages or in the main sections to attract new users.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/jvBh7bY1JUW2AweaPKSmVg.png)

For a detailed description of the settings, see these articles: "[Cover and Titles Block Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/cover-and-titles-block-settings)", "[Video Block Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/video-block-settings)", and "[Columns Block Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/columns-block-settings)".

---

# Video Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/video-block-settings

> Set up the Video block on a site page: size, padding, background, and container width.

The "Video" block adds video content to a page, such as commercials, educational videos, or webinars. Video helps visitors understand a topic more easily. You can use the block on course pages, in program description sections, or in promotional materials.

To add a block to a site page, open the page editor. Click the "Create New Block" button and select the "Video" block. Several block options in different styles are available. Click the one you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rCJGbjnjiEKnBEIh9DdzbA.png)

Select the entire block to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Iqb-IQvlpkaS64Qz8MGa8w.png)

# 
General Settings

Block Size. Use "Height Mode" to choose how tall the block is: Automatic, Full Height, or Manual. With Automatic, the block height matches the elements inside it. Full Height matches the height of a laptop screen. With Manual, you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the "Height" field. To reset the height and return to Automatic, click the cross.
In the "Vertical Alignment" list, choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: Start, Center, End, Space Between, or Space Around.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/KCvn8kEGs0mBTYHXb6W2zg.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's edges and the elements inside it. Use this when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Ri4maiMJckO84HTHS8gTCg.png)

Background. Here you can change the block's background color and add a background image. To add an image, turn on "Background Image". More settings appear: "Image" (choose the picture), "Size" (Fill, Original Size, Cover, Contain, or a percentage from 10% to 100%), and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1u7tQhgocEmhL0jO3A4O4w.png)

Container. Here you can set the width of the elements inside the block with the "Width" option: Automatic or Full Width. You can also set the container's background color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/z6VB6LHYDEiJkfJVG44qdw.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/4nQF_qoAxkylg9ixEnwtlA.png)

# 
Conditional Show / Hide

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show / Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/29hXSR4f0U6wkpGUz25MoQ.png)

For more about the settings of the Video element inside the block, see the article "[Video Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-video)."

---

# Columns Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/columns-block-settings

> Set up the Columns block on a site page: size, padding, background, and container width.

The "Columns" block divides content into several columns so the page is better structured and easier to read. It lets you present a lot of information in a compact format. Use it to create multiple columns on a page.

To add a block to a site page, open the page editor. Click the "Create New Block" button and select the "Columns" block. Several block options in different styles are available. Click the one you want.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/-Sx5bHOxuEq-Z-0t_Hqh6g.png)

Select the entire block to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_D6c_6Ss0k-uXJtRiRlmjQ.png)

# 
General Settings

Block Size. Use "Height Mode" to choose how tall the block is: Automatic, Full Height, or Manual. With Automatic, the block height matches the elements inside it. Full Height matches the height of a laptop screen. With Manual, you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the "Height" field. To reset the height and return to Automatic, click the cross.
In the "Vertical Alignment" list, choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: Start, Center, End, Space Between, or Space Around.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/t1pRl9qkAkOcGruygCddCg.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's edges and the elements inside it. Use this when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vC9XZU8uSEqR4t5skzcNIA.png)

Background. Here you can change the block's background color and add a background image. To add an image, turn on "Background Image". More settings appear: "Image" (choose the picture), "Size" (Fill, Original Size, Cover, Contain, or a percentage from 10% to 100%), and "Repeat".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UaOccL7l70iZKGYwjYQaSA.png)

Container. Here you can set the width of the elements inside the block with the "Width" option: Automatic or Full Width. You can also set the container's background color.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/e9Zhf-u9j0G5-TFj26CE1w.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yh2GN15V3UGzGIba3X3zZw.png)

# 
Conditional Show / Hide

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show / Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eXu-ZvKPJUG5XEPTqbW0hQ.png)

For more about the column settings inside the block, see the article "[Column Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)."

---

# Cover and Titles Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/cover-and-titles-block-settings

> Customize the Cover and Titles block: height, vertical alignment, padding, background, and container width.

The "Cover and Titles" block is a large image with a title at the start of the page. It creates a first impression and grabs visitors' attention. Use it on the home page of your course or website to present your product.

To add the block to a website page, open the page editor and click "Create New Block". Select the "Cover and Titles" block. You'll see several variations in different styles. Click the one you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/RHdFJktwzEGa_azNRU1-tw.png)

Select the entire block to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/WlfeKpF0O0C5h-AYBJ73sw.png)

# 
General Settings

Block Size. Change the height of the block with Height Mode: Automatic, Full Height, or Manual. Automatic sizes the block to fit the elements inside it. Full Height makes the block at least as tall as the browser window. Manual lets you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the Height field. To go back to automatic height, click the X to reset the setting.
In Vertical Alignment, choose Start, Center, End, Space Between, or Space Around.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/untxoImEDkeAb-lErFLoqQ.png)

Padding. Change the space between the edges of the block and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and needs to be moved away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/gtWX9y576UGSEjh6q3yotA.png)

Background. Change the block's background color and add a background image. For an image, you can also choose the image, set its size (Fill, Original Size, Cover, Contain, or a percentage from 10% to 100%), set how it repeats, and set its position inside the block.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nmoxkrGgjk-OfReuKiiTCQ.png)

Container. Change the width of the elements inside the block: Automatic or Full Width. You can also set the background color of the container.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/GieNJkAlE02DhO1HEl8Nzg.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For more about the settings in this section, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5xL2KCRQfki7vGR13_YK9w.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more about the settings in this section, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/D9vv4nKnMEGChYYWbSPz6g.png)

---

# Text Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/text-block-settings

> Set up the Text block on a site page: size, padding, background, and container width.

The "Text" block holds text content: information, instructions, descriptions, and so on. You can place it anywhere on the page where you need text.

To add a block to a site page, open the page editor. Click the "Create New Block" button and select the "Text" block. Several block options in different styles are available. Click the one you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rDKYpYd4EUGpcGPf3muyRg.png)

In the list of blocks that opens, select the "Text" block. Then adjust the block settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vOBdUhNo_0uLhuZ9IMlI1g.png)

Select the block to open its settings. The toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/hDIvCjhi-UqYik8LPVKxHg.png)

# 
General Settings

Block Size. Use "Height Mode" to choose how tall the block is: Automatic, Full Height, or Manual. With Automatic, the block height matches the elements inside it. Full Height matches the height of a laptop screen. With Manual, you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the "Height" field. To reset the height and return to Automatic, click the cross.

In the "Vertical Alignment" list, choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: Start, Center, End, Space Between, or Space Around.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's edges and the elements inside it. Use this when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Here you can change the block's background color and add a background image. To add an image, turn on "Background Image". More settings appear: "Image" (choose the picture), "Size" (Fill, Original Size, Cover, Contain, or a percentage from 10% to 100%), and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Here you can set the width of the elements inside the block with the "Width" option: Automatic or Full Width. You can also set the container's background color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QGx_8o9k7ECJBsqCHeniFA.png)

# 
Conditional Show / Hide

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show / Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

---

# "About Project" Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/about-project-block-settings

> Learn how to add the "About Project" block to a page and adjust its size, padding, background, and container.

Select the "About Project" block from the list of blocks available for building a website page. Then edit the page: replace the image and text, add a description of your company, and adjust the block settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/m3zjBJYj20uNu0qbb4N0wQ.png)

Select the entire block to open its settings. The settings panel opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rp3AnQp4HkiyCC6JlTA7Sg.png)

General Settings

## 

Block Size. Change the block's "Height Mode" to "Automatic," "Full Height," or "Manual." With "Automatic," the block's height matches the size of the elements inside it. "Full Height" matches the height of a laptop screen. With "Manual," you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the extra "Height" field. Click the cross to reset the setting and return to "Automatic" height.

In the "Vertical Alignment" field, choose where the elements sit inside the block: "Start," "Center," "End," "Space Between," or "Space Around."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's borders and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the block's edge and needs to move away from it.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Change the block's background color and add a background image. When you add an image, more image settings appear: image selection, image size (choose from options such as Cover, Contain, 50%, and 100%), image repeat, and the image's position inside the block.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Change the width of the elements inside the block: "Automatic" or "Full Width." You can also set the block's background color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/hEeXuJ2UKE2SMUE_b4dlkg.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/-Z9rTzJsz0Gw3pxqj7GnYQ.png)

To learn more about the settings of each element in the block, read "[Column Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)," "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)," "[Heading Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-heading)," and "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)."

---

# "Order Is Complete" Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/order-is-complete-block-settings

> Learn how to add the "Order Completed" block to a page and adjust its column, padding, background, shadow, and border.

The "Order Completed" block tells customers that their order went through. It confirms that a transaction or order is complete, so you can use it after an order is successfully paid.

To add the block to a website page, open the page editor. Click "Create New Block" and select the "Order Completed" block. Several block options in different styles appear. Click the one you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XW8ANuj-RkGiBUhcjlF5Yg.png)

Select the block's column to open its settings. The settings panel opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M35KI_3FpES0Dq3X3TIx5A.png)

General Settings

## 

Column Settings. Adjust the column's width and shift it to the right on the page.

Content Alignment. Position the column's content vertically or horizontally. You can also align the column's content relative to each other, both vertically and horizontally.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/8JE6Lum-lkWGoA-G7IJ8ZA.png)

Style

Padding. Adjust the space between the column's borders and its content (text, images, and so on). Use it when content sits too close to the column's edge and needs to move away from it.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/6fusSGizH0yFwnl8zakPdQ.png)

Background. Set the column's background. Select the column and choose a background color from the menu on the right. You can also set a background image for the column: add or change the image, choose its size (Cover, Contain, Fill, or a percentage), choose how it repeats, and set its position inside the column.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1EcLozrSy0ahYfjw3TupZg.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the column and adjust its offset, blur, and color.

Border. Customize the border around the column: corner radius (how rounded the corners are), style ("No Border," "Solid," "Dotted," or "Dashed"), color, and width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/aeOMI_Gpokmf0FSARQeG3w.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wufHyLGBmUejS9nEKSCv2g.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1LNwf0-xGkeNpzgZw-33-g.png)

Then edit each element on this page: replace the image, text, and reviews, and set up the "Start Course" buttons.

To learn more about the settings of each element in the block, read "[Column Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)," "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)," "[Heading Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-heading)," "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)," and "[Button Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)."

---

# "Menu" Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/menu-block-settings

> Learn how to add the "Menu" block to a page and adjust its size, padding, background, and container.

The "Menu" block contains a navigation menu for moving between the pages of your website. It helps visitors find the information they need. You can place it at the top or on the side of the website to navigate through courses, sections, and additional materials.

To add the block to a website page, open the page editor. Click "Create New Block" and select the "Menu" block. Several block options in different styles appear. Click the one you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1Za2xEvZ7EWZOWpk1ASNgQ.png)

Select the block's column to open its settings. The settings panel opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YnZk0BWKgUu30G_iDgEpmQ.png)

General Settings

## 

Block Size. Change the block's "Height Mode" to "Automatic," "Full Height," or "Manual." With "Automatic," the block's height matches the size of the elements inside it. "Full Height" matches the height of a laptop screen. With "Manual," you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the extra "Height" field. Click the cross to reset the setting and return to "Automatic" height.

In the "Vertical Alignment" field, choose where the elements sit inside the block: "Start," "Center," "End," "Space Between," or "Space Around."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's borders and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the block's edge and needs to move away from it.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Change the block's background color and add a background image. When you add an image, more image settings appear: image selection, image size (choose from options such as Cover, Contain, 50%, and 100%), image repeat, and the image's position inside the block.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Change the width of the elements inside the block: "Automatic" or "Full Width." You can also set the block's background color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/8ji86cYmwEO1LyyjMga2mA.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

To learn more about the settings of each element in the block, read "[Column Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)," "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)," "[Heading Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-heading)," and "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)."

---

# "Advantages" Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/advantages-block-settings

> Learn how to add the "Advantages" block to a page and adjust its size, padding, background, and container.

The "Advantages" block is for placing user reviews. It builds trust in your product through social proof. Use it on course pages or in the main sections to attract new customers.

To add the block to a website page, open the page editor. Click "Create New Block" and select the "Advantages" block. Several block options in different styles appear. Click the one you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Sb4aFnJThEWQxK3mo5ksJw.png)

Select the entire block to open its settings. The settings panel opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/b0RDed2Z50eBx0MzZEbPSg.png)

General Settings

## 

Block Size. Change the block's "Height Mode" to "Automatic," "Full Height," or "Manual." With "Automatic," the block's height matches the size of the elements inside it. "Full Height" matches the height of a laptop screen. With "Manual," you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the extra "Height" field. Click the cross to reset the setting and return to "Automatic" height.

In the "Vertical Alignment" field, choose where the elements sit inside the block: "Start," "Center," "End," "Space Between," or "Space Around."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's borders and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the block's edge and needs to move away from it.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Change the block's background color and add a background image. When you add an image, more image settings appear: image selection, image size (choose from options such as Cover, Contain, Fill, 50%, and 100%), image repeat, and the image's position inside the block.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Change the width of the elements inside the block: "Automatic" or "Full Width." You can also set the block's background color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/EJzBsLvkz0y5eSKtoSPEMQ.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

To learn more about the settings of each element in the block, read "[Column Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)," "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)," "[Heading Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-heading)," "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)," and "[Button Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)."

---

# Page Dividers Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/page-dividers-block-settings

> Add a Page Dividers block to separate sections of a long page, and set its size, padding, background, and container width.

The "Page Dividers" block helps you visually separate content on a page. It makes navigation easier and the content more readable. Use it on long pages to separate different topics or sections.

To add the block to a site page, open the page editor and click "Create New Block". Select the "Page Dividers" block. You'll see several block options in different styles. Click the variant you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/fj8r1wSTVEW6FIYlj_pDMw.png)

Select the whole block to open its settings. They appear in a panel on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/HBGsOprtgka44MTV7TaTmw.png)

General Settings

## 

Block Size. Use "Height Mode" to set the height of the block: "Automatic", "Full Height", or "Manual". With "Automatic", the block is as tall as the elements inside it. "Full Height" makes the block at least as tall as the visitor's screen. With "Manual", you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the "Height" field that appears. Click the cross to reset the setting to "Automatic".

In the "Vertical Alignment" list, choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: "Start", "Center", "End", "Space Between", or "Space Around".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the edges of the block and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Here you can change the background color of the block and add a background image. Turn on the "Background Image" switch to add one. More image settings appear: the image itself, "Size" ("Fill", "Original Size", "Cover", "Contain", or a percentage from 10% to 100%), and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Here you can set the width of the content inside the block: "Automatic" or "Full Width". You can also set the background color of the container.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QGx_8o9k7ECJBsqCHeniFA.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

For more information about the settings of each element in the block, see the article "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)".

---

# Forms Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/forms-block-settings

> Add a Forms block to collect visitor details, and set up its fields, layout, redirect, labels, and style.

The "Forms" block lets you create forms that collect data from visitors, such as a name and an email address (for example, for course registration). Use it on registration pages, on email signup pages, or in feedback forms.

To add the block to a site page, open the page editor and click "Create New Block". Select the "Forms" block. You'll see several block options in different styles. Click the variant you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/fgz-Nr4GAEKfgAHrnmpHLA.png)

Select the whole block to open its settings. They appear in a panel on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/kXycilvouEGJfXylZMM0UA.png)

Element Settings

## 

Settings. Enter the "Form Name" and the "Message" that visitors see after they submit the form (for example: "Thank you! We've received your submission."). To send visitors to another page after they submit, turn on "Redirect to URL" and enter the address.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/GSgTOSKTA0aOiGeqcXu1WA.png)

Layout. Under "Direction", choose whether the form fields are arranged "Vertical" or "Horizontal".

If you choose "Horizontal", you can also set the "Horizontal Alignment": "Start", "Center", or "End".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5jgyra1OJ0ex-C5e9mCg4g.png)

# 
Fields

Here you can customize the form fields. By default, the form has two fields: "First Name" and "Email". You can remove fields, add new ones, and customize each one. Most settings are the same for every field.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/RvgSXNe7S0mX_KvLsiSCTQ.png)

Field settings:

1. Type. You choose the field type when you add the field (see "Add Field" below). The available types are: Email, First Name, Last Name, Middle Name, Phone Number, Number, Checkbox, Message, Text Input, Text Area, Dropdown, Hidden, and Text.
2. Label. Enter the name of the field. It's displayed outside the field.
3. Placeholder. Enter the hint text shown inside the field. It disappears when the visitor starts typing.
4. Required. Turn on the "Required" switch to make the field mandatory: visitors must fill it in to submit the form. If the switch is off, the field is optional.
5. Attribute. Select an attribute from the list or enter a new one for the field.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Fdqh2zwutUm2kDpb3j7V9g.png)

Add Field. Click this button to add a new field to the form, then choose the field type from the list. The settings for the new field open.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Y-lGdxHr9kC4L62eheo6uw.png)

Positioning

## 

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_HO5rFyeakKHybOCfhHtng.png)

## 
Style

Background. Change the background color of the form or add a background image. When you add an image, more settings appear: the image itself, "Size", and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/iqS5ACc-yE2tgwyQUYiqYg.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the form. You can adjust the shadow offset ("Offset X" and "Offset Y"), the "Blur" (a bright, sharp shadow or a transparent one), and the "Color".

Rounded Corners. Set the "Radius" to round the corners of the whole form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UsKTR48HN0O0KhE-MYvELw.png)

Labels. Labels are the names displayed next to the form fields, such as First Name, Email, or Phone Number. You can change their position ("Top" or "Left"), color, font size, line height, and text alignment ("Left", "Center", or "Right").
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UH6KlwO-hUKyDXZqZmFTPg.png)

Field Style. Customize how the fields look: the background color of the fields, the text color, the font size, the line height, and the text alignment inside the fields (left, center, or right).

Border. Part of Field Style. Customize the border around each field: the "Radius" (rounds the corners), the "Color", and the "Width".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nr9lbvRqXkahyKljWPClcQ.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vUqV9Irq3kmfb-Lis13sUQ.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5YrSD1-IhU-Gm-ylCAyI7Q.png)

For more information about the settings of each element in the block, see the articles "[Button Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)" and "[Form Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-form)".

---

# Timer Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/timer-block-settings

> Settings for the Timer block in the page editor: height, padding, background, and container width.

From the list of blocks that opens, select the Timer block to add it to your page. Then configure the block.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rLaZ1bsOvUaDFa9qRFjWRQ.png)

Select the entire block to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/f8-_Ea9xr0CyeggNIDyh-g.png)

General Settings

## 

Block size. Use "Height Mode" to choose how tall the block is: Automatic, Full Height, or Manual. With Automatic, the block is as tall as the elements inside it. With Full Height, the block fills the height of the screen. With Manual, you set the height yourself in the "Height" field, in pixels. Click the X to reset the setting and return to Automatic.

In "Vertical Alignment", choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: Start, Center, End, Space Between, or Space Around.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's edges and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Change the block's background color or add a background image. When you add an image, more image settings appear: image selection, size (choose Cover, Fill, Contain, 50%, 100%, or another size), repeat, and the position of the image inside the block.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Set the width of the elements inside the block: Automatic or Full Width. You can also set the block's background color here.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/EJzBsLvkz0y5eSKtoSPEMQ.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

For details about the settings of each element in the block, see the articles "[Element Title](https://docs.axl.tech/element-heading)" and "[Element Timer](https://docs.axl.tech/element-timer)".

---

# Payment Forms + Upsell Forms Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/payment-forms-upsell-forms-block-settings

> Add a Payment Forms + Upsell Forms block to take payments and offer extra products, and adjust its size, padding, background, and container.

The "Payment Forms + Upsell Forms" block lets visitors pay and also offers them additional products or services. It raises the average order value by suggesting extra courses or products. Use it on order confirmation or payment pages.

To add the block to a site page, open the page editor and click "Create New Block". Select the "Payment Forms + Upsell Forms" block. You'll see several block options in different styles. Click the variant you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/4CvalPJ9Lkit1kbfd4drig.png)

Select the whole block to open its settings. They appear in a panel on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/y592ldHBBUC7TtXwAIlDaA.png)

General Settings

## 

Block Size. Use "Height Mode" to set the height of the block: "Automatic", "Full Height", or "Manual". With "Automatic", the block is as tall as the elements inside it. "Full Height" makes the block at least as tall as the visitor's screen. With "Manual", you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the "Height" field that appears. Click the cross to reset the setting to "Automatic".

In the "Vertical Alignment" list, choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: "Start", "Center", "End", "Space Between", or "Space Around".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the edges of the block and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Here you can change the background color of the block and add a background image. Turn on the "Background Image" switch to add one. More image settings appear: the image itself, "Size" ("Fill", "Original Size", "Cover", "Contain", or a percentage from 10% to 100%), and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Here you can set the width of the content inside the block: "Automatic" or "Full Width". You can also set the background color of the container.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/uNaTYOLKRUGnV4ftOymucw.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

After that, edit each element in the block: replace the image and text, and set up the buttons.

For more information about the settings of each element in the block, see the articles "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)", "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)", "[Button Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)", and "[Form Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-form)".

---

# Footers Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/footers-block-settings

> Add a Footers block to the bottom of your pages and adjust its size, padding, background, and container width.

The "Footers" block adds a footer: the area at the bottom of each page, below the main content. A footer can include information about your company, links, and contact details. It gives visitors key information and links to pages such as your privacy policy and terms of use, and it makes the site easier to navigate.

To add the block to a site page, open the page editor and click "Create New Block". Select the "Footers" block. You'll see several block options in different styles. Click the variant you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/fLfaDuiYMkWHAnH4NewfPg.png)

Select the whole block to open its settings. They appear in a panel on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/dgVRL1ea_UuKjE4hjFhSAg.png)

General Settings

## 

Block Size. Use "Height Mode" to set the height of the block: "Automatic", "Full Height", or "Manual". With "Automatic", the block is as tall as the elements inside it. "Full Height" makes the block at least as tall as the visitor's screen. With "Manual", you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the "Height" field that appears. Click the cross to reset the setting to "Automatic".

In the "Vertical Alignment" list, choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: "Start", "Center", "End", "Space Between", or "Space Around".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the edges of the block and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Here you can change the background color of the block and add a background image. Turn on the "Background Image" switch to add one. More image settings appear: the image itself, "Size" ("Fill", "Original Size", "Cover", "Contain", or a percentage from 10% to 100%), and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Here you can set the width of the content inside the block: "Automatic" or "Full Width". You can also set the background color of the container.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1v_E7kvvoUSboDr4XRiosw.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

For more information about the settings of each element in the block, see the articles "[Column Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)", "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)", and "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)".

---

# Direct Message Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/direct-message-block-settings

> Add a Direct Message block and set up its columns, positioning, style, and visibility.

The "Direct Message" block is for posting customer reviews. It builds trust in your product through social proof. Use it on course pages or in the main sections of a page to attract new customers.

To add the block to a site page, open the page editor and click "Create New Block". Select the "Direct Message" block. You'll see several block options in different styles. Click the variant you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AHYrOHxZ-0SoxioRyJ3nIA.png)

Select the whole block to open its settings. They appear in a panel on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/zKdBuX6kfkCq-QFc72no6A.png)

Element Settings

## 

Columns. Here you can change the background color of the columns, set the "Column Position" ("Left", "Right", "Center", "Space Between", or "Space Around"), and set the "Column Gap", which is the space between columns.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eti4UOYKSEmQodCLkAWREA.png)

Column Settings. Each column has its own group ("Column 1", "Column 2", and so on). Set the width of a column with "Size" and shift it to the right with "Offset".

The settings are the same for every column.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Q0nE4Mk6jk2P7y6WnTybow.png)

To change the order of the columns, click the "Move Down" arrow (or "Move Up") in the column's header.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/0pNqGkScQ06Ce52rssuaxQ.png)

Click the "Select" icon in a column's header to open more settings for that column.

For more information on configuring each column, see the article "[Column Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/srLJpYkm6EiG7L_SoAjLag.png)

To add another column, click "Add Column".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/WqbsvhNqY0mX8LjcXMdvuA.png)

Positioning

## 

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Edv4AIRkdEWgLzKKrGeCSA.png)

## 
Style

Background. Change the background color of the element or add a background image. When you add an image, more settings appear: the image itself, "Size", and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/oQtgR8ql5kCwwxrnDosYvg.png)

Border. Customize the border around the element: the "Radius" (rounds the corners), the "Color", and the "Width".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/R2b8mbF0aUOYod2zJdLt0g.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Hw_7FR6dL0ew-hYOEjCWCg.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/OhLOv2aADkCWGff4iXwaIw.png)

For more information about the settings of each element in the block, see the articles "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)" and "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)".

---

# Product Sale Cards Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/product-sale-cards-block-settings

> Add a Product Sale Cards block to present products or services for sale, and adjust its size, padding, background, and container.

The "Product Sale Cards" block displays specific products or services in visually designed cards. A card usually includes the product name, an image, the price, a description, and a button to buy or get more information. The cards make it easy to present and sell products or services. They help visitors quickly find the information they need and make a choice, and they increase conversions by turning website visitors into buyers.

To add the block to a site page, open the page editor and click "Create New Block". Select the "Product Sale Cards" block. You'll see several block options in different styles. Click the variant you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/v5cJpL0RK0iiuuCZWlfZgA.png)

Select the whole block to open its settings. They appear in a panel on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YMHnBcueXkWMurq085bEog.png)

General Settings

## 

Block Size. Use "Height Mode" to set the height of the block: "Automatic", "Full Height", or "Manual". With "Automatic", the block is as tall as the elements inside it. "Full Height" makes the block at least as tall as the visitor's screen. With "Manual", you set the height yourself: enter a value in pixels in the "Height" field that appears. Click the cross to reset the setting to "Automatic".

In the "Vertical Alignment" list, choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: "Start", "Center", "End", "Space Between", or "Space Around".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the edges of the block and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Here you can change the background color of the block and add a background image. Turn on the "Background Image" switch to add one. More image settings appear: the image itself, "Size" ("Fill", "Original Size", "Cover", "Contain", or a percentage from 10% to 100%), and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Here you can set the width of the content inside the block: "Automatic" or "Full Width". You can also set the background color of the container.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/JF-p923w-EeROXLEfGE0Pw.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

After that, edit each element in the block: replace the image and text, and set up the buttons.

For more information about the settings of each element in the block, see the articles "[Text Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)", "[Picture Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)", "[Button Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)", and "[Form Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-form)".

---

# AXL Trademark Block Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/axl-trademark-block-settings

> Settings for the AXL Trademark block in the page editor: height, padding, background, and container width.

A trademark is a symbol that identifies a company or brand. It helps your audience tell your products and services apart from those of other companies, helps you establish your brand, and protects it from counterfeiting or use by others. It also builds trust, because customers recognize a trademark and associate certain qualities with it.

To add the block to a site page, open the page editor. Click 'Create New Block' and select the 'Order Fulfilled' block. You'll see several block variants in different styles. Click the one you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QQdgdeKKwEWwO0-jUnxi_A.png)

Select the entire block to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ROnYF6GAEUGTyGBq3-VT2g.png)

General Settings

## 

Block size. Use "Height Mode" to choose how tall the block is: Automatic, Full Height, or Manual. With Automatic, the block is as tall as the elements inside it. With Full Height, the block fills the height of the screen. With Manual, you set the height yourself in the "Height" field, in pixels. Click the X to reset the setting and return to Automatic.

In "Vertical Alignment", choose how the elements are positioned inside the block: Start, Center, End, Space Between, or Space Around.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pG_bbUzn20awvF7zUPaB0g.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the block's edges and the elements inside it. Use it when an element sits too close to the edge of the block and you need to move it away.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M4NYNknEBkei877qpDgRow.png)

Background. Change the block's background color or add a background image. When you add an image, more image settings appear: image selection, size (choose Cover, Fill, Contain, 50%, 100%, or another size), repeat, and the position of the image inside the block.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vE1Lthmmd0yHPmdSPKyB6A.png)

Container. Set the width of the elements inside the block: Automatic or Full Width. You can also set the block's background color here.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UG93UxPAQUePItcl3_O2KA.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1v_E7kvvoUSboDr4XRiosw.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YAGBT5atAEGEZrR2QJFGtA.png)

For details about the settings of each element in the block, see the articles "[Element Column](https://docs.axl.tech/element-column)", "[Element Text](https://docs.axl.tech/element-text)", and "[Element Picture](https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture)".

---

# Text Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-text

> Learn about the Text element in the page editor and its settings.

A Text element is any block of text on a web page.

Select the element to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/TgUWRuy9l0W1BmQ9xNwqMA.png)

# 
Element Settings

Text. Change the text color, font, font size, and line height. The default line height is auto. Drag the slider up or down to adjust the height, or enter a number. Click the cross to reset a number back to auto.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XYnHRRPhlUCviEcrOfUlwg.png)

Positioning

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pRtmhZ0Bj0iaT-raiHJs9Q.png)

# 
Style

Background. In this section, you can change the background color of the text field or add a background image to it. For a background image, more settings appear: image selection, size, repeat, and position within the text field.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/oHkSi-ZCekWEMW4SBDtKLQ.png)

Text shadow. Choose the shadow color, its direction (left, right, up, or down), and the blur, which makes the shadow sharp and bold or soft and transparent. Use this effect when the background is uneven and the text is hard to read in places, or to make the text stand out.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/g0KsAOhlnkaGhlkiCp_afw.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the text field and adjust its offset, blur, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/MoXs9NROv0GDaHCNOtxgKA.png)

Border. Customize the border of the text field: radius (rounded corners), border style (none, solid, dashed, or dotted), width, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ISU0Jy-3I0OlFMY3VMzoXg.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nDvAEK9fEEux2emvD3XT1Q.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/m70hHBhDxk-VeNcsuStEAQ.png)

---

# Heading Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-heading

> Learn about the Heading element in the page editor and its settings.

A heading is a text element that differs from regular text in its size settings. It is larger and more prominent.

Select the element to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qePAyQSq4U-04f-i3kFjDA.png)

Element Settings

Text. Change the text color, font, font size, and line height. The default line height is auto. Drag the slider up or down to adjust the height, or enter a number. Click the cross to reset a number back to auto.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ToF6jhCLV0ibicpnWLnJFg.png)

Positioning

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/zIXIUe04K0GtAqijPQ_SJg.png)

## 
Style

Background. In this section, you can change the background color of the text field or add a background image to it. For a background image, more settings appear: image selection, size, repeat, and position within the text field.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/BIp1b4QmBUyPCe0BGmGGXw.png)

Text shadow. Choose the shadow color, its direction (left, right, up, or down), and the blur, which makes the shadow sharp and bold or soft and transparent. Use this effect when the background is uneven and the text is hard to read in places, or to make the text stand out.

Shadow. Add a shadow around the heading and adjust its offset, blur, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yNOT4xvLwU6zU8E9GQ_Mmw.png)

Border. Customize the border around the heading: radius (rounded corners), border style (none, solid, dashed, or dotted), width, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/SRlNCxykQ0661hwnNeyElg.png)

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ywS-4EmuWU621Dblx4Dpog.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3lSCzheY806flZQg3l6eOg.png)

---

# Fonts

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/fonts

> Choose, install, and apply fonts for text and headings in the page editor, and set a main font for your whole site.

You can manage fonts in the settings of the "Text" and "Heading" elements. The AXL editor gives you access to 1,052 fonts.

## 
Font Selection

Open your site and select the "Text" or "Heading" element. A toolbar opens on the right. Find the "Font" field there.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/TPUYrKLgB0mihhGcbamxCQ.png)

Click the font name to see a list of available fonts. These are the standard fonts. You can choose a font from this list.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nHKB8N8BsEy1wAbNTaOTYQ.png)

Below the list is a "Manage" button. Click it to see all font options. A window opens with a list of 1,052 fonts.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/chZRW2iIZkyTKYPHuS3KGw.png)

## 
Font Management

You'll see a gallery of fonts. Scroll through it and click "Install" next to a font you want to use. After a font is installed, click "Select" to apply it to the selected element (text or heading). To make the font the main font for your entire site, click "Set as Main". The font you chose is then applied to all headings and text on the site.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/cUJ2vAhgbkCcdbCKIb7cLw.png)

At the top, you can use these filters:

## 
Search

Enter the font name.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7x9SPF9ff0-ejrS7oGUZvQ.png)

## 
Supported Languages

Choose a language from the list.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/FpKk5ceNe02_rWARksJjfQ.png)

## 
Font Type

Choose a font type from the list.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/-5okGaUF2U6lXpTvrT9ztg.png)

## 
Show

Select "All" to see every font in the list, or "Installed" to see only the fonts you've installed.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ihhuk53qRE-CeHT53iQW_w.png)

To use different fonts for headings and text, or to set the size, style, and color, go back to the element settings.
Select the text you want to edit. On the toolbar on the right, open the "Font" list and choose a font for that text.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/tjmvIR0wEkW6HJ-rVxGDhA.png)

Then choose the font style: bold, semi-bold, thin, and so on. The list shows numeric values, so pick the one that matches the style you want.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/atXddy7KikSqDDtWHmeVYA.png)

Set the font size and, if needed, the line height. You can leave the line height as "auto" for automatic spacing.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/NbrZ8fQCUku1w78GoL7ZlQ.png)

Click the "Save" and "Publish" buttons.

---

# Image Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-picture

> Learn about the Image element in the page editor, its settings, and the click actions it supports.

An image element is any image you add to a web page, whether you upload it from your computer or download it from the internet first.

When you select an image element, a panel with these tools opens:

## 
Element Settings

Select the element to open its settings. A toolbar appears on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5NaWL0ob1E-N9rfE9X_xHw.png)

Image Settings. In this section, you can add or change the image itself. Choose the image size: Fill, Original Size, Cover, or Contain. You can also choose the shape of the image, square or circle, and round the corners.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rvnHTC0Yn0Kp2Ae_y9UQ7g.png)

In the "Image Optimization" section, choose how much the image is compressed: "Element Size", "2x Element Size", or "Original Quality" (no compression).

For 95% of images, the standard compression to the size of the element is enough. We recommend JPG because the files are much smaller, compress well, and load faster than PNG. Use PNG if you need a transparent background.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/tFsTUE8ofkGqUTIv0CEIzQ.png)

In the "Alt Text" section, add alternative text for the image. Visitors see this text if the image doesn't load or if they use a screen reader. It also helps with search engine optimization.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/iUox02fbWUmp1oZGxyBLwA.png)

Positioning

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2gr_S1ZXN06bGuH86NMt8w.png)

Style

Shadow. Add a shadow around the image and adjust its offset, blur, and color.

Border. Add a frame around the element: radius (rounded corners), border style (none, solid, dashed, or dotted), width, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/i-J1v7oePUiGuFLsYcolcA.png)

## 
Interaction

Click. An image is an interactive element. When a visitor clicks it, it can take them to a link or trigger another action. Click "Add Click Action" and choose from the options:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/L97fPIQEFEu2c_Aae73PGA.png)

1. Add to Cart. Adds a product to the cart when a visitor clicks the element. Select the product from the list. To start checkout right after the visitor adds the product, turn on "Fast Checkout".
2. Download File. Starts downloading the selected file to the visitor's device. Click "Choose from Server" to attach a file, or upload one from your computer.
3. Go to Checkout. Takes the visitor straight to the checkout page. This action has no additional settings.
4. Open Link. Takes the visitor to the page you select. Paste the link into the "Link" field. To open the page in a new browser tab, turn on "Open in new tab".
5. Refresh Page. Reloads the visitor's page. This action has no additional settings.
6. Remove from Cart. Removes a product from the cart when a visitor clicks the element. Select the product. To remove it from the cart entirely, turn on "Completely".
7. Run Custom Event. Triggers an event that you can use to start an automation. Enter the event name in the "Custom Event Name" field. To learn how to set up a custom event, read the article "[Types of Events in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".
8. Run JS Code. A JS function is a block of code that performs a specific task. When a visitor clicks the element, the code you entered runs.
9. Scroll to Block. Scrolls the page to another block on the same page. Select the block from the list.
10. Show Popup. Displays an extra window on top of the page when a visitor clicks the element. To learn how to set up a popup, read the article "[Pop-Up Windows](https://docs.axl.tech/pop-up-windows)".
11. Zoom Image. Enlarges the image when a visitor clicks it. This action has no additional settings.

Choose what happens when a website visitor clicks the image.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/e66hLhRAZ0mq7thdD_gpRA.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/WKzK5kuP5EqjLuAShNy2GQ.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/oWBXC6Y3CESA5siKpkNERQ.png)

Select the action that runs when a site visitor clicks the image.

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/8Kayyr5mYUSUycN2WYp-BQ.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/82eGPSPV3kaVuoqc8eOgkw.png)

---

# Video Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-video

> Learn about the Video element in the page editor and its settings.

You can add a video to your web page. Upload the video to YouTube, Vimeo, Kinescope, or Wistia. Copy the link to the video and paste it into the "Link to Video" field in the page editor. You can also paste any embed code to add a video.

Select the element to open its settings. The tools panel opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/98iPOtFwX0S6iH6Jz4ztDQ.png)

## 
Element Settings

Video Settings. In this section, paste the link to the video into the "Link to Video" field. Then set the aspect ratio: horizontal (16:9), vertical (9:16), or square (1:1).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/bTVRR5oAf0Wn45iJpwwtdg.png)

Positioning

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7-shj2jGq0atc9ngJgpAww.png)

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nl8DxFaZ6kmqj6TMdPKaIA.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vW7wugrceE2NTLiMUGKsqA.png)

---

# Text + Image Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-text-image

> Learn how to add a Text + Image element and set up its text, image, margin, style, and visibility in the page editor.

The Text + Image element combines an image and text on a page. You can upload the image from your computer or add one from the internet.

Click "Add Element" and select the "Text + Image" element. Then adjust its settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YfZ86ZYRak28bMMrQweAYw.png)

Click the element to select it. Its settings appear on the right.

For "Text + Image" elements, the panel includes these tools:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pllB59PJDEiaUt8Up-cDwQ.png)

Element Settings

Text. Change the text color, font, font size, and line height. Line height is set to auto by default. Drag the slider up or down to adjust it, or enter a number. Click the cross to reset it to auto.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pXV8V-hCXES-f1KVGnkcVQ.png)

## 
Image

Image. Here you can add or change the image itself. You can use an image or an icon.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/G_30sciBtki2OUgrHuEktw.png)

Image Settings. Here you can set the image "Position": "Left", "Top", "Right", or "Bottom". You can also adjust the "Width" and "Height" of the image and choose its "Size": "Fill", "Original Size", "Cover", or "Contain". Choose the "Shape": "Square" or "Circle". For a square image, you can also set "Rounded Corners".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Kprvjlz1IUa-6kQggmK05Q.png)

Margin. Adjust the space around the image, outside its edges. Use it when the image sits next to another object (text, another image, an icon, and so on) and you need to move it away from that object.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ioqAmpnFXEWLf24t-xJW3Q.png)

Positioning

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/kWYwt0MTHUi9ff_JtcoEyQ.png)

Style

Background. Change the background color of the "Text + Image" element or add a background image. When you add an image, more settings appear: the image itself, "Size", and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/RCJ4THZIdEuX40SCr_Lfxw.png)

Text Shadow. Choose the shadow color, its direction ("Offset X" and "Offset Y"), and the "Blur" (a bright, sharp shadow or a transparent one). Use a text shadow when the background is uneven and the text is hard to read in places, or to give the text more depth.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/jA67Iyu4WEyKnus5d064LQ.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the element and adjust its offset ("Offset X" and "Offset Y"), the "Blur", and the "Color".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/plYPvaxKdk6Myi9V6L0evA.png)

Border. Add a border to the element. You can set the "Radius" (rounds the corners), the "Style" ("No Border", "Solid", "Dashed", or "Dotted"), the "Width", and the "Color".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/DuTVt1DzRk-Tn9hZdlMWOg.png)

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nWyOMA3i8kmZzXaoYu0OUw.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YU-s-zMjHEukOefGtqxrtw.png)

---

# Icon Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-icon

> Learn about the Icon element in the page editor, its settings, and the click actions it supports.

The Icon element is a ready-made graphic that you use to design a web page. The icon library is built into the AXL editor and updated regularly. Choose an icon from the library and add it to your page.

To open the settings for an element, click the element to select it. A toolbar appears on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/hxcZHF8IkUK2FU89OL06Jw.png)

## 
Element Settings

Image Settings. In this section, you can add or change the icon, set its size, and choose its color and background color. You can also choose the shape of the icon, square or circle, round the corners, and align the icon.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/y7yLI1XYEEugJQrLrA6kxg.png)

Positioning

## 

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/US0Hg3UMK02RmNvUabecYg.png)

Style

## 

Shadow. Add a shadow around the icon and adjust its offset, blur, and color.

Border. Adjust the border around the icon: radius (rounded corners), style (none, solid, dashed, or dotted), color, and thickness.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Bb59NR5Xh0i0_hFeq3TO_g.png)

## 
Interaction

Click. An icon is an interactive element. When a visitor clicks it, it can take them to a link or trigger another action.
Click "Add Click Action" and choose from the options:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Xy37wt2GxEmlxZmD8s2xYw.png)

1. Add to Cart. Adds a product to the cart when a visitor clicks the element. Select the product from the list. To start checkout right after the visitor adds the product, turn on "Fast Checkout".
2. Download File. Starts downloading the selected file to the visitor's device. Click "Choose from Server" to attach a file, or upload one from your computer.
3. Go to Checkout. Takes the visitor straight to the checkout page. This action has no additional settings.
4. Open Link. Takes the visitor to the page you select. Paste the link into the "Link" field. To open the page in a new browser tab, turn on "Open in new tab".
5. Refresh Page. Reloads the visitor's page. This action has no additional settings.
6. Remove from Cart. Removes a product from the cart when a visitor clicks the element. Select the product. To remove it from the cart entirely, turn on "Completely".
7. Run Custom Event. Triggers an event that you can use to start an automation. Enter the event name in the "Custom Event Name" field. To learn how to set up a custom event, read the article "[Types of Events in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".
8. Run JS Code. A JS function is a block of code that performs a specific task. When a visitor clicks the element, the code you entered runs.
9. Scroll to Block. Scrolls the page to another block on the same page. Select the block from the list.
10. Show Popup. Displays an extra window on top of the page when a visitor clicks the element. To learn how to set up a popup, read the article "[Pop-Up Windows](https://docs.axl.tech/pop-up-windows)".

Choose what happens when a website visitor clicks the icon.

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1jLOlTQB0Eq0dNcpDyKs7w.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ep1vcFy_v0Krj11mNDg0Kw.png)

---

# Audio Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-audio

> Learn how to add an Audio element and set up its file or URL, download control, click actions, and visibility.

The Audio element adds an audio recording to a web page. You can upload a recording from your computer or link to one on the internet.

Click "Add Element" and choose the "Audio" element. Then configure its settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/-wva8PiraU-YVVpgzoJa1g.png)

To edit an Audio element, click it to select it. Its settings appear on the right.

For Audio elements, the panel includes these tools:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/jd17GXDLYUqOew6NDL64vw.png)

General Settings

Settings. Here you can add an audio recording and allow or prevent downloads.

To upload audio from your computer, turn on the "Use Uploaded File" switch and click "Choose from Server". Use MP3 files so the audio plays in every browser. Other formats work only in some browsers.
Turn on the "Disable Downloads" switch to hide the download button from visitors. This option doesn't work in every browser.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AxeTjMQuTkyW7tgWH7EVcQ.png)

To use audio from the internet, turn off the "Use Uploaded File" switch and enter the URL of the recording in the "Audio URL" field.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wfsC63O7N0OHvhZ1aymvtA.png)

Positioning

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VmyyrXs_AUOFiHCgycbilA.png)

Interaction

Click. An Audio element can respond to a click, for example by taking the visitor to a link.

Click "Add Click Action" and select an action from the list:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/dmSojKBn-U6JfAHvq8XBBw.png)

1. Add to Cart. When a visitor clicks the element, the product is added to their cart. Select the product from the list in the "Product" field. To start checkout right after the product is added, turn on the "Fast Checkout" switch.
2. Download File. This action downloads the selected file to the visitor's device. Attach the file by clicking "Choose from Server", then upload the file from your computer.
3. Go to Checkout. The visitor goes straight to the checkout page. This action has no additional settings.
4. Open Link. When a visitor clicks the element, they go to the page you specify. Paste the link into the "Link" field. To open the page in a new browser tab, turn on the "Open in new tab" switch.
5. Refresh Page. When a visitor clicks the element, the page reloads. This action has no additional settings.
6. Remove from Cart. When a visitor clicks the element, the product is removed from the shopping cart. Select the product, and turn on the "Completely" switch to remove it from the cart entirely.
7. Run Custom Event. You can create any event that triggers an automation. Enter the event name in the "Custom Event Name" field. To learn how to set up a custom event, see the article "[Types of Events in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".
8. Run JS Code. JS code is a block of code that performs a specific task. Enter it in the "JS Code" field. When a visitor clicks the element, the code runs.
9. Scroll to Block. This action scrolls the visitor to another block on the same page as the element. Select the block you want from the "Block" list.
10. Show Popup. When a visitor clicks the element, a popup window appears on top of the page. To learn how to set up a popup, see the article "[Popups](https://docs.axl.tech/pop-up-windows)".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eza_4bsZbkSGgoWuvH00Gw.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/IIMF4BIjNk2mO6OEmROy2Q.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/9TUnvjipI0i2mXBJBljMXA.png)

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/zkw26aJ6oEiwljAtb1tWrQ.png)

# 
Advanced Settings

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/f1Eiwc8d3ku0YapxmolC_w.png)

---

# Button Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-button

> Learn about the Button element in the page editor, its settings, and the click actions it supports.

A button is a separate interactive element with a variety of functions.

Select the element to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/N_uX04tzsku8dip1lKCL0w.png)

## 
Element Settings

First Line. In this section, you can enter the text inside the button, change the text color, font size, and line height, choose a font, and align the text within the button.

Second Line. If needed, you can add a second line of text inside the button. Turn on the "Second Line" switch to show an additional line on the button. The settings for the second line are the same as for the first line: enter the text, choose the text color, set the size and line height, choose a font, and align the text within the button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/JT4sh750yEyc89o8VGkJ0A.png)

Positioning

## 

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eTBmiQBTT0q-thEGgHdhKA.png)

## 
Style

Background. This setting is on the "Element Settings" tab. Choose a background color for the button, or add a background image inside it. For a background image, more settings appear: image selection, size, repeat, and position inside the button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7PpLAIF2Q06a2hIkpwg0_w.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the button and adjust its offset, blur, and color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text inside the button. Adjust the shadow's offset, blur, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/D-QQVBQdeE2y7mQHHH6VVQ.png)

Border. Customize the border around the button: radius (rounded corners), style (none, solid, dashed, or dotted), color, and thickness.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AXFXf2abuEKTSdTrU0IT_w.png)

Icon

An icon is a ready-made graphic that decorates the button. The icon library is built into the AXL editor and updated regularly. Choose an icon and place it to the left or right of the text inside the button.

Icon Left. Turn on the switch. Here you can choose the icon, set its size and color, set the icon's background color, round the corners, and adjust the margin. This icon appears on the left side of the button.

Icon Right. Turn on the switch. The settings are exactly the same as for "Icon Left", but the icon appears on the right side of the button.
Click. A button is an interactive element: when a visitor clicks it, it takes them to a link. Click "Add Click Action" and choose from the options.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wA4TVzBR4EyLimCagH6CBQ.png)

## 
Interaction

Click. A button is an interactive element. When a visitor clicks it, it can take them to a link or trigger another action. Click "Add Click Action" and choose from the options:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/FmWe0ogAcUeU78uVB94KMA.png)

1. Add to Cart. Adds a product to the cart when a visitor clicks the element. Select the product from the list. To start checkout right after the visitor adds the product, turn on "Fast Checkout".
2. Download File. Starts downloading the selected file to the visitor's device. Click "Choose from Server" to attach a file, or upload one from your computer.
3. Go to Checkout. Takes the visitor straight to the checkout page. This action has no additional settings.
4. Open Link. Takes the visitor to the page you select. Paste the link into the "Link" field. To open the page in a new browser tab, turn on "Open in new tab".
5. Refresh Page. Reloads the visitor's page. This action has no additional settings.
6. Remove from Cart. Removes a product from the cart when a visitor clicks the element. Select the product. To remove it from the cart entirely, turn on "Completely".
7. Run Custom Event. Triggers an event that you can use to start an automation. Enter the event name in the "Custom Event Name" field. To learn how to set up a custom event, read the article "[Types of Events in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".
8. Run JS Code. A JS function is a block of code that performs a specific task. When a visitor clicks the element, the code you entered runs.
9. Scroll to Block. Scrolls the page to another block on the same page. Select the block from the list.
10. Show Popup. Displays an extra window on top of the page when a visitor clicks the element. To learn how to set up a popup, read the article "[Pop-Up Windows](https://docs.axl.tech/pop-up-windows)".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/e4WNuifUs02AnUEvv9Kirg.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xK3wGaH2SE27VjgPBN3Rdg.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/C0S0k5DNNUqN2svH_z_YbA.png)

Select the action that runs when a site visitor clicks the button.

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/736R2b18ukqn_DlntBbcfA.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For more information about these settings, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/zS-jm-lOFk-MzxUIJGfxBA.png)

---

# Column Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-column

> Use the Column element to hold other elements, set its width and offset, and style its padding, background, shadow, and border.

The Column element holds other elements, such as icons, buttons, and images. Like a group, it combines several elements so that you can move, select, and group them together.

Select the column to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_tZ160HNIUGJuuu84xxJAg.png)

## 
General Settings

Column Settings. Use Size to set the width of the column and Offset to shift it to the right on the page.

Content Alignment. Set how the content of the column is aligned inside it, vertically (Vertical Alignment) and horizontally (Horizontal Alignment).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xkTjAUF3wke6z2m3jHYSDA.png)

## 
Style

Padding. Change the space between the edges of the column and its content (text, image, and so on). Use it when the content sits too close to the edges of the column and needs to be moved away from them.

Background. Change the column's background color and add a background image. For an image, you can also choose the image and set its size, repeat, and position inside the column.

Shadow. Add a shadow around the column. You can adjust the offset, the blur, and the shadow color.

Border. Customize the border around the column: radius (rounds the corners of the column), style (No Border, Solid, Dashed, or Dotted), color, and width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/aGH48Wz8AkiSRjbnqZdOqw.png)

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/G2oVqYAUo0SRF7-74C5WgQ.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/b9uNGraRSkOofYiqRIPjYQ.png)

---

# Form Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-form

> Learn how to set up the Form element in the page editor to collect contact details from visitors.

The Form element collects contact information from visitors to your page or website. It looks like a table of fields for the visitor to fill in. The form fields correspond to contact attributes, such as name, email, and phone number.

## 
General Settings

Select the entire form to open its settings. A toolbar appears on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ndTennJfaEephzECu5VUNg.png)

Settings. In this section, enter the form name, the message visitors see after they submit the form, and the URL where visitors are redirected afterward. When a visitor completes the form, the message appears (for example, "Thank you! We've received your submission.").

Run JS Code. JS code is a block of code that performs a specific task. It runs after the visitor submits the form and before the redirect, if you set one. Turn on the switch and enter your JS code.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UW_X8a3X2Ei1GRjk2gCqtA.png)

Layout. Choose how the form fields are arranged: vertically or horizontally.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/FHDHewaMhkqTTy9VuG3GHg.png)

## 
Fields

In this section, you can customize the form fields. By default, the form has two fields: contact name and email. You can delete these fields, add new ones, and customize each one. Most fields share the same settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/N94jd7i6X0-ccVUZJ9kT8g.png)

Field Settings:

1. Label. Enter the field's name. This label appears outside the field.
2. Placeholder. Enter the hint text that appears inside the field. It disappears when the visitor fills in the field.
3. Required. Turn this on to make the field required: the visitor must fill it in to submit the form. If it's off, the field is optional and the visitor can skip it.
4. Hide this field if the user is signed in. Turn on the switch to hide this field from signed-in users.
5. Attribute. Select an attribute from the list, or enter a new one for the field.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/o6aL_arEfkC5bWZKtQoBVA.png)

Add Field. Click this button to add a new field to the form, then choose the field type from the list. The field settings open next.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/M0GQEW6XJEy9SZQOu4ylnQ.png)

Positioning

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_gGpgUv52kmtUhyqGiseSA.png)

## 
Style

Background. Change the form's background color and add a background image. For an image, you can also choose the image and set its size, repeat, and position within the form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/BCfZmstGDk2CG9SrRCMmQw.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the form. You can adjust the offset (Offset X and Offset Y), the blur (a softer, more transparent shadow), and the shadow color.

Rounded Corners. Adjust how rounded the corners of the entire form are.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/veYrcoIO9EKNPRRcZLw9ww.png)

Labels. Labels are the captions for your fields (name, email, phone, and so on). You can change the label position (top or left), color, font size, line height, and text alignment (left, center, right).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/A_X2lqyDUk6CIynBdgvONA.png)

Field Style. Change how the form fields look: background color, text color, font size, line height, and text alignment inside the field (left, center, right).

Border. This option is part of Field Style. Set the border of the form fields: radius (rounds the field corners), color, and width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/azjl_iMSrE6XEeCZmbzKvg.png)

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/CMAjaXWHPki7SdNGRJMqTg.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/LcEd1PDVBUit-V9Rx0EPbA.png)

---

# Form/Quiz Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-form-quiz

> Learn how to add a Form/Quiz element to a page, create a new form from the page editor, and style the element.

A quiz is a short online survey. At the end, the visitor gets an answer to their request, and your company gets their contact details. Quizzes are a tool for generating leads on a website: a potential customer answers the questions, picks the service or product that suits them, and leaves their contact information.

Click "Add Element" and select the "Form/Quiz" element. Then customize its settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/cT0TcPJzFk2xUGyvh8DxeQ.png)

Click the element to select it. Its settings appear on the right.
For "Form/Quiz" elements, the panel includes these tools:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ObO8LuZlxkeZHLfw0wxHeg.png)

Element Settings

# 

Form/Quiz. Here you add the form or quiz you need. Choose one from the list of forms you've already created. To set up or create a new form, click the "Go to Forms" link.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/C5873GPeZUWsPP4Pa8o3mA.png)

A new browser tab opens with Forms & Quizzes in the Sites section, where you can edit existing forms or create new ones.
Click "Create with AI". A window opens with two tabs. Switch to "Create from Scratch".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eThJdRF_H0ihJ3BnBWFETw.png)

Fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter the name of the form.
2. Description. Add a description of the form.
3. Template. Choose a template for the form: "Blank", "Feedback", "Quiz", "Test", "Questionnaire", or "Survey".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5MmAZp9NfEqw7VHh90LW3A.png)

Click "Create and Open" to create the form and continue setting it up. For more information on creating a form, see the article "[Forms & Quizzes](https://docs.axl.tech/forms-and-quizzes)".

Positioning

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XE5gWpVdjUiTG-f-xY_oXw.png)

Style

Background. Change the background color of the element or add a background image. When you add an image, more settings appear: the image itself, "Size", and "Repeat".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/bKT6gjtvNkGEC69zbl0T4g.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the element and adjust its offset ("Offset X" and "Offset Y"), the "Blur", and the "Color".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/r8zdhNu6Yku_nO8AmHkvhA.png)

Text Shadow. Choose the shadow color, its direction ("Offset X" and "Offset Y"), and the "Blur" (a bright, sharp shadow or a transparent one). Use a text shadow when the background is uneven and the text is hard to read in places, or to give the text more depth.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/NenZyV41UkicaWINeGNWMg.png)

Border. Customize the border of the element: the "Radius" (rounds the corners), the "Style" ("No Border", "Solid", "Dashed", or "Dotted"), the "Width", and the "Color".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vmElstQf7UePUgtuGYdjMA.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

# 

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/a9C7C48QzUO08asi4f2pTQ.png)

Advanced Settings

# 

For more information on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/W9RqMWxCpEG0RHADEdPtHg.png)

---

# Element Payment Form

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-form-of-payment

> Add a Payment Form element to a page, then set up its products, upsell, components, style, and upsell buttons.

The Payment Form element lets you accept payments for selected products. It also records whether website visitors choose to buy a product or decline it.

Payment Form

Click "Add Element" and select "Payment Form." Click the element and drag it onto the page. Then configure its settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/jp4vswKz9UWfyu6U3x0_XA.png)

Click the element to select it. Its settings open on the right.
The settings panel for the Payment Form element includes the following tools:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/RJ-C6CiScE2vT2pkV4QH_g.png)

Element Settings

## 

Products. In the Products group, click "Add Product" and choose one or more products. To learn how to create a product on the AXL platform, see "[Products and Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)."
If you select several products, they must all use the same currency. You can change the order of the products in the list: hold down the handle next to a product's name and drag it to a new place.

Mode. If you add several products to the payment form, set the selection mode.

- In "All" mode, the user buys every product added to the form and can't pick just one from the list.
- "Product Selection" mode lets the user choose only one of the products offered.
- "Multiple" mode lets the user choose one or more of the products offered in the form.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/svEg-uHUl0uoUQr1Glxrdg.png)

Upsell. An upsell is a sequence of pages the customer is redirected to after paying for the initial order. Turn on the switch and add the URL of an upsell page you created on the AXL platform. For instructions on creating an upsell page, see "[Upsell Page](https://docs.axl.tech/upsell-page)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eSdbF8xYm063--o92Lp_zg.png)

Thank You Page. This page is shown after a successful payment. If you haven't created a separate thank-you page, the success page that the platform creates automatically is shown. Turn on the switch and add the URL of the thank-you page you created on the AXL platform. You can find instructions for creating a thank-you page in the "Sites" section.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eAjzt9h60Uumz-Zuo84BSg.png)

Run JS Code. For advanced users. In this field, you can enter your own JavaScript to run when the form is submitted, before the payment itself.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/aqBNQU6duUa--o2D8hDC3A.png)

Components

## 

This section has advanced settings for each component of the payment form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/fK6RiR7kiEOqoBxpjAE9-w.png)

Form component. A form collects a page visitor's contact details. Click "Select."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/IZtKXC6ew0-cVNb30AVp_Q.png)

The form field settings open. Adjust them as you need. For more about configuring the form, see "[Form Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-form)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7pUGoyqwA0en5Q-wqU2gVw.png)

When you finish the form settings, click "Back to Payment Form."

Product list component. Turn on the switch and click "Select."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/mKXbLPHbU06Eal4l3PA64Q.png)

In this section, add one or more products from your product list. To add a product description, select the product in the form. For more about configuring the product list component, see "[Product List Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-product-list)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3xN4y2sPgUGkaNLm4H67iA.png)

When you finish the product list settings, click "Back to Payment Form."

Payment button component. In this section, add one or more payment buttons. Each button is linked to its own payment method; choose one from the list for each button. To learn how to set up a payment method, see "[Payment Gateways](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Iypwu7AdV0KCTaQGpM_Kqw.png)

Next, click the "Select" icon in the upper-right corner of a payment button to open its advanced settings. For more about configuring the button, see "[Payment Button Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-payment-button)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1hOltGAojk6Rh-q9XXgGGA.png)

When you finish the payment button settings, click "Back to Payment Form."

Totals component. You can add extra fields: savings, shipping, and total. They appear in the payment form so customers can see the discount amount, the shipping amount, and the total purchase amount. Turn on the switch and click "Select." To learn how to configure the totals component, see "[Totals Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-totals)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2Vg90v1Qb0qHwosLIHeTKA.png)

When you finish the totals settings, click "Back to Payment Form."

Promo code component. In this section, you can add and configure a promo code. To learn how to create a promo code, see "[Promo Codes](https://docs.axl.tech/promo-codes)."

Turn on the switch and click "Select." To learn how to configure the promo code component, see "[Promo Code Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-promo-code)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7weZR4VG_UWBrwJXYFcqzQ.png)

Order bump component. An order bump automatically adds a product to the order or replaces one. Turn on the switch and click "Select."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/BaggNb-TP0-NEdRe32D17g.png)

To learn how to set up the order bump component, see "[Order Bump Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-order-bump)." When you finish the component settings, click "Back to Payment Form."

Credit Card Form. Turn on the switch to add fields for entering credit card details to the order form. For now, the credit card form supports only Stripe. For more about integrating Stripe, see "[Stripe Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5x5P8Q8BbUWDHqPRM-rptg.png)

Positioning

## 

For details on this section, see "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Tr1w9o0B506zewvs4aHKkQ.png)

Style

## 

Background. You can change the background color of the payment form or add a background image. When you add an image, more settings appear: the image itself, its size, and whether it repeats.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/BHCSqSRWIkyBJNZ9L7O2SA.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the payment form and adjust its offset (left, right, up, or down), blur (a sharp or a soft shadow), and color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text and adjust its offset (left, right, up, or down), blur (a sharp or a soft shadow), and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1_9UnYdW1UGcg_odS_sR7w.png)

Border. You can customize the border around the payment form: its radius (rounds the corners), color, and width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3LlomRDopkC82JpnuQlQZA.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For details on this section, see "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/w0lgGOOkOUCRB33bf6yErA.png)

Advanced Settings

## 

For details on this section, see "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rA489kSsy0usP1Sf49Vuag.png)

Upsell Accept Button

The Upsell Accept Button lets the user buy additional products after paying for the main product. Place the "Upsell Accept Button" anywhere on the upsell page. It works only after the main order is paid.

In the page editor, click "Add Element." In the list of elements, select "Payment Form." Click the "Upsell Accept Button" element, then drag the button you want from the list onto the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qWgaWwuExkONpdiRiuhiCA.png)

For more about the upsell page and the "Upsell Accept Button" element, see "[Upsell Page](https://docs.axl.tech/upsell-page)."

Upsell Decline Button

The Upsell Decline Button lets the user decline additional products after paying for the main product. Place the "Upsell Decline Button" anywhere on the upsell page. It works only after the main order is paid.

In the page editor, click "Add Element." In the list of elements, select "Payment Form." Click the "Upsell Decline Button" element, then drag the button you want from the list onto the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nZ-gCpdG8kqY0Mtx6-18zw.png)

For more about the upsell page and the "Upsell Decline Button" element, see "[Upsell Page](https://docs.axl.tech/upsell-page)."

---

# Element Timer

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-timer

> Add a countdown timer to a page and configure its mode, units, text, background, separator, and style.

The Timer element adds a countdown timer to a page. It's one of the editor's interactive elements and makes it easier for visitors to engage with your content.

You can use a timer for the following:

- Time tracking for tasks. For example, on a knowledge-testing page, add a timer that counts down the time left to finish the test or a specific question. This keeps people focused and on schedule.
- Time-limited access. If some content on your site should be available only for a limited time (for example, access to a course or a section of materials), use a timer to set the time limit. This lets you control access and protect the value of your content.
- Motivation to act. On a page for promotions, ads, or sales, a timer can show the time left until the promotion or discount ends. This creates urgency and can encourage visitors to decide or buy.

Examples of using the Timer element on site pages:

1. Knowledge-testing page. The timer counts down the time left (for example, 30 minutes) to finish the test, so users can pace themselves and stay within the time limit.
2. Course with limited access. On the course page, the timer shows the number of days left until access to the materials expires. This creates a sense of exclusivity and encourages visitors to buy or register for the course.
3. Limited-time promotion page. The timer counts down to the end of the promotion or discount, which draws attention and encourages visitors to buy before the deadline.

To add the element to a page, click "Add Element" and select "Timer". Then configure the element.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3ZDb0rrv2kmEISqL9mD4Xw.png)

To open the settings for the element, select the whole element. The tool panel opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2N6km7MrwEKdobRmqjfUHA.png)

## 
Element Settings

Mode. Choose the type of timer.

Select the timer mode:
     - "Date & Time": counts down to a specific date and time. In the field below, set when the timer ends.
     - "Duration": counts down for a set length of time. For example, the timer can count down two days from the moment a visitor opens the page. In the field below, set the duration in days, hours, minutes, or seconds.

Show Elements. Choose which units the timer shows: days, hours, minutes, or seconds.

Gap. The gap is the space between the timer units. Set its size in pixels (px).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1qXyWOgHFUCvfHlHjWzbFw.png)

Text. Change the text color, font, font size, and line height.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Lh0wLWhvb06aStmT2AYU4w.png)

Background. This is the background around the timer. Change its color, corner radius, and padding. Padding is the space between the timer number and the edge of the background.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/tD0jIKnzTE-hd2nOrV7QKA.png)

Subtext. Subtext is the label under each timer number that names the unit, such as days, hours, minutes, or seconds. Turn on the switch to show the subtext on the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/54AERkNROkaj_SZ9dhmiXw.png)

Separator. The separator is the symbol between the timer units. Turn on the switch to show it. Choose the symbol from the suggested options, and set its size and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/oODB_2r2w0aDML36e-R2Jg.png)

Positioning

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/LykUNzwWOE-Nq1RwZkbWgQ.png)

Style

Background. Change the element's background color or add a background image. When you add an image, more image settings appear: image selection, size, repeat, and the position of the image within the element.

Shadow. Add a shadow around the element. You can adjust the shadow's offset (left, right, up, down), its blur (a bright shadow or a transparent one), and its color.

Text Shadow. Choose the color of the text shadow, its direction (left, right, up, down), and its blur (a bright, clear shadow or a transparent one). Use this effect when the background is uneven and the text is hard to read in places, or to make the text stand out.

Border. Customize the element's border: radius (corner rounding), style (No Border, Solid, Dashed, or Dotted), width, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ItIxQ_DCzEu9sYeia42yjA.png)

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/V_KLaOR3f0OWE4yGoB1iWA.png)

## 
Advanced

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/KOpT6hHQ5U2iTUx0Lkw6ww.png)

---

# Group Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-group

> Use the Group element to combine several page elements so you can move, copy, align, and style them together.

The "Group" element is a container for several other elements.
Use a group to move several elements at once, copy or delete them together, or align them relative to the page edges or to other elements.
A group also lets you create one style for several elements and copy it. For example, to list your products, your services, or the features of a product, style one group (say, an image and text) and copy it as many times as you need. Then edit the text and image in each copy.
Groups also help when you adapt your page for mobile. In the mobile version, elements shift and wrap onto the next line, and they can end up in the wrong order. Group them to keep them together. For example, if you group an image with its text, the mobile version always shows the image first, then the text.

Select the group to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VArPdGCks0S7Untd_nCCXg.png)

## 
General Settings

Content Alignment. Use Content Direction to arrange the contents of the group vertically or horizontally. Use Vertical Alignment and Horizontal Alignment to position the contents inside the group.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3gIRoR8BeEGtgi2u8ljc3g.png)

Positioning

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/usnUtAfFO0eU3LgstapbuA.png)

Style

Background. Change the group's background color and add a background image. For an image, you can also choose the image and set its size, repeat, and position within the group.

Shadow. Add a shadow around the group. You can adjust the offset (Offset X and Offset Y), the blur (a sharper or more transparent shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Choose the color, offset, and blur of the text shadow (a sharp, clear shadow or a soft, transparent one). Use it when the background is uneven and the text is hard to read in places, or to make the text stand out.

Border. Customize the border around the group: radius (rounds the corners), style (No Border, Solid, Dashed, or Dotted), color, and width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ZDKTW1-rNUKMawCiH7kd3A.png)

## 
Conditional Show/Hide

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qWmOHVMYek6MMgNzQ_a58Q.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For details about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/GsKP4faNRkKq_67bo8N1wA.png)

---

# Element Menu

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-menu

> Add a Menu element in the page editor, then set up its layout, collapse behavior, buttons, click actions, and style.

The Menu is a standalone interactive element with many built-in functions.

Click "Add Element" and select "Menu." Then configure the element's settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wUedXPMmpEeVdOI7CvflLQ.png)

Click the Menu element to select it. Its settings open on the right.
The settings panel for the Menu element includes the following tools:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_CO_DHBzkUOqaitar5Fpqw.png)

Element Settings

# 

Content Alignment. Here you can change how the components of the Menu element are arranged, both horizontally and vertically. You can also align the buttons inside the element and set the gap between them.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VbacYGrhhUi0DpdegggX4A.png)

Collapse on devices. Choose the devices where the Menu appears in full and the devices where it appears collapsed.
Click a device to highlight it in blue and collapse the Menu on it. On those devices, visitors see only the collapse button (three horizontal lines, the standard menu icon). To display the floating menu in the editor, click "Show Menu."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/emMuP9jTu0W23-QFG7kIhA.png)

Floating Menu Settings. Here you can change the background color of the floating menu.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2deECJBDZEy1q0EKtwNpAQ.png)

Collapse Button Style. Here you can change the color of the collapse button and its position on the page: left, center, or right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xQEplwOe9Eas0r9XKhFopg.png)

Menu Items

Button Style. Here you can set the shared style for all Menu buttons: text color, background color, font size, line height, and text alignment (left, center, or right).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ObRf70knjU-DhCSX7Ju8qw.png)

Buttons. This section lists each button in the Menu. You can rename a button and assign a click action to it. You can also reorder the buttons by dragging them up or down in the list.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1Ko3uCgAJUyq0TXY9CXGLg.png)

Click "Select" next to a button to open its advanced settings. For more about button settings, see "[Element Button](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wfZayolF8kqPm7wpBQkZvQ.png)

A button is an interactive element that visitors click to follow a link. To add a click action to a Menu button, click "Not Connected" next to Click Actions.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XS9Ix-Lxyk2333BmrMFelw.png)

Click "Add Click Action" and choose one of the following options:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/zxkVeUIm5E-K9_l3mn0ssA.png)

1. Add to Cart. When the user clicks the element, the product is added to the cart automatically. Select the product from your product list. To start checkout as soon as the product is added, turn on "Fast Checkout."
2. Download File. This action starts downloading the selected file to the user's device. Click "Choose from Server" to attach a file, then upload it from your computer.
3. Go to Checkout. The user is taken straight to the checkout page. This action has no additional settings.
4. Open Link. When the user clicks the element, they go to the page you choose. Paste the link into the field. To open the page in a new tab, turn on "Open in new tab."
5. Refresh Page. When the user clicks the element, the page reloads. This action has no additional settings.
6. Remove from Cart. When the user clicks the element, the product is removed from the cart. Select the product. To remove it entirely, turn on "Completely."
7. Run Custom Event. You can create any event that triggers an automation. In the settings, enter the event name. To learn how to set up a custom event, see "[Types of Events in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)."
8. Run JS Code. JS code is a block of code written to perform a specific task. When the user clicks the element, your code runs.
9. Scroll to Block. This action scrolls the user to another block on the same page as the button. Choose the target block from the list.
10. Show Popup. When the user clicks the element, a popup appears on top of the page. To learn how to set up a popup, see "[Pop-Up Windows](https://docs.axl.tech/pop-up-windows)."

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/e4WNuifUs02AnUEvv9Kirg.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xK3wGaH2SE27VjgPBN3Rdg.png)![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/C0S0k5DNNUqN2svH_z_YbA.png)

Positioning

# 

For details on this section, see "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XFZUPgSCM0qv_yqj4u9S3g.png)

Style

Background. Change the element's background color or add a background image. When you add an image, more settings appear: the image itself, its size, and whether it repeats.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/9FdlrUyrOkGIWiJQCkT5jg.png)

Shadow. Set the shadow's color, its offset (left, right, up, or down), and its blur (a sharp, strong shadow or a soft, faint one). Use a shadow when the background isn't uniform, or to give the element depth.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/LGiy4wIzakyn0YgjBsxoBw.png)

Rounded Corners. Round the element's corners. Set the radius as a percentage or in pixels.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Qv-wma7hZEas0sOl_jmLmg.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

# 

For details on this section, see "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/L_gVL1F28k-Dv8xHVhCxsg.png)

Advanced Settings

For details on this section, see "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/4nu8d9qHBUaZQko2Ltk9BQ.png)

---

# Element Markdown

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-markdown

> Add a Markdown element in the page editor, then set up its content, text, positioning, and style.

Markdown is a way to format a document with simple text characters. It converts to HTML and looks the same in any browser. Text written in Markdown is easy to read and write because it needs no code.

Click "Add Element" and select "Markdown." Then configure the element's settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/bjSTFipE8EuwOxWCG78bww.png)

Click the element to select it. Its settings open on the right.
The settings panel for the Markdown element includes the following tools:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/d_Dd_8Cs5UO8i4OvgVitpA.png)

General Settings

Content. Click the Edit button to change the Markdown content.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/a35CSdqoG0CAltJWSiFswg.png)

A window opens where you can edit the Markdown. Make your changes there.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2N4yDCCIQEKLoMGMZjxVcg.png)

Text. You can change the font, font size, line height, and text color. Line height is set to automatic (auto) by default. Font size and line height can also be set in pixels (px). Click the cross to reset a value to auto.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VHfQjRz-pEitMMrxJXhkCw.png)

Positioning

For details on this section, see "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/03wbxxcTUEG0FHZ_nz9O7Q.png)

Style

Background. Change the element's background color or add a background image. When you add an image, more settings appear: the image itself, its size, and whether it repeats.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ODqzx0eu-EmvO24rjlKZmQ.png)

Text Shadow. Set the shadow's color, its offset (left, right, up, or down), and its blur (a sharp, strong shadow or a soft, faint one). Use a text shadow when the background isn't uniform and the text is hard to read in places, or to give the text more depth.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/C7cEQwaNf0ux6drlUo312g.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the element and adjust its offset, blur, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ktaxm0nM_kS_-EpnswljXQ.png)

Border. Customize the element's border: radius (rounds the corners), border style (no border, solid, dashed, or dotted), width, and color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ol3v2NWfmUua3RYi1Ny8Qg.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For details on this section, see "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/dtIOZIdCUEWD5VCEy-r8eg.png)

Advanced Settings

For details on this section, see "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Ebxihou21UeNfV5ebeoDgA.png)

---

# HTML Code Element

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/element-html-code

> Add your own HTML code to a page with the HTML Code element in the page editor.

The HTML Code element lets you add your own code to a page. Use it to build unique elements for your site. HTML code is usually written by developers and can represent almost anything: text, video, an image, a form, a counter, and more.
You can see the result only on a saved and published page of your site. In the page editor, you see a placeholder that says "HTML code will be rendered on the published page" instead of the final result.

## 
General Settings

Select the element to open its settings. A toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3Hxb_-zvUUSIvXfBC-u14g.png)

HTML Code. Click the "Edit" button to write or paste your HTML code. A window opens where you enter the code. When you're done, close the window. Your code is saved automatically.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Bx_YoK5QakGkgC4OjVPSlw.png)

## 
Positioning

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Xd-IkNGrKkC-gq57JrvVPg.png)

## 
Conditional Show / Hide

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show / Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qnX1lm5J5UOZjrSE7IPEbg.png)

## 
Advanced Settings

For more about the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1vVdOpv7GEudl-2Lhv-8bg.png)

---

# Positioning

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/positioning

> Set an element's size, alignment, margin, and padding in the Positioning tab of the page editor.

Positioning

Size. Here you can adjust the element's width and, for elements that support it, its height.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/q_TQ12WAGEqMOsBF2feqMQ.png)

Size is set to automatic (auto) by default. You can also enter a numeric value in percentages (%) or pixels (px). Click the cross to reset the value to auto.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/-UwmelG0JEWGjA_eoTo_ng.png)

Alignment. Here you can align the element within its block: left, center, or right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/W558loCtekSPu3r0vy62vA.png)

Margin. Adjust the space outside the element. Use margin when the element sits next to another object (text, an image, an icon, and so on) and you need to move it away from that object's edge.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/JzfrkcQt0EusvW6CsoI7jw.png)

Padding. Adjust the space between the element's content and its edges. Use padding when the content sits too close to the element's borders and you need to move it inward.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UVC6nI6Lj0KZScsS3iCKUA.png)

---

# Conditional Show/Hide

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide

> Show or hide an element by device, or by conditions such as signed-in status, filter membership, and URL.

# 
Conditional Show/Hide

Device Visibility. Choose the devices where this element appears and the devices where it's hidden.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/q7SxVPZRG0KsEWGSz7T5iA.png)

By default, the element is visible on all devices: desktop, tablet, and mobile. To hide it on a device, click that device so it becomes inactive.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AEOrmaCNxkON0EGUweiD0w.png)

Show Only If

# 

Show Only If. In this section, you can set a condition so the element is visible only to visitors who meet it.
Click "Add Condition" to open the list of conditions, then choose the one you need.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xS-CiHCqvka5efLcwUeIPA.png)

User is signed in. A signed-in user is a visitor to the AXL platform who has registered and is signed in to their own account. With this condition, the element is shown only to signed-in users.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pjRij-r2i0aMgIav1AXAmQ.png)

User is not signed in. With this condition, the element is shown only to visitors who aren't signed in, such as new users who haven't registered yet.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/uVpHXSCnNEi9tv65TIJXdA.png)

User matches the filter. With this condition, the element is shown only to users who match the selected filter. It works only if the user is signed in; otherwise the condition is never met.
Click "Choose" to pick the filter.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/c29r-LGFnkWnG9DlXv6cEg.png)

Then select an existing filter or create a new one. To create a filter, click "Create Filter."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/dXy9oATmwUS8YMkV3i5lnQ.png)

Set up the filter, then click "Save Filter."

1. Title. The name of the filter. You can change it.
2. Type. Choose a Personal or Shared filter. A shared filter is available to everyone in your account.
3. Add 'OR' Condition. Select a condition from the list. The filter includes users who meet at least one of the conditions you set.
4. Add 'AND' Condition Group. Select a condition from the list, or delete the group. The filter includes users who meet all the conditions you set.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/fIV6TgAT1kKvrT52-eTtpQ.png)

User doesn't match the filter. With this condition, the element is shown only to users who don't match the selected filter. It works only if the user is signed in; otherwise the condition is always met.
Click "Choose" to pick the filter.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/dnCxYAbI602Q1sJU0PAIAg.png)

URL Parameter Value. With this condition, the element is shown only when the page URL contains the parameter you specify with the matching value. It's mainly used for UTM tags. Enter the parameter name and its value.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/DOrFrBVo3EWQq73KGqEW8A.png)

URL Contains. With this condition, the element is shown only if the address the visitor opened contains the value you specify (for example, Facebook).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/lm6uf8csLU23DWB7DqNt5A.png)

Hide If

Hide If. In this section, choose a condition under which the element is hidden from the page visitor.
Click "Add Condition" to open the list of conditions, then choose the one you need. The condition settings are the same as in the previous section.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nGdAdrFUf0ajy6ID6-Qfnw.png)

---

# Animation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/animation

> Add motion to any page element and set its trigger, effect, speed, delay, and repeat count.

Animation is a visual effect that adds movement to elements on a page and makes your website more dynamic and interactive.
In the page editor, you can set up animation for any element.

Select the element and click "Add Animation":
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/hxflj9YxkkiCKeAlyMEI7g.png)

Preview. Click the preview button to see how the animation looks with the settings you've chosen.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AinYJNNY-EOMp9xVKP46Fw.png)

Delete Animation. To delete the animation, click the trash icon.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/PTTxtRVT60qYlIOWVGPPmg.png)

Trigger. Choose the event that starts the animation: page load, the element scrolling into view, the element scrolling out of view, a click, the cursor hovering over the element, or the cursor leaving the element.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/NVGo8c4af029aci--YMF-Q.png)

Animation. Choose an effect from a library of nearly 100 animations.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/LosuEb02x0CkxVeylQSGDA.png)

Speed. Choose how fast the animation plays.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/bFEREsKY_0elYv2IZibS9w.png)

Delay (ms). Set a delay, in milliseconds, before the animation starts.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/CmF3XT8g4EakcXNbxsWadA.png)

Repeat. Set how many times the animation repeats.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/a6k9SknMJECFlrVMdcKF-g.png)

---

# Advanced Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings

> Copy an element's ID and add custom CSS or CSS classes in the Advanced Settings tab of the page editor.

# 
Advanced Settings

Element Info. This section shows the element's ID. You can copy it and use it on other pages.

Custom CSS. Enter your own CSS code here to style the element. Use & as the selector for the element itself.

Custom CSS Classes. Add your own CSS classes to the element here. Separate multiple classes with spaces.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YU-s-zMjHEukOefGtqxrtw.png)

---

# Popups

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/pop-up-windows

> Learn what popups are, how to create them in the page editor, and how to set their size, padding, and style.

A popup is an element that appears on top of a web page in the browser. It "pops up" on its own, without a visitor's request, or appears when a visitor clicks something.

Marketers use popups to generate leads and to promote a company's services and products. You can create popups on your website, for example, to collect subscribers, offer a discount, or invite visitors to book a consultation.

Click a section to jump to its description:
How to Create a PopupSettings

## 
How to Create a Popup

Open the page editor. In the upper-right corner, click the "Popups" icon.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/gGcDOKNSq0qKZYGJVNwvcA.png)

In the panel that opens, click "Add Popup."

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/GrkEXnEJ3UuPZd-NLt-png.png)

The new popup appears in the list with a default name, such as "Popup 1." Click "Add Popup" again to add another popup to the list. Create as many popups as you need.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yoQLmbn7OEaKMbGoXgLDCA.png)

Click a popup's name in the list to open it for editing. Here you can design your popup. Click "Add Element" and add the elements you need: text, heading, picture, video, form, and so on. To learn how to design a page, read "[The Elements](https://docs.axl.tech/elements)" and the related articles.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_tkq_hljsU2q6yhSlAcYDA.png)

## 
Settings

Select the "Popup" element. The settings panel opens on the right.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2_p3Z5JgmE2CCilRySOAkw.png)

### 
General Settings

Size. Adjust the width of the popup.

Padding. Change the space inside the popup. Use it when an element in the popup needs to move away from the popup's borders.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qsJgIKdKcEqcsKCIVmCbZg.png)

### 
Style

Background. Choose the popup's background color. You can also add a background image. When you add an image, more image settings appear: image selection, size, repeat, and position inside the popup.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Rl7TJyUCj0iylqbTqcaG-A.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the popup and adjust its offset, blur, and color.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_fKaB6yTN0-CGSuZndirQg.png)

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text inside the popup and adjust its offset, blur, and color.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VLZBh1_XpkaxLRNbx8o3dg.png)

Border. Customize the border around the popup: corner radius (how rounded the corners are), style ("No Border," "Solid," "Dotted," or "Dashed"), color, and thickness.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/G8R39L7uN0aG8_zVWX66zg.png)

Advanced Settings

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/82ci_1InA0aJ7M3UApvctQ.png)

### 
Conditional Show/Hide

To learn more about the settings in this section, read "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/k5HeJp-3qkGWn0uY1025WA.png)

---

# Webinars

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinars

> Learn what the Webinars section does and how to create a webinar, copy it, and open its settings.

The "Webinars" section is your hub for interactive online events. You can run live streams with real-time audience interaction, or launch automated webinars: prerecorded presentations that run at the dates and times you schedule.

Click a topic below to jump to that section:

How to Create a Webinar

Webinar Settings Overview

## How to Create a Webinar

Go to Webinars → Webinars. Click "Create".

![Webinars list with the Create button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

A panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Name. Enter a title for your webinar.
2. Internal Name. Only you and your team can see this name. It isn't shown to attendees.
3. Description. Add a description of the webinar.
4. Scheduled Date. Pick the webinar date on the calendar and enter the start time. Then choose your time zone.

![Create Webinar panel with name, internal name, description, scheduled date, and time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/296588659f05aa8bb6d323933977661e0c1c79ca3219d832fa9af64e6c84b013.png)

Click "Create". The new webinar appears in the webinar list, which shows:

1. Name. The webinar title.
2. Status. The webinar's current status: Not Started, Live, or Completed.
3. Scheduled Date. The date and time the webinar is scheduled for. You can sort the list by this column.
4. Attendees. The number of people who registered for or actually attended the webinar.
5. Actions:

    - Edit (pencil) icon. Opens the webinar so you can change its title, description, date, time, and more.
    - Copy icon. Creates a copy of the webinar. There are two options:

        - Copy with Same Link. Creates an exact copy that uses the same access link as the original. This is handy for running the same webinar again for another group.
        - Copy with New Link. Creates a copy with a new, unique link. Use it when you run the webinar for another group and want to keep its attendees separate from the original's.
    - Delete (trash) icon. Removes the webinar from the list after you confirm.

![Webinars list with the Name, Status, Scheduled Date, Attendees, and Actions columns highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

Click the webinar name or the Edit icon to open the webinar's settings.

Creating the webinar adds it to the list; it does not start the broadcast. Add the content and registration settings, then open **Links → Sign In As → Host** to prepare the room. Start the event from the room when you are ready.

![Webinar row with its title link and the edit, copy, and delete actions highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

## Webinar Settings Overview

You've opened the webinar's settings, where you manage your webinar room. These tabs are at the top of the page:

1. Settings. Set up your webinar room here. Read more in the article "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".
2. Attendees. See the personal details of the webinar attendees. You can add new attendees or delete existing ones. Read more in the article "[Webinar Attendees](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-participants)".
3. Chat Messages. See the messages attendees sent. Read more in the article "[Chat Messages](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-messages)".
4. Automation. Set up the sequence of events and actions for the webinar. Read more in the article "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario)".
5. Statistics. See the webinar's statistics: registrations, attendees, attendance rate, and view rate. Read more in the article "[Webinar Statistics](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-statistics)".
6. Templates. Create and manage templates for automated webinars based on this webinar. Read more in the article "[Webinar Template](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-template)".

![Webinar header with the Settings, Attendees, Chat Messages, Automation, Statistics, and Replays tabs highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fdf5495b2d46b92177de9eb80e29684deb1c4b3a9780afc860ebf8f7f1853aa2.png)

At the top right, open the "Links" menu:

- Registration. Copy the registration link and send it to attendees. This step is optional: everyone who registers receives a link to the webinar automatically.
- Sign In As. Choose Guest, Host, or Moderator to enter the webinar room. Read more about the room in the article "[Webinar Room](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-room)".

![Room menu next to Enter as host with the Registration and Calendar links and the Guest, Moderator, and Host sign-in links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd5364edcbaaf9305fd81bb1b89880caa9569db5d9356045205891ae45a2d18a.png)

The top right also shows information about the webinar:

- Type. The type of webinar.
- Status. The webinar's current status: Not Started, Live, or Completed.
- Scheduled Date. The exact date and time of the webinar.
- Starts In. The time left until the webinar starts.

![Webinar header with the scheduled date and the countdown highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fdf5495b2d46b92177de9eb80e29684deb1c4b3a9780afc860ebf8f7f1853aa2.png)

For more on webinar settings, read these articles: "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)", "[Webinar Attendees](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-participants)", "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario)", "[Webinar Statistics](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-statistics)", "[Automated Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/autowebinars)".

---

# Webinar Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings

> Configure your webinar: general details, content and slides, registration, design, chat rules, and custom code.

A webinar's settings decide what it contains and how people get in: its title and the materials attendees can access, the registration process, the room's appearance and integrations with other services.

Open Webinars → Webinars, select the webinar, and open its Settings tab.

Click a topic below to jump to that section.

Webinar Settings

General Settings

Additional Settings

## Webinar Settings

Go to Webinars → Webinars. Create a new webinar or open an existing one. For more on creating a webinar, see the article "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".

![Webinars list with Northstar Academy · Leadership Masterclass, its status, date, attendees and actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f6ced01b4a26e796aca0ccf85eb478de88a05c53f95996f978a4dbe43566fe53.png)

The menu on the left has two groups:

1. General Settings. The most important webinar options, which determine its content and what materials attendees can access.
2. Additional Settings. Options that affect the registration process, appearance, and integration with other services.

![Webinar settings navigation beside the General form.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b183160a9ce369e0153f385576f6607db317b24aabe651e41214650bcce07703.png)

## General Settings

The "General" section shows the details you entered when you created the webinar:

- Title. You can change the title. Attendees see it in the webinar list, in invitations, and on the webinar page.
- Internal Name. A name that only you and the colleagues who manage the webinar can see. It isn't shown to attendees.
- Description. The description you added when you created the webinar.
- Closing Message. Write the text attendees see right after the webinar ends. Thank them for attending, offer extra materials (such as the recording or the presentation), and add a call to action (such as subscribing to your newsletter or buying a product).
- Redirect to another URL when the webinar ends. Check the box to send attendees to a specific page when the webinar ends. For example, point them to a product page you promoted during the webinar, a feedback form, or a testimonial page. For more on creating a website page on the AXL platform, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
- Comment. Add a note about the webinar. Attendees can't see this comment.
- Domain. Use your own branded domain instead of the platform's domain. For more on connecting your existing domain to the AXL platform, see the article "[Domains](https://docs.axl.tech/domains)".
- Link. The web address of the webinar's registration page. By default, it ends with the webinar number. You can replace that part with your own text (Latin letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores only) and copy the full link.
- Scheduled Date. Shows the date and time of the webinar and its time zone. You can change them here.
- Estimated Duration. Set to 2 hours by default. To change it, select hours and minutes from the list.
- Blocked IPs. Add IP addresses that can't access the webinar.

![Webinar General settings with title, description, closing message, domain, link, schedule, and duration.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b36d316b52a47e3a2526e49993a947acdf65b45c2adc47582f1997fbbb79d277.png)

Click "Save".

## Content & Slides

The "Content & Slides" section holds the main materials you plan to use during the webinar: presentations, videos, demos, widgets, and more. Choose what you want to add:

- Presentations. A PDF document, or a set of them, for the webinar.
- Streams. Materials you can broadcast live during the webinar.
- Videos. Videos you play during the webinar. They can be recorded in advance or broadcast live. For more on adding videos to the AXL platform, see the article "[Video](https://docs.axl.tech/video)".
- Widgets. Website elements you embed in the webinar, such as a registration form, a button, or a payment form for your products. For more on creating a widget, see the article "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)".

![Content &amp; Slides settings for presentations, streams, AXL Live Stream, videos, and widgets.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d865787f43c3d58572b06ca2e52df092b33afb375e2286fe7de7dfa3a37eb911.png)

To add a presentation, click "Select Files". In the window that opens, upload your file, then click it to select it. The presentation appears in the list.
To add a stream, paste a link to the broadcast video in the field and click "Add Stream". The stream appears in the list.
Add a video the same way: use "Select Videos", or paste a video link and click "Add Video".

Check the presentation's **Conversion Status** before opening it in the room. Adding a file to the webinar's content list does not automatically put it on the stage; enter as **Host** and use the relevant **Share** control to select it.

![Content &amp; Slides with the Select Files button for presentations highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d865787f43c3d58572b06ca2e52df092b33afb375e2286fe7de7dfa3a37eb911.png)

The list shows:

1. Preview. The first slide of your presentation.
2. File Name. The title of your presentation or content.
3. Date Added. The exact date and time the file was uploaded.
4. Conversion Status. The processing status of the presentation: pending or completed.
5. Actions. Download the file to your computer or delete it from the list.

![Presentations table in Content &amp; Slides with Select Files and the northstar-masterclass-slides PDF: preview, file name, date added, Pending conversion status, download and delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/46547c9e1fe3bfa36d1db8a4c0cc719dca4918bf060993ae9b4d55e7b3251913.png)

You can add widgets to the webinar room so attendees can fill out a registration form or pay for a product without leaving the page. A button or form opens the widget in a pop-up window in the center of the screen. To add one, click "Select Widgets".

![Content &amp; Slides with the Select Widgets button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d865787f43c3d58572b06ca2e52df092b33afb375e2286fe7de7dfa3a37eb911.png)

In the window that opens, select a widget you've already created, or create a new one by clicking "Create". For more on creating and configuring a widget, read the article "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)".

![Widgets picker with Create Widget and the account's widgets.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08397d9c7bb88b1a39ac246e257636f890c467b216606b4c8c7cfffe9f8affe1.png)

## Downloadable Files

In the "Downloadable Files" section, you can add files to use during the webinar, such as PDF documents, templates, checklists, examples, and extra resources.
If you select at least one file, attendees see a "Files" tab in the webinar room. Downloadable resources add value to your webinar and encourage attendees to take part.

![Downloadable Files settings with one attached file.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/07ac683353754b9009960b06d8251d3b355a40f1f58f977cdf0075a7fb2ce6c2.png)

## Additional Settings

The "Additional Settings" group controls the webinar room itself. These settings affect the registration process, appearance, and integration with other services.

![Registration form with the Email field and its Confirmation option highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8837e9da5b336e0067d7b6fd483049731a0c72e3fc388c3a8dd2a94e6f71cfe.png)

## Registration

Registration settings. The "Registration" section lets you choose the fields attendees fill in when they register (name, email, birthday, gender, and so on). You can make some fields required and leave others optional.

By default, the form includes the attendee's email address and name. Click "Add Fields" and select a field from the list. The field is added to the webinar's registration form automatically.

![Registration settings with the Add Fields button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8837e9da5b336e0067d7b6fd483049731a0c72e3fc388c3a8dd2a94e6f71cfe.png)

These fields are available for registration:

- Email. Use it to automatically send confirmation emails, reminders about the webinar date and time, and a login link.
- First Name.
- Last Name.
- Phone.
- Birthday.
- Gender.
- Terms of Service. Add a link to the document that sets the terms for using the webinar materials. Use the terms that apply to your webinar, and make the linked document available to attendees before they register.

Check the boxes next to the fields attendees must fill in to register. Think about which fields you really need: the fewer the fields, the more likely people are to finish registering.
Then click "Save".

Open **Links → Registration** to check the saved registration page. Confirm the title, required fields, and time zone before sharing the link.

![Registration form with the Terms of Service field highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8837e9da5b336e0067d7b6fd483049731a0c72e3fc388c3a8dd2a94e6f71cfe.png)

Registration via Chatbots. You can also let people register through a chatbot and its channels.
Select the chatbot, then check the boxes next to the channels attendees can use to register for the webinar. Next, copy the channel link and send it to your audience.

![Registration via Chatbots with the chatbot selector highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8837e9da5b336e0067d7b6fd483049731a0c72e3fc388c3a8dd2a94e6f71cfe.png)

Access restrictions. You can set up a closed webinar. In that case, only attendees who meet the conditions and filters you choose can register. Check the box "Restrict access by filter".

![Access Restrictions with the Restrict access by filter checkbox highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8837e9da5b336e0067d7b6fd483049731a0c72e3fc388c3a8dd2a94e6f71cfe.png)

A window titled "Access Restrictions" opens, where you set up the contact filter. Select the filter conditions you want from the list. For more on creating a filter, see the article "[Filters & Search Criteria](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

![Access Restrictions filter with an Email Confirmed condition.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5002d448e59bf2c06abd91ba8ee4198081fecee3d17dc36cad18cbe19c1ad5c2.png)

## Design

Open the webinar's **Settings → Design**. Choose **Registration** for the sign-up page or **Waiting room** for the page attendees see before the webinar. Each page has its own design.

- **Theme**: **Like the viewer's** lets the page follow the viewer's light or dark appearance. **Always its own** keeps the page's own colors. This setting is separate from the editor's light/dark preview controls.
- **Change template**: choose a starting design. Confirming a template change replaces the page's existing content and makes the replacement visible immediately. The confirmation also lets you apply the matching design to the other page; review that checkbox before confirming.
- **Design**: click an element in the preview to select it. Use **Text Color**, **Background Color**, spacing and typography controls to style the selected block. Keep text and buttons readable against their backgrounds. A block supplied by webinar data shows a hint explaining where to change that content.
- **Registration form**: on the Registration page, select the form in Design to open **Registration Form**, its fields and required-field options, and **Button Text**. Save changed form settings with the controls in that panel. The default button text is **Register Now**.
- **Code** and **Styles**: open the HTML or page styling controls when you need to adjust the design beyond the selected element.
- **Preview controls**: check the page with **Light theme**, **Dark theme**, and the mobile, tablet and desktop controls. Use **Open page** for a separate page preview. Check that the title, date, form and images remain readable at narrow widths.

The editor saves ordinary page edits as a draft; wait for **Saved**. Use **Publish** when the design is ready for viewers. Changing a template is an immediate replacement, so it is not the same as saving an ordinary draft edit.

![Current webinar Design settings with Registration selected, page editor controls and the existing registration-page preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d9dae63c2532b5a5e9821ef7fa9364045e0893cafde924a3d8360a9365fc5b4c.jpg)
Registration and Waiting room have separate page designs. This is the Registration page in the editor.

![Registration Form selected in Design, showing Add Fields, Email confirmation and required controls, First Name and Button Text.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c82bfe39af55e2a809ead5e6b47269caff7d1b4a3252d6de5e20b8a6c5dc66c1.jpg)
Select the registration form to inspect its fields and Button Text. The preview reflects this existing webinar’s current design.

![Current webinar Design settings with Waiting room selected and its page preview, date, countdown and calendar control.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/84506458dfe3e593c3271a892579a4f62a3c4d43818bb5442574f025e362f856.jpg)
The Waiting room page has its own preview. This existing webinar’s scheduled date is in the past, so its displayed countdown is zero.

## Webinar Room

In the Webinar Room section, you set the rules for attendees:

1. Enable chat. Check the box to give attendees a chat. Uncheck it to turn the chat off.
2. Block guest messages that contain links. Check the box to stop attendees from sending messages with links.
3. Hide attendees' last names. Shows only first names in the chat and the attendee list.
4. Hide attendee count. Check the box to hide the number of attendees shown in the webinar room.
5. Block access from multiple tabs. Check the box so one person can't open the webinar in multiple browser tabs or on multiple devices.
6. Enable questions. Check the box to add a section for attendee questions to the chat.
7. Allow questions no more than once every. Limit how often each attendee can send a question to the chat: once every 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 1 minute 30 seconds.
8. Filter blocked words in chat. Create a list of words that are automatically blocked in the chat.

![Webinar Room settings for chat, attendee names, questions, and blocked words.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64c333b03d1360f9d3a6cedaad65e331868c08a1ac7d05c514d8f75fdea387a4.png)

To add a glossary of blocked words, click "Manage Glossaries".

![Blocked Word Glossaries selector with Manage Glossaries.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e9eb8076fd11eca9dcf87f93b6a62ec53ea4d0942ca60653d63365b98057bf7f.png)

In the window that opens, click "Create Glossary" and fill in the fields. Click "Create", then add the new glossary of blocked words to the webinar settings.

![New glossary with a title, description, and three blocked words.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d5353fd31ad526948d8717825141b4fd63dfdb52d0420cd6c3b2146e47021930.png)

"Bulk Add Words" lets you add several blocked words at once as a list instead of one at a time.

Click "Bulk Add Words" and add your list. Put each word or phrase on its own line.

![Bulk Add Words dialog with one word or phrase per line.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a83a93fbfb4585b0904e76f16a95d8c3244ac77f4bd16704149541ef25000e4f.png)

## Integrations

The "Integrations" section lets you extend the webinar room and connect third-party services by adding custom HTML code to your webinar pages.
Add custom code for the webinar registration page:

- Code in the &lt;head&gt; Tag. Paste HTML code that goes inside the &lt;head&gt; tag on the webinar pages.
- Code in the &lt;body&gt; Tag. Paste HTML code that goes inside the &lt;body&gt; tag on the webinar pages. Use this field for scripts, widgets, and other elements that should appear or run on the page.

![Webinar Integrations with code for the head and body tags.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/71790011cf9415c5021e961374fb8178069dbd778f36db18538d50b040dba567.png)

Click "Save".

---

# Set Up Webinar Registration with Chatbot Reminders

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/setting-up-registration-for-a-webinar-with-reminders-via-a

> Create a webinar, build a registration page, and send attendees reminders through a chatbot such as Telegram or Viber.

Reminders in a messaging app help registered people remember to come to your webinar. Below, the pieces are connected step by step: a webinar and its automation, a registration page with a form, the form's automation and a thank-you page that sends people to the chatbot.

Select a section to jump to it:

Prepare a connected chat channel and chatbot before setting up registration. The website form registers the contact for the webinar; the thank-you page then asks the contact to open the chatbot. These are separate steps, so check both registration and the messaging-channel connection.

Create and Configure a Webinar

Create a Webinar Automation

Create a Website Page with a Registration Form

Create a Form Automation

Create a Thank-You Page

Add the Thank-You Page to the Form

## Create and Configure a Webinar

Go to the "Webinars" section and click "Create".

![Webinars list with the Create button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

In the "Create Webinar" window that opens, fill in the fields. Enter a name for the webinar. Attendees will see this name. Set the webinar date and time zone. Click "Create and Open". Now you can set up the webinar.

![Create Webinar panel with name, internal name, description, scheduled date, and time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/296588659f05aa8bb6d323933977661e0c1c79ca3219d832fa9af64e6c84b013.png)

In the webinar settings, go to "Registration" and find the "Registration via Chatbots" section. Select the chatbot and the chat channels people will use to register. To learn how to create chat channels and a chatbot, see "[Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels)" and "[Chatbots](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-bots)".

![Webinar Registration settings with the registration form fields, chatbot registration, and access restrictions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8837e9da5b336e0067d7b6fd483049731a0c72e3fc388c3a8dd2a94e6f71cfe.png)

To learn how to set up and run a webinar, see "[Hosting a Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/hosting-a-webinar)".

## Create a Webinar Automation

In the webinar, go to the "Automation" tab. It already contains a default webinar automation, which is created automatically when you create a webinar. You can use this template and add your own steps. Select an event from the list and drag it into the workspace.

Next, add an action and connect it to the event. You can create one or more connections between events and actions.
For details about actions, see “[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)”.

![Webinar Automation tab: Registered for Webinar and two Webinar Reminder events, each connected to Send Message.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/464418d19583268403cb8060397a777eeae169f19ae1d825f47d0b4f3150da04.png)

Configure each action: click the gear icon on that action and choose Configure Step. Check the event's settings separately.

### Set the reminder times

Use Webinar Reminder events in the webinar's **Automation** tab to send reminders relative to the event. A regular Delay after registration waits from the time each person registers; it does not mean one hour before the webinar.

1. Check the webinar's scheduled date and time zone first.
2. In the event list, choose Events → Webinars & Meetings → Webinar Reminder. Open its gear menu and choose **Configure Step**.
3. For a reminder to all registered contacts, leave **Attendee Status** at **Any**. Choose **Online** or **Offline** only when you deliberately want to limit the audience by whether they are currently in the room.
4. Under Automation Start, choose the **Before Webinar Starts** option. Set the days, hours, and minutes as shown below, then click **Save**.
5. Connect that timer event to its own reminder-message action. Configure the message and its webinar sign-in link, then save the action.
6. Add a second timer event for the second reminder, with its own timing and message. Reopen both timer settings to check the saved values.

| Reminder | Days | Hours | Minutes |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| One hour before the webinar | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Ten minutes before the webinar | 0 | 0 | 10 |

**Before** uses the scheduled webinar start. **After** uses the time the webinar actually starts, so use it for follow-up during the event rather than a reminder before it. These events target contacts registered for the selected webinar; the message channel must also be connected to the contact. Do not rely on a reminder whose scheduled time has already passed to reach a late registrant. Provide the sign-in link in the registration confirmation as well.

![Webinar Reminder Step Settings with Before Webinar Starts selected, Days 0, Hours 1, Minutes 0, Offline attendee status, and Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/823679bdf8a06f699f8e49785df0566323cdc632ff0f6bb06c3edb0565612459.png)
One-hour reminder timing: Before Webinar Starts, 0 days, 1 hour and 0 minutes. Check the intended Attendee Status separately before saving.

![Send Message step menu with Configure Step, Copy Step, and Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7b56038eab5e6bf26c7311d677d8582727b2f02c615d4936e7c7f83cffe73cec.png)

In the settings of the "Send Message (Chat/Email)" action, you can add variables.
A variable is a placeholder that is automatically replaced with the data you selected, such as the contact's name, the webinar name, or the link to sign in to the webinar. When the message is sent, each variable is replaced with real data. For example, add the "Webinar sign-in link" variable, and the message will contain a link the attendee can follow.

![Send Message step settings with the chat message, template variables, buttons, and delivery channels.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/513ac16a40766ed6ef7f8389a9c91666f66483409456503ab70ee4de4e39089b.png)

Click "Add Variables". A list of variables opens on the right. Select the ones you need.

![Add Variables panel with the Webinar group, including the webinar link variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5ebb18a1e93078b627a6b8c0374b200239c7fc5736fe1d3862cc666ef3bd1f81.png)

When you finish setting up the webinar automation, make sure the "Active" toggle is on.

![Active webinar automation with registration and reminder message branches.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/464418d19583268403cb8060397a777eeae169f19ae1d825f47d0b4f3150da04.png)

## Create a Website Page with a Registration Form

Go to the "Sites" section and open an existing site or create a new one. To learn how to create a website, see "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
Next, open the "Pages" tab and click "New Page".

![Website Pages tab: the website name, its link under the name, and the list of pages with their links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/af842475a0a45bedf30588fe809b9dce82447f1b428d669d274c05a413de8421.png)
New Page is above the list of pages.

A window opens. Go to the "Create from Scratch" tab and fill in the fields: enter the page title, add a short description, and enter the page URL using Latin characters. Click "Create and Open".

![New page window, Create from Scratch tab: Title, Internal Name, Short Description, Page URL, Make Available, Create and Create and Open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f4fe9bd638ae05ac69abe9642230b0176b0f63e0c30b2a6177d3e3dc018beaab.png)
Create and Open creates the page and opens it in the editor.

On the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to add the registration form. For example: "Add a short sign-up form below the hero: First name and Email fields and a button labeled "Reserve my seat"". You can ask for text, images, or a video on the page in the same way. If you already have the thank-you page link, include it in the request so the form redirects there (step 6 of this article). To learn more, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

![Page editor: a request to add a sign-up form that redirects to a thank-you page, the AI Assistant reply, and the form with First Name, Email Address and Reserve my seat in the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/904e55f76a882cb891d5a9fdc4e9d26c89e210e29b65fee68732439c208653ac.png)
The assistant adds the form to the page draft.

Check the form in the preview, then click "Publish".

To make the page available to visitors, turn on the "Page Status" switch. Copy the page link under the page name in the upper-left corner. You can send this link to people so they can open the webinar registration form.

![Page editor header: page title, its link with a copy icon, and the Page Status switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c5bf77dd4c0532fa62286f9247b1de8247382774b88a8fa32c799f0073ce8e15.png)
The page link is under the page name; the Page Status switch makes the page available.

## Create a Form Automation

On the registration page, open the "Automation" tab. To create the form automation, select the "Form Submitted" event and drag it into the workspace. This event triggers when a user fills out and submits the form.

![Page Automation tab: the step list and a Form Submitted event for any form on the page, connected to a Notification.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ceaa35beae8c1b547dc99bb3b231daf9666bbe70ed8d7e4d09bbd9d27307aa9d.png)
Form Submitted runs when someone submits a form on this page.

Add the "Register for Webinar" action to the automation, then connect the event and the action.

![Page Automation tab: Register for Webinar found in the step list and connected to the Form Submitted event; the step still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c4f4be4451cf75b392c63b8255a9ad6d4271b02e256ff7997e867f210c48ccf4.png)
Connect Form Submitted to Register for Webinar, then configure the step.

Now configure the action. Click the gear icon on the action, then select "Configure Step". In the step settings window that opens, choose a webinar from the list and click "Save".
When you finish setting up the form automation, make sure the "Active" toggle is on.

![Step Settings for Register for Webinar: Type Webinar, Northstar Academy · Leadership Masterclass selected, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/522492743e173f418f6006cbd758cd37a16c8c9e81c243b7134e31e9a9c8d436.png)
Choose the webinar and click Save.

## Create a Thank-You Page

Create another page on the site the same way: on the "Pages" tab, click "New Page", go to "Create from Scratch", and click "Create and Open".

First, copy the chatbot link. Go to the "Webinars" section and open the webinar you created earlier. In the webinar settings, find the "Registration via Chatbots" section and copy the link to the webinar chatbot.

![Webinar Registration settings with a Telegram chatbot registration link.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/lIw7EN-EnkacnJukzctPqQ.png)

In the thank-you page editor, on the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to build the page and add a button that opens the chatbot link you copied. For example: "Build a short thank-you page: a heading, one sentence asking people to get reminders in our chatbot, and a button "Get reminders in Telegram" that opens [chatbot link]". Ask for more buttons, such as one for Viber, in the same way.

![Page editor of the Thank You page: a request for a short thank-you page with a Get reminders in Telegram button, the AI Assistant reply, and the generated page in the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/80b47591a9068144f694c421d3fbe91efcd1367d8f5d30fbbaa6ddf08593064d.png)
The assistant builds the page and links the button to the chatbot.

Check the page in the preview, then click "Publish".
Now, when someone clicks the button on the thank-you page, the link opens the webinar chatbot.

## Add the Thank-You Page to the Form

Make sure the thank-you page’s "Page Status" switch is on so visitors can open it. Copy the link to the thank-you page under the page name in the upper-left corner.

![Thank You page header: page link with a copy icon and the Page Status switch set to Available.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82c253a74e87600c5c64576c510afdddae028d18c72f53bf7d4ca25bd88b9836.png)
Copy the thank-you page link under the page name.

Go back to the registration page. On the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant to redirect the form to the thank-you page and paste the link into your request. For example: "After someone submits the sign-up form, redirect them to [thank-you page link]".

![Page editor: a request to add a sign-up form that redirects to a thank-you page, the AI Assistant reply, and the form with First Name, Email Address and Reserve my seat in the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/904e55f76a882cb891d5a9fdc4e9d26c89e210e29b65fee68732439c208653ac.png)
The redirect is part of the form request.

When you finish setting up the webinar registration form, click "Publish".

Now, when someone submits the form to register for the webinar, they are redirected to the thank-you page, which invites them to get webinar reminders in the chatbot (Viber, Telegram, and so on). When they click "Get a reminder in Viber" or "Get a reminder in Telegram", the messenger opens in the chatbot.
The webinar timer events schedule the reminders you configured. Confirm that the contact is registered for the webinar and connected to the chosen chatbot channel; opening the thank-you page alone does not complete the messaging-channel connection.

Check the full path with a demonstration contact: submit the form, confirm that the contact appears on the webinar's **Attendees** tab, open the thank-you page's chatbot link, and confirm that the reminder automation uses the correct webinar and time zone. A successful redirect alone does not prove registration or message delivery.

---

# Webinar Attendees

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-participants

> Add, search, and manage webinar attendees, see their details and roles, and export the list.

Webinar attendees are guests who registered for the webinar on their own through your site or whom an admin added manually. Attendees also include account administrators, the host, and moderators.

Click a topic below to jump to that section:

How to Add a Webinar Attendee

List of Attendees

Webinar Attendee Details

Attendee Roles

Search for a Webinar Attendee

Export Users

## How to Add a Webinar Attendee

Go to Webinars → Webinars. Create a new webinar or open an existing one. For more on creating a webinar, see the article "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".

![Webinars list with the Create button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

Open the "Attendees" tab. It lists the people who registered for the webinar on their own through your site and the people an admin added manually.
To add an attendee manually, click "Add Attendee".

![Webinar Attendees tab with two registered attendees.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4081b8de81127e298ad3e6037c6b403ad2a3c4c129af23b3489742da6ce40a4e.png)

A panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Contact. Select an attendee from your contact list, which contains the registered users of your account. If the person is already in your account, you can find them in the list, and the remaining fields fill in automatically.
2. Email. Enter the attendee's email address. This field is required.
3. First Name. Enter the attendee's first name.
4. Last Name. Enter the attendee's last name.
5. Role. Select a role from the list:

    - Guest. The main audience of the webinar: people who come to get information, ask questions, and join the discussion. Guests have the lowest level of access, usually limited to watching and interacting through chat and polls. This role is selected by default.
    - Host. The face of the webinar: an expert who shares their knowledge and experience. The host has full control over the presentation, microphone, and video (if used).
    - Moderator. The person who provides technical and organizational support for the webinar. Moderators have a high level of access, focused on managing the webinar rather than presenting content. They can access the webinar platform's settings.

Click "Add".

![Add Attendee panel with contact, email, first name, last name, and role.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fb69edbf59446864efb52a3bc6e66a39f54dc99547afc86e598e045b42c90a9e.png)

## List of Attendees

After you add an attendee, they appear in the list, which shows:

1. Contact. The attendee's email address, first name, and last name, as entered at registration. If the attendee is a host or moderator, their role is shown here too.
2. Registration Date. The exact date and time the attendee registered for the webinar.
3. Attendance. Shows whether the attendee joined the webinar. If they did, you see how long they stayed in the webinar room, both as hours, minutes, and seconds and as a percentage of the webinar's total time.
4. Source. Where the attendee registered for the webinar.
5. Affiliate. The affiliate whose link the attendee used to register.
6. Actions:

    - The link icon. Click it to show the webinar link for this specific attendee, host, or moderator, and copy it.
    - The "Webinar Chat Messages" icon. Opens a window with the attendee's messages in the webinar chat.
    - The info icon. Opens a window with detailed information about the attendee and their session.
    - The lock icon. Click it to ban the attendee after you confirm.
    - The delete icon. Click it to remove the attendee from the list after you confirm.

![Attendee table with the Contact, Registration Date, Attendance, Source, Affiliate, and Actions columns highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4081b8de81127e298ad3e6037c6b403ad2a3c4c129af23b3489742da6ce40a4e.png)

## Webinar Attendee Details

Click the info icon next to an attendee. A panel opens on the right with detailed information about them.

Check the email and webinar before using an attendee's personal link or changing a restriction. **Muted**, **Chat Blocked**, and **Blocked** describe different controls: message visibility, permission to send chat messages, and access to the webinar.

Attendee details:

- Email. Taken from the attendee's contact card.
- First Name. The attendee's first name.
- Last Name. The attendee's last name.
- Phone. The attendee's phone number.
- Gender. The attendee's gender, if they provided it at registration.
- Birthday. The attendee's date of birth, if they provided it at registration.
- Blocked. Shows whether the attendee is banned.
- Muted. Shows whether the attendee's chat messages are hidden from other guests. Hosts, moderators, and the message author can still see them. This setting does not control microphone or playback volume.
- Chat Blocked. Shows whether the attendee is blocked from sending chat messages.
- Role. The attendee's role: host, moderator, or guest.
- Attendance. A graph that marks in green when the attendee was in the webinar. You can also see when they joined, when they left the webinar room, and whether they came back.

Session information:

- Date Started. The date and time the attendee's session began.
- Pages Viewed. The number of pages the attendee viewed.
- Enter Page. Click to open the page the attendee entered from.
- Enter Page Parameters. Extra parameters passed from the entry page, if any (for example, UTM parameters for tracking ad campaigns).
- Exit Page. The page the attendee left the webinar from.
- Location. The country and city where the attendee was, determined by IP address.
- Browser. The type and version of the browser the attendee used.
- Device. The type of device the attendee used (for example, "Computer", "Phone", or "Tablet").
- Screen. The screen resolution of the attendee's device.
- Source. The website the attendee clicked through from.

## Attendee Roles

The attendee list shows each person's role:

1. A guest is an attendee who registered on their own or received a personal email invitation from the organizer. Guests can watch the online event, use the live chat, and see all the materials. They can join interactive elements such as polls, quizzes, or votes to share their opinions or test their knowledge, and they can ask the moderator or other attendees questions in the chat. A guest does not need to be an account administrator to join the webinar.
2. The moderator is an administrator of the account who helps the host organize and run the webinar. Moderators provide technical support, monitor the chat, answer questions, and keep order during the webinar. A moderator can delete messages, ban attendees, reply in writing, send announcements to the chat, and more.
3. A host is the person who runs the webinar and shares their knowledge and experience or presents a product or service. The host is the face of the webinar and is responsible for the quality of its content and presentation. The host creates and presents content, keeps the audience engaged, answers attendees' questions, and more.

![Role filter with Guest, Host, and Moderator options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6925bd7629fe1d961021252a9a49332d215595377a5d3dbd909c079c53297bf4.png)

## Search for a Webinar Attendee

The search bar and filter at the top of the section help you find the right attendee quickly:

- Search. Enter the attendee's email address or name in the search box.
- Add Filter. Click "Add Filter" and choose a condition from the list:

    - Deleted. Shows attendees who registered for the webinar but were later removed from the list (for example, by the organizer).
    - Role. Shows attendees with a specific role.
    - Attendance. Shows attendees who attended the webinar for a certain amount of time.

![Attendee search and the Add Filter menu with Attendance, Deleted, and Role.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4f0d516a901bc2b3c0de05c07fb1e2ff820d39e21abffe2d162c79535c6655dc.png)

## Export Users

At the top right of the page is the "Export Users As…" button.

![Export Users As menu offering XLSX and CSV.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0628c078c2cc3954c7523b6c0bf3ecd15b9b9645aa7800e4cc328ec55badbdf.png)

Your exports are saved and shown in the "Export Sessions" panel, which also shows how many have run. Click "Details" to work with the saved exports.

![Completed attendee export notification with the session name, record count, and Action.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/73c06a7ca63a16f42ac272441cffd94e6fb60bf9c9a7dfc14b9fc2dd381ba1f2.png)

In the window that opens, you'll find all the exports you've created. To download a file again, click "Actions" and select "Download".

![Attendee export Action menu with Download, Download and Close, and Close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7f572ae129f01e5733213bedb524c426bc087308eb4196ee37fd667ed5b7a464.png)

---

# Hosting a Webinar

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/hosting-a-webinar

> Open the webinar room, share a presentation or stream, start and end your webinar, and follow the attendee chat.

Hosting a webinar means running it live from the webinar room: you go on air, show a presentation and talk with attendees in the chat.

Click a topic below to jump to that section:

Opening the Webinar Room

Adding a Presentation

Attendee Chat

## Opening the Webinar Room

Go to Webinars → Webinars. Select a webinar from the list and click its name or the Edit icon.
For more on creating a webinar, see the article "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".

![Webinars list with Northstar Academy · Leadership Masterclass, its status, date, attendees and actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f6ced01b4a26e796aca0ccf85eb478de88a05c53f95996f978a4dbe43566fe53.png)

To enter the room before starting the webinar, open the "Links" menu at the top right and click "Host" under "Sign In As".
The host has the highest level of access, with full control over the presentation, microphone, and video.

![Room menu next to Enter as host with the Guest, Moderator, and Host sign-in links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd5364edcbaaf9305fd81bb1b89880caa9569db5d9356045205891ae45a2d18a.png)

The webinar room opens. Read more about how the room works in the article "[Webinar Room](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-room)".

Entering as **Host** does not start the event. Prepare the stream and presentation first; the separate **Start Webinar** confirmation makes the session live.

### Go live with AXL

You can also broadcast right from the room, with no outside streaming service: click **Share Stream** and choose **Go Live from Browser** or **External Stream** under **AXL Live Stream**. The studio, going live, screen sharing, OBS, guests, restreaming and the recording are described in "[Live Broadcast in AXL](https://docs.axl.tech/live-broadcast)".

![Host room before the start: empty stage with Share Stream and the chat sidebar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96d1abcf667f73a1b19f5311dafc6b20fa200ff0309dd9001bec3ba9211da579.png)

## Adding a Presentation

If the stage shows "Share Stream", first switch the layout to "Presentation" with the layout button in the room header. Click "Share Presentation". A window opens with the presentations you've already uploaded. Click the presentation you want to share. If the list is empty, click "Upload a presentation" and add your file. A new file shows "Still being prepared" until its slides are ready; click "Refresh the list" to check again.

![Share Presentation panel with Presentations of this webinar, the northstar-masterclass-slides file still being prepared, Refresh the list and Upload a presentation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cd942fc74ded994feca059f30883cef91436e503e1de1b8743c664a6dad4c3c8.png)

If you chose an outside streaming service instead of the built-in AXL broadcast, start your stream there and add its public playback link in the webinar room.

Click "Share Stream". A window opens. Under "Or a stream by a link", paste your broadcast link into the field and click "Add". Then click "Show" next to the stream to share it.

![Share Stream panel with a field for a YouTube, Vimeo, Twitch, or Facebook video link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebc9eea9648b50cafd1b0aee079e7f78e5e788223e9ee1773b1ae4044cecf5df.png)

The broadcast window now shows the stream you started. Use the layout button in the room header to show the Stream on its own or choose Presentation and Camera. With a presentation, drag the camera to a suitable position and resize it from its inner corner. Viewers see the same placement.

![Webinar room as host with the Presentation and Camera layout: a shared video stream in the corner over the slide What we will cover, and the chat panel on the right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/88fb2964ca457b5c5d9d8f4a979a5c18db0cd2177e6ce1b64996deb03045178d.png)

After you add your stream and presentation, you can start the webinar. Click "Start Webinar" in the room header. In the window that opens, click "Start Webinar" again to confirm.

![Start-webinar confirmation with an equipment-check notice and Start Webinar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/25b524fe3dee036689b7d8a7999328b1b2a0cbf01c62163f4cf0afe4435074ad.png)

The webinar is live. In the header, the "Start Webinar" button turns into an "End Event" button with "live" under it. Attendees can now see your broadcast and presentation.

## Attendee Chat

The "Chat" panel is on the right. Here you can see messages from attendees, as well as their questions, the number of attendees, and their personal details.

Please note that when you enter the webinar room or refresh the page, the last 30 comments load. This speeds up the system. You can see the full list of attendee messages in the webinar's "[Chat Messages](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-messages)" tab.

![Live webinar room with a host chat message and the End Event button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a368687a8b6e6de7028e58e4b91821ecca65689385a0b878fa35aac1f626fd1b.png)

To stop the broadcast and end the webinar, click "End Event" in the header. Then confirm in the window that opens.

![End-webinar confirmation explaining the waiting room and the 5-minute resume window.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/765b05fdaf554445c769d46fbb5a974d5fe3945838e56842dc02a553c8b81e9f.png)

Recording behavior depends on the stream source. To reuse the webinar in an automated session, create a webinar template and check that its media and events are available before scheduling it. Read more in the article "[Automated Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/autowebinars)".

### Check the recording

After an AXL broadcast ends, its recording is processed for **Videos**. In the webinar settings, open **Content & Slides**, find the **AXL Live Stream** section and check its recording status. Wait while processing is in progress. When it says the recording is saved, click **Open Recording**; if it reports a failure, do not assume a replay is available.

The native recording contains the broadcast picture: cameras, the shared screen, on-screen overlays, and sounds played live. The room chat, polls, reactions, widgets, and buttons below the picture are separate and do not appear in that video. For a stream hosted by another service, check that service's recording settings separately.

---

# Webinar Room

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-room

> How to enter the webinar room as a host, connect a stream, share a presentation or video, add buttons, and start and end the webinar.

The webinar room is a virtual space for running online events such as webinars, conferences, lectures, presentations, and training sessions. Use it to present to your audience and interact with them in real time.

You create a webinar in your account, then open the webinar room. To broadcast, connect a live stream from another service such as YouTube, Vimeo, or Facebook, or go live with AXL's built-in live streaming.

In the webinar room, you control the presentation and interact with attendees.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

How to Enter the Webinar Room

Webinar Room Interface

Connecting a Stream

Adding Buttons to the Webinar

Presentation

Choosing a Layout

Video

Widget

Start and End the Webinar

## How to Enter the Webinar Room

Open the "Webinars" section and select a webinar from the list. Click the webinar's name or the "Edit" button.
To learn how to create a webinar, see "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".

![Webinars list with a webinar title highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

On the webinar page, click "Links" and, under "Sign In As", select "Host".
The host has the highest level of access, with full control over the presentation, microphone, and video.

![Room menu next to Enter as host with the Guest, Moderator, and Host sign-in links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd5364edcbaaf9305fd81bb1b89880caa9569db5d9356045205891ae45a2d18a.png)

The webinar room opens in a new browser tab. This is where you set up your session and run your webinar.

Opening the room as **Host** gives you stage controls but does not start the event. Prepare and check the content before confirming **Start Webinar**.

For built-in streaming, click **Share Stream** and choose **Go Live from Browser** under **AXL Live Stream**. The studio lets you check your camera and microphone before **Go Live**. Choose **External Stream** there if you use an encoder. See "[Live Broadcast in AXL](https://docs.axl.tech/live-broadcast)" for the studio, screen sharing, pauses and ending the broadcast.

You can also prepare the built-in broadcast before entering the room: in the webinar's **Settings → Content & Slides**, the **AXL Live Stream** section has **Add AXL Live Stream**. The **Streams** section above it is only for a stream hosted by another service; its **Set up a live stream** link scrolls down to the AXL section.

![Content &amp; Slides settings: the Streams section with the hint about going live from the room and Set up a live stream, the link field with Add Stream, and the AXL Live Stream section with Add AXL Live Stream.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/22ff79751d9b2a0004bc0ff30ab342549a90199ddf9521264139ab99974c6f5a.png)

## Webinar Room Interface

The webinar room has two parts:

- The stage (on the left). This is the main area where the video and audio of the webinar play. You can see the presenter, the presentation, a screen share, or any other visual content the host shares.
- The attendee chat (on the right). This is where attendees talk to each other and to the moderator.

![Webinar room before the start: stage with Share Stream, toolbar, and the chat sidebar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96d1abcf667f73a1b19f5311dafc6b20fa200ff0309dd9001bec3ba9211da579.png)

In the upper-left corner of the room you can see:

- The webinar name. A short, clear description of the topic.
- The webinar status (Not Started, Live, Completed). It shows whether the webinar hasn't started yet, is in progress, or has ended.
- The countdown to the start. A timer that shows how much time is left before the webinar begins, so attendees know when to be ready.

![Webinar room header with the title, status, and start countdown highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96d1abcf667f73a1b19f5311dafc6b20fa200ff0309dd9001bec3ba9211da579.png)

In the upper-right corner of the room you can see these buttons:

- Attendee count. Shows the number of attendees in the webinar. Hover over it to see how many of them are hosts, moderators, and guests.
- Full screen. Click the button to expand the webinar room to full screen for easier viewing. Available on desktop.
- Three-dots menu. Opens the room settings, available to hosts and moderators, such as:

    - Edit Profile. Change the profile you're signed in with.
    - Clear Chat. Deletes all messages from the webinar room chat.
    - Disable Chat for Guests. Stops users who joined as guests from sending messages to the chat. After you disable the chat, use the same menu item, now called "Unblock Chat for Guests", to turn it back on.
- Sign out. Click the button to leave the webinar room.
- Hide sidebar. Click the button to hide the chat panel. Click it again at any time to bring the chat panel back.

![Webinar room toolbar highlighted: add, layout, attendee count, theme, full screen, more, end, and exit.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96d1abcf667f73a1b19f5311dafc6b20fa200ff0309dd9001bec3ba9211da579.png)

## Connecting a Stream

For a stream hosted by another service, click "Share Stream", paste your stream link into the "Or a stream by a link" field, click "Add", and then click "Show" next to the stream in the list. To learn how to connect a stream, see "[Hosting a Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/hosting-a-webinar)".
After you add the stream, more buttons appear at the top of the stage when you hover over it:

- Add Button (the arrow icon). Adds an interactive button to the stream. Click it to add a button that does something during the webinar. Attendees can click the button to take the action you set.
- Volume. Adjusts the stream volume or mutes it completely.
- Full screen. Click the button to expand the stream to full screen.
- Replace. Click the button to swap the stream for another one. The "Share Stream" window opens, where you can add and select a different stream.
- Clear content. Click the button to remove the stream and all its content from the stage.

![Webinar room stage with a YouTube stream: Add Button, volume, full screen, replace and clear buttons at the top right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aeb1c2fb1b5ed3b689fd87302ff2bf07295d59ce705a8262648a60249c6e5573.png)

## Adding Buttons to the Webinar

With a stream or video on the stage, click + (Add to the stage) in the room header and choose Button. The Footer Button window opens.

![Room add menu with Button, Poll, and Widget.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebfa760d8074090ddff7827640157df7a5a917be4459054dc6b19e9f7ae2a64e.png)

Enter the button text and colors, and choose what the button does: **Open Link**, **Custom Event** (starts a step of the webinar automation) or **Open Widget**. You can add up to five buttons and show or hide each one during the webinar. Click **Save**. All the settings are described in "[Buttons, Widgets, and Custom Events in the Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/buttons-widgets-and-custom-events-in-the-webinar)".

Buttons appear below the picture on the webinar page. They are not part of the recording or restream.

![Footer Button settings: text, Open Link / Custom Event / Open Widget action, link, colors, and Show button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a090b4657e0209eb09605d979acbd128395bde86d08339544819c5e414cea8e0.png)

## Presentation

Click "Share Presentation" and upload your presentation. When it's ready, click "Show" to display it on the stage. You have these options:

1. Replace. Click the button to choose or upload a different presentation in place of the current one.
2. Clear content. Click the button to clear the presentation from the stage.
3. Slides. The arrows on the sides of the slide move to the previous or next slide. At the bottom, click the slide counter (for example, "Slide 2 of 6") to open thumbnails of all the slides, see which slide comes next and jump straight to the one you want.

![Presentation on the webinar stage: replace and clear buttons at the top right, arrows on the sides, and the Slide 2 of 6 counter with slide thumbnails at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/33c2f775e9ab2f9ab6e0fa3f364824c76fdd189336b65c3ed8bfa40a641c7a86.png)

## Choosing a Layout

In the header at the top of the room, click the layout button ("Select Layout"). It lets you choose what appears on the stage.

![Webinar room with the Select Layout button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96d1abcf667f73a1b19f5311dafc6b20fa200ff0309dd9001bec3ba9211da579.png)

A menu opens with these layouts: "Stream", "Presentation and Camera", "Video and stream", "Presentation", and "Video". Click the layout that suits your webinar. It applies right away, so there is nothing to confirm.

With **Presentation and Camera**, drag the camera over the stage and resize it from its inner corner. This room layout is separate from the AXL Live Stream studio's **What viewers see** control, which arranges cameras and a shared screen within the broadcast picture.

![Select Layout menu: Stream, Presentation and Camera, Video and stream, Presentation, and Video.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ca1a9a6536fa1c922c2f70a7484cc1599cb9df2af6baf9318f6c4bce1e49f74c.png)

The layouts are built from these items:

- Presentations are documents or sets of documents in PDF or PowerPoint format.
- Streams are the live material you broadcast during the webinar.
- Videos are any video materials.
- Widgets are embedded website elements, such as a registration form, a button, or a payment form for products. A widget is no longer part of the layout menu. Add it with the "+" button in the header, and it floats over the stage.

## Video

To add a video to the webinar, select "Video" or "Video and stream" in the layout menu. The video can fill the stage on its own or share it with the stream.

![Webinar room top bar with the Select Layout menu open: Stream (selected), Presentation and Camera, Video and stream, Presentation and Video.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19aa463a20106ece41df63a75ad4967cd5d394658bf9bdada145124bbde88378.png)

Click "Share Video". Paste the video link into the field and click the "Share Video" button next to it. The video appears in the list. Then click "Select This Video" to put it on the stage.

![Share Video panel: a field for a YouTube, Vimeo, Twitch or Facebook link with a Share Video button, and the list of the webinar's videos with Leadership Masterclass · Intro and its Select This Video button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a89d4397bd2f1266896c43b10d7fd73652ae9bd6d785b0c7fe3b194c1cd7d6a1.png)

After you add the video to the webinar room, more buttons appear at the top of the window:

1. Add Button. Adds interactive elements to the video. Attendees can click a button to take the action you set.
2. Replace. Click the button to swap the video for another one.
3. Clear content. Click the button to remove the video from the stage.
4. Video controls are at the bottom of the screen and make it easy to manage playback. The "Play/Pause" button starts or stops the video. The seek bar lets you move quickly through the video to skip or revisit a moment. The timer shows how long the video has played and its total length. The volume control changes the video volume or mutes it completely. The "Full screen" button expands the video to full screen for easier viewing.

![Webinar room stage with the Leadership Masterclass · Intro video: open-in-new-window, replace and clear buttons at the top right, and the play, rewind, forward, volume, timer 00:17 / 01:00, settings and full-screen controls at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b7c344ac586dc295296adb952558c518fcd312c32bcdb9b8e67e39008f75f427.png)

## Widget

To add a widget to the webinar, click "+" ("Add to the stage") in the header and select "Widget". The widget floats over the stage, so you can drag it anywhere.

Widgets are embedded website elements. A widget can be a registration form, a button, or a payment form for your products.
To learn how to create and configure a widget, see "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)".

![Webinar room header with the + (Add to the stage) menu open: Button, Poll and Widget.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/da0cec9e079573918e8fcac72414051affc7c2a07362706e2faa37baa3518a85.png)

The "Share Widget" window opens. Select a widget you created earlier, or click "Create Widget" to make a new one.
For a widget to appear in the list, first add it in the webinar settings, in the "Content & Slides" section. To learn more about that section, see "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".

![Share Widget panel with the Northstar Corporate Training Inquiry widget, Create Widget and Select This Widget.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b24fff6ecf72ea347b2d5542dae54fd1726a2c7ddf90a512647de2ad76289361.png)

After you add the widget to the stage, hover over it: two buttons appear in its upper-right corner:

- Replace. Click the button to swap the widget for another one.
- Clear content. Click the button to remove the widget from the stage.

![Northstar training inquiry widget with a sign-up form floating over a presentation on the webinar stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/20b7f93d9d0db891c4793ef3c4c325c164ee85784baca64e210191324eea1614.png)

## Start and End the Webinar

The "Start Webinar" button is in the upper-left corner of the room. Click it and confirm in the window that opens to start the webinar. When the webinar is over, click "End Event" in the same place and confirm.

With AXL Live Stream, **Go Off Air** pauses your camera and microphone while the broadcast continues; **End Live Stream** ends it for all viewers and saves the recording to **Videos**. Chat, polls, reactions, widgets and buttons below the picture are not in the recording. See "[Live Broadcast in AXL](https://docs.axl.tech/live-broadcast)".

![Live webinar room with the End Event button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a368687a8b6e6de7028e58e4b91821ecca65689385a0b878fa35aac1f626fd1b.png)

If the stream drops or you click "End Event" by accident, you can resume the webinar within 5 minutes; the button shows the time left. Click "Resume Webinar". Anyone who hasn't left the waiting room yet returns to the webinar.

![Completed webinar room header with the Resume Webinar countdown highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dc1b473141b5d31351789b034cb86e248bf5625e116825f46078bfb32fbbc88c.png)

The chat is on the right side of the webinar room. To learn more, see "[Webinar Attendee Chat](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-participants-chat)".

### Polls, reactions, and smaller screens

To prepare a poll, open **+ → Poll** in the room header. Start the prepared poll when you want attendees to vote. **Stop Voting** ends voting while keeping the results visible. Attendees send reactions from the reaction button in the chat field; the host can change guest reactions in the three-dots menu.

On a phone, the chat and poll adapt around the stage. Use the sidebar control to show or hide the chat. Widgets appear below the picture on phones, so they do not cover the broadcast. When the browser supports picture-in-picture, viewers can use the floating-video control to keep watching while using another window.

The sun/moon control switches the room between light and dark appearance. A room with custom styling may use its own appearance.

---

# Live Broadcast in AXL

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/live-broadcast

> Go live from the webinar room with your camera, microphone and screen, or connect OBS and vMix, without a third-party streaming service.

AXL Live Stream lets you broadcast a webinar right from the webinar room: your camera, microphone and screen go to viewers with less than a second of delay, and the recording is saved to **Videos**. You don't need YouTube or another streaming service. You can also send the picture from OBS, vMix or a hardware encoder.

## Prepare the Broadcast

Enter the webinar room as **Host** (see "[Hosting a Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/hosting-a-webinar)"). Click **Share Stream** on the stage. Under **AXL Live Stream**, choose how you will broadcast:

- **Go Live from Browser**: your camera, microphone and screen, right on this page.
- **External Stream**: OBS, vMix or an encoder. The server and the stream key appear in the studio.

![Share Stream window: the AXL Live Stream block with Go Live from Browser and External Stream, and the field for a stream by a link below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/979d384b84f2d0cc55c9d6f0566ce26aa06989120764de6323e4e91e3428b4eb.png)

The studio opens on the stage and starts preparing the broadcast. It takes about a minute; when the stage shows **Ready to Go Live**, you can start.

The live stream also appears in the webinar settings, in **Content & Slides** → **AXL Live Stream**. There you see its state, the viewers, the recording and the region, and you can end the broadcast. The stream key becomes available automatically an hour before the webinar starts; to get it earlier, click **Get Key**.

![AXL Live Stream in the webinar settings: Live since 9:52 PM, viewers now and at peak, Recording, End Live Stream, Region USA, and the External Stream server and stream key.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/182f79c0739d13f96cab0555edd5d22fcf6fbce7d0eaef8ef211a9f6657172b1.png)

The **?** button in the studio opens **How the Studio Works**, a short guide to every studio control.

![How the Studio Works window with the On air, The picture, Guests and viewers, Over the broadcast and Widget sections.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b3bdbb94627d38cf666063a18573446efa12133be4e9810faeb5812940b47d1a.png)

## Camera and Microphone

When you choose **Go Live from Browser**, your browser asks for access to the camera and microphone. Click **Allow**. The round buttons at the bottom of the studio turn the microphone and the camera on and off; a red button means the device is off.

![Studio ready to go live: Ready to Go Live on the stage, and the From Browser, External Stream, help, microphone, camera, What viewers see, Guests on Stage, Restream, Sounds, On Screen and Go Live buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/44c1f327b9063580b680986ef38807076061b8190e37301f643e255be485510d.png)

Click the arrow next to the microphone button for its settings: choose the microphone, turn **Noise Suppression** on or off, and click **Test** under **Microphone Test**. The test records 5 seconds and plays them back, so you hear yourself as viewers will.

![Microphone settings above the studio bar: the microphone list, the Noise Suppression switch and Microphone Test with the Test button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1f52cc94c11d257b48bc586bf1a22b3d097b948049fcd9a7d55c288a62a3741b.png)

The arrow next to the camera button opens the camera settings: choose the camera, turn **Mirror my video** on or off (only you see the mirrored picture; viewers see the true image, so text reads correctly) and turn on **Background Blur** to hide the room behind you.

![Camera settings over the presenter preview: the camera list, the Mirror my video switch and the Background Blur switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c50243f8a2ca31c4521dbdd3e23165a9360409c890425e5d06b64dae260b9cb6.png)

## Go Live, Go Off Air and End the Broadcast

Click **Go Live**. Your camera and sound start going to viewers, and the stage shows **On Air**. Once you are on air, the recording starts too.

![Studio on air: the On Air label on the presenter picture, and Go Off Air and End Live Stream at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/77627a7a75ab20c243620b28e77ac2fdbf92729bbe6d563a8dca36b76202ff9a.png)

- **Go Off Air** is a pause: your camera and microphone stop, but the live stream and the recording keep going. Use it for a break or to switch to an external stream. **Go Live** brings you back.
- **End Live Stream** ends the broadcast for everyone and saves the recording to **Videos**. The studio asks you to confirm first.

![Studio off air: the label &quot;You're off air. The live stream is still running.&quot; with Recording, and the Go Live and End Live Stream buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/31d3eee2e4ce00606aad4ed69a9e877948b94787a1e72ab7d9817f89606a6094.png)

![Confirmation &quot;End the live stream for everyone?&quot; above End Live Stream, with Cancel and End Live Stream.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5601af8b4459dc5bb1c6536be721449e0f5394e7e594ade0af2bec09682d8649.png)

The broadcast and the webinar are separate. **Start Webinar** and **End Event** in the room header open and close the webinar for attendees: the chat, the stage and the attendee list. **Go Live** and **End Live Stream** only control the picture and sound you send, so you can go live and check everything while the webinar is still **Not Started**.

## Share Your Screen

Click the screen button in the studio and choose a browser tab, a window or your entire screen. The screen fills the stage, and your camera floats over it in the corner; drag it anywhere and resize it from its corner. Viewers see it in the same spot. To return to the camera, click the same button again (**Stop Sharing**).

![Shared slide «What we will cover» on air with the presenter camera floating in the lower-right corner.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3ac17d2cd5b7bfdf4551d6a32f467628abe436e4354e6bd16f7802d661642fdc.png)

The **What viewers see** button picks how the broadcast picture is laid out: **Speaker**, **Screen + Cameras**, **Grid** or **Side by Side**. To keep one camera large for everyone, see "Focus on a Speaker" below.

![What viewers see menu with Speaker, Screen + Cameras, Grid and Side by Side over the shared slide.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9dc64c76c9e7ec9fc8c21df36d3de9709393e11691c98885c8727c23edb5c8b3.png)

## Guests on Stage

You can bring an attendee on stage with their camera and microphone, for example a co-speaker or a student with a question. The webinar must be started and you must be live.

1. Open the **Attendees** tab in the room, click the three dots next to the person and choose **Invite to Stage**.

![Attendees tab during a live broadcast: the actions menu next to the attendee Daniel with Invite to Stage, Block Chat, Mute User, Block User and Block by IP.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3167b4d594bcdf305b0d22b981a5027a3fbfcbb7c8f11afeea36f17c24d1b85c.png)

2. The attendee sees **The host invited you to go live** and clicks **Go Live** (or **No Thanks**).

![Invitation on the attendee screen: The host invited you to go live, with No Thanks and Go Live.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8fade40d2dad443c3038a7edaf1921457020f8f9581c47768c094d58ac4e8572.png)

3. The attendee checks their camera and microphone in **Check Your Camera and Microphone**: the picture, the **Audio** and **Video** tabs, the microphone test. Then they click **Go Live** and appear on stage.

![Check Your Camera and Microphone window for the guest: camera preview, Audio and Video tabs, the microphone list, Noise Suppression, Microphone Test, Cancel and Go Live.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5f5504e0c36cba3930eaa2a8e63b5819500798c2f09d0d700df7a770c2e505a3.png)

The **Guests on Stage** button in the studio shows how many guests are on stage. Hover over a guest's camera to turn off their microphone (**Turn off their microphone**), their camera (**Turn off their camera**), or take them off the stage (**Remove**).

![Guest Daniel on stage in the corner of the broadcast with the hover buttons Turn off their microphone, Turn off their camera and Remove; Guests on Stage shows 1.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d40862debd05e42c73d4374cf810ecac3c165463712378bddb7f2caf6464473e.png)

## Focus on a Speaker

When there are several cameras, the broadcast follows whoever is speaking. To keep one person in focus, choose **Grid** in **What viewers see** and click that person's camera: it fills the stage for everyone, and the other cameras move to the corner.

![Grid view in What viewers see: Daniel and Alex Morgan side by side on the stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9ca048536b6e18dc140f3c0eca5c4fdd6e40740d2b0b428c8db9ff762b50f053.png)

The **Unpin · auto** label at the top shows that the camera is pinned. Click it to unpin and let the broadcast follow the speaker again. Viewers can also enlarge any camera just for themselves; this does not change what others see.

![Daniel pinned in focus on the stage with Alex Morgan in the corner and the Unpin · auto label at the top.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/70bf297511048499ae91f194b7e5d38cfa06cf943cf3a87fb768eb1897496da8.png)

## Broadcast from OBS or vMix

Click **External Stream** in the studio bar. The studio confirms the switch and frees your camera for the other app. Copy the **Server** and the **Stream Key**. In OBS, go to **Settings** → **Stream** → **Service: Custom**, paste both, then click **Start Streaming**. When the picture arrives, the studio shows it; until then it waits for the stream signal. Keep the stream key private.

![External Stream panel on the stage with the Server and Stream Key fields, copy buttons, the OBS hint and &quot;Waiting for the stream signal…&quot;.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/467cce8c37605823fc436fa7b7002a11c7dde50dde1cd7d5753a656805681299.png)

Only one app can use the camera at a time. If OBS holds the camera and you switch back to **From Browser**, the studio says the camera is busy: close OBS or stop its camera, then click **Try again**.

## Restream and the Recording

The **Restream** button sends the live stream to YouTube, Facebook, Instagram, Twitch and other platforms at the same time. Choose the platform, copy the server address and stream key from it (the steps are shown under the platform), paste them and click **Start**. **Add Another** adds one more platform. The key is used only for this live stream and isn't saved.

![Restream to YouTube, Instagram, and more window: YouTube selected, the server field filled in, the stream key field, Add Another and Start.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/095710c328c8c429d87e1cac49ec6b1d86e02afec2689b85ad18419a2806a512.png)

The recording starts when you first go live and is saved to **Videos** when you end the live stream. It may take a few minutes to process; the webinar settings show **The recording is being processed and will appear in Videos** until it is ready, then **Recording saved to Videos** with an **Open Recording** link.

![AXL Live Stream in the webinar settings after the broadcast: Ended, peak viewers, Get Key, Delete, Region USA, and Recording saved to Videos with Open Recording.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d7a7e340ee9516f0f8f30bb6c3fcb1857bf856ac0ef4064029a9d23074e8b355.png)

The recording and the restream get the broadcast picture: cameras, the shared screen, **On Screen** elements (timer, QR code, name tags, text) and **Sounds**. Buttons under the broadcast, polls, widgets, reactions and the chat are seen only in the webinar room.

## What Viewers See

- Viewers watch with less than a second of delay and with sound. If the browser blocks sound until the first click, a click anywhere on the page turns it on.
- Viewers can enlarge any camera just for themselves and keep watching in a floating window (picture in picture) while they do something else.
- On a phone, the picture is at most 720p to save data. If the connection is weak, the player switches to a steadier stream with a few seconds of delay by itself.

## If the Camera or Microphone Doesn't Work

- **No access to the camera or microphone**: allow the camera and the microphone in your browser's site settings, then click **Try again**.
- **The camera is busy** or **The microphone is busy**: another program is using it, for example OBS, Zoom, Skype or another browser. Close it and click **Try again**.
- **No camera found** or **No microphone found**: connect the device or pick another one in the camera and microphone settings, then click **Try again**.
- Viewers can't hear you: run **Microphone Test** in the microphone settings and check that the microphone button isn't red.

---

# Buttons, Widgets, and Custom Events in the Webinar

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/buttons-widgets-and-custom-events-in-the-webinar

> Add buttons to your webinar room and set them to open a link, trigger a custom event, or open a widget in a pop-up.

Buttons under the webinar video let viewers act during the broadcast: a button can open a link, show a widget such as a payment form, or trigger a custom event for your automation.

Open the room as a host and put a stream or video on the stage first. These buttons appear under the picture on the webinar page; they are not included in the broadcast recording or restream.

Select a section to jump to it:

Add a Button in the Webinar Room

Manage Webinar Buttons

Action Type "Open Link"

Action Type "Custom Event"

Action Type "Open Widget"

## Add a Button in the Webinar Room

Go to the "Webinars" section. Create a webinar or open an existing one.
To learn how to create a webinar, see "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".

![Webinars list filtered to Northstar webinars, with the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/517edba4d960a147d5c7d92bd1d4234054efe53bfcfc4d7f3835f09efb41f7cb.png)

On the webinar page, click "Links" and, under "Sign In As", select "Host".
The host has the highest level of access, with full control over the presentation, microphone, and video.

![Room menu with the Host sign-in link highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd5364edcbaaf9305fd81bb1b89880caa9569db5d9356045205891ae45a2d18a.png)

The webinar room opens. Click the "+" button ("Add to the stage") at the top of the room and select "Button". This option is available only when a live stream or video is on the stage. Otherwise, it's disabled and shows "Put a stream or a video on the stage first".

![Webinar room with the add (+) button highlighted in the toolbar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96d1abcf667f73a1b19f5311dafc6b20fa200ff0309dd9001bec3ba9211da579.png)

In the "Footer Button" window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Button Text. Enter the text that appears on the button. This is what attendees see and click.
2. Button Color. Choose the color of the button itself.
3. Text Color. Choose the color of the text on the button.
4. Action Type. Determines what happens when an attendee clicks the button, so you can set up different ways to interact with attendees.
Select an action type:

    - Open Link. Opens the page you specify in a new browser tab. Use it to send attendees to a registration page, a payment page, a download page, and so on. To learn how to create a website on the AXL platform, see "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
    - Custom Event. When someone clicks the button, the custom event you define is triggered. The event fires only if the contact exists in the CRM (has an email address). You can also use it to integrate with other services. To learn how to set up a custom event, see "[Buttons, Widgets, and Custom Events in the Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/buttons-widgets-and-custom-events-in-the-webinar)".
    - Open Widget. Clicking the button opens the widget in a pop-up in the center of the screen, for example a question form, a chat, or a survey. Use it to engage the audience and collect feedback. To learn how to create and set up a widget, see "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)".
5. Show button. Turns the button on or off in the webinar room. Use it to control when attendees see the button, for example to show it only at a certain moment of the webinar.
6. Add Button. You can add and customize several buttons in a webinar. Click to add another button.

When you're done, click "Save".

![Footer Button settings for text, action type, link, colors, and visibility.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a090b4657e0209eb09605d979acbd128395bde86d08339544819c5e414cea8e0.png)

## Manage Webinar Buttons

After you create buttons, they appear in a list. Each button has these controls:

1. Move. Each button has a drag handle (a grip icon) next to it. Hold the handle and drag the button up or down in the list to change the order in which attendees see the buttons.
2. Preview. Shows exactly how the button will look to attendees and updates as you edit it. The preview itself isn't clickable.
3. Action Type. When a button's card is collapsed, it shows what the button does: Open Link, Custom Event, or Open Widget. Below that, you see the link, the event name, or the name of the widget.
4. Show button. Turn the switch on to show the button to attendees, or off to hide it.
5. Delete. Click the trash icon to delete the button from the list. You'll be asked to confirm.
6. Expand. Click the arrow to expand the button's card and edit its settings.

![Footer Button window with three collapsed buttons: Enroll in the certificate (Open Link to northstar.example.com), Book a consultation (Custom Event consultation_request) and Request the program (Open Widget), each with Show button, delete and expand controls, plus Add Button 3 / 5.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c0b7314b1283313fd9a29401459e58965a7030377c8573ec439ba76f66963460.png)

You can add up to five buttons to a stream or video on the stage.
When you're done, click "Save".

## Action Type "Open Link"

This action sends the attendee to a URL you specify when they click the button.
Examples:

- Link to a product or service. If the webinar is about a specific product, the button can lead to its purchase page or a detailed description. For example, a "Learn More About the Product" button that opens the product page.
- Link to the registration page for the next webinar. A "Register for the Next Webinar" button makes it easier to sign up attendees for future events.
- Link to social media. A "Join Us on Facebook" button helps you grow your audience on social networks.

In the button settings, enter the button text and select the action type "Open Link".
In the "Link" field, enter the URL attendees go to when they click the button. You can link to a website you created on the AXL platform or to any other website. To learn how to create a website on the AXL platform, see "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".

When you're done, click "Save".

![Footer button with the Open Link action and its link field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a090b4657e0209eb09605d979acbd128395bde86d08339544819c5e414cea8e0.png)

Now, when an attendee clicks the button, the link opens the page you specified.

## Action Type "Custom Event"

A custom event is an event that triggers when an attendee clicks the button. It is the most flexible action: it lets you start a specific chain of events and actions defined in the webinar automation. You can create any event you like to trigger the automation. The event fires only if the contact exists in the CRM (has an email address).
Use this action for complex, tailored behavior. It lets you automate and personalize what happens when someone clicks the button, and you can also use it to integrate with other services.

First, create a custom event in the webinar automation.
To do this, open the "Automation" tab in the webinar. From the list of events, select "Custom Event" and drag it into the workspace.

![Custom Event step dragged from the step list onto the webinar automation canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0729f6f55afedc6c125dce4d9c26840ad917c24a4016949552d6ad5acf4fcafe.png)

Now configure the custom event. Click the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the event, then select "Configure Step".

![Custom Event step menu with Configure Step, Copy Step and Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6422fadfda50a75db7b6bf55ea78aa6bb7eff3d50632249036b1aedfd183d058.png)

In the step settings window, enter the event name in the "Event Name" field and click "Save".

![Custom Event step settings with the Event Name field and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/57b1290c6f446759111b6eb8fbf4ca58ca8c48a0314c13ca9794a06ef61b4141.png)

Next, open the "Actions" tab, select the action you want, and drag it into the workspace. Then connect the event and the action.

![Custom Event workshop_cta_click connected to an Add Task action.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1fbcb00f0b33375a304bef73756d0fe7030dd5f238d4978e1e69df54f2655087.png)

The action needs to be configured too. Click the gear icon on the action, then select "Configure Step". Adjust the step settings and click "Save".

![Add Task step menu with Configure Step next to the connected custom event.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f0754f2be956b2e8e7b77236b35f282b964976cea39d5d2b4b773d5652aa389f.png)

When you finish setting up the automation, return to the webinar room. Click the "+" button at the top of the room and select "Button".
In the window that opens, enter the button text and select the action type "Custom Event". In the "Custom Event" field, enter the same event name you used in the webinar automation.
When you're done, click "Save".

![Footer button with the Custom Event action, the event name, and the CRM-contact notice.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cad240b85b12adcaed03d934201e1f162a6dd533b941b17ab78d601de7f89be6.png)

The button and automation event must use the same event name. When a CRM contact with an email address clicks the button, that event triggers the connected action. Check the action settings as well as the button before using it during a session.

## Action Type "Open Widget"

Widgets are embedded elements that extend what a webinar room can do. A widget can be a registration form, a chat, a survey, and more. When an attendee clicks the button, the widget opens in a pop-up in the center of the screen. Attendees can then fill out a registration form or pay for a product without leaving the webinar.

You create a widget the same way as a website page, in the page editor, and it can do many things. To learn how to create and set up a widget, see "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)".

First, create widgets and add them to the webinar. To do this, open the "Settings" tab in the webinar and go to the "Content & Slides" section. Click "Select Widgets".

![Content &amp; Slides with Select Widgets beneath presentations, streams, and videos.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d865787f43c3d58572b06ca2e52df092b33afb375e2286fe7de7dfa3a37eb911.png)

In the window that opens, select a widget you created earlier or create a new one by clicking "Add". To learn how to create and set up a widget, see "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)".

![Widgets picker with Create Widget and the account's widgets.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08397d9c7bb88b1a39ac246e257636f890c467b216606b4c8c7cfffe9f8affe1.png)

Once you add the widget to the webinar, you can select it in the settings of the button in the webinar room.

Go back to the webinar room. Click the "+" button at the top of the room and select "Button".
In the window that opens, enter the button text and select the action type "Open Widget". Select the widget from the list. Then enter the "Window Title" and set the "Window Width".
When you're done, click "Save".

![Footer Button window with the Request the program button expanded: Action Type Open Widget, widget Northstar · Corporate Training Inquiry, Window Title Corporate training inquiry, Window Width 600 px, and the Save button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/519859a654230a13cfbde172cd4d307ff209579ba5498f30630c1b5216717a24.png)

Now, when an attendee clicks the button, the selected widget opens in a pop-up in the center of the screen.

---

# Webinar Attendee Chat

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-participants-chat

> How the attendee chat works in the webinar room: chat, questions, announcements, and the attendee list, plus moderation tools for hosts and moderators.

The attendee chat is where your audience talks during a webinar: attendees chat with each other and with the moderator, ask questions and see announcements. As a host or moderator, you also manage the chat from here.

Open **Webinars → Webinars**, select the webinar, and use **Links → Sign In As → Host** or **Moderator**. The chat moderation actions below require a team role; ordinary guests do not see all of these controls.

Here's how the attendee chat works in the AXL webinar room.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Webinar Room Interface

Chat

Announcements

Questions

Attendees

## Webinar Room Interface

The webinar room has two parts:

- The stage (on the left). This is the main area where you see the presenter, the presentation, and screen shares.
    To learn more, see "[Webinar Room](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-room)".
- The attendee chat (on the right). This is where attendees talk to each other and to the moderator.

Here's how the attendee chat works.

![Webinar room with the stage and the chat sidebar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a368687a8b6e6de7028e58e4b91821ecca65689385a0b878fa35aac1f626fd1b.png)

The attendee chat panel has these tabs:

1. Chat. The main place for attendees and the moderator to talk.
2. Questions. Shows attendees' questions for the speaker. Attendees can ask the moderator questions here without losing them in the general flow of messages. Attendees can like questions, so the speaker sees which ones matter most to the audience. The host or a moderator can follow the questions and answer them when possible.
3. Attendees. Shows the list of everyone in the webinar: the names and emails of the people in the webinar room. Each entry also shows the person's role (for example, host, moderator, or guest). Only hosts and moderators see this tab.

![Room sidebar with Chat, Questions, Attendees, and Files tabs, Add Announcement, an announcement, and a host message.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7b971d7e95c2592335a4f5e6eef3277563b187a2399e024be71a2671b095660f.png)

## Chat

The "Chat" tab shows the conversation between attendees. Hosts and moderators can manage messages to guide the discussion and keep order in the chat.
Click the three dots next to a message and select an action:

Choose the least extensive action that matches the problem: delete one message to remove that message; use **Mute User** to hide that attendee's messages from other guests; use **Block Chat** to stop further messages; use **Block User** to prevent access to the room. Check the attendee's identity before applying a restriction.

- Reply. Click to answer a specific attendee's message.
- Delete Message. Click to remove an unwanted message from the chat.
- Delete All Messages from User. Deletes all messages from one attendee. Use it if an attendee repeatedly breaks the rules or posts a lot of spam.
- Mute User. Hides this attendee's messages from the other guests. The attendee still sees their own messages, and hosts and moderators still see them too. Use it to quietly stop spam or off-topic messages.
- Block Chat. Stops this attendee from sending messages to the chat. Use it when an attendee keeps disrupting the discussion.
- Block User. Removes the attendee from the webinar room. This is a stricter measure: the attendee is removed from the webinar and can no longer sign in with the same account.
- Block by IP. Blocks access to the webinar from a specific IP address. This is the strictest measure, for serious rule violations or attempts at sabotage. It stops the attendee from reconnecting from the same IP address, even with a different account. Use it carefully, because different users may share one IP address (for example, on a shared network).

![Chat message menu with Reply, Delete Message, and Delete All Messages from User.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dbae56a0862e956574847d6596f82d27f8bc06d32482671121af3e754d4967da.png)

Type your message in the field at the bottom of the chat and send it to the other attendees. Press Enter to send.

## Announcements

Click "Add Announcement" to post an important message or notice to all webinar attendees. When a host or moderator clicks this button, a field opens for the announcement text. Once posted, the announcement is pinned at the top of the chat so every chat user sees it.

You can manage the announcement in these ways:

- Settings. This menu lets the host or a moderator manage the announcement pinned in the chat:

    - Edit Announcement. Change the text, fix typos, or update the information.
    - Delete Announcement. Removes the announcement from the chat, for example when it's no longer relevant.
- Expand/collapse. A long announcement shows only its first two lines so it doesn't clutter the chat. Click it to show the full text, and click it again to collapse it.

![Announcement menu with Edit Announcement and Delete Announcement.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/826ef8192583e7366788abdab366c76e40c39f68590387f6c235defe8618c7d8.png)

## Questions

The "Questions" tab lists attendees' questions. You can do the following with a question:

1. Like. Like a question to flag it as interesting and important. Attendees see the number of likes on their question.
2. Actions. Click the three dots and select an action:

    - Answer Verbally. Marks a question you answered out loud during the webinar (not in writing in the chat).
    - Delete Question. Removes a question from the list. Use it for incorrect or offensive questions, or questions unrelated to the webinar topic.
    - Delete Question and Block Chat. Deletes the question and blocks the chat for the attendee who asked it.
3. Answer. Under each question is a text field. Type your answer and click "Send Answer".

    After answering, enable **Show answered** if you need to find the question again. Use **Answer Verbally** only when the speaker has already addressed the question aloud.

![Questions tab for the host: a guest question with its menu open, showing Answer Verbally and Delete Question.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bb218ec9fdbdd711e3a3d182dc831e2c07619c8e57c0436f040772504a9a6e2f.png)

At the top of the "Questions" tab, you can:

1. Sort. Click to choose the order of the questions:

    - Newest First. Shows the latest questions at the top of the list.
    - Oldest First. Shows the earliest questions at the top of the list.
    - Most Liked. Shows the questions with the most likes from attendees at the top.
    - Least Liked. Shows the questions with the fewest likes at the top.
2. Show answered. Turn this on to see the questions that have already been answered.

## Attendees

In the "Attendees" tab, you can see each person's details (first name, last name, email, and role) and manage webinar attendees.
Click the three dots on the right and select an action:

- Block Chat. Stops the selected attendee from sending messages to the webinar chat. Use it for people who post spam, insults, or messages unrelated to the webinar topic.
- Mute User. Hides the selected attendee's messages from the other guests. Hosts and moderators still see them. Use it, for example, to keep a disruptive attendee from distracting others.
- Block User. Removes the user from the webinar. They can't sign in again with the same account.
- Block by IP. Blocks webinar access for everyone using the blocked attendee's IP address.

![Chat message actions for a guest: Reply, View User Profile, Mute User, Block Chat, Block User, Block by IP, Delete Message and Delete All Messages from User.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8ca0d433a8e9d0874d297d291e5c01fba1e4703eba7443d70bc4c53b21624a05.png)

These filters are at the top of the tab:

1. Role. Filters the attendee list by role in the webinar:

    - All. Shows all webinar attendees, whatever their role.
    - Hosts. Shows only users with the host role.
    - Moderators. Shows moderators only.
    - Guests. Shows all attendees who aren't hosts or moderators. These are the regular webinar viewers.
2. Search. A text field for finding an attendee by name or email.
3. Blocked Users Only. Shows only users blocked by a host or moderator, so you can review them and unblock someone if needed.
4. Offline Users. Shows users who were connected to the webinar earlier but are offline now (disconnected).

![Attendees tab filters: All, Hosts, Moderators, Guests, Blocked Users Only, and Offline Users.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/069ba99359cd52d50d1b92c9403ff9042ee4f8df6971fe3427bb1c600068353a.png)

---

# Chat Messages

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/chat-messages

> View, filter, and export the messages attendees and your team posted in a webinar chat.

The Chat Messages tab lists every message posted in a webinar chat. Here you can browse the messages and export them as XLSX or CSV.

Go to the "Webinars" section and click the webinar name or the pencil (Edit) icon.

![Webinars list with a webinar edit action highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

Go to the "Chat Messages" tab.

![Webinar Chat Messages tab with search, Add Filter, and Export Messages As.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/36c54aa483a85eb06e8d88cc4c9e670fe74bca63b38fed0e5b998df7ab4e7c92.png)

The list shows detailed information about each message:

1. Date. The exact date and time the message was sent, and how long into the webinar it was sent.
2. Author. The author's name, email, and role (Host/Moderator or Guest). If the author is a CRM contact, click the name to open the contact.
3. Message Text. The text of the message.

![Webinar chat messages with date and time from start, author, role, and message text.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/36c54aa483a85eb06e8d88cc4c9e670fe74bca63b38fed0e5b998df7ab4e7c92.png)

Use the filters at the top to find messages quickly:

1. Search. Enter message text or an attendee's name in the search box.
2. Add Filter. To narrow the results, click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:
Contact. Select a contact from your CRM.
Role. Select the attendee's role: All, Guest, or Host/Moderator.

![Chat message search and the Add Filter menu with Contact and Role.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6317732cb10314c6315ba90a5576eb38103e2f872998b4d3ce36131e9ca72ab1.png)

You can export the list of messages to your device (computer, laptop, or tablet) as a single CSV or XLSX file. This is a quick way to move a large number of messages.

To export, click "Export Messages As…" and select XLSX or CSV.

![Export Messages As menu with XLSX and CSV.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/716ec9051ed489c89ed70175fcd8eb846e1438af6efad321e647cccd67231a15.png)

An export panel opens and shows the progress. When the file is ready, click the "Action" button.

![Completed chat-message export notification with the Action button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8b631b3e39708165b30410309560486b2b33c072603f4cf0a1cb54636e551d48.png)

Select an action from the list: "Download", "Download and Close", or "Close".
"Download" saves the message list to your device (computer, laptop, or tablet), "Download and Close" saves it and closes the export session, and "Close" closes the export session without downloading.

![Export Action menu with Download, Download and Close, and Close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2374038efc088dc96851ca7ce05eb54f54ad215b93abf1f17aa175a7cea09ff4.png)

## Find and export a conversation segment

1. Open the webinar and its **Chat Messages** tab. Search for a phrase or attendee, and use **Add Filter** to narrow by contact or role.
2. Review the displayed message dates, authors, and text so you know which conversation you are inspecting.
3. Choose **Export Messages As…** and select CSV or XLSX. Wait until the export panel offers its actions.
4. Choose **Download** or **Download and Close**, then open the downloaded file and check its rows. **Close** alone does not download the export.

---

# Webinar Statistics

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-statistics

> See how a webinar performed: registrations, attendance, engagement, sales, and the UTM sources behind them.

The Statistics tab is an analytics tool that shows how well a webinar performed and whether it reached its goal.

Go to Webinars → Webinars. Click the webinar title or the Edit icon.

![Webinars list searched for a live webinar, with its Live status, scheduled date, attendee count, edit action and Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c45184c86eba5df05dcb2b73c97b076d6fa0805cb4d9016f3d87d18a040a9667.png)

Open the "Statistics" tab.

The attendee metrics count guests, rather than hosts and moderators. For example, 480 registrations and 312 attendees give an attendance rate of 65%. A view rate of 65% instead means that attendees watched 65% of the webinar duration on average.

![Webinar Statistics tab with Live status, Webinar UTM Parameters, 7 registrations, 6 attendees, a 2% view rate, an 86% attendance rate and the Attendance chart.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a90634641b6b4dc9cffe6405c506da6cac5c101961f2236353b29c83006b4e9b.png)
This example webinar has 7 registrations and 6 attendees, so its attendance rate is 86%. Its low view rate means attendees watched a small share of the long broadcast on average.

Here you can see detailed statistics for the webinar. Attendee Analytics:

- Registrations. The number of people who registered for the webinar.
- Attendees. The number of people who actually attended the webinar. Compare it with Registrations to see how many sign-ups turned into real visits.
- Attendance Rate. The percentage of registered guests who attended: attendees divided by registrations, multiplied by 100. This is different from the share of the webinar each person watched.
- View Rate. The average share of the webinar duration watched by attendees. It is not the percentage of attendees who watched from beginning to end.
- Attendance. A graph of how the number of attendees changed over time. Peaks show when more attendees were present, and drops show when fewer were present. Compare those moments with the event timeline before deciding why attendance changed.

![Attendee Analytics section showing Registrations 7, Attendees 6, View Rate 2%, Attendance Rate 86%, and the Attendance chart over the webinar timeline.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/15d8c69f639744082984da5ad717c2d779004ae4ae1247b1ff7a363a3072f717.png)

Below is a detailed Webinar Event Analytics section. The chart shows payments and form submissions.

Use **During the Webinar** to see when payments and form submissions were recorded. Compare those moments with the webinar timeline when assessing the response to an offer or form. These events do not measure every attendee's attention or satisfaction.

Use **24 Hours After the Webinar** to review payments and form submissions recorded in that follow-up window. Compare the two panels when planning follow-up activity. This view covers the stated 24-hour period; it is not a measure of longer-term retention or satisfaction.

![Webinar Event Analytics with During the Webinar and 24 Hours After the Webinar charts, one form submission during the webinar, the Payment and Form Submission legend, and time axes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e0d95d06702f766f325bef5b328e336687c3d95d68c65712e86bad40893106a.png)
In this example one form submission was recorded during the webinar and none in the following 24 hours. The two panels separate the two periods.

Below is a detailed Webinar Sales Analytics section.

It analyzes the sales that result from a webinar, including the number of forms submitted, revenue, paid and unpaid orders, and average order value.

![Webinar Sales Analytics grid with one form submission, revenue breakdowns, unpaid order amount and count, Payments, Paid Orders, Paid Order Rate and Avg. Order Value.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7747f177b81c399f38c1f29af5ad88d9112bdec6d353adb49b1bc71a2f33d121.png)

To search and analyze more easily, use the Webinar UTM Parameters filter.

UTM parameters (Urchin Tracking Module) are tags added to a URL to track how well a specific marketing campaign or traffic source drives people to the webinar registration or broadcast page.
The main UTM parameters are:

- UTM Source. The traffic source recorded in the link. It names the platform or website the visitor came from (for example, facebook, google, or newsletter).
- UTM Campaign. The campaign name recorded in the link. It identifies a specific marketing campaign (for example, spring\_sale or webinar\_promotion).
- UTM Content. The content, used to tell apart ads, banners, or links within the same campaign (for example, image\_version\_1 or text\_headline\_2).
- UTM Medium. The traffic type recorded in the link. It describes the kind of marketing activity (for example, cpc for cost per click, email, or banner).
- UTM Term. The keyword, used to track keywords in paid advertising.

![Webinar UTM Parameters selector expanded to show all five optional filters: UTM Source, Campaign, Content, Medium and Term, with no values selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e311c3957c19abf48d49b4d05bac763b6185cf44178d11adfb66e4be4aef18d8.png)

---

# Webinar Template

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-template

> Learn what a webinar template is, how to create one and set up its events, and how to run it as an automated webinar.

A webinar template is a model webinar where you set up the events and settings for a future webinar. Once you create a template, you can run it automatically as an automated webinar. To learn more, see "[Automated Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/autowebinars)".

A template lets you create an automated webinar from scratch, without hosting a live webinar first. Record your videos and add events, and then you can start the automated webinar.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

How to Create a Webinar Template

Events

## How to Create a Webinar Template

Go to the "Webinars" section and open the "Templates" tab. Click "Create".

![Webinar Templates list with the Create button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65be717b5a59c2c632eb0f4b63393d99ca284682f0f66ea3df8b0642fac28064.png)

A window opens. Fill in the fields:

- Name. Enter a name for the webinar template.
- Internal Name. Only you can see the internal name. It isn't shown to users.
- Description. Add a description for the webinar template.
- Time Zone. Select a time zone from the list.

Click "Create" or "Create and Open".

![Create Template panel with name, internal name, description, and time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5c88dd3db78c161dea22fe0c4a5dc59382c0f222dac8a60cccf14d734a2acb70.png)

Open your webinar template. These tabs are available:

- Settings. Add a description of the webinar, set its time, and more. To learn more, see "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".
- Attendees. See the personal details of webinar attendees. You can invite new attendees or remove them. To learn more, see "Webinar Attendees".
- Automation. Manage the webinar's automation: add events and actions and configure them. To learn more, see "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario)", "[Types of Events in an Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)", and "[Types of Actions in an Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".
- Statistics. See the webinar statistics: the number of registrations, the number of attendees, and the attendance and view rates. To learn more, see "[Webinar Statistics](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-statistics)".
- Events. Manage the events that happen during the webinar. To learn more, see "[Types of Webinar Template Events](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-webinar-template)".
- Automated Webinars. Set up automatic playback of the webinar on a specific date and time. To learn more, see "[Automated Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/autowebinars)".

![Webinar template header with its tabs and the General settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e976f3f80e7c2d63afa739b660733bb86566dd02e46ff7727058578573baa6f2.png)

## Events

Events are everything that can happen during a webinar or an automated webinar. This is where you build the sequence of events.

Open the Events tab. In the preview editor, place the playhead at the desired time and click Add Event Here to choose an event. To learn more about each event, see "[Types of Webinar Template Events](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-webinar-template)". Or click "Import" and upload a file up to 10 MB.

![Automated Webinar Preview with Saved, Import, Export, playback controls, Chain, Add Event Here and four timeline lanes; empty stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a74bc9b3ea2b52096d9e4a09bc3c8edf1144fa984e558531aa84e1ba3b2212b1.png)
Current editor in Full Screen with the Room & Stage filter, playback toolbar and four timeline lanes. This existing template has no media events, so the stage is empty.

![Add Event Here menu showing Room actions, Change Stage Template, Change Stage Layout, Add Recorded Stream and Add Video.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d55fbb778e84791c59a7b9c4207d906221207e559c34e7f3da2c92b0c72ceebc.png)
Add Event Here: the top of the scrollable menu shows Room actions and the first Stage actions.

![Add Event Here menu scrolled to video playback, presentation, slide, widget, buttons, Clear Content and Remove Stage Element actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/881aabfb15ba375077e794dfe0f862b83b08505a3f852b76db827b2dd79fcbf9.png)
Scroll within the same menu to see the remaining Stage actions, including presentation, widget, buttons and content controls.

![Add Event Here menu scrolled to Chat and Questions actions, with its full bottom border visible.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f1d89009ccebb16644149453db13a1c183c6fd54f2cbb4286182165002cad1c5.png)
The bottom of the same menu shows Chat and Questions actions. No event needs to be selected just to inspect the available types.

![Template Events tab with the Add Event Here button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

Choose the event, then complete its fields on the Event tab in the panel on the right. Select an existing event in the Chain or on the timeline to edit it.

In this example, we selected the "Open Room" event, set it to "After Start", and set the time to zero. The room opens as soon as the webinar starts, with no delay.

![Template timeline with the Room &amp; Stage lane highlighted, starting with an Open Room event.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

Set the general settings for each event:

1. Add event buttons. Use Add Event Here to insert an event at the playhead. Fine-tune its time in the Event panel. To change the order of events, change their times. The event then moves up or down in the list.
2. Status icon. A green checkmark means the event is added and set up. A red exclamation mark means the event isn't set up. Check that the event data is filled in correctly, add any missing settings, and make sure the event is placed correctly relative to the other events. Click the red exclamation mark to see hints from the system.
3. Event settings list. Click to view the general information about the webinar.
4. Event sequence. Choose when the event runs: before or after the webinar starts.
5. Time. Set the time the event starts, in hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.
6. Event name. The name of the event.
7. Move Events. Place the playhead at the first event you want to shift, then use Move Events to move events at or after that point earlier or later. Events before the playhead keep their times.
8. "Remove" button. Click to remove the event from the list.

![Event panel with the trigger and time of the selected event highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

At the top of the event list, you can:

1. Status icon. A green checkmark means the events are added and set up correctly. A red exclamation mark means an event isn't set up or isn't placed correctly relative to the other events, or that the "Open Room" and "Close Room" events are missing. Click the red exclamation mark to see hints from the system.
2. Save. After you add and configure the events, resolve every blocking problem and click Save. Wait for Saved before leaving the template; preview changes are not saved automatically.
3. List of all added events. Select an event from the list to jump to its settings. This is handy when you have many events.
4. Import. Brings webinar events into your AXL account. You can upload a list of events from your device (computer, laptop, or tablet) as a single JSON or CSV file, so you can quickly move a large number of events into your account's webinar. If the webinar already has saved events, AXL asks whether to delete them before the import. The maximum file size is 10 MB. You can import from BIZON 365, GetCourse, EverWebinar, and AXL.
5. Export. Exports all webinar events in JSON format, so you can move the list of events from your account to another account. Click "Export" and download the file to your device (computer, laptop, or tablet) as a single file.

![Events toolbar with Import, Export, sound, Full Screen, and Save highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

Build the sequence of events for your webinar template and set the time for each event. To learn more about the events in a webinar template, see "[Types of Events in a Webinar Template](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-webinar-template)". Once the event list is set up, you can export all the events in JSON format. This makes it easy to edit the events in the file if the webinar has a lot of them. To export, click "Export". You can also import the events into another account.

For the current preview, timeline, event editing, and validation controls, follow [Automated Webinar Preview and Event Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/automated-webinar-preview-and-event-editor). Import formats depend on the selected source: AXL and BIZON 365 use JSON; GetCourse and EverWebinar use CSV. The upload limit is 10 MB. Save before exporting so the export includes your latest edits.

![Events toolbar with the Export button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

To add a video recording, a presentation, and widgets to your webinar template, go to the "Settings" tab and select "Content & Slides".

![Content &amp; Slides settings for presentations, streams, videos, and widgets.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d865787f43c3d58572b06ca2e52df092b33afb375e2286fe7de7dfa3a37eb911.png)

Upload your video and presentation, and add a widget if needed. Or select a video and presentation you uploaded earlier from the list.

![Template event editor with the preview, the selected chat message, and the event timeline.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

After you add all the events you need, go to the "Automated Webinars" tab and click "Create".

![Template Automated Webinars tab with the Create and Create Schedule buttons highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f62c241c4ee4c15765a4f3b23551d6f24f2aebb9578204b11c0288a3be94e432.png)

A window opens. Fill in the fields:

- Name. Enter a name for your automated webinar.
- Internal Name. It isn't shown to users.
- Description. Add a description.
- Scheduled Date and Time Zone. Enter the date, time, and time zone for the automated webinar to run.

![Create Automated Webinar panel with name, internal name, description, scheduled date, and time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4b6e4011ca65814c6cc5fb4e72019a24eebec6c58e905829d7fce971deb2a2f9.png)

The automated webinar starts at the date and time you set. The events during the webinar happen as defined in the template's event script.
To learn more about the events in a webinar template, see "[Types of Events in a Webinar Template](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-webinar-template)".

---

# Types of Events in the Webinar Template

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-webinar-template

> Add and configure webinar timeline events, control stage and chat content, resolve editor problems, and save or transfer the event list.

A webinar template is a sample webinar where you set up the events and settings for future webinars. Once you create a template, you can run it as an automated webinar. Learn more in "[Automated Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/autowebinars)".

A template lets you create an automated webinar from scratch, with no live webinar needed first. Record a video and add events, then launch the automated webinar.

To build a template, pick events from a ready-made list and arrange them in the sequence you want. Events control how attendees interact and give you more control over the content and structure of the webinar.

Every event has two common settings: **Trigger** (**Before Start** or **After Start** of the webinar) and **Time** (hh:mm:ss.mmm from that point). They are described once under "General Event Settings"; the sections below list only each event's own fields.

Select a section below to jump to it:

Add Events to the Webinar Template

Types of Events in the Webinar Template

General Event Settings

## Add Events to the Webinar Template

Go to the "Webinars" section and open the "Templates" tab. Open an existing webinar template or create a new one. To learn how to create a template, see "[Webinar Template](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-template)".

![Webinars, Templates tab with the Leadership basics template and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7cc7bf713616df6797c44d8066b5d89b88ce2a31db324041e2a11efbd2d29d9e.png)

Open the "Events" tab and click "Add Event Here". A menu opens with the event types, grouped as Room, Stage, Chat, and Questions, plus a search box. The new event is added at the current playhead time, shown at the top of the menu.

![Events tab of a webinar template: Automated Webinar Preview, the Chain list, playback controls, Add Event Here and the timeline lanes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/afb32807d9b9f8e882fa03777ae5465aa43605aaa3f22eddb4d4f16b648900ac.png)

Select an event type from the menu. The event appears on the timeline and in the Event Chain. Now set it up.

For a first sequence, add **Open Room** before the start, choose a stage template that supports your content, and then add the presentation or video. Add **Close Room** at the intended finish. Check the **Problems** list, correct the reported errors and click **Save**. The full settings for these events are below.

![Add Event Here menu at 00:00:00 with a search box and Room and Stage event types.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/af2b68f51d42592671f434db75a514896454486f8a55a2a0b538038348847bac.png)

Here is what each event does.

## Types of Events in the Webinar Template

## Add Announcement

This event adds an announcement that attendees see during the webinar. Use it to call out important moments, such as the start of a Q&A, a discount, or an upcoming event.

In the event settings:

1. Text. Enter the announcement text.

![Add Announcement event: Trigger After Start, Time 00:00:05, and the announcement text.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/86ce1731b01feb847714f2bf25ac9bca3fd1a282e64caaad15abe98e7a78e4e6.png)

## Remove Announcement

This event removes an announcement you added earlier from the chat at the time you set, for example when the announcement is no longer relevant.

This event has no settings of its own.

![Remove Announcement event with Trigger and Time.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d69fbdd470eff539d1f870d45ab18fe163a2920e04c3ac344801d39d953652ea.png)

### Add Question

This event adds a question from an attendee to the chat.

In the event settings:

1. First Name. Enter the first name of the attendee who asks the question.
2. Last Name. Enter the attendee's last name. This field is optional; a first name is enough.
3. Text. Enter the question text.

![Add Question event with Trigger, Time, First Name, Last Name and the question text.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6a3a8248d8915d0eb3a648b3651f1c1d46dbb5aeead9393f1b74fa6c776b01ea.png)

### Delete Question

This event deletes a question from the chat, for example when it is outdated or has already been answered.

In the event settings:

1. Question. Select a question from the list. The list shows all the questions you added earlier. If it is empty, make sure you added a question first.

![Delete Question event with the question selected from the list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d36ece9d44e86bef87621fb64be51c78993e53f04b839e65821d71587c190e2b.png)

### Answer Question

This event adds an answer to a question asked earlier in the chat.

In the event settings:

1. Question. Select a question from the list. The list shows all the questions you added earlier. If it is empty, make sure you added a question first.
2. First Name. Enter the first name of the person who answers.
3. Answer. Enter the answer text.

![Answer Question event with the question, the first name of the person answering, and the answer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9b39ecc13f8afb5991156d0d6e15d6fb3fe6bfd5a6739b197b02f587d815e0a5.png)

### Like Question

This event adds a like (an emoji reaction) to an attendee's question in the chat.

In the event settings:

1. Question. Select a question from the list. The list shows all the questions you added earlier. If it is empty, make sure you added a question first.

![Like Question event with the question selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cbf48a95b550a0b240fb94311396a5da716723650d854a0cf3992b8ffe60bb57.png)

### Clear Chat

This event clears all messages from the chat. Use it to start with a clean chat before a new part of the webinar or after the webinar ends.

This event has no settings of its own.

![Clear Chat event with Trigger and Time.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd934283850268ce03e12973a21701ce90172602fa18d95c498b935c0fa9f3b5.png)

### Disable Guest Chat

This event turns off the chat for guests. It stops guests from sending messages, which keeps the webinar orderly.

This event has no settings of its own.

![Disable Guest Chat event with Trigger and Time.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82213471544eecbfc576b090a055559ea913a7092b869f52f322298408164001.png)

### Enable Guest Chat

This event turns the chat back on for guests who couldn't send messages.

This event has no settings of its own.

![Enable Guest Chat event with Trigger and Time.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/22b8d7412d6d9f4228df251d70abf1f80512184db96f8e7fe538fdcee69de115.png)

### Send Message

This event sends a chat message to attendees. Use messages for reminders, instructions, feedback requests, or other important information during the webinar.

In the event settings:

1. First Name. Enter the first name of the person who sends the message.
2. Last Name. Enter the sender's last name. This field is optional; a first name is enough.
3. Text. Enter the message text.
4. On behalf of the team. Turn this on to send the message on behalf of your team.

![Send Message event with First Name, Last Name, the On behalf of the team switch and the message text.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bfed572aaeba00d6b59b3bbf8facc3c12e6638f14a64107a213a959bfb94ab51.png)

### Open Room

This event opens the webinar room for all attendees at the time you set. Opening the room lets attendees know the webinar has started and they can join to watch and chat. You can open the room early, for example 10 minutes before the main session, so attendees can connect and check their connection.

This event has no settings of its own.

![Open Room event set to 10 minutes before the start.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/134e331882197d949d671156c332a90ffc14beb5a4d4be39d96d2c61d6bf8a2a.png)

### Close Room

This event closes the webinar room for all attendees at the time you set. Close the room after the webinar ends or whenever you need to stop access completely. You can pick any closing time, for example right after the last slide or after a set amount of time.

This event has no settings of its own.

![Close Room event at 00:01:00 after the start.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f50c6665ca76cf4d94c3a53da21a330411de75f15d0719eca8c2e8fd2e8267c8.png)

### Update Attendee Count

This event changes the number of attendees at the time you set. This changes the displayed count in the automated webinar. Treat it as a configured presentation value, not as a measurement of actual attendance.

The counter in the webinar adds up the numbers from successive "Update Attendee Count" events. To increase the count, enter a positive number in the next "Update Attendee Count" event for how many attendees you want to add. For example, say there are 50 guests when the webinar starts and after 15 minutes you want to add 20. Set that time and enter 20 for guests in the next "Update Attendee Count" event. At that time, the counter shows 70 guests.

To decrease the count, enter a negative number (with a minus sign) in a later event. The number of attendees then goes down by the amount you enter.

You can gradually increase and then decrease the number of attendees during the webinar.

In the event settings:

1. Hosts, Moderators, and Guests. Enter how many of each to add. Use a positive number to increase the count compared with the previous "Update Attendee Count" event, or a negative number to decrease it.

![Update Attendee Count event adding 1 host, 2 moderators and 48 guests.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ac5c59b1a5e4bba1c38b367ee7621d54d39ca88e9e6358bc80421c15fc00fbfb.png)

### Change Stage Template

This event changes the stage template at the time you set. Use it to show different content in different parts of the webinar.

For example, your webinar starts with a template that shows only the live stream. After 10 minutes, you switch to a template that shows the presentation with a corner camera. Later, you switch to a template that shows only a widget, such as a registration form for your paid product.

In the event settings:

1. Stage Template. Choose the template that takes effect at this time. You can pick a single element (presentation, live stream, video, or widget) or the presentation with a corner camera.

![Change Stage Template event with the stage template list open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f95ba28a2d46578f955c576d8bdf138d9f815fc33086ac47b9ec3ab6bf5e5413.png)

### Add Presentation

This event puts a presentation (PDF) on the stage at the time you set. A presentation supports what you say and helps you get information across. When the event runs, attendees see the selected presentation.

If a presentation is already on the stage, this event replaces it.

Note that attendees won't see the presentation if the current stage template has no place for it. To fix this, add a "Change Stage Template" event before this one and select a template that includes the presentation.

In the event settings:

1. Presentation. Choose a presentation from the list. To make a presentation appear in the list, upload it in the webinar's Settings tab under "Content & Slides". The list refreshes every time you open it, so your new presentation is ready to select. To learn how to add a presentation, see "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".

![Add Presentation event with a PDF presentation selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4cea4345d813dccba853fbb01c3f0d829feea2132e6e9cc1b45bd8de2df72144.png)

### Add Recorded Stream

This event puts a recorded stream on the stage at the time you set. Attendees see a video stream with pre-recorded content.

If a stream is already on the stage, this event replaces it.

Note that attendees won't see the stream if the current stage template has no place for it. To fix this, add a "Change Stage Template" event before this one and select a template that includes the stream.

In the event settings:

1. Live Stream. Choose a stream from the list. To make a stream appear in the list, add it in the webinar's Settings tab under "Content & Slides". The list refreshes every time you open it, so your new stream is ready to select. To learn how to add a stream, see "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".
2. Join Source at (Seconds). Set the point in the video, in seconds, where playback starts. Use it to skip the parts you don't need.
For example, if the video runs 10 minutes and you want it to start at 2 minutes 30 seconds to focus on the relevant material, enter 150 seconds (2:30). When the event runs, the video plays from that point.

![Add Recorded Stream event settings: After Start at 00:05:00, a YouTube stream selected in Live Stream, and Join Source at (Seconds) set to 150.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2344237b2b22879b60accb7fc4e95ce7b58cff23435e8946b400d1b6dea41f1d.png)

### Add Video

This event puts a video on the stage at the time you set. A video can add information or illustrate the webinar topic. To control when the video starts and pauses, use the "Play Video" and "Pause Video" events, described below.

If a video is already on the stage, this event replaces it.

Note that attendees won't see the video if the current stage template has no place for it. To fix this, add a "Change Stage Template" event before this one and select a template that includes the video.

In the event settings:

1. Video. Choose a video from the list. To make a video appear in the list, add it in the webinar's Settings tab under "Content & Slides". The list refreshes every time you open it, so your new video is ready to select. For details on adding a video, see "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".

![Add Video event settings: Trigger After Start, Time 00:00:20.000 and the video Leadership Masterclass · Intro selected, with a note that a video already on the stage is replaced, and the Duplicate and Delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b27569b1316dd5f8b8db7321a8c3fa906f25ae0ef38db89178fc050c9e459622.png)

### Add Widget

This event puts a widget on the stage at the time you set. Widgets add interactive elements, such as polls, chat, or feedback forms, that keep the host and attendees interacting and deepen engagement.

To learn how to create a widget, see "[Widgets](https://docs.axl.tech/widgets)".

If a widget is already on the stage, this event replaces it.

Note that attendees won't see the widget if the current stage template has no place for it. To fix this, add a "Change Stage Template" event before this one and select a template that includes the widget.

In the event settings:

1. Widget. Choose a widget from the list. To make a widget appear in the list, add it in the webinar's Settings tab under "Content & Slides". The list refreshes every time you open it, so your new widget is ready to select. For details on adding a widget, see "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".

![Add Widget event with the Northstar Corporate Training Inquiry widget selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/043088be82611e5b3ae5d5bd2c1e3e592331acfa23b32d3f3f5daffad5cd62aa.png)

### Remove Stage Element

This event removes a stage element (presentation, live stream, video, or widget) at the time you set. Removing elements you no longer need keeps the screen clean and avoids confusion. When the event runs, the selected element disappears from attendees' screens.

In the event settings:

1. Stage Element. Select the element to remove.

![Remove Stage Element event with Widget selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3b5e52080c07f366162a4e108fbfd103fb825e2c9f18a7ae323bc1666d1cb1ba.png)

### Clear Content

This event clears the content of the stage element you select (presentation, live stream, video, or widget) but leaves the element itself on the stage. Use it before moving to the next part of the webinar so old content doesn't clutter the screen. To take an element off the stage completely, use "Remove Stage Element" instead.

In the event settings:

1. Stage Element. Select the element whose content will be cleared.

![Clear Content event with Presentation selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b317e0b3da5ea62c6e12cd5e7db7575177f08d3fb298cdfa4656a180334ad91c.png)

## Add Buttons

This event places one or more buttons under the main picture at a set moment in the webinar. Buttons can link to pages with more information, registration forms, purchases, or other resources, so attendees can interact with your content. For example, they can buy a product or sign up for a newsletter.

In the event settings:

1. Stage Element. Choose the element the buttons appear with: Live Stream or Video.
2. Button settings. For more detail on button settings, see "[Buttons, Widgets, and Custom Events in the Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/buttons-widgets-and-custom-events-in-the-webinar)".

    Set up each button:

    - Show button. Turn this on to make the button visible to attendees.
    - Button text. Enter the text attendees see on the button.
    - Button Color and Text Color. Change the color of the button itself or of the text on it.
    - Action Type. Choose what happens when someone clicks the button:

        - Open Link. When the button is clicked, the attendee goes to the link you specify. Enter the URL in the "Link" field. You can link to a website you created on the AXL platform or to an external site.
        - Custom Event. A custom event triggers when an attendee clicks the button. You can create any event that starts an automation. For details on custom events, see "[Buttons, Widgets, and Custom Events in the Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/buttons-widgets-and-custom-events-in-the-webinar)". The event triggers only if the contact exists in the CRM (that is, has an email address).
        - Open Widget. When someone clicks the button, a widget opens in a pop-up in the center of the screen. Select the widget from the list of widgets added to the webinar. To make a widget appear in the list, add it in the webinar's Settings tab under "Content & Slides". For details on adding a widget, see "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".
3. Click "Add Button" to add another button. A new settings section opens below.

![Add Buttons event with a Reserve your seat button, its colors, Show button, Action Type Open Link and the link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e9ab07fdc0ac7b0c22b94ddecad5e58f1cd30e545d9a197cc7e5d928bcc5da9b.png)

## Remove Buttons

This event removes all the buttons at the time you set, for example when a button is outdated or the time to click it has passed.

In the event settings:

1. Stage Element. Select the element whose buttons will be removed.

![Remove Buttons event with the stage element selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c6014247ec0d7bfcbb1314abf032b56c763aaea2e52a8f44c3ccd3253aed9900.png)

### Pause Video

This event pauses the video at the time you set. Pausing can help you stress a point, comment on it, or answer attendees' questions.

To use this event, first add the "Add Video" and "Play Video" events. The video pauses at the second you choose. Both events are described in this article.

In the event settings:

1. Position in Source (Seconds). The second in the video where playback pauses.

![Pause Video event: the event time and the position in the video, in seconds.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2508efe3de36daa5a9d46e3f77bde848c58665a19ab452869934fba2901b11f6.png)
Pause Video: Time sets when the event runs in the webinar; Position in Source sets the second of the video where playback pauses.

### Play Video

This event starts video playback at the time you set. Use it to sync the video with other parts of the webinar, such as slides, text blocks, animations, and buttons.

To use this event, first add the "Add Video" event. The video starts playing from the second you choose. The "Add Video" settings are described earlier in this article.

In the event settings:

1. Position in Source (Seconds). Set the second in the video where playback starts. Use it to start from a specific part and skip what you don't need.
For example, if a video runs 10 minutes and you want it to start at 2 minutes 30 seconds to focus on the relevant material, enter 150 seconds (2:30). When the event runs, the video starts from that point.

![Play Video event starting playback at 10 seconds into the video.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bd03f6bd5c7ba11fcde4ca6062c2c22ddb91d29ee16d9e3b92f2c931b03a6755.png)
Play Video starts playback 10 seconds into the video; the event’s time controls when it runs in the webinar.

### Change Slide

This event changes the slide during the webinar. Switching slides lets you show new information or key visuals to attendees.

To use this event, first add the "Add Presentation" event. The slides of that presentation change at the time you set. The "Add Presentation" settings are described above in this article.

In the event settings:

1. Slide. Enter the number of the slide to show at that time. A note under the field shows how many slides the presentation has.

![Change Slide event showing slide 3 at 00:00:30.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0cdaa13e5e3ad589777404402ad04a42a850ed24bf9ede5c8ab7a4221cacca75.png)
Change Slide sets the slide number and the time to show it. The presentation itself is chosen in an Add Presentation event.

## General Event Settings

Every event has these general settings:

1. Add Event Here. Click this button to add the next event, then pick the event type from the menu. To change an event's position in the Event Chain, change its time. The event then moves up or down in the chain.
2. Status. A "Ready" badge at the top of the Event tab means the event is set up correctly. A "Warning" or "Error" badge means it needs attention. Check that the event's fields are filled in correctly and that it is positioned correctly relative to the other events. Open the "Problems" list for hints.
3. Event tab. The side panel shows the settings of the selected event. Select an event on the timeline or in the "Chain" tab to open it.
4. Trigger. Choose when the event runs: "Before Start" or "After Start" of the webinar.
5. Time. Set when the event runs, in hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.
6. Event name. The name of the event type appears at the top of the Event tab.
7. Move Events. Use this menu to move every event at the playhead time and later, earlier or later, by the amount you enter. Events before the playhead stay where they are.
8. Delete. Click to delete the event from the list.

![Trigger list open with After Start and Before Start.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7a7f4494982f4712a5b42e2814e185f5445226c7c361045af59cb1fd1577dc01.png)

The editor also gives you these controls:

1. Problems. The "Problems" list shows what to fix before the webinar can run: an event that isn't set up, an event positioned incorrectly relative to the other events, or a missing "Open Room" or "Close Room" event. For some problems, a "Fix" button corrects the issue for you.
2. Save. After you add and set up all the events, click "Save". The button is active only when there are unsaved changes, and the editor won't save while errors remain.
3. Event Chain. The "Chain" tab lists all the events you added. Select an event to open its settings, or use the search box to find one. This is handy when you have many events.
4. Import. Import brings webinar events into your account on the AXL platform from a file on your device (computer, laptop, tablet). Choose the source: BIZON 365 or AXL (JSON file), or GetCourse or EverWebinar (CSV file). This lets you transfer a large number of events quickly. If the webinar already has saved events, the editor asks whether to delete them before importing the new ones. The maximum import file size is 10 MB.
5. Export. Export saves all the webinar events to a file in JSON format, so you can move the event list from your account to another account. Click "Export" and download the file to your device (computer, laptop, tablet). The button appears once the webinar has events.

![Automated Webinar Preview toolbar with Import, Export, sound, Full Screen and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8e47e9e987123c17593b24da8e800b87fa6e9af5bde6f01ca73e17214ee715d6.png)
The Automated Webinar Preview toolbar with Import, Export and Save.

---

# Automated Webinars

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/autowebinars

> Turn a recorded webinar into an automated webinar with a template, a schedule, and an automation, then manage it like a live one.

An automated webinar plays a prerecorded video and follows a timed sequence of events. You can build it from a previous webinar or create a template from scratch. Prepare the recording and the template's events before scheduling a one-time session or a recurring schedule.

After you host a live webinar and save its recording, you can create an automated webinar on the AXL platform. It plays that recording back, and attendees experience it as a live broadcast.

Go to Webinars → Templates to create a template, add the pre-recorded video to the template, and set up the events that happen during the automated webinar. Read more in the articles "[Webinar Template](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-template)" and "[Types of Events in a Webinar Template](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-webinar-template)".

The webinar runs fully automatically. You can't start or stop the broadcast while an automated webinar is running, and you don't need to set up a broadcast connection. You can moderate the chat, answer questions in writing, and add or remove attendees.

Click a topic below to jump to that section:

How to Create an Automated Webinar from an Existing Webinar

How to Create an Automated Webinar from a Template

Automated Webinar Settings

Automation for an Automated Webinar

## How to Create an Automated Webinar from an Existing Webinar

Go to Webinars → Webinars. From the list of past webinars, select the one you want to run automatically. Click its title or the Edit icon.

![Webinars list with a webinar row and its edit action highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fea6d1516f20fdcfa3a394511cc9751988ace1201873fcb367caffc68641e1.png)

Open the "Templates" tab and click "Create".

![Webinar Templates tab with the Create button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65be717b5a59c2c632eb0f4b63393d99ca284682f0f66ea3df8b0642fac28064.png)

A panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Name. Enter a name for the webinar. Attendees see this name in the webinar room window.
2. Internal Name. Only you can see this name. It isn't shown to attendees.
3. Description. Add a description for this automated webinar. Attendees can see it too.
4. Time Zone. Select the time zone for the automated webinar from the list.

![Create Template panel with name, internal name, description, and time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5c88dd3db78c161dea22fe0c4a5dc59382c0f222dac8a60cccf14d734a2acb70.png)

Click "Create" or "Create and Open". The template appears in the template list. Click its name or the Edit icon.

![Templates list with the new template highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65be717b5a59c2c632eb0f4b63393d99ca284682f0f66ea3df8b0642fac28064.png)

Next, open the "Automated Webinars" tab. It has these buttons:

1. Create. Creates a single, one-time automated webinar. Choose the date and time when your webinar recording is shown to the audience.
2. Create Schedule. Sets up a recurring automated webinar on a preset schedule. The schedule decides when registered attendees can watch your automated webinar. For example, you can run a webinar every Tuesday and Thursday at a set time.

![Template Automated Webinars tab with Create, Create Schedule, and the 24-hour cleanup note.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f62c241c4ee4c15765a4f3b23551d6f24f2aebb9578204b11c0288a3be94e432.png)

If you click "Create", a panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Name. The template name is filled in by default. Attendees see this name in the webinar room window.
2. Internal Name. Only you can see this name. It isn't shown to attendees.
3. Description. Add a description for this automated webinar. Attendees can see it too.
4. Scheduled Date and Time Zone. Set the date and time zone for the automated webinar's launch.

Click "Create".

![Create Automated Webinar panel with name, internal name, description, scheduled date, and time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4b6e4011ca65814c6cc5fb4e72019a24eebec6c58e905829d7fce971deb2a2f9.png)

If you click "Create Schedule", set up the schedule for the automated webinar:

1. Schedule. Choose how often it runs: every hour, day, week, month, or year. Set the time.
2. Time Zone. Select the time zone for the automated webinar from the list.

Click "Save".

Automated webinars cannot be scheduled more often than once every 10 minutes. Add events to the template before creating a schedule: empty templates are skipped.

![Schedule panel set to every day at 19:00 with the time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8e12f4c6a842b236196b7ea7d45be898bf17801b91920623a4508f35621fa396.png)

Next, refresh the page. The automated webinar you created appears in the list. Click its title or the Edit icon to open its settings.

An automated session that ends without any registrations or attendees is removed after 24 hours. Check this condition if an unused session no longer appears in the list.

![Automated Webinars list with one scheduled session highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1da83419b661ae34e1b15cfcc31bfcf56074b695ae94058f2402b67585d446e3.png)

## How to Create an Automated Webinar from a Template

Go to Webinars → Templates and click "Create". You're creating a template for a future automated webinar. For more on creating a webinar template, see the article "[Webinar Template](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-template)".

![Webinars section with the Templates tab highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65be717b5a59c2c632eb0f4b63393d99ca284682f0f66ea3df8b0642fac28064.png)

Then open the template you created: click its name or the Edit icon, and go to the "Automated Webinars" tab. Click "Create Schedule", set the schedule in the window that opens, and click "Save". Your automated webinar is created.

![Template Automated Webinars tab with the Create Schedule button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f62c241c4ee4c15765a4f3b23551d6f24f2aebb9578204b11c0288a3be94e432.png)

You can edit the webinar settings and title, replace files and events, change the automation, and more. You can change the date and time until the automated webinar starts. You can also join an automated webinar as a moderator or guest and write questions and answers in the attendee chat. To see an automated webinar's statistics, click the template name or the Edit icon, then open the "Statistics" tab. Read more in the article "[Webinar Statistics](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-statistics)".

![Statistics tab of an automated webinar template: Registrations 423, Attendees 277, View Rate 79% and Attendance Rate 65% cards next to the Attendance chart over 45 minutes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/67e6ee88514c34de44259dcaad481ee2e42ecdb4b88ab5dd1caabf5c71c32077.png)

## Automated Webinar Settings

You've opened the settings of the automated webinar. Here you can change its name, description, and date and time. You can also edit the webinar registration page and the webinar room settings, add attendees, edit the automation, and track statistics.
These tabs are at the top of the page:

- Settings. Information about the automated webinar. This tab is identical to the settings of a regular webinar. Read more in the article "[Webinar Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-settings)".
- Attendees. The personal details of the automated webinar's attendees. You can add new attendees or delete them. Read more in the article "[Webinar Attendees](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-participants)".
- Chat Messages. The messages attendees sent. You can export messages in XLSX and CSV format. Read more in the article "[Webinar Chat Messages](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-messages)".
- Automation. Set up the sequence of events and actions for the automated webinar. Read more in the article "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario)".
- Statistics. The statistics for the automated webinar: registrations, attendees, attendance rate, and view rate. Read more in the article "[Webinar Statistics](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-statistics)".

![Automated webinar header with its tabs and the General settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dab34189466eadd8f2c8ed2f68d56730e505223ba843a1c3e9b925f63541aabd.png)

You can copy the registration link and send it to attendees, but you don't have to: everyone receives a link to the webinar automatically after registering. You can set up messages and other actions in the webinar automation.

![Automated webinar Room menu with the Registration link highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6087af989e0493c4daed5f47a2fbf80b35c962c9a90363470ee6a35a99ce1abd.png)

You can also enter the webinar room to monitor the attendee chat and answer questions in writing during the automated webinar. To do this, open the "Links" menu at the top right and choose a role under "Sign In As":

- Guest. See the automated webinar through an ordinary attendee's eyes and make sure everything displays correctly and the links work.
- Host. Opens the room in the host role. The automated webinar still follows its template's event sequence; use the template editor to change that sequence.
- Moderator. Gives you tools to manage the chat and attendees during the automated webinar.

![Automated webinar Room menu with the Guest, Moderator, and Host sign-in links highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6087af989e0493c4daed5f47a2fbf80b35c962c9a90363470ee6a35a99ce1abd.png)

The "Go to Template" button takes you straight back to the template this automated webinar was created from.

![Automated webinar header with the Go to Template link highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dab34189466eadd8f2c8ed2f68d56730e505223ba843a1c3e9b925f63541aabd.png)

## Automation for an Automated Webinar

In the "Automation" tab, you can change the sequence of events and actions for one specific automated webinar.

By default, an automated webinar uses the automation of the template it was created from, so the same automation runs in every automated webinar from that template. To change the automation for one automated webinar, you first need to unlink it from the template.
To do this, click "Copy Template Automation". The template's automation is copied to this automated webinar. This can't be undone. After that, you can edit this automated webinar's automation separately. For more on setting up an automation, read the article "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario)".

![Automated webinar Automation tab with Copy Template Automation highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0abd0ea092f1866bf590dc991b5ade72593509f01677b50236fbc5c150ab805f.png)

---

# Automated Webinar Preview and Event Editor

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/automated-webinar-preview-and-event-editor

> Preview an automated webinar in the Events editor, jump to any moment, and add, edit, and re-time events on the timeline.

The visual preview lets you check how an automated webinar plays out in the room. For example, you can see when a video starts, when chat messages appear, or when the room’s status changes. You can review the sequence of events, jump to any point, and edit event settings right away.

Jump to a section:

How to Open the Event Preview and Editor

Event Preview and Editor Overview

How to Preview an Automated Webinar

Timeline

How to Add an Event

How to Edit an Event

How to Check for Problems and Save Changes

## How to Open the Event Preview and Editor

1. Go to Webinars → Templates.
2. Select an automated webinar template and open its Events tab.
3. Find the Automated Webinar Preview editor.
4. For a better view, click Full Screen. To return to the standard view, click Exit Full Screen.

![Template Events tab with the preview, the Chain panel, and the four timeline lanes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f3ccf648a4e6520c1b9b19cdae4d231cd4376f2b45be56ee4e0fdc829fe74c8.png)

## Event Preview and Editor Overview

The webinar room, with its video and chat, is in the center. As you play the preview, the room changes to match the events you’ve set up.

The panel on the right has two tabs:

- Chain: Lists the events and when each one happens. Search for an event, or filter the list by category: Room & Stage, Media, Chat, or Questions. Select All to see the full list.
- Event: Shows the settings for the selected event. The available fields depend on the event type.

![Chain tab highlighted beside the automated webinar preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f3ccf648a4e6520c1b9b19cdae4d231cd4376f2b45be56ee4e0fdc829fe74c8.png)

The timeline is at the bottom. Events sit on lanes that match the same categories, and the red playhead shows your current position in the preview. Above the timeline are the playback controls, the time field, and the tools for managing events.

![Playback toolbar and timeline highlighted below the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

## How to Preview an Automated Webinar

1. Click Play below the webinar room. Watch the video, chat messages, and other events as they happen. Pause the preview whenever you need to.
2. Use Previous Event and Next Event to move between events.
3. Click 2× or 4× to preview the webinar faster. Click 1× to return to normal speed.
4. To check a specific segment, click that position on the timeline. The current time appears in the field next to the playback controls.
5. Click Collapse Lanes to make the timeline more compact.
6. Use the − and + buttons on the right to zoom the timeline out and in. This makes it easier to inspect events that are scheduled close together.

For example, if a message is scheduled for the five-minute mark, jump to that point and check that it appears in the chat.

![Playback controls, speed, and current time highlighted above the timeline lanes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

## Timeline

Click anywhere on the timeline to jump to that point in the automated webinar and see what the room shows at that moment.

![Automated Webinar Preview of the Leadership basics template at 00:00:36: the Media lane shows the Add Video event at 00:20 and the Play Video bar starting at 00:21, which you can drag along the timeline.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b31c723b44fa293316fc264e6060a23b54de26cbbd19e31b7d0b51f69c894a5f.png)

You can also change when an event happens right on the timeline. For a short event, press and hold the event itself. For a longer event, press and hold the handle at its start. Then drag left to make the event happen earlier, or drag right to make it happen later.

When you’re done, click Save.

![A Send Message event selected on the Chat lane, with its fields in the Event panel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

You can also change an event’s time in the panel on the right, along with any of its other settings.

![Event panel highlighted with the selected chat message and its timing fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0c7859308e4aa64f37bb2766ae2016e7af5136c27d44df524a55221945cddbd.png)

## How to Add an Event

1. Move the playhead to the approximate time. You can fine-tune it later in the panel on the right.
2. Click Add Event Here above the timeline.
3. Choose an event type from the list. To find one quickly, start typing its name.
4. On the Event tab on the right, complete the settings and check the event time.
5. Check the result in the preview.

    Adding the event updates the preview immediately. To keep it, click **Save** in the editor toolbar and wait for **Saved** before leaving the template.

![Automated Webinar Preview with Saved, Import, Export, playback controls, Chain, Add Event Here and four timeline lanes; empty stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a74bc9b3ea2b52096d9e4a09bc3c8edf1144fa984e558531aa84e1ba3b2212b1.png)
Current editor in Full Screen with the Room & Stage filter, playback toolbar and four timeline lanes. This existing template has no media events, so the stage is empty.

![Add Event Here menu showing Room actions, Change Stage Template, Change Stage Layout, Add Recorded Stream and Add Video.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d55fbb778e84791c59a7b9c4207d906221207e559c34e7f3da2c92b0c72ceebc.png)
Add Event Here: the top of the scrollable menu shows Room actions and the first Stage actions.

![Add Event Here menu scrolled to video playback, presentation, slide, widget, buttons, Clear Content and Remove Stage Element actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/881aabfb15ba375077e794dfe0f862b83b08505a3f852b76db827b2dd79fcbf9.png)
Scroll within the same menu to see the remaining Stage actions, including presentation, widget, buttons and content controls.

![Add Event Here menu scrolled to Chat and Questions actions, with its full bottom border visible.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f1d89009ccebb16644149453db13a1c183c6fd54f2cbb4286182165002cad1c5.png)
The bottom of the same menu shows Chat and Questions actions. No event needs to be selected just to inspect the available types.

![Add Event Here menu at the playhead with Room and Stage events.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aaa2451225ab955febc7c220332b63e0d4fe58b0aa597396e1b56f02e6ee9f22.png)

For example, a Play Video event has a start time and a playback position in the source video, in seconds. A Send Message event has the sender’s first and last name, an option to send the message on behalf of the team, and the message text.

The Duplicate and Delete buttons are at the bottom of the panel.

![Event tab of a Play Video event: Trigger After Start, Time 00:00:21.000, Position in Source (Seconds) 0, Ready status, and the Duplicate and Delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/04dbb3f04222edc1c82148070283f2cdd0571ce7caf997d215933c191e4552c0.png)

## How to Edit an Event

1. Select the event in the chain or on the timeline.
2. Open the Event tab in the panel on the right.
3. Change the event time or any other settings.
4. Check the result in the preview.

![Move Events window opened from the timeline at 00:00:20: 5 events won’t move and 3 will, Move Earlier and Move Later, By 30 seconds, and the Move button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/79c78fa42d38dd1415bed7d253efe6c3bda782cd77010985c9eb3cabd88c7880.png)

To move a group of events, first put the red playhead at the beginning of that group. Move Events shifts events at or after that point; earlier events keep their times. Click Move Events, choose Move Earlier or Move Later, enter how much time to move them by, and click Move.

![Move Events popover with affected-event counts, direction, amount, and time units.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/67f65e17490fdf727c965975420d8626067a7cc809fb533a4409ab256e59cf99.png)

## How to Check for Problems and Save Changes

A validation indicator appears above the timeline. It shows either No Problems or Problems along with the number of problems found. An event with incorrect settings may have an Error status.

For example, adding a message without entering any text creates a problem. After you enter the message text, the event status changes to Ready and the indicator updates.

Before you save:

- Fix every event with an Error status.
- Make sure the indicator shows No Problems.
- Check the key events: Change Stage Template, Open Room, Add Video, Play Video, Pause Video, and Close Room.
- Click Save in the upper-right corner.
- Make sure the Saved status appears.

Note: If the Unsaved changes status appears, click Save before you leave. Your changes show up in the preview right away, but they aren’t saved until you click Save.

![Script Problems list of the automated webinar: a warning that the Play Video event at 00:00:20 affects a stage element that isn't on stage yet, and an error that no event closes the room, with a Fix button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/40738d6ec97164774740da501ce3785c0b99c4cb99147def840fc5786255ab58.png)

---

# Videos

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/video

> Upload videos, organize them in folders, control who can watch them, embed them on your pages, and track views.

Videos is the AXL section where you store your video files. Upload as many videos as you need and use them in your courses and on your websites. You also get detailed statistics for each video: views, duration, and when people watched.

AXL has its own video player, which helps protect your videos from being copied or reused by others. You decide who can watch each video and on which pages or websites. Every video comes with an embed code, so you can place it on pages that accept embedded video, such as your Membership Portal or website, and track views. The video privacy settings still apply.

Click a topic to jump to that section:

Add a Video from Your Computer

Add a Video from a URL

Video Card

Embed a Video

General Analytics

Sort and Search

## Add a Video from Your Computer

Go to Content → Videos. To keep your videos easy to find, organize them in folders. Click "Create Folder".

![Videos page with library totals, the Search field, Show deleted, Add Video and Create Folder.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a72d7af9c8171d325be895477d95c93feb2ad979f115bf08a84e0fd4f7316214.png)

In the "New Folder" window, enter a title for the folder and click "Create".

![New Folder window with the title Northstar Academy · Programs and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/097d3fe647b946310480e9a592a0b63b70eda5aca3680b6a1542a593ea38f1af.png)

The new folder appears in the list. For each folder, you can see:

1. Checkbox. Select it to act on the folder, for example, to move it to another location.
2. Folder name. Click the name to rename the folder.
3. Contents. Shows how many items are inside the folder.
4. Open. Click the folder icon to open the folder.
5. Delete. Click the trash can icon to delete the folder.

![Folder card Northstar Academy · Programs with its checkbox, item count, open icon and trash can.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/04ce4e4f90185190c153990498896366ff9f78376eef5f87bca7ff7269abe306.png)

Inside a folder, you can create another folder to build a chain of nested folders, or you can upload a video. To upload a video, click "Add Video" and select "From Computer".

![Add Video menu inside a folder with From Computer and From URL.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/037ac28a383afbb8be9ed02d961e2653bee6486298e5b6364e640dd580999b35.png)

Select the video file on your computer. AXL uploads it to your account and adds a card for the video to the list while it uploads. The card shows the upload progress as a percentage. To stop the upload, click "Cancel": the card disappears. When the upload finishes, the card shows "Converting" while AXL prepares the video for playback.

Stay on this page until the upload finishes, and don't refresh it, or the upload may fail. If you leave the page, unfinished uploads stop and those videos are deleted.

![Folder Northstar Academy · Programs: the Leadership Masterclass · Module 3 card uploading at 33% with Cancel, next to a video in Converting.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/31d8d9b80d314cbc8b1f218c4babfab503b056be750f7b74eb8a2803ad659bed.png)

## Add a Video from a URL

To add a video from a link, click "Add Video" and select "From URL".

![Add Video menu with the From URL option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/037ac28a383afbb8be9ed02d961e2653bee6486298e5b6364e640dd580999b35.png)

You can add videos from these services:

- Google Drive
- OneDrive
- Dropbox
- Zoom

Steps for each service are below.

![Add Video from URL window with the Video URL field and the supported services link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8418d4b864caf779e9ad311f5763728e4fada7f63788722596e9f4e97beb1543.png)

## Add a Video from Google Drive

Sign in to your [Google Drive](https://drive.google.com) account and open your files.

![Google Drive file list containing a selected video file.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/JTtEnytHbEmjt7Z8ANPz8w.png)

Find the recording in the list. Next to it, click "More actions" to open the menu, then select "Share".

![Google Drive file menu with Share and Copy link options.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ggRH7FDjqE-U-vE8n8UOzg.png)

In the window that opens, go to "General access" and allow anyone with the link to view the video. Copy the link and click "Done".

![Google Drive sharing dialog set to Anyone with the link.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/EWYsTAFj6EeEorqv9jk89w.png)

Go back to AXL. Paste the link into the "Video URL" field and click "Add Video".

![Google Drive link pasted into the Video URL field, with the Add Video button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8418d4b864caf779e9ad311f5763728e4fada7f63788722596e9f4e97beb1543.png)

AXL uploads the video to your account and adds a card for it to the list. The card shows the upload progress as a percentage. To stop the upload, click "Cancel".

## Add a Video from OneDrive

Sign in to your [OneDrive](https://onedrive.live.com/) account. Find the recording in the list, right-click it to open the menu, and select "Share".

![OneDrive video context menu with Share highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/TpEibdwvLUG3jinYXf12yw.png)

In the window that opens, make sure anyone with the link can open the file, then copy the link.

Go back to AXL. Paste the link into the "Video URL" field and click "Add Video".

![Add Video from URL window with a pasted link and the Add Video button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8418d4b864caf779e9ad311f5763728e4fada7f63788722596e9f4e97beb1543.png)

## Add a Video from Dropbox

Sign in to your [Dropbox](https://www.dropbox.com) account.

![Dropbox All files page with a video thumbnail.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/DFD30XsyX0-9F1ugq5QUNg.png)

Find the recording in the list and click "Share".

![Dropbox video card with the Share control highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UuUwSz0FFEi3Su6aQdCynQ.png)

In the window that opens, make sure anyone with the link can open the file. Create the link and copy it.

![Dropbox Share this file dialog with Copy link highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/32IDGJsmzUW4h5SsFyOAIA.png)

Go back to AXL. Paste the link into the "Video URL" field and click "Add Video".

![Add Video from URL window with a pasted link and the Add Video button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8418d4b864caf779e9ad311f5763728e4fada7f63788722596e9f4e97beb1543.png)

## Add a Video from Zoom

Sign in to your [Zoom](https://zoom.us/) account.

![Zoom website with My Account highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rLQevw6h6E2e8GBWp9cRoA.png)

Open Recording & Transcripts, then Cloud recordings, and find the processed recording you want to transfer.

![Zoom recording settings with cloud recording controls.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UXvOIw7i3k--Sv5272bEaA.png)

Open the recording and use **Share** to inspect that recording's access settings. Copy its sharing link. You do not need to turn off passcodes for every future recording in your Zoom account to transfer one file.

If AXL cannot import the sharing link, or you want to keep the recording restricted, download the video from its Zoom recording page and use **Add Video → From Computer** in AXL. Keep the recording's existing access settings unless you intend to change who can view it.

![Zoom cloud recording access settings with the passcode requirement highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/iUDnvF79d0CXAas_sIqZYw.png)

To download a recording, open its page in Zoom and click Download, then confirm. To try a URL import instead, use the link from that recording's Share dialog.

![Zoom cloud recording list with Recordings highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/m_yyUR7U0EyeGDLnhXOz1Q.png)

Copy the link for the recording you intend to import. Sharing and download options can be restricted by the Zoom account administrator.

![Zoom cloud recording files with a share link control highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/IMCIwpK3LE24DnkOvvBo_Q.png)

Go back to AXL. Paste the link you copied into the "Video URL" field and click "Add Video".

![Add Video from URL window with a pasted link and the Add Video button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8418d4b864caf779e9ad311f5763728e4fada7f63788722596e9f4e97beb1543.png)

The video now appears in your list.

Wait for processing to complete, then open the video card and play the preview. A file appearing in the list does not by itself confirm that it is ready to play. Check the title, duration, cover, and privacy settings before embedding it in a lesson.

## Video Card

Once a video is added, it appears in the video list. The list shows:

1. Name. The thumbnail, the title, and the processing status. The video's duration appears on the thumbnail, and list view also has a separate Duration column.
2. Size. The size of the video file.
3. Date Created. The exact date and time the video was created.
4. Actions. Each action is an icon:

    - Embed. Click it to open the "Embed Video" window, where you can copy the code that places the video on a web page.
    - Show Analytics. Click it to see statistics for this video. To learn more about view analytics, read the article "Video Analytics".
    - Edit. Click it to open the video card and make changes.
    - Delete. Click the trash can icon to delete this video.

![Video library in list view with Name, Size, Duration, Date Created and Actions columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ecff044c7313686cbec47f0161e0eb208110503f52f3858ae6dd72b89a4a81e2.png)

You can change how videos are displayed. Click the view icon above the list, on the right, and choose "Grid" or "List".

![View menu above the video list with Grid and List options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ba5fb7437b5b998ce5831ba401f37850fd303f00b1df23a3ae0bbedd5eac4d78.png)

You can move videos between folders one at a time or in bulk. Select the checkbox next to one or more videos, click "Bulk Actions", and choose "Move".

![One selected video with the Bulk Actions menu open: Move, Add Watermark and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1473e53f6e61e40075fbca914f7c80c5de913e1dca4e5df06d81ce479e1cae76.png)

In the window that opens, choose the folder you want to move the video to. To create a new folder, click "Create Folder".
After you pick a folder, click "Select". The video moves to that folder.

![Move 1 item to window with folders, Create Folder, Cancel and Select.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6a2d1e7f4ccb27dff6b315911e1426e279e72d2f27f52c9648502d80b46c3595.png)

To see deleted videos, select the "Show deleted" checkbox. Deleted videos appear in the list with a "Deleted" label. To restore one, click its Restore icon, or select it, click "Bulk Actions", and choose "Restore".

![Show deleted turned on, a video card labeled Deleted, and Restore in the Bulk Actions menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c39bc898f2ffae53441b463ebc320fbe4230ed2686cd5bb9230701685f64efc8.png)

Click a video's title to open its card. These buttons are at the top:

1. The "Analytics" button. You can track the statistics of every video you upload to AXL. Click this button to see how people viewed this video. To learn more about view analytics, read the article "Video Analytics".
2. The "Upload Video" button. Click it to upload a new version of the video.
3. The "Embed Video" button. Click it to open the window where you can copy the code that places the video on a web page.
4. The "Download" button. Click it and pick the file to download, such as the original or a specific resolution.

![Top of a video card with the Analytics, Upload Video and Embed Video buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c06640abb667770eb95fbb62515fa2f87e6039ef39f4c3a5c5a6f06478948afd.png)

Below the buttons, the card has these sections:

1. General.
2. Privacy.
3. Video Versions.
4. Video preview.
5. Chapters.
6. Video Thumbnails.

Each section is described below.

![Video card of Leadership Masterclass · Intro: General, Privacy and Video Versions on the left; the video preview, Chapters and Video Thumbnails on the right; Analytics, Upload Video, Embed Video and Download at the top.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/83da236c27c62163a383510a54069f795dbb81109031b7fff21fb1e1dd829774.png)

## General

The "General" section holds the basic information about the video and its settings.
It has these fields:

1. Title. The name of the video.
2. Description. Details about what the video covers, such as its topics, key points, or instructions.
3. Use Watermark. Adds a watermark (a logo or text) over the video to help protect it from unauthorized copying or use. The watermark appears in different places on the video at different times. It is an overlay, so it doesn't change the original video. You can choose how often it appears: every 15, 30, 60, or 120 seconds.
When the watermark is on, click "Find View by ID" to look up a recorded view. Enter its ID and click "Apply" to see the video, the date, the duration, the contact or guest, and the browser and location for that view.

After you change something, click "Save", or click "Discard Changes" to undo your edits.

![General section with the video title, description and the Use watermark checkbox.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/22e2e7b4e9154a7a61ff6fe483b0dc64c42392497d5fcae6a577bcf42bd5ffad.png)

## Privacy

This section controls who can watch the video. By default, "Available everywhere" is selected, which means the video can play on any page where you publish it. Clear the checkbox to see other options:

- Available everywhere. The video can play on any of your pages.
- Available in your courses. The video can play in the courses of your Membership Portal.
- Available on your AXL websites. The video can play on the websites you build in AXL (the Websites section).
- Available via link. Anyone who has the link to the video can watch it.
- Allowed Domains for Embedding. Enter the domains where you plan to embed the video with its embed code. Select domains from the list, or click "Manage Domains" to add new ones.

![Privacy section with availability checkboxes and Allowed Domains for Embedding.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/27ca32155171d54dc913022cc58186e130376a9d629d2b78db70be4c835cb198.png)

Click "Save", or click "Discard Changes" to undo your edits.

## Video Thumbnails

This section shows frames from the video. Choose one as the video cover, or upload an image from your device to use as the cover.

![Video Thumbnails section with two uploaded cover images and the upload area.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a6fab918d65e876b946b0d053543cfd4039c0d71c832b8509c1763cb49018380.png)

## Chapters

Add chapters to help viewers jump between sections and find the moments they're looking for.

To save time, click "Generate with AI" to have the AI suggest chapters. This is a paid action.

**Important:** AI chapters are built from the video's subtitles. If the video has no subtitles, the button is unavailable; add the chapters by hand.

![Chapters section with three chapters, their start times, Generate with AI and Add Chapter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/46c1eb0c873a38fd63fde834202c4a9c430c91dc11b6cee199695ace6d137c6b.png)

## Video Versions

This section lists every version of the video. Use it to replace an outdated version with a new one in one click, everywhere the video is used (courses, websites, and so on).
For each version, you can see:

- Admin. The name of the admin who uploaded this version of the video.
- Status. The processing stage, such as Uploading, Converting, or Completed. While a version is in progress, you also see the percentage.
- Duration. The total length of the video.
- Date Created. The exact date and time the version was uploaded to the platform.
- Actions. Two icon buttons: a check mark that makes a version the current one, and a trash can that deletes a version. When you make a version current and confirm, it replaces the old one in all the courses and websites where the video is used.

![Video Versions table with one version uploaded by Alex Morgan: status Completed, duration 01:00, created today at 7:04 PM, with the make-current and delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b672e2ab0ca217c87180a4f6220f8f1a533c3198680648f5b40994ed831ca8f6.png)

## Embed a Video

At the top of the video card, next to the "Upload Video" button, click "Embed Video".

![Embed Video button at the top of the video card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c06640abb667770eb95fbb62515fa2f87e6039ef39f4c3a5c5a6f06478948afd.png)

A window opens with the embed code and display options.

- Code. The code that embeds the video on a web page, such as a website, social network, or Membership Portal. Copy it and paste it into the page you want.
- Width. The width of the video window.
- Height. The height of the video window.
- Show controls. The controls are the standard play, pause, forward, and back buttons. To hide them, clear the checkbox.
- Show title. Choose whether the title shows while the video plays or stays hidden from viewers.

![Embed Video panel with the iframe code, Width, Height, Show controls, Show title, Muted and Autoplay.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/90aeeb95db97069476b6c4fd98367189f62d037b9eb6d690e510d8f0bde20318.png)

Click "Copy" to copy the code to your clipboard. Paste it on the page where you want the video to appear, and the video shows up there.

## General Analytics

Go back to the Videos page. In the upper right corner, you can see analytics for all your videos. The data covers the current month.

1. Videos. The number of videos in your library and their total size.
2. Views. The total number of views across all your videos.
3. Unique Views. Counts first views separately for each video, using the identified contact or site guest. In the library total, the same person can contribute a unique view for each different video, so this is not a count of distinct people across the whole library. The selected period includes first views recorded during that period.
4. Avg. % Viewed. The average share of a video that viewers watch per view. For example, 60% means viewers watch about 60% of a video on average.
5. Watch Time. The total time viewers have spent watching all your videos.
6. Avg. Watch Time. The average time viewers spend watching per view.

![Library totals on the Videos page: videos and size, views, unique views, average percent viewed and watch time.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a72d7af9c8171d325be895477d95c93feb2ad979f115bf08a84e0fd4f7316214.png)

## Sort and Search

Use the search box above the list to quickly find a video or folder by keyword.

You can also change the sort order. Videos are sorted by creation date by default, newest first. In grid view, click the current sort option above the list, on the left (it shows "Date Created" by default), and pick another one:

- Name (A-Z)
- Name (Z-A)
- Last Updated
- Date Created
- Duration (Longest First or Shortest First)
- File Size (Largest to Smallest)
- File Size (Smallest to Largest)

In list view, click a column header (Name, Size, Duration, or Date Created) to sort by that column.

![Sort menu above the grid with name, date, duration and file size options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ef43b69cde67b56a3a50ee503dc3118a76e2d09e8390cd75f5acfcf8a7fd56c0.png)

---

# How to Embed a Video

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/how-to-embed-a-video

> Upload a video to AXL, copy its embed code, and add it to a course lesson or a website page.

Videos you upload to AXL can be shown in course lessons and on website pages, and you can update a video to a new version.

Click a topic to jump to that section:

Add Videos to AXL

Add a Video to a Course Lesson

Add a Video to a Website Page

Update a Video Version

## Add Videos to AXL

Go to Content → Videos. To keep your videos easy to find, organize them in folders. Click "Create Folder".

![Videos page with library totals, Search, Show deleted, Add Video and Create Folder.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a72d7af9c8171d325be895477d95c93feb2ad979f115bf08a84e0fd4f7316214.png)

In the "New Folder" window, enter a title for the folder and click "Create".

![New Folder window with the title Northstar Academy · Programs and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/097d3fe647b946310480e9a592a0b63b70eda5aca3680b6a1542a593ea38f1af.png)

Inside a folder, you can create another folder to build a chain of nested folders, or you can upload a video. To upload a video, click "Add Video" and select "From Computer".

![Add Video menu inside a folder with From Computer and From URL.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/037ac28a383afbb8be9ed02d961e2653bee6486298e5b6364e640dd580999b35.png)

**Select the video file on your computer**. AXL uploads it to your account and adds a card for the video to the list while it uploads. The card shows the upload progress as a percentage. To stop the upload, click "Cancel".

Stay on this page until the upload finishes, and don't refresh it, or the upload may fail. If you leave the page, unfinished uploads stop and those videos are deleted.

Upload completion and playback readiness are different states. After uploading, wait for the video to finish processing and check playback before using it in a published lesson or page.

![Folder Northstar Academy · Programs: the Leadership Masterclass · Module 3 card uploading at 33% with Cancel, next to a video in Converting.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/31d8d9b80d314cbc8b1f218c4babfab503b056be750f7b74eb8a2803ad659bed.png)

Once the video is added, it appears in the video list. For quick access to its embed code, use the "Embed" icon in the list.

![Video card in the list with its Embed, Analytics, Edit and Delete icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8d2906edb2ddc138246463f22284db5045b331e614c2082dc336bdb424cbe939.png)

You can also get the code from inside the video card. Click the video's title or the "Edit" icon to open the card, then click "Embed Video" at the top. A window opens where you can copy the embed code.

![Top of a video card with the Analytics, Upload Video and Embed Video buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c06640abb667770eb95fbb62515fa2f87e6039ef39f4c3a5c5a6f06478948afd.png)

The window shows the embed code and display options:

1. Code. The code that embeds the video on a web page, such as a website, social network, or Membership Portal. Copy it and paste it into the page you want.
2. Width. The width of the video window.
3. Height. The height of the video window.
4. Show controls. The controls are the standard play, pause, forward, and back buttons. To hide them, clear the checkbox.
5. Show title. Choose whether the title shows while the video plays or stays hidden from viewers.

![Embed Video panel with the iframe code, Width, Height, Show controls, Show title, Muted and Autoplay.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/90aeeb95db97069476b6c4fd98367189f62d037b9eb6d690e510d8f0bde20318.png)

Click "Copy" to copy the video's embed code to your clipboard. You can paste this code into a course or a website you built in AXL, or into a third-party website or social network.

## Add a Video to a Course Lesson

To add a video to a course lesson, go to Memberships → Courses. Open an existing course or create a new one, and add lessons (steps) to it. For details on creating a course, read the article "[Courses](https://docs.axl.tech/courses)".

Open the "Steps" tab, then click the lesson name or the "Edit" button to open the course step.

![Course Steps tab of Northstar Academy · Feedback Fundamentals: Module 1 expanded with four lessons, Lesson 1.4: SBI in Action (Video) among them, and each lesson's edit and visibility buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dae23b084b1f14281207cdcdfd9001c362cf3850676c101e7ea67e522896e635.png)

Open the "Theory" tab. For an empty lesson, pick a video design, such as **Video lesson**. Switch to **Design** and click the video placeholder in the preview. The panel on the left shows **Your videos**: the videos uploaded to your account. Click a video to insert it.

![Design mode of Lesson 1.4: SBI in Action (Video) with the video placeholder selected and the Your videos list in the left panel: Leadership Masterclass · Intro and Welcome to Northstar Academy, plus Insert by link instead.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/255877955edd6a6d23460b9acd3b6ce7fa5209f6a50d66b659a86d323fd9e942.png)

Videos you uploaded to Content → Videos appear in this list, so you don't need to copy their embed code. For a video from YouTube or Vimeo, click **Insert by link instead**, paste the link, and click **Apply**.

![Video panel in Design mode: the video in the page now, Your videos, and Insert by link instead opened with a YouTube or Vimeo link field and Apply.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0c57d1fb61c440cdf2ba61a426bbc712d6236b0ab319bb1dcb05c88bb6b25637.png)

The video appears in the lesson. When the lesson is ready, click **Publish** in the editor toolbar.

![Video lesson design with the Leadership Masterclass · Intro video inserted; the left panel shows it under In the page now and marks it as Selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6d0512421384c54600e5214558545074f21364cafc02a013cd51c1d5e50b9826.png)

## Add a Video to a Website Page

Go to "Sites", open your website, and on the "Pages" tab click the page name to open it in the page editor. To learn how to create a website, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".

On the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to add the video, and paste the video link or embed code you copied into the same message. For example: "Add a video section above the form that embeds this video: [video link]". The assistant adds the video block to the page draft. Check it in the preview, then click "Publish" when the page is ready. To learn more, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

![Page editor: a request to add a video section with a Northstar video link, the AI Assistant reply, and the new video section in the draft preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/87aef715b88efb54b4034c4cddcc009f05daa4081478083d24a5edbb8d7709b0.png)
Paste the video link into your request. The AI Assistant adds the video section to the draft.

The video is now on the website page.

## Update a Video Version

You can replace an outdated video with a new version in one step, everywhere it is used (courses, websites, and so on). Go to Content → Videos, then click the video's title or the "Edit" icon to open the video card.
To upload a new version, click "Upload Video" and select a new file on your computer. AXL uploads the file to the video card.

![Video card header of Leadership Masterclass · Intro with the Analytics, Upload Video, Embed Video and Download buttons above the General section and the video preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ee2961a06d987b5ca4a1037d4e70341967d04118bf1641b99053e0794583a4ab.png)

The new version appears in the "Video Versions" section.

![Video card of Leadership Masterclass · Intro after uploading a new version: Video Versions lists the new version (today at 11:34 PM) above the original (today at 7:04 PM), both Completed, 01:00.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0e02e613da296ccc355e8a99e0ccb5123b287f2f2b566345afd33f3fd16917fb.png)

The new version automatically becomes the current one and replaces the old version in every website and course that uses the video.

![Video Versions table: hovering the check mark of the newest version shows the tooltip This version of the video is already current.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9b1da83d8bc024f1e8ed7ec161e2a5c3130bdd47eac5066a430cf1a2fe08de04.png)

To go back to the original version, click the check mark button next to the original version in the "Video Versions" section and confirm. The video updates right away.

![Video Versions table with two Completed versions; the check mark next to the original version (today at 7:04 PM) makes it current again.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/964feff086326053bdf32ccd6da366d0a01b6ab74114027976d7182531464d50.png)

---

# Video Analytics

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/video-analytics

> See how people watch your videos: views, unique views, watch time, and charts for one video or for all of them.

Video analytics shows how well your video content performs. Use it to see how people interact with your videos, then improve your content and your courses based on what you learn.

## Analytics for One Video

You can track the statistics of every video you upload to AXL. Open **Content → Videos**. On the video's card, click the chart icon (its tooltip is **Show Analytics**). You can also open the video by its title and click **Analytics** at the top of the video page. The **Video View Analytics** panel opens on the right. Scroll it down to see the video details. Close it with the **×** next to the title.

1. Date. Choose the period you want to see statistics for: pick a day, a month, a year, or a custom range in the calendar. Or select a preset: **Today**, **This Week**, **Last Week**, **This Month**, **Last Month**, **Last 6 Months**, or **Last Year** (the previous calendar year, for example 2025-01-01 to 2025-12-31). By default, the current month is shown. The numbers and the chart update as soon as you pick a period.
2. Add Filter. Narrow the statistics to one **Contact** or one **Course**. Click **Add Filter**, choose the filter, then pick the contact or course. After you choose a course, a second field lets you select one lesson step. To remove a filter, point at it and click the **×** that appears in its upper right corner.
3. Views. The number of views of this video.
4. Unique Views. Counts first views of this video, using a contact or site-guest identity to recognize repeat visits. The date range includes first views recorded during that period; a person who first watched earlier is not counted as a new unique view when returning. Use viewing percentage and watch time to assess how much was watched.
5. Avg. % Viewed. The average share of the video that viewers watched per view. For example, 60% means viewers watched about 60% of the video on average.
6. Watch Time. The total time viewers have spent watching this video.
7. Avg. Watch Time. The average time a viewer spends watching the video, per view.
8. Chart. Below the numbers, a chart shows the trend (rising or falling) for the metric you selected, so you can tell at a glance whether views are going up or down.
9. Uploaded By. The name of the admin who uploaded this video.
10. Upload Date. The exact date and time the video was uploaded.
11. Duration. The total length of the video.
12. Title. The title of the video.
13. Size. How much storage space the video takes up.

![Video View Analytics for Welcome to Northstar Academy, October 2026: 306 views, 82 unique views, 76% viewed, 5h 2m 12s watch time, 59s average, a daily Views chart and the video details uploaded by Alex Morgan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a8d9d55248f0f65d5eb2f998b0f4112b5039fdfea41b393a64ef1cc75720064e.png)
Analytics for **Welcome to Northstar Academy** in October: the period and **Add Filter** at the top, the five metrics, the daily chart for the selected metric (**Views**) and the video details below.

Use these numbers to find your most popular videos, and to spot the ones that people skip or overlook.

## Charts

Set the date range. Most charts show daily activity over that period. The single-video Avg. Watch Time chart instead follows positions within the video. Click a metric to see its chart.

Keep the same date range when comparing metrics. **Views** counts view activity, while **Watch Time** measures time spent watching; a higher view count does not necessarily mean viewers watched more of the video.

- Views. See which day or days had the most views.

- Unique Views. See which day or days had the most unique views.

- Avg. % Viewed. See, day by day, the average share of the video that viewers watched during the period you set.

- Watch Time. See the total time viewers spent watching the video, in minutes, over the period you set.

**Avg. Watch Time.** The number above the chart is total watch time divided by the number of views. For one video, selecting this metric opens a retention chart: it counts views recorded at each 15-second point in the video, with a final point at the end. Use dips to find sections viewers skipped or stopped watching. In analytics for all videos, this metric instead shows average watch time by day, in minutes.

![Avg. Watch Time selected for one video: a retention chart from 00:00:00 to 00:01:15 that falls from about 305 views at the start to about 150 at the end.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ce2a552fc4bd685e440880a02b4b20728bc444499f3e47687ae8c780bc65e61e.png)
With **Avg. Watch Time** selected for one video, the chart shows how many views reached each point of the video. Here about half of the views reach the end.

To see more about the video itself, go back to the Videos page and click the video's title to open its card.

## Analytics for All Videos

General video analytics lets you evaluate how all your video content performs. It shows data for the current month.

Open **Content → Videos**. The numbers in the upper right corner are the general analytics for all your videos; the note below them, **Showing data for the current month**, reminds you of the period. Click any metric to open the **Video View Analytics** panel for all videos. It has the same **Date**, **Add Filter**, metrics and charts as the panel for one video, so you can change the period or limit the numbers to one contact or course there. On a phone, the header shows only the number of videos; the view metrics are not displayed.

1. Videos. The number of videos in your library and their total size.
2. Views. The total number of views across all your videos.
3. Unique Views. Adds up first views across the selected videos and date range. Uniqueness is tracked separately for each video, so one person watching three different videos can contribute three unique views. This total is not a count of distinct people across your whole library.
4. Avg. % Viewed. The average share of a video that viewers watch per view. For example, 60% means viewers watch about 60% of a video on average.
5. Watch Time. The total time viewers have spent watching all your videos.
6. Avg. Watch Time. The average time viewers spend watching per view.

![Videos page summary for the current month: 18 videos, 350.7 MB, 682 views, 255 unique views, 76% viewed, 17h 20m 56s watch time and 1m 32s average watch time.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5e3bcb9577814a5da74165c31319b73ba6adac0aef25f2ebcd70e42d858a1bc2.png)
The library summary in the upper right corner of **Content → Videos**. Click a number to open its chart.

---

# Files

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/file-manager

> Upload files to your account, organize them in folders, and control whether each file is public or private.

Files is the AXL section where you store your files, such as photos, text documents, and presentations. Upload as many files as you need and use them in your courses and on your websites.

Storage fees depend on your plan and are calculated from the total size of your files.

Click a topic to jump to that section:

Upload Files

Manage Files

## Upload Files

Go to Content → Files. To keep your files easy to find, organize them in folders. Click "Create Folder".

In the "New Folder" window, enter a title for the folder and click "Create".

![Complete New Folder dialog with the Title set to Leadership Handouts and Cancel and Create buttons; the example has not been saved.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2bb09dfad77d76bc9c99ed15d9e1ef583e5ca2337c237dd9ce697ae5c4a28a02.png)
Enter a descriptive folder title, then select Create when you are ready to add it.

Next, upload files into the new folder. Open the folder and click "Upload".

![Files page inside Program resources and Leadership - November 2026, with complete breadcrumbs, Upload and Create Folder controls, all list columns and an empty-folder message.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3e0751519220ee375a3fc332307169b3d74af2926b9a302fbb43438f7e8e6ca7.png)
Open the destination folder before uploading. The breadcrumb shows its location; select Files to return to the top level.

**Select a file on your computer**. AXL uploads it to your account and displays a percentage indicator while the upload is in progress.

Wait until the upload finishes before using the file in a page or course. Then find it in the folder you opened and use **Actions → Download** to check that the uploaded file opens correctly.

## Manage Files

After you upload a file, it appears in the file list. The list shows:

1. Name. The name of the file.
2. Size. The size of the uploaded file.
3. Extension. The file type.
4. **Access**. A file is marked public or private. Public files are intended for reusable public links. For an ordinary private file in the account file manager, **Copy Link** creates a temporary download link that is valid for six hours from creation. Anyone who receives that temporary link can use it while it remains valid; the Private label is not a list of individually authorized recipients.

    When a temporary link expires, return to the file and use **Copy Link** again. Avoid pasting temporary links into permanent page or email content. Files attached to a website can instead use an address on that website’s domain. Use the link supplied by AXL, and configure the page, course, or product access separately when the material is for a restricted audience.
5. Last Updated. The exact date and time the file was last updated.
6. Actions. Open this menu to manage the file.

![Files in List view searched for leadership-workshop, showing the complete Name, Size, Extension, Access, Last Updated and Actions columns for a public PNG image in Leadership - November 2026.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6592ee4a8d66c2626fb5b3f4503c5de49d7d0e7ab5d8a658faa44196576ebb3d.png)
List view shows the file name, size, extension, public or private access, update time and Actions menu.

Open the file's **Actions** menu (three dots), or right-click its card in grid view. These actions are available for a file:

- Download. Saves the file to your computer.
- Copy Link. Copies the file link to your clipboard.
- Make Private / Make Public. Changes the file’s public/private setting. This does not select individual recipients or replace page, course, or product access settings.
- Replace. Choose another file with the **same extension** as the original, such as a PDF to replace a PDF. AXL rejects a replacement with a different extension.
- Rename. Opens the file name for inline editing. Enter the new name, then press **Enter** or click outside the field to save it. Press **Escape** to cancel and keep the original name.
- Delete. Removes the file from the list.

![Public leadership-workshop-agenda image card in Grid view with the complete Actions menu: Download, Copy Link, Make Private, Replace, Rename and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d8c00b9d299a31f9edece1bb7f4f0daa3c16e475e352a35a7a0f97c95442e8a6.png)
Open Actions on the file card, or right-click the card, to see its available commands.

To change how the file list looks, click the view icon above the list, on the right, and choose "Grid", "Large Grid", or "List".

![File Manager view selector with its trigger and all three options: Grid, Large Grid and List.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4de7de7e5e82d266660b0ab1c83666c872b960726c196698a93cde43be6a3df8.png)
Use the view selector above the file list to switch between Grid, Large Grid and List.

The folder you are in is saved in the page address (URL), so if you refresh the page or come back with your browser's Back button, you land in the same folder.

Inside a folder, click "Files" in the breadcrumb at the top to return to the top level of the file list.

---

# Courses

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/courses

> Create and manage courses in AXL: the course list, structure, comments, ratings, and reviews.

Courses is the section of AXL where you create training courses for your account.

Here you create and manage your list of courses: add new ones, edit or delete them, and change their names, descriptions, and other details.

A course is a set of learning steps. You choose their display order and can configure whether students must complete earlier steps before opening later ones.

In AXL, a course is made up of steps (videos, text, tests, assignments) grouped around a topic, which students study online. You can give students access to one course or to all the courses in your account at once. Access can be paid or free.

Click a section name to jump to its description:

Course List

How to Create a Course

Course Structure

Comments

Ratings

Reviews

## Course List

Go to Memberships → Courses. The Course List tab opens with all your courses. For each course, you can see:

![Courses page filtered to Northstar, with the complete Course List row, Title, Updated, Users and Actions columns, and Create Course button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Search by course title, then click the course name or its pencil icon to edit it.

1. Title. The course name. Click it to edit the course.
2. Updated. The date and time of the last change to the course.
3. Users. The number of students taking this course.
4. Actions. The edit button does the same thing as clicking the title: it opens the course so you can make changes.

Use the search box on the Courses page to find a course quickly. Enter the course title or a word from it, and the list shows only the courses whose titles contain that word.

## How to Create a Course

To add a course to your account, click "Create Course". In the window that opens, enter a "Title" for the course and, if you like, a "Description" (this field is optional). Published is checked by default. Clear it if you want to prepare the course as an unpublished draft; leave it checked to publish the course. Click "Create".

![New Course form for the 12-week Northstar Leadership Certificate, with title, description and Published cleared.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/280b78af791bc201447f28e9a11a30a0bb3d2bca1f3e639cbf0b272205515a5a.png)
Preparing the Northstar Leadership Certificate as a draft: enter the title and description, clear Published, then use Create when ready to save the course.

After you create a course, it appears in the course list, and you can start managing it. To learn more, see "[Course Management](https://docs.axl.tech/course-management)".

Open the new course to add its learning steps. The **Published** option controls whether the course is published; it does not add lessons or grant paid-course access. Before inviting students, add content, publish the intended steps, and configure course access.

## Course Structure

On the "Course Structure" tab, you set the order and hierarchy of your courses.

To group courses, create folders and fill them with courses. Click "Create Folder".

![Leadership Programs folder containing one Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate course, with child counts and complete expand, edit and delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/445e6029c44e1cc47ad015595a60500c7461ece723ba1a74453440f3ac4938a8.png)
A course grouped inside Leadership Programs. The folder shows one direct course and no subfolders; its Delete button is disabled while it contains the course.

In the window that opens, enter a title and add the optional details you need:

1. Title. Enter the folder name.
2. Description (optional). Add a short description of the folder to make it easier to find.
3. Cover (optional). Add a cover image to the folder. Click to select an image and upload it from your device (computer, tablet, or laptop).

Click "Create".

![Complete New Folder form with Leadership Programs title, optional description and cover, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0e2e5248bff083af42be5f5591f89e432982239442537e29f1895367c920cfd.png)
Enter the required title and optional folder details, then click Create.

Next, add courses to the folder. To change the order of courses inside a folder, drag them: hover over a course name, hold down the left mouse button, and move the course up or down.

In the upper-right corner, click "Collapse All Folders" to hide all subfolders and courses and show only the top-level items.

Now you have a course structure. For each item, you see:

1. The type of item (folder or course) and its number in the list.
2. The name of the folder or course.
3. The number of courses and folders directly inside each folder.
4. The "Hide/Expand" button. Click it to collapse or expand the contents of a folder.
5. The "Edit" button. Click it to change the folder details or to fill the course with content.
6. The "Delete" button. Click it to delete a folder or a course. A folder must be empty before you can delete it.

## Comments

The "Comments" tab shows comments on individual course steps across your courses.

![All-course Comments with published, pending-review and unpublished examples, moderation controls, replies, and published/pending counters.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc7daf8fc05206a8e48febe9d574caa396fa7e1689ac8b73a89786f7e3f2937d.png)
The Comments tab brings together step comments from your courses. Its badges show published comments and comments awaiting moderation.

The Comments tab name shows two counters: the number of published comments and the number of comments awaiting moderation. They sit in the tab name so you can see them at a glance.

At the top of the page, you have filters for managing comments. You can filter comments by:

- Course. Select the course that the comments were left on.
- User. Select the students who left the comments.
- Add a filter. Add more filters, such as status and date created.

![All-course comment filters with Course and User selectors and the Add Filter menu offering Date Created and Status.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ac00958eadaa4bd9aa2edd56fd6812e9cb359cf7a38348ca0ac9456f11a6abcd.png)
Choose a course or user, or add a Date Created or Status filter.

To export comments, click "Actions" in the upper-right corner of the page, then choose XLSX or CSV under "Export Comments As…".

![All-course Comments Actions menu with Send Comment and Export Comments As XLSX and CSV above a comment thread.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0d0ddf35989267fdf6991440f8bfe716316f68d5b3a2e929dae170e4ae019bbf.png)
Open Actions and choose XLSX or CSV under Export Comments As.

To learn more about this tab, see "[Comments](https://docs.axl.tech/comments)".

## Ratings

Students can rate a course step from 1 to 10 and add a comment explaining their rating when ratings are enabled for the step. You can see all student ratings on the "Ratings" tab.

![All-course Ratings showing Alexandra Morgan Rivera’s nine-out-of-ten leadership-step rating, explanation and reply composer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a0eed99a24d18548e5a28d8380efcda2920d89bd44e5a4d8a0443beaf1717106.png)
Ratings are attached to course steps. This example includes a score and the learner’s explanation.

To export ratings, click "Actions" in the upper-right corner of the page, then choose XLSX or CSV under "Export Ratings As…".

![All-course Ratings with a complete Export Ratings As menu offering XLSX and CSV beside a nine-out-of-ten step rating.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c7b2ccc9ed006f5705ff0875e61aa89c60139b5c5cd617336d97d78fb409072c.png)
Use Actions to open the ratings export formats.

To learn more about this tab, see "[Ratings](https://docs.axl.tech/ratings)".

## Reviews

After finishing a course, students are asked to leave a review unless the course is set not to request feedback. You can see all reviews on the "Reviews" tab.

![All-course Reviews table with Course, Start Date, End Date and Review columns and Aria Sullivan’s Leadership Certificate feedback.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e1dc597d7578e396d5482883cf28b5882b2d8bc3857ed56ea457f232f11fe9d3.png)
The Reviews tab lists course-completion feedback and identifies the course for each review.

To export reviews, click "Export Reviews As…" in the upper-right corner of the page and choose XLSX or CSV.

![Complete Export Reviews As menu offering XLSX and CSV.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e5ec1276c9d4606bc3a1306c1a71f6ec25c75567e4f8c33685ea524c60a3595c.png)
Choose the format under Export Reviews As.

To learn more about this tab, see "[Reviews](https://docs.axl.tech/reviews)".

---

# Course Management

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/course-management

> Edit a course: its general info, settings, plans, steps, comments, ratings, users, reviews, and automation.

Each course has its own page where you manage everything about it: general details, settings, steps, comments, ratings, users, reviews and automation. There you also publish the course or preview it the way students see it.

Courses you create in Memberships → Courses appear in the course list, where you can manage them. Click a section name to jump to its description:

Course Management

General

Settings

Steps

Comments

Ratings

Users

Reviews

Automation

## Course Management

Click the course title or the edit button in the Actions column.

![Courses page filtered to Northstar, with the complete Course List row, Title, Updated, Users and Actions columns, and Create Course button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Search by course title, then click the course name or its pencil icon to edit it.

The course page opens. At the top of the page, you see:

1. The course name.
2. The "History" button. It shows the history of changes to the course.
3. The "Preview Course" button. See the course the way your students see it.
4. The "Published" switch. Turn it on to publish the course or off to unpublish it.

Below that, you see these tabs:

- General
- Settings
- Steps
- Comments
- Ratings
- Users
- Reviews
- Automation

Let's look at each tab in more detail.

## General

The settings on this tab are grouped into cards: Main, Course Prerequisite, Certificate, Tab Names and Images. You can change:

1. Title. The course name. This field is required.
2. Description. An optional description of the course.
3. Categories. Select a category. If you don't have any categories yet, click "Manage Categories" and create one.
4. Course Prerequisite. Students can't start this course until they complete the selected courses.
5. Completing any one of the selected courses is enough. Check this box to open the course for a student once they complete any one of the courses selected above.
6. Certificate. Select the certificate template that AXL issues automatically when a student completes the course. Do not also add an **Issue Certificate** step to the course automation, or the student gets two certificates. For more about certificate settings, see "[Certificates](https://docs.axl.tech/certificates)".
7. Tab Names. Turn on the switch in the card to rename the course tabs that students see. Custom names replace the default titles. If you leave a name empty, the default title is used.
8. Images. Upload an image for your course.

![Northstar course General tab in cards: Main with title, description and categories, Course Prerequisite, Certificate, Tab Names switched off, and Images.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d925eb4de80b8cd5bc47b416770fa692231c9d354d20d326533431714bce3cbb.png)
Each group of settings is a card. Tab Names is off in this example; turn on its switch to rename the tabs students see.

When you change something, a bar appears at the bottom of the page. Click "Save Changes" to keep your changes, or "Reset" to undo them.

## Settings

On this tab, you configure how students get access to the course. Each setting is described below.

The access and Other checkboxes save when you change them. With **Available for free** off, you can enable **Show Without Access** and provide a **Payment URL** so students without access can find the purchase page. The payment URL saves when you leave the field after entering a valid URL.

![Northstar course Settings tab: the Course Access card with Available for free and Show Without Access, and the Other card with Don't ask for feedback and Enable Gamification.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3104daf5916ed62f0d88ead6fed84808538793f95cc89d9eed787d105b668b8.png)
Settings is split into cards. Course Access and Other come first, followed by Plans, Included in Products and Included in Cohorts.

## Course Access

Available for free: this option opens the course to all registered users at no cost. If a paid course has free steps, any registered user can access those steps even when this option is off.

If this option is off, students need another access grant, such as a purchase, manual enrollment, or an included cohort. Turning it off does not remove those existing access grants.

## Other

Don't ask for feedback. If you check this box, students aren't asked to leave a review after they complete the course. If you leave it unchecked, every student is automatically asked for a review after the course.

Enable Gamification. Check this box so students can earn achievements for completing course materials. Uncheck it if you don't want this course to take part in gamification.

For more about gamification settings, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)".

## Plans

Plans let you offer variants of the same course. Step availability can depend on the selected plan, and a plan can remove step time limits. Set the selling price in [Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers).

Click "Add Plan" to open the "Create Plan" window.

The "Course" field is filled in automatically with the current course, and you can't change it.
Enter a "Name" for the plan. This field is required.
Check "Remove all step time limits" to remove all step time limits for this plan.

Click "Create".

![Create Plan drawer for Northstar Leadership Certificate with the Leadership Essentials name, optional time-limit setting, and Create and Cancel controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e6393f8c6075d833b8ff43446cc1f1eacc225c93b2284560c32338757796de61.png)
The current course is selected automatically. Enter the plan name, choose whether to remove step time limits, then click Create.

The Plans list shows the plans configured for this course. On the right of each plan are three buttons to copy, edit, and delete it. Creating a plan does not enroll students or sell the course.

![Plans card with the Leadership Coaching and Leadership Essentials plans, their Copy, Edit and Delete buttons, and Add Plan below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a9c95e66cdf19e735fa7358f83cd895f9872f7ea9ac3da1077fe8f72a0894080.png)
Each saved plan has Copy, Edit and Delete buttons. This example has two plans: Leadership Coaching and Leadership Essentials.

## Included in Products

A product is one or more courses or plans sold together. Here you can see which products include this course. To learn how to create a product and add a course to it, see "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".

![Included in Products card listing Northstar Leadership Certificate (Courses &amp; Materials) and Northstar Leadership Membership (Subscription).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/71090b237d986579af5e92654a6806d9a9156ea332e91c88a6f6d60c557a518e.png)
Included in Products lists products containing this course. Click the product name to open its settings.

## Included in Cohorts

A cohort is an event on the AXL platform that is tied to a specific date. Here you can see which cohorts include this course. To learn how to create a cohort and add a course to it, see "[Cohorts](https://docs.axl.tech/cohorts)".

![Included in Cohorts card with the Northstar Academy Leadership Cohort for Spring 2027.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ed7a736e4d3b80e46273b5f3245be762efe54fbdb50bdd304934eb6b8bc3d774.png)
Included in Cohorts lists cohorts linked to the course. Click the cohort name to open it.

## Steps

The Steps tab is the course builder. Here you create lessons: videos, text, tests, and assignments. On a computer, double-click "Step" to append a draft lesson, or drag it into the course structure where you need it. Arrange the steps in the order you want. For example, start with a video lesson, follow it with a text description (an article), and finish with a set of test questions to check what students have learned.

To learn how to add lessons to a course, see "[Course Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/course-steps)".

Use **Preview Course** to check the lesson order and content. Publishing the course and publishing its steps are separate actions; also check each step's content visibility and access rules before inviting students.

![Step and Section insertion buttons, Copy Steps from Another Course, Collapse All, and the complete Leadership Foundations section with three lesson rows and their action icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9cc1efc48b3dae593e7463e94037e03b6dbae3559ed6ce2edfa1916e682f1b2b.png)
The section and its three lessons are shown together. Each lesson has content shortcuts, a lock for availability, and edit, publication, copy and delete controls.

## Comments

This tab shows student comments on the course and on each course step. To learn more, see "[Comments](https://docs.axl.tech/comments)".

![Northstar course comments with a published student discussion and follow-up, a Pending Review question, a Not Published reflection, timestamps, source lessons, and reply controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e48f310e8a75c8c64f9f054603dd1ab462665ff63eaf9c79ca8e8d1366c1e808.png)
An example course list showing Published, Pending Review and Not Published comments. The expanded thread contains a student’s own follow-up; the reply fields below each thread are empty.

## Ratings

The Ratings tab collects student ratings of this course's steps on a scale of 1 to 10. Students can also leave a comment with their rating. To learn more about ratings, see "[Ratings](https://docs.axl.tech/ratings)".

![Course Ratings tab showing Alexandra Morgan Rivera, the complete Week 1 lesson path, a 9 out of 10 rating, a detailed explanation, and an empty reply field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/999a0f1cf06658fde6ed237851dbaf3ba939ec299295b94335729fd7336c0b64.png)
A rating can include an explanation. The lesson path identifies the step, and the Comments area lets you discuss the feedback.

## Users

This tab shows information about the course's students:

1. User. The student's first and last name. Click the name to see detailed information about this student in the contact record in Contacts.
2. Activity. The date and time of the student's last visit to the course.
3. Start Date.
4. End Date (the date the student completed the last step).
5. Step. The step the student is currently on.
6. Status (Not Started, In Progress, or Completed).
7. Score. The points recorded for the student in this course. A dash appears when the course has gamification disabled.
8. Actions. The available actions depend on the course record:

    - View. Open the Membership Portal and see the course inside the student's account, as that student sees it.
    - History. Opens a window with the student's detailed course history: steps, dates, times, grades, and comments.
    - Feedback. See the feedback the student left about the course. The icon is disabled when there is no feedback.
    - Course completion. For a completed record, use the rollback icon to reset course completion. This action is absent while the record is In Progress.

![Course Users table with Aria Sullivan Completed and Alexandra Morgan Rivera In Progress, date and user filters, scores, and state-dependent Feedback and reset-completion controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a66b9bcc05cde44ea51e3b7cabf0ce36b99662837af3719c7bf921273e6c64d3.png)
Completed records can show feedback and reset-completion controls. An In Progress record has no completion date; Feedback is disabled when no review is recorded.

This tab also has filters to help you find information quickly:

1. Start Date Range. Filter by the period when students started the course.
2. End Date Range. Filter by the period when students finished the course.
3. Status (Not Started, In Progress, Completed). Select a status from the list.
4. User. Select a user from your contacts.
5. The "Reset" button clears all filters.

This tab shows the same learning records as the Learning tab of a contact card: here the rows are students in this course, while a contact card lists that contact’s courses. To learn more, see "[Users](https://docs.axl.tech/users)".

## Reviews

When course feedback is enabled, students are asked to leave a review after finishing the course. The Reviews tab lists those responses.

![Northstar course Reviews tab with Aria Sullivan, course start and completion dates, the full review, search and filter controls, and Export Reviews As.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/803e63a3ffe73fb78283692c90b4ac89d2d9ab3ec9d501bd89f64cb1faee2582.png)
Reviews lists completed-course feedback. Search or add filters to find a review, and use Export Reviews As for an export.

## Automation

On this tab, you set up automations that run between your account and students. To learn how to create them, see "[Course Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/course-scenario)".

![Inactive course Automation showing the complete Course Started trigger connected to a five-minute Delay, with the course still unpublished.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a354ae8f02ba4035d24d18c9cda07f1210892606c7820850d1a42169bed19426.png)
This inactive example connects Course Started to a five-minute Delay. The palette provides the events, actions and wait steps you can use to build a course automation.

---

# Course Steps

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/course-steps

> Learn what course steps are, how to add them to a course, and how to set them up and edit them.

Every course has steps. A step is a unit of learning content in a course. A step can be a video lesson, an article, a test, an assignment, and so on. You add as many steps as you need to a course in your Membership Portal.

Click a section name to jump to its description:

How to Add Steps to a Course

Step Settings

Editing a Step

## How to Add Steps to a Course

To add steps to a course, go to Memberships → Courses. Then click the course title or the edit button.

![Courses page filtered to Northstar, with the complete Course List row, Title, Updated, Users and Actions columns, and Create Course button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Search by course title, then click the course name or its pencil icon to edit it.

Go to the "Steps" tab.
On this tab, you build the sequence of steps that students go through. You can add, delete, and reorder steps. You can change a course at any time, even after you've published it and students have access. That means you can update the course, make changes, fix information, replace videos, and more whenever you need to.

![Northstar course Steps tab with four expanded modules, three weekly lessons in each module, all row controls visible, and course Published switched off.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bc9066daaf84d91227b7365aecbf7d8f271cc22f6b1991a30e6408d477efc8b4.png)
A 12-week course outline with four sections and three lessons in each section. The course is still unpublished while its content is being prepared.

At the top of the page, you see these buttons:

1. "Step" button. A step is a component of a course, a unit of learning content. A step can be text, a video, a picture, a table, a list, an assignment, a test, and so on. On a computer, double-click "Step" to append a draft step, or drag "Step" into the course structure at the position you need.
2. "Section" button. Use it to group the steps of a course when you want to divide the course into parts. On a computer, double-click "Section" to append a draft section, or drag "Section" into the course structure at the position you need.
3. "Copy Steps from Another Course" button. Use it to copy steps from one course to another.
Automations attached to the copied steps are copied with them; this action does not copy the course-level automation. Copied steps are drafts and are initially available on all plans. Review their publication and availability settings before publishing them.
Click "Copy Steps from Another Course". In the window that opens, select the source in From Course. Target Course is the course you are editing. Check the box next to each step or section you want to copy. Click "Create". The steps appear in the course with a "Copy" label.

![Step and Section insertion buttons, Copy Steps from Another Course, Collapse All, and the complete Leadership Foundations section with three lesson rows and their action icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bfd8ef45ada797979714d5b33781d1b5bf6c1314c19d33ff790ae7eee702c893.png)
The section and its three lessons are shown together. Each lesson has content shortcuts, a lock for availability, and edit, publication, copy and delete controls.

Add steps to your course.

Once you've added steps and sections, fill the course with content, such as text, video, and assignments. To do that, use the step settings.

A step's **Published** state and its **Theory Visibility**, **Test Visibility**, and **Assignment Visibility** switches serve different purposes. Publish the step and enable the content types you want students to use; access conditions still determine which students can open it.

## Step Settings

Each **Step** has content shortcuts and action icons in its row. Click the step title or the pencil icon to open the full editor. The lock icon opens Availability; the eye, copy, and trash icons control publication, duplication, and deletion.

1. Theory button. Add text blocks, videos, and images for the lesson. Choose Classic for the block-based page editor or HTML for a lesson you can edit in Design and Code views.
2. Tests button. Create tests for students. A test can use choice, matching, ordering, fill-in-the-blank, and sentence questions. Each question type has its own answer controls. The number of questions, answer options, and correct answers is not limited. To learn how to create tests, see "[Tests](https://docs.axl.tech/tests)".
3. Assignments button. Create assignments for students. Unlike tests, assignments are answered in the student's own words, optionally with files and extra form fields, and are checked by your team or the AI Tutor. You can add as many questions as you like. To learn more, see "[Assignments](https://docs.axl.tech/tasks-2)".
4. Automation button. This automation belongs to the step. Set up what happens when a student starts or completes this step. For events when the entire course starts or finishes, use the course's Automation tab. To learn more, see "[Course Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/course-scenario)".
5. Link button. For a published step, click the link icon to open a pop-up with its direct link, then copy it. While the step is a draft, this icon is disabled on a computer and hidden on a phone. This is handy for sharing the link with colleagues or other users, or for using it in your course promotional materials.
6. Availability (lock icon). Set who can access this step and when. You can make a step available on all plans or only on selected ones. Set the step's availability in the sequence: available right away, or only after students complete the previous steps. You can block a step until the previous steps are done. You can also set availability by time, so access opens after a delay.
7. Edit (pencil icon). Opens the full step editor. See "Editing a Step" below.
8. Publish / Unpublish (eye icon). Publish the step to make it visible to students, or unpublish it to hide it.
9. Copy (copy icon). Creates a copy of the step.
10. Delete (trash icon). Deletes the step.

Each "Section" has these settings:

1. Hide / Expand button. Hides or shows the contents of the section. If your course has many sections and steps, collapse the sections to work more comfortably.
2. Availability (lock icon). Set access for this section. You can make the section available on all plans or only on selected ones. Set when the section opens in the sequence: right away, or only after students complete the previous steps. You can block the section until the previous steps are done. You can also set availability by time, so access opens after a delay.
3. Edit (pencil icon). Change the section name, add a comment for editors and tutors, and turn on step comments and step ratings.
4. Publish / Unpublish (eye icon). Publish the section to make it visible to students, or unpublish it to hide it.
5. Copy (copy icon). Copies the entire section with all its steps.
6. Delete (trash icon). Deletes the section. You can delete a section only when it has no steps, so delete its steps first.
7. The "Collapse All" button. Click it to hide the steps inside each section so that only the sections are visible in the step list.

## Editing a Step

Click the step title or its pencil icon. The step editor opens on **General Settings**. Fill in the details of the course step:

On **General Settings**, a bar appears at the bottom of the page when you change something: click "Save Changes" to keep the changes, or "Reset" to undo them. The HTML Theory editor saves changes automatically. In the Classic editor, save your page changes before leaving; complete any save controls shown by the Tests and Assignments editors too.

1. General Settings. Enter the name of the course step and add a comment for editors and tutors. Turn on the Comments and Rating cards if you want students in your Membership Portal to be able to comment on and rate this course step. To set who can access the step and when, use the availability settings on this tab or the lock icon in the step row.
2. Theory. Choose Classic to build the lesson from blocks, or HTML to edit lesson content in Design and Code views. Add text, videos, and images.
3. Tests. Create tests for students. To learn how to create tests, see "[Tests](https://docs.axl.tech/tests)".
4. Assignments. Create assignments for students. To learn more, see "[Assignments](https://docs.axl.tech/tasks-2)".
5. Ratings. See student ratings for the step, if ratings are enabled. To learn more about ratings, see "[Ratings](https://docs.axl.tech/ratings)".
6. Comments. See student comments on the step, if comments are enabled. To learn more, see "[Comments](https://docs.axl.tech/comments)".
7. Automation. Create an automation of events and actions for this step. To learn more about automations, see "[Course Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/course-scenario)".
8. History. See the detailed history of changes to this step: the date and time of each change, the name of the user who made it, and what was changed.

![Week 3 lesson header with its course path, History, Published switched off, and the General Settings, Theory, Tests, Assignments, Ratings, Comments and Automation tabs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d808a57be3f192462dfec21a3e48151b10c40dd3525553661519d2d3d4b17b79.png)
Click a step title or its pencil icon to open this editor. General Settings is the first tab; content switches and Published are separate controls.

---

# General Course Step Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/general-course-step-settings

> Set a course step's title, comments, ratings, access conditions, and time delays on its Account Settings tab.

Every course step has general settings: its title, a note for editors and tutors, whether students can comment on it and rate it, and when it becomes available. Use them to control how students interact with each lesson.

Open **Memberships → Courses**, select the course, and open **Steps**. Click the step title or its pencil icon. Use **General Settings** to change the title, editor note, comments, ratings, and availability.

When you open a course step for editing, you land on its "General Settings" tab. Its settings are grouped into cards.

![General Settings of Week 3 in cards: Main with the title and the editor and tutor comment, and the Comments and Rating cards switched on with their options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc1f64da63d4ddd2415a4d8ae4d8a45f3c1d723dff64a48373d29a3622b6bd73.png)
The Main card holds the title and the private comment. The Comments and Rating cards are switched on here to show their options.

In the Main card, you can change the step title and leave a note in the "Comment for Editors and Tutors" field. Students can't see this comment.

When you change any setting, a bar appears at the bottom of the page. Click "Save Changes" to keep your changes, or "Reset" to undo them. To open the availability settings directly from the course structure, click the lock icon in the step row.

The tab includes these settings:

- Comments. Turn on the switch in the card header to let students comment on the lesson, for example to ask a question.

    - Show comments to all users. On: every student sees the other students' comments. Off: only the author and your team see a comment.
    - Publish comments without moderation. Comments appear without your approval. Whether other students see them still depends on Show comments to all users.
- Rating. Turn on the switch to let students rate the lesson from 1 to 10.

    - Require a rating. The student must rate the lesson before the next step opens.
    - Require a comment with the rating. The rating must come with an explanation. Available only with Require a rating.
- Optional Step. A switch in the Step Availability in Sequence card. Students can complete the course without this step: optional steps do not count toward **Course Completed**.

Below these cards are the step's availability cards: which plans include it, whether it opens only after earlier steps, and time delays or a fixed opening date. All of these options are described in "[Course Availability](https://docs.axl.tech/course-availability)".

![Step availability cards: Step Availability by Plan with Available on all plans, Step Availability in Sequence with the previous-step condition, Block further progress and Optional Step, and the Delay for Purchase or Manual Enrollment, Delay When Taken in a Cohort and Available after a specific date cards switched off.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5cee63748a9d5d1ab0e1dc6dd0c15b331b974a41f9103229f16df8e382fe9919.png)
The availability cards below the general settings: plan access, sequence, and three timing cards that you turn on with their switches.

---

# Libraries

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/libraries

> Create libraries of learning materials, add articles and sections, and manage comments and ratings.

Libraries are learning materials that are not part of any course. A library is a knowledge base, reference material, or a set of articles that students study separately from courses.

Access to libraries can be paid or free, and you configure it separately from courses.

In this section, you manage your list of libraries.

Click a section name to jump to its description:

Creating a Library

Library Management

General

Items

Creating an Item

Comments

Ratings

## Creating a Library

Go to Memberships → Libraries.

**You'll see a list of your libraries**. To create one, click "Create Library" in the upper-right corner.

![Memberships > Libraries page with Library List, Library Structure, Comments and Ratings tabs, the Search box, Table and Cards views, and the Create Library button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9e1819ca691293d76bdb83904539583f5d407b644de5883ef8228694b6630f07.png)

A **New Library** window opens. Enter a **Title** and a **Description**. **Published** is checked by default; clear it while you prepare the content. Click **Create**. Publishing makes the library available subject to its access settings and the visibility of its items.

![New Library window with Title Leadership Resource Library, a description and Published checked.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/174ed293451e54377862df274c20b257ed3f55a65dec67ddda8db72f99c0fd8d.png)

Your new library now appears in the list.

1. Title. The library name. Click it to edit the library.
2. Users. The number of students who have access to the library.
3. Date Updated. The date of the last change to the library.
4. Items. The number of articles (lessons) in the library.
5. Actions. The available buttons are:
The "Delete" button. Click it to delete the library.

![Library list with two libraries and the Title, Users, Date Updated, Items and Actions columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f65eb4707324b77b4997ae42eb3c5a7fb91f524708716230e1ff1a64344d09f7.png)

Use the search bar at the top of the page to find a library quickly.

![Library list with the Search box above the table.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f65eb4707324b77b4997ae42eb3c5a7fb91f524708716230e1ff1a64344d09f7.png)

## Library Management

To set up a library and add content to it, click its name in the list of libraries. The library settings page opens.

![Leadership Resource Library settings page with the Published switch and the General, Items, Comments and Ratings tabs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cc3d8fdf533362bc90871a5b7909f58f65250999110ee522e8e69f047b683c60.png)

## General

This tab holds the main information about the library's materials. Make your changes on the "General" tab:

1. Title. Change the library name.
2. Description. Add a description of the library. This field is optional.
3. Categories. Select a category for your library from the list, or add a new one. To add one, click "Manage Categories". In the window that opens, click "Add Category", enter a name for the category, and click "Save". Then select the category on the "General" tab and click "Save".
4. Access. Select **Free Access** to let signed-in students use the published library without a separate library-access grant. When it is off, students need access that includes this library, such as direct library access or access through a product or cohort. Buying an unrelated course does not grant access to the library. Check **Included in Products** and **Included in Cohorts** below, and save changes with **Save**.
5. Other. Gamification is a tool that uses game elements to enhance students' learning experience. Game elements such as rewards and achievements create a sense of progress that can inspire students to keep learning and reach new goals. For more about gamification settings, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)".

    Check "Gamification enabled" so students can earn achievements for completing library materials. Uncheck it if you don't want this library to take part in gamification.
6. Included in Products. See which products include this library.
7. Included in Cohorts. See which cohorts include this library.
8. Images. Upload images for this library.

![Library General tab: Title, Description, Categories with Manage Categories, Free Access, Gamification enabled, Included in Products, Included in Cohorts and Images.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c03d7178396a182309568daa5019a19dd3bfacbd6cbe2dc89961052ef005617f.png)

## Items

On this tab, you add items to the library. Press and hold the left mouse button on the "Article" button, and drag it into the workspace. The article appears in the list of steps.

Drag in as many items as you need and arrange them in the order you want. You can have one section or several, several articles, or several articles inside one section.

![Empty library Items tab with the Article and Section buttons and the drop area: No steps yet. Drag a step or section here to create it.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/145ca872e4dc74cd6d11b791bade39dff70a549bc6ebdf71851b77fad7de5ee8.png)

The buttons for managing items are on the right.

1. The number of the item in the list.
2. The name of the section or article.
3. The number of items inside the section.
4. Hide button. Click it to collapse the items inside a section.
5. Availability button. Click it to edit the access settings for this item.
6. Edit button. Click it to edit the item.
7. Visible button. Click it to show the item to students or hide it from them.
8. Copy button. Creates a copy of the item.
9. Delete button. Removes an item from the list. To delete a section, you must first delete all the articles inside it.

![Library items: section Team meeting templates with two articles and their Collapse, Availability, Edit, Visible, Copy and Delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0bf9a2c6712e0178c6ae3ef1bbc498d6dfac51e429d1f89c1bc4de24b0a3a8b3.png)

To reorder the articles in a section, drag them: hover over an article title, hold down the left mouse button, and move the article above or below the others.

In the upper-right corner, click "Collapse All" to hide all articles and show only the top-level sections.

![Library items with the Expand All and Collapse All buttons in the upper-right corner.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0bf9a2c6712e0178c6ae3ef1bbc498d6dfac51e429d1f89c1bc4de24b0a3a8b3.png)

## Creating an Item

Click an item's name in the list, or click its "Edit" button. The item page opens, where you create or edit the item. On the General tab, enter:

1. Title. Enter the title of the item (article or section).
2. Comment for Editors and Tutors. Add a note for your team. Students don't see it.
3. Comments. Turn on the switch to let students comment on this item.
Show comments to all users. Check this box to make comments visible to other students.
Publish comments without moderation. Check this box to publish comments without your review and approval.
4. Rating. Turn on the switch to let students rate this item on a scale of 1 to 10 and explain their rating.
Require a comment with the rating. Check this box to require an explanation with every rating.
5. Delay when the library is taken in a cohort. Turn on the switch if access to the item should open with a delay after the cohort start, then set the delay. You can also change this with the "Availability" button next to the item in the Items list.

Click "Save Changes" at the bottom of the page.

![Library item General Settings: Title, Comment for Editors and Tutors, Comments with Show comments to all users, Rating, and Delay when the library is taken in a cohort.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9dd7d240dca9b8eae8da7ba05ef7e6a3bbef4f7ca726b607f8872acc7dddfcde.png)

On the "Article" tab, you build the content of the item. When you open an empty item for the first time, AXL shows Article designs. Pick a design as a starting point. The designs stay available under the Templates button in the editor toolbar. If you prefer the old block editor, click "Old editor (v1)" at the bottom of the list.

![Article designs list for a library item: Video lesson, Video with notes, Video walkthrough, Watch and practise, Cinema, Video and key points and more, with the Old editor (v1) button at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0b0e74fe6154e185bff01160344b9dba2ef0dfb915a135f0181e51f202640d88.png)

The chosen design opens in the editor. In Design mode, click any element in the preview to change its text and style. Chat mode opens the AI Assistant, and Code mode shows the HTML of the article. When the article is ready, click "Publish" in the editor toolbar: students see the published version, and later edits stay a draft until you publish again. To learn more about the editor, see "[AI page editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

![Article tab of the One-on-one meeting agenda item in Design mode: the Visual editing panel on the left and the checklist article preview with Saved and Publish in the toolbar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a0a485dee0ad9741d886c51b7dd913348a2454f9a991ebfc3c1387b5f7f1e142.png)

Once the item is ready, turn on the "Published" switch in the upper-right corner.

To go back to the list of items, click the "Library steps" breadcrumb at the top of the page (it also shows the library name).

Check both levels before sharing the library: the library itself must be published, and the individual item must be published and visible. Access settings still determine which students can open it.

![Published library item One-on-one meeting agenda with the Published switch turned on in the upper-right corner.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/505b88cd55d69dca5299f994dbec5453d98fa2f2eee4de6b9d569ba19a6b8a9a.png)

Your library is now created and published in your Membership Portal. Make sure the "Published" switch in the upper-right corner of the page is on, and that the "Visible" button next to each item (article and section) is on as well.

![Library items with the Visible tooltip on an article's eye button and the library Published switch turned on.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2a30287e0eb15e382e7483a94a3b7cc9e8a83525e4af4f207afb0cef8a93ae49.png)

## Comments

The "Comments" tab contains student feedback. Here you can see students' comments on the library items. You can also manage comments and reply to them.

![Library Comments tab: Olivia Bennett's comment on One-on-one meeting agenda, Pending Review, with the actions menu open: Publish, Unpublish, Block Comments and Remove.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bdd2b8f25d7a9875077b53003f5cf9ce4ce75916fa8656dc5dc33184f35886a8.png)

At the top, you have filters for managing comments. You can filter comments by:

- Library. Select a library to read its comments.
- User. Select a student to read only that student's comments.
- Status. Select a comment status: Published, Pending Review, or Not Published.
- Date Created. Select the date the comment was created.

![Library Comments filters: Library, User and the Add Filter menu with Date Created and Status.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/14c3869036816349115e3fe31405f1a90d44c5c4afaed50f4c211ef964be1602.png)

## Ratings

On the "Ratings" tab, you can see your library students' ratings on a scale of 1 to 10. Students can rate library items if you've checked "Enable rating" in the item's general settings.

Here you can also comment on students' ratings.

![Library Ratings tab: Olivia Bennett rated One-on-one meeting agenda 9 out of 10 with an explanation and a comment box.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/85432ee95a1ab185e45087fbf2c42e85535cd238059670d3113ea7205dfff491.png)

At the top, you have filters for managing ratings. You can filter ratings by:

- Library. The library you're currently in is selected by default.
- User. Select a student to see only that student's ratings.
- Date Created. Shows ratings created on the dates you choose.
- Has Comment. Shows ratings that do or don't have a comment.
- Has Files. Shows ratings with or without attached files.
- Duration. Use the slider to choose a range of ratings from 1 to 10 (inclusive). Only ratings within that range are shown, and all other ratings are hidden.

![Library Ratings filters with the Add Filter menu: Date Created, Duration, Has Comment and Has Files.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1e6605794f471a03cc43854648dd9668080b73008b942c7859f4c4ace98e48fc.png)

---

# Event Calendar

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/event-calendar

> Publish live Q&As, workshops and meetups in the membership portal, let students register, and see who is coming.

The event calendar tells your students what is coming up: live Q&As, workshops, webinars and in-person meetups. Students see the events in the membership portal and register with one click; you see who registered. Open **Memberships → Event Calendar**. If **Memberships** is missing from the menu, turn it on in **Account Features**.

## Create an Event

1. Click **Create Event**.
2. Enter the **Event Name** and a **Description**.
3. Set the **Start Date and Time** and the **Time Zone**; the hint under it shows the same time in the account's time zone. **Select on Calendar** lets you drag over a time range on the calendar instead.
4. Choose the duration: from **10 min** to **2 Hours**, **All Day**, or **Custom** with your own end time.
5. Turn on **Auto-create webinar** to create a webinar for the event and use its link. Otherwise enter the **Event URL**: the link students follow to join, for example your video call.

![Create Event panel with the event name Live Q&A: Pricing Your First Course, a description, the start date and time, the America/New York time zone, the 1 Hour duration, Auto-create webinar and the Event URL.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3fdafa2b29ff5eb5c8b2f1e9a71527478d42f50ae5f405b234af2d48d9ab9217.png)

The optional fields further down:

- **Address**: where an in-person event takes place.
- **Details Link**: a page with more about the event.
- **Restrict Access by Filter**: only contacts who match the filter you build see the event, for example the students of one course.

Click **Create**.

![Lower part of the Create Event panel with Auto-create webinar, Event URL, Address, Details Link and Restrict Access by Filter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d915f529ed1e4173ac2f3b6a3fc9b622fa2da33197c14feb0ea194363f9d2ab3.png)

## Manage Events

The calendar shows events by **Month**, **Week** or **Day**; **Today** and the arrows move between periods, and **Search** and **Add Filter** find an event.

![Event Calendar in Month view for October 2026 with three events: Live Q&A, Course Launch Workshop and Northstar Community Meetup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e948356b7d2717194371c74c575e2dc6c17c11002b86cac9b4425d3f332590c.png)

Click an event to see its time, description, link and creator. **Edit** changes it, **Copy** creates a copy, for example for the next session, and **Delete** removes it.

![Course Launch Workshop event card with the date and time, the description, the event URL, the creator, and the Edit, Copy and Delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/674150f73fc79f07aef4d968387c7bf6beb589ce0c29785b748d5572096b35e2.png)

## What Students See

In the membership portal, the **Upcoming Events** card on the courses page and on the community page lists the next events. **Show All Events** opens the whole calendar.

![Membership portal of Northstar Academy with the courses and the Upcoming Events card listing three events and Show All Events.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82966385cdb727d51ade3da5bf7bf72d9b2a44684b3ecf9393c8319080792ba6.png)

A student clicks an event to see the details and clicks **Register**. The event is then marked with a check, and the button changes to **Registered**. If the event has a webinar, registering also signs the student up for the webinar, and the event link becomes their personal link to the webinar room.

![Event details in the membership portal with the date and time, the event name, the description, the event URL and the Register button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6d95ad716f495ce47d040a329e3ef838817bc8f2d960540dc6dae56803c5298c.png)

## See Who Is Coming

Open the event, click **Edit**, then **View Attendees**. The list shows everyone who registered, with a search. For an event with a webinar, people who registered for the webinar are added here too.

![Event Attendees panel with Total attendees: 1, the search field and the student Olivia Bennett with her email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/158eb136af7cf5f7e590cb18ba35d9e49a1be848d8688b099d324c1210cb5140.png)

More about the portal in "[Membership Portal Account](https://docs.axl.tech/membership-portal-account)" and "[Community](https://docs.axl.tech/community)"; about webinars in "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".

---

# Cohorts

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/cohorts

> Learn what a cohort is, how to add one, and how to set its dates, courses, and libraries.

A cohort is an event on the AXL platform that is tied to a specific date.

A cohort brings together the participants of an event, such as a course or a webinar, and gives them access to information at the same time. Everyone receives the content together and moves through it as a group.

In Memberships → Cohorts, you set up the cohort dates and content (courses and libraries) and configure automated actions, such as sending an email.

Click a section name to jump to its description:

How to Add a Cohort

General Information

## How to Add a Cohort

Go to Memberships → Cohorts. To add a cohort for your courses, click "Add Cohort".

![Cohorts list with Search, Active Only, Add Cohort and the Northstar Academy Leadership Cohort — Spring 2027 row with its edit and delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f16c5d1bcb5d1636bdf467482fd91ba9009a9455cf945cd9630e34749a1e012f.png)

In the window that opens, enter a title for the cohort and click "Create" or "Create and Open".

The cohort now appears in the list. Use the search box and the filter at the top of the page to find the cohort you need quickly.

1. Search. Search by any keyword.
2. Active Only. Hides date rows whose end time has passed. Current and future date periods remain visible; the cohort titles stay in the list. Turn this filter off to include past date rows.

To set up a cohort, click its name or the edit button. The cohort page opens.

## General Information

On the General tab, you manage the products (courses) included in this cohort. Fill in the cohort details:

Set up the date range and the included learning materials separately. A cohort title identifies the group, while its dates determine the period for that group; the course plan determines which course content is included.

1. Title. Enter the name of the cohort.
2. Dates. Set the dates when the cohort is active. Click "Add", enter a name, and choose the period: the date and time the cohort starts and the date and time it ends. Click Save to add the period.
3. Courses. Add a course to the cohort and select its plan.
4. Libraries. Link libraries to this cohort.

![Northstar Leadership Cohort General tab with Title, Dates and Show past dates, the Leadership Certificate course already added, and Add controls for Dates, Courses and Libraries.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/11c3312bcc20348904519cdec028c86790c135273a509bc3018b1ab9cfd61cac.png)
Add dates and learning materials separately on General. Creating the cohort title alone does not add dates, courses or libraries.

### How students join a cohort

Students get into a cohort through a product: in **Sales → Products & Services**, create a product with the type **Cohort** and choose one of the cohort's dates. A buyer gets the cohort's courses and libraries for exactly that date's period, from its start to its end. You can also grant a cohort by hand from the contact card.

**Important:** each date is a separate group. For the next group, add a new date to the cohort and sell it with its own product, or switch the product to the new date: people who bought the old date keep their old period.

After you finish the cohort settings, set up the cohort automation on the Automation tab. To learn how, see "[Cohort Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/cohort-scenario)".

If you change the cohort's **Title**, click **Save** in the General section. Check the dates and included courses in their lists before configuring the automation.

---

# Theory

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/theory

> Add video, text, files, and images to a course step on its Theory tab.

The Theory tab is where you create a lesson's content: text, video, images and downloadable files. You build it in the same editor as website pages, with the AI Assistant or by hand.

Open **Memberships → Courses**, select your course, and open **Steps**. Click the lesson title, then open **Theory**. Prepare the lesson text and the video or files you want students to use.

On the Theory tab, you add the content of the lesson: text, video, images, and downloadable files. Lessons are built in the same editor as website pages: the AI Assistant is on the left, and the lesson preview is on the right.

### Choose a lesson design

When you open the Theory tab of an empty step, AXL shows **Lesson designs**. Pick a starting point, for example **Video lesson**, **Classic lesson**, **Step-by-step guide**, or **Checklist**. The designs stay available under the Templates button in the editor toolbar.

If you prefer the old block editor, click **Old editor (v1)** at the bottom of the list. It works as before.

![Lesson designs for a new course step: Video lesson, Video with notes, Video walkthrough, Watch and practise, Cinema, Video and key points, Classic lesson, Step-by-step guide and Checklist, with Old editor (v1) at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/342656bbdde648b19a4a503e5326cbe3f5903498a01cf545cef5ffe09465892a.png)

### Fill the lesson with the AI Assistant

Describe what the lesson should contain in the AI Assistant message box and send it. For example: "Fill this lesson for managers: Giving Feedback That Lands. Use the SBI model (Situation, Behavior, Impact), one short example from a weekly team meeting, and a practice task. Keep the design."

The assistant fills the chosen design with your content and saves it as a draft. AI usage is billed to your account. To change something by hand, switch to **Design** and click any element in the preview to edit its text and style, or open **Code** to edit the HTML.

![Theory tab of Lesson 1.3: Giving Feedback That Lands after an AI Assistant request: the request and the assistant reply on the left, the filled SBI lesson in the preview, and Publish in the toolbar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5158be2fc2e0f167e7cb52f7161c35b6ac3d421ce0c60d6fe34c8ef0204970c5.png)

Check the lesson in the preview, then click **Publish** in the editor toolbar. Students see the published version; later edits stay a draft until you publish again.

Below the editor, use **Files** to attach files students can download. To stop students from selecting and copying text from the lesson, check **Prevent text copying and selection**.

This setting affects text selection and copying in the lesson interface. It does not guarantee that someone cannot reproduce the material by other means.

![Prevent text copying and selection checkbox and the Files upload area below the lesson editor.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d4a95a10e6857120c65df99ce2e91fdcb3dc36873c5f8b36ed6920e8d95edc1c.png)

Turn on the switch next to the Theory tab name to include theory content in this step. This switch does not publish the step or the course.

![Course step header with the Theory switch turned on next to the Theory tab name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5158be2fc2e0f167e7cb52f7161c35b6ac3d421ce0c60d6fe34c8ef0204970c5.png)

When the lesson is ready, turn on **Published** in the step editor header. In the course Steps list, the eye icon also controls the step publication state. Check that the course itself is published and that your intended students have access.

![Course Steps list with a lesson's eye-shaped visibility control highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/39fc029185aeb10119eb4d532267aa16d7dae24e8c4fb2010ea747a87d9717d4.png)

With the course and step published, Theory enabled, and access conditions met, students can open the lesson. Repeat these steps for the remaining lessons.

---

# Tests

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/tests

> How to add a test to a course step, write its questions and answers, and make it visible to users.

Tests are sets of questions and answers that check users' knowledge and are graded automatically.

You can add a test to any step of a course, including a final test at the end of the course. Put the test in a theory step (lesson) or make it a separate course step.

Follow these instructions to create a test.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Edit the Course

Add a Test

Add Questions

Add Answers

Test Controls

Test Visibility

## Edit the Course

Go to the "Memberships" menu and select "Courses". Click the course name or the pencil (Edit) icon in the "Actions" column. The course opens for editing.

![Courses page filtered to Northstar, with the complete Course List row, Title, Updated, Users and Actions columns, and Create Course button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Open the course by its title or pencil icon, then choose Steps.

Open the "Steps" tab.

Each course step can include theory, tests, and assignments. You can put all three in one lesson or split them into separate steps.

![Step and Section insertion buttons, Copy Steps from Another Course, Collapse All, and the complete Leadership Foundations section with three lesson rows and their action icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9cc1efc48b3dae593e7463e94037e03b6dbae3559ed6ce2edfa1916e682f1b2b.png)
Use the Tests shortcut in the lesson row, or open the lesson by its title and select Tests. These draft rows have their test content switches off.

## Add a Test

Open the step by its title, then select the "Tests" tab and click "Add Test". You can also use the Tests shortcut in the step row.

![The Northstar Week 3 Tests tab with its content switch off, Add Test, a saved five-question knowledge check, and complete Preview, Copy, Edit and Delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b97b4e021559a49147b1920cfb519000b7aa01c4f02ad56322fcaf368a109333.png)
Open Tests and click Add Test. The saved example has five questions; its Tests switch and Published are off while the lesson is being prepared.

The Add Test panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for the test. For example, "Leadership Foundations · Knowledge Check".
2. Explanation for Students. Describe the test. This helps users understand what it covers.
3. Scoring Method. Choose "Percentage" or "Points".
4. Minimum Passing Percentage. Enter a number from 0 to 100. This is the percentage of correct answers required to pass this test. If you chose "Points", set the minimum number of points to pass instead ("Minimum Passing Score"). You decide how many points the test is worth, based on the number of questions.
5. Click "Create". The test is added to the list. You can now add questions and answers to it.

After you create the test, more fields appear for questions and answers:

1. Questions and Answers. Add the questions and answers of the test here. See the sections below for how to do it.
2. Shuffle questions. This checkbox appears when the test has more than one question. Select it to present the questions in a random order.
3. Files. If needed, attach files that users can download with this test.
4. The "Copy Test" button. Only saved data is copied.

    - Copy to Current Step. Copies an existing test and adds it to the step you are editing.
Copy to Another Step. Choose a step, and the test is copied there.

![Saved knowledge-check editor with title, explanation, Percentage scoring, an 80 percent passing threshold, all five questions, Shuffle questions, Files, Copy Test and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ce609bed94d86f9f9b7b309a9ba91fa0d4f8a8ea4f76207a70445be116cb47a8.png)
This is the editor after Create: add questions here, then use Save for later test changes. The example uses five questions and an 80% threshold.

You can attach files to a test (images, text, video). Users can download these files.

In Files, click the upload area or drag a file into it. After uploading, the file row shows its name and size, with action icons on the right:

1. File name and size. Click the file name to rename it; finish editing to save the name.
2. Replace file. Click the upward-arrow icon to upload a new file in its place.
3. Download. Click the cloud-with-down-arrow icon to download the file.
4. Remove. Click the trash icon and confirm removal.

## Add Questions

Click "Add Question". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Type. Choose a question type from the list: 

    - Single or Multiple Choice. With Students must select all correct answers cleared, learners choose one answer; any option you mark correct is accepted.
Select Students must select all correct answers to show checkboxes and require every correct option, with no incorrect options selected. Marking several answers correct does not enable this rule by itself.
    - Matching. Users match items from two columns, such as terms and their definitions, or questions and answers. This format checks whether users can connect a concept with its explanation.
    - Correct Order. Users put items in the right order, for example the order of events, the stages of a process, or a sequence of steps. These questions check how well users understand the structure of the material.
    - Fill in the Blanks. The question is a text with missing words or phrases that users fill in. This checks knowledge and how well users understand the context.
    - Choose the Correct Answer in a Sentence. Users complete a sentence by choosing the right word or phrase from several options. This type focuses on grammar, vocabulary, and understanding of context.
2. Question. Enter the text of the question.
3. Click "Create". The question is added to the test. You can now add answers.

Choose the type before clicking **Create**: the type selector becomes disabled after the question is created. Then fill in the answer controls for that type.

![Add Question type selector showing Single or Multiple Choice, Matching, Correct Order, Fill in the Blanks, and Choose the Correct Answer in a Sentence.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/791ecd47d738bd7723ac34d330d26b2c1b79672bf0b4a35ae9be66af8161a61a.png)
Choose the question type before Create. After creation, the type selector is disabled.

After you create a Single or Multiple Choice question, the following controls appear. The other four types have their own editors, described under Add Answers:

1. Files. If needed, attach files to the question. All images and GIF files appear below the question text. Recommended format: landscape 16:9.
2. Answers. Click "Add Answer". Add answers one at a time. To the right of each answer, click the check icon to mark it as correct or incorrect. The number of answers is unlimited. The number of correct answers is unlimited.
3. Students must select all correct answers. Check the box to require all correct options and no incorrect ones. If it is clear, learners choose one answer, and any answer marked correct is accepted.
4. Shuffle answers. Select it to present the answer options in a random order.
5. Preview. Click to see what the test will look like for users.

![Multiple-choice question with four readable planning answers, one green correct marker, three gray incorrect markers, an explanation, selection and shuffle options, Preview and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/28fee48322051ea54b9bbff9f04203e9b59dff412073dec9c5586b5e45e00f70.png)
The baseline answer is the only correct choice. Shuffle answers is on; Students must select all correct answers is off. Use Preview to check the learner view, then Save.

## Add Answers

Click "Add Answer". Enter the answers in the field that opens:

The answer controls below describe **Single or Multiple Choice** questions. For matching, ordering, and sentence questions, use the answer editor for that question type, then open **Preview** to check the task students will receive.

1. Answer order. Drag an answer by the handle on its left to move it. This is how you change the order of the answers.
2. Answer text. Enter the answer in this field.
3. Select image. Click to choose an image and upload it from your device (laptop, computer, tablet).
4. Mark the answer as correct or incorrect. Click the check icon to the right of the answer. Its tooltip reads "Mark as correct" or "Mark as incorrect".
5. Delete. Click the trash icon to delete the answer.
6. Add Explanation. You can add an explanation to each answer. Click "Add Explanation" and enter the text in the field. This field supports Markdown. Click the "Markdown" icon on the right to show formatting help. Right-click the icon to preview the text.

For a Single or Multiple Choice question, mark each answer as correct or incorrect after adding it. A green check mark means the answer is correct. A gray check mark means the answer is incorrect. At least one answer in a question must be correct. The final green marker cannot be cleared; its tooltip says "At least one answer must be correct". Mark another answer correct first if you need to change the sole correct option.

Click "Save". The question appears in the test. Here you can see the following:

1. Question order. Drag a question by the handle on its left to move it. This is how you change the order of the questions in the list.
2. Question type. An icon shows the type: single or multiple choice, matching, correct order, fill in the blanks, or choose the correct answer in a sentence.
3. Question text. The question itself.
4. Copy question. Click the button to create a copy of the question. The copy appears below it in the list.
5. Edit question. Click the button to change the question.
6. Delete. Click the trash icon to delete the question.

Click "Add Question" to add another question to the test.

Check the "Shuffle questions" box to give users the questions in a random order.

After you add all the questions, click "Save". The test is saved.

Open **Preview** and check a correct and an incorrect answer, the passing threshold, and any requirement to select all correct answers. If you use points, confirm that the available question scores can reach the minimum passing score.

### Matching

1. Click **Add Question**, choose **Matching** in **Type**, enter the question, and click **Create**.
2. Click **Add Answer** for each pair. Enter the item on the left and its correct match on the right. For example, pair *Onboarding time* with *10 days*, *First-response time* with *8 hours*, and *Team clarity score* with *4.3 out of 5*. Each side also has an image picker.
3. Select **Shuffle answers** if you want the choices shuffled. Click **Preview**: the learner sees tags to match with the corresponding values. Check that every pair is unambiguous.
4. Close the preview and click **Save** in the question editor.

![Matching question editor with three metric-target pairs, Shuffle answers selected, and full Preview and Save controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c31ec16231953ee7928befc5cd2b2ecf60ae74e4301b85d4427ef5318a11695b.png)
Define the correct pairs in the editor; learners match the values in the preview. The full pair controls, Shuffle answers, Preview, and Save are shown.

![Question 1 of 5 in the Northstar knowledge-check preview, with three metric-target tags, empty matching columns, instructions, Back and Next.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/02b8ded6a2b63078547b87892c1f0074a6d78da7867ba1be4aa4646a5198207f.png)
Preview shows Question 1/5 in the same five-question example. Check the instructions and drag targets before making the test available.

### Correct Order

1. Click **Add Question**, choose **Correct Order**, enter the task, and click **Create**.
2. Click **Add Answer** once for each item and enter the items in their correct order. For a team improvement cycle, use: *Measure the current baseline*, *Choose one improvement goal*, *Run a two-week experiment*, then *Review results and adjust*. The grip to the left of an answer lets you adjust its order.
3. Open **Preview**. The items appear in a mixed order for the learner to arrange. Check that the task gives enough context for one intended sequence.
4. Close the preview and click **Save**.

![Correct Order question editor with four complete improvement-cycle answers, reorder grips, Add Answer, ordering guidance, Preview and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3452c2413318edc2e7913873da50f6dd0f14d426069fb5f43475e32fd6c45c4f.png)
Enter the answers in their correct sequence. The learner receives them in a mixed order; Preview lets you check the task before saving.

### Fill in the Blanks

1. Choose **Fill in the Blanks** when adding the question, enter the question text, and click **Create**.
2. In **Text with Missing Words**, put each missing answer in square brackets. Separate accepted alternatives for the same blank with commas. For example: `Our improvement plan covers [90, ninety] days and starts with a measurable [baseline].`
3. If an accepted answer itself contains a comma, put that answer in quotation marks inside the brackets. You can add an explanation using **Add Explanation**.
4. Click **Preview** and check that the two bracketed groups become two input fields in the sentence. Close the preview and click **Save**.

![Fill in the Blanks editor with two bracketed gaps, accepted alternatives 90 and ninety, complete syntax guidance, Add Explanation and Preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c3185691b77baa096b4b26c6c4f0534fdf9917c53422bbcab0ff91cd9c19838e.png)
Each bracketed group becomes one answer field. Separate accepted alternatives with commas; use Preview before Save in the editor footer.

### Choose the Correct Answer in a Sentence

1. Select **Choose the Correct Answer in a Sentence**, enter the question, and click **Create**.
2. In **Text with Options**, place the alternatives in square brackets and separate them with commas. Add an asterisk directly after the correct option: `When a colleague brings a problem, first [give your own answer, ask what options they considered*, take over the task].`
3. Check the asterisk carefully. The editor's help states that if you omit it, any option counts as correct. If an option contains a comma, wrap it in quotation marks and keep its asterisk inside those quotes.
4. Click **Preview** to see the selectable responses in the sentence. The brackets and asterisk are authoring syntax; the preview displays the answer text. Close the preview and click **Save**.

![Sentence question editor with three bracketed coaching responses, an asterisk marking the correct option, and the complete syntax guidance, Preview, and Save controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a825513ee74e5e51b83a8fb5c7ac7a6cd1fd1d2f9a950b3bc628e33762536a0d.png)
The asterisk marks the intended correct response. The editor includes the full syntax guidance and separate Preview and Save controls.

After saving the questions, click **Save** in the test editor too. Reopen the test with its pencil icon, then reopen each question to check that its answers and settings were saved. Keep the course and step unpublished while preparing the assessment.

## Test Controls

Each test in the list has these controls:

1. Test order. Drag a test by the handle on its left to move it. This is how you change the order of the tests in the list.
2. Title. The name of the test and the number of questions in it.
3. Preview. Click to see what the test will look like for users.
4. Copy Test. Click to copy the test with its questions and answers. Choose whether to copy it to the current step or to another step.
5. Edit Test. Click to change the test, its questions, and its answers.
6. Delete. Click the trash icon to delete the test.

## Test Visibility

After you fill in all the fields, save the test.

Turn on the "Test Visibility" switch next to the "Tests" tab name so users can see the test in the lesson and take it.

Go back to the course page and check that the step and course are published and that the intended students have access. Test Visibility makes the test content visible inside the step; it does not replace publication or access settings.

**Important:**

- A test counts toward the lesson only when the student passes it. A student below the passing threshold sees the result and can retake the test with **Restart**; the number of attempts is not limited.
- A lesson with a test is completed, and the next lesson opens, only after the test is passed, together with the lesson's other required parts.

---

# Assignments

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/tasks-2

> How to add an assignment to a course step, set up its fields and review option, and make it available to users.

Assignments are prepared written tasks for course users, who answer in their own words.

You can add an assignment to a theory lesson or make it a separate course step. You can also skip review: the system then accepts a submitted answer as correct. Access to the next step still depends on the other completion, publication and availability conditions.

Follow these instructions to create an assignment.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Edit the Course

Course Steps

Add an Assignment

Manage Assignments

Assignment Visibility

Publish the Step

## Edit the Course

Go to the "Memberships" menu and select "Courses". Click the course name or the pencil (Edit) icon in the "Actions" column. The course opens for editing.

![Courses page filtered to Northstar, with the complete Course List row, Title, Updated, Users and Actions columns, and Create Course button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Open the course by its title or pencil icon, then choose Steps.

## Course Steps

Open the "Steps" tab. Each course step can include theory, tests, and assignments. You can put all three in one lesson or split them into separate steps.

![Step and Section insertion buttons, Copy Steps from Another Course, Collapse All, and the complete Leadership Foundations section with three lesson rows and their action icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bfd8ef45ada797979714d5b33781d1b5bf6c1314c19d33ff790ae7eee702c893.png)
Each lesson row has an Assignments shortcut: the clipboard with a check mark. You can also open the lesson by its title and select Assignments.

## Add an Assignment

In the row of the step you want, click the "Assignments" button. The step opens on its "Assignments" tab. Click "Add Assignment".

![Week 3 Assignments tab with visibility off, Add Assignment, a complete 186-account baseline task and expected answer, plus reorder, Copy, Edit and Delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f55d8a392e4e751405f21d03b020a3c93522e5431504266b229cc7ab07a19ea3.png)
The saved assignment and its controls are shown together. Assignments and Published remain off in this draft example.

The "Add Assignment" panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Intro Text. Enter the text that appears before the question and explains what the assignment is about.
2. Question. Enter the question for the assignment.
3. Answer. Enter the correct answer to this question. Only account admins can see the answer.
4. Disable review (accept any answer as correct). Check the box to skip the review. The system then accepts a submitted answer as correct. If you leave the box unchecked, user answers are reviewed.
5. Create. Click "Create" to add the assignment to the lesson.

**Disable AI tutor review** is a separate option. If the AI Tutor is turned on for your account, it reviews answers to assignments by itself: when it is confident enough (95% by default), it sets the answer status and, if its settings allow, leaves a comment for the student; otherwise it leaves the answer for your team. Its work is paid from your account's AI balance. Select **Disable AI tutor review** for an assignment that only your team should check; it does not turn on automatic acceptance. See "[AI Tutor](https://docs.axl.tech/application-ai-curator)".

Fill in **Answer** even with review on: it is the reference your team and the AI Tutor compare answers with.

After you add the assignment, an "Additional Fields" section appears in the panel. You can create extra fields for the assignment. Creating an additional field is described below.

After editing an existing assignment, click **Save**. The initial **Create** action adds the assignment; it does not make later edits automatic. Save before using **Copy Assignment**, which copies saved data.

A "Copy Assignment" button also appears. Only saved data is copied.

- Copy to Current Step. Copies an existing assignment and adds it to the step you are editing.
- Copy to Another Step. Choose a step, and the assignment is copied there.

![Assignment editor with realistic Intro Text, Question, admin-only Answer, review settings, Disable AI tutor review selected, attachment and formatting controls, and Create Field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3ac2608bf1a52142a1c151cc015fef7da2bd7a96957604a889fd3e1dc84da483.png)
After Create, Additional Fields becomes available. This example keeps answer review enabled and disables AI tutor review. Later edits use Save in the footer.

1. Files. You can attach files in the "Question" field. Click the paperclip beside Question to select files, or drag files into its upload area.
2. Formatting help. The "Intro Text" and "Question" fields support Markdown. Click the "Markdown" icon for formatting tips. Right-click the icon to preview the text.
3. Emoji. You can add emoji to the text. Use the smile icon beside the text field to choose an emoji.
4. Voice recording. You can add a voice question to the assignment. Click the "Voice recording" icon to record an audio message instead of typing. A voice recording field appears below, where you can listen to the question and delete or download the recording.

In the "Additional Fields" section, click "Create Field". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Type. Select the type of the new field:

    - Text Field. A one-line field for a short text answer. It is usually used for simple answers such as names, numbers, or short phrases.
    - Text Area. A multi-line text field for longer answers. It suits essays, descriptions, and other long texts that need more room.
    - Checkbox. A control that lets users select or clear a single option. It is usually used for yes/no or agree/disagree questions. One checkbox holds only one value, and you can use it to confirm or decline.
    - Multiple Choice. Lets users select several options from the list. It suits questions with several correct answers, or questions where users can choose more than one option, such as preferences.
    - Single Choice. Lets users select only one option from the list. It suits questions with a clear choice, where users must pick the single most suitable answer.
2. Show label. Show or hide the field label.
3. Title. Enter the name of the label. Click the "Formatting Help" icon for tips. AXL uses Markdown for formatting.
4. Placeholder. The text inside the field that helps users understand what to enter. For example: "Enter a description."
5. Hint. Enter the hint text. It appears under the answer field. Click the "Formatting Help" icon for tips. AXL uses Markdown for formatting.
6. Required. Check the box to make the field mandatory.
7. Answer Options. If you chose Multiple Choice or Single Choice, the "Answer Options" field appears in the panel. To add options, click "Add Option". Then enter the text of each option.
8. Preview. This line shows the field the way users will see it.

Check the field’s **Preview**, then click **Create** to add the field. Use **Cancel** to leave without creating it.

![Text Area additional-field settings with Show label, title, placeholder, hint, Required, and a complete learner-style Preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9b3d8c214028cef48575505cc4673aeba59b3c82655bf469d80cd6e026d87127.png)
Preview updates as you configure the field. Check its label, placeholder and hint before Create; the example asks for evidence from the same 186-account sample.

## Manage Assignments

After you create an assignment, it appears in the list. Here you can use the following controls:

1. Assignment order. Drag an assignment by its handle to change the order of assignments in the step.
2. Copy Assignment. Click the button to copy the assignment. Choose "Copy to Current Step" to add a copy to the list below, or "Copy to Another Step" to copy it to a different step.
3. Edit Assignment. Click the button to change the assignment.
4. Delete. Click the trash icon to delete the assignment.

## Assignment Visibility

Turn on the "Assignment Visibility" switch next to the "Assignments" tab name so users can see the assignment in the lesson and complete it.

Go back to the course page. The "Assignments" button is filled in blue, which means the assignment is visible to users in this step. The green badge shows the number of assignments in the step.

## Publish the Step

Publish the step so users can complete the assignment. Click the step title to open its editor, then turn on Published in the header. You can also use the eye icon in the step's row on the course Steps tab.

Users can now complete the assignment. To learn how to review their answers, see the article "[Checking Assignments](https://docs.axl.tech/checking-assignments)".

If students cannot see it, check the course's publication and access settings as well as the step's publication and **Assignment Visibility**. If answers require review, use **Memberships → Assignment Review** to handle submissions.

---

# Course Availability

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/course-availability

> Control who can open a course and when: free access, step order, plans, time delays, and fixed dates.

Availability controls when and how users get access to courses and steps. Access can depend on time, plan, payment, or other conditions. To make a course available to users, set up its access.

Follow these instructions to set up access.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Edit the Course

Settings

Course Steps

Course Step Access Settings

## Edit the Course

Go to the "Memberships" menu and select "Courses". Click the course name or the pencil (Edit) icon in the "Actions" column.

![Courses page filtered to Northstar, with the complete Course List row, Title, Updated, Users and Actions columns, and Create Course button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Search by course title, then click the course name or its pencil icon to edit it.

## Settings

Open the "Settings" tab.

In the "Course Access" section, check "Available for free" to give all registered users free access to this course.

Note: If the course has free steps, users can start the course even when this option is off.

![Northstar course Settings tab: Course Access card with Available for free and Show Without Access, Other card with Enable Gamification selected, and the Plans card with two plans and Add Plan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/332719bc68c08d173d821f20c8372bc96c94dba8fd0061913e5141bac53fdc9d.png)
Course Access is the first card on Settings. In this example, Available for free and Show Without Access are cleared.

## Course Steps

Open the "Steps" tab. Click the lock icon in the row of the section or step you want to configure. The Availability panel opens.

![Step and Section insertion buttons, Copy Steps from Another Course, Collapse All, and the Leadership Foundations section with three lesson rows and their action icons, followed by the other modules.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bfd8ef45ada797979714d5b33781d1b5bf6c1314c19d33ff790ae7eee702c893.png)
On Steps, use the lock beside the section or lesson you want to configure. The pencil opens its editor.

## Course Step Access Settings

The Availability panel controls access to the selected section or step. Check its title before editing so you change the intended item. In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

You can also open the step title, select **General Settings**, and scroll below the Comments and Rating cards to reach the same availability cards. The first screenshot below shows this route.

1. Step Availability by Plan. You can limit the availability of a specific lesson by plan. For example, if you offer several pricing plans (basic, standard, premium), you can choose which lessons or modules each plan includes. Turn off "Available on all plans", then select the plans from the list.
2. Step Availability in Sequence. Set the order in which users can open the course steps. In the "Step is available" list, choose a condition. The last two items below are separate switches under the list:

    - Step is available if the previous step is completed. Users can open the selected step only after completing the previous step.
    - Step is available if all previous steps are completed. Users get access to the step only after they complete all previous steps, not just the one before it.
    - Step is available regardless of previous steps. Users can freely choose which steps to take, with no fixed order.
    - Block further progress until the step is completed. This switch is available for steps. It stops users from moving on to the next step until they complete the current one.
    - Optional Step. Turn on the switch to make this step optional. Users can finish the course without completing it.
3. Step Availability by Time. Set a time delay. For example, a delay of 1 day after the previous step is completed opens this step 24 hours after that completion. A delay counted from the course start or access date has a different starting point. Each option below is a card; turn on its switch to use it:

    - Delay for Purchase or Manual Enrollment. Turn on the switch to use the delay. Then set when the step opens: enter the number of hours, days, weeks, or months for the delay, and choose the condition. The step can open after the previous step is completed, after the course starts, after access is granted, after the previous section starts, or after the previous section is completed.

        - Wait until a specific time. Sets the exact time when the lesson opens. For example, you can make the lesson available only after 10:00 AM. The time is based on your account's time zone setting, not the student's.
        - Only on certain days of the week. Opens the lesson only on certain days of the week. For instance, you can make the lesson available only on Mondays and Wednesdays.
    - Delay When Taken in a Cohort. Turn on the switch to use the delay. Then set when the step opens: enter the number of hours, days, weeks, or months for the delay, and choose the condition. The step can open after the previous step is completed, after the cohort starts, after the course starts, after the previous section starts, or after the previous section is completed.

        - Wait until a specific time. Sets the exact time when the lesson opens.
        - Only on certain days of the week. Opens the lesson only on certain days of the week.
    - Available after a specific date. Turn on the switch. Then pick the date and time in the calendar when the step opens.

**Important:** Delay for Purchase or Manual Enrollment applies to every student, including students in a cohort. A student who takes the course in a cohort is also checked against Delay When Taken in a Cohort, and the step opens only when both delays have passed. If cohort students should follow only the cohort schedule, leave the first delay off.

![Step availability cards: Step Availability by Plan with Available on all plans, Step Availability in Sequence with the previous-step condition, Block further progress and Optional Step, and the Delay for Purchase or Manual Enrollment, Delay When Taken in a Cohort and Available after a specific date cards switched off.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5cee63748a9d5d1ab0e1dc6dd0c15b331b974a41f9103229f16df8e382fe9919.png)
Availability cards on the step's General Settings tab. Available on all plans is on; the three timing cards are off.

For a time delay, choose the number of hours, days, weeks, or months. Then choose the reference event. For purchase or manual enrollment, all five choices are shown below; cohort delays use the cohort-specific choices listed above.

![Availability panel for Week 3 with Delay for Purchase or Manual Enrollment switched on and its unit menu open: month, week, day and hour; Reset, Save Changes and Close at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1ed8c66a1310ebcb295854491befcf8dfd345ceaed8f8628f88b792f068d62fa.png)
Turn on Delay for Purchase or Manual Enrollment, then choose the delay unit. The example is one day after completion of the previous step.

![Availability panel with the purchase or manual enrollment reference menu open: completion of the previous step, the start of the course, the start of access, the start of the previous section and completion of the previous section.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1ddbe23457e0240577072b71637e5dce2659c4a8eb6ae740426a19d5978df008.png)
For purchase or manual enrollment, the reference menu has five choices: previous step completion, course start, access start, previous section start, and previous section completion.

When you change a setting, click "Save Changes" at the bottom of the panel, or "Reset" to undo the changes; Close only closes the panel. Keep at least one active plan selected when restricting access by plan. Reopen Availability to check the saved values. The step becomes available only when the student's access, publication state, and configured timing conditions are satisfied. Repeat for each step that needs its own rules.

---

# Comments

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/comments

> How to let users comment on course steps, reply to and moderate comments, filter the list, and export it.

Comments are feedback from your course users: thoughts, questions, and criticism about lessons, assignments, videos, and tests in your Membership Portal.

In this section, you can see user comments about a course or a course step, reply to them, and manage them.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

How to Allow Comments

All Comments

Comments for a Single Course

Manage Comments

## How to Allow Comments

Go to the "Memberships" menu and select "Courses". Click the course name or the pencil (Edit) icon in the "Actions" column. The course opens for editing.

![Courses page filtered to Northstar, with the complete Course List row, Title, Updated, Users and Actions columns, and Create Course button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Search by course title, then click the course name or its pencil icon to edit it.

Open the "Steps" tab. Find a step and click its pencil (Edit) icon or title. The step opens on General Settings, where the Comments card holds the comment settings.
To let users leave comments, use these settings:

- Comments. Turn on the switch in the card header to let users leave comments on this step or lesson.
- Show comments to all users. When this is on, all users can see comments left by other users. When it is off, only the comment author and the teacher can see them.
- Publish comments without moderation. When this is on, comments do not wait for teacher or moderator approval. Who can see a published comment still depends on Show comments to all users. Leave this off to review comments before publishing them.

Go back to the "Steps" tab to allow comments on other steps.

When you change a setting, a bar appears at the bottom of the page: click **Save Changes** to keep the changes, or **Reset** to undo them. The two options appear only while the **Comments** switch is on. To moderate submissions, leave **Publish comments without moderation** off, then review the **Pending Review** comments on the course's **Comments** tab.

![Comments card on a step's General Settings with the switch turned on and the Show comments to all users and Publish comments without moderation options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5ba924fb1ec973be22bf2739f1e876193c78fb26a8fc7c79e4dd7ce6f3a1b53a.png)
Turn on the Comments switch to see its two options. Both are cleared in this example.

## All Comments

To open the list of all comments, select "Courses" in the "Memberships" menu, then open the "Comments" tab. This tab shows user comments on all courses in your Membership Portal.

## Comments for a Single Course

To see the comments on a single course, select "Courses" in the "Memberships" menu and open the course. Then open its "Comments" tab. It shows users' comments on this course.

![Northstar course comments with a published student discussion and follow-up, a Pending Review question, a Not Published reflection, timestamps, source lessons, and reply controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4ac67557c2b138cc2a967c3161a7ddb47aaa80b4c25211d29f44e0bae27ea669.png)
An example course list showing Published, Pending Review and Not Published comments. The expanded thread contains a student’s own follow-up; the reply fields below each thread are empty.

The list of comments shows the following:

- User avatar. If a user has uploaded a photo, you see it in a round avatar.
- User name. The user's name.
- Course. The name of the course. Click the course name to open its settings.
- Lesson (course step). The step of the course where the user left the comment. Click the lesson name to open its settings.
- Comment text. The comment the user left.

You also see:

- Date posted. The date and time the comment was posted.
- Date edited. If the user edited the comment, you see the date of the edit.
- Delete. Open the comment's three-dot menu and choose Remove to delete this comment.

- Comment status. On the right, you see the status of the comment: "Published", "Pending Review", or "Not Published".
- Publish and Unpublish. Open the comment's actions menu and choose "Publish" or "Unpublish" to change its status. Publishing shows the comment in the course. Unpublishing hides it.

![A Pending Review course comment with the complete menu: Publish, Unpublish, author comment status, Block Comments and Remove.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4e71f17389e768d42896a344d56954421f2b4febd0736b22355637bd61a4d225.png)
Open the three-dot menu beside a comment to moderate it. The menu also shows whether its author can comment.

Below the comment is the reply area:

1. Comments (count). Click the reply count or its caret to collapse or expand the thread.
2. Avatar. If the contact has a photo, you see it in a round avatar.
3. Attachment (paperclip icon). Click to attach files to your reply.
4. Reply. Type your reply in the text field and click the "Send" icon on the right.
5. Add emoji. Click to add an emoji to your reply.
6. Record a voice message. Click to record and send a voice message.

- Reply to comment. Your reply appears under the user's comment. You can reply, edit your own comment, delete it, or unpublish it.

## Manage Comments

The "Comments" tab has filters that help you manage comments. You can filter comments by the following:

- Course. On a course's own "Comments" tab, that course is already selected. In the list of all comments, you can choose any course.
- User. Select a user's name to see only their comments.
- Status. Shows comments that currently have a certain status. Choose from the list: Published, Pending Review, or Not Published.
- Course Step. Shows comments left on a certain step (lesson). Choose a course step from the list. This filter is available on a course's own "Comments" tab.
- Date Created. Shows comments created on certain dates. Choose the date range when the comments were created.

![Course and User filters above a published comment thread, with Add Filter open to Course Step, Date Created and Status.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0e253a84d1bfd96417bc90406c68e215b181d9f6e7ea2934173e0e771f9ecb86.png)
Course and User are visible above the list. Use Add Filter for Course Step, Date Created or Status.

Export is in the "Actions" menu at the top right of the list. It saves the comments as an XLSX or CSV file.

![The course comment Actions menu with Send Comment and Export Comments As options XLSX and CSV.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4ea567521bdee96a2cdc5efabf3cbcb7a1815b98a531ffc3cb67ae393bba1e2f.png)
To export the filtered list, open Actions and choose XLSX or CSV under Export Comments As.

Click **Actions** and, under **Export Comments As…**, choose **XLSX** or **CSV**. Watch the export notification in the bottom-left corner. When the file is ready, open its **Action** menu and choose **Download**.

Choose **Download and complete** to download the file and close that export session. **Complete** closes the session without starting a download.

---

# Ratings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/ratings

> How to turn on ratings for course steps, review user ratings and comments, filter the list, and export it.

The "Ratings" tab shows user ratings of course steps. It collects ratings across courses or shows the steps of one selected course.

**Users rate on a scale from 1 to 10**. They can rate an individual step and add a written explanation to their rating. They can also write a comment on the rating.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

How to Turn On Ratings

All Ratings

Ratings for a Single Course

## How to Turn On Ratings

Go to the "Memberships" menu and select "Courses". Click the course name or the pencil (Edit) icon in the "Actions" column. The course opens for editing.

![Courses list showing the Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate course.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Open the course from Memberships → Courses.

To turn on ratings, open the "Steps" tab. Find a step and click "Edit". The step opens on the "General Settings" tab, where the Rating card holds the rating settings.

![Course Steps showing the Leadership Certificate outline and its lesson editing controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bfd8ef45ada797979714d5b33781d1b5bf6c1314c19d33ff790ae7eee702c893.png)
Open a course step to change its rating settings.

Configure these options for each step:

- Rating. Turn on the switch in the card header to turn on ratings for this step (lesson). Users can rate the lesson content on a scale from 1 to 10 and share what they think about the quality, accessibility, and usefulness of the material. Teachers also get feedback on their work, which helps them improve the course. Turning this on can help you identify the strengths and weaknesses of a lesson.
- Require a rating. This option appears when the Rating switch is on. Users must submit a rating before this step can be completed or they can progress to the next step. This can encourage users to be more attentive to the material, because they have to think about how they experienced it. It can also increase the amount of feedback you collect and improve the quality of the course.
- Require a comment with the rating. This option is available only when the Rating switch is on and "Require a rating" is checked. When required, users must leave a nonempty written explanation with their rating before completing the step or progressing to the next step. You can use these explanations to make changes to a lecture or to the course as a whole.

![Rating card on a step's General Settings with the switch turned on, Require a rating cleared and Require a comment with the rating disabled.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/85c40095c381424d3dc72f17f8194fe17fe5d9e882d6f5948da9b377f231836b.png)
In this example, ratings are on but optional. Require a comment with the rating becomes available when Require a rating is checked.

Go back to the "Steps" tab to turn on ratings for other steps.

Keep the three settings separate: the **Rating** switch makes the rating available, **Require a rating** makes it part of progression, and **Require a comment with the rating** requires a written explanation when the switch is on and Require a rating is checked. When you change any of them, click **Save Changes** in the bar at the bottom of the page.

## All Ratings

Select "Courses" in the "Memberships" menu and open the "Ratings" tab. This tab collects user ratings of steps across all courses.

![The overall Courses Ratings page showing Alexandra Morgan Rivera’s nine-out-of-ten rating for a Leadership Certificate course step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/50ceaf5e6130db0e44a2624a3d2399478ffdd3327c5492f899ac5c83069f3f2a.png)
The overall Ratings page collects step ratings across courses. Use the Course filter to narrow the list.

## Ratings for a Single Course

Select "Courses" in the "Memberships" menu. Open the course: click its name or the pencil (Edit) icon in the "Actions" column.

![Courses list showing the Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate course.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Open a course to see ratings of its steps.

Next, open the "Ratings" tab. It shows user ratings of this course's steps.

![Northstar Academy course Ratings with Alexandra Morgan Rivera’s nine-out-of-ten step rating and explanation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a10f547ba962dc4615701639f1fea922522bb7dc8db962748f4e3811b025fd9f.png)
A course’s Ratings tab shows feedback on its steps. The course is already selected in the filter.

At the top of the page, you will find filters:

- Course. Shows ratings of steps in the selected course. On an individual course's "Ratings" tab, the current course is already selected and cannot be changed.
- User. Shows the ratings from one user.
- Add Filter. Click "Add Filter" and choose a condition from the list:

    - Course Step. Shows ratings submitted for a specific step of the current course. A rating does not by itself mean that the user has completed the step.
    - Date Created. Shows ratings by the time they were submitted. Choose a period (for example, a week, a month, or specific dates) to see only the ratings from that interval.
    - Has Comment. When enabled, shows ratings with text in the rating's own explanation. Replies in the "Comments" thread do not satisfy this filter. Turn the switch off to show ratings without an explanation. It can help you pinpoint problem areas in the course.
    - Has Files. When enabled, shows ratings with files attached either to the rating itself or to a reply in its "Comments" thread. Turn the switch off to show ratings without either kind of attachment. You can see how often users attach materials to their ratings and how that relates to the ratings they give.
    - Duration. Despite its label, "Duration" filters the numeric score, not elapsed time. Set the inclusive range with the slider (0 to 10); users submit scores from 1 to 10.

![Course Ratings with the Add Filter menu open: Course Step, Date Created, Duration, Has Comment and Has Files.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/510d6899e2831b6933314b793624a12440d09f77a0e1a1d8667e9d384ddf7077.png)
Choose an additional filter. Duration is the numeric rating range, while Has Comment checks the rating explanation.

You can export the list of ratings to your device (computer, laptop, tablet) as a single CSV or XLSX file. The export uses the current filters, so you can save the ratings you need.
To export, click "Actions" and, under "Export Ratings As...", choose "XLSX" or "CSV".

![Course Ratings with the Actions menu open and XLSX and CSV export choices.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/72fc615ad2ebc9d1c7cda1a2a31f08daf294758bffe78e12f895351a8dce181f.png)
Actions offers XLSX and CSV exports for the filtered ratings list.

**An export notification appears while the file is being prepared.** Once the file is ready, open its "Action" menu and choose "Download", "Download and complete", or "Complete".
"Download" saves the file to your device. "Download and complete" also closes the export session; "Complete" closes the session without downloading the file.

![Completed ratings export notification with its Action menu open: Download, Download and Close, and Close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/343eedb24e9d794a209e0cf3151e67ce79f9f21c38fb76fb4c022ee6edecbde0.png)

**Below the filters is the list of ratings**. Each rating is a separate card with the following information:

- User avatar. A round photo of the user, if they uploaded one to their profile.
- First and last name of the user.
- Date. The exact date and time the user sent the rating ("Sent"). If the user changed the rating, you also see the date of the change ("Updated").
- Course, course section, and lesson that was rated.

![Rating card showing Alexandra Morgan Rivera, sent and updated timestamps, and the course, module and step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a10f547ba962dc4615701639f1fea922522bb7dc8db962748f4e3811b025fd9f.png)
The card identifies the participant and the rated step, with sent and updated timestamps.

- Rating. The score on a scale from 1 to 10, shown as, for example, 8 / 10.
- Explanation. The user's reason for the rating: why they gave that score.

![Rating card with a score of nine out of ten and an explanation about the leadership-principles worksheet.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a10f547ba962dc4615701639f1fea922522bb7dc8db962748f4e3811b025fd9f.png)
The score and Explanation show how the participant evaluated this step.

- Comments on the rating. Here you can see the user's comment on this rating.
- Your comment on the rating. Your comment on the user's rating appears here. You can edit or delete your comment.

![Course rating card with the score, explanation, comments thread, and reply field highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/61981b3ad6afc4f7333a8d4c07d38ef18627a331c90dff31b98ad0ad8875f503.png)

- Comment field. Write a reply to the user's rating here and attach files.

![Rating card with the Add a comment composer and attachment control beneath the explanation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a10f547ba962dc4615701639f1fea922522bb7dc8db962748f4e3811b025fd9f.png)
Write a reply in Add a comment and use the paperclip to attach a file.

- Rating history. Click the clock icon to see the detailed history of the rating: additions and changes.

![Course rating card with the clock-shaped Rating history button at its upper right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a10f547ba962dc4615701639f1fea922522bb7dc8db962748f4e3811b025fd9f.png)
Open the clock button to inspect the rating history.

The history of changes to the rating appears in the "Rating History" panel.

![Rating History panel for the One-on-one meeting agenda step in Leadership Resource Library: the rating 9 added on October 21, 2026 at 10:15 PM and the explanation added at 10:16 PM.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/00b2d00d4e5b6eb726c791906b24b9dd97ea0c587448263215c44a83b21b240b.png)

---

# Users

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/users

> How to find course users, filter them by status and dates, and view their progress, history, and feedback.

Users are people who have an account in your Membership Portal on AXL.

The **Users** tab inside a course lists course learning records. Use it to review each user's progress, course dates, score and available actions.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Course Users

User List

## Course Users

Go to the "Memberships" menu and select "Courses". Find the course in the list and click its name or the pencil (Edit) icon in the "Actions" column to open it.

![Courses list filtered to Northstar, with the Leadership Certificate course title and its Edit pencil icon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Open the course by clicking its name or the Edit pencil in the Actions column.

Open the "Users" tab.

![Northstar Leadership Certificate Users tab with date, Status set to In Progress and User filters, and Alexandra's In Progress row showing Step, Score and Actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19c8380c767b5a0dab682ad505c14a63381755b2b683f19f6433184fe75e21a4.png)
Use the filters above the Users table to find a course record. Alexandra's In Progress row shows the current step and has no End Date yet.

The filters are at the top of the page:

1. Start Date Range. Shows users who started the course within the dates you choose.
2. End Date Range. Shows users who finished the course within the dates you choose.
3. Status. Choose the user's status in the course from the list: Not Started, In Progress, or Completed.
4. User. Select a user's name from the list.
5. Reset. Click to clear the filters.

With filters, you can quickly find users who meet specific conditions, for example, users who have not started the course yet.

For example, choose **Status → Not Started** to find students who have not begun. Clear the status condition or click **Reset** before checking the complete course list again.

## User List

The "Users" tab shows the following information:

- User. The user's first and last name.
- Activity. The date the user was last active in the course.
- Start Date. The date the user started the course.
- End Date. The date the user completed the course.
- Step. The course step the user is on now.
- Status. The user's status in the course: Not Started, In Progress, or Completed.
- **Score**. Points recorded for this course when course gamification is enabled. A dash is shown when it is disabled.
- Actions. Buttons for each user, described below.

In the Actions column, you can view information and make changes:

- View. Click this button to open the user's account and see the course the way the user sees it.
- History. Click this button to see the user's detailed learning history.
- **Feedback**. Hover over the green message icon to read the user's course feedback. The icon is disabled when there is no feedback.
- Reset course completion. Click the button, then confirm, to reset the user's completion of the course. This button appears only for users who completed the course. Use it when you need to change the user's answers or when the course itself changed (for example, you added a step, test, or assignment).

![Northstar course Users table with Aria Sullivan Completed and Alexandra In Progress; Aria has active Feedback and Reset course completion actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5fd1273437ec36ad719835d7feb7bb983ab6d349426ce6574fde85a0151fd48a.png)
A completed course record shows an End Date and the Reset course completion action. Feedback is active when the user has left a review.

Click a user's name to open their contact page in Contacts. To learn more about contacts, see the article "[Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/contact-card)".

![Feedback popup above Aria Sullivan’s completed Northstar course record, showing the full course review.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d05d6678cd5c21986888ad6ca8fa7a99c8dbf9ef63ebfd162f1a87d6d16dc2f1.png)
The Feedback popup displays the review attached to this course record.

---

# Reviews

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/reviews

> See, filter, and export the reviews students leave about your courses.

The "Reviews" tab shows the reviews students have left about your courses. After a student completes a course, they're asked to leave a review.

Click a section below to jump to it:

All Reviews

Reviews for One Course

## All Reviews

Go to Memberships → Courses and open the "Reviews" tab. It lists the reviews for all your courses.

![Account-wide Courses Reviews tab with course and search filters, export control, and Aria Sullivan's Northstar course review with start and end dates.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/323b3f0e2e261fe81bd5e082c8b274851e314e6a46d8acac5b783ce6f1a41a15.png)

## Reviews for One Course

Go to Memberships → Courses. Open a course by clicking its name or the pencil icon in the "Actions" column.

![Courses list showing Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate as a linked title and a pencil action at the right of its complete row.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)
Open the course by its title or the pencil in Actions.

Then open the "Reviews" tab. It shows the reviews for this course.

Use the account-wide **Reviews** tab when you need to compare courses. Open a course’s own **Reviews** tab when you want that course to remain selected while filtering.

![Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate Reviews tab with fixed Course, Search, Add Filter and Export Reviews As controls and Aria Sullivan’s complete review with start and end dates.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/df2501f4c0c43e7380a91f61be98f778c3602b8a1ca7566fbf31a492181c9abb.png)
The course stays selected on its own Reviews tab. The table shows each user, their course dates and review.

The filters at the top of the page help you find reviews. You can filter by:

- Course. The course whose settings you opened is already selected, and you can't change it on this tab.
- Search. Free-text search by keyword. Type any word into the search field.
- Click "Add Filter" and choose a condition from the list:

    - User. Shows the reviews from the selected user. You can select only one user.
    - Start Date. Shows reviews by the course start date. Select a date range.
    - End Date. Shows reviews by the course end date. Select a date range.

![Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate Reviews tab with the Add Filter menu showing End Date, Start Date and User.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/127470221b1c67e942bc5f3b1135f813fdcd3f811f56f06e39cbcd734c673ce1.png)
Use Add Filter to select a user or a course start or end date range.

The list below shows one review per row, with these columns:

1. User. Click the name to open the contact card.
2. Start Date. The course start date.
3. End Date. The course end date.
4. Review. The text of the review.

The "Export Reviews As…" button is in the upper-right corner of the page. Export lets you save the data and analyze it outside the platform in XLSX or CSV format.
Use it to gauge student satisfaction, find the strengths and weaknesses of a course, and put reviews to work in your marketing, for example by posting positive reviews on your website.

![Export Reviews As menu with XLSX and CSV choices.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/95b87ad58385e82d24b336eb277aef9a8242611fb57abb0a8b3ebf6f669120bd.png)
Choose XLSX or CSV to start exporting the selected reviews.

Click "Export Reviews As…" and choose a file format (XLSX or CSV). When the export is ready, click "Action" in the export notification and select "Download" to save the file.

---

# Checking Assignments

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/checking-assignments

> Review student answers to assignments, approve or return them, and leave comments in Assignment Review.

Assignments are written tasks prepared in advance for students in a course. The student writes an answer in free form and can also attach files to it.

In Assignment Review, you can see student answers to the assignments you created in Courses.

Click a section name to jump to its description:

Checking Assignments

Student Answers

## Checking Assignments

Go to Memberships → Assignment Review.

![Memberships menu with Assignment Review selected and the review filter panel on the right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cb9ffb6aea57d73b07db32f486cd97cd7f1830a40cf174848814366bd01ffc23.png)

On the left is the filter panel for the assignment list:

1. Status. Select an answer status from the list: Needs Attention, Approved, Incomplete, Not Approved, or Editing.
2. Assignees. Select the team member responsible for the review.
3. Courses. Select a course from the list.
4. Course Steps. Select course steps from the list.
5. Course Plans. Select course plans from the list.
6. Users. Select a user from the list to see only that user's assignments.
7. Cohort Dates. Select a cohort date from the list.
8. Answer Date. Set a date or date range to filter answers for a specific period, such as a month or today.
9. Sort By. Choose from the list:
Newest First: shows the newest answers from students first.
Blocking First, Then New: shows first the answers that block a student from moving on to the next lesson. A student can't continue until a team member approves the answer to the assignment.

![Assignment Review filters: status, assignees, courses, steps, plans, users, cohort dates, answer date, sorting, and Search.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3a7de717b6604decf707daedbec727ea820b69adc2e0c2301485a6a2c61b512.png)

Click "Search". The student answers that match your criteria appear on the right. Click "Reset" to clear the filter.

For a review queue, start with answers that need attention. Use **Blocking First, Then New** when you need to prioritize students whose next lesson is waiting for approval. Open the assignment history if you need to compare a resubmission with the earlier answer.

**Important:** if the AI Tutor is turned on, it reviews new answers before you do. Answers it was confident about already have a status, and a comment if its settings allow it; the rest stay for your team. You can always change a status the AI Tutor set. See "[AI Tutor](https://docs.axl.tech/application-ai-curator)".

## Student Answers

Student answers to assignments appear on the right.

![A student's answer card in Assignment Review: status, student name, answer date, course path, question, correct answer, answer, review buttons, and the comment field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9bc83ced82e40ffb69775dd3d50481a44f547590d01fd79eb512e66045351634.png)

- At the top, you see the student's name. Click the name to open the contact card in the CRM. Below it are the date the student answered and the date of the last change.
Next come the course, section, and lesson names.
- The "Show Answers for This Step" button. Click it to see this student's answers to this course step.
- The "Show All Answers" button. Click it to see all of this student's answers.

![The assignment question, the correct answer for reviewers, and the student's answer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a3eac9bc158a4cb2620057a7f244e33cadcac49e3dd75127c17bb36008c5c342.png)

Below that, you see:

- Question. The question from the assignment.
- Correct Answer. The correct answer to the question. Students don't see it.
- Answer. The student's answer to the question.

![Review buttons: Approved, Needs Revision, Not Approved, and Pending Review.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2ce082579ee253740bbc6685db317a89e652b66c7bf24335d55f5fb54b68c770.png)

Buttons:

- Approved: click to approve the student's answer. (If the assignment is checked automatically, this button isn't available.)
- Needs Revision: click if the student needs to complete the answer.
- Not Approved: click if the answer is incorrect and needs to be corrected.
- Pending Review: click if you need more time to review the assignment.

![Comment field with Attach Files, Emoji, and Voice Recording icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d63d7c88748c527f181b6cf2d39aa71ac72f0ce218f119b37f28e6aae786ec90.png)

Comment. In this field, you can write a comment on the student's answer and attach files.

1. Files. You can attach files to a comment. Click the "Attach Files" icon and select a file from your device.
2. Type a message…. Type the text of your comment.
3. Emoji. Add emoji to your comment.
4. Voice recording. Leave a voice reply or a voice comment for the student. Click the "Voice Recording" icon to record an audio message instead of typing.

![Top of an answer card with the Pending Review status tag.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/56ea34f4afa8315cafc206b25c0548a5020fcdf9876896cc2f86dbf367f699e1.png)

At the top of each answer, you see:

- Answer status. Shows the status of the answer: Approved, Needs Revision, Not Approved, or Pending Review.
- The "Blocking Step" tag. It means this assignment can block further progress until the required review is complete. After approving the work, check the answer status; writing a comment alone does not approve it.
- The Show Assignment History link. Click it to see the history of this student's answer to the assignment.

![Show Assignment History link at the top right of an answer card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/56ea34f4afa8315cafc206b25c0548a5020fcdf9876896cc2f86dbf367f699e1.png)

A window opens that shows the history of this assignment and every change made to it.

![Assignment History for Olivia Bennett's answer: Pending Review, Needs Revision by Alex Morgan, Editing and Pending Review again in step Week 1 of the Leadership Certificate course.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a86d1e9fb85ca2f036d9fa9ec1919c4b03f89b54d515254801c46fab533da33a.png)

---

# Certificates

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/certificates

> Create certificate templates, issue certificates to students, and automate delivery.

In AXL, a certificate is a document you design and issue to record a student's completion of a course, program, or training. It can be electronic or printed, and it can include the course name, the completion date, and sometimes a grade or the skills the student gained.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Certificates

Settings

Issuing Certificates

Automation

Issued Certificates

## Certificates

To create a certificate template, go to Memberships → Certificates and click "Create Certificate" in the upper-right corner of the page.

![Certificates page with the Create Certificate button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebcd0f3318c30bcae17e377a20183d481711eadd5ad1d43a403c672bbb2c7cae.png)

The "Create Certificate" panel opens. Enter a name for the template in the "Title" field and click "Create".

![Create Certificate panel with the required Title and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/994c4ec90109b15ffbe0ed9a114b867ca1405530faf7a3bd279835fe2ee31208.png)

The new certificate appears in the list. The list shows:

1. Image. The certificate's background image.
2. Title. The name of the certificate template.
3. Date Created. The exact date and time the template was created.
4. Linked Courses. The courses whose settings link to this certificate template. To learn how to set up a certificate for a course, see "Course Management".
5. Issued. The number of certificates issued from this template.
6. Actions. Two icon buttons are available:
The copy icon ("Duplicate certificate"). Click it to create a copy of the template.
The trash icon. Click it to delete this certificate template. You'll be asked to confirm.

![Certificates table with the Image, Title, Date Created, Linked Courses, Issued, and Actions columns highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebcd0f3318c30bcae17e377a20183d481711eadd5ad1d43a403c672bbb2c7cae.png)

To design the certificate and add content, click its name in the list.

![Certificates list with the certificate title highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebcd0f3318c30bcae17e377a20183d481711eadd5ad1d43a403c672bbb2c7cae.png)

## Settings

The certificate editor opens. Use it to set up the template for the new certificate.
The Settings panel is on the left side of the page. To open it, expand the menu.

![Certificate designer with Add Field and Preview highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2add95c569d22d72fa2c00000608441bb91d7c69cd9957cc53b7fcf7e0060b4a.png)

The "Settings" panel includes:

1. Settings. These options let you create a unique certificate that matches your requirements and preferences. You can customize its appearance so it looks good and fits your needs.
2. Title. Change the name of the certificate template here.
3. Layout. Sets the size and orientation of the document used to issue or print the certificate.

    - A4 Portrait: the standard A4 format (210 mm x 297 mm) in portrait (vertical) orientation, 1240 x 1754 pixels.
    - A4 Landscape: the standard A4 format (210 mm x 297 mm) in landscape (horizontal) orientation, 1754 x 1240 pixels.
    - Custom: set your own page size with the width and height fields.
4. Background Image. A graphic that fills the certificate background. Click the icon to choose and upload an image from your device (computer, tablet, or laptop).
5. Background Color. The color that fills the certificate background. Choose a preset color (such as white, black, or gray) or pick any color from the palette.
6. Primary Font. The font sets the style and look of the text on the certificate. Choose the primary font from the list to give your certificate a more personal look.
7. Numbering. Certificate numbering gives every issued certificate a unique identification number. A number usually has a prefix and a sequence number. They identify each certificate, let you track it in the database, and link it to the right student.
8. Prefix. A code or letters that identify a group of certificates. A prefix typically marks a specific time period or type of certificate. It's added to the beginning of the certificate number.
9. Fixed Number Length. Check the box so the numbers of all issued certificates have the same, fixed length. The system adds zeros at the start of the number. For example, with a length of 6, the number is "000001". A fixed length keeps all your certificates in one uniform format.
10. Number Length. Set the length of the certificate number (1 to 20). This field is available when Fixed Number Length is on.
11. Next Number. The sequential number the next certificate will get. Numbers are assigned automatically and go up by one with each certificate you issue. They are generated in order and don't repeat within a prefix. The next number is shown in the line below.
12. "Reset Numbering" button. Click it, enter the number the next certificate should get, and confirm by clicking "Reset Numbering" in the pop-up.
13. Delivery. By default, the certificate is sent by email. To change how it's sent, go to the automation. For more about automations, see "[Certificate Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/certificate-scenario)".

![Certificate designer with the Settings sidebar highlighted: title, layout, background, font, and numbering.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2add95c569d22d72fa2c00000608441bb91d7c69cd9957cc53b7fcf7e0060b4a.png)

To add content to the certificate, click "Add Field".
Each field is replaced automatically with real data when the certificate is issued, such as the contact's first and last name, student ID, email, certificate number, and course name.

Choose the fields you need from the list:

- First Name. Replaced with the recipient's first name from the contact card when the certificate is issued.
- Last Name. Replaced with the recipient's last name from the contact card. First and last name can appear separately on the certificate, on the same line or different lines, or in different places.
- First Name + Last Name. Shows the first name followed by the last name. Both names are joined with a space in one text field. The text may wrap if the field is too narrow; it is not forced onto two lines. To place the names separately, add First Name and Last Name as two fields.
- Last Name + First Name. Shows the last name before the first name.
- Student ID. The ID is the student's unique account number in the system, which can contain numbers and letters. This field is replaced with the student's ID.
- Student Email. Replaced with the email the student provided when registering on the platform.
- Course Name. Replaced with the name of the course when the certificate is issued.
- Certificate Number. Replaced with the certificate's sequential number. In the certificate settings, you can set up numbering with a prefix and a number, or just the sequential number.
- Date. Replaced with the date the certificate is issued.
- Text. This field isn't replaced with any value. Type any text you want.
- Image. Adds any image to the certificate. For example, you can add your Membership Portal logo, or an image of a signature. Adding a signature image changes the appearance of the certificate; it is not a cryptographic signature.

![Add Field menu listing name, student ID, email, course, certificate number, date, text, and image fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebfb0c672b1abf12fe7b27d6d96631cf7adbfcdb92f70d38d84a42e4254b6611.png)

In the "Add Field" list, click the field you want. It appears on the certificate. Then drag it to the position you want to arrange the layout.

![Name field placed on the certificate canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2add95c569d22d72fa2c00000608441bb91d7c69cd9957cc53b7fcf7e0060b4a.png)

Hover over a field and right-click to open its settings. There you can change the font, font size, text color, and style. You can also align the text to the right, center, or left of the field.

![Text Settings popover for a selected field with font, size, color, style, alignment, and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b98dea474415d2a64fe9556ac1588dfacad982a3d0060a4522e04fbc9e5665e4.png)

In the image field's settings, click the upload icon to upload an image from your device. Adjust the width and height if needed.

![Certificate editor: the Course Name field rotated by dragging its transform point above the field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e80272e87a10a209dd2c886b9f7cbb54659530619cc4c89ef58cf415c6fc5c6f.png)

You can rotate fields relative to the vertical or horizontal axis. Grab the "transform point" with your cursor and turn the field to the right or left.

![Certificate editor: Add Field and Preview above the certificate layout.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b2cfc94267ea62a4c4e5edcea9bf7e4e979dede1e78d36bdf0671dc1eaa700a1.png)

When the layout is ready, click "Preview" (the eye icon) next to "Add Field" above the certificate.

Preview checks the layout but does not save the template. After making changes, click **Save Changes** in the bottom bar. Reopen the certificate to check the saved version before issuing it.

![Certificate preview for a selected contact and course.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/134f3b501c818703dd38e0d4db8c65c6d0f18e075d090074085af89451ed0b8d.png)

In the preview, choose a contact and a course to see how the certificate will look for that student.

Choose a sample contact with a full name and select the intended course. Check that the name, course title, date, and certificate number fit inside their fields. If a long name wraps awkwardly, close Preview and widen its field or reduce the font size, then preview again. Preview does not issue a certificate or send an email.

![Certificate Preview with Alexandra Morgan Rivera and the Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate course selected; the completion heading, full name, course title and 12-week completion statement fit without overlapping.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/92f23e085300863c4c295168fa95e7de9432f1798315daa6011a9ad914038281.png)
Select a contact and a course in Preview to check a long name and course title before issuing the certificate. This saved Northstar example keeps the personalized text clear of the completion statement.

## Issuing Certificates

To issue a certificate manually, click "Issue Certificate" in the upper-right corner of the certificate page. The button is unavailable while you have unsaved changes, so save or discard them first.

![Issue Certificate button highlighted above the certificate designer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2add95c569d22d72fa2c00000608441bb91d7c69cd9957cc53b7fcf7e0060b4a.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Certificate. The template you're working on is selected by default.
2. Contact. Select the contact who will receive the certificate.
3. Course. Select the course whose name will appear on the certificate.

Click "Issue Certificate".

![Issue Certificate panel with Certificate, Contact, and Course selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8632487b0ab55700043668872c17599a7036defec7cf8f592896fc9264a9dc2.png)

To issue certificates on course completion, select this template in the course's **General** settings: AXL then issues it by itself when a student completes the course. Do not also add an **Issue Certificate** step to the course automation, or the student gets two certificates.

## Automation

On the "Automation" tab, configure the actions that run when the certificate is issued. A default automation is already there. It's created automatically with every new certificate template and sends the student a message after the certificate is issued. You can keep it or build your own. To learn more about automation settings, see "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)".

To activate the automation, turn on the switch in the automation toolbar so that it reads "Active".

**Important:**

- The certificate reaches the student only through this automation. If it is inactive or has no message step, the certificate is issued but nobody sends it.
- The student receives a link to the certificate, `#Cert.Link#`, not a file attached to the message. The link opens the certificate image, which the student can download.

![Certificate Automation tab with Certificate Issued connected to Send Message.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bb295d9c0c7832a537b1375ec2ed20d539af48777ed33bc1c17d22f5324eb361.png)

## Issued Certificates

On the "Issued" tab, you can see a list of all certificates you've issued.

The list shows:

1. Number. The certificate's sequential number.
2. Date Created. The exact date and time the certificate was issued.
3. Contact. The contact the certificate was issued to. Click the name to open the contact card.
4. Certificate. The certificate template. Click the template name to open its settings.
5. Actions. These icon buttons are available:

    - The download icon ("Download certificate"). Click it to download the issued certificate to your device in JPEG format.
    - The link icon ("Copy link"). Click it to see the link to the issued certificate and copy it. You can send this link to the student.
    - The trash icon. Click it to delete the issued certificate. You'll be asked to confirm.

![Issued tab with the Number, Date Created, Contact, Certificate, and Actions columns and one issued certificate.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8cb7577cbfffe711276dbda9ca9321a1044442d4e6a02a9096c1d3eda6e4782d.png)

At the top of the page there's a search field and a filter. Use them to find certificates quickly.

- Search. Free-text search by keyword.
- Certificate. On a certificate's own page, that certificate is selected by default. This condition shows certificates issued from the selected template.
- Click "Add Filter" and choose a condition from the list:

    - Contact. Shows certificates issued to the selected contact.
    - Course. Shows certificates issued for the selected course.
    - Date Created. Shows certificates issued on specific dates or within a date range.

![Issued certificates search and the Add Filter menu with Contact, Course, and Date Created.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5e11a500c2aa2f657f36dca9a3ad551631e81ad0602a872d6468c39a723df270.png)

---

# Gamification

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/gamification

> Reward students with points, achievements, and a leaderboard, and let them spend points in a Points Store.

Use **Memberships → Gamification** to award points and achievements, offer rewards in the Points Store, and show students their progress and leaderboard position.

Choose the activities you want to recognize and describe the reward criteria clearly. Configure the points awarded by each achievement; an achievement can award zero points.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Setting Up Gamification

What Students See in the Membership Portal

## Gamification

Go to Memberships → Gamification. To start using gamification, turn on the "Enable Gamification" switch in the upper-right corner of the page.

![Gamification page header with the Enable Gamification switch turned on.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d37f86a4d4ea7750d7ad7071cb53f1f99886aab9f2708a44ce6e68a998af1ba8.png)

**The Gamification page has these tabs**: Settings, Achievements, Points Store, History, Leaderboard, and Automation. Let's go through them one by one.

![Gamification tabs: Settings, Achievements, Points Store with its switch, History, Leaderboard and Automation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d37f86a4d4ea7750d7ad7071cb53f1f99886aab9f2708a44ce6e68a998af1ba8.png)

## Settings

On the Settings tab, set up the basics:

1. Leaderboard. Turn on the "Enable leaderboard" switch to show the achievements leaderboard in the Membership Portal. The leaderboard shows which students get the best results.

    - Show leaders for. Set the time period in days, months, or years. In the Membership Portal, students see the leaders for that period.
    - Show top. Enter how many top leaders to show in the Membership Portal (up to 250).
2. Earned Points. Students earn points for completing assignments, passing tests, or reaching milestones as they learn.

    - Name. Change the name of the points, for example, "coins".
    - Abbreviation. The short name of the points, shown in students' accounts in the Membership Portal.
    - Points Icon. Choose an icon from the standard set, or select "Upload Your Own" to use a custom icon.
    - Points Expiration. Turn on the switch to make earned points expire after a set period. Choose the period in days, months, or years.
3. Preview. This frame shows how the points icon will look to students in the Membership Portal. Earned points appear in the upper-right corner of the portal toolbar.
4. Reset Gamification. Deletes all students' achievements and transactions. To confirm, enter your account name (case-sensitive) in the window that opens.

![Gamification Settings: leaderboard period and size, earned-points name, abbreviation and icon, points expiration, the header preview and Reset Gamification.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/190f50672ffac587df8acb47437e760acd3cd464049c12c4aba75f81fc42f1b3.png)

## Achievements

Achievements are special rewards that students can earn for completing specific tasks or reaching goals as they learn. The points they earn can be spent on rewards in the Points Store.

Set up the basic achievement options:

1. Achievement Style. Choose a style for your achievements from the list.
2. Achievements. A built-in list of achievements that you can edit and customize however you like.

![Achievements tab with four achievement styles and enabled achievements such as Level 3 Buyer, Serial Learner, Early Bird and First Test with their point rewards.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e701829a38e895e7ae33586306db91b3223659d4939b8a2d5bc21a6fe6a88ad7.png)

Each achievement card shows:

1. Icon. The achievement image in the selected style.
2. Title and description. The achievement's title and a short description that explains why the student earned it.
3. Note. Built-in achievements have an info icon next to the title. Hover over it to see how many times a student can earn the achievement: "Can be earned only once", "Can be earned once per course or library", or "Can be earned multiple times".
4. Points. The number of points the student gets for the achievement.
5. Edit. Click the pencil icon to change the achievement's title, description, icon, and points.
6. Active. Turn the switch off to disable this achievement.

![Achievement cards with icon, name, description, points reward, edit button and enabled switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a65cc77fce4f49cd791a8d5f9763892389856511676db147b20bca4c6fa03f67.png)

You can use the built-in achievements or create your own. To add one, click "Create Achievement".

![Achievements list header with Search and Create Achievement.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/620b072a549843c524078d22b46d7dda70ee33b568bf2268d227f7711e9e3138.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter the achievement's title. Students see it in the Membership Portal when they earn the achievement.
2. Description. Add a short description that explains why the student received the reward. Students see it in the Membership Portal.
3. Active. Check the box to start awarding points for this achievement.
4. Points. Enter the number of points the student gets for this achievement.
5. Achievement Image. Choose an image from the standard set or upload your own.

Click "Create".

![Create Achievement panel: title Team Leader, description, Active, 100 points and the standard achievement images.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/30f15580151ff028c1b509a9a133c30fabd44651e780e40606ff73baba07dc94.png)

## Points Store

The Points Store is a virtual store where students can spend the points they've earned on products or privileges.
It can offer a variety of items: access to additional products, a bonus balance top-up, or items without content, such as a consultation or an in-person meeting. Privileges give students extra opportunities. Besides giving access to extra materials and privileges, the store motivates and rewards students: the points they earn become additional goals and rewards for their effort in learning.

Turn on the switch next to the "Points Store" tab name to enable the store. Students can then view and buy items in the Membership Portal. To add a new item, click "Add Product" at the top left of the tab. The button stays disabled until the store is on.

![Points Store tab turned on with Add Product, Show deleted and the Northstar Coaching Session product.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/441519f61612a188e72f3f8b1ce7f333a4b25694c2774e4fc3c88547e1a316f9.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Available for sale. Check the box to let students buy this item with their points.
2. Name. Enter the item's name.
3. Description. Add a short description of the item. Students see it in the store.
4. Price. Every item in the store has its own price in points. Students choose what to buy based on how many points they've collected. Enter the item's price in points.
5. Set quantity limit. Sets the maximum number of items that can be sold. Enter the maximum in "Quantity Available". The limit applies to all students together. For example, a limit of 15 means 15 items in total, not 15 per student.
A limit can help control demand and spread the item fairly among buyers. For example, only the first 10 students can buy it. In the Membership Portal, students see how many items are left.
6. Content. Choose what the student gets:

    - Product. Gives the student access to the product you select after they buy the item. Choose the product in the "Select Product" list below.
    - Bonus Balance. Adds the amount you set to the student's bonus balance after the purchase. Enter the amount in "Top-Up Amount" below.
    - No Content. For items such as consultations or in-person meetings. Set up an automation to deliver them.

Click "Create". After you add the item, you can set up an automation for it. To learn more about automations, see the "Automations" article.

![Create Product panel: available for sale, name Leadership Workbook (PDF), description, price 200, quantity limit 50 and the Leadership Certificate product as content.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c50789a32aee723516983e67b10f4ac57c0bba64704aa84ee589ca068d07d6df.png)

After you add it, the product appears in the list. The list shows:

1. Image. The product image.
2. Name. The product name. Click it to open the product page.
3. Price. The price in points.
4. Content. What the student gets after buying: access to a product, a bonus balance top-up, or no content.
5. Quantity. The sales limit for this product.
6. Actions. These icon buttons are available:

    - **The pencil icon**. Click it to edit the product.
    - **The trash icon**. Click it to delete the product. You'll be asked to confirm.

![Points Store list with image, name, price, content, quantity and edit and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ca624df8aae261f6d702d61a873e81aa141420ae3e09cf0d03ae69884d9598ec.png)

To see deleted products, check "Show deleted". They appear in the list marked "Deleted". To restore one, click the restore icon (the undo arrow) in the "Actions" column and confirm.

![Points Store with Show deleted on: a deleted Leadership Workbook (PDF) product with its restore icon, and the Northstar Coaching Session product.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8332b6e7df1ea8f4827511ffff0866175b6213c422665d8d6f0b3e6884aea26d.png)

To open a product, click its name in the list. On the page that opens, you can change the product's basic settings.

![Points Store product Northstar Coaching Session: settings, price 350, quantity limit and the product card preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a14389631652fd05917d5f01edc8e5b7ef7010a37b187feb5b140a2056cd5b88.png)

The "Transactions" tab lists all transactions for this product.

![Points Store product Transactions tab with Olivia Bennett's purchase for −350 points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b5753ad0eff2842fc0bfe7839f0335d9b1c6ed07116622434ea7758203157a4a.png)

On the "Automation" tab, you can set up the automation for purchases of this product.

![Points Store product Automation tab: the Gamification: Item Purchased trigger connected to a Deals: Create or Update Deal step for the Fall Enrollment pipeline, stage New Inquiries.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7180a554090639d05c9821d556b44529bef40a137b3848313d038308f4735be2.png)

To return to the list of products, click the back arrow at the top left of the page.

![Points Store product header with the back arrow.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/359aea0ca95f93b9599b437b6292d52dcc2eba466f8d8c0eba364966a863ba27.png)

## History

On the "History" tab, you can see all point transactions, both earned and deducted. The table shows:

1. Date. The exact date and time of the transaction.
2. Contact. The contact the transaction belongs to.
3. Info. The type of transaction and its main details.
4. Points. The number of points added or deducted.

![Gamification History tab with dates, contacts, purchases and achievements, and points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/13c351d61058a7d45ffd505b6f98965154f9c42ad440c2c59ecd92d4d1a9e273.png)

The filter at the top of the tab helps you find a specific transaction quickly. Click "Add Filter" and choose a condition from the list:

- Date Created. Shows transactions from specific dates. Select a date range.
- Contact. Shows transactions for the selected contacts. You can choose one or several contacts from the list.
- Points. Shows transactions within a selected range of points.
- Gamification Product. Shows transactions related to the selected product.

![Gamification History with the Add Filter menu open: Contact, Date Created, Gamification Product and Points, over demo point transactions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8cfbf7ee3e9d3c419f553ea4d9f46d8b26ab0354aa994df54a70407fc1589d08.png)

## Leaderboard

The "Leaderboard" tab lists all participants along with their scores and rankings. The table shows:

1. Rank. The leader's position number.
2. Achievements. The leader's achievements.
3. Contact. The student's contact. Click the name to go to the contact card.
4. Total Points. The total number of points earned.

![Gamification Leaderboard with rank, achievements, contact and total points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c33b9fb93ce820e2b4a5a77c0cf057875f0ee0a6e911bfd1d8c810680c937e94.png)

The filter at the top of the tab helps you find a specific leader quickly. Click "Add Filter" and choose a condition from the list:

- Contact. Choose contacts from the suggested list. You can select one or several.
- Points. Shows leaders whose total points fall within a selected range.

![Gamification Leaderboard with the Add Filter menu open: Contact and Points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/380efd282610704e750c9dc20c7d7d7c83b90015349539cf77467d0e9995c962.png)

## Automation

On this tab, you can automate processes and set up the sequence of events and actions that lead to goals. To learn more about building an automation, see "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)".
To activate the automation, turn on the switch in the automation toolbar so that it reads "Active".

![Gamification Automation tab with Achievement Earned connected to Gamification: Add Transaction.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64430eca990855650bc8c659b47bc8756b4b179f6d6cfc7e5b77091a628434bf.png)

## What Students See in the Membership Portal

Gamification appears in the Membership Portal only when "Enable Gamification" is turned on at the top of the Gamification page. For more about the settings, see the sections above.
In the portal, students see the number of points they've earned in the upper-right corner. Clicking the points icon opens the gamification details.

![Membership Portal header with the member's points balance (875 pt).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/86d820371cfb425deff8fa012ea3943cb516bbfa3c7eb52064b39acdbe908d52.png)

There, students can see:

1. Points. Their current balance, the total points they've earned, and their transaction history.
2. Leaderboard. This section appears only if "Enable leaderboard" is turned on in the gamification settings.
3. Achievements. All the achievements the student has earned and the points awarded for each.
4. Products. The products available in the Points Store. Students choose what to buy based on the points they've accumulated and pay for it with those points.

![Member gamification page with Points, Achievements, Leaderboard, and Products.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/590e471e04ffb80212cf6deb53ebcee8a8af373c78f81cd70a2bf0fde471165c.png)

---

# Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/settings-2

> Customize your Membership Portal: set its domain, sign-up rules, chat, footer, member profile fields, and custom code.

The "Settings" page lets you tailor your Membership Portal to your business, so members get a more convenient, efficient, and personalized learning experience.
Select a section below to jump to its description:

Settings

General

User Profile

Custom Code

## Settings

Go to "Memberships" → "Settings".
Here you can change the general information about your Membership Portal. The page has three tabs: General, User Profile, and Custom Code. Let's look at each one in detail.

![Membership Portal General settings with subdomain, custom-domain DNS instructions, registration options, logo, favicon and an expanded cookie notice example.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c3bd23be6008a233de62aa5f146a0a0687d66c4d46a987c660666dbcef769bcd.png)
Unsaved local example: the cookie notice is expanded. Copy domain and DNS values from your own account.

## General

This tab covers the settings for your Membership Portal.

The General tab contains the following settings:

1. Membership Portal + Subdomain. Enter the subdomain for your Membership Portal using English letters.
2. Custom Portal Domain. Enter the domain for your Membership Portal and follow the DNS instructions below the field. When AXL lists two addresses, add one A record with both values, each on its own line. Copy the current values from your account.
3. Disable open registration. Check this box to prevent visitors from creating an account through the portal’s public sign-up form. This is a registration setting, not a rule that grants access to paid courses.
4. Show unavailable courses the student has started. Check this box to show members the courses they've already started but can't currently access for some reason (for example, an expired subscription). This lets them see their progress in those courses and track updates and availability notifications.
5. Show cookie notice. This option shows users a notice that the site uses cookies. Cookies are small text files that websites store on a computer or mobile device. The notice shows transparency and care for your users' privacy. In the "Cookie Notice Text" field, use square brackets to add a link: [link text | URL].
6. Chat. Switch "Enabled" on to turn on chat for your team members, then enter the name members will see in the "Membership Portal Chat Name" field. To turn off the internal chat, switch "Enabled" off.
7. Footer. Check "Show on pages" and enter the footer text.
8. Documents. Check "Show a consent checkbox on the sign-up form" so users can accept the sign-up agreement. Then add the agreement text in the "Sign-Up Agreement" field.
9. Session Settings. The "Limit the number of active sessions" option lets you cap the number of simultaneous active sessions (sign-ins) for each user. This limits simultaneous sessions and can reduce account sharing. It does not verify who is using an account or prevent someone with a stolen password from signing in.
10. Logo. Upload your account logo.
11. Favicon. Add a favicon image for your account. The image should be at least 256x256 px.

After you change the general settings, click **Save** at the bottom of the form. The save controls appear when you have unsaved changes. To restore the saved settings, click **Discard Changes**.

![Membership Portal Chat and Footer controls with Northstar Student Support and an example footer in the editor.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/393421ac79b703ded3e9831bbdfcecfae388171a2300076907cef9063955e849.png)
Unsaved Chat and Footer examples. The footer editor appears when Show on pages is selected.

![Membership Portal Documents with an example Sign-Up Agreement, unchecked session limit, and Discard Changes and Save controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9bfbc8f64434e291308d996d75a01043e06f891662dddae17f26cad9e3d44e93.png)
Unsaved sign-up agreement example. Save applies your changes; Discard Changes restores the saved settings.

![Session Settings with Limit the number of active sessions checked, a limit of 3, and Discard Changes and Save controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1c0a5aaa14ad2e22575b5658283353b966c34d2c9542fda55c946928d957085b.png)
Unsaved session-limit example with three simultaneous active sessions allowed.

## User Profile

On the "User Profile" tab, you set the requirements users must meet when they sign up for your Membership Portal (for example, email confirmation).

Choose the requirements from the list:

1. Email. Set parameters:
- Require email confirmation. AXL sends a confirmation email to the address the user enters.
- Prevent email changes. Members can't change their email address.
- Block access if the email is not confirmed. Users can't access the portal until they confirm their email.
2. First Name. Check this box to ask members for their first name when they sign up. Then check "Required" to make it mandatory.
3. Last Name. Check this box to ask members for their last name. You can also check "Required".
4. Middle Name. Check this box to ask members for their middle name.
5. Phone. Check this box to ask members for their phone number. You can also check "Required".
6. Birthday. Check this box to ask members for their date of birth.
7. Gender. Check this box to ask members for their gender.

Click "Save".

![Membership Portal User Profile tab with email confirmation and email-change options, required first and last names, and optional profile fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/eea8be83d0f3793a9bd5b644e57323022f45d468e8299de8fc9efccdfc388882.png)
Choose which profile fields to request and which enabled fields are required.

## Custom Code

You can add custom code to the top and bottom of your Membership Portal pages, for example, to quickly install analytics trackers. An analytics tracker is a tool that measures, collects, and analyzes data about website visitors to help you improve site performance.

On the "Custom Code" tab, you can make the following changes:

1. Head Code. Code is added to the top part of the page (&lt;head&gt;).
2. Body Code. Code is added at the end of the page body (&lt;body&gt;).
3. Variables. Use these variables to show member information. They're replaced with actual values before the code is added to the page:

- #Contact.ID# - ID
- `#Contact.Email#` — Email
- `#Contact.FirstName#` — First Name
- `#Contact.LastName#` — Last Name
- `#Contact.Phone#` — Phone

Click "Save".

![Membership Portal Custom Code tab with Head Code, Body Code, supported tag hints and five Contact variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6dbc43e0a3c11f0fdf9519cc2cc2b8f3bb45572be56a66cd748513e81fab9f39.png)
Head Code and Body Code use the displayed contact variables. No custom code was entered in this example.

## Advanced Settings and JS Code

You can listen for the moment a lesson, test, or task is displayed in the learning section, using the built-in AXLSchool object. For example, you might need this to run a JS function every time a member moves from one step to the next.
Code example:

JavaScript

window.AXLSchool.addEventListener('CourseItemChanged', function (data) {
// your function
});

The data argument is an object with the following fields:

JavaScript

{
courseId: string; // course ID
courseItemId: string; // step ID
tab: 'theory' | 'tests' | 'tasks' | 'rating'; // current tab
studentId?: string; // member ID
}

---

# Products and Services

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers

> Create and manage the products and services you sell, including digital and physical products, courses, subscriptions, and cohorts.

Products and services are what you sell to your customers through AXL.
In this section, you manage the products you sell: add or delete products and edit their price, description, and name.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Product Types

How to Create a Product

Product List

## Product Types

You can sell any product or service on AXL. Just choose the product type:

1. **Digital Product**. A file customers can download from your site, such as an ebook, checklist, catalog, or song. For digital products, you can turn on "Free download" so customers can download the file without paying.
2. **Physical Product**. Any physical item you sell, such as books, phones, clothes, or bags.
3. **Service**. Any service you provide, such as consultations, manicures, cleaning, car repair, or home construction.
4. **Courses & Materials**. Training courses in your account, libraries, and other educational materials. You can sell courses one at a time or bundle them together. To learn more about courses, see "[Courses](https://docs.axl.tech/courses)".
5. **Subscription**. A built-in recurring payment, where customers pay a set amount on a regular schedule to keep access to a product or service. To learn more, see "[Subscription](https://docs.axl.tech/subscription)".
6. **Cohort**. An event on AXL tied to a specific date that brings its participants together.

## How to Create a Product

Go to Sales → Products & Services. Click "Add Product".

![Products &amp; Services filtered to Northstar with For Sale off, showing the leadership membership and course products with prices, included course, zero orders and buyers, and edit, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5d0ddb1e07d8a2d751de1e38f9d697d1447aa7a5b1f4310ffb0c472fd14a743e.png)
Use Add Product to create a product. This list is filtered by Northstar with For Sale off, so it shows the examples whose sales are disabled.

In the New Product window, fill in the fields:

1. **Public Name**. Enter the product name. Customers and leads see this name in the cart and in emails.
2. **Internal Name**. Only you and your team see this name. Customers never see it.
3. **Description**. Add a description for the product. This field is optional.
4. **Type**. Select the product type: Digital Product, Physical Product, Service, Courses & Materials, Subscription, or Cohort.
5. **Category**. Categories help you organize your products and find them faster. Click "Manage Categories" to create product categories.
6. **Disable Sales**. Turn on the switch to stop selling this product or service.

![New Product form for Northstar Leadership Certificate with public and internal names, description, Courses &amp; Materials, category and Disable Sales enabled.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1ae6c984076e4ceee79a3acdb206ec1ee3b7b9392853b283d91ebf76edea5ff3.png)
Complete the New Product form. Keep Disable Sales on while preparing the product.

Click "Create and Open". The product settings page opens. Make the changes you need on the product’s settings tab. Add a description, set the price and access duration, and add the product content. For more details about product settings, see “[General Settings for Products and Services](https://docs.axl.tech/common-settings-of-the-products-and-services-section)”.

After configuring the product, click **Save Changes** in the footer and return to **Sales → Products & Services**. Check that the intended price and content appear in its row. Creating the product is separate from finishing its price and access settings.

![Northstar Leadership Certificate product settings with a $149 price, included leadership course, one-month access duration and product card preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b8c1e508ba69acd6c17f37ff920c3018f15e2fc214e8e0a4b27e944345616ede.png)
The saved example includes the leadership course at $149 with one month of access. Sales remain disabled.

Open the product's **Automation** tab to set up events and actions for that product. A new Courses & Materials product has an empty automation: configure its trigger and actions before expecting it to run. For the full setup steps, see [Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario).

![Product Automation tab for Northstar Leadership Certificate with event and action controls and an empty canvas that has no trigger.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4f43a945d51b77d59083493db84b81716e9470b3dd92ef7dea305bc4851f76f1.png)
A new Courses & Materials product starts with an empty automation. It cannot run until a trigger is configured, even when Active is on.

## Product List

Your new product appears in the product list. If you left **Disable Sales** on, turn off the **For Sale** filter to find it. The list example above shows the columns and row actions described below.

1. **Title**. The product name and type.
2. **Date Created**. The exact date and time the product was created.
3. **Price**. The price of the product.
4. **Category**. Groups your products so they are easy to find and organize.
5. **Content**. The courses and plans included in this product.
6. **Orders**. The number of orders placed for this product.
7. **Buyers**. The number of customers who have access to the product.
8. The "**Edit**" button. Click to edit the product.
The "Copy" button. Click to copy the product. All product settings and automations are copied too.
The "Delete" button. Click to delete the product.

Use the search bar and filters at the top of the page to find a product quickly.

- **Search**. Search the list by keyword.
- **Product Type**. Show only products of a certain type. Select a type from the list.
- Click "**Add Filter**" and select a condition from the list:

    - **Course**. Show products that include a certain course. Select a course from the list.
    - **Library**. Show products that include a certain library. Select a library from the list.
    - **Cohort**. Show products linked to a certain cohort. Select a cohort date from the list.
    - **Categories**. Show only the products in the categories you select, and hide the rest. Select one or more categories from the list.
    - **Deleted**. Show deleted products, so you can restore them.
    - **For Sale**. Filter products by whether they are available for purchase. Turn the switch on or off to see products that are for sale or not for sale.

![Products &amp; Services search and For Sale filters with the Add Filter menu showing Categories, Cohort, Course, Deleted and Library.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/336367bba844b0b78a2b6a976819dd48654edc45af4474a5675e4cd3eb801267.png)
Search by name and add conditions to narrow the list. For Sale is already applied here, so it is absent from Add Filter.

To restore a deleted product, add the **Deleted** filter and turn it on. Click the **Restore** arrow at the end of the product row. Turn the Deleted filter off to see the restored product again.

Deleting a product can revoke access already granted to its content. If you only want to stop new purchases, use **Disable Sales** on the product page instead. For a subscription, **Disable Sales** also stops automatic renewals of existing subscribers.

**Important:** a product's content works live for everyone who bought it. If you add a course to a product, all its buyers get the course; if you remove one, they lose access to it. To change what new buyers get without touching existing customers, create a new product.

![Products &amp; Services with Deleted enabled and a deleted Strategy Workshop course product, with the Restore arrow at the end of the row.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/50078b045711d5654db87962f0cfa6cc947c6bfc397059711d1038aa1f597fe4.png)
Enable Deleted to find a deleted product, then use the Restore arrow at the end of its row.

---

# Products & Services: General Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/common-settings-of-the-products-and-services-section

> A guide to the General Settings of a product or service: names, price, discounts, bonuses, content, access, payment options, and cover.

A product's first settings tab defines what you sell and how: the name customers see, the price and, depending on the product type, billing periods and payment retries for subscriptions or attachments for digital products.

Go to **Sales → Products & Services**, open a product, and select its first settings tab. In the current interface, this tab is labeled **Account Settings**. The sections depend on the product type: subscriptions include billing periods and payment retries, while digital products include attachments.

The examples below use Northstar Academy course and subscription products. Review the settings that apply to your product type.

![Northstar Leadership Certificate product settings with general details, price, course content, access duration, payment options, cover picker and product card preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b8c1e508ba69acd6c17f37ff920c3018f15e2fc214e8e0a4b27e944345616ede.png)
Current **Courses & Materials** example: $149 with one month of access to the selected course. Sales are disabled while this example is prepared. Enlarge the image to inspect the complete settings page.

**General Settings** identifies the product for customers and your team:

- **Public Name**: the name customers see in the cart and emails.
- **Internal Name**: a label for your team; customers do not see it.
- **Description**: the customer-facing description shown with the product.
- **Category**: group products so your team can find and manage them. Open the category selector and choose **Manage Categories** to manage categories, if your permissions allow it.

![Northstar Leadership Membership general settings with public name, internal name, description and Category selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/90725d539ebf10516e1832a78e246828477995a924b2b788cead4ab3f6b9f573.png)
The subscription example uses a customer-facing name and a separate internal label. Category is optional in this example.

**Price Settings** controls the amount offered at checkout. Available controls depend on the product type.

- **Pay what you want**: for products that offer this option, turn it on and enter the minimum payment amount. The customer chooses an amount at or above that minimum.
- **Price** or **Subscription Price**: enter the fixed amount, or the amount charged per subscription period. Setting a price does not charge a customer.
- **Show discount price**: enable this to display an **Original Price** alongside the actual price. Enter the original amount; it appears crossed out in the cart and payment forms.

Discounts and permitted bonus payments can affect the amount due.

![Subscription price 49, crossed-out original price setting 69, and Pay with Bonuses enabled with a 20 percent maximum.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fb1c942d08228c722f0e7a68d3334ac787366da200fb7f6087486de58e31a580.png)
Subscription example: $49 per period, an original price of $69, and a 20% bonus-payment limit. The same frame includes the bonus controls explained below.

Pay with Bonuses. Turn on the switch to let customers pay part or all of the product price with points from their bonus account.
Choose "Percentage" or "Fixed Amount," then enter the value below. If you choose a percentage, enter the share of the product price that customers can pay with bonuses. If you choose a fixed amount, enter the maximum amount that can be paid with bonuses.

**Subscription Period** is available for subscriptions:

- **Subscription Duration**: set the length of each paid period in days or months.
- **Limit the number of renewals**: enter the maximum number of automatic renewals. When the remaining count reaches zero, automatic renewal stops. Access follows the end of the last subscription period plus any configured access grace period; the limit does not immediately revoke an already purchased period.
- **Trial Period**: enable an introductory period, then set its **Trial Price** and **Trial Duration**. A zero price makes the trial free. The trial grants the content configured for the product.

At the end of the trial, AXL attempts renewal at the regular subscription price. Automatic charging requires a supported gateway and a valid saved payment method. Check the gateway and failed-payment settings before offering an automatically renewing trial.

![Subscription period with one month duration, a twelve-renewal limit, and a seven-day trial priced at 9.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a8251f1451b28a68b7e19ff504edc3e650aff4f9475637916e4c56cc1267f284.png)
Example: a seven-day $9 trial followed by $49 monthly payments, with a limit of 12 renewals.

**Attachments** is available for digital products. Click the attachment area, select the files in the file picker, and choose **Open**. You can also drag files into the upload area. Review the selected files before saving the product.

Content. This field is available when you set up subscriptions, courses, and materials. You can add multiple courses and libraries to the product. Click "Add Content" to open a new panel.

In **Add Content**, choose the content type:

1. **Course**: select the course and, if needed, a **Plan**.
2. **Library**: select the library. After a library is selected, **Steps** appears. Leave **All items** selected to include the whole library, or clear it and select the required items from the tree.
3. Use **Access to all courses** or **Access to all libraries** only when the product should include every item of that type.

Click **Add Content** to add the selection to the product form, then save the product when its configuration is complete. You can add more than one course or library.

![Complete Add Content panel with Course selected, Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate and the Leadership Essentials plan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4cbf773b31e0ac8f019d363a422bbc5a1fdc697c5631ceeba1d48a9068afc8b.png)
Current Course example with its plan selected. The Library alternative uses the same panel; its Steps controls appear after selecting a library. This example does not show a populated library or grant library access.

Access Duration. Set how long the product is available to customers. You can set the duration in days or months, or set a period with exact opening and closing dates. Access can also be unlimited. To do this, select the "Unlimited" checkbox.

**Additional Settings** includes:

- **Don't send the default email after payment**: suppress the standard purchase email. Configure any replacement email on the product's **Automation** tab. See [Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario).
- **Set order expiration**: choose a duration in days or a specific date. For an order containing several products, the earliest applicable expiration determines the order lifetime.

![Additional settings with an unsaved two-day order expiration example, installment restriction and Allowed Payment Gateways selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b6ff6c6abc050a4e66fc935f47846c0ed5506f4234f70f800d685b034dcbaf7a.png)
Unsaved example with a two-day order expiration. The same panel shows installment and allowed-gateway controls; these choices were reset after the demonstration.

**Payment Method Settings** controls which payment options are offered for this product:

- **Disable installment payments**: remove installment payments for the product.
- **Allowed Payment Gateways**: choose the gateways customers may use. The empty selection is labeled **All payment gateways**. See [Payment Gateways](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings) for connection settings.

Failed Payments. This section is available when you set up a subscription.

- Payment Attempts. The first payment attempt is made at the end of the subscription. Choose how the system makes more attempts:

    - Automatic. If the first attempt fails, the system automatically makes more attempts to charge the customer's card or account. You set the number of additional attempts and the number of days they're spread over (for example, 3 more attempts within 7 days).
    - Custom. In this mode, the system waits between payment attempts, which gives the customer time to fix a card problem or add funds. You set how long each wait lasts after the last failed attempt (for example, a 3-day wait).
- Keep access for X days after a failed attempt. Select this checkbox and set the access grace period. It extends access beyond the subscription period's end date while payment is unresolved. For example, a 7-day grace period keeps access until seven days after that end date. It does not restart a new 7-day window after every failed attempt. Payment retries and the access end date are separate settings.

![Failed Payments settings with Automatic and Custom modes, three additional attempts within seven days, a three-day access grace period, and related product and category selectors.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7b222daf108c0b9049dd07818301d777f01046be1d07ef905faf50f46f66af0c.png)
Example retry settings: three additional attempts within seven days and a three-day access grace period. The Renewal and Purchase controls are included below. The grace period extends access beyond the subscription period end date; it does not restart after each failed attempt.

**Renewal and Purchase** is available for subscriptions:

- **On purchase, renew related products**: select the subscriptions whose active access should be extended when this subscription is purchased.
- **On purchase, renew products in these categories**: select categories to apply related-product renewal to matching active products.

Related-product renewal applies to active access; later renewals follow the most recently purchased subscription. Configure the product's automation for successful and failed renewals. Automatic renewal requires saved-card support and a valid saved method; review **Save card details for future payments where supported** in the payment gateway settings.

Cover. Upload an image for the product's cover. Click the icon to open the file manager, then upload an image or select one you've already uploaded.

Product Card Preview. This section shows how the product card looks to customers in the cart and in emails.

![Cover picker and Northstar Leadership Membership card preview showing a seven-day 9 dollar trial, 49 dollars per month and a crossed-out 69 dollar original price.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5374acc336e75f2ba54766158b43c6faffa52d45174f67c1a430aa764ffb8c36.png)
Choose a cover and review the product card. This example has no custom cover; it shows the public name, description, original price, trial and recurring price.

Review **Product Card Preview** after changing the public name, description, price, or cover. Keep the internal name distinct if your team needs a label customers should not see.

When you finish, click "Save Changes."

---

# Subscription

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/subscription

> Learn how to create a subscription and set its price, trial, renewals, failed-payment retries, and automations.

A subscription is a built-in payment type where a customer pays a recurring amount for access to a product or service. For repeat payments, customers don't need to enter their card details again. The subscription fee is charged automatically. Customers can manage their subscriptions in their account in the Membership Portal: pause renewal, renew manually if a payment fails, and more.

Recurring payments are built into the AXL platform. You can use any payment gateway that supports saving cards. To learn how to set up a payment gateway, read the articles "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)," "[Stripe Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings)," and others. AXL fully manages the payments, and they run on your schedule. You can also accept cash payments and simply record the payment in the system.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Subscription

General Settings

Automation

## Subscription

To create a subscription, go to **Sales → Products & Services** and click **Add Product**.

![Products &amp; Services list filtered by Northstar with For Sale off, the Add Product button and two Northstar products marked Not for Sale.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/89f18061eb27cdac261c302beed2a8dca63e5706f5f6dbc636540687cb6d1319.png)
Open Sales → Products & Services and choose Add Product. The example list shows an existing course product with sales disabled.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. **Public Name**. Enter the product name.
2. **Internal Name**. Only you can see the internal name. Customers don't see it.
3. **Description**. Add a description for this product. This field is optional.
4. **Type**. Select the product type from the list: Subscription.
5. **Category**. Assign the product to a category. Categories group your products and make them easier to find. To add or edit categories, select "Manage Categories" at the bottom of the list.
6. **Disable Sales**. Turn on the switch to stop sales of this product. For a subscription this also stops automatic renewals: current subscribers keep access until the end of their paid period, but they are not charged again.

![New subscription product with Northstar Leadership Membership selected and Disable Sales enabled](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ba350df044734ddd6ce32e03187e79d1a9e281cffe1e8bc21be44889fdfdec81.png)
Select Subscription and complete the product details. Keep Disable Sales on while preparing the subscription.

Click **Create and Open**. The product page opens on **Account Settings**. Complete the General Settings and the subscription options below.

## General Settings

In the General Settings section, you manage the advanced settings of your product or service.

- **Public Name**. You can change the product name here. Customers see this name in the cart and in emails.
- **Internal Name**. Only you can see the internal name. Customers don't see it.
- **Description**. Add a more detailed product description. Customers also see it in the cart and in emails.
- **Category**. Categories group your products so they're easier to find and manage. Click "Manage Categories" to create categories for your products and offers.

![Subscription General Settings with public name, internal name, description and category](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0e16aa7b0b06b4f25a544b30c7b0b72b75841aa37d1a74d5200f14ebe1ea8245.png)
The public name and description appear to customers; the internal name helps your team identify the subscription.

## Set the subscription price

Subscription Price. Enter the subscription price. This amount is charged to the customer's saved card at the interval you set.

Discount Price Settings. Turn on the "Show discount price" switch to open the "Original Price" field. Enter the product price before the discount. It appears crossed out in the cart and on the product's payment forms.

![Subscription price $49, original price $69 and a twenty percent bonus payment limit](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65dcbd96ae558bddda5f9d14783dfa6efbadf7886a31a7e57cce58fdda7d3f7d.png)
This example charges $49 per period, shows $69 as the original price, and allows up to 20% of the price to be paid with bonuses.

Pay with Bonuses. Turn on the switch to let customers pay part or all of the subscription price with points from their bonus account.
Choose "Percentage" or "Fixed Amount," then enter the value below. If you choose a percentage, enter the share of the subscription price that customers can pay with bonuses. If you choose a fixed amount, enter the maximum amount that can be paid with bonuses.

## Set the billing and trial periods

Subscription Period. The subscription period is how long each payment keeps a subscription active. Common periods are monthly, quarterly, or annual, but you can set any length of time.

- **Subscription Duration**. Set the subscription duration in days or months. You can create a subscription with any billing interval, whether that's every 10 days or every calendar month.

**Limit the number of renewals.** Select this checkbox and enter the maximum number of automatic renewals. Each successful renewal reduces the remaining count. When the count reaches zero, no further automatic renewal is scheduled. The limit does not immediately remove already granted access: access follows its expiration date, including any configured extra access period.

Trial Period. A trial period lets new customers try a service or product for a limited time, at a reduced price or for free. A trial usually lasts a week or a month.
Select the checkbox to open the trial settings. A trial subscription requires payment details, such as a credit card, and automatically becomes a paid subscription when the trial ends. The customer's saved payment method is charged.

- **Trial Price**. Set the price for the trial period.
- **Trial Duration**. Set the trial length in days or months. During the trial, customers have access to all the features and functionality of the product or service.
For example, the first 7 days cost $9, then $49 per month. The customer pays $9 up front, and after 7 days the full subscription begins.

![Monthly subscription period with a twelve-renewal limit and a seven-day trial priced at $9](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3dffadd93e95a9da663974bc18f02028bca175dcc4658c161e815810450ac571.png)
Set the billing interval and any renewal limit. This example has a $9 seven-day trial followed by $49 monthly payments.

## Understand renewal notifications

At the end of each subscription period, the system attempts renewal using the customer's saved payment method. Without a usable saved payment method, the customer must pay manually to renew.

The default renewal automation includes a failed-payment message action. When that action is configured and active, its email can explain the failure and provide a payment link. Review the action and its template before relying on this notification.

Customize the system email in **Email → Email Settings → System Templates**. For the full steps, see [Email Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/mail-settings).

![System Templates tab with Subscription Renewal Payment Failed and Subscription Renewal Payment Succeeded among the email templates.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ea0ad194553f4f5fd7115bb824250c44c5758ac6ad285b03150fa4bdf20f3f8a.png)
Open the matching subscription renewal template in Email Settings → System Templates to edit its content.

The successful-renewal branch can send the **Subscription Renewal Payment Succeeded** system template. Its message confirms the renewal and links to the customer's account in the Membership Portal. Customers manage their subscription in **Access & Payments**, where they can pause renewal or make a payment. Check the configured action and template rather than assuming every automation sends the same message.

If a renewal payment fails, the retry schedule and any extra days of access depend on this subscription’s **Failed Payments** settings. Configure the payment attempts and access grace period there; do not assume that every subscription retries daily for three days.

## Choose the subscription content

Content. You can add multiple courses and libraries to a subscription. Click "Add Content" to open a new panel.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. **Content Type**. Select the content type you need: Course or Library.
2. **Access to all courses / Access to all libraries**. Select this checkbox to give subscribers access to all courses or all libraries.
3. **Course / Library**. Select the course or library you want to give access to through the subscription.
4. **Plan / Steps**. For a course, select a plan from the list. For a library, select which steps to include.

![Subscription content form with Course selected and the Northstar Leadership Essentials plan](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2612b3c445a7d08096db73ccfb928c9a18ceb1e218eb641d4aabb21744f63de1.png)
Select the course and its plan, then click Add Content. Use the Library tab when the subscription should include library content.

## Configure purchase options

Additional Settings. This section has more product options.

- **Don't send the default email after payment**. Select this checkbox to turn off the standard email sent after a purchase. You can set up emails on the "Automation" tab. For detailed instructions on creating automations, read the article "[Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)."
- **Set order expiration**. Select this checkbox to set how long the order stays valid. This can motivate customers to complete their payment. If an order has more than one product, it expires according to the product with the earliest expiration.

![Additional settings with a two-day order expiration and payment method restrictions](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2d98cce3c771829ae6a78c10ff47efd2eff2617dfe957278b29fb68f1ce1bc96.png)
Example settings with a two-day order expiration. Review the installment and allowed-gateway options, then save the changes you need.

Payment Method Settings. Use this section to manage how customers can pay for access to products or courses. You can set parameters and restrictions for processing payments.

- **Disable installment payments**. Select this checkbox to remove the option to pay for this product in installments. Customers will have to pay the full price up front instead of splitting it into payments. This can be useful for high-cost products when you don't want to risk unpaid installments.
- **Allowed Payment Gateways**. You can set specific payment gateways for each product. For more on creating and configuring payment gateways, read the article "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)."

## Configure failed-payment retries

Failed Payments.

- **Payment Attempts**. The first payment attempt is made at the end of the subscription. Choose how the system makes more attempts:

    - **Automatic**. If the first attempt fails, the system automatically makes more attempts to charge the customer's card or account. You set the number of additional attempts and the number of days they're spread over (for example, 3 more attempts within 7 days). This helps reduce canceled subscriptions.
    - **Custom**. In this mode, the system waits between payment attempts, which gives the customer time to fix a card problem or add funds. You set how long each wait lasts after the last failed attempt (for example, a 3-day wait).
- **Keep access for X days after a failed attempt**. This setting adds an access grace period beyond the subscription period's end date while payment is unresolved. For example, a three-day grace period keeps access for three days after that period ends. It does not start a new three-day window after every failed payment attempt. Set this independently from the retry schedule.

![Failed-payment retry schedule, access grace period and related-product renewal controls](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d24c60692646b79a0f4aa55dc677e1bc98a0cd6ca01963ccc1e92cfc13dea08b.png)
This example allows three additional attempts within seven days and a three-day access grace period beyond the subscription period end date. The grace period does not restart after each failed attempt. Related-product renewal controls appear below.

## Configure renewal and related products

Renewal and Purchase.

- **Auto-renewal**. Auto-renewal works only if the "Save card details for future payments where supported" checkbox is selected in your payment gateway settings. To change what happens after a successful or failed renewal, edit the product's automation. See the Automation section below.
- **On purchase, renew related products**. Select subscriptions from the list so that purchases of related products extend each other for the customer and don't overlap. If the customer has active access to any of these products, it's extended by the specified period. Later renewals continue from the most recently purchased subscription.
- **On purchase, renew products in these categories**. Select product categories to apply the related-product renewal rule to their subscriptions.

## Preview the product card and save

Cover. Upload an image for the subscription's cover. Click the icon to open the file manager, then upload an image or select one you've already uploaded.

Product Card Preview. This section shows how the subscription card looks to customers in the cart and in emails.

![Subscription cover picker and product card showing a seven-day $9 trial followed by $49 per month](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ce58ea70151ca8b98624e440a3a84c27d78a280a7be971eeb4f0be865ce204cc.png)
Choose a cover and check Product Card Preview. The example has no custom cover yet; the card shows its name, description, trial and recurring price.

When you finish, click "Save Changes."

Reopen the subscription’s settings and check the price, billing period, trial, content, retry schedule, and payment gateways. Review **Product Card Preview** to confirm the customer-facing name, image, and price.

## Automation

The subscription's automation defines what happens when a customer buys a subscription and when a renewal payment succeeds or fails. You can also send data to third-party services during renewal. For example, you can remove a customer from a Telegram group or add them to one.

For actions after the initial subscription purchase, start with the **Product Purchased** event. It applies whether or not a trial is configured. Use **Renewal Payment Succeeded** for later subscription renewal purchases. Add the actions you need, such as sending an email, granting or removing product access, or adding the customer to a group, then connect the event and action nodes in the order they should run.

Open the product's **Automation** tab. Creating a subscription also creates default successful- and failed-renewal branches. Turn the automation off while reviewing its events and actions; the example below shows **Inactive**.

![Inactive subscription automation with separate failed-renewal and successful-renewal events connected to email-template actions](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2ec4a2c3eb6a66b79e1a2e0e4a7aa9934b8a9d2e8b55740df38e395754bfd437.png)
Review both renewal branches. This example uses email-template actions and remains inactive while its configuration is reviewed.

These events are available for a subscription automation:

1. **Subscription Period Check**. This event fires a set number of days before the subscription period ends or after it starts. For example, use it to warn a customer about the end of the subscription a few days before renewal. In the event settings, choose a type (Before End or After Start) and enter the number of days. For "Has a saved payment method (can renew)", choose Yes to fire the event only for customers who have a saved payment method and can renew automatically. Choose No to fire it only for customers who can't renew because they have no saved payment method. Choose Any to ignore this condition.
2. **Subscription Ended**. This event fires after the subscription's access period expires, including any configured extra days of access. It is separate from a failed renewal-payment attempt. No additional settings are required.
3. **Renewal Payment Failed**. This event fires after a failed renewal-payment attempt. More attempts may still be scheduled, so the event does not mean that all retries are exhausted or that access has ended. A subscription can trigger this event more than once; write failure messages and follow-up actions with that in mind. No additional settings are required.
4. **Renewal Payment Succeeded**. This event fires when the next subscription period is paid. No additional settings are required.
5. **Canceled by Customer**. This event fires when the customer turns off the renewal themselves. No additional settings are required.
6. **Product Order Created**. This event fires when a customer creates an order with the subscription but hasn't paid for it yet.
7. **Product Purchased**. This event fires for the initial subscription purchase, with or without a trial period. Later subscription renewal purchases use **Renewal Payment Succeeded**.

Next, add actions to the automation. To learn more about actions, read the article "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Configurations](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)."

![Actions palette filtered to email with Send Email and Send Message (Chat/Email), while the subscription automation is inactive](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bebe5bdf8ef568bc0cb05efb61c960adf92687a09ede39f0a2a112af6e800a35.png)
Choose Actions and search for the action you need. Send Email and Send Message (Chat/Email) have different configuration options.

1. Open the gear menu on the action and choose **Configure Step**.
2. Give the step a clear name and complete its settings. For **Send Message (Chat/Email)**, choose the channels to use. Chat requires a configured chat channel; turn Chat off for an email-only action.
3. For an email template, enable **Email** and **Use Template**, then choose the **Email Template**. The example uses the successful-renewal system template.
4. Review the remaining email options, including **Always send email** if email must be sent regardless of whether chat was sent. Click **Save** to save the step configuration.

The separate **Send Email** action has its own email settings. Configure the action you selected; do not treat these two actions as interchangeable.

![Complete renewal confirmation Step Settings with email template, Always send email, Email Check and Save controls](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2b72143325a1c4d5ec9b47a9e1b86646308ba5f7f1463e95e92b0b8b868f45c9.png)
The complete Send Message (Chat/Email) settings show Chat off, Email enabled, the successful-renewal system template, Always send email, and the Save button.

Next, connect the events and actions. You can create one or more links between them.
To remove a link between steps, double-click it.

Complete every action marked **Configuration required**. Check the event branches, recipients, templates and connections before turning the automation on. The example above remains inactive; a connection between steps alone does not show that an action is ready to run.

---

# Orders

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/purchase-orders

> See customer orders, find them with search and filters, update statuses, process refunds, and export order data.

Orders are customer requests to buy courses, lessons, or other products and services you offer on AXL.

To view your customers' orders, go to Sales → Orders. The page lists the orders from your website. When a site visitor adds an item to the cart or opens the payment page, AXL adds the order to this list. You can work with the list: change an order's status, and update contact and payment information.

![Global Orders list filtered by the two Northstar products, with Create Order, two unpaid rows for Olivia Bennett, Manage Filters, Add Filter and the column-settings button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0bd8ec611deca3aed48388cbf5dde3019171a8dd58a0f250bf817812e7962907.png)

Click a section below to jump to it:

Creating Orders

Order List

Search and Filter Orders

Order Management

Restoring Deleted Orders

Bulk Actions

How to Record a Refund

## Creating Orders

AXL creates orders automatically when a visitor adds a product to the cart and/or pays for it. You can also create orders manually. To do that, click "Create Order". For step-by-step instructions, see "[Create an Order](https://docs.axl.tech/create-order)".

After you create an order, it appears in the list.

## Order List

The order list shows this information for each order:

1. Number. The serial number of the order. This number also appears in the Payments section.
2. Columns. Columns with information about the order. You can customize which columns appear and in what order.
3. Actions. These buttons are available:
The "Edit" button. Click to make changes to the order.
The "Delete" button. Click to delete the order.
The "Order History" button. Click to view the order history.

To change which columns appear and in what order, click "Manage Columns".

The Manage Columns window opens.

![Manage Columns upper available fields, selected column order and Apply/Cancel footer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9283d63c79e646632ee205c520640116919d9250f71dca852611f7b0f41bf594.png)![Manage Columns lower fields including Status, UTM Parameters, Affiliate and Affiliate Commission.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6b8042f07c194516ccb77a1fd6256d2f0d9d022ad071f4802b43cc69c2fcdfc5.png)

The left side lists all available columns.

- ID. A unique ID assigned to the order.
- Date Created. The exact date and time the customer created the order on the page.
- Contact. The CRM contact linked to the order. Click the contact's name to open their profile in Contacts.
- Items. The products, and their quantities, that the customer added to the cart or paid for.
- Payment Date. The exact date and time the order was paid.
- Tags. The tags attached to the order.
- Owner. The team member responsible for the order.
- Source. The address of the page the order came from, or the name of the admin who created it manually.
- Order Total. The cost of the items the customer has to pay.
- Paid. The payment status: Unpaid, Fully Paid, or Partially Paid. For a partial payment, the amount paid is shown.
- Fee. The fee, which AXL fills in automatically when the order is paid.
- Income. The paid amount minus processing fees, affiliate commission, bonuses used for payment and other recorded deductions. Income is shown as zero if that calculation is negative.
- Expires. The date the order's payment window closes. After this date, the customer can no longer pay for the order.
- Status. The stage the order is currently in. You can edit it from the order page.
- UTM Parameters. The UTM parameters attached to the order.
- Affiliate. The contact of the affiliate from the affiliate program.
- Affiliate Commission. The commission amount the affiliate earned.

Check the boxes next to the columns you want to show in the order list. Or click "Reset to Default" to return to the original view.

**The right side lists the columns you selected**. To change their order, drag a column up or down. When you are done, click **Apply**.

## Search and Filter Orders

At the top of the Orders page, you will find a search bar and filters.

Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- Search. Search orders by keyword.
- Date Created. Show orders created within a date range. Select the dates.
- Payment Date. Show orders paid within a date range. This includes any payment made in that period, even a partial payment.
- Full Payment Date. Show only orders that were fully paid within a date range.
- Has Payments. Show orders with or without payments. Turn the switch on or off to choose.
- Fully Paid. Show orders that are fully paid or not fully paid. Turn the switch on or off to choose.
- Linked Contact. Show orders linked to a CRM contact. Select one or more contacts from your CRM contact list.
- Owners. Show orders assigned to certain team members. Select one or more team members from the list.
- Products. Show orders that include a specific product. Select one or more products from the list.
- Statuses. Show orders that are currently in a certain status. Select a status from the list.
- Amount. Show orders whose total falls within the amount range you set.
- Amount Paid. Show orders that have been paid a certain amount. Set the amount range.
- Renewal. Show subscriptions that were renewed or not renewed. Turn the switch on or off to choose.
- Courses. Show orders that include certain courses. Select one or more courses from the list.
- UTM Parameters. Enter a UTM parameter value to show only orders from contacts who reached your website through that parameter.
- Tags. Show orders that have certain tags attached.
- Promo Code. Show orders that used the selected promo code.
- Affiliate. Show orders linked to the selected affiliate. You can choose one or more affiliates.
- Affiliate Program. Show orders created through the affiliate program.
- Show Deleted. Show previously deleted orders.
- Custom Fields. Show orders that have custom fields. You can select one or more custom fields.
- Subscription Type. Show orders by subscription stage: a trial period, a renewal after the trial, a full payment, or a paid renewal (a renewal that does not follow a trial).
- Advanced Filter. Use the advanced filter to combine conditions in different ways. The Filter Conditions window opens, where you define the conditions for the order list. To learn more about filter conditions, see "[Filters and Search Criteria](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

![Orders Add Filter menu: Advanced Filter, Affiliate, Affiliate Program, Amount, Amount Paid, Card Number, Courses, Created By, Custom Fields, Date Created and more.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a2fcda289a4a34170af8a582a13e344e688f2430fe1d04cff29e782cecd2e67.png)

"Manage Filters" lets you customize and streamline how orders appear in the list. It is especially useful for teams that handle a large number of orders and need an easy way to track their status and details, so you can quickly find the orders you need.

![Unsaved Products filter on Orders with the Manage Filters menu open: Save, Clear, Saved Filters, Copy Link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/496a8d742d3f4b7ab69bbb7a47cb37d325576e380e591dc7cef0e83a1f92564c.png)

By combining filter conditions, you can build a custom "set" filter and save it for later. This is especially useful if you often search for the same data, because you do not have to set up the filters every time.
Select the conditions you want, click "Manage Filters", and then click "Save".

![Unsaved Products filter on Orders with Save marked in the Manage Filters menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/496a8d742d3f4b7ab69bbb7a47cb37d325576e380e591dc7cef0e83a1f92564c.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

- Name. Enter a name for the filter.
- Description. Add a short description to make the filter easier to find.
- Access. A filter can be public or private.
Public. A public filter is available to all users.
Private. A private filter has limited access. Only users you have given access to can see it.

Then click "Save".

![Save Filter dialog: name Leadership orders, a description, and Public or Private access.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f4d4b00c1152ce6356f34e272d35a48ca7a09fa7c939cf669e3d91855e2f3553.png)

Once you have saved the filter, you can copy its unique link and send it to your team members. They get the same filter settings and see the same set of orders, which makes collaboration and discussion much easier.
With saved filters, your team finds the data it needs faster.

![Saved Leadership orders filter with the Manage Filters menu: Edit, Make a Copy, Clear, Reset, Saved Filters, Copy Link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ed7dc323fbdb8411b5e9b96eb11aab5cc94949bf58bd995bc5493fc366c954e0.png)

Your saved filters appear in the list of saved filters. Click "Manage Filters", then "Saved Filters".

![Saved Leadership orders filter with Saved Filters in the Manage Filters menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ed7dc323fbdb8411b5e9b96eb11aab5cc94949bf58bd995bc5493fc366c954e0.png)

The window that opens shows:

1. The name of the filter, its access type, the date and time it was created, and who created it.
2. Apply. Click to open the order list with this filter's conditions.
3. Edit. Click to change the saved filter.
4. Copy Link. Click to copy the link to this filter so you can share it.
5. Copy. Click to create a copy of the filter.
6. Remove. Click to remove the filter.
7. Search. Search for a filter in the list by keyword.

![Saved Filters panel with the private Leadership orders filter and its apply, edit, copy link, duplicate and delete icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7805feddf7099c8c418e31f7c230178f719221630bbe478102b7680feb44ce0e.png)

The "set" filter is also saved in the page address. You can copy the address and send it to your team members. When a team member opens the link, their Orders page opens with your filter applied.

## Order Management

Click "Edit" to see the full details of the order. Here you can make changes to it.

![Purchase order #1420 for Olivia Bennett: payment link, status, totals, Order Info, Items, Order Payments, Order History and Affiliate Commissions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/932ec92df2fbaabf552f9b3b5d071f092a9c681fa92b7d2d1648440cc74969de.png)

At the top of the page, you will see:

1. Order number.
2. The "Complete" or "Undo Completion" button. **Complete** gives the customer access to the products in the order and starts the **Product Purchased** automations, even if the order is not paid. **Undo Completion** takes back the access this order gave. The status field only labels the order; access depends on completion.
3. Status. The current status of the order.
4. Source. The page where the order was created, or the name of the admin who created it manually.
5. Date Created. The exact date and time the order was created.
6. Payment Link. The link customers use to pay for the order. Copy it and send it to your customer if needed.
7. Add Partial Payment. Click to create a link for a partial payment. In the window that opens, enter the payment amount.
8. Income. The paid amount minus processing fees, affiliate commission, bonuses used for payment and other recorded deductions. Income is shown as zero if that calculation is negative.
9. Total. The order total.
10. Amount Paid. The amount already paid, if the order is partially paid.
11. Amount Due. The final amount the customer still has to pay.
12. Delivered. Shows Yes or No, depending on whether the order has been delivered.

![Existing unpaid order 1420 header with Created status, Payment Link, Add Partial Payment, total $149, amount due $149 and Delivered No.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/95c1c4afe16a802c215d6a76ba50a815bd177fc612b4dae7dd8610e31d4523e9.png)
This unpaid order shows the payment-link controls and outstanding amount. Other summary fields depend on the order state.

Order Info. Here you can change the order details.

1. Status. Change the order status here.
2. Linked Contact. The customer who placed the order.
3. Tags. Change the order's tags here.
4. Owner. The team member responsible for the order. You can change the owner here.
5. Affiliate. The affiliate whose invitation link was used to create the order.
6. Deal. The number of the deal the order was created from, and the deal's stage.
7. Expiration Date. After this date, the customer can no longer pay for the order.
8. Manage Custom Fields. Click to create custom fields for the order.
9. Contact Information. Here you can change the contact's personal details. Click "Edit".

![Order Info panel: status, tags, linked contact, owner, affiliate, deal, expiration date and contact information.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a1aa557cfe75045a9b52f97be34aebe5c20fee085238af7d4f28b66d5bb092e8.png)

To change the order status, select the one you want from the list:

- **Created**: The order was placed but has not been processed yet.
- **Entering Details**: The customer needs to fill in additional details (for example, access information or personal information).
- **Payment in Progress**: The payment is being processed and AXL is waiting for confirmation.
- **Partially Paid**: The customer paid, but not the full amount (for example, with installments or a partial prepayment).
- **Paid**: The full payment went through, and the order is ready for shipment or access.
- **Preparing Shipment**: The order is being prepared for shipment or activation (for example, setting up course access).
- **Shipped**: The order was sent to the customer, or access to the course was activated.
- **Fulfilled**: The order is complete (for example, everything was delivered and the course is available).
- **Canceled**: The order was canceled, either by the customer or for another reason.
- **Refunded**: The customer started the refund process (for example, after canceling a course or being dissatisfied).

![Order Status list: Created, Entering Details, Payment in Progress, Partially Paid, Paid, Preparing Shipment, Shipped, Fulfilled, Canceled, Refunded.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8427e9119bec0c3cb6280d503438c6a6d4f2e9229dfd4685fd98eef26817e9f8.png)

Items. The products in the order. You see each product's name, quantity, and price, plus any discount.

![Order Items with promo code, product picker and the Leadership Certificate line: quantity, price, discount and total $149.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d469653a28d733798f57deeeb22077ea353032e4e0d3485e47e829137106edd9.png)

Affiliate Commissions. This section tracks the commissions paid to affiliates for bringing in customers or selling educational products. To learn more about the affiliate program, see "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)".

![Affiliate Commissions table on the order, empty.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/32fb78114cb39933d3b3a5cb0fa6fd2462937a2a8a72f0bebf06958174c26a1b.png)

Order Payments. Payment information appears here. You can also add a payment manually. Click "Create" to open the New Payment window. Select a payment gateway from the list, then enter the status, amount, and payment date. Click "Create". The payment information appears, and you can change or delete it.

A manual payment entry records the payment details in AXL. Check the actual payment or refund in your bank or payment-provider account separately, and record it only once. When a manual payment brings the order to fully paid, the order is completed automatically, with the same effect as **Complete**.

In **New Payment**, the received-payment status is **Succeeded**; **Refund** records a refund. The form also includes **Fee**. Record only payments or refunds that actually occurred, then check the entry in **Order Payments**.

![Order Payments section of order #1421: a manual Stripe payment, Succeeded, $49.00 with a $1.72 fee and $47.28 income, and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0cb8eb0e04255d29b269b1ec0acb831d82f92a69b0c1cff1e50efb5684a8ef44.png)

Order History. The detailed history of this order.

![Order History of paid order #1420: license added, order completed, a successful $149 Stripe payment, the product added and the order created.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/546fcd59b88dea0848edaa2d6aef89d581296c29c60863eaa61d4b9322316ed2.png)
Payment and completion events from an existing paid order. Scroll to review earlier history.

## Restoring Deleted Orders

To see previously deleted orders, add the "Show Deleted" filter. Deleted orders then appear in the list, marked "Deleted". To restore one, click the "Restore Order" button in the Actions column.

![Orders list with the Show Deleted filter on: order #1422 marked Deleted and its Restore Order button with tooltip.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/59a58a942199a368474c597bc36bc007bb13c3dbef9e9d7770e423924999df37.png)

You can also restore an order from its order page. Click the order number or "Edit" to open the page, click "Restore Order" at the top, and confirm.

![Deleted purchase order #1422 with the Deleted tag and the Restore Order button at the top of the order page.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0a07b8ca595538aebd5061876b64b65951eb63c33101d1013c9a0ef5c22a0a10.png)

## Bulk Actions

Use filters and search to select orders, then apply bulk actions to them. A bulk action applies the same action to several selected orders at once. Instead of processing each order individually, you can select a group of orders that meet certain criteria and act on all of them in one step.

Select the orders you need and click "Bulk Actions".

![Two selected orders with the Bulk Actions menu: Export Orders, Change Status, Cancel Orders, Delete Orders.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7231a756dcf8c32a06109fe643ab454613a2dbe0f3ad8a787f48bb11a1218f4d.png)

## Export Orders

"Export Orders" exports all selected orders in XLSX or CSV format. It saves a list of your account's orders as a file.

![Bulk Actions menu on selected orders with Export Orders at the top.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7231a756dcf8c32a06109fe643ab454613a2dbe0f3ad8a787f48bb11a1218f4d.png)

In the window that opens, select the file format and the fields to export. Click "Export Orders" to download a single file to your device (computer, laptop, or tablet).

![Export Orders dialog with XLSX or CSV format and order, contact, shipping, and UTM fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96ff8fa6a01a8b5fca75e97560588341473da92751d40d84822360067d5b5df2.png)

AXL saves your export sessions and shows them in the "Export History" panel on the left side of the Orders page, along with the number of sessions. Click the "Details" button to work with saved sessions.

![Export orders panel with the latest order export session, its record count, and the Action button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c81cf1a552f30d3d3768dde9eda36e770ca1fdcd757b0b60b1fd302df87c3300.png)

The window that opens lists all your previous order exports. To download a file again, click "Actions" and select "Download".

![Export session Action menu with Download, Download and Close, and Close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/31d5342944f59ab5f998129b46f6e702617b63526baab37ca24bdc329fc7ad19.png)

## Change Status

"Change Status" lets an admin quickly change the status of several orders at once. It is especially useful when you have a lot of orders.
A bulk change lets you update the status of many orders quickly, depending on the current situation. For example, you can change orders from "Payment in Progress" to "Paid", or from "Shipped" to "Fulfilled".

![Bulk Change Status window with the available order statuses listed.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a792064f9018cdd89779b4bab774c5b7e97a1aadaf150c8925a2e2abfa038c18.png)

## Delete Orders

"Delete Orders" deletes several selected orders at once.

It helps you keep your order data clean and current. For example, you can delete test orders created for verification, or duplicate orders caused by a system error or a customer checking out more than once.

![Bulk Actions menu on selected orders with Delete Orders at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7231a756dcf8c32a06109fe643ab454613a2dbe0f3ad8a787f48bb11a1218f4d.png)

## How to Record a Refund

The steps below record a refund in AXL after you arrange the actual return of money through your payment provider or bank. Creating a manual Refund entry does not send money to the customer.
To record the refund, find the order concerned. Click the order number or "Edit" to open the order details. At the top of the order page, click "Undo Completion".

![Fulfilled purchase order #1420 with the Undo Completion button next to the order title.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8a6942c116491128b6de701f33e8c3dc7a4ea4a1279c5b9ac92e2c157ad897f7.png)

Next, in the "Order Payments" section, click "Create".

![Order Payments with a Succeeded payment and a Refund entry for $49.00, Create button marked.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/398491b140f38f6bf1a1818865621d5e7d0422e6b2e990f749e58540cf5aca99.png)

In the New Payment window, select the payment gateway used for the original payment. Set the status to "Refund". Then enter the refund amount, fee, and payment date, and click "Create".

![New Payment window for a refund: Payment Gateway Stripe, Status Refund, Amount 49.00, Fee 0.00 and Payment Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6c899a69c74515c73a95e1173bfb75b165c66f23e8f497ecf53a9fa2b623c0f7.png)

AXL includes this refund amount in your sales analytics. To learn more, see "[Sales Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/sales-analytics)".

---

# Create an Order

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/create-order

> Create an order by hand and send your customer a payment link.

AXL creates orders automatically when a website visitor adds a product to the cart and/or pays for it. You can also create an order manually. This is useful when you need to send a customer a payment link, or take a payment without building a website or page.

For example, say you have added courses to your account but have not built a website to sell them yet. You can create an order for a course and send the payment link to your customer.

## How to Create an Order

Go to Sales → Orders. Click "Create Order".

![Orders list filtered by the two Northstar products, with Create Order, two unpaid orders for Olivia Bennett, Manage Filters and Add Filter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0bd8ec611deca3aed48388cbf5dde3019171a8dd58a0f250bf817812e7962907.png)
Use Create Order to add an order. To open an existing order, scroll its row to the right and click the pencil icon.

The New Order window opens. Fill in the fields:

1. **Status**. Select an order status from the list.
2. **Tags**. Select tags for the order from the list.
3. **Linked Contact**. Select the customer from the list. A linked contact is required when creating an order. If needed, use the selector's Create Contact option to add the customer first.
4. **Affiliate**. Select the affiliate who earns a commission on this order through the affiliate program.
5. **Owner**. Select the admin who is responsible for the order.
6. **Deal**. Select the deal linked to the order. The list shows each deal's number and stage.
7. **Expiration Date**. After this date, the customer can no longer pay for the order.
8. **Manage Custom Fields**. Click to create custom fields for the order.
9. **Contact Information**. Review the customer's first name, last name, email address and phone number. You can also enter country, state/province/region, city, ZIP code, address and a comment.
10. **Items**. Select one or more products to add to the order. Review each item's quantity, price, discount and total. You can also apply a promo code.

![Upper New Order form with Olivia Bennett selected, Created status, tags, Alex Morgan as owner, affiliate, deal, expiration date and the contact information prefilled from the contact.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/696a7a98f78aae8a225100860b4f1a6cfe240aaac2c76c1f9a69426ec84a2980.png)
Start with the order settings and linked contact. This is an unsaved example.
![Lower New Order form with Items, Promo Code, the Leadership Certificate item priced at $149, quantity one, zero discount, total $149, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d8bce5e7b99ac2ee4c2096c82dda457686d63554012cf9efc54d864848887fed.png)
Scroll down to review the contact information, item quantities, prices, discounts and total before creating the order.

## Save the order and open its payment link

Click "Create". The new order appears in the order list. Click its "Edit" button.

The order page opens. Copy the payment link and send it to your customer.

Before sharing the link, check the customer, products, order total, and expiration date on the order. Use the full-order payment link for the outstanding order amount, or create a separate partial-payment link below for a specific amount.

![Order 1424 header with Payment Link, copy and email controls, Add Partial Payment, Created status, total $149 and amount due $149.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3e7c1c7499b49ddaa8fc503fb625adf40af799dbc5089e4867693d4daf7553ef.png)

## Create a partial-payment link

You can also create a link for a partial payment. Click **Add Partial Payment**, enter the **Payment Amount**, then click **Add Partial Payment** inside the popover. This updates the displayed payment link for that amount; it does not record a payment. Copy the updated link and send it to your customer.

**Important:** an order created by hand is not linked to any website page, so page automations do not react to it. The product's automation does: **Product Order Created** fires right away, with **Triggers if an admin created the order** set to **Yes** or **Any**. When the customer pays in full, they get access to the products automatically.

![Add Partial Payment popover with Payment Amount 50 and the Add Partial Payment confirmation button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d77ca99ac4d0f357f65402471e82e9c6f9aad3586ba6e32562b5dbbf15135373.png)

---

# Payments

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/payments

> View and filter payments, add or edit them manually, and export payment data.

The Payments page lists payment records and payment attempts linked to orders.

It shows successful payments as well as attempts that did not go through. A payment that failed shows the status "Failed".

To see the payment list, go to Sales → Payments.

![Sales → Payments selected in the sidebar, with Total Payments, Paid and Income above the payments table.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3817f551eba392f71a7d0c767a187de0307c8bf527016d82d6a598b929baf976.png)

Click a section below to jump to it:

Payment List

Search and Filter

Creating a Payment Manually

Editing a Payment

Exporting Payments

## Payment List

The Payments page shows this information:

1. **Order**. Click it to open the order in a window with the same information as on the Orders page. You can manage the order and make changes there. To learn more, see "[Orders](https://docs.axl.tech/purchase-orders)".
2. **Date Created**. The date the payment record was created, and the unique ID assigned to that payment.
3. **Payment Date**. The exact date and time of the payment.
4. **Status**. The payment status, such as "Succeeded", "Refund", "Failed", or "Pending".
5. **Payment Gateway**. The payment gateway used to make the payment.
6. **Amount**. The amount the customer paid.
7. **Fee**. The fee, which AXL fills in automatically when the payment goes through.
8. **Income**. The amount paid minus the fee.
9. **Actions**. For manually added payments, users with permission to manage payments can use **Edit** to correct the record or **Delete** to remove it after confirmation. These actions are not available for automatically recorded provider payments. Deleting a manual record recalculates the order; it does not return money through the payment provider.

![Payments table header and a payment row for order #1416: date created, payment ID, payment date, Succeeded and Test status, Revolut gateway, amount, fee and income.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f11b22a465898645978434f41d1ae613bf9b4a35149fb1a6ed463e0da3c0cbae.png)

## Choose payment columns

You can customize which columns appear and in what order. To do that, click "Manage Columns".

![Payments page with the Manage columns eye button at the top right of the table.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3817f551eba392f71a7d0c767a187de0307c8bf527016d82d6a598b929baf976.png)

The Manage Columns window opens.

The left side lists all available columns. Check the boxes next to the columns you want to show in the payment list. Or click "Reset to Default" to return to the original view.

The right side lists the columns you selected. To change their order, drag a column up or down. When you are done, click **Apply** to save the selected columns and their order.

![Manage Columns dialog for Payments: column checkboxes, drag-to-reorder list, Reset to Default, Select All, Apply and Cancel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5b893de5349c4353f98e534bc789588a978594b187386b6443a99f2d628fef3d.png)

## Search and Filter

At the top of the page, you will find a search bar and filters. Use them to find the payment you need quickly.
Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Search**. Search payments by keyword.
- **Date**. Show payments within a date and time range.
- **Statuses**. Show payments that are currently in a certain status. Select a status from the list.
- **Payment Gateways**. Show payments made through a certain payment gateway, such as Stripe, Square, or a cash or non-cash payment. Select a gateway from the list.
- **Amount**. Show payments for a certain amount. Set the amount range.
- **Hide Test Payments**. Hide all test payments.
- **Advanced Filter**. Use the advanced filter to combine conditions in different ways. The Filter Conditions window opens, where you define the conditions for the payment list. To learn more about filter conditions, see "[Filters and Search Criteria](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".
- **Affiliate Program**. Show payments made through the affiliate program.
- **Autopay**. Show payments that were made by autopay.
- **Orders**. Filter payments by the conditions of their orders. To learn more about the order filter conditions, see "[Orders](https://docs.axl.tech/purchase-orders)".

![Payments Add Filter menu: Advanced Filter, Affiliate Program, Amount, Autopay, Card Number, Date, Hide Test Payments, Orders, Paid with Bonuses, Payment Gateways, Search.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82458ac3cad8a5f98be1dfadc26914eea8dcbcdfd5b49640c626d7f370943858.png)

## Save and reuse a filter

"Manage Filters" lets you customize and streamline the payment list. It is especially useful for teams that handle a large number of orders and need an easy way to track payment status.

By combining filter conditions, you can build a custom "set" filter and save it for later. This is especially useful if you often search for the same data, because you do not have to set up the filters every time.
Select the conditions you want, click "Manage Filters", and then click "Save".

![Unsaved payment filter on Payment Gateways with the Manage Filters menu open: Save, Clear, Saved Filters, Copy Link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f9778e5753b64de1de345dc4b29333c3eed4a6dd7e0c0398b3edbee06e4e8210.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

- **Name**. Enter a name for the filter.
- **Description**. Add a short description to make the filter easier to find.
- **Access**. A filter can be public or private.
Public. A public filter is available to all users.
Private. A private filter has limited access. Only users you have given access to can see it.

Then click "Save".

![Save Filter dialog: name Stripe payments, a description, and Public or Private access.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4aff4c2cac27d2714de75ce1e25f770bac1151838404decb7518cc39d54aa12.png)

After saving a filter, copy its link to share the selected conditions with a team member. You can also find it through **Manage Filters → Saved Filters**. Use **Apply** to run it, or **Copy Link** to share it.

![Saved Stripe payments filter with the Manage Filters menu open, including Copy Link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9ef48b8e87f91509cbc6d6a2a575b74d1a5ab51c5e6eb30420214eb14f7c0c3a.png)

## Open a saved filter

Your saved filters appear in the list of saved filters. Click "Manage Filters", then "Saved Filters".

![Saved Stripe payments filter with the Manage Filters menu open, including Saved Filters.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9ef48b8e87f91509cbc6d6a2a575b74d1a5ab51c5e6eb30420214eb14f7c0c3a.png)

The window that opens shows:

1. The **name** of the filter, its access type, the date and time it was created, and who created it.
2. **Apply**. Click to open the payment list with this filter's conditions.
3. **Edit**. Click to change the saved filter.
4. **Copy Link**. Click to copy the link to this filter so you can share it.
5. **Copy**. Click to create a copy of the filter.
6. **Remove**. Click to remove the filter.
7. **Search**. Search for a filter in the list by keyword.

![Saved Filters panel with the private Stripe payments filter and its apply, edit, copy link, duplicate and delete icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9c27a490c1a43792787bc1ddb09b5d440acadd121ad558e25112da583a8a12c9.png)

## Creating a Payment Manually

A payment is created when a customer clicks "Pay" in the order payment form.
You can also create a payment manually. To do that, go to Sales → Orders and click "Edit" to open the order details.

![Sales → Orders with Create Order, filters and Olivia Bennett's orders #1421 and #1420; the order number opens the order.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c868150dbabe0a00a49215fb949d287717cd7deaaa7d22b30c0ad377c04ab859.png)

The full order details open. In the "Order Payments" section, click "Create".

Review the payments already listed for this order before adding a manual entry, so the same payment is not recorded twice. A manual entry records money received or refunded outside this form; it does not charge a card or initiate a provider refund. Record the actual transaction, then check the order total. A new successful manual payment can trigger the contact's payment notification and order-paid automations.

![Purchase order #1420 for Olivia Bennett with Order Info, Items and the Create button in Order Payments.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e281df00fffaaa7c79e89c78d7e4c61b793cb05e0ae87e971b449b7c760feaaa.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. **Payment Gateway**. Select a payment gateway from the list. To learn more about payment gateway settings, see "[Payment Gateways](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)".
2. **Status**. Select **Succeeded** to record a received payment, or **Refund** to record money already returned. Choosing Refund here updates the AXL payment record and order totals; it does not send a refund request to the provider.
3. **Amount**. Enter the payment amount.
4. **Fee**. You can set a fee when you create a payment manually.
5. **Payment Date**. Select the exact date and time of the payment.

Click "Create". The new payment then appears in the order details, in the "Order Payments" section, and in the payment list.

![New Payment panel: PayPal gateway, Succeeded status, amount 149.00, fee 5.55, payment date, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/def5a31e284984df666991be5f7fe79a354be77dbe5e3393a6ce863540a273fd.png)

If an admin added the payment manually, the payment list marks it with the comment "Manual".

**Important:** a manual payment counts like an online one. When it brings the order to fully paid, the order is completed: the customer gets access to the products in it, and the **Product Purchased** and general **Order Paid** automations start. Record a payment only after the money has actually arrived.

![Payments list with two manual Stripe payments for order #1421 and the Manual tag tooltip: An admin added this payment manually, Alex Morgan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c53ac3660f049dff462d96df542e399f539cefd54baf2b543b85227ebb86122c.png)

## Editing a Payment

To correct a manually added payment, click its **Edit** button. The button requires permission to manage payments and is unavailable for automatically recorded provider transactions. Check the original receipt or refund before changing the amount, status or date.

![Payments rows for order #1421, a Refund and a Succeeded manual Stripe payment, with the Edit button marked.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/959c81eea2b109be0f315e299944f87a653c93b7906d0a132c3b1bec458466b0.png)

In the window that opens, make the changes you need:

1. **Payment Gateway**. The payment gateway the customer used to pay.
2. **Status**. The payment status: Succeeded or Refund.
3. **Amount**. The amount the customer paid.
4. **Fee**. The fee for this payment.
5. **Payment Date**. The exact date and time of the payment.

![Edit Payment window: Payment Gateway Stripe, Status Succeeded, Amount 49.00, Fee 1.72 and Payment Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e54f49b8a64e97cfb8d222a5a91f50fa42a0e4821c38e52ca1aa1ba5d589a58c.png)

When you have finished correcting the manual payment, click **Save**. Reopen the payment and check its gateway, status, amount, fee and date, then review the order's recalculated paid amount. Changing a record here does not perform a new external money transfer.

## Exporting Payments

Use filters and search to select payments, then apply bulk actions to them. Check the boxes next to the payments you need and click "Bulk Actions".

![Payments table with one selected row and the Bulk Actions menu open on Export Payments.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/36772defd3731e710bf11f6005bd4a3fd3dc1628f12ef184933a22e395c33a0f.png)

"Export Payments" exports all selected payments in XLSX or CSV format. It saves a list of your account's payments as a file. In the window that opens, select the file format and the fields to export. Click "Export Payments" to download a single file to your device (computer, laptop, or tablet).

![Export Payments dialog: XLSX or CSV, payment, order and gateway fields to include, 29 payments to export, Export Payments button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/386723fa8dbba0a173357360823305900080e2895b03edbeadfec6825c4cbd3e.png)

AXL saves your export sessions and shows them in the "Export History" panel on the Payments page, along with the number of sessions. Click the "Learn More" button to work with saved sessions.

![Export payments panel with the latest export session, its record count, and the Action button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3ac05b92782fb74fa1ee4a70b37111dde2e85e66f2ee4fac7b5eb64e86abb521.png)

The window that opens lists all your previous payment exports. To download a file again, click "Actions" and select "Download".

![Export session Action menu with Download, Download and Close, and Close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/15b28654d31d7d2a808b3591c108f332a0bcf339a16717b869cc225149941b3c.png)

---

# Promo Codes

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/promo-codes

> Create promo codes that give customers a fixed or percentage discount, and manage them in one list.

A promo code is a unique combination of letters and numbers that gives customers a special price on a product or group of products when they enter it. Promo codes are a sales promotion tool.

For example, you might make a special offer to new users. When a customer leaves their email and joins your mailing list, they can get a personal discount code by email. These offers are usually valid for a limited time, after which the discount expires.

A promo code lowers the order total by a fixed amount or by a percentage.

Click a section below to jump to it:

How to Create a Promo Code

Promo Code List

## How to Create a Promo Code

To create a promo code, go to Sales → Promo Codes and click "Create Promo Code".

![Promo Codes page searched for Leadership, with Create Promo Code and the saved LEADERSHIP20 row showing code copy, All Products scope, Active status, start and end dates, 20 available uses, affiliate and edit/delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/59e6aff5b973b861e8f2bcd0faf0e19e42ccf85b61bdd4a80d22d7563bae6526.png)
An existing saved promo code. The same list provides the management controls described below.

In the New Promo Code window, fill in the fields:

1. **Name**. A unique name that helps you identify the promo code in AXL. For example, "FALL-ENROLLMENT" or "ALUMNI25."
2. **Code**. Enter the code: a unique combination of letters and numbers that customers type in to activate the discount. For example, "LEARN50" or "WELCOME10."
3. **Ignore Case**. When customers enter the promo code, AXL ignores whether the letters are uppercase (capital) or lowercase (small). For example, if the promo code is FALL2026, customers can enter fall2026, Fall2026, or FALL2026, and AXL accepts all of them.
4. **Discount Type**. Choose the type of discount:

    - **Fixed**. A discount of a specific amount (for example, $5).
    - **Percentage**. A discount as a percentage of the total product cost (for example, 10%).
5. **Discount**. Set the discount amount in your account currency or as a percentage, depending on the discount type you selected.
6. **No End Date**. Check this box if the promo code should never expire. You then set only a start date, and the code has no expiration date.
7. **Period**. Set the start and end dates for the promotion. The promo code is valid only within that period (for example, November 1 to November 30, 2026).
8. **Limit Uses**. Turn on the switch to limit how many times the promo code can be used. Once the limit is reached, the promo code is no longer available.
9. **Available Uses**. Enter how many times the promo code can be used. The number goes down only after a successful payment. Each payment that uses the promo code reduces the available uses by one.
10. **Products**. Select one or more products from the list. This limits the promo code to specific products or services. For example, the promo code might apply only to the "Programming for Beginners" course.
11. **Disable for subscription renewals**. Check this box so the promo code cannot be used for subscription renewals.
12. **Affiliate**. When a buyer applies a valid promo code, its selected affiliate takes priority over the program's usual order-attribution rule. This does not bypass commission eligibility: AXL calculates commission for a fully paid, completed order using an active offer that matches the affiliate or affiliate group, the product or product category, and the purchase type. The affiliate program must also be active. The affiliate is also linked to the contact if the contact does not have one yet. Selecting an affiliate is useful for affiliate programs and for tracking referrals.

![New Promo Code draft with name and code, 20 percent discount, validity period, a limit of 20 uses, product scope, subscription-renewal option and affiliate selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fb65afc180297cb7c75952f575dd87114fdbbde4c0a6445031f32938d680448f.png)
Unsaved example with a percentage discount and limited uses. Save creates the code; Cancel discards the draft.

Click **Save** to create the promo code. Find it in the list and check its code, dates, discount, product scope, and available uses before sharing it.

### Automatic promo codes

The form also supports automatic application. When enabled, choose whether eligibility is based on selected contacts or a contact filter. In contact mode, select the eligible contacts. In filter mode, open the filter editor and configure the conditions. Save the promo code after setting its discount and validity period.

![Auto-Apply enabled with Users mode selected, Olivia Bennett chosen in Contacts and the selected-user priority note.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/93da38bd0cb472831473c53c61154cd7139b0d67004406542faa661106962d0b.png)
Unsaved Auto-Apply example: choose Users, then select eligible contacts.

![Auto-Apply enabled with Filter mode selected and Contact Filter edit control above No filters selected yet.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4ce1c0fa7a3b024ae885eb4cb8370f35908ae909ccdcfcf4b8aed09af5ab7eec.png)
Unsaved Auto-Apply example: choose Filter and open the Contact Filter editor to define eligibility.

## Promo Code List

The promo code you created now appears in the list. Here you can see this information about each promo code:

1. **Name.** The name of the promo code, which makes it easy to find. You can sort this column alphabetically in ascending or descending order.
2. **Code.** Click the "Copy" button next to the code to copy it. You can sort this column alphabetically in ascending or descending order.
3. **Status.** A promo code can be active (still valid) or inactive (expired).
4. **Start Date.** The date the promo code becomes valid. You can sort this column in ascending or descending order.
5. **End Date.** The date the promo code expires. You can sort this column in ascending or descending order.
6. **Available Uses**. Shows whether the promo code has a usage limit.
7. **Affiliate**. The affiliate linked to this promo code. Commission is credited only when the order and active offer meet the eligibility rules described above.
8. **The "Edit" button.** Click to edit the promo code.
9. **The "Delete" button.** Click to delete the promo code.

At the top of the page, there is a search field for finding promo codes by name. For a quick search, enter the name of the promo code in the search bar.

![Promo Codes search for Leadership showing the matching saved LEADERSHIP20 promo-code row.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/59e6aff5b973b861e8f2bcd0faf0e19e42ccf85b61bdd4a80d22d7563bae6526.png)
Search by the promo code name to narrow the list.

---

# Sales Analytics

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/sales-analytics

> Track revenue, orders, payments, and new customers with sales charts and filters.

Sales Analytics is the section of AXL with tables and charts that show how much you have sold and how much revenue you have earned over the period you choose. It shows how sales are going in your account.

On the Sales Analytics page, you can see revenue, paid and unpaid orders, new customers, payments, average order value, and more.

Go to Sales → Sales Analytics.

1. Set **Date** to the period you want to inspect.
2. Use **Add Filter** to select the product, owner, or sales source you want to compare.
3. Review the summary cards and the chart with those conditions applied.

![Sales Analytics for September 21 through October 21, 2026, with eleven metric cards, total revenue $601,850, 335 paid orders, 513 unpaid orders and the daily revenue chart.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0bffbbfee579ea64907e0bf0e060a2e40e3683fda99b418c93f20808cbce98e2.png)
This report shows existing sales for the selected period: $601,850 in revenue, 335 paid orders and 513 unpaid orders. Select a card to display its statistic on the chart.

## Set the reporting period and filters

At the top of the page, you will find these controls:

1. **Date**. Set the time period.
2. **Add Filter.** Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

    - **Order Owners.** Filter data by the team members or managers who process or fulfill orders. Select one or more team members from the list.
    - **Websites**. Select the websites where sales were made. Choose websites from the list.
    - **Site Pages**. Filter data by the pages where purchases were made.
    - **Product Type**. Filter sales by product type (for example, digital product, service, or subscription).
    - **Products**. Filter data by specific products and services.
    - **Product Categories**. Filter data by product category.
    - **Widgets**. Select widgets from the list.
    - **Webinars**. Analyze sales related to webinars. Select a webinar from the list. To sort through a large number of webinars, choose the webinar type on the bottom line of the dropdown: live, template, automated webinar, or all.
    - **Upsell.** Show sales where an upsell worked (for example, the customer bought additional courses or services).
    - **Autopay**. See sales analytics for autopay payments only, meaning payments that happen automatically.
    - **Purchase from Broadcast.** Show sales made through email broadcasts.
    - **Purchase from Email.** See sales analytics for purchases made from emails.
    - **First UTM Parameters**. Analyze traffic sources and marketing campaigns to see where customers came from and which channels were the most effective. You can enter a UTM parameter value to show only orders where the contacts reached your website through that parameter.
    - **Last UTM Parameters**. Works the same way, but tracks the last parameters before a purchase. Select the last UTM parameters from the list.
    - **Affiliate**. Show orders linked to a specific affiliate or several affiliates.
    - **Affiliate Program**. Show orders created through an affiliate program.
    - **Pay What You Want**. Show transactions where the customer chose their own price.
    - **Subscription Type**. Show specific subscription types for more detailed data analysis:

        - **Trial Period.** All sales or subscriptions made during a trial period (for example, free access for a limited time).
        - **Renewal After Trial**. Subscriptions that were renewed after the trial period ended.
        - **Full Payment**. Subscriptions that were purchased without a trial period (the customer paid for full access right away).
        - **Paid Renewal.** Subscriptions that were renewed, but not after a trial period (for example, the customer renewed the subscription after the paid period ended).

![Upper Add Filter menu with search, Affiliate, Affiliate Program, Autopay, First and Last UTM Parameters, Order Owners, Pay What You Want, Product Categories, Product Type, Products and Purchase from Broadcast.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c10c3d0a691479002806704dc1d0002bb98371fb6528bc8b3154748ae69b40c8.png)
Search the filter list or scroll through the available conditions.
![Lower Add Filter menu with Product Categories, Product Type, Products, Purchase from Broadcast, Purchase from Email, Site Pages, Subscription Type, Upsell, Webinars, Websites and Widgets.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f37272f513f95ab266f3992fd93c4a8c02488c510485a40259be5d66fd696a9a.png)
The lower part of the menu includes sales sources and subscription conditions. A filter that is already applied disappears from this list.

## Reuse or share the report conditions

By combining filter conditions, you can build a "set" filter. AXL saves the "set" filter in the page address. Copy the address to reuse the filter later, or send it to your team members. When a team member opens the link, Sales Analytics opens with your filter applied.

![Sales Analytics with Product Type set to Digital Product for September 21 through October 21, 2026; the matching result has zero revenue, payments and orders.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b45360fa79ed968efdf5987f7028ffd5835c3bf4c653836d184603930a95823d.png)
Product Type is set to Digital Product. This example has no matching sales, so the cards show zero values. Copy the page address to reuse the same conditions.

## Read the report

The eleven sales data cards on the left show:

- **Revenue**: four cards for Total Sales, Sales Department, First Sales and Repeat Sales.
- **Paid Orders**: the count of paid orders.
- **Paid Order Rate**: the percentage of orders that are paid.
- **Unpaid Orders**: separate amount and count cards.
- **Avg. Order Value**: the average order amount.
- **Payments**: the payment count.
- **New Customers**: the customer count.

Click a card to show its statistic in a chart. The overview at the start of this article shows all eleven cards beside the chart.

The chart on the right shows the statistics for each card visually.

---

# Affiliate Program

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program

> Set up and manage your affiliate program: affiliates, commission offers, payouts, withdrawal requests and automations.

The AXL affiliate program lets you work with affiliates who promote your products and services. An affiliate can be a webmaster, blogger, info-product creator, Membership Portal user, or anyone else with an audience or resources that can bring in potential buyers.
The goal of the program is to attract new customers and grow your sales. When a customer places an eligible order through an affiliate link, AXL can credit commission according to the program's attribution and active offer settings. The program helps you reach customers you couldn't reach without affiliates. It also builds brand awareness and drives sales by tapping into the relationships and trust that affiliates have already built with their audiences.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Set Up the Affiliate Program

Affiliate Program in the Contact Card

Affiliate Program in the Membership Portal

## Set Up the Affiliate Program

Go to "Sales" → "Affiliate Program". To start using this section, click "Turn On."

![Sales → Affiliate Program opened from the sidebar, with the Turn On switch and the Analytics tab.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/910a4e2a1f01cb2137e86f415c947b1b562c97aafba06ee811b9741fd92300c7.png)

The "Affiliate Program" section has these tabs: "Analytics," "Affiliates," "Settings," "Commissions (Offers)," "Automation," "Earnings & Payouts," and "Withdrawal Requests." Let's look at each tab in detail.

![Affiliate Program tabs (Analytics, Affiliates, Settings, Commissions (Offers), Automation, Earnings &amp; Payouts, Withdrawal Requests) above the Analytics counters.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ce9106a36cfe27f0ab899b45efcfc0f07bc9cf548af8c40c0a845ac1ff5b7722.png)

## Analytics

The "Analytics" tab shows reports on your affiliate program.

The tab includes these sections:

1. **Link Clicks**. The number of recorded clicks on affiliate links. This counts link-click events, not unique people.
2. **Registrations**. The number of users who signed up through affiliate links.
3. **Sales (Count)**. The total number of sales through affiliate links.
4. **Sales (Amount)**. The total amount of sales through affiliate links, in your account's currency.
5. **Total Credited**. The total commission credited to affiliates.
6. **Chart**. The program's analytics shown as a graph. Click any of the sections above to see its graph on its own. You can also use the filter to see stats for specific dates or set a time interval.

![Affiliate Analytics: date range, Add Filter, Link Clicks, Registrations, Sales (Count), Sales (Amount), Total Credited and the Link Clicks chart.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4a288696d3c56a6056f31b78e291232d6292c58fac95f3a319407bb0114b0064.png)

Use the filter at the top of the section for more detailed analytics. Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Websites**. Shows actions on individual websites. Select one or more websites from the list.
- **Site Pages**. Shows actions on the selected pages of a website. Select the pages from the list.
- **Affiliate**. Shows results for specific affiliates. You can select one or more affiliates from the list.
- **Date**. Shows analytics for the selected dates or time period.
- **Products**. Shows results for specific products. Select one or more products from the list.
- **UTM**. Enter a UTM tag value to see only the results where related contacts clicked that UTM tag.

![Affiliate Analytics Add Filter menu: Affiliate, Products, Site Pages, UTM and Websites.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4c2728800b1ff8fc9723374b5739b65aaed8b5092114428faf26f618b24f5c0a.png)

## Affiliates

The "Affiliates" tab lists the active affiliates in your program. Only active affiliates appear here: those whose links were clicked or led to a purchase at least once. The table shows:

1. **Contact**. The affiliate's contact. Click the name to open the contact card.
2. **Sign-Up Date**. The exact date and time of sign-up through the affiliate link.
3. **Clicks**. The number of clicks on the affiliate's link.
4. **Sign-Ups**. The number of new users who signed up through the affiliate's link.
5. **Sales Amount**. The total amount of purchases made through the affiliate's link.
6. **Commission**. The commission credited to the affiliate.
7. **Available Today**. The commission the affiliate can withdraw today.

![Affiliates tab with Olivia Bennett, sign-up date, clicks, sign-ups, sales amount, commission and amount available today.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6bf6497ec0b44bfb5f85e7ac7e56278afd470b4b5b9d1ca8b8c0b30e4d6dbaab.png)

Use the search bar and the filter at the top of the section to quickly find an affiliate. Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Sign-Up Date**. Filters affiliates by sign-up date.
- **Stats Period**. Selects affiliates based on the dates and periods you choose for statistics.
- **Agreement Date**. Filters affiliates by the date they accepted the agreement.

![Affiliates search and Add Filter menu: Affiliate Code, Agreement Date, Sign-Up Date and Stats Period.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5731507ab00fdb5a2bca32bbb96947e260dd9caff5840e0fd970c70de4c6d521.png)

## Settings

In the "Settings" tab, you set up the basics of the affiliate program:

1. **Affiliates**. You can require affiliates to agree to the program terms.

    - **Require consent to join the affiliate program**. Select the checkbox to show a consent pop-up in the user's Membership Portal.
    - **Message Text**. Enter the message users will see.
    - **Link to Affiliate Program Terms**. Add a link to the program terms so users can review them.
2. **Multi-Level System**. Sets how many levels your affiliate program has. Each level can have its own conditions and rewards for bringing in new affiliates or customers, so you can build a network of affiliates. For example, a first-level affiliate can earn a percentage of the sales made by the second-level affiliates they invited, and so on.

    - **Number of Levels.** Choose a number from 1 to 10. You set the commission for each level in each offer's commission settings.
3. **Affiliate Attribution.**

    - **Affiliate code cookie duration for website and membership portal visitors.** When a website or Membership Portal visitor clicks an affiliate link and signs up, the affiliate code is stored in cookies on their device. This lets you track which affiliate brought in a specific visitor or user and credit that affiliate with the commission. You can set how long the code stays in the cookies, from a few days to several months or even years. If the visitor signs up or makes a purchase during that time, the affiliate whose code is saved in the cookies is recognized as the one who brought in the customer and earns the commission.
    - **How long an affiliate stays assigned to a contact (user).** Choose a number of days or select Forever. After this period, the affiliate no longer earns commission. The default is Forever, which means there is no time limit on assigning an affiliate to a contact.
4. **Sign-Up via Affiliate Link**. Sign-up commission is credited to the affiliate's bonus account: for every new user who signs up through a unique affiliate link, the affiliate receives a set amount of bonus credits. The credits appear in the user's bonus account in the Membership Portal. Users can spend them on products or on certain perks and services. Bonus credits can't be withdrawn. You can add funds to a bonus account with automations, or users can transfer them from their affiliate balance. For details on the bonus account in the Membership Portal, see the "Affiliate Program in the Membership Portal" section below.

    To learn more about the bonus balance, read "[Bonus Balance](https://docs.axl.tech/bonus-balance)."
This works when a new contact (referral) is created, for example when someone submits a website form, signs up in a chatbot, or registers for a webinar.

    - **Credit to the affiliate's bonus account**. Select the checkbox to credit the inviting affiliate's bonus account, then enter the amount.
    - **Credit to the contact's (referral's) bonus account**. Select the checkbox to credit the new user's (referral's) bonus account, then enter the amount.
If you select both checkboxes, both the inviting affiliate and the new contact (referral) get bonus credits for the sign-up, for example, 50 bonus dollars each. Users can spend this amount from their bonus accounts on purchases.
5. **Commission Accrual & Payouts**. Set how commission is credited and when affiliates can withdraw it.

    - **Holding period before commission can be withdrawn**. Set the number of days before new transactions become available for withdrawal. If you enter 0 days, the commission is available for withdrawal right away.
    - **Who Earns the Commission**. Select one of these options:

        - **Affiliate from the referral link**. The commission goes to the affiliate whose referral link was used to place and pay for the order.
        - **Assigned affiliate, if any**. If an affiliate was assigned earlier, they get the commission. Otherwise, it goes to the affiliate from the current referral link.
    - **Allow commission withdrawal**. Lets affiliates create a withdrawal request, which an account admin must process and approve.
    - **Minimum Withdrawal Amount**. Set the smallest commission amount an affiliate can withdraw.
    - **Allow transferring commission to the bonus account**. Lets affiliates move the commission they've earned to a bonus account. When this is on, users can transfer their earned commission to the bonus account from the Membership Portal.
    - **Deduct payment gateway fees**. Select the checkbox to subtract the fee the payment gateway charges for each transaction before calculating affiliate rewards. This accounts for the extra costs of processing payments.
The commission is calculated after the payment gateway fee is deducted.
6. **Affiliate Dashboard**. Set whether the affiliate program is available in the Membership Portal.

    - **Show the affiliate dashboard in the membership portal**. Select the checkbox so users can see analytics, offers, commissions, and payouts in the "Affiliate Program" section of the Membership Portal. For what users see there, read the "Affiliate Program in the Membership Portal" section below.

        - **Show only to contacts in the group**. Shows the affiliate program only to users who belong to a certain group. To create a group, go to "CRM" → "Contacts" and select the contacts you need. Next, click "Bulk Actions" and choose "Add Groups." To create a group, click "Manage Groups." For more on creating a contact group, read the article "Contacts."
    - **Show the order list to the affiliate**. Select the checkbox so the affiliate can see all paid orders, including the referral's (buyer's) first and last name.

        - **Show created and unpaid orders**. Select the checkbox to also show the affiliate unpaid customer orders.
        - **Show the referral's (buyer's) contact details**. Select the checkbox to show the affiliate additional buyer data.
In this case, the affiliate can see unpaid orders and the referral's contact details. They can contact the referral and sell the product.

![Affiliate Program Settings: consent, levels, attribution, sign-up bonuses, commission accrual and payouts, and the membership-portal dashboard option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/90b85ce1af6efa424519af2a3586ac20c6059acc6a7e7463331e98b8b0c9dbe6.png)

After changing the program settings, click **Save Changes** in the footer. Reopen **Settings** and check the attribution period, commission rules, and portal visibility before inviting affiliates.

## Commissions (Offers)

The "Commissions (Offers)" tab lists all the offers available to your affiliates. Here you can create and customize new offers. Click "Add Offer."

![Commissions (Offers) tab with Add Offer above an empty offers table.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fbc1d96b3c7599fa77c8754a338393f4f830062d3313543bf0e30adbd44a1e17.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. **Title**. Enter a name for the new offer.
2. **Description**. Add a description with more details about the offer.
3. **Purchase Type**. Choose the type of purchase: Any, First, or Repeat.
4. **Commission**. You can add or change the number of levels in the "Settings" tab of the affiliate program. Select the commission type for the affiliate: Percentage or Fixed Amount.
Percentage is a reward calculated as a percentage of the order amount or revenue, depending on your settings.
Fixed Amount is a reward in an amount you set. The amount is shown in your account's currency.
5. **Level Commission**. Set the commission value for each level. The fields are labeled "Level 1 Commission," "Level 2 Commission," and so on. If you chose Percentage, enter the percentage of the sales amount to credit to the affiliate. If you chose Fixed Amount, enter the amount to credit to the affiliate.
6. **Products**. You can add specific products to the offer ("Selected Products"). Or select "All Products" to make every product in the account available for sale in this offer.
7. **Available To**. Select "Selected Affiliates" and choose affiliates from the list. The offer will be available only to the selected contacts.
Or select "All" to make the offer available to all users.
8. **Promotional Links**. Add at least one link to the selling page, with a title and a URL for each. Click "Add URL" to add another link. To learn how to create a selling page, read the article "How to Create a Website."
9. **Offer is active**. Select the checkbox to make the offer active for affiliates. Clear the checkbox to make the offer unavailable.

![Add Offer form: Leadership Certificate referral, 15% commission on any purchase of all products, available to all affiliates, with a Program page promotional link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8ddd3d071be1ff041e3850e638d1cfb60dea4659f721f8d18ee16a0ff32de19c.png)

Click "Create." The new offer appears in the list. The list shows:

Check the new offer’s products, eligible affiliates, commission by level, promotional links, and active state before distributing its links.

1. **Title**. Click the offer's name to open it for editing.
2. **Purchase Type**. The type of purchase: Any, First, or Repeat.
3. **Commission**. In a multi-level program, click "Levels" to see the details: the commission type and amount for each level.
4. **Products**. The products available for sale.
5. **Affiliates**. The affiliates this offer is available to.
6. **Promo Links**. Click a link to open the selling page.
7. **Actions**. These buttons are available here:
The "Edit" button (pencil icon). Click it to change the offer.
The "Delete" button (trash icon). Click it to delete the offer. You'll be asked to confirm.

![Offers table with the Leadership Certificate referral offer: Any purchase type, 15% commission, all products and affiliates.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/025019a6db4c955c572daa4c3da111a55ecf5dce447ee250914cdfefaf9667fb.png)

## Automation

Use this tab to automate the affiliate program by setting up a sequence of events and actions. To learn how to create an automation, read "[Affiliate Program Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program-scenario)."

![Affiliate Program Automation tab with the Events palette and Sign-Up via Affiliate Link (Referral) connected to Send Email and a $50 bonus credit.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d59a1102dd719fd1734d37d9114a9882703f148598a2ba293b793e227d1331c1.png)

## Earnings & Payouts

The "Earnings & Payouts" tab shows the full history of commissions credited to affiliates and payouts made to them. You can also create new transactions here. Click "Create Transaction."

![Earnings &amp; Payouts tab with Add Filter and Create Transaction above an empty transactions table.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6b43f66462bd76607dd9262d6089aa85892d9e543d7ac9fd0851cdfb6dd41a48.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. **Affiliate**. Select the affiliate's contact from the list.
2. **Commission**. Enter the commission amount.
3. **Type**. Select the transaction type: Credit or Debit.
Credit is a transaction that adds commission to the affiliate.
Debit is a transaction that writes commission off.
4. **Comment**. Add a comment to the transaction.
5. **Transfer to Bonus Account**. For a Debit, select this checkbox to deduct commission and credit the same amount to the affiliate's bonus balance. If it is clear, Create records a commission debit only; it does not send money through a bank or payment provider.

![Create Transaction form: Affiliate Olivia Bennett, Commission 25, Type Debit, a comment visible to the affiliate and Transfer to Bonus Account.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/503b8e2e79f26ecfa34da4545d2ea6a72a8ce4d4d8ccf343325e4e5547d01a4b.png)

Click "Create." The new transaction appears in the list. The list shows:

1. **Date Created**. The exact date and time the transaction was created.
2. **Affiliate**. The affiliate's contact. Click the name to open the contact card.
3. **Contact**. The referral's contact.
4. **Comment**. The comment on the transaction, plus who created the transaction.
5. **Level**. The user's level in a multi-level program. You can add or change the number of levels in the "Settings" tab of the affiliate program.
6. **Payment Amount**. The amount the referral paid when buying the product through the affiliate link.
7. **Credit/Debit**. The commission amount credited to or debited from the affiliate.
8. **Actions**. This button is available here:
The "Delete" button (trash icon). Click it to delete the transaction.

![Affiliate Program Earnings &amp; Payouts with a $25 commission credit for Olivia Bennett, its comment and creator, Payment Amount, Credit/Debit and the Delete icon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8e1abe1b730e7e11d44e79ce50477c008b99a1cafd3bded521de6bf4f59e6cab.png)

Use the filter at the top of the section. Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Date Created**. Filters transactions by date or time period.
- **Affiliate**. Shows the transactions for a specific affiliate. You can select one or more affiliates from the list.

![Earnings &amp; Payouts tab with the Add Filter menu open: search, Affiliate and Date Created.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4bee648a89bc9c8160b6079126e9ca3a3fc6df0e7a4eaa32c1b3d7f71de9b3d2.png)

## Withdrawal Requests

The "Withdrawal Requests" tab shows all commission withdrawal requests from affiliates. You can confirm or reject each request.
The list of requests shows:

1. **Date Created**. The exact date and time the request was created.
2. **Affiliate**. The affiliate's contact. Click the name to open the contact card.
3. **Amount**. The amount the affiliate asked to withdraw.
4. **Comment**. The comment on the request.
5. **Status**. The request status: Pending, Approved, or Declined.
6. **Actions**. These buttons are available here for pending requests:
The "Approve" button (check mark icon).
The "Decline" button (X icon).

**Important:** approving a request only records the payout: AXL debits the amount from the affiliate's commission balance. It does not send any money. Pay the affiliate yourself, by bank transfer or another method you agreed on, then approve the request.

![Withdrawal Requests tab with a Pending $240.00 request from Olivia Bennett, her comment, and the Approve and Decline buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0d41a5c888228c529dfb440208657141b27d21dde894538ff2a15a0a5308da13.png)

## Approve a withdrawal request

To approve a withdrawal request, click the "Approve" button. In the pop-up that opens, enter a comment. Keep "Create a withdrawal transaction automatically" selected (it is selected by default) so a debit transaction is created for you in the "Earnings & Payouts" tab. Then click "Approve." Approval updates the request and, when selected, records the debit. It does not send the payout. Arrange the money transfer separately and avoid recording the same debit twice.

![Approve pop-up above a withdrawal request with the Comment field, the Create a withdrawal transaction automatically checkbox selected, and the Approve button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d2163ea75971186e94e0ab06ebd6e496d5e30cd763e86fc380c58a6c67e2d9d0.png)

## Decline a withdrawal request

To reject a withdrawal request, click the "Decline" button. In the pop-up that opens, enter a comment explaining the rejection, then click "Decline."

![Decline pop-up above a withdrawal request with the Comment field, the note that the affiliate will see the comment, and the Decline button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/89e8095d017c634a77f09a5122323b83accf3290c9152d98349bcbbae0bb7cc1.png)

Use the filter at the top of the section. Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Date Created**. Filters withdrawal requests by date or time period.
- **Affiliate**. Shows the withdrawal requests from a specific affiliate. You can select one or more affiliates from the list.

![Withdrawal Requests tab with the Add Filter menu open: search, Affiliate and Date Created.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8036ba04532bded4cdd1c90de9e84f50e4d3a420d69811fa41accfef3c915767.png)

## Affiliate Program in the Contact Card

The "Affiliate Program" section is also available in the contact card. From the card, you can create unique affiliate links for a contact, create transactions, and approve or reject commission withdrawal requests. The affiliate's personal analytics are in the card too.

Go to "CRM" → "Contacts" and click the affiliate's name to open their contact card. Then open the "Affiliate Program" tab. To learn more about this section, read "[Affiliate Program in the Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program-in-the-contact-card)."

![Olivia Bennett's contact card on the Affiliate Program tab: totals, processing, available to withdraw, payout requests and her affiliate code.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c273af1d1fc3d2fce1fbaa8171e0eb863f2f52df21b36fe8f23d0bfc97dabc29.png)

## Affiliate Program in the Membership Portal

The "Affiliate Program" section is available to users in the Membership Portal only if you selected "Show the affiliate dashboard in the membership portal" in the affiliate program settings. See the settings described earlier in this article.

On the "Affiliate Program" page of the Membership Portal, the affiliate sees:

1. **Analytics**. The affiliate's personal analytics. Users can apply filters to manage the analytics: select dates or time periods, and track clicks on affiliate links or sign-ups by UTM tags.

    - **Clicks**. The number of recorded clicks on affiliate links, not a count of unique referrals.
    - **Sign-Ups**. The number of referrals who signed up through affiliate links.
    - **Purchases (Count)**. The total number of sales through affiliate links.
    - **Purchases (Amount)**. The total amount of sales through affiliate links.
    - **Commission**. The amount of commission earned.
2. **Offers**. A list of active offers with their details. Here the affiliate can copy a unique affiliate link to the selling page.
3. **Orders**. A list of orders that referrals (buyers) placed through affiliate links. This section appears only if you selected "Show the order list to the affiliate" in the program settings. You can show the affiliate only paid orders, or also show created and unpaid orders and the referral's (buyer's) contact details. See the settings described earlier in this article.
4. **Earnings & Payouts**. Commission earned and paid out.

    - **Total Earned**. The total amount of commission earned.
    - **Pending**. Commission that is still being processed. If you set a holding period under "Holding period before commission can be withdrawn" in the program settings, new transactions become available for withdrawal after that period. If you set 0 days, the commission is available for withdrawal right away.
    - **Available to Withdraw**. The amount available to withdraw today.
    - **Withdrawal Requests**. The amount waiting for the account admin's approval. Click it to open the request details. The affiliate can create a withdrawal request from the Membership Portal.
    - **Earnings List**. All earnings, shown as a list. In the "Available to Withdraw" column, the affiliate sees every amount that is available today or still pending. Hover over an amount to see the date it becomes available for withdrawal.

![Member Affiliate Program page with Analytics, Offers with a promo link, and Earnings &amp; Payouts.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d855d7510b320ae483d09323c485c3a3cf43c519955a11149e0fa8418371b16e.png)

## Request or transfer commission from the portal

An affiliate can request to withdraw their earned commission from the Membership Portal. To do this, they click "Withdraw," enter the amount to withdraw and a comment, and click "Withdraw" again. The amount then appears in the "Withdrawal Requests" column.
An affiliate can also move earned commission to their bonus account. To do this, they click "Transfer to Bonus Account," enter the amount to transfer, and click "Transfer to Bonus Account" to confirm.

![Member Earnings &amp; Payouts with Transfer to Bonus Account and Withdraw above the balance cards.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/67a0fb7367e784e9149f753bf703e56f2dbccf4ac19fa405bcee1bc5f11a6bdb.png)

Bonus credits appear in the bonus balance in the user's Membership Portal. Users can spend them on products or on certain perks and services. Funds from the bonus balance are deducted automatically when the user buys a product. For each product, you can set the maximum amount that can be paid with bonuses.

In the top-right corner, click the profile and select "Bonus Balance" from the list.

![Member profile menu with Bonus Balance.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/42e0594b2f5775399fdf43deba70cea5bb6c8ad740b58b6521ce5454eaa2eb63.png)

In the window that opens, the affiliate sees their bonus balance and a list of bonus transactions.

![Membership Portal User Profile, Bonus Balance tab: balance $75 and the list of bonus transactions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f5ed379eb1f838b1465fc6d8bf86bb5cbba64d11f7da4d38179604bb7851bd88.png)

---

# Sales Form

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/sales-form

> Add the Payment Form element to a page and set up its products, upsell pages, thank you page, and components.

The Payment Form element lets you accept payments for selected products. It also records whether site visitors decide to buy a product or decline it. The Payment Form group has three elements: the payment form itself, a button that accepts an upsell offer, and a button that declines it.

Click a section to jump to its description:
Creating a Payment FormElement SettingsComponentsUpsell Accept ButtonUpsell Decline Button

Creating a Payment Form

To create a Payment Form, go to "Sites" and click the name of a site, or click "Add Website". To learn how to add a website, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/A2PPhoF_CkSfUL2_Hq85MQ.png)

Open the page editor (the legacy editor, v1). Select "Create New Block" and click "Add Element". In the list of elements, select "Payment Form". Three options appear: "Payment Form", "Upsell Accept Button", and "Upsell Decline Button". Drag "Payment Form" onto the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/jp4vswKz9UWfyu6U3x0_XA.png)

Select the whole payment form to open its settings. The toolbar opens on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/RJ-C6CiScE2vT2pkV4QH_g.png)

Element Settings

Products. In the "Products" field, add one or more products. To learn how to create a product on the AXL platform, see the article "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".
If you select several products, they must all use the same currency. To change the order of the products, hold the "Move" button next to a product name and drag it to another place in the list.

Mode. If you add several products to the payment form, choose how customers select them.

- With the "All" mode, the customer buys all the products in the form and can't choose between them.
- The "Product Selection" mode lets the customer choose only one of the products.
- The "Multiple" mode lets the customer choose one or more of the products.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/svEg-uHUl0uoUQr1Glxrdg.png)

Upsell. Upsell pages are a sequence of pages that customers are redirected to after they pay for their initial order in a payment form. On these pages, you offer customers additional products. Upsell pages add sales steps after customers have already decided to buy the main product.

Turn on the "Upsell" switch, click "Add", and enter the URL of an upsell page you created on the AXL platform. To learn how to create an upsell page, see the article "[Upsell Page](https://docs.axl.tech/upsell-page)".

Note: The upsell page works only if the settings of the selected payment gateway include "Save card details for future payments where supported". To learn more about payment settings, see the article "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)".
The upsell page opens automatically after the customer enters their payment details in the payment form. It lets the customer buy an additional product, which is added to the order without re-entering payment details.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eSdbF8xYm063--o92Lp_zg.png)

You can set up one or more upsell pages. If you set up two upsell pages, the customer goes to the first one automatically after paying for the main product.

On the first upsell page, if the customer clicks "Accept Offer", they go to the payment page for the additional product. After they pay, they go to the second upsell page. If they click "Decline", they go straight to the second upsell page.

On the second upsell page, the customer either goes to the payment page for the second additional product and then to the thank you page, or clicks "Decline" and goes straight to the thank you page.

If you set up three or more upsell pages, the customer goes through them one by one after completing the actions on each previous page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/WO29ZlJ0m0KtPBV6hwUaTw.png)

Thank You Page. This page appears after a successful payment. If you don't create a separate thank you page, AXL shows the default success page. Turn on the "Thank You Page" switch and enter the URL of a thank you page you created on the AXL platform. For instructions on creating a thank you page, see the "Sites" section.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eAjzt9h60Uumz-Zuo84BSg.png)

Run JS Code. For advanced users. In this field, enter your JavaScript. It runs when the visitor submits the form, before the payment itself.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/aqBNQU6duUa--o2D8hDC3A.png)

Components

## 

In the payment form settings, open the "Components" tab. It shows the advanced settings for each component inside the payment form. You can add or remove components. Each component's settings are described below.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/fK6RiR7kiEOqoBxpjAE9-w.png)

Form component. The form collects a page visitor's contact details. Click "Select".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/IZtKXC6ew0-cVNb30AVp_Q.png)

The form field settings open. Adjust them as needed. For more on configuring the form, see the article "[Form Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-form)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/L9qToTq3R0G1UlF4GTIc-g.png)

When you finish the form settings, click "Back to Payment Form".

Product List. This component appears in the payment form by default. To hide the product list, turn off its switch.
To add and configure the component again, turn the switch back on and click "Select".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/mKXbLPHbU06Eal4l3PA64Q.png)

Here you add one or more products from your product list. To show product descriptions in the form, turn on the "Show Description" switch. For more on configuring the product list component, see the article "[Product List Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-product-list)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/HhDhqqHdNU2doi6J-sTuTA.png)

When you finish the product list settings, click "Back to Payment Form".

Payment Buttons. Here you add one or more payment buttons. Each button connects to its own payment gateway. Choose a payment gateway for each button from the list. To learn how to set up a payment gateway, see the article "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Iypwu7AdV0KCTaQGpM_Kqw.png)

Next, click "Select" in the upper-right corner of a payment button to see its advanced settings. For more on configuring the button, see the article "[Payment Button Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-payment-button)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1hOltGAojk6Rh-q9XXgGGA.png)

When you finish the payment button settings, click "Back to Payment Form".

Totals component. You can add extra lines to the payment form: savings, shipping, and total. Customers see the discount amount, the shipping amount, and the total purchase amount. Turn on the "Totals" switch and click "Select". To learn how to configure the totals component, see the article "[Totals Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-totals)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2Vg90v1Qb0qHwosLIHeTKA.png)

When you finish the totals settings, click "Back to Payment Form".

Promo Code component. Here you can add and configure a promo code. To learn how to create a promo code, see the article "[Promo Codes](https://docs.axl.tech/promo-codes)".
Turn on the "Promo Code" switch and click "Select". To learn how to configure the promo code component, see the article "[Promo Code Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-promo-code)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7weZR4VG_UWBrwJXYFcqzQ.png)

Order Bump component. An order bump automatically adds a product to the order or replaces one. Turn on the "Order Bump" switch and click "Select".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/BaggNb-TP0-NEdRe32D17g.png)

In the order bump settings, choose the product to offer. Under "Behavior", choose what happens when the customer selects the order bump: "Add" adds the product to the cart with the main product, and "Replace" replaces the main product.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/jHtN7k2vk0qTYAo-SzR8zQ.png)

To edit the text in the order bump field, double-click it.
When the customer checks the box "Add the course and save 50%", the second product is added to the cart, or the main product is replaced automatically.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ITu6Ue1QZEuyYnK6Q5pppg.png)

To learn how to set up the order bump component, see the article "[Order Bump Component](https://docs.axl.tech/component-order-bump)". 
When you finish the component settings, click "Back to Payment Form".

Credit Card Form. Turn on the switch to add credit card fields to the order form. Right now, the credit card form supports only Stripe. To learn more about the Stripe integration, see the article "[Stripe Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5x5P8Q8BbUWDHqPRM-rptg.png)

When you finish the component settings, click "Back to Payment Form".

For the settings on the remaining tabs of the payment form, see the article "[Payment Form Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-form-of-payment)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/lI_pxSgHVkCUPPC-yqlkCg.png)

Upsell Accept Button

The Upsell Accept Button lets a customer buy additional products after paying for the main product. Place the "Upsell Accept Button" anywhere on the upsell page. It works only after the main order is paid.

In the page editor, click "Add Element". In the list of elements, select "Payment Form". Click "Upsell Accept Button", then drag the button you want from the list onto the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qWgaWwuExkONpdiRiuhiCA.png)

For more on the upsell page settings and the "Upsell Accept Button" element, see the article "[Upsell Page](https://docs.axl.tech/upsell-page)".

Upsell Decline Button

The Upsell Decline Button lets a customer decline additional products after paying for the main product. Place the "Upsell Decline Button" anywhere on the upsell page. It works only after the main order is paid.

In the page editor, click "Add Element". In the list of elements, select "Payment Form". Click "Upsell Decline Button", then drag the button you want from the list onto the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nZ-gCpdG8kqY0Mtx6-18zw.png)

For more on the upsell page settings and the "Upsell Decline Button" element, see the article "[Upsell Page](https://docs.axl.tech/upsell-page)".

---

# Upsell Page

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/upsell-page

> Create an upsell page, add the Accept Offer and Decline buttons, and connect the page to a Payment Form.

Upsell pages are a sequence of pages that customers are redirected to after they pay for their initial order in a payment form. On these pages, you offer customers additional products. Upsell pages add sales steps after customers have already decided to buy the main product.

You can set up one or more upsell pages.
If you set up two upsell pages, the customer goes to the first one automatically after paying for the main product in the checkout form. On the first upsell page, if the customer clicks "Accept Offer", they go to the payment page for the additional product. After they pay, they go to the second upsell page. If they click "Decline", they go straight to the second upsell page. On the second upsell page, the customer either goes to the payment page for the second additional product and then to the thank you page, or clicks "Decline" and goes straight to the thank you page.

If you set up three or more upsell pages, the customer goes through them one by one after completing the actions on each previous page.

Note: The upsell page works only if the settings of the selected payment gateway include "Save card details for future payments where supported". To learn more about payment settings, see the article "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)".
The upsell page opens automatically after the customer enters their payment details in the payment form. It lets the customer buy an additional product, which is added to the order without re-entering payment details.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eUrF9GBLv0OQpiYvrKzRNQ.png)

Click a section to jump to its description:
Creating an Upsell PageSetting Up the "Accept Offer" ButtonSetting Up the "Decline" ButtonAdding an Upsell Page to a Payment Form

Creating an Upsell Page

To create an upsell page, go to "Sites", open your site, and go to the "Pages" tab. To learn how to create a website in AXL, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/OB7xNHf9AUaVWEozaNC_5A.png)

To add an upsell page, click the "Page" button or drag it to where you want the new page to go.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3LWPvANvfk2VEPx0t5YxMA.png)

A window opens. Go to the "Create from Scratch" tab and fill in the fields:

1. Title. The page name appears here. You can change it.
2. Internal Name. Only you can see the internal name. It isn't shown to visitors. It helps you find the page inside AXL.
3. Short Description. Site visitors see this description. The field is optional. If you leave it empty, visitors see the site's description instead. Up to 160 characters are visible.
4. Page URL. Enter the page address in the field.
5. Redirect. To send visitors to another site, check the box and enter the address in the field that opens.
6. Hide from search engines. Use this option if you don't want search engines to find the page.
7. Make Available. Check the box to publish the page and make it available to visitors.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/6mJBVO4gdkyKZ_2A9W5cXQ.png)

If you want to follow these steps in the legacy editor (v1), check "Create in the legacy editor (v1)" first. Then click "Create and Open".

In the editor that opens, click "Create New Block".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/aHR_j5iL7UG8jIR_59sumw.png)

In the list of blocks, select the "Payment form + upsell form" block. You can pick an "Upsell Form" page type from the suggested templates.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eWrVBPCiLEibaHNuhOhUmw.png)

The picture below shows an example of an upsell page. Edit it: replace the image and text, and add a description of your product.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qeUkJo1S20S2Kqndtqb9Nw.png)

Or build your own upsell page by adding the elements you need to the page. To learn more about configuring page elements, see the article "[Elements](https://docs.axl.tech/elements)".

If you build your own upsell page, you need to add two buttons: "Accept Offer" and "Decline".
These buttons are required on an upsell page. They let the customer move on to the next upsell page or to the thank you page, which completes the purchase of the main product in the payment form. Without a "Decline" button, the customer can't reach the thank you page or complete the purchase of the main product in the payment form.
If you create several upsell pages, put the "Accept Offer" and "Decline" buttons on every upsell page.

Setting Up the "Accept Offer" Button

You need to add two buttons to the upsell page: "Accept Offer" and "Decline". To add the first one, click "Add Element", click "Payment Form", and then select "Upsell Accept Button".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wdZQhWNU_Ua-7ukJ9-ZQFQ.png)

Drag any of the "Accept Offer" buttons onto the upsell page. You can place the button anywhere on the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/CXIUhchZXUWemzThABj54w.png)

Element Settings

Upsell Products. Select the "Accept Offer" button on the upsell page to open its settings. In the settings, click "Add Product" and select the upsell product from the list. When a customer clicks "Accept Offer", they go to the payment page for the upsell product.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/tyH47kNmS0WJFYRbBREEfw.png)

First Line. Enter the text inside the button, and change its text color, font size, line height, and text alignment.

Second Line. If you need to, add a second line of text inside the button. Turn on the switch on the right to show an additional line on the button. The second line has the same settings as the first: text, text color, font size, line height, and text alignment.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/gBoARo9FmEKpcu0bmVguUA.png)

For the settings on the remaining tabs (positioning, style, icon, conditional show/hide, advanced), see the article "[Button Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/FTL5wFFMzUiFRnRGPYpjVA.png)

Setting Up the "Decline" Button

Click "Add Element" again, click "Payment Form", and then select "Upsell Decline Button".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ZHXjx7UpGUqgEuha98J_xw.png)

Drag any of the "Decline" buttons onto the upsell page. You can place the button anywhere on the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/m4xgEWrPlEGANwQcmEIYEg.png)

The "Decline" button has the same settings as the "Accept Offer" button, described above, except that you don't choose an upsell product. You can also read about button settings in the article "[Button Element](https://docs.axl.tech/element-button)".

When you finish setting up the upsell page, click "Save".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/cRdfdHj710Ck8YREK4jeuA.png)

Adding an Upsell Page to a Payment Form

Copy the URL of the upsell page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_MvG43ACM0WL4zF9-mbQlQ.png)

Enter this URL in the matching field when you set up the "Payment Form" element. For details, see the article "[Sales Form](https://docs.axl.tech/sales-form)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/TPX5vgGRsUe8gQE-gfRPog.png)

---

# Form Component

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/component-form

> Set up the form component of the Payment Form: contact fields, labels, styles, and when to hide the form.

Form component. The form collects the contact details of a visitor to the payment form page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/WSpXxNCkAUakjyungYX0Xg.png)

To open the advanced form settings, click "Select" in the payment form settings. Then adjust the settings you need.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/IZtKXC6ew0-cVNb30AVp_Q.png)

General Settings

Select the form element inside the payment form. The advanced settings of the form component open on the right. Open the "General Settings" tab.

Settings. To hide the form when you already know the visitor's details, turn on the "Hide the form if the data is already known" switch.

Fields. By default, the form has an email field, and the payment form asks the visitor to fill it in. Customize the form fields:

1. Email. The name of the field appears here.
2. Label. Change the label text here. You can also double-click the label text to edit it. Enter the text you want.
3. Placeholder. The hint text shown inside the field, so visitors know what to enter.
4. Required. Turn on the switch to make the field mandatory. Turn it off to make the field optional.
5. Hide this field if the user is signed in. Turn on the switch to hide the field from signed-in users. When a user is signed in, the form doesn't show this field.
6. Attribute. The attributes in the list are linked to the contact. When a visitor submits the form, AXL saves the entered data to the matching contact attribute, so you can use it later, for example to send emails or process orders. You can also enter your own attribute and reuse its name later.

To add more fields, click "Add Field".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AcHEOFInSES2JDnGmJSg0g.png)

A list of additional fields opens. Add the fields you need. Visitors will be asked to fill them in too.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/lL7EbAX3-EGgm6aFGJ92-w.png)

To remove a field from the form, click the Delete icon in the upper-right corner of the field.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/tqmTPEhYiUOXaJoUrFqlvQ.png)

To change the order of the fields, hover over the move button on a field, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the field up or down.

This way, you build the list of fields that visitors fill in on the form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/HEth-7AYDkaWPALhT_wCQg.png)

Field Style

Open the "Field Style" tab of the form.

Labels. A label is the name of a contact attribute inside the form, such as name, email, or phone. You can change the label position (top or left), label color, font size, line height, and alignment (left, center, right).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QYkF0MYwPkyZB4zXFpAhsA.png)

Field Style. Change how the form fields look: the field background color, the text color inside the field, the font size, the line height, and the text alignment inside the field (left, center, right).
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/HLAirFx8GkK_EiaYYFKe2Q.png)

Field Border. Customize the border around each field: the radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/kZ7jNVDvSE-5nI8dQWAcGQ.png)

Positioning

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_fhAPG35e0aj17lCfhOC9w.png)

Style

Open the "Style" tab of the form.

Background. Change the form's background color or add a background image. For an image, extra settings let you choose the image, its size, whether it repeats, and its position inside the form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vpjS-fbdakmQhlSorabjJw.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the form. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/zodlxUEfvUqG7ZZ7cu2S8g.png)

Border. Customize the border around the form: the radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YP60c8f-jUCAvqKBL68B0w.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3dRMw3Ahw0qAZ5ZadmDZRA.png)

Advanced Settings

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/6oM47laIXU-Sa003iSw25g.png)

---

# Product List Component

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/component-product-list

> Set up the Product List component of the Payment Form: add products, choose the selection mode, and show product descriptions.

Product List component. This is the list of products that customers can buy in the payment form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/l7fqgKVDQUK-pgBRElwkyg.png)

This component appears in the payment form by default. To hide the product list, turn off its switch. To add and configure the component again, turn on the "Product List" switch and click "Select".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/mKXbLPHbU06Eal4l3PA64Q.png)

General Settings

Select the product list element inside the payment form. The advanced settings of the component open on the right. Open the "General Settings" tab.

Products. Add one or more products from your product list. If you select several products, they must all use the same currency. To learn how to create a product on the AXL platform, see the article "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".

Mode. If you add several products to the payment form, choose how customers select them. The "Product Selection" mode lets the customer choose only one of the products. With the "All" mode, the customer buys all the products in the form and can't choose between them.

Settings. To show a product description in the form, turn on the "Show Description" switch. You add the description in the product's settings. For more on product settings, see the article "[General Settings of the Products & Services Section](https://docs.axl.tech/common-settings-of-the-products-and-services-section)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xU54zVHHF022r7sYW-Jh5A.png)

To move a product, hover over the move button, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the product up or down the list.

To remove a product from the list, click the × icon next to the product name.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xJLsLlPzBEu2IsenyqeNkA.png)

Positioning

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QcEE3BPOyUSiGwhs2dToAQ.png)

Style

Background. Change the component's background color or add a background image. For an image, extra settings let you choose the image, its size, whether it repeats, and its position inside the component.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/OhFviG7Q_EiAF2T3STW6HQ.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the component. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/HV99JtXMk0iVmj0ldHYarA.png)

Border. Customize the border around the product list: the radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/L0cFefYDOU-xhwGEnm_iTA.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/074GFHM_kUqTf1GPQNKFQw.png)

Advanced Settings

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/w4lewvcLTEW7r5HWMTpF1g.png)

---

# Payment Button Component

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/component-payment-button

> Set up the Payment Button component in a payment form: payment method, partial payment, button text, icons, and style.

The Payment Button component. Use it to add one or more payment buttons to a payment form. Each button is linked to its own payment gateway. Select the payment method for each button from the list. To learn how to add a payment gateway, read the article "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/C7S4tq45DUi2wlQVPokDNg.png)

In the payment form settings, click "Create" to add one or more payment buttons to the form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Iypwu7AdV0KCTaQGpM_Kqw.png)

Next, click the "Select" icon in the upper-right corner of a payment button to open that button's advanced settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1hOltGAojk6Rh-q9XXgGGA.png)

Element Settings

Select the button inside the payment form. The advanced settings of the payment button open on the right. Go to the "Element Settings" tab.

Payment Method. Select the payment method for this button from the list. To learn how to add a payment gateway, read the article "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/G0zWXmJCJUuxhUs6XY7JTQ.png)

Partial Payment. Turn on this switch to set a partial payment amount. Use it when you sell a course at a discount and want customers to reserve the price by paying part of it up front. The order is marked as partially paid, and the customer can pay the remaining amount later.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Vbx7UsN6Fk2lah4dEtoEiQ.png)

You can add several payment buttons. For example, use one button for a partial payment and another for the full price of the product.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/gLWO3z8g1E2a1DmQ74kP4Q.png)

First Line. Enter the text for the button, then set its color, font size, line height, font style, and text alignment.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Q8oTGpWL1UOOz-UPRfpr-Q.png)

Second Line. If needed, add a second line of text to the button. Turn on the switch on the right to show it. The settings are the same as for the first line: enter the text, then set the color, size, line height, font style, and alignment.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/0YDMl1Q9zkmJKtnKnwOMSQ.png)

Positioning

For more about this section, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YN0PRJvc70KTmGTyBgGEqA.png)

Style

Background. Change the background color of the button or add a background image. For an image, you can also choose the file and set its size, repeat, and position inside the button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/i1JngDMGkUeKHSn0YpjeKQ.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the button. You can adjust the offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a sharper or softer shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the button text. You can adjust the offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a sharper or softer shadow), and the shadow color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eE1JcEIQBkWy1SC_u7H14w.png)

Border. Customize the border around the button: the corner radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the thickness.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/42E3csIy7UeBsxM2aBOEwQ.png)

Icon

An icon is a ready-made graphic you can add to a button. Icons are built into the AXL editor and updated regularly. Pick an icon from the available ones and place it to the left or right of the button text.

Icon Left. Turn on the switch on the right to open the settings. Here you can choose an icon and set its size and color. You can also set a background color for the icon, round its corners, and adjust the outer margin. The icon appears on the left side of the button.

Icon Right. Turn on the switch. These settings are the same as for "Icon Left," but the icon appears on the right side of the button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/NXx_nY7iQUKu5GP1y84WmQ.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For more about this section, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/PNRVGNLpC0aWsS8zNroEcw.png)

Advanced Settings

For more about this section, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nOG0aqO2n0yyokjz3jxeIQ.png)

---

# Totals Component

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/component-totals

> Customize the Totals component of the Payment Form: line labels, text, style, and display conditions.

Totals component. You can add extra lines to the payment form: savings, shipping, and total. Customers see the discount amount, the shipping amount, and the total purchase amount.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/H9RorSqdykuKnKbJrrHfWA.png)

In the payment form settings, turn on the "Totals" switch and click "Select".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2Vg90v1Qb0qHwosLIHeTKA.png)

General Settings

Select the totals element inside the payment form. The advanced settings of the component open on the right. Open the "General Settings" tab.

Totals Labels. Enter your own name for each line in its field.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ZWlKPQT41k-hTfHB4hZYSA.png)

Text. In the "Text" group, you can change the color, font, font size, and alignment of the totals text.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/xHKSLVNiB0-tsP205WB7gA.png)

Positioning

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/kEUkF5v2mUutpTwn9wgieA.png)

Style

Background. Change the component's background color or add a background image. For an image, extra settings let you choose the image, its size, whether it repeats, and its position inside the component.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1udFA_qIpkSVuuYGXrzXYg.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the component. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/kpryKK43R0ygsLHH2Td9mQ.png)

Border. Customize the border around the component: the radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/L2BPDOKQpUOVtGKLfa56Uw.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XxyE0BiN10GWFdRP0nnGSg.png)

Advanced Settings

## 

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/gelt2yJm4Eekn8GCG0SyNw.png)

---

# Promo Code Component

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/component-promo-code

> Customize the Promo Code button of the Payment Form: text, style, icons, and when the button appears.

Promo Code component. Here you can add and configure a promo code. To learn how to create a promo code, see the article "[Promo Codes](https://docs.axl.tech/promo-codes)".

The "Promo Code" button lets a customer apply a promo code to their order.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YW1ENDXxjk-gRfVoKjUXEg.png)

In the payment form settings, turn on the "Promo Code" switch and click "Select".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7weZR4VG_UWBrwJXYFcqzQ.png)

Element Settings

Select the promo code element inside the payment form. The advanced settings of the promo code button open on the right. Open the "Element Settings" tab.

First Line. Enter the text inside the button, and change its text color, font size, and line height.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/8D8EaHCLn0i-oHBo3XGhwA.png)

Second Line. If you need to, add a second line of text inside the button. Click the switch on the right to show an additional line on the button. The second line has the same settings as the first: text, text color, font size, and line height.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/iO2pNNwm8UCHUNBE9BCsDw.png)

Positioning

## 

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/EeMhqspAZkiW45YkPrrTIQ.png)

Style

## 

Background. Change the button's background color or add a background image. For an image, extra settings let you choose the image, its size, whether it repeats, and its position inside the button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/RTFru-w2bESLNrPViaupbw.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the button. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/d9-1cLay0Ua_W2eLAn3_qg.png)

Border. Customize the border around the button: the radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/JGCeeQlaBUm85R5L3_dqhQ.png)

Icon

## 

Icons are ready-made graphics you can use to decorate a button. The icons are built into the AXL editor and updated regularly. Choose the icon you like and place it to the left or right of the button text.

Icon on the left. Click the switch on the right to open the settings. Here you can choose an icon, its size, and its color. You can also set a background color for the icon, round its corners, and adjust the outer spacing. This icon appears on the left side of the button.

Icon on the right. Click the switch. The settings are the same as for "Icon on the left", but the icon appears on the right side of the button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/BJaHuwn3pkK6QXTskv2D_g.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/LAbVQ4IhQkCVI5_lp9sYSg.png)

Advanced Settings

## 

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/QLvuC_1Jq0akBumPDAPkMg.png)

---

# Order Bump Component

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/component-order-bump

> Set up the Order Bump component of the Payment Form: which product to offer, whether it adds or replaces, and the text customers see.

Order Bump component. An order bump automatically adds a product to the order or replaces one.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/S-4PQRMiw0iRZmgiyTHPyg.png)

In the payment form settings, turn on the "Order Bump" switch and click "Select".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/BaggNb-TP0-NEdRe32D17g.png)

General Settings

## 

Select the order bump element inside the payment form. The advanced settings open on the right. Choose the product to offer in the order bump. Under "Behavior", choose what happens when the customer selects the order bump: "Add" adds the product to the cart with the main product, and "Replace" replaces the main product.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/jHtN7k2vk0qTYAo-SzR8zQ.png)

In the "Text" group, you can change the text color, font, font size, line height, and text alignment.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/uKcdDaPm002kSi61wIScpg.png)

To edit the text in the order bump field, double-click it.
When the customer checks the box "Add the course and save 50%", the second product is added to the cart, or the main product is replaced automatically.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ITu6Ue1QZEuyYnK6Q5pppg.png)

Positioning

## 

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/tBuTPWuG10qx7ATwNDtGtQ.png)

Style

## 

Background. Change the component's background color or add a background image. For an image, extra settings let you choose the image, its size, whether it repeats, and its position inside the component.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/p9T4MhVO1kWjf1I2_l4c_g.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the component. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text. You can adjust the shadow offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a bolder or fainter shadow), and the shadow color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/PhULteklA0CIyhrKQcs3Kw.png)

Border. Customize the border around the component: the radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the width.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/oEWQWMtt3k-2YVDwZD6iIw.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yey5iffJ6E-bC3S2LkISdA.png)

Advanced Settings

## 

For more on the settings in this section, see the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/8Q07_K2LaE-eQ5-BRdgBZQ.png)

---

# Credit Card Form Component

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/credit-card-form-component

> Set up the Credit Card Form component in a payment form: payment method, labels, positioning, and style.

The Credit Card Form component lets customers enter their credit card details right in the payment form. For now, it supports only Stripe. To learn how to connect Stripe, read the article "[Stripe Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Lfb19gFFDkOBdhcP0eA6sQ.png)

To open the advanced settings of the form, turn on the Credit Card Form switch in the payment form settings, then click the Select button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/5x5P8Q8BbUWDHqPRM-rptg.png)

Element Settings

Select the credit card form inside the payment form. Its advanced settings open on the right. Go to the "Element Settings" tab.

Payment Method. Select a payment method from the list. For now, the credit card form supports only Stripe.

Labels. Enter the text for the form title, then set its color, font size, line height, and text alignment. To hide the title, turn the switch off.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/N4fLkFCFS0atZNRc8ev5Eg.png)

Positioning

## 

For more about this section, read the article "[Positioning](https://docs.axl.tech/positioning)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_fhAPG35e0aj17lCfhOC9w.png)

Style

Go to the "Style" tab.

Background. Change the background color of the form or add a background image. For an image, you can also choose the file and set its size, repeat, and position inside the form.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vpjS-fbdakmQhlSorabjJw.png)

Shadow. Add a shadow around the form. You can adjust the offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a sharper or softer shadow), and the shadow color.

Text Shadow. Add a shadow to the text. You can adjust the offset (left, right, up, down), the blur (a sharper or softer shadow), and the shadow color.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/zodlxUEfvUqG7ZZ7cu2S8g.png)

Border. Customize the border around the form: the corner radius (rounds the corners), the color, and the thickness.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YP60c8f-jUCAvqKBL68B0w.png)

Conditional Show/Hide

For more about this section, read the article "[Conditional Show/Hide](https://docs.axl.tech/conditional-show-hide)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/3dRMw3Ahw0qAZ5ZadmDZRA.png)

Advanced Settings

For more about this section, read the article "[Advanced Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/advanced-settings)."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/6oM47laIXU-Sa003iSw25g.png)

---

# Form for Selling with a Shopping Cart

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/form-for-sale-via-shopping-cart

> Create a form that sells your products through the shopping cart, and choose what happens when a visitor clicks the form button.

The "Form" element is one of the most important blocks in the page editor. Visitors use forms to sign up, subscribe to mailing lists, and place and pay for orders.

Forms also let you sell products and services from your account and collect information about your visitors.

Click a section to jump to its description:
How to Create a Sales FormForm FunctionalityClick Actions

## 
How to Create a Sales Form

To create a form, go to "Sites". Open an existing site or create a new one.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ukMK5WiC8UCF-NJp2wlrTA.png)

Next, go to the "Pages" tab. Open an existing page or create a new one.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wMEdWFC4ckOHQXeDedKx7A.png)

Next, open the "Design" tab to start the page editor. These steps use the legacy editor (v1). To use it on a new page, check "Create in the legacy editor (v1)" when you create the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/b8kje7IVy0aWT8PvhAzTqA.png)

Next, click "Create New Block" and select "Blank Section".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/V-iqt0Qh7U6BMwiJZe9hGg.png)

Click "Add Element".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XSWi7yTtQ0SuviWRhvoGWw.png)

Select the Form element and drag it onto the page.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/aIZ83_q6SEWmynZDWxpivg.png)

You've created a form. Select the whole form to open its settings on the right. There you can change the form's appearance, add fields, and change its style.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/H7Yywdzip0mHdoXsybNDjQ.png)

Note: You can create a form the same way in the "Widgets" section.

Go to "Widgets" and click "Create Widget". Then open the widget to start the page editor. Create a new block and add a "Form" element.

## 
Form Functionality

After you create the form, set up what happens when a visitor fills it out and clicks the button.

To do this, select the button. Its settings open on the right.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/n32tOSXvhUqYBpO1ID4xNA.png)

Open the "Interaction" tab.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1qYFhxOo_Ui6PByVE_ohHA.png)

Here you'll see the "Add Click Action" button. The action you choose determines what happens when a visitor clicks the button.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_m6lyZkTj0qVKzBFu7QeAA.png)

To create a form that sells your products, add these actions:

1. Add to Cart. Select a product from your products and services.
2. Go to Checkout.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vsEvkNqdVU-vLZCWRnLoGw.png)

If you add only the "Add to Cart" action, the visitor sees the cart on the right after clicking the button. They can click the cart to go to checkout and pay.
If you also add the "Go to Checkout" action, the product is added to the cart and the visitor goes straight to the checkout and payment page.

## 
Click Actions

You can choose different click actions for different forms, depending on what the form is for. Here are all the options.

Click "Add Click Action" and choose one:
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/_m6lyZkTj0qVKzBFu7QeAA.png)

Add to Cart. Choose a product from the list. If you turn on "Fast Checkout", checkout starts as soon as the visitor adds the item to the cart. The checkout window opens on the right, and the visitor can buy right away without leaving the page.

Download File. Upload the file that visitors can download by clicking the button.

Go to Checkout. Takes the visitor to the checkout page.

Open Link. Paste the link in the "Link" field and turn on "Open in new tab".

Refresh Page. The page reloads when the visitor clicks the button.

Remove from Cart. Select the product to remove from the shopping cart.

Run Custom Event. Enter the name of the event to trigger. Then specify this event in the automation for this page (the page's "Automation" tab). Learn more in the Automations section.

Run JS Code. Runs JavaScript when the visitor clicks the element. This option is for advanced users. Enter your JavaScript in the "JS Code" field.

Scroll to Block. Select the page block that the visitor jumps to when they click the button.

Show Popup. A popup opens when the visitor clicks the button.

---

# Automations Overview

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/scenario

> Create an automation, choose its events and actions, connect and organize steps, run it for contacts, and review step history.

An automation runs steps for a contact by itself: it starts on an event, such as a form submission, a purchase or a new deal, and then sends messages, adds tags, creates tasks and so on. Each run belongs to one contact, and you can see it in their card.

There are two kinds of automations. A **general automation** is created under **Settings → Automations** and reacts to events across the whole account. An automation of a **page, course, webinar, product** or other item lives on that item's **Automation** tab and reacts only to it. This article covers creating automations and working in the editor; each kind has its own article, listed under "Automation Types".

This article covers the topics below. Click one to jump to its description:

Creating an Automation

Automation Types

Toolbar

Automation Events and Actions

Deleting and Copying Steps

Step History

In the editor, use **Events**, **Actions** or **Wait Steps** to narrow the palette, or select **All** and use its search field. The available steps depend on the automation you opened. **Delay** and **Condition** have their own entries below the grouped list.

## Creating an Automation

To create a new automation, go to "Settings" → "Automations" and click the "Create Automation" button.

![Automations page under Settings with Create Automation and four Northstar Academy automations found by search.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4db7034ecb4a559fe13b42d7829ae4747cb89e3afbb7f118fa212a3fa9af74df.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for the automation. It's only for you and makes the automation easier to find.
2. Description. Add a description of the automation. This field is optional.

Then click "Create".

The new global automation is Inactive. Open its Automation tab to configure the flow; creating it does not start runs.

![New Automation panel with a Northstar Academy title, a short description, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/27f21f2fc1389f01ec6107288a5c046e79d95df8c99dea1decd07e7ced2c4579.png)

Your new automation appears in the list. For each automation, the list shows:

1. Title. The name of the automation. It helps you find automations and tell them apart.
2. Type. The automation type. The types available on the AXL platform are described below. You can also use it to filter the list.
3. Date Created. The date and time you created the automation. Use it to see how old an automation is and to plan updates.
4. Active. Shows whether the automation is on. To turn it on, open the automation and switch the toggle to "Active".
5. Steps. The number of steps (events, actions, and other cards) in the automation. It shows how complex the automation is and helps you plan its structure.
6. Active Runs. The number of automation runs that are still in progress for your users.
7. Completed Runs. The number of automation runs your users have completed.
8. The Edit button (pencil icon). Click to edit the automation.
The Copy button (copy icon). Click to create a copy of the automation.
The Delete button (trash icon). Click to delete the automation, then confirm.

![Automations table with Title, Type, Date Created, Active, Steps, Active Runs and Completed Runs, plus edit, copy and delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4d7d3c54ec3037ed21e7df2330fb206ae8c75710cdb12ab6a4d82a6f7200814c.png)

After you create and configure an automation, you can run it for a specific contact from their contact card. 
Go to "CRM" → "Contacts" and click the contact's name to open their card. In the upper left corner, click the "Actions" button and select "Run Automation". Then choose the automation to run for this contact.

![Olivia Bennett's Actions menu with Run Automation, and the Run Automation panel listing Northstar Academy automations.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c57e6c2f0a69edf7bc1d26db4335842a971f08d489bcc988de933b4756f1103d.png)

Use filters and search to find the contacts you need and act on them in bulk. For details on filtering, see the article "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

Select the contacts, click the "Bulk Actions" button, and choose "Run Automation". The automation you pick runs for all the selected contacts.

![Three selected contacts with the Bulk Actions menu open, including Run Automation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1755f2f18baf7e05b988afc3109403f5cf0bd8d6bca0795e1f06a0ce68875074.png)

## Automation Types

A general automation under **Settings → Automations** can start when a contact is added, gets a tag or joins a group, registers on your Membership Portal, when any order in the account is created or paid, when any course is completed, or when you run it for contacts by hand (**Automation Started**). For an event of one specific page, course, product or other item, use that item's own automation below.

**Important:** an automation runs only while it is **Active**, and only for events that happen after you turn it on. Events from the time it was inactive are not replayed.

## Site Automation

The site automation is in the "Sites" section, on the "Automation" tab of a page.

A site automation defines the sequence of events and actions between you and a potential customer, a site visitor. To turn it on, switch the toggle from "Inactive" to "Active". To learn how to create one, see the article "[Site Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario)".

![Leadership page Automation tab: Form Submitted, a one-day Delay and a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2a44407e9b05f6a04f26b9de69ee1a4526f1ba76327a79f642c213524b6a3724.png)

## Widget Automation

The widget automation is in "Sites" → "Widgets".

A widget automation defines the sequence of events and actions between you and a potential customer, a website visitor. To learn how to create one, read the article "[Site Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario)".

![Widget Northstar · Corporate Training Inquiry, Automation tab: Form Submitted, a one-day Delay and an Add Task step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/07a2914d6d1dc8494696bce8461fc0993c13cf07ed364362f966bd119bcc6e90.png)

## Form and Quiz Automation

The form automation is in "Sites" → "Forms & Quizzes".

A form automation defines the sequence of events and actions between you and a potential customer, a website visitor. To learn how to create one, read the article "[Site Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario)".

![Northstar Executive Program Intake form, Automation tab: Form Completed connected to a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4cf8519ca21df42cf0d171db78dfbba07cbac1aeabf290f078bf00c433e6b9ad.png)

## Webinar Automation

The webinar automation is in the "Webinars" section, on the "Automation" tab of a webinar.

A webinar automation is a sequence of events and actions that starts after a user registers for a webinar in your account on the AXL platform. It reacts to the registration and then responds, for example by sending reminder emails and a link to the webinar room. To learn how to create one, read the article "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario)".

![Northstar Academy Leadership Masterclass, Automation tab: registration and two reminder branches, each with a Send Message step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fff3808df3cf055fcf6e510532aa56c187cd138d42821f020470ac9be8a80ee8.png)

## Course Automation

The course automation is in "Memberships" → "Courses", on the "Automation" tab of a course.

A course automation defines the sequence of events and actions that run when a user of your Membership Portal starts a course, while they study, and after they finish it. To turn it on, switch the toggle from "Inactive" to "Active". To learn how to create one, see the article "[Course Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/course-scenario)".

![Leadership Certificate course, Automation tab: Course Started with a Delay and Send Email, and Course Completed with Issue Certificate.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c128d6438de21792502e1c8282fe5ce6615c540aaa5d00914477951f542d8bce.png)

## Cohort Automation

The cohort automation is in "Memberships" → "Cohorts", on the "Automation" tab of a cohort.

A cohort automation defines the sequence of events and actions within a cohort. To turn it on, switch the toggle from "Inactive" to "Active". To learn how to create one, see the article "[Cohorts](https://docs.axl.tech/cohorts)".

![Leadership Cohort Spring 2027, Automation tab: Cohort Started and Cohort Ended, each connected to a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1926f86fe62579a99a55326398179685989aa82fe2ca73c76bf4e3a59ad40d89.png)

## Certificate Automation

A certificate is an official document issued to participants who complete a specific training. It confirms that the participant gained certain knowledge, skills, or competencies in a given field. To learn how to set up a certificate template, read the article "[Certificates](https://docs.axl.tech/certificates)".

The certificate automation is in "Memberships" → "Certificates", on the "Automation" tab of a certificate. It runs when a certificate from this template is issued and is used to deliver it, for example to send the download link. A certificate attached to a course is issued automatically when the course is completed; to issue it at another moment, use the **Issue Certificate** step in any automation. To learn how to create a certificate automation, read the article "[Certificate Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/certificate-scenario)".

![Leadership Certificate, Automation tab: Certificate Issued connected to a Send Message step with the Certificate released template.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8ec133ee21c48443d2f93a381252c4e3d06f45c120e4f774229b3bdf5e90ad62.png)

## Gamification Automation

The gamification automation is in "Memberships" → "Gamification", on the "Automation" tab.

It runs when a contact earns an achievement, for example to credit extra points or send a congratulation. To set up achievements and points, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)"; to build the automation, see "[Gamification Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification-scenario)".

![Gamification, Automation tab: Achievement Earned connected to a Gamification: Add Transaction step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d12fab8d9b18eaea1275e43bf0e6ba262b6e96e6cc389ca786b5d55ea85f3710.png)

## Product or Subscription Automation

The product or subscription automation is in "Sales" → "Products & Services", on the "Automation" tab of a product.

A subscription automation defines the sequence of events and actions that run when a user of your account buys a subscription, or when a subscription renewal payment succeeds or fails. You can also manage a third-party service by sending data at renewal, for example to remove a user from a Telegram group or add them. To learn how to create a subscription automation, read the article "[Subscription](https://docs.axl.tech/subscription)".

![Leadership Membership subscription, Automation tab: renewal payment failed and succeeded branches with reminder and confirmation messages.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f84eb52b521186c7db1a99a4e7e3b33edc8d1a9caaaca012d93add97b6a706cb.png)

## Affiliate Program Automation

The affiliate program automation is in "Sales" → "Affiliate Program", on the "Automation" tab.

An affiliate program is a way for you and your partners (affiliates) to cooperate when selling a product or service on the AXL platform. Its purpose is to bring in new customers and increase sales. To learn how to set one up, read the article "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)".

An affiliate program automation is a sequence of events and actions. It reacts to activity in the affiliate program and responds automatically. On the "Automation" tab, you can automate processes and set up the sequence of events and actions for the program. To learn how to create one, read the article "[Affiliate Program Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program-scenario)".

![Affiliate Program, Automation tab: Sign-Up via Affiliate Link (Referral) connected to a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82ff9598a14fba103ec2b60f1312ac155cb1f00d09b48fdd7bf4ff186a918c42.png)

## Deal Automation

The deal automation is in "CRM" → "Deals", on the "Automation" tab of a pipeline.

A deal automation is a sequence of events and actions. It reacts to what happens with deals in a pipeline and responds automatically, so you can automate your pipeline processes. To learn how to create one, read the article "[Deal Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/deal-scenario)".

![Fall Enrollment pipeline, Automation tab: Deal Added with Add Task, and Moved to Stage with a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cf6c09fcdbb7d51ee5c3fb37dfbbf6a017ef1fb2d1fd0a86e3a1f9cc4f955e99.png)

## Chat Channel Automation

The chat channel automation is in "Communications" → "Chat Channels", on the "Automations" tab of a channel.

A chat channel automation is a sequence of events and actions inside a chat channel of your account on the AXL platform. It reacts to what users do in the channel and responds automatically. To learn how to create one, see the article "[Chat Channel Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels-scenario)".

![Northstar Academy website chat channel, Main Automation: Message received connected to Send Message, both still needing setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7ff328bb79f3ed6fe18469ae47e4ef018d9fd72d9bda44b7f9c31d73af434460.png)

## Chatbot Automation

The chatbot automation is in "Communications" → "Chatbots", on the "Automation" tab of a chatbot.

A chatbot automation is a sequence of events and actions inside a chatbot in your account on the AXL platform. It reacts to what users do in the chatbot and responds automatically. To learn how to create one, read the article "[Chatbot Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/chatbot-scenario)".

![Strategy Lab Welcome chatbot automation at 80% zoom: Chatbot Started, Add Tags, Send Message, Delay and Send Email steps.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e5ddce2cea1189ae2864fa2a3d23db085390c0bacedfb58ef5590dab22ef4aa2.png)

## Telegram Groups/Channels App Automation

You'll find the automation for the "Telegram Groups/Channels" app in "Settings" → "Apps". To open it, click the "Manage" button in the "Telegram Groups/Channels" window. The list shows all connected Telegram groups and channels. Click the "Manage Automation" button next to a group or channel to open and configure its automation.

This automation is a predefined sequence of actions that run automatically in response to specific events, such as a message sent to a group or channel. The actions can include talking with users, sharing information, running surveys, sending notifications, delivering learning materials, and more.

![Connected Telegram Groups and Channels app with Scenario management highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/inTY-eARN0CWj-HUx9Yq8w.png)

## Contact Automations

Contact automations are in "CRM" → "Contacts". Open a contact and go to the "Automations" tab.

The tab lists the automations that have run for the contact. For details, read the article "[Automations in the Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/scenarios-in-the-contact-card)".

![Contact Automations tab showing completed automation runs and their action icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ada674e77b3efd1de4008a89a5d47ffc94b2397d63bea231b69b79d138237c80.png)

## Toolbar

The toolbar is located in the upper right corner:

1. "Copy" button. Copies one or more selected steps. You can copy steps and connections between automations within the same account. The button becomes active after you select steps.
2. "Paste" button. Pastes the steps you copied into the automation.
3. "Auto-arrange" button. Aligns the steps on the canvas vertically and horizontally. You'll be asked to confirm, because this can't be undone.
4. "Full screen" button. Expands the canvas to full screen. Click it again to exit full screen.
5. "Zoom to fit" button. Scales the steps to fit the window.
6. "-" and "+" buttons. Zoom the canvas out or in. You can also zoom with the mouse wheel.
7. Zoom level. Shows the current zoom as a percentage.
8. "Help" button. Opens help for the editor.
9. "History" button. Opens the automation's history.

![Automation editor toolbar: copy, paste, layout, fit view, minimap, zoom out, zoom in, zoom level, help and history.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3e02030e1042a61ebb59015fbea6996cffdf5dfe66906df8a8d8a0554d66cefa.png)

## Automation Events and Actions

An event starts the automation when the specified activity or condition occurs, such as a contact action or a scheduled timer. Each automation type has its own set of events. For more about events, see the article "[Automation Event Types and Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".

An action is a step the automation takes in response to an event. The palette shows the actions available in the current context; some require data from a connected preceding step. For more about actions, see the article "[Automation Action Types and Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".

![Automation editor with the step palette on the All tab, and Automation Started, Condition, Delay and Add Task cards on the canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d14ef240ad94236187b9492a2a49c7f1d4573d041730dbda7bab1c1a000f8a19.png)

The panel on the left lists the events and actions available for this automation. Drag a step onto the canvas, or double-click its name in the palette to add it. A single click selects the palette item without adding it. Event cards are blue and action cards are green.

![Step palette switched to Events, listing contact events next to the automation canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4402e859e08a19879338c052ca760ca222eb68a87ef6d616a0acc78293612913.png)

To build a sequence of events and actions, connect the cards: draw a line from one event or action to another. To remove a link between two steps, double-click the link.

![Connected cards on the canvas: Automation Started to a Condition and a Delay, with Add Task, Add Note and steps that still need setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9b8f520bd43cc4ad7602e9bfca6001048d60322b9ef860d7b23618f471ab79ea.png)

Anchor points let you shape the lines between steps. To add one, hold Ctrl (Cmd on a Mac) and click the spot on the line where you want the point. Then drag the point to move it on the canvas.
To delete an anchor point, double-click it. Double-clicking the line deletes the line and all its points.

![Selected link between Automation Started and a Condition card, shown as a dashed blue line.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d5b8e18f8ddee3907a3f1e612beec3ffbe98e1203737bd59b7ce2b42f3d8a964.png)

For a configurable card, open its gear menu and select **Configure Step**, or double-click the card. Fill in the panel and use its final button: **Save** for Condition, Delay and Add Task; **Add** for Grant Product Access; **Confirm** for Add Note. Reopen the card to check that the values were retained. A card that says **No Configuration Needed** has no settings to fill in.

Keep the automation Inactive while building it. Complete required fields, remove Configuration Required warnings and check the connections before activating it.

![Add Task gear menu with Configure Step, Copy Step and Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b4d986abdbfe4a5a2123147bbc9ca6ec87a7ae97ffd9b0c4f47b3e9946a4938e.png)

In a step's settings, you can add template variables.

A template variable is a placeholder that's automatically replaced with the data you choose, such as the contact's name or email, your account name, or an order number. For example, add the contact's first name variable to an email, and AXL replaces it with each recipient's first name when the email is sent.

![Add Note step settings with the step name, the Add Template Variables link and a note that uses #Contact.FirstName#.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc109eaa373809a68fdcc4c185a74d256eab061db487a544e344f670a66ed38c.png)

Click the "Add Template Variables" button next to the field you're filling in. A list of variables opens on the right. Select the ones you need.

![Add Variables panel listing contact variables such as #Contact.FirstName#, #Contact.Email# and UTM fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c9d40f9f1e6f5eabce6ab2fe58bf276e57605eb02d0383744263df3bae2bcc86.png)

If you added the "Create Order" action earlier in the automation, the user's order data appears in the list of template variables.

![Add Variables panel showing the Order group after a Create Order step: order ID, number, status, dates, amounts and payment link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ffdb4dea10f8aa138cf94d859116b34f89dc2f0e223c37a07c7621a2c8ff209d.png)

For more about variables in step settings, see the article “[Variables in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario)”.

## Deleting and Copying Steps

To delete several steps at once, hold Shift and click the events and actions you want to remove. Then press Delete or Backspace and confirm the deletion.

![Delete Step confirmation: deleting the step also removes all its connections.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0b2955b0febb02e19fd7d2f1246cb139b16f00d327134e3a1dd711764ab9e3b9.png)

You can copy steps and connections between automations within the same account. Hold Shift and click the steps you want to copy, then click each line you want to include while still holding Shift. A connection is copied only when the line and both steps it joins are selected. Selected steps get a blue border.

Then click the "Copy" button or press Ctrl + C. A message in the upper right corner confirms that the steps were copied.

![Selected Add Task card and the message: Selected steps copied. Open the automation you want and press Ctrl+V or click Paste on the action bar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/92eeed7894f3fd5763be798ec67d16ce9ce643412d75ac0b34afb329bea8a0b0.png)

Open another automation in your account. Steps can only be moved within the same account. Click the "Paste" button or press Ctrl + V. The steps appear in the new automation.

![Automation with only Automation Started and the Paste (CTRL/CMD + V) tooltip on the toolbar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/56cd204450341496c019b7d5c7e1bda26a1a1679dcf134556e80c5229560231f.png)

## Step History

In the upper right corner of each event and action card, a counter shows how many times the step has run. It appears once the step has run at least once. Hover over it to see "Number of runs". To view the history of a step, click the counter.

![Automation canvas of Northstar Academy · Week 1 check-in: the Week 1 question step shows its run counter, 2, with the Number of runs tooltip.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bd8a72381977fc660330fc633519e360e45f7d005fdc26fb4236b9665649808b.png)

Click the counter and the "Step History" panel opens. It shows the date and time of each run and the contacts it ran for. Click a contact's name to open their CRM contact card.

![Step History of the Send Message (Chat/Email) step: two runs on October 21, 2026, each for Olivia Bennett, with a link to her contact card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dd2c7c7a1bd57b375b2445926404c3d0a635a075f5c01a004c97447a1ff121ca.png)

Each button in a step also has a counter, which shows how many times the button was clicked. Hover over it to see "Trigger count".

![The Going well button of the Week 1 question step shows its counter, 1, with the Trigger count tooltip; I need help shows 0.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/754acaafa0e88afe7e2d62afcd13f1c5d789eac5cd1ef5d6e31d6ec451b22ad5.png)

Click the button's counter and the "Branch History" panel opens. It shows the date and time of each click and the users who clicked the button, so you can see which button each user chose. Click a name to open the CRM contact card.

![Branch History of the Going well button: two clicks by Olivia Bennett on October 21, 2026, with links to her contact card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/20e9bf46228293f8477e8a0e06e4f5b2cf9119b667ab6c1d940b97ee08fd3648.png)

## Check a run for one contact

1. Open **CRM → Contacts** and select the contact.
2. For a manually started general automation, use **Actions → Run Automation** and select the automation. For an event-based automation, perform the event that you configured.
3. Open the contact’s **Automations** tab and locate the new run.
4. Open its **History** action and check which steps ran. For a branch, verify the route taken; for an email or other external action, inspect the actual result separately.

---

# Course Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/course-scenario

> Open a course automation, choose Course Started or Course Completed, configure actions, connect the steps, and activate the flow.

A course automation runs steps for a contact when they start or finish one course: for example, it sends a welcome email when they open the course for the first time, or tags them and offers the next course when they finish it. To create a course, see "[Courses](https://docs.axl.tech/courses)".

## How to Create a Course Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **Memberships → Courses** and open the course. Then open its **Automation** tab.

![Courses list showing the Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate course.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bc1e51fc69dbaae1eadb991c9dd7ff2e2f9207dcc324547e15ab7bf981a4f87.png)

### Choose the trigger

Drag one of the two course triggers onto the canvas. Neither needs settings: they always react to this course.

| Trigger | Fires when |
| --- | --- |
| **Course Started** | The contact opens the course for the first time. Getting access is not enough: a contact who bought the course but has not opened it yet does not start the trigger. |
| **Course Completed** | The contact completes every required lesson available to them. Optional lessons do not count. If a lesson has a task that you check, the course is completed only after the task is accepted. |

**Important:**

- If the course has a certificate, AXL issues it on completion by itself. Do not add a certificate step to **Course Completed**, or the contact gets two certificates.
- To react to a purchase or to access being granted, use the product's automation instead: see "[Product Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/product-scenario)".
- To react to a single lesson or its task, use that lesson's own automation: open the lesson and its **Automation** tab. It has triggers for a started or completed lesson, a completed task and a submitted form.

![Events palette in the inactive Northstar Academy course automation, showing Course Started and Course Completed.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76602f3968550b3ca5fbadde8a8564898738d203d7c7b50c599c4dada5dbf3ab.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger: for example, **Delay** and **Send Message (Chat/Email)** for a welcome series, or **Add Tags** and **Add Task** on completion. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**, or double-click it. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Actions palette beside the inactive Northstar Academy course automation, with Course Started linked to a five-minute Delay.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9bafe75a68d3a8c40a6de3b1bca7871d95e12a7e676417cfec54467e099617cc.png)

### Activate the automation

Open each step that shows **Configuration required**, fill in its settings and save them. Then turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**. The automation runs only for contacts who start or finish the course after you turn it on.

![Inactive activation switch above a configured Course Started and five-minute Delay flow; the course is unpublished.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4e390eb46c546e63ddd97cc88ec91f83ecaebdf360155d6fefcfd710e47029ad.png)

---

# Website Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario

> Open a site page automation and configure payment, form submission or custom events with connected response actions.

A website automation runs steps when a visitor does something on one page of your site: submits a form, creates or pays an order through the page's payment form, or triggers a custom event. For example, it sends a lead magnet after a form is submitted, or creates a task for a manager after a payment. Each page has its own automation.

## How to Create an Automation for a Website

### Open the automation

Go to **Sites** and open the site. On the **Pages** tab, open the page through its title or the edit icon. Then open the page's **Automation** tab.

![Sites page filtered to the Northstar Academy · Executive Programs site card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/04da2fbb2a71e720d029966a90e5df547df399f0ef7cb3d0391db57707a069f6.png)

![Northstar Academy · Executive Programs, Pages tab with the row actions shown for the Leadership page, including the edit pencil.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f5386038f484150e73a396ca5c1e5fcecb4c0a86421ba18fb282c58cad479143.png)

### Choose the trigger

Drag one of the page triggers onto the canvas and open its settings through the gear icon → **Configure Step**:

| Trigger | Fires when | Settings |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Form Submitted** | A visitor submits a form on this page | **Form Name**: the name of one form. Empty means any form on the page. |
| **Order Created (Payment Form)** | An order is created from this page's payment form, before payment | **Triggers if an admin created the order**: **Yes**, **No** or **Any** |
| **Order Paid (Payment Form)** | An online payment for an order from this page succeeds | **Payment Type**: **Full**, **Partial** (a balance remains) or **Any**; and the same admin-order setting |
| **Custom Event** | The page sends an event with this name, for example from a button | **Event Name**, required |

**Important:**

- A form submission with an email or phone number creates or updates the contact in your CRM. Use the automation for what comes next: emails, tags, tasks, deals.
- **Form Name** must match the form's name on the page exactly, except for capital letters. With a typo, the trigger never fires; leave it empty if the page has one form.
- The order triggers react only to orders from this page. An order your team creates by hand is not linked to the page and does not start them. For such orders, use **Order Created** and **Order Paid** in a general automation under **Settings → Automations**.
- **Custom Event** works only for a visitor the site already knows as a contact, for example after they submitted a form or signed in. For an anonymous visitor nothing happens. A trigger without an event name never fires.

For an unpaid-order reminder, connect **Order Created (Payment Form)** to a **Delay**, then a **Condition** with **Order Paid** = **No**, and send the reminder from the matching output. See the example in "[Product Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/product-scenario#kb-reminder)".

![Form Submitted step settings with Step Name and Form Name, where an empty form name means any form.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/de50d003ac4bc2b07c5e755d8de8f59ca463857fe40a268c2620183e067b0c85.png)

![Order Paid (Payment Form) step settings: step name, Payment Type Any, Partial or Full, and whether an admin-created order triggers it.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f8789be7d4ead4e38d50a97718061bb880e87575c1ad30481de75bc974ef61c.png)

![Custom Event step settings with Step Name and the required Event Name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/161e6941620140986a774cf3459d14680004090703616a4ba0c6165fa138ee18.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**. After **Form Submitted**, a **Condition** can branch on the submitted answers. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Leadership page automation with the Actions palette open beside a Custom Event that still needs an event name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a926779ee6cf3634b4f24bc9c3d3ca20dd4b21a5f0708bec8214ae2f35977c86.png)

### Activate the automation

Open each step that shows **Configuration required**, fill in its settings and save them. Then turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**.

---

# Cohort Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/cohort-scenario

> Set up actions before a cohort starts, at its start or end, and when a participant joins, then configure and connect the steps.

A cohort automation runs steps for the participants of a cohort on its timeline: a reminder a few days before the start, a welcome message on the first day, a feedback request when the cohort ends. Each step runs separately for every participant who has access to the cohort. To create a cohort and set its dates, see "[Cohorts](https://docs.axl.tech/cohorts)".

## How to Create a Cohort Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **Memberships → Cohorts** and open the cohort. Then open its **Automation** tab.

![Cohorts list with Northstar Academy · Leadership Cohort — Spring 2027, its dates and the edit button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/202c7757542e3b80580dd1eab24a8f21a85185c2a28908ac9b33683a0f481053.png)

### Choose the trigger

Drag one of the cohort triggers onto the canvas:

| Trigger | Fires | Settings |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Before Cohort Starts** | The set number of days before the cohort's start date | Number of days. Required: without it the trigger never fires. |
| **Cohort Started** | When the cohort's start date arrives | Optional: **Configure Delay → Use Delay** to fire a number of days later, and **Wait until a specific time of day**. |
| **Cohort Ended** | When the cohort's end date arrives | None |
| **Added to Cohort** | When a person joins the cohort: after a purchase or when you grant access | None |

**Important:**

- The date triggers run once per person. **Cohort Started** also catches up: someone who joins within 30 days after the start gets its steps when they join. So do not duplicate the welcome in an **Added to Cohort** branch, or late joiners receive it twice.
- **Before Cohort Starts** has no catch-up: it runs during one day after the moment you set and only until the start. A person who joins later does not get it.
- AXL checks the date triggers on a schedule, so a step can run some minutes after the exact time. If the time of day matters, use **Wait until a specific time of day**.

![Cohort automation: cohort events in the palette and Cohort Started settings with Use Delay, Days and Wait until a specific time of day.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64c6cd559aaaf57da15656281d15367230acc54ae7781047b515428f50aa6234.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab and drag the steps you need onto the canvas: for example, **Send Message (Chat/Email)** with the meeting link, **Add Task** for the cohort's curator, or **Add Tags** to mark graduates on **Cohort Ended**. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step** and connect it to the trigger. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Cohort automation with the Actions palette open and Send Email selected, beside the Cohort Started and Cohort Ended branches.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/203b26e3c9f70f4dc082a53b0bdf9296b7d74aeb6f57e41cf9c1bee2c001fa6b.png)

### Activate the automation

Open each step that shows **Configuration required**, fill in its settings and save them. Then turn on **Active** in the upper-left corner of the canvas. Turn it on before the first trigger date. If you turn it on within 30 days after the start, the **Cohort Started** steps run at once for everyone already in the cohort.

---

# Webinar Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario

> Choose webinar registration, reminder, start or end events, configure actions, connect the flow, and activate the automation.

A webinar automation runs steps for each registered attendee: it confirms the registration, sends reminders with the personal link to the room, and follows up after the webinar. Every webinar gets its automation when it is created. To create a webinar, see "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".

## Create a Webinar Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **Webinars**, open the webinar and then its **Automation** tab. Build on the steps already there or add your own.

![Webinars list with Northstar Academy · Leadership Masterclass, its status, date, attendees and actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f6ced01b4a26e796aca0ccf85eb478de88a05c53f95996f978a4dbe43566fe53.png)

![Leadership Masterclass, Automation tab: Registered for Webinar and two Webinar Reminder events, each linked to a Send Message step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fff3808df3cf055fcf6e510532aa56c187cd138d42821f020470ac9be8a80ee8.png)

### Choose the trigger

Each trigger runs its steps separately for every attendee:

| Trigger | Fires when | Settings |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Registered for Webinar** | A contact registers for the webinar | None |
| **Webinar Reminder** | At the set time before the scheduled start, or after the actual start | **Attendee Status** (**Any**, **Online**, **Offline**), **Before Webinar Starts** or **After Webinar Starts**, and the time in days, hours and minutes |
| **Webinar Started** | The webinar starts | Optional: only attendees who are online or offline at that moment |
| **Webinar Ended** | The webinar ends | None |
| **Custom Event** | The webinar room sends an event with this name | **Event Name**, required |
| Chat message | An attendee writes a message with your keywords in the webinar chat | Words, matched like in chat channels; without words it never fires |

**Important:**

- A reminder is sent only at its moment. A person who registers later does not get it: someone who signs up 30 minutes before the start does not receive the "1 hour before" reminder. Cover late registrations in the **Registered for Webinar** message.
- **After Webinar Starts** counts from the moment the webinar actually started. If it never starts, these reminders are not sent.
- A **Webinar Reminder** runs only after you save its settings: without them it never fires.
- For an auto-webinar, a session without its own automation uses the automation of its template.

![Webinar Reminder step settings: Attendee Status (Any, Online, Offline), Automation Start before or after the webinar, and 1 hour before start.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e7aeb342811f18d1882ec1df24ee6733d05b1df34260af715c157cc55cb8687b.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**. In messages, add the webinar variables, such as `#Webinar.Name#` and `#Webinar.TimeToStart#`, and the attendee's personal link to the room, which opens it without signing in. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; for variables, see "[Variables in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Leadership Masterclass automation with the Actions palette open, beside the registration and reminder message flows.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/463ef093edc8c4511ffd8c3ab82c2c9f37e5e8581380022fcdfd68789b0d8523.png)

### Example: a deal for attendees who watched over 45 minutes

Hand your most engaged attendees to the sales team. After the webinar, the automation checks how long each attendee watched and creates a deal for everyone who stayed more than 45 minutes.

On the Events tab, drag **Webinar Ended** onto the canvas. It fires shortly after the webinar ends, when the minutes each attendee watched are already counted.

Drag a **Condition** step onto the canvas and connect the trigger to it. In the step settings, choose the **Webinar Attendance (Duration)** filter, keep **From the automation** in the webinar field and set **more than 45 minutes**. Click **Save**.

![Condition step settings: Webinar Attendance (Duration), webinar From the automation, more than 45 minutes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7a22bc931ba87b4e7367a72c325f99fa059f536faa9e6eb6eb4d832018090b17.png)

On the Actions tab, find **Deals: Create or Update Deal** and drag it onto the canvas. Connect the green port of the condition, the one for attendees who meet it, to this step. In its settings, choose the pipeline and the stage for the new deal and who gets it: a specific team member, round robin or the contact owner. Click **Save**.

![Deals: Create or Update Deal step settings: Fall Enrollment pipeline, New Inquiries stage, assigned to a specific team member.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7773fa078c83635e9b024fc17f88b83f3f10d1b237fc81a39fb77ad4dc4de1f9.png)

The branch is ready. Attendees who watched 45 minutes or less leave through the red port: connect another step to it if you want to reach them too, for example a message with the recording.

![Webinar Ended trigger, the Watched more than 45 minutes? condition and the Deal for engaged attendee step in the Fall Enrollment pipeline.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1282177a607d70b185c95343c48d8ce25317ffbfd361810a219aee1657ea19f2.png)

### Activate the automation

Turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**. Turn it on before registration opens: people who registered while it was inactive do not get the registration message.

![Active webinar automation with registration and reminder messages using #Webinar.Name# and #Webinar.TimeToStart# variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8ef72b2d6ff098f31b51d83c9f44b8a7d516648eed8c697d6ebba901ee259993.png)

---

# Product Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/product-scenario

> Configure purchase, order-created and subscription events, personalize messages, and set up an unpaid-order reminder.

A product automation runs steps when someone orders or buys one product, and for subscriptions when a renewal is paid, fails or ends. For example, it sends the buyer a link to their account after payment, or reminds them about an unpaid order. To create a product, see "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".

**Important:** the buyer gets access to the courses and materials included in the product automatically when the order is paid. You do not need an automation step to grant it.

## Create a Product Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **Sales → Products & Services**, open the product and then its **Automation** tab.

![Products &amp; Services list with the Leadership Membership and Leadership Certificate products.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/830b478fc72de7c6b4f6d3cba519d5e72cff56454e5c20a1e8832c9b65d8e5ea.png)

### Choose the trigger

Every product has these triggers:

| Trigger | Fires when |
| --- | --- |
| **Product Order Created** | An order with this product is created, before payment. The order may never be paid. |
| **Product Purchased** | The order is paid in full, or your team marks it completed, and the buyer gets access. With installments, it fires once, after the last payment. |
| **Order Paid (Payment Form)** | A payment arrives for an order with this product. In **Payment type**, choose **Full**, **Partial** (a balance remains) or both, for example to thank a buyer for each installment. |

The order triggers have the setting **Triggers if an admin created the order**: **Yes** reacts only to orders your team created by hand, **No** only to orders customers placed themselves, **Any** to both. Leave it empty to react to both.

![Leadership Certificate product automation: Product Purchased and Product Order Created events, with Product Order Created settings for admin-created orders.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9f3e6b1206e8119b7d28fe55c9343fef7a7ecc734ac1ac76304e89d95faa3931.png)

A product with the **Subscription** type has five more triggers. None of them needs settings except **Subscription Period Check**.

| Trigger | Fires when |
| --- | --- |
| **Renewal Payment Succeeded** | The next subscription period is paid. |
| **Renewal Payment Failed** | A renewal charge fails. AXL may retry, so this can fire several times for one period, and it does not mean access has ended. Write the message with that in mind. |
| **Subscription Period Check** | A set number of days **Before End** of a period or **After Start**, for example a renewal reminder 3 days before the end. |
| **Canceled by Customer** | The customer cancels the renewal themselves. |
| **Subscription Ended** | Access ends because the subscription was not renewed, including any extra days of access. |

![Subscription product Events palette: Product Order Created, Product Purchased, Renewal Payment Failed and Succeeded, Subscription Ended and Subscription Period Check.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64708dee8e5320ca0d7c82947f49a41b628115da6c41eb76c72775a7bec3483b.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Leadership Certificate product automation: Product Purchased linked to Send Email, and Product Order Created linked to Delay, Condition and Send Email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9787d503327189b97e9be5cd4aefcb022e9196176577ebb0eb985ae5b10c63ef.png)

### Variables for purchase emails

In a message or email step, click **Add Variables** next to the text to insert the buyer's and the order's data:

- `#School.ContactInviteLink#` (Personal link to the account) takes the buyer to their account on your Membership Portal. A new buyer first sets a password; a registered one goes straight in or to the sign-in page. Put it in the email after **Product Purchased** so the buyer can open the course at once.
- The **Order** group inserts the order number, status, contents, amounts and a payment link. The payment link is what an unpaid-order reminder needs.

For all variables, see "[Variables in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario)".

![Add Variables panel listing contact and account variables, including #School.ContactInviteLink# (personal link to the account).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6ed27774ec78a935debf5b82b6022a3b41b140cddc6be2419dc722d3e55d3ef7.png)

![Add Variables panel showing the Order group: order ID, number, status, dates, amounts and payment link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ffdb4dea10f8aa138cf94d859116b34f89dc2f0e223c37a07c7621a2c8ff209d.png)

### Example: remind about an unpaid order

Connect **Product Order Created** → **Delay** (for example, 1 hour) → **Condition** → **Send Email**:

1. In the **Condition**, add **Order Paid** and select **No**. This checks the order from this run at the moment the delay ends.
2. Connect **Send Email** to the condition's matching output, and add the order's payment link to the email. A buyer who has paid by then gets no reminder.

**Important:**

- Connect the steps before you configure the **Condition**: **Order Paid** appears only when a step before it supplies the order.
- Do not use the contact's **Product Purchase** condition for this check. It looks at the whole purchase history and can match an earlier paid order of the same product.
- For a second reminder, add another **Delay** and another **Order Paid** check before its email.

![Product Order Created linked to a one-hour Delay, a Condition and Send Email; the last two still need setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e3d667c29ea88a5dde0a5a414da20a56badaef5a095897ae222856cf7fab344b.png)

### Activate the automation

Open each step that shows **Configuration required**, fill in its settings and save them. Then turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**.

---

# Chatbot Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/chatbot-scenario

> Build simple and webinar chatbot automations, configure start phrases and events, connect actions, and activate the chatbot flow.

A chatbot automation is the conversation a chatbot runs in your chat channels: it greets the person, asks for their data, sends materials and follows up. It starts when the person sends the bot's key phrase or opens its start link. A chatbot is one of two types: **Simple**, for any conversation, or **Webinar**, which registers people for a webinar and reminds them in the chat. To create a chatbot, see "[Chatbots](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-bots)".

## Create an Automation for a Simple Chatbot

### Open the automation

Go to **Communications → Chatbots**, open the chatbot and then its **Automation** tab. The **Chatbot Started** trigger is already on the canvas: it fires when the bot starts for a person.

![Chatbots list with Northstar Academy — Strategy Lab Welcome, a Simple chatbot.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/46e1bb743b208111850870c8eb053800636a604ed73be054060efc6d24e90992.png)

![Strategy Lab Welcome chatbot automation at 80% zoom: Chatbot Started, Add Tags, Send Message, Delay and Send Email steps.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e5ddce2cea1189ae2864fa2a3d23db085390c0bacedfb58ef5590dab22ef4aa2.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps onto the canvas and connect them, starting from **Chatbot Started**. Typical steps are **Send Message (Chat/Email)**, **Request Data** to ask for an email or a name, **Delay** and **Add Tags**. Messages go to the chat where the bot started. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Strategy Lab Welcome chatbot automation with the Actions palette filtered to Send Email, beside the welcome sequence.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4542ab0f9696da68512f6b3cc1ed0da884f4bfa8e8ff161c5ceddb3b650c0f75.png)

### Set how the chatbot starts

Open the chatbot's **Settings** tab. There are two ways to start it:

- **Key phrase.** Click **Add Phrase**, enter the phrase and click **Save**. The bot starts when a person sends exactly this phrase in any of your chat channels. Capital letters do not matter, but the message must contain nothing else. Tell people the exact phrase, for example "course guide".
- **Start link.** Copy the channel's link from the same tab and share it. When the person opens it, the chat opens and the bot starts by itself.

**Important:**

- A key phrase needs at least 3 characters. Key phrases work across the whole account, so use a different phrase for each chatbot.
- While the bot's conversation with a person is still running, for example waiting on a **Delay** or an answer, sending the phrase again does not restart it.
- The automation must be **Active**: turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas.

![Chatbot Settings with an empty Key Phrases list and the Add Phrase button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/71a3558ad400a22659c4801535dc54bdb1701d84f4e830ff4b4f834c6eaf849d.png)

![Chatbot Settings with the Telegram channel launch link highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/aBIg74fUCUWg8jn9O-2yMQ.png)

## Create an Automation for a Webinar Chatbot

A webinar chatbot registers people for a webinar right in the chat and then sends them reminders and the link to the room there. Connect it to the webinar first: open the webinar's **Settings**, find **Registration via Chat Bots**, choose the bot and the channels, and share the registration link it gives you.

Then go to **Communications → Chatbots**, open the webinar chatbot and its **Automation** tab. Besides **Chatbot Started**, it has the webinar triggers: **Registered for Webinar**, **Webinar Reminder**, **Webinar Started** and **Webinar Ended**. They work as in a webinar automation, including the reminder rules: see "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario#kb-events)". Add the actions the same way as for a simple chatbot.

**Important:** while the chatbot's automation is inactive, people who register through it do not get any messages from it. Turn on **Active** before you share the link.

![Chatbots list with Add Chatbot, the Webinar chatbot Northstar Academy — Masterclass Assistant and the Simple Strategy Lab Welcome chatbot.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8ae7c6ef88dc57ee87cb195ff37dce2d76199c5e171e8e18d9abcff70008db3f.png)

![Webinar chatbot automation: Chatbot Started linked to Request Data steps for the email and the first name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4e2be39c2cb8e00b665f8c00c7bd8e04c7b041794adb83c4ccd6f761fb3a853.png)

![Webinar chatbot Events palette: Chatbot Started, Registered for Webinar, Webinar Ended, Webinar Reminder and Webinar Started.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a83b10e527c94e5a1c4d7d0d9b2899dbd3b81af04dd591b66b5709a24ae5b33a.png)

### Check how the chatbot starts

Before sharing, test it yourself: send the key phrase from a chat that is not in a conversation with the bot, and open the start link. Both should reach the first message of the automation.

---

# Chat Channel Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels-scenario

> Create keyword-based chat replies with exact or partial matching, configure response actions, and activate the channel automation.

A chat channel automation replies to messages that contain your keywords: for example, it sends the schedule when someone writes "schedule", or creates a task for a manager when someone writes "help". It works in the channel where it is set up: a website chat, Telegram, WhatsApp, Instagram and so on. To connect a channel, see "[Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels)".

## Create a Chat Channel Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **Communications → Chat Channels** and open the channel. Then open its **Automations** tab.

A channel can have several automations. The main one, marked with a star, is created with the channel and cannot be deleted. You can add more, for example a separate automation for each topic. Each automation has its own **Enabled** switch in the list.

![Chat Channels list with Add Channel and the Northstar Academy website chat channel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/78acad33bab9ed1211299731890613482940d8d592c7de70244053bda26826a9.png)

![Northstar Academy website chat channel, Main Automation: Message received linked to Send Message.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7ff328bb79f3ed6fe18469ae47e4ef018d9fd72d9bda44b7f9c31d73af434460.png)

### Set up the Message Received trigger

Drag **Message received** onto the canvas and open its settings through the gear icon → **Configure Step**. In **Words**, add the words or phrases that start the automation. For each one, choose how it matches:

| Setting | The trigger fires when | Example for the word "price" |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Exact Match** | The whole message is this word or phrase. Spaces at the start and end are ignored. | "price" fires; "what is the price?" does not. |
| **Contains** | The message contains this text anywhere, even inside another word. | "what is the price?" and "prices" both fire. |
| **Ignore case** | Added to either mode: capital and small letters do not matter. | "Price" and "PRICE" fire too. |

To add a word, click **Add Word** or press Enter. Select **Send the next message as a reply** to send the automation's next message as a reply to the contact's message, quoting it.

**Important:**

- A trigger with no words never fires. There is no "any message" mode: the automation reacts only to the words you list.
- **Contains** also finds the text inside other words. A short word such as "art" also fires on "start" and "party", so use whole phrases or **Exact Match** for short words.
- Messages without text, such as a photo or a voice message, do not start the trigger.
- If a message matches the words of several triggers, in this or in another automation of the channel, all of them run. Keep the words of different branches distinct, or the contact gets several replies.

In an Instagram channel, the palette also has a story trigger: it fires when someone replies to your story or mentions your account in theirs, optionally only for replies with your words.

![Message received step settings: a sample word with Exact Match or Contains, Ignore case, Add Word and Send the next message as a reply.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7dce708098679eac498e904b8ec396e15e6d85ca3ca65f9014e26cbb80b327a3.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger: for example, **Send Message (Chat/Email)** with the answer, and **Add Task** for a manager to follow up. The message goes to the same chat the contact wrote from. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Channel automation canvas: Message received linked to Send Message (Chat/Email) and Add Task, all still needing setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08bd6c3fc97a8ddd68419bd71fbee2318889d98ce4a170067f9e188da8a1f603.png)

### Activate the automation

Turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**. To build several branches, add more **Message received** triggers with different words to the same canvas.

![Channel automation with the Active/Inactive switch and two branches from Message received: a reply message and a task.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08bd6c3fc97a8ddd68419bd71fbee2318889d98ce4a170067f9e188da8a1f603.png)

---

# Deal Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/deal-scenario

> Open a pipeline automation, choose deal-added or stage-change events, configure the target stages and actions, and connect the flow.

A deal automation runs steps when something happens to deals in one pipeline: a deal is added, moves to a stage, gets a note, a task or a new owner. For example, it creates a follow-up task for the deal owner when a deal reaches "Proposal Sent", or sends the contact an email when the deal is won. To create a pipeline and its stages, see "[Deals](https://docs.axl.tech/deals)".

## Create a Deal Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **CRM → Deals**, select the pipeline and open its **Automation** tab. The automation belongs to this pipeline only: deals in other pipelines do not start it.

![Northstar Academy Fall Enrollment pipeline with the Automation tab open, Inactive status and all five deal events.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4b6986f1e265502c8404fd4e208e3a068a880fd17790839b1b2a66e56f30c7c5.png)

### Choose the trigger

Drag one of the deal triggers onto the canvas and open its settings through the gear icon → **Configure Step**:

| Trigger | Fires when | Settings |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Deals: Deal Added** | A deal is created in this pipeline: by hand, by a form or by another automation | **Stages**: the stages the new deal must be in. Empty means any stage. |
| **Deals: Moved to Stage** | A deal enters a stage, including a deal moved here from another pipeline | **Stages**: the stages that count. Empty means any stage change. |
| **Deals: Note Added** | Someone adds a note to a deal | None |
| **Deals: Task Added or Changed** | A task linked to a deal is created, changed or deleted | Optional: the task status and which of these changes count |
| **Deals: Owner Changed** | The deal owner is assigned, changed or removed | Any owner or specific team members, or the case when the owner is removed |

**Important:**

- A new deal starts both **Deal Added** and **Moved to Stage** for its first stage. If both triggers watch the same stage, both branches run, so use only one of them for a stage.
- A deal moved from another pipeline starts **Moved to Stage** here, not **Deal Added**.
- Archiving or restoring a deal does not start any trigger.

![Deal Added step settings with New Inquiries selected in Stages.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7ee9631a1860ba737f2a6faf9cdff92430833739248f753bacb7075065e97903.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger. For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

A common step is **Add Task** for the deal owner. In its settings, set **Deal** to **From Automation** so the task is linked to the deal that started the automation, and choose **Deal Owner** under **Assign To**.

- **Later** sets when the task starts, for example in 3 days. The task itself is created at once, when the step runs. To create it later, put a **Delay** step before it.
- If the deal has no owner, the task is created without an assignee.

![Add Task settings linked to the automation's deal, starting three days later for 30 minutes and assigned to the deal owner.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8507361275f7ddbd7525ef107309843f067643137b29619c50aa05f31d687b4.png)

### Activate the automation

Open each step that shows **Configuration required**, fill in its settings and save them. Then turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**. Deals that changed before that do not start it. For a complete example, see "[How to Automate a Deal](https://docs.axl.tech/how-to-automate-a-deal)".

---

# Affiliate Program Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program-scenario

> Set up affiliate sign-up and purchase automations, choose whether actions run for the referral or affiliate, and connect rewards and messages.

The affiliate program automation runs extra steps when someone signs up or pays through an affiliate's link: for example, it sends the new customer a welcome email or rewards the affiliate. Commissions and sign-up bonuses set in the program itself are credited automatically; the automation is for everything else. To set up the program, see "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)".

## Create an Affiliate Program Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **Sales → Affiliate Program** and open the **Automation** tab.

![Affiliate Program, Automation tab: Sign-Up via Affiliate Link (Referral) connected to a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82ff9598a14fba103ec2b60f1312ac155cb1f00d09b48fdd7bf4ff186a918c42.png)

### Choose the trigger

Drag one of four triggers onto the canvas. Each pair fires on the same event; the difference is **for whom** the next steps run:

| Trigger | Fires when | Next steps run for |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Sign-Up via Affiliate Link (Referral)** | A new contact signs up through an affiliate's link | The new contact (the referral) |
| **Sign-Up via Affiliate Link (Affiliate)** | The same sign-up | The affiliate whose link was used |
| **Purchase via Affiliate Link (Referral)** | An order of a referred contact is paid | The buyer |
| **Purchase via Affiliate Link (Affiliate)** | The same paid order | The affiliate the buyer is attached to |

The sign-up triggers need no settings. The purchase triggers have one: **First purchase**. Choose **Yes** to react only to the buyer's first paid order, **No** for repeat orders only, or leave **Doesn't matter**.

**Important:**

- The triggers fire only while the affiliate program is active and the contact is still attached to the affiliate. How long the attachment lasts is set by **Partner assigning duration** in the program settings.
- The sign-up triggers fire only when a **new** contact is created. An existing contact who opens an affiliate link does not start them.

![Affiliate Program palette with four events: purchase and sign-up via an affiliate link, for the affiliate and for the referral.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ac74100024e3c1a02e1804686b024bd660a24f1cd2f91d7fea5563f57f7578b2.png)

### Add the actions

Drag actions from the **Actions** tab and connect them to the trigger. Configure each one through its gear icon → **Configure Step**. Actions that are specific to the affiliate program:

- **Bonus Balance: Add Transaction** credits or debits the bonus balance of the contact the steps run for. Bonus credits can be spent on your products and cannot be withdrawn.
- **Affiliate Program: Add Transaction** credits or debits the commission balance of the contact's affiliate. If the contact has no affiliate, the step does nothing and the automation continues.
- **Affiliate Program: Change Affiliate** attaches the contact to another affiliate, or detaches them if you leave **Affiliate** empty. It affects future commissions only; commissions already credited stay.

**Important:** the program settings can already credit sign-up bonuses: **Deposit to the partner's bonus account** and **Deposit to the referral's bonus account**. If they are on, do not add the same bonus with **Bonus Balance: Add Transaction** in a sign-up automation, or the contact receives it twice.

![Affiliate Program automation: Bonus Balance: Add Transaction found in the palette and added to the canvas, linked from Sign-Up via Affiliate Link (Referral).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b5dfadea1a02bb3698ad3e5ab4a379be994c6e3b28fd71054a9abb863c47f365.png)

![Bonus Balance: Add Transaction step settings with Amount, Credit selected, Expiration and Comment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/70ba84d9c5897c602de35d784c739b0c0134723578a80e55b2cdd23d2c2d1a3c.png)

### Variables for affiliate messages

In a message or email step, click **Add Variables** next to the text field to insert:

- `#Contact.PartnerLink("link")#`: the contact's personal affiliate link. Replace `link` with the address of the page to promote, for example `#Contact.PartnerLink("https://northstar.onaxl.com/leadership")#`: AXL adds the affiliate's code to that address. Without the address, `#Contact.PartnerLink#` inserts only the code. For a contact who is not an affiliate, the variable stays empty, so use it in messages to affiliates.
- `#Contact.BonusAmount#`: the contact's current bonus balance.

For the other variables, see "[Variables in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario)". To connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Add Variables panel with #Contact.BonusAmount# (bonus account balance) and #Contact.PartnerLink(&quot;link&quot;)# (website link with the affiliate code).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6ed27774ec78a935debf5b82b6022a3b41b140cddc6be2419dc722d3e55d3ef7.png)

### Activate the automation

Turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**. While it is inactive, sign-ups and purchases still count for the program, but the automation steps do not run.

![Affiliate Program automation with the Active/Inactive switch and the referral sign-up flow: welcome email and $50 bonus credit.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1f38c7d6e6fdeadb8a728826462322e2b1f2313257dfcbeea1db0a6f48c82444.png)

---

# Certificate Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/certificate-scenario

> Configure what happens after a certificate is issued, add certificate variables to messages, and connect the issuing and notification automations.

Every certificate template has its own automation. It runs each time a certificate from this template is issued to a contact and decides what the contact receives: by default, a message with a personal link to the certificate. You can add more steps, for example tag graduates or open access to the next course.

A certificate can be issued in three ways, and the automation runs in each case:

- **Course completion.** When the certificate is linked to a course, AXL issues it automatically when a student completes that course.
- **Manually.** Click **Issue Certificate** on the certificate page and choose the contacts.
- **From another automation.** Add the **Issue Certificate** step to a webinar, product or other automation (see Issue a certificate from another automation).

To create and design a certificate template, see "[Certificates](https://docs.axl.tech/certificates)".

## Open the Certificate Automation

### Find the certificate

Go to **Memberships → Certificates** and click the certificate's title.

![Certificates list with Create Certificate and the Northstar Academy · Leadership Certificate row.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/da99a262ed8ca644f5b4deb749cb4a05bd8b86426456660fe30a8011b75be5d1.png)

Open the **Automation** tab. AXL creates a default automation with every new certificate template: **Certificate Issued** connected to **Send Message (Chat/Email)**. It is active right away, so recipients get their certificate even if you change nothing.

![Leadership Certificate, Automation tab: Certificate Issued connected to Send Message with the Certificate released template; the automation is Active.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c3f4ce7575558cdfa768b44c20256a2683a640805f2fb1cd9e79f2269796e13a.png)

## The Message with the Certificate

Double-click the **Send Message (Chat/Email)** step to open its settings. The default step sends the system email template **Certificate released**. You can edit the email with **Edit Email** or pick your own template. Turn on **Chat Message** to also send the link in a chat channel; its default text is *To obtain a certificate, follow the link #Cert.Link#*.

Two variables deliver the certificate itself. Click **Add Template Variables** next to the text field to insert them:

- `#Cert.Link#`: the recipient's personal link to their issued certificate. Keep it in every message: this link is how the recipient gets the certificate.
- `#Cert.Number#`: the certificate's number, for example to quote it in the text.

**Important:** the step does not attach the issued certificate as a file. Files you add to the message with **Click or drag files here to upload** are the same for every recipient, such as a program brochure. The personal certificate always goes out through `#Cert.Link#`.

Click **Save** to apply the changes. For the other variables, see "[Variables in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario)".

![Add Variables panel with the Certificate group: #Cert.Number# (certificate number) and #Cert.Link# (download link).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64bd34dc6be775002ad40196077d56d67d747f2313b5844219ea33edd26f73f7.png)

## Add More Steps

Add actions after **Certificate Issued** to do more for each graduate. For example:

- **Add Tags** or **Add to Group**: mark graduates, for example with the tag `leadership-graduate`, to segment them in broadcasts.
- **Grant Product Access**: open the next course or a bonus library.
- **Notification**: let your team know who has completed the program.

Drag an action from the **Actions** tab onto the canvas, configure it through its gear icon → **Configure Step**, and connect **Certificate Issued** to it. For working with the canvas (connections, copying and deleting steps), see "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)"; for all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".

## Issue a Certificate from Another Automation

To issue a certificate for something other than completing a linked course, for example attending a webinar, add the **Issue Certificate** action to that webinar's or product's automation. In its settings, choose:

- **Certificate**: the template to issue.
- **Contact**: leave it empty to issue the certificate to the contact who is going through the automation. Choose a contact only to always issue it to that one person.
- **Course**: optional; the course the certificate refers to.

When the step runs, AXL issues the certificate, and this template's own automation sends the message with the link. Do not add a second message about the certificate in the webinar automation, or the contact receives two.

![Issue Certificate step settings with Certificate, Contact and Course selectors.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6236a7260abff5c4d060e3fa1cde82c423dd0e46243bb2fd075afbf4953cdb08.png)

### Keep the automation active

The **Active** switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas must stay on. If you turn it off, certificates are still issued, but recipients get no message and the link reaches no one. After changing steps, check that none of them shows **Configuration required**.

![Leadership Certificate automation with the Active switch on, Certificate Issued and the Send Message step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c3f4ce7575558cdfa768b44c20256a2683a640805f2fb1cd9e79f2269796e13a.png)

To see who has received the certificate, open the certificate's **Issued** tab.

---

# Gamification Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/gamification-scenario

> Respond to earned achievements, add or deduct points, award or remove achievements, and configure the gamification automation.

A gamification automation runs steps when a contact earns an achievement: for example, it credits extra points, gives access to a product or sends a congratulation email. The points and achievement steps described here also work in any other automation, such as a course automation that awards a badge when a lesson is completed. To set up achievements, points and the points store, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)".

## Create a Gamification Automation

### Open the automation

Go to **Memberships → Gamification**. If gamification is off, turn on **Enable Gamification** first: while it is off, every points and achievement step fails, in this and in any other automation. Then open the **Automation** tab.

![Gamification page with the Enable Gamification switch turned on and the Settings, Achievements, Points Store, History, Leaderboard and Automation tabs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2e41e5737dec97d2deda1fc71613b23908a8832ab46da4b3d27565794a32dc41.png)

![Gamification, Automation tab: Achievement Earned connected to a Gamification: Add Transaction step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d12fab8d9b18eaea1275e43bf0e6ba262b6e96e6cc389ca786b5d55ea85f3710.png)

### Choose the trigger

The gamification automation has one trigger: **Achievement Earned**. It fires when a contact receives an achievement, whether it was awarded by an automation step or by hand. In its settings, choose a specific achievement, or leave **Any** to react to every achievement.

**Important:** earning an achievement already credits the points set in the achievement itself. Add a **Gamification: Add Transaction** step only for extra points, or the contact gets the achievement's points twice.

![Gamification automation with the Events palette showing Achievement Earned.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/57d52e01c26132c518282308add7df3d09219ef8cfd144777da7149827799161.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**. The gamification steps:

| Step | What it does | Settings and notes |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Gamification: Add Transaction** | Credits points to the contact's points account (**Deposit**) or deducts them (**Withdrawal**) | **Points**: a number, or a variable such as `#Scenario.Data(points)#`. For a deposit, **Validity** sets when the points expire: never, after a period or on a date. For a withdrawal, **Don't create if not enough funds** is on by default: if the contact has fewer points, the step fails and nothing is deducted. You can also link the transaction to a course lesson or a library article and add a comment. |
| **Gamification: Add Achievement** | Gives the contact an achievement | Also credits the achievement's points and starts **Achievement Earned**. A disabled achievement cannot be awarded: the step fails. **Add even if already earned** is on by default: a contact who already has the achievement gets it again, with its points again. Turn it off so the step fails for such a contact instead. |
| **Gamification: Remove Achievement** | Takes the achievement away | Also removes the points that the achievement credited, so the balance goes down. If the contact does not have the achievement, the step does nothing and the automation continues. |

Points are not money: contacts spend them only in the points store and cannot withdraw them. They are also separate from the bonus balance. For all other actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)".

![Actions palette filtered to Gamification: Add Achievement, Add Transaction and Remove Achievement.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/33030224609c1c7e8ce2a64efeb31f76c0f87f7f8b08f6b3b8a0b9d6e9f08ebb.png)

### Automation for a points store item

Each item in the **Points Store** has its own automation. Open the item and go to its **Automation** tab. Its trigger, **Item Purchased**, fires when a contact spends points on this item.

The item can deliver its reward without an automation: access to a product or a bonus balance credit, as set in the item. If the item delivers nothing by itself, for example a consultation or a certificate, use its automation: add a task for your team, send the contact an email with the details, or add a tag.

### Activate the automation

Turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**. While it is inactive, achievements and points still work as set in **Gamification**, but the automation steps do not run.

![Gamification automation with the Active/Inactive switch at the top of the palette and the configured achievement-to-points flow.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/513d92af74d17945444fda9791603642fb700210f170aefb3147414611350d8b.png)

---

# Telegram Groups/Channels App Automation

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/telegram-groups-channels-application-scenario

> Open a connected Telegram group’s automation, configure message keyword matching, and connect replies or follow-up actions.

Each Telegram group or channel connected through the **Telegram Groups/Channels** app has its own automation. It reacts to messages with your keywords in that group: for example, when a member writes "homework", it sends them the instructions or creates a task for a curator. Approving join requests and removing members without access are done by the app itself, not by the automation. To connect the app and a group, see "[Telegram Groups/Channels App](https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels)".

## Create an Automation for the Telegram Groups/Channels App

### Open the automation

Go to **Settings → Apps**, open the **Connected** tab and click **Manage** on the **Telegram Groups/Channels** app. In the **Groups** list, click the **Manage Automation** icon next to the group. The icon appears once the group's status is **Connected**. The same link is in the group's **Edit Group** window.

![Connected Applications tab with the Telegram Groups and Channels app and Manage highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/k_8k8nuoVEOI9bOAvcPXWA.png)

![Telegram Groups and Channels list with the Scenario management icon highlighted beside a group.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rTB4dgnNXU6nPES_IV6zDw.png)

### Set up the Message Received trigger

The automation has one trigger: **Message Received**. Drag it onto the canvas and open its settings through the gear icon → **Configure Step**. Add the words that start it and choose how each one matches: **Exact Match** (the whole message is the word), **Contains** (the word appears anywhere, even inside another word) and **Ignore Case**. The matching works the same way as in chat channels: see "[Chat Channel Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels-scenario#kb-events)".

**Important:**

- A trigger with no words never fires, and only text messages count.
- While a member's previous run of this automation is still going, for example waiting on a **Delay**, their new messages do not start another run.

![Telegram group Events palette with Message Received and its Configure node menu.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/cY4v-ONOQ0-vg5XRlk47eg.png)

![Message Received settings with word matching, Complete Match, Contains and Ignore Case options.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/tYguZ4vGcEquF9SbBCkDaw.png)

### Add the actions

Open the **Actions** tab, drag the steps you need onto the canvas and connect them to the trigger. Configure each step through its gear icon → **Configure Step**.

To use the member's message in a step, click **Add Variables** and select `#TelegramGroup.MessageText#` from the **Telegram Group** group. For example, a task for a curator with the text `New question in the group: #TelegramGroup.MessageText#`.

For all actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)"; for variables, see "[Variables in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario)"; to connect, copy or delete steps, see "[Automation Events and Actions](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-48)" and "[Deleting and Copying Steps](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario#e-72)". For a worked example, see "[How to Automate Telegram Groups and Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/how-to-automate-the-work-of-the-telegram-groups-channels)".

![Telegram group Actions palette and the Configure node menu for Send Message.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Mmk_yhPjbUSaUwVPPgUUvQ.png)

### Activate the automation

Open each step that shows **Configuration required**, fill in its settings and save them. Then turn on the switch in the upper-left corner of the canvas so it reads **Active**.

---

# Date and Time Format

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/date-and-time-format

> Learn how to format the webinar date and time in the messages and emails that your webinar automation sends.

Webinar automations use the "Webinar date" and "Webinar time" variables. When you create a webinar, you set its date and time. To show them in a readable format, use the additional "DateFormat" variable ("Webinar date format").

DateFormat is a variable that converts the date and time of an event into a readable format.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Where DateFormat Is Used

How to Set DateFormat

## Where DateFormat Is Used

Go to Webinars. Create a webinar or open an existing one.

![Webinars list searched for the Northstar Academy masterclass, showing its title, Not Started status, scheduled date, attendee count, edit action and Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4a3f962eb28c9d4b0821edbc6ad15143369130a9324c44cce2314904abc55707.png)

Next, open the "Automation" tab.

Select the "Send Message (Chat/Email)" action in the webinar automation. Click the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the action and select "Configure Step".

![Send Message (Chat/Email) automation step with its gear menu open, showing Configure Step, Copy Step and Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3995dc00c91e3fc61a2ef744b86a20a4963e2f65b03b40bb92033c1ef3c7458d.png)

The window that opens shows where the date and time format is used.

![Unsaved Send Message Step Settings with Chat Message enabled, a Webinar.DateFormat expression with the Webinar.Timezone companion, and Add Template Variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7ce42e0bdbd107df6bf81ec3322e45acb6d4ef5c63726ca06c77cf7be9287bbe.png)
Unsaved chat-message example: include the format expression and the webinar time zone together. This shows the expression before rendering; no message has been sent.

You can change the date and time format in the "Chat Message" text and in the "Email Template".

![Send Message Step Settings with Email on, Use Template selected, an Email Template selector with a system template, Edit Email, Create Template and the email preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/89347e51ccf93134b1539b3916c7437e3131c6f524864fa3992a9a5dd9c1b0eb.png)
When Email is enabled, Use Template displays the selected email template and its editing controls. This screenshot shows the template entry settings, not a rendered or sent email.

## How to Set DateFormat

1. Open the configured **Send Message (Chat/Email)** step in the webinar’s **Automation** tab. In **Step Settings**, turn on **Chat Message** if you are editing a chat message.
2. Below the **Chat Message** field, click **Add Template Variables**. In **Add Variables**, type `Webinar` into **Search** to show the webinar variables. Click the `#Webinar.DateFormat#` text, labelled **Webinar date format**, then close the variables panel. Clicking the variable text adds it to the message; the adjacent copy icon copies it to the clipboard.
3. Replace that placeholder with a complete expression, including the format in parentheses. For example, use `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd MMMM yyyy, HH:mm)#` for a full date and 24-hour time.
4. Keep `#Webinar.Timezone#` in the same message as `DateFormat`, beside the formatted time. In the current webinar automation workflow, a `DateFormat` expression on its own can produce an empty date. A complete example is: `Our Northstar masterclass starts on #Webinar.DateFormat(dd MMMM yyyy, HH:mm)# #Webinar.Timezone#.`
5. Complete the message’s other required settings, including the intended channels under **Delivery Channels**, and click **Save**. Reopen **Configure Step** to check that the expression is retained.

The format changes how the scheduled date is displayed; it does not reschedule the webinar. AXL uses the webinar’s scheduled time zone. Month and weekday names follow the language used to render the message. Before activating a customer-facing automation, check the resulting message in your own test channel.

![Add Variables filtered by webinar, showing Date, Time, Timezone and DateFormat with their descriptions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08036813e4bb691aa8c1ed2d0221242a8f534cd27459464f8a851d1387003270.png)
Search for Webinar to find Webinar date format alongside the date, time and time zone variables. This is the variable picker; no message has been sent.

![Lower unsaved Step Settings with Delivery Channels, Internal selected, Email enabled with a template, and Cancel and Save controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c1ed19035587c5ba9f83f8395834bb1c43ffd8a71421366a2576c26d2b99b176.png)
The lower part of the same unsaved example shows delivery settings and the footer. Email is on in this example. Cancel discards changes; Save stores the step settings.

The table below shows sample DateFormat options and their results, that is, how the date and time appear in the text the recipient gets.

These examples use a webinar scheduled for 23 October 2026 at 17:30:45 in its scheduled time zone. English month and day names are shown; the names can differ with the language used for the message.

| DateFormat expression | Displayed result |
| --- | --- |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd.MM.yyyy HH:mm)#` | 23.10.2026 17:30 |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd MMMM yyyy, dddd)#` | 23 October 2026, Friday |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dddd, dd MMMM yyyy)#` | Friday, 23 October 2026 |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(hh:mm tt)#` | 05:30 PM |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(hh-mm tt)#` | 05-30 PM |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd MMMM h-mm tt)#` | 23 October 5-30 PM |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd MMMM yyyy, hh:mm)#` | 23 October 2026, 05:30 |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(yyyy.MM.dd hh:mm)#` | 2026.10.23 05:30 |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm tt)#` | 2026-10-23 05:30 PM |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd MMMM yyyy, dddd, HH:mm)#` | 23 October 2026, Friday, 17:30 |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(ddd, dd MMMM yyyy, hh:mm:ss)#` | Fri, 23 October 2026, 05:30:45 |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(MM/dd/yyyy, HH-mm)#` | 10/23/2026, 17-30 |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd/MM/yyyy, hh:mm tt)#` | 23/10/2026, 05:30 PM |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dddd, dd MMMM yyyy, hh:mm tt)#` | Friday, 23 October 2026, 05:30 PM |
| `#Webinar.DateFormat(dd MMMM, dddd, hh:mm tt)#` | 23 October, Friday, 05:30 PM |

To pick the date and time format you need, use these values:

d → Day of the month, 1 to 31

dd → Day of the month with a leading zero, 01 to 31

ddd → Abbreviated day name (Mon, Tue, Wed, etc.)

dddd → Full day name (Monday, Tuesday, etc.)

h → Hour in 12-hour format (for example, 4)

hh → Hour in 12-hour format with a leading zero (for example, 06)

H → Hour in 24-hour format (for example, 15)

HH → Hour in 24-hour format with a leading zero (for example, 22)

m → Minutes

mm → Minutes with a leading zero

M → Month number (for example, 3)

MM → Month number with a leading zero (for example, 04)

MMM → Abbreviated month name (for example, Jan, Feb, Sep, Oct, Dec)

MMMM → Full month name (for example, December)

s → Seconds

ss → Seconds with a leading zero

t → First letter of AM or PM (A or P)

tt → AM or PM

y → Year without a leading zero (for example, 2022 becomes 22)

yy → Two-digit year with a leading zero (for example, 2022 becomes 22)

yyy → Year (for example, 2022)

yyyy → Year (for example, 2022)

K → Time zone information of the date and time value (for example, +05:00)

z → Signed offset of the local operating system's time zone from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), in hours (for example, +6)

zz → Like z, but with a leading zero (for example, +06)

zzz → Signed offset of the local operating system's time zone from UTC, in hours and minutes (for example, +06:00)

Format letters are case-sensitive: `MM` is the month, while `mm` is minutes; `HH` uses the 24-hour clock, while `hh` uses the 12-hour clock. Include `tt` with a 12-hour time when recipients need to distinguish morning from evening.

To show the webinar’s time zone, use `#Webinar.Timezone#`. The `K` and `z` format letters describe date-value offset information; they do not select or change the webinar’s scheduled time zone.

---

# Automation Event Types and Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-events-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations

> Find automation events by feature, learn when they trigger, and configure their available settings.

An event, or trigger, is what starts an automation: a form submission, a purchase, a date, a message with a keyword. Each automation offers only the events of its own item: a course automation has course events, a deal automation has deal events, and so on. This article lists them by automation type. Drag an event onto the canvas, open its settings through the gear icon → **Configure Step** if it has any, and connect it to actions.

**Important:** an event starts the automation only while the automation is **Active**, and only for what happens after you turn it on.

## Site Automation Events

Open the site in **Sites**, the page on the **Pages** tab, and its **Automation** tab. A widget in **Sites → Widgets** has the same events. Details: "[Website Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario)".

| Event | Fires when | Settings |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Form Submitted** | A visitor submits a form on this page | **Form Name**; empty means any form |
| **Order Created (Payment Form)** | An order is created from this page's payment form, before payment | **Triggers if an admin created the order** |
| **Order Paid (Payment Form)** | An online payment for an order from this page succeeds | **Payment Type** (**Full**, **Partial**, **Any**) and the admin-order setting |
| **Custom Event** | The page sends an event with this name; only for a visitor known as a contact | **Event Name**, required |

**Triggers if an admin created the order** is the same in every order event: **Yes** reacts only to orders your team created by hand, **No** only to orders customers placed, **Any** or empty to both.

![Order Paid (Payment Form) step settings: step name, Payment Type Any, Partial or Full, and whether an admin-created order triggers it.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f8789be7d4ead4e38d50a97718061bb880e87575c1ad30481de75bc974ef61c.png)

![Custom Event step settings with Step Name and the required Event Name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/161e6941620140986a774cf3459d14680004090703616a4ba0c6165fa138ee18.png)

## Form and Quiz Automation Events

Open the form in **Sites → Forms & Quizzes** and its **Automation** tab. It has one event, **Form Completed**: the person fills in the required fields and submits the form or quiz.

![Northstar Executive Program Intake form, Automation tab: Form Completed connected to a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4cf8519ca21df42cf0d171db78dfbba07cbac1aeabf290f078bf00c433e6b9ad.png)

## Course Automation Events

Open the course in **Memberships → Courses** and its **Automation** tab. Details: "[Course Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/course-scenario)".

| Event | Fires when |
| --- | --- |
| **Course Started** | The contact opens the course for the first time |
| **Course Completed** | The contact completes every required lesson. If the last lesson has an assignment you check, it fires when the assignment is approved. |
| **Email Opened**, **Email Clicked** | Available after a **Send Email** step: the contact opens that email or clicks a link in it |

![Leadership Certificate course, Automation tab: Course Completed and Course Started in the palette, with start and completion flows.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c128d6438de21792502e1c8282fe5ce6615c540aaa5d00914477951f542d8bce.png)

![Course automation: Send Email followed by Email Opened and Email Clicked events, beside Course Started, Delay, Course Completed.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ebf2da6b122f64257bcd58999da4324febbab897782623fb8bc31940a0c0146f.png)

## Course Step Automation Events

Open the course, then the lesson on the **Steps** tab, and the lesson's **Automation** tab.

| Event | Fires when |
| --- | --- |
| **Course Step Started** | The contact opens the lesson |
| **Course Step Completed** | The contact completes the lesson |
| **Assignment Approved** | Your team approves the lesson's assignment, for example to open extra materials |
| **Form Submitted** | The contact submits a form in the lesson; **Form Name** as on a site page |
| **Custom Event** | The lesson sends an event with this name; **Event Name** required |

![Week 1 lesson, Automation tab with the Events palette: Assignment Approved, Course Step Completed, Course Step Started, Custom Event and Form Submitted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/111d73836ebd7c891ff0eca0fb67eef6af22cf21be9612f98e5999bd26ae9cbc.png)

## Cohort Automation Events

Open the cohort in **Memberships → Cohorts** and its **Automation** tab: **Before Cohort Starts** (a set number of days before the start), **Cohort Started** (optionally delayed by days), **Cohort Ended** and **Added to Cohort**. The date events run once per person. Details and catch-up rules: "[Cohort Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/cohort-scenario)".

![Cohort automation: cohort events in the palette and Cohort Started settings with Use Delay, Days and Wait until a specific time of day.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64c6cd559aaaf57da15656281d15367230acc54ae7781047b515428f50aa6234.png)

## Webinar Automation Events

Open the webinar in **Webinars** and its **Automation** tab: **Registered for Webinar**, **Webinar Reminder** (before the scheduled start or after the actual start, optionally only for online or offline attendees), **Webinar Started**, **Webinar Ended**, **Custom Event** and a webinar chat message with keywords. A reminder is sent only at its moment, so people who register later do not get it. Details: "[Webinar Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/webinar-scenario)".

![Northstar Academy Leadership Masterclass, Automation tab: registration and two reminder branches, each with a Send Message step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fff3808df3cf055fcf6e510532aa56c187cd138d42821f020470ac9be8a80ee8.png)

## Product Automation Events

Open the product in **Sales → Products & Services** and its **Automation** tab. Details: "[Product Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/product-scenario)".

| Event | Fires when |
| --- | --- |
| **Product Order Created** | An order with this product is created, before payment |
| **Product Purchased** | The order is paid in full and access is granted |
| **Order Paid (Payment Form)** | A full or partial payment arrives for an order with this product |
| Subscription products only: |
| **Renewal Payment Succeeded** | The next period is paid |
| **Renewal Payment Failed** | A renewal charge fails; it can fire several times for one period |
| **Subscription Period Check** | A set number of days **Before End** or **After Start** of a period |
| **Canceled by Customer** | The customer cancels the renewal |
| **Subscription Ended** | Access ends because the subscription was not renewed |

![Subscription product Events palette: Product Order Created, Product Purchased, Renewal Payment Failed and Succeeded, Subscription Ended and Subscription Period Check.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64708dee8e5320ca0d7c82947f49a41b628115da6c41eb76c72775a7bec3483b.png)

## Chatbot Automation Events

Open the chatbot in **Communications → Chatbots** and its **Automation** tab. **Chatbot Started** is already on the canvas: it fires when a person sends the bot's key phrase or opens its start link. A webinar chatbot also has the webinar events. Details: "[Chatbot Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/chatbot-scenario)".

![Strategy Lab Welcome chatbot automation at 80% zoom: Chatbot Started, Add Tags, Send Message, Delay and Send Email steps.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e5ddce2cea1189ae2864fa2a3d23db085390c0bacedfb58ef5590dab22ef4aa2.png)

## Chat Channel Automation Events

Open the channel in **Communications → Chat Channels** and its **Automations** tab. **Message received** fires when a message matches one of its **Words** (**Exact Match** or **Contains**, optionally **Ignore case**). Without words it never fires. An Instagram channel also has a story trigger for replies to and mentions of your stories. Details: "[Chat Channel Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels-scenario)".

![Message received step settings: a sample word with Exact Match or Contains, Ignore case, Add Word and Send the next message as a reply.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7dce708098679eac498e904b8ec396e15e6d85ca3ca65f9014e26cbb80b327a3.png)

## Deal Automation Events

Open the pipeline in **CRM → Deals** and its **Automation** tab: **Deals: Deal Added** and **Deals: Moved to Stage** (both with an optional **Stages** filter), **Deals: Note Added**, **Deals: Task Added or Changed** and **Deals: Owner Changed**. A new deal starts both **Deal Added** and **Moved to Stage** for its first stage. Details: "[Deal Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/deal-scenario)".

![Fall Enrollment pipeline, Automation tab: Deal Added with Add Task, and Moved to Stage with a Send Email step that still needs setup.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cf6c09fcdbb7d51ee5c3fb37dfbbf6a017ef1fb2d1fd0a86e3a1f9cc4f955e99.png)

## Affiliate Program Automation Events

Open **Sales → Affiliate Program** and its **Automation** tab. **Sign-Up via Affiliate Link** and **Purchase via Affiliate Link** each come in two versions: **(Referral)** runs the next steps for the new contact or buyer, **(Affiliate)** for the affiliate. The purchase events have the **First purchase** setting. Details: "[Affiliate Program Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program-scenario)".

![Affiliate Program palette with four events: purchase and sign-up via an affiliate link, for the affiliate and for the referral.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ac74100024e3c1a02e1804686b024bd660a24f1cd2f91d7fea5563f57f7578b2.png)

## Certificate Automation Events

Open the certificate in **Memberships → Certificates** and its **Automation** tab. **Certificate Issued** is already on the canvas: it fires when a certificate from this template is issued, for example to send the download link. Details: "[Certificate Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/certificate-scenario)".

![Leadership Certificate, Automation tab: Certificate Issued connected to a Send Message step with the Certificate released template.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8ec133ee21c48443d2f93a381252c4e3d06f45c120e4f774229b3bdf5e90ad62.png)

## Gamification Automation Events

Open **Memberships → Gamification** and its **Automation** tab. **Achievement Earned** fires when a contact receives an achievement, a specific one or **Any**. A points store item has its own automation with **Item Purchased**. Details: "[Gamification Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification-scenario)".

![Gamification palette with the Achievement Earned event and the Add Achievement, Add Transaction and Remove Achievement actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/196b1f2584c36ca9941039efd93931c5422447a84d0a4ca7ab921d25a0a4e0d8.png)

## Telegram Groups/Channels Automation Events

Open **Settings → Apps**, the **Telegram Groups/Channels** app, and **Manage Automation** next to the group. **Message Received** fires when a group message matches one of its words, with the same options as in chat channels. Details: "[Telegram Groups/Channels App Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/telegram-groups-channels-application-scenario)".

![Telegram group Message Received settings with word matching options open.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Ps-rA2-7WkSOhlJIvDfXVw.png)

## General Automation Events

A general automation is created in **Settings → Automations** and reacts to events across the whole account:

| Event | Fires when | Settings |
| --- | --- | --- |
| **Automation Started** | You run the automation for contacts from their card or with **Bulk Actions**, or another automation starts it | None; it is on the canvas from the start |
| **Contact Created** | A new contact appears in your CRM | None |
| **Added to Group** | A contact is added to the selected group | The group |
| **Contact Tags Added** | A contact gets the selected tags | The tags |
| **User Signed Up** | A person signs up on your Membership Portal | None |
| **Order Created** | Any order in the account is created, including one your team creates by hand | The admin-order setting |
| **Order Paid** | A payment is recorded for any order, including a payment added by hand | **Payment Type** and the admin-order setting |
| **Course Completed** | A contact completes a course | **Courses**; empty means any course |

![Events palette of a general automation, top and bottom: contact events, Order Created, Order Paid, Course Completed and Automation Started.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e5361b6b084294ac50d8d305f6bb50e97e0f471fcce39d9a7fea65ec8a92b422.png)

## Lead Priority Assigned

With lead scoring turned on for the account, a general automation also has **Lead Priority Assigned**. It fires when scoring gives a contact a new priority that matches the event's settings:

- **Tiers**: **Hot**, **Warm** or **Cold**. Empty means any tier; a new event starts with **Hot** selected.
- **Minimum Priority**, optional: a whole number from 0 to 100 that the score must reach.

**Important:** the event reacts to new scores only. It does not run for contacts who already had the priority; to work with them, use the **Lead Priority** contact condition.

---

# Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations

> Configure automation action fields, delivery and access options, deal updates, rewards, delays and branching using the full settings reference.

Actions are what an automation does: send an email or a message, edit an order, update a contact and more. This reference lists the settings of every action, so you can configure each step correctly.

This article describes the settings of every automation action. To add an action, open the automation, find the step on the **Actions** tab of the palette or with its search, and drag it onto the canvas. Open its settings through the gear icon → **Configure Step**, or double-click the card, and connect it to the step before it.

Every step also has **Step Name**: a label for you on the canvas, which contacts never see. It is not repeated in the sections below.

![Inactive Northstar enrollment follow-up automation showing the CRM &amp; Contacts section of the Actions palette, Search, Delay and Condition.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fccfb626ef0c853772d31a9c63195b5506a5d45c9b1f30ea41f81e1815907477.png)

Click a section below to jump to its description. This article covers the settings for these automation actions:

"Orders: Add Payment" Step Settings

"Edit Order" Step Settings

"Delete Chat Message" Step Settings

"Send Email" Step Settings

"Webhook" Step Settings

"Send Message (Chat/Email)" Step Settings

"Update Contact Attribute" Step Settings

"Create Order" Step Settings

"Add Tags" Step Settings

"Remove Tags" Step Settings

"Add Task" Step Settings

"Add Note" Step Settings

"Grant Product Access" Step Settings

"Revoke Product Access" Step Settings

"Suspend Access" Step Settings

"Add Owner" Step Settings

"Remove Owner" Step Settings

"Add to Mailing List" Step Settings

"Remove from Mailing List" Step Settings

"Register for Webinar" Step Settings

"Request Data" Step Settings

"Start Automation" Step Settings

"Add to Group" Step Settings

"Remove from Group" Step Settings

"Notification" Step Settings

"Add Tags to Order" Step Settings

"Deals: Create or Update Deal" Step Settings

"Deals: Change Stage" Step Settings

"Deals: Change Owner" Step Settings

"Apps: Add to Telegram Group/Channel" Step Settings

"Apps: Remove from Telegram Group/Channel" Step Settings

"Telegram: Check Group/Channel Subscription" Step Settings

"Pause Subscription Renewal" Step Settings

"Bonus Balance: Add Transaction" Step Settings

"Affiliate Program: Add Transaction" Step Settings

"Affiliate Program: Change Affiliate" Step Settings

"Switch" Step Settings

"Issue Certificate" Step Settings

"Gamification: Add Transaction" Step Settings

"Gamification: Add Achievement" Step Settings

"Gamification: Remove Achievement" Step Settings

"Reach Yandex Metrica Goal" Step Settings

"Delay" Step Settings

"Condition" Step Settings

In the editor, use **Events**, **Actions** or **Wait Steps** to narrow the palette, or select **All** and use its search field. The available steps depend on the automation you opened. **Delay** and **Condition** have their own entries below the grouped list.

## "Orders: Add Payment" Step Settings

This action records a payment received from a contact for specific services, courses, or memberships. Use it to confirm that the contact has paid. In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Payment Gateway. Select a payment gateway from the list. To learn how to set up payment integrations, see "[Payment Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)."
- Choose the transaction type: Payment or Refund.
- Amount. Enter the payment or refund amount.

    - From Order. The amount is taken from the order in this automation.
    - Custom. Enter any amount you want.

        - Click "Use Value" and enter the amount in the field below. The account currency is used by default. You can change it in "[Account Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/account-settings)."
        - Click "Use Variable" and enter the variable in the field below. You can use data from the automation, for example #Scenario.Data(points)#. For more about variables, see "[Variables in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario)."
- Fee. If needed, enter the fee amount.

Click "Save."

![Orders: Add Payment step settings with Payment Gateway, Payment or Refund, Amount From Order or Custom, and Fee.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9d920efdc55566c5c65673574e2fd4fb57a45c5c00c0e1eee63be1f4fde6ca85.png)

## "Edit Order" Step Settings

This action edits the order for the current contact. Use it to update the order as the contact's needs or the conditions in your automation change. The order to edit is taken from earlier steps of the automation. In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Tags to Add. Tags can show an order's status or characteristics, which helps with analysis and order management. Select the tags to add to the order. Click "Manage Tags" to add new tags to the list.
- Tags to Remove. Select the tags to remove from the order. Click "Manage Tags" to add new tags to the list.
- Promo Code. Select a promo code to add to the order. To learn how to create promo codes, see "[Promo Code](https://docs.axl.tech/promo-codes)."
- **Custom Fields**. Enter values in the order custom fields shown in this section. The available fields come from your account’s order field configuration. The step updates those values on the order supplied by an earlier step; it cannot choose an unrelated order merely because it belongs to the same contact. Supported variables in the supplied values are resolved when the step runs.

Click "Save."

![Edit Order step settings: the order comes from earlier steps, with Tags to Add, Tags to Remove, Promo Code and Custom Fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82e6b6288feb67dd44700bba15d540a87800e59f37e47c53056a5b6345fb7e18.png)

Click "Manage Tags" to add new tags to the list.
In the window that opens, click "Create Tag," then enter a name for the tag and choose a color to make it easy to spot.
Use "Merge Tags" to combine two tags. Select the source tag and the tag to merge into it. After the merge, the source tag stays and the tag you merged is deleted and replaced with the source tag everywhere it was used. If you have accumulated many similar or duplicate tags, merging them reduces clutter and makes tags easier to manage. This action can't be undone.
Use the search bar at the top of the window to find a tag quickly.

![Manage Tags dialog filtered to Northstar, with edit and delete icons, Create Tag and Merge Tags.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/eef100fd20915864e709e76d55664444f281fbafe7df9ecf234d4dab8131c036.png)

## "Delete Chat Message" Step Settings

This action deletes the chat message sent by an earlier step in the automation, if the messaging channel supports it (for example, WhatsApp or Telegram). Use it to correct mistakes or remove outdated or inappropriate information.
This step needs no additional settings.

![A one-day Delay connected to Delete Chat Message, which needs no configuration.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1935f2cb7e5c9c1c118a87e2fef715f0656a3c07e6936d8ac06326d056da800a.png)

## "Send Email" Step Settings

For an email already added to the step, open **Configure Step** and click **Edit Email**. In the email editor, open **Settings** to set **Email Profile**, **Subject** and **Preheader**. Use **Design**, **Code** or **Text** for the body, then open **Preview** to inspect the email. The preview offers **Mobile**, **Tablet** and **Desktop** views. The step settings and email editor are separate panels, so return to the step after finishing the email.

This action sends an email to a contact at the address on file. The contact must have entered an email address, for example in a form field. If they didn't provide an address, or provided an incorrect one, the email isn't sent or delivered.
Example: After a contact signs up on the platform, the automation sends a welcome email that explains what the platform can do. A few days later, it sends an email offering a short introductory course for beginners. If the contact completes the course, the automation sends a congratulatory email and offers more advanced courses.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Recipients. Select who receives the email. "Contact's Email" sends it to the contact who provided an address (for example, by registering on your website or in a course). "Custom List" sends it to the addresses you enter, separated by commas.
- Choose "No Template" to write a new email or "Use Template" to use an existing one. With "Use Template," select a template in the Email Template field. Click "Edit Email" to change it or "Create Template" to make a new one.
- The "Create Email" button. With "No Template," click it to write a new email. In the dialog that opens, you can also start from an existing template.
- Email Profile. Select the tool that sends the email. It can be built in or integrated. Read more in "[Mail Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/mail-settings)."
- Name. Enter a name for the email.
- Subject. Enter the subject line.
- Preheader. Short text shown in the inbox right after the sender name and subject line. Also known as preview text.
- Body. Write the text of the email.
- **View Plain Text Version.** Open this control in the email editor’s **Settings** to inspect the plain-text representation. Review it along with the designed email.
- Test Email. Enter an email address and click "Send Test Email" to send yourself a test.

For a new email under **No Template**, finish by clicking **Create** at the bottom of the email editor. The editor closes and the email preview appears in the step settings. If you are editing a saved email template, the editor’s final button is **Save**. Back in the step settings, click **Save** to store the step configuration. You can reopen **Configure Step → Edit Email** to review the saved content before enabling the automation.

![Send Email step settings with Recipients (Contact's Email or Custom List), No Template or Use Template, and the Email Template selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/24a9f6a2c7c41ed5ec9718052f17aad5282cfbb01d17242842c07aa404e58bee.png)

For this action, you can add an extra event: Email Opened or Email Clicked. Click "Add Event" and select the event.

![Send Email card with the Add Event menu open: Email Opened and Email Clicked.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/af8e6feba8b541cb4a1d3b7d2959fb137fde634e15bdf78b6dbe2e71e0b86a63.png)

Template variables. You can add template variables to the subject, preheader, and body of the email.

A template variable is a placeholder that AXL automatically replaces with the data you choose, such as the contact's name or email, your account name, or an order number. For example, if you add the variable "Contact first name," AXL replaces it with the recipient's first name when the email is sent.

![Send Email step settings with recipients and the template choice.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/24a9f6a2c7c41ed5ec9718052f17aad5282cfbb01d17242842c07aa404e58bee.png)

For the subject or preheader, open the email editor’s **Settings** and click **Add Variables** next to the field. For the body, use **Insert variable** in the editor toolbar. Select the variable needed for that field.

![Add Variables panel listing contact variables such as #Contact.FirstName#, #Contact.Email# and UTM fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c9d40f9f1e6f5eabce6ab2fe58bf276e57605eb02d0383744263df3bae2bcc86.png)

If the previous step in the automation is "Create Order," the order's data appears in the list of template variables.

![Add Variables panel showing the Order group after a Create Order step: order ID, number, status, dates, amounts and payment link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ffdb4dea10f8aa138cf94d859116b34f89dc2f0e223c37a07c7621a2c8ff209d.png)

## "Webhook" Step Settings

A webhook is a way for the platform to send an automatic HTTP request when something happens. It passes data or notifications from one application to another based on rules you set. Webhooks automate data exchange between systems and connect AXL with your other apps.
For example, you can use webhooks to connect AXL to email and messaging apps, so that contacts get notifications and reminders about deadlines, new materials, or course changes. For an example of an automation that uses the "Webhook" action, see "[Integration with SMS Services via Webhook](https://docs.axl.tech/integration-with-sms-mailing-services-via-webhook)."

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Method. Select the HTTP method for the webhook from the list.
- URL. Enter the URL for the request.
- Headers. Enter a header name in the "Key" field and, if needed, its value in the "Value" field. Click "Add" to add another header. Remove a header you don't need with its remove button.
- Resend the webhook if the response is an error. If the response code isn't 2xx, AXL resends the webhook after 1 minute, then up to 10 more times over 24 hours at increasing intervals.
- Test Request button. Click it to send a test request and check your settings.
- Show Variables button. Click it to see the variables you can use.

![Webhook step settings with Method, URL, Headers, the resend-on-error option, Test Request and Show Variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/75d2ba88b445475844492cab81f04840004a0690e857e682a2d1ed90e0f8d8f0.png)

## "Send Message (Chat/Email)" Step Settings

This action sends a message to a contact through a channel set up in your account. Email is sent only when it is enabled, its template is valid and the contact has an eligible email address. When email is optional, it is used only if no chat message succeeds; requiring email also allows it to be sent when a chat message succeeds. Leaving the channel selection empty does not by itself guarantee email delivery. To learn more about channels, see "[Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels)."
Add buttons when the selected delivery channel supports them. Configure the choices in this step, then check the channel-specific title and button-count limits below. You can also send files as video notes, voice messages, and audio files.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Chat Message. Turn on the switch to send a chat message.
2. Chat Message. Enter the message text. Chatbots support message formatting. Messengers have their own formatting features, but your formatting is kept (if the messenger supports it) and applied the same way everywhere. You no longer need a separate message for each channel: one message works for all chat channels. Click the "Info" icon under the message text to open the chatbot message markup table.

    - Add Break. Use it to choose where the message is split into parts. This is useful when the automatic split by character count doesn't suit you. If your message is longer than the maximum allowed per message, it's split into parts automatically, but the split may land in an awkward place, such as in the middle of a sentence or paragraph. With the "Add Break" button, you can mark exactly where each part ends to keep the text logically organized.
    - Add Template Variables. Insert special variables into the message text. They're replaced automatically with the matching data when the message is sent. For example, you can add a variable for the recipient's name, a date, or other personal details. Variables make your messages more personal. This is especially useful for broadcasts, where each message must address a specific person or include unique data.
    - Message Formatting. Click the info message to open the chatbot message markup table. It shows which chatbots support each kind of formatting: bold, italic, underline, strikethrough, link, spoiler, and code.
3. Click or drag files to upload. Attach video or audio files.
4. Buttons. Add buttons to the message here. Click "Add Button" to open the settings.

    - Button Text. Enter the text users will see on the button. AXL currently shortens button labels to these limits: Telegram, 64 characters; Viber, 250; Facebook, Instagram, WhatsApp and LINE, 20. These are button-label limits, separate from message-body limits. Keep labels concise so each choice remains easy to read.
    - Button Type. Select the button type:

        - Default.
        - Link.
    - URL Address. This field appears if you select the Link button type. The maximum link length is 128 characters. Links support variables, like the message text.
In AXL’s current WhatsApp automation integration, a Link button acts as a reply button: after the contact taps it, AXL sends the URL in a separate text message. This describes this AXL button flow, rather than every button type available on WhatsApp.
    - Click **Add Button** for each choice. AXL currently groups buttons into messages with up to 100 buttons for Telegram, 7 for Viber, 3 for Facebook, Instagram and WhatsApp, and 4 for LINE. Viber is also capped at 7 buttons in total because its keyboard is replaced by a later keyboard. For other supported channels, AXL can split additional buttons into separate messages. Check that the resulting choices still make sense in each delivery channel.
    - Continue if no button is clicked within. If the contact doesn't click any button, the automation continues after the time you set and runs the next action. Check the box and set the time interval. You can choose days, hours, or minutes.
    - Ignore repeated button clicks. Check the box so that the contact can click a button only once.
5. Common settings.

    - Link Preview. This feature lets the messenger show a preview of a link's content before the contact opens it. For example, when someone sends a link to a website, the messenger automatically shows a preview with the title, image, and a short description. This helps people judge a link's safety before opening it.
    - **Send files as video and voice messages**. On supported channels, this sends suitable video or audio attachments as video notes or voice messages. It does not turn a photo into a video or voice message. The file must meet the channel's format, codec, size and duration requirements; conversion and delivery can fail. Review the file settings and restrictions described later in this article.
    - Delete the message if there's no response within. The message is deleted if the contact doesn't click a button or reply within the time you set. This works only in Telegram and Internal Chat.
6. Fine-Tuning Messengers. Messenger settings let you adjust privacy and security options, such as content protection and link preview. They help you protect your data and adapt the messenger to your needs.

    - Facebook. A message without a tag isn't sent if more than 24 hours have passed since the contact's last message. Use a message tag only when the message qualifies for that tag’s permitted purpose. If your messages don't match the selected tag, your account may be blocked.
Select a tag for the Facebook channel:

        - ACCOUNT\_UPDATE: a non-recurring update about the contact's account. Can't be used for advertising.
        - CONFIRMED\_EVENT\_UPDATE: a reminder about an upcoming event, or an update about an event in progress, that the contact registered for. Can't be used after the event is over, or for sales and surveys.
        - CUSTOMER\_FEEDBACK: a customer feedback survey. Messages asking for feedback must be sent within 7 days of the customer's last message.
        - POST\_PURCHASE\_UPDATE: a notification about order payment. Can't be used for sales.

    - Telegram. Enable protected content. Telegram’s protected-content option prevents forwarding and saving the sent message’s content. It does not replace access controls for your course, website or downloadable resources.
7. Message Testing. Select a channel and a user, and the system sends them a test message. The selected user is saved so you can test again easily.

    - Chat Channel. Select a chat channel from the list.
    - Chat User. Select a user from the list.
    - Send Test Message. Click the "Send Test Message" button.
8. **Delivery Channels**. The system tries the selected chat channels in the order listed. If no chat message succeeds, AXL attempts email only when email is enabled, its template is valid and the contact has an eligible email address. **Always send email** also attempts email after a successful chat send. Email delivery is not guaranteed. For channel settings, see [Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels).
9. Email. Turn on the switch to send an email.
10. Template. Choose "No Template" to create a new email or "Use Template" to use an existing template. For more about email settings, see the "Send Email" Step Settings section of this article.
11. Always send email. Check the box to send an email even if the chat message was delivered successfully.

![Send Message (Chat/Email) step settings: chat message, attachments, Buttons, General Settings, Test Messages, delivery channels, email template and Always send email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f202e5d1ea7ca1e763c95fa85f18068bbe811bef1384b708715ab45bc512ea72.png)
Send Message settings: message content, buttons, messenger options, Message Testing, delivery channels and email settings.

You can send files as a video note (round video) or a voice message.

1. Click or drag files to upload. Attach video or audio files.
2. Messenger restrictions. Click to open a table of parameters and restrictions for each messenger. Video notes are available only in Telegram. Voice messages can be sent in Instagram, Facebook, WhatsApp, and Telegram.
3. Check the box "Send files as video and voice messages." For a file to become a video note, it must be a square MP4 video (equal width and height) up to 639 px and no longer than 1 minute. For a voice message, the file must be in OGG format and up to 50 MB.

**Check the received media format.** A recording saved from Telegram is not a guarantee that a later automated send will succeed or appear as a voice or video message. The file must meet the destination channel’s format, codec, size and duration requirements. Open **File limits by messaging app**, then send a test to a contact you control before using the file in an automation. If it arrives as an ordinary attachment or fails, check those requirements and adjust the file.

![Messaging App Limits table for Telegram, Viber, VK, Facebook, WhatsApp, Instagram and Line, opened from File limits by messaging app.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6cec28bad85d96e753935852822d6b58022c624ba9ca8c0ed9d61b459169c335.png)

You can add template variables to the message. Click "Add Template Variables" next to the field you want to edit. A list of variables opens on the right. Select the variables you need.

![Add Variables panel listing contact variables, opened from a step's Add Template Variables link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c9d40f9f1e6f5eabce6ab2fe58bf276e57605eb02d0383744263df3bae2bcc86.png)

## "Update Contact Attribute" Step Settings

This action changes a contact's information. A contact attribute is a characteristic or piece of data about the contact, such as first name, last name, email address, or phone number. Updating an attribute changes that data.
Example: A contact fills out a form on your website and shares their preferences as a future customer. The automation processes the form and updates the contact's "comment" attribute. Based on that, it starts sending personalized emails with offers that match the contact's interests.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Contact Attribute. Select the attribute from the list (first name, last name, middle name, phone, city, country, comment, date of birth, gender). Click "Save." The attribute takes the new value when the step runs.

![Update Contact Attribute step settings with an empty Contact Attribute selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/79bf55db88817594675006266450c66efb4ced7a36c907a7a21cb55c3c744640.png)

If you select a number attribute, you can either enter a value or add a mathematical expression that is calculated to get the attribute value.
Values and expressions help you automate and simplify working with numbers in automations.

![Update Contact Attribute settings for Team size with the Value, Variable and Expression value types.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/31cb26694943588c5a70a8df05017f1d9a9ad4546b18d82fd7ecfafa94c7bc77.png)

How to create a number attribute for a contact.
To create a number attribute, go to CRM → Contacts. Click a contact's name to open their profile. Then click "Manage Custom Attributes."

![Olivia Bennett's contact profile with the Manage Custom Attributes link under the profile fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3c768af1143889ca6cf7fe025f1e750e9ecaf900ecb9940ee6cef8c1f0f11887.png)

To create a new attribute, click "Create Field." In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

- Name. Enter a name for the attribute.
- Type. Select the type Number. A number attribute holds numeric values, such as a contact's age or the number of completed tasks.
- Key. A unique identifier for the attribute in the system. Use Latin letters, numbers, and the symbols - \_ . (hyphen, underscore, period). You can use the key in the API and in other parts of the platform.

When you're done, click "Add."

![New Field form for a custom attribute with Number selected and empty Title and Key fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e1d4a60fc433e0811baa2956e1051f3a7b796b2e15f6db403e8f00d8ebdc19e.png)

The new attribute appears in the list. In this example, we created a number attribute named "account size."

To learn more about creating different kinds of contact attributes, see "[Contact Profile](https://docs.axl.tech/contact-profile)."

![Custom Attributes list with Shoe size, Social profile link, Ready to buy, Team size (Number, staff_count), Revenue and Business type.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f79b01d2d96018e016cffab561c58bc92d7a2f928ec7eca0e20f2660c9ae1d9.png)

Update Contact Attribute step settings.
Go back to the automation and open the settings of the "Update Contact Attribute" step. Select the number attribute you created. More fields appear below:

- Attribute Value Type. Select the type of attribute value.

    - Value. A specific value, entered as a number. For example, a number attribute can hold values such as a contact's age or account size.
    - Expression. A mathematical expression that is calculated to get the attribute value. It can include math operations, logical conditions, and other operators to produce a value based on other contact attributes or data. Expressions help you automate and simplify operations with number attributes. For example, you can use them to increase or decrease the value depending on certain conditions, or to run complex calculations from existing values.
- Attribute Value / Expression. Enter a number or a mathematical expression.

![Update Contact Attribute settings for Team size with the Value, Variable and Expression value types.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/31cb26694943588c5a70a8df05017f1d9a9ad4546b18d82fd7ecfafa94c7bc77.png)

A mathematical expression is a formula that uses number attribute values to perform math operations. For example, you can write "{contact.key1} + 10", where "{contact.key1}" is the current value of the contact attribute with the key key1, and "10" is the number to add to it.
Click the "Information" icon for formatting tips and examples of mathematical expressions.

![Update Contact Attribute with Expression selected and the Formatting Help popover with expression examples.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/66c3e1944fa99b1151a9f6977dd72e87d0b49676ab971d2ec0e557396d474b64.png)

To get an attribute key, open the "Attributes" dropdown. It lists all number attributes. Click the "Insert" icon next to the attribute you want to add its key to the expression.

![Expression Attributes picker listing Team size with its key staff_count and the copy and insert controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76e332681ff4612e230d9fd4cbd2e1fb98a01354322c76399e02df7e2146c5cd.png)

Click "Manage Custom Attributes" to create a new attribute in the contact card.

![Expression Attributes picker with the Manage Custom Attributes link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76e332681ff4612e230d9fd4cbd2e1fb98a01354322c76399e02df7e2146c5cd.png)

## "Create Order" Step Settings

This action creates an order for the selected product.
Example: When a contact places an order, the automation creates it and sends an email confirming the order and delivery details. When the order is delivered, the automation updates its status and sends a delivery confirmation that asks for feedback. If the contact leaves feedback, the automation marks the order as completed and sends a thank-you email.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Expiration. Choose how long the order can be paid: "No Expiration," "Until Date," or "Duration" (in days or hours).
- Tags to Add. Add tags to the order.
- Promo code. Select a promo code for the order from the list.
- Items. Add products to the order by selecting them from the list. The table below shows the order details. You need to add at least one product.
- List of selected products. This list shows the products you selected in the previous field.

![Create Order step settings with Expiration, Tags, Manage Custom Fields, Promo Code, product selector and Automatically complete the order.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bb7626432645df5a29c41d9e4daee4e1e5b67ebd2f6fa22cef7c46bc90f3d2e4.png)

## "Add Tags" Step Settings

This action adds tags to a contact.
Tags are labels you assign to organize and classify information. They make it easier to search and sort your data. Tags help you manage and analyze your customer base and make personalized offers and recommendations based on each customer's interests and preferences. 
For example, you can tag the products a customer has bought so you can take that into account when offering future purchases. You can also give a customer who shows interest in sports products or services a "Sports" tag. Tags like "loyal customer" or "VIP customer" can mark customers you have a long-term relationship with.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Tags. Select tags from the list or write new ones. Click "Confirm."

![Add Tags step settings with the tag list filtered to Northstar and the Manage Tags link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/515253194f4aebcc0e519084823f8d22eaf6c8bcb33942a65ce00f173c15f508.png)

Click "Manage Tags" to add new tags to the list.
In the window that opens, click "Create Tag," then enter a name for the tag and choose a color to make it easy to spot.
Use "Merge Tags" to combine two tags. Select the source tag and the tag to merge into it. After the merge, the source tag stays and the tag you merged is deleted and replaced with the source tag everywhere it was used. If you have accumulated many similar or duplicate tags, merging them reduces clutter and makes tags easier to manage. This action can't be undone.
Use the search bar at the top of the window to find a tag quickly.

![Manage Tags dialog filtered to Northstar, with Create Tag and Merge Tags.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/eef100fd20915864e709e76d55664444f281fbafe7df9ecf234d4dab8131c036.png)

## "Remove Tags" Step Settings

This action removes tags from a contact. For example, you can first add a tag such as "Do not send broadcasts" to pause broadcasts to a contact. Later, use this action to remove the tag and resume sending broadcasts.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Tags. Select tags from the list or write new ones. Click "Confirm."
- Click "Manage Tags" to add new tags to the list.

![Remove Tags step settings with an empty Tags selector and Confirm.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/885c7c85230e0010559f4720077784e2a8dd98a768bccdb18db0701b49c38c07.png)

## "Add Task" Step Settings

This action creates a task for the selected contact. A task is a specific action or issue that needs someone's attention. Tasks help you keep the platform running smoothly and reach your training goals. For example, you can assign a task to manage the registration of new users, set up access levels, track user activity, and respond to their requests.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Task. Enter what needs to be done.
- Add Description. Click it to add a description of the task.
- Deal. Select "From Automation" to link the deal from the automation to the task, or "Don't Link" to leave the task unlinked.
- Start. Set the start date of the task:

    - Specific Date. Select a date on the calendar.
    - **Event date**. Use the time this task step runs as the task’s start date.
    - **Later**. Set the task’s start date a number of hours or days after this step runs. The task is created when the step runs, with that future start date. For example, enter **3 days** to create a callback task now whose scheduled start is three days away. To postpone creating the task itself, place a **Delay** step before **Add Task**.
- Duration. Set how long the task takes.
- Reminder. Choose when you want to be reminded about the task.
- Assign To. Choose who gets the task: "Specific Admin" for one team member, "Round Robin" to distribute tasks among several team members in turn, "Contact Owner" for the person responsible for the contact, or "Deal Owner" for the person responsible for the deal. If the automation has no deal, or the deal has no owner, the task is left unassigned.
- Job Title. If you select "Contact Owner," enter the job title of the team member to assign. If no team member with that title is found, the task is left unassigned.
- Observers. Select the admins who are notified when the task status changes.
- Files. Attach any files the task needs.

![Add Task settings for an enrollment review, starting 3 days later for 30 minutes and assigned to the contact owner with the Curator job title.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9cda84adb2a9ddc972860f9bb0fe13bac1036d0549482e17e958d7f30683568f.png)
Later sets the task start date. This example schedules a 30-minute task three days after the step runs; the task itself is created when the step runs.

## "Add Note" Step Settings

This action adds a note to a contact. A contact note is extra information you save about a contact, such as details about them, their interests, preferences, or personal circumstances, anything that helps your teachers or admins work with them effectively. If a contact has specific requirements or needs, use a note to record them. For example, you can add a note that the contact needs extra help with assignments and prefers to communicate by email.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Write your note in the editor and attach any files you need. Click "Confirm."

![Add Note step settings with the note field, Add Template Variables and the attachment icon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a7ff70c2247bd2e6f1fc87915d4ae8380411bac07025a2a23de712d1d1867f16.png)

Click "Add Template Variables." A list of variables opens on the right. Select the variables you need.

When you finish configuring the step, click "Confirm."

![Add Variables panel listing contact variables, opened from Add Note.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c9d40f9f1e6f5eabce6ab2fe58bf276e57605eb02d0383744263df3bae2bcc86.png)

## "Grant Product Access" Step Settings

This action gives a contact access to a specific product in your account. It's usually used for free products, because access to paid products is granted right after purchase.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Select what to grant access to: Course, Product, Cohort, or Library.
2. Access to all courses. Check the box to give access to all courses in the Membership Portal.
3. Product. Select a course, product, cohort, or library from the list.
4. Start Date. Choose when access begins:
Event Date. Access starts when this step runs.
Specific Date. Select a start date for the license on the calendar.
5. End Date. Choose when access ends:
Duration. Set how long access lasts, in months, days, or hours. After that time, access is revoked.
Specific Date. Select the date on the calendar when access is revoked.
No End Date. Access to the product never expires.
6. Extend if already active. If the contact already has an active license for the selected product (or for a linked product), that license is extended.

Click "Add."

![Grant Product Access step settings with Course selected, Start Date, End Date, duration fields and Extend if already active.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/70d683c7b2fd3fa961cb4893e5c7c2a0a0c388c3fd1d5af87ecfc8cfc1e6c116.png)

## "Revoke Product Access" Step Settings

This action removes a contact's access to a specific product. 
For example, some learning platforms give users access only to certain lessons or courses, depending on their level, test result, or other factors. If those conditions change or the contact no longer meets the criteria, you can revoke access to a product.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Select the product type from the list: Course, Product, Cohort, or Library.
- Product. Select a course, product, cohort, or library from the list.
- Plan. Select a plan from the list (if you chose a course).

Click "Delete."

![Revoke Product Access step settings with Course, Product, Cohort and Library tabs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d99b3763c5467fd0177b1382fa7bc7d0ffb4efba7ef630cb570f4a0e5f4548f8.png)

## "Suspend Access" Step Settings

**Suspend Access** temporarily blocks access granted by the selected products. The suspension begins when this step runs and ends after the chosen duration or at the specified date and time.

For example, give a contact a seven-day study break by selecting the product and a duration of seven days. A finite access period is extended by the suspension time; access tied to a fixed cohort date is not extended. This action is separate from stopping subscription renewal.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Products to Suspend. Select the products whose access you want to suspend.
- **Date**. Choose how the suspension ends. With **Duration**, enter months, days and hours from the moment the step runs. With **Specific Date**, select the date and time when access should resume.

![Suspend Access step settings with Products to Suspend and Duration or Specific Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8d846d2f0e2ff12c6eb0f69d2c0ea03d62f2b9471450dcaf811fdf34c952ed19.png)

## "Add Owner" Step Settings

This action assigns an owner (a responsible admin) to the contact. An assigned owner improves the quality and efficiency of learning. For example, the owner can be a teacher or coach who monitors each contact's activity and progress and supports them throughout their learning. The owner tracks each contact's progress, analyzes their strengths and weaknesses, and adjusts the learning process, providing extra support where it's needed.

Set the assignment type to "Specific Admin" to select one owner.

- Admin. Select the owner from the list.
- Job Title. Enter the job title of the owner. This field is optional.
- If an Owner Is Already Assigned. Choose what happens if the contact already has an owner for this job title: "Do Nothing," "Update Settings, Keep Owner," or "Update Settings, Replace Owner."
- Automatically assign new orders. Check the box to assign new orders to the owner. Only one team member can have new orders assigned automatically.
- Automatically assign new chats. Check the box to assign new chats to the owner.

Click "Add."

![Add Owner step settings with Specific Admin selected, Job Title, assignment options and what to do if an owner is already assigned.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/873705a4503af132350c5664b1d5f6822a54763b33c60766ff784b61e8f84858.png)

Set the assignment type to "Rotation" to select several admins and distribute the work among team members in turn.

- Admins. Select several admins from the list.
- Job Title. Enter the job title of the owner. This field is optional.
- Automatically assign new orders. Only one team member can have new orders assigned automatically.
- Automatically assign new chats. Check the box to assign new chats to the owners.
- If an Owner Is Already Assigned. Choose what happens if the contact already has an owner for this job title.

Click "Add."

![Add Owner step settings with Rotation selected and the Admins selector for assigning owners in turn.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3b1915b1f3719822285ef3b6c3b35f87ab0658cbb8d7b231ab00c1a4a683cb2d.png)

## "Remove Owner" Step Settings

This action removes the previously assigned owner from the contact.
You may need it when:
1. The owner is no longer available or no longer involved in the project. This keeps the information about owners up to date for tasks and projects.
2. You need to reassign the contact to a different owner. This lets you redistribute responsibility when your team or projects change.
3. The contact made a mistake or broke the platform rules.
4. The contact has completed the training.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Choose which type of owner to remove:

    - Admin. Select the owner you want to remove from the list.
    - Job Title. Enter the job title you want to remove.

Click "Delete."

![Remove Owner step settings with Admin and Job Title choices.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/844c7fe4250613db6ce462cce7e07ff8ab0bbf9bc82a4d2b7a46a8d902d85254.png)

## "Add to Mailing List" Step Settings

This action adds the contact's email address to the selected mailing list. Broadcasts are how the platform sends informational messages to subscribers: useful materials, news about new courses or promotions, reminders about activities, and other important updates. Their purpose is to give contacts relevant information, draw their attention to new materials and updates, and keep them motivated to keep learning. To learn how to create and configure broadcasts and mailing lists, see "[Broadcasts](https://docs.axl.tech/broadcast)."

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Mailing List. Select a mailing list and click "Confirm."

![Add to Mailing List step settings with the Mailing List selector; only static lists can be selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9d82f5373a9cb35b61baab29edcd6a2d3e4963968e8ef667d198c66eddc67809.png)

## "Remove from Mailing List" Step Settings

This action removes the contact's email address from the selected mailing list. The contact no longer receives messages sent to that list.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Mailing List. Select a mailing list and click "Delete."

![Remove from Mailing List step settings with the Mailing List selector; only static lists can be selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd6cb3e0cb3b25d0aba13117796964f472db2216ae65956fea3c2b98307d12f0.png)

## "Register for Webinar" Step Settings

This action registers a contact for the selected webinar or for the nearest automated webinar. To learn how to create and set up a webinar, see "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)."

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Type. Choose "Webinar" or "Next from Template." With "Next from Template," the nearest upcoming webinar from the selected template is chosen automatically.
- Webinar. Select a webinar or a webinar template from the list.

Click "Save."

![Register for Webinar step settings with Webinar or Next from Template and the Webinar selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7c9c04665f1f378d47dce4c658712b5068395aabfc912c19f75958c41f2661cd.png)

## "Request Data" Step Settings

This action runs when you need to get data from a contact. A data request asks the contact for information, such as their name, email, or phone number. Use it to collect information for personalizing learning, building contact profiles, analytics and statistics, tracking learning progress, and improving the platform.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Data Type. Select the type of data: email, first name, last name, or phone.
- Request Message. Enter the text of your request. You can use variables in the text.
- Error Message. Enter the text to show when the contact's reply isn't valid. You can use variables.
- Max Attempts. Set the maximum number of times to ask for the data. After that many attempts, the automation stops asking.
- Cancel the request if there's no reply within a set time. If the time runs out, the step fails.
- **Delivery Channels**. Select the chat channels through which the contact can receive and answer the data request. In a conversation-based automation, the existing conversation can supply the destination; otherwise the step needs an available conversation in one of the selected channels. This step does not fall back to email. For channel settings, see [Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels).

Click "Save."

![Request Data step settings for Email with request and error messages, Max Attempts, reply timeout, General Settings and delivery channels.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5505c6be8a7334b8625e7630beba8ee301fa4c7ef87cfc277a9c0f50eb7ea80e.png)

Click "Add Template Variables" next to the field you want to edit. A list of variables opens on the right. Select the variables you need.

![Add Variables panel listing contact variables, opened from Request Data.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c9d40f9f1e6f5eabce6ab2fe58bf276e57605eb02d0383744263df3bae2bcc86.png)

## "Start Automation" Step Settings

This action starts the actions of another automation you've set up.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Automation. Select the automation to start from the list. Click "Confirm."

![Start Automation step settings with an empty Automation selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3591b37efd98283af974211971eb82f1a76fee843dedf03f0a47a872f5b4fd12.png)

## "Add to Group" Step Settings

This action adds a contact to a contact group you've created. Groups let you organize contacts so you can run further actions on group members or give them extra access or privileges. For example, you can show the affiliate program only to contacts in a specific group.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Group. Select a group from the list. If you haven't added any groups yet, you can create a new group and add it to the automation. Click "Confirm."

![Add to Group step settings with an empty group selector and a disabled Confirm button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a8881c299c46efb3e50536179e300f6eaa4f8c4c367bd20d7a8d347ae25c0f13.png)

## "Remove from Group" Step Settings

This action removes a contact from a group. Use it when you want to exclude a contact from a group for any reason. For example, the contact breaks the group's rules, or has completed the course and no longer needs to be in the group. It keeps the group relevant for its current members.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Group. Select a group from the list. Click "Confirm."

![Remove from Group step settings with an empty group selector and a disabled Confirm button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/872aae417fe2b7e38526f6950b84d9fee0e078ba6bbaa8515289894f4392d51b.png)

## "Notification" Step Settings

This action sends a notification. It sends a message to an admin or to the contact to tell them about an event, action, or request in the system. Notifications keep people informed in time and help you stay in touch with admins and contacts. For example, a new user registration notification: when someone registers on the platform, the admin receives a notification with all the details about that user. This lets the admin know about the new user and take any further action, such as approving the account.
Or an important update notification: if there's an important update on the platform, the admin receives a notification about it. For example, new features, changes to platform policy, or a new course. Such notifications help the admin stay aware of all changes and pass the information on to users and teachers.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Notification Text. Write the text of the notification.
- Type. Select who gets the notification: Admin, Contact, or Contact Owner. If you select "Admin," the admins you choose in "Admins to Notify" receive the notification. If you select "Contact," a registered user in your Membership Portal receives it. If you select "Contact Owner," the person responsible for the contact receives it. Enter the owner's job title.

![Notification step settings with Notification Text, Add Template Variables, Type (Admin, Contact, Contact Owner) and Admins to Notify.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cc35b3a45952ed619427d2282d0ca19890e2538c97b16753b5c8625b2af76b6f.png)

Click "Add Template Variables." A list of variables opens on the right. Select the variables you need.

![Add Variables panel listing contact variables, opened from Notification.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c9d40f9f1e6f5eabce6ab2fe58bf276e57605eb02d0383744263df3bae2bcc86.png)

## "Add Tags to Order" Step Settings

This action adds tags to the order. Tags are added only if the automation has an order, so connect an order event or a Create Order action earlier in the chain.
Order tags are labels that help you classify and organize orders by different criteria. They make navigating and searching the platform easier. For example, a team member can use tags to quickly find orders that match their interests or expertise. A teacher in a particular subject area can filter for only the orders related to that subject with the matching tag.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Tags. Select tags from the list. Click "Confirm."

![Add Tags to Order step settings with an empty Tags selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/52ea6096d74a0a1470e968590be3062db24e8d9685f44c41f4f6487d0758378b.png)

## "Deals: Create or Update Deal" Step Settings

This action adds a contact to the selected stage of a deal, or updates a deal created earlier in the sales pipeline.
A sales pipeline is a visual representation of the steps a prospective customer goes through, from first contact to closing the deal. The action fills in information about the prospect and helps you assign sales tasks, set the sales stage, and estimate the chance of closing the deal. It lets your sales team see the whole process and manage it effectively.
For example, a prospect fills out a form on your website to show interest in a product or service. A deal is then created in the pipeline with the customer's details and tasks for follow-up and a product demo.
To learn how to create and configure a pipeline, see "[Deals](https://docs.axl.tech/deals)."

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Pipeline. Select the pipeline. More fields appear.
- Stage. Select the stage the deal is added to.
- Deal Amount. Select "Automatic" or "Manual." With "Automatic," the amount is taken from the order added to the deal. If the automation has no order, the amount is 0. With "Manual," enter the amount.
- Contact. Select the contact shown on the deal card. "From Automation" uses the contact from the automation (the data entered in a form). "Manual" lets you select a contact yourself.
- Assign To. Assign an owner to the deal. Select "Specific Admin" for one team member, or "Round Robin" to assign deals to the selected team members in turn. You can also select "Contact Owner" and enter a job title to choose the person responsible for the contact.
- Tags. Use "Tags to Add" and "Tags to Remove" to change the deal's tags. Click "Manage Tags" to find or create tags.
- Check the box "Add the order from the automation (if any)" to add the order from the automation to the deal.
- Update a matching deal if found. If the system finds a matching active deal (not deleted and not in a won or lost stage) in the selected pipeline, it updates that deal and moves it to the selected stage. Deals are matched by the selected contact and by the parameters you choose below. Set the search criteria you need:
- Related Contact. The system automatically searches for related contacts.
- Deal Tags. When you use deal tags as a search parameter, all the tags selected on the deal are taken into account. A deal with no tags is also compared. 
- Amount. When you use the amount as a search parameter, the budget must match exactly.
- Update Owner. To update the owner of the deal, check the box "Update Owner."

![Deals: Create or Update Deal step settings with pipeline, stage, deal amount, contact, Assign To, tags, participants and matching options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3953c1bbdf7fc81744857ec6dc4b07814af4c59a14fae7cde57aaa50dc62f436.png)

## "Deals: Change Stage" Step Settings

This action moves the deal from the automation to a new stage of the sales pipeline. It can help you streamline the sales process and close more deals.
For example, a prospect at the "Interested" stage takes a test to measure their knowledge level. After they pass, the deal moves to the next stage, where they get personal advice on choosing courses.
Or a prospect postpones their purchase decision. The platform moves the deal to the "Pause" stage, assigns tasks to resolve their concerns, and plans a follow-up to close the deal.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Stage. Select the stage to move the deal to. Click "Confirm."

![Deals: Change Stage step settings: the deal comes from the automation; select the Stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/06515e2be7a086beb7f39ff470e1f6de12a74062268626b8f40dac0131463f0d.png)

## "Deals: Change Owner" Step Settings

This action changes the owner of the selected deal. 
For example, a manager who handles new customers is the owner at first. If the customer shows interest in a specific product or service during the first contact, you can transfer ownership to a specialist in that product or service.
Or when a customer is interested and ready for a demo of the online platform, you can transfer ownership to the team member who gives demos.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Assign To. Change the team member who owns the deal. Select how to assign it:

    - Specific Admin. Select one admin.
    - Round Robin. Distribute deals among several team members. Deals are assigned in turn to the selected team members.
    - Contact Owner. Choose the contact's owner by entering their job title. If no team member with that title is found, no owner is assigned.

Click "Save."

![Deals: Change Owner step settings with Specific Admin, Round Robin or Contact Owner and the assignee selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76767361030302e80537f6a13e9ef0107e2bdadedb3cf4e2a894496562084fe0.png)

## "Apps: Add to Telegram Group/Channel" Step Settings

This action adds a contact to a Telegram group or channel linked to a specific course or program. Joining a Telegram group or channel lets contacts communicate and collaborate with other contacts and instructors, which makes learning more effective and gives extra support. Being part of the group helps contacts feel like part of a learning community and encourages them to join discussions, share ideas, and stay engaged.

For example, during a course, contacts are encouraged to take part in the Telegram group chat, discuss course material, share their thoughts, and ask questions. That way, they get feedback on their ideas and discussions from instructors and other participants.

Or after a contact completes the first module of a course, they automatically join a Telegram group where they can find additional content for the program and learn about extra resources for a deeper understanding of the subject.

To learn more about Telegram group settings, see "[Telegram Group Application](https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels)."

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Telegram Group/Channel. Select the group or channel to add the contact to. Click "Confirm."

![Add to Telegram Group or Channel settings with the group selector and bot subscription note.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/EDF0VHn2L0aBPd_HLZzjiA.png)

## "Apps: Remove from Telegram Group/Channel" Step Settings

This action removes a contact from a Telegram group or channel. Removing members lets teachers and admins control who takes part in learning. For example, if a participant breaks the platform rules or behaves badly, you can remove them from the group to prevent conflicts. You can also use this action to filter out inactive participants or those who don't follow instructions, so you can focus on more active participants.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Telegram Group/Channel. Select the group or channel to remove the contact from. Click "Confirm."

![Remove from Telegram Group or Channel settings with the group selector and bot subscription note.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XUWRHCFzJkGbofNB_ETo8A.png)

## "Telegram: Check Group/Channel Subscription" Step Settings

This action checks that a contact is subscribed to a specific Telegram channel or group. The subscription can serve as proof that they took part in certain activities or received information.
You can use a channel or group subscription as a condition for access to exclusive content, such as lessons, webinars, or extra materials. A subscription check can also be a condition for continuing a course or getting additional resources.
By staying in touch through Telegram, you can increase engagement by sharing up-to-date information, updates, and reminders about upcoming events.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Chat Channel (Telegram Chatbot). Select a Telegram chatbot from the list.
- Channel or Group Link. Enter a link to a Telegram channel or group in the @channel\_name or https://t.me/channel\_name format.
To add more links, click "Add."

![Check Telegram Group or Channel Subscription settings with chat channel and group link fields.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/9iBiLfsPwkmFLZ6xoTbYzQ.png)

## "Pause Subscription Renewal" Step Settings

**Pause Subscription Renewal** stops automatic renewal for the selected subscription products. It leaves the current access dates unchanged and does not create a timed access suspension. For example, use it when a contact wants their subscription to stop renewing after the current access period. To block access temporarily for a defined period, use **Suspend Access**.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- **Products**. Select the subscription products whose renewal should stop, then click **Save**.

![Pause Subscription Renewal step settings with a required Products selector.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2560c6a43e8311b235bd1431dfddcfaf0b93d7b9aa8413320cfc16a44a4bf3fe.png)

## "Bonus Balance: Add Transaction" Step Settings

This action creates a transaction that adds bonus points to a contact's bonus account or deducts them from it. The bonus account is shown as bonus points in the contact's profile. Contacts can spend the points on products, special privileges, or specific services. Bonus credits can't be withdrawn.

A transaction that tops up a contact's bonus account gives them a set number of bonus points. A transaction that deducts from the bonus account reduces their bonus balance. This helps you motivate contacts to take an active part in learning, complete tasks, reach specific results, or join promotions.

For example, you can reward bonuses for completing tasks. When a contact completes a specific task or gets a good grade for their work, the automation automatically adds bonus points to their bonus account. They can use the points to pay for the next course or get discounts on other platform services.

Or you can reward bonuses as part of a promotion such as "Get double bonuses for inviting a friend." When a contact successfully invites a friend to the platform, they receive a transaction on their bonus account.

Another example is adding bonuses to the bonus account as a refund. In some cases, you may offer contacts a choice between a cash refund or adding the refunded amount to their bonus account. If the contact chooses the bonus account, the automation adds a transaction that increases their bonus balance.

Read more about a contact's bonus account in "[Bonus Balance](https://docs.axl.tech/bonus-balance)."

When you choose the transaction type Credit, fill in the fields in the panel that opens:

- Amount. Enter the amount of the credit or debit. The amount is in the account currency.
- Type. Select the transaction type: Credit or Debit.

    - Credit is a transaction that adds bonus credits to a contact's bonus account.
- Expiration. Set how long the credited bonuses stay valid.

    - No Expiration. The bonuses never expire.
    - Duration. The bonuses stay active for the time you select. In the field below, set the validity period in days or months.
    - Date. The bonuses stay active until the date you select. In the field below, pick the date when the credited bonuses expire.
- Comment. Add a comment to the transaction.

Click "Save."

![Bonus Balance: Add Transaction step settings with Amount, Credit selected, Expiration and Comment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/70ba84d9c5897c602de35d784c739b0c0134723578a80e55b2cdd23d2c2d1a3c.png)

When you choose the transaction type Debit, fill in the fields in the panel that opens:

- Amount. Enter the amount of the credit or debit. The amount is in the account currency.
- Type. Select the transaction type: Credit or Debit.

    - Debit is a transaction that deducts bonus credits from a contact's bonus account.
- Don't create if the balance is too low. This option is available when you select the Debit type. Check the box to skip the transaction if the bonus account doesn't have enough funds. In that case, the step fails and the automation continues along the red line.
- Comment. Add a comment to the transaction.

Click "Save."

![Bonus Balance: Add Transaction step settings with Debit selected and Don't create if the balance is too low.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/52614ffe7d52f10ad425bf22335c712e141af27fa5eefeb998ea340612874204.png)

## "Affiliate Program: Add Transaction" Step Settings

This action creates a transaction that credits or debits a commission in the affiliate program. The affiliate program lets you attract new customers through affiliates, who earn rewards for each referred user or for sales of platform products. Affiliate program transactions track and account for affiliate rewards. For example, a reward for successfully completing a specific stage of training: the affiliate earns a reward when users they referred to the platform complete a specific stage of training, such as a certain module or level. Or a reward for a successful sale: the affiliate is credited with a reward when a user they referred makes a purchase on the platform. This helps you grow your affiliate network and bring more new users to the platform. These transactions appear in the "Affiliate Program" section on the "Earnings & Payouts" tab. To learn more about the affiliate program, see "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)."

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Commission. Enter the amount to credit or debit. The amount is in the account currency.
- Type. Select the transaction type: Credit or Debit.
Credit is a transaction that credits a commission for the affiliate program.
Debit is a transaction that writes off a commission for the affiliate program.
These transactions appear on the "Earnings & Payouts" tab of the affiliate program.
- Comment. Add a comment to the transaction.
- Affiliate. Select the affiliate whose account receives the commission:
- Linked Affiliate. The commission goes to the affiliate linked to the contact. If the contact has no linked affiliate, no transaction is created and the automation continues without a commission.

    - Affiliate from Automation. The affiliate is picked automatically from the automation. If the automation has no affiliate, no transaction is created and the automation continues.
- Other. Choose an affiliate from your contact list to receive the commission.

Click "Save."

![Affiliate Program: Add Transaction step settings with Commission, Credit or Debit, Comment and the affiliate choice.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2c595d41a78fef48e1f3c5ef763be2c2130fee91f7744d2a469074eeade6d646.png)

## "Affiliate Program: Change Affiliate" Step Settings

This action replaces a contact's affiliate or removes it. When an invited guest clicks an affiliate link, registers, or makes a purchase, they're linked to the affiliate who invited them. This lets you see which affiliate brought in a specific guest or user and pay that affiliate a commission.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Affiliate. Select the affiliate you want to link to the contact from the list. To remove the affiliate, leave the field empty.

Click "Save."

![Affiliate Program: Change Affiliate step settings with the affiliate contact selector; leave it empty to remove the affiliate.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1fc432a9eb9628b763999de330fd34844f5e6796510213faaeef002f1e6cc11d.png)

## "Switch" Step Settings

The switch lets you split an automation into multiple branches. Each branch has its own sequence of events and actions. You can set from 2 to 10 outputs, and choose whether they fire in sequence from first to last or in random order.
Here are two examples of automations you can build with a switch:
1. Use a switch to create outputs for different bonus-related events. For example, to build a wheel of fortune or a lottery, add a switch with 10 outputs after a user event, each with its own chain of events and actions. Set the type to random order. After the contact starts the automation, it picks a random output on the switch and runs the matching chain of events. The chain can include conditions. For example, to win, the contact must answer questions or complete certain tasks. If they win, they receive bonus points or other rewards defined in the chain.
2. Balance the workload between sellers. For example, create 4 outputs on the switch and set the type to sequence. Each output matches a specific seller and has its own chain of actions. When a contact sends a request, the automation uses the switch to pick a seller in turn and assigns them the sales tasks. You can also set a ratio: 1 output sends tasks to the first seller, and the other 3 outputs send tasks to the second seller. That way, the ratio of tasks between sellers is 1:3. The switch spreads the workload evenly between sellers and makes the sales process more efficient.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Number of Outputs. The switch lets you create multiple outputs on an automation branch. Each output has its own sequence of events and actions. You can set from 2 to 10 outputs.
- Type. Select how the outputs switch: "Sequence" (from first to last) or "Random Order." The next output to run is shown below. Click "Reset Sequence" to start the sequence over.

Click "Save."

![Switch step settings with two outputs, Sequence selected, the next output and Reset Sequence.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ce99d4b1a3cf96f3cab2738ab2f7204b1f4aabfb5454dfbf5ba108767472413c.png)

## "Issue Certificate" Step Settings

This action issues a certificate from the selected template to the contact, for example for attending a webinar. A certificate attached to a course is issued automatically when the course is completed: do not add this step for it, or the contact gets two certificates.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Certificate. Select a certificate from the list. To learn more about certificate settings, see the "Certificates" article.
- Contact. This field is optional. By default, the contact from the automation is used. To issue the certificate to a specific contact, select one from the list.
- Course. This field is optional. By default, the course from the automation is used. Or select the course name from the list to show on the certificate.

Click "Save." After the certificate is issued, its automation starts.

![Issue Certificate step settings with Certificate, Contact and Course selectors.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6236a7260abff5c4d060e3fa1cde82c423dd0e46243bb2fd075afbf4953cdb08.png)

## "Gamification: Add Transaction" Step Settings

This action credits points to the contact's points account or deducts them. Contacts spend points in the **Points Store** and cannot withdraw them; points are separate from the bonus balance. The gamification module must be enabled, or the step fails. See "[Gamification Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification-scenario)".

When you choose the transaction type Add Points, fill in the fields in the panel that opens:

- Contact. This field is optional. By default, the contact from the automation is used. To run the transaction for a specific contact, select one from the list.
- Points. Enter the number of points to add or deduct.
- Type. Select the transaction type: Add Points or Deduct Points.

    - Add Points. A transaction that adds points.
- Expiration. Set how long the credited points stay valid.

    - No Expiration. The points never expire.
    - Duration. The points stay active for the time you select. Set the validity period in days, months, or years.
    - Date. The points stay valid until the date you select. Select the expiration date for the credited points.
- Comment. Add a comment to the transaction.

Click "Save."

![Gamification: Add Transaction step settings with Contact, Course or Library, Points, Add Points, Expiration and Comment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3fa094fefba08160037c45186ad80d7f4d13757d3127a9a5cc57b6fedcff81a.png)

When you choose the transaction type Deduct Points, fill in the fields in the panel that opens:

- Contact. This field is optional. By default, the contact from the automation is used. To run the transaction for a specific contact, select one from the list.
- Points. Enter the number of points to add or deduct.
- Type. Select the transaction type: Add Points or Deduct Points.

    - Deduct Points. A transaction that deducts points.
- Don't create if there aren't enough points. This option is available when you select the Deduct Points type. Check the box to cancel the transaction if the contact's account doesn't have enough points. In that case, the step fails and the automation continues along the red line.
- Comment. Add a comment to the transaction.

Click "Save."

![Gamification: Add Transaction step settings with Deduct Points and Don't create if there aren't enough points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f117e2b00908cd85b9b534b0c1d6fe9ab1f66ec321fcacc3f5ffe565a2a79451.png)

## "Gamification: Add Achievement" Step Settings

This action gives the contact an achievement. It also credits the points set in the achievement and starts the **Achievement Earned** trigger of the gamification automation.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Contact. This field is optional. By default, the contact from the automation is used. To add the achievement for a specific contact, select one from the list.
- Achievement. Select an achievement from the list. You can add and configure a new achievement in the "Gamification" section.
- Add even if already earned. On by default: a contact who already has the achievement gets it again, with its points again. Turn it off so the step fails for such a contact instead.

Click "Save."

![Gamification: Add Achievement step settings with Contact, Achievement and Add even if already earned.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f0c6726d4a80b0ff50328ae27d13a87d388b00ba834d7ba861f7236aeab5831a.png)

## "Gamification: Remove Achievement" Step Settings

The "Remove Achievement" action removes a specific achievement from a contact's list of achievements.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Contact. This field is optional. By default, the contact from the automation is used. To remove the achievement from a specific contact, select one from the list.
- Achievement. Select an achievement from the list. You can add and configure a new achievement in the "Gamification" section.

Click "Save."

![Gamification: Remove Achievement step settings with Contact and Achievement selectors.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d9a8ebfadf56b19e3d1f8cbf71812f1357dad516ae87b6b92942985c051a6713.png)

## "Reach Yandex Metrica Goal" Step Settings

The "Reach Yandex Metrica Goal" action measures and tracks specific events and user activity on your website. It automates goal tracking, so you don't have to collect data by hand, and gives you faster, more accurate statistics.

Yandex Metrica Conversions is a web analytics tool that provides visual reports, records visitor actions, tracks traffic sources, and helps you assess how effective your online and offline advertising is. You can use it to collect data on how users interact with your website and see which content attracts your target audience.

This action is available to select only after you connect the Yandex Metrica Conversions app.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- App. Select the Yandex Metrica app.
- Goal. Select a goal from the list. You can add and configure goals on the Yandex Metrica website. Only goals of the "JavaScript event" type with the "matches" condition appear in the list.

Click "Save."

![Reach Yandex Metrica Goal settings with Application and Goal selectors.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/faFQxNPahE-vHULY81Fumw.png)

## "Delay" Step Settings

The "Delay" step adds a pause between an event (or action) and the next action. For example, you can delay showing new content, answering a question, or showing results. A delay gives the contact time to take in the previous information and get ready for the next step. It keeps the automation flowing smoothly and leaves time for specific tasks. You can use it for different purposes:
1. Give the contact time to think about and understand the information from the previous step. For example, after a training video on learning a new language, the contact gets 5 minutes to practice what they learned in exercises.
2. Delay new blocks of information to avoid overload. For example, after a contact completes a block, the next page with new materials becomes available only after 10-15 seconds.
3. Help the contact stay focused on the upcoming material or task.
4. Create a sense of comfort and control over the flow of the automation or learning process.

First, the settings for the "Time Period" delay type. In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Delay Type. Select a time period or a date.
A time period is a delay between an event and an action that you define yourself.
- Duration. Set the length of the delay in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
- Wait until a specific time of day. Check this box so that the automation runs the next action at a specific time of day and/or day of the week.

Click "Save."

![Delay settings with Time Period selected and a duration of 2 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c71fe2f83bc64a304e91b91affb2d9e70e652d88df735692c7ead4fcd6c43e74.png)
Set a two-day pause, then click Save at the bottom of the panel.

Next, the settings for the "Date" delay type. In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Delay Type. Select a time period or a date.
A date is a delay between an event and an action until a specific date that you set in the settings.
- Date. Select a date and time on the calendar.
- Time Zone. Select the time zone for the date from the list.
- Select **Don’t run after the selected date** to stop this branch if the contact reaches this delay after its target date has already passed. If the contact reaches it before that date, the delay is scheduled for the selected date. This option is not a deadline that cancels every later action in the automation.

Click "Save."

![Delay step settings using Date with Time Zone and Don't run after the selected date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/16b1fcfe0d51f16c0fe7504ee55bb3581a4db933e29f02008bccbc2327ebaa53.png)

## "Condition" Step Settings

A condition is a step in an automation that sets specific conditions for running the next step. It controls the flow of the automation and lets you customize it based on earlier results.
Here are some tasks that a condition step helps you solve:
1. Personalized learning: Adapt the next learning step to the contact's results. For example, if the contact answered the previous question correctly, they move on to the next difficulty level.
2. Choosing a path: Let the contact choose which path to take in the learning process. For example, they can choose between two different topics to study.
3. Progress tracking: Track progress and split contacts into different groups. For example, after a certain number of completed tasks, a contact can receive additional materials or the chance to talk with other contacts at the same level.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

- Condition. Select a condition from the list and click "Save." For a detailed description of the conditions, see "[Conditions in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-in-the-scenario)."

![Condition step settings with Add 'OR' Condition and the contact filter list expanded.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/587787a4087304ae25b96e3ef73f58433f87105d70a28e53d3b3861c82ee8521.png)

## Additional Action Settings

Find these actions in the editor's left-hand palette. Double-click an action to add it to the canvas, then open its gear menu and choose **Configure Step**. Complete the settings below and connect the relevant outputs to the next steps. Keep the automation Inactive while you configure it.

### Chat Agent

Lets a configured chat agent handle the conversation and continue through the appropriate output. The automation must already have an incoming chat message in its context; adding this action to an unrelated contact-only flow does not supply a conversation.

1. Choose the **Chat Agent** and enter any **Additional Instructions** for this step.
2. Set **End Chat After** with its number and time unit. This controls the completion timeout while the step is waiting for the conversation to continue.
3. Expand **Outputs** and click **Add Output** for each additional outcome. Enter its required **Name** and **Condition**, for example a name of “Enrollment questions answered” with a condition describing when the conversation is complete.
4. Click **Save**, then connect each required output to its next action.

The selected agent must be enabled. Saving configures the step; it does not start a chat.

### AI Call

Calls the phone number on the contact's card using an available voice agent. You need a configured voice agent and an appropriate outbound number before the action can place a call.

1. Select **Voice Agent**. Your account's voice agents are listed.
2. Choose **Outbound Number**, or use the agent/app default shown in the field. Numbers are restricted to the selected agent's provider.
3. Set **Wait for Call to End (Minutes)**. If no result arrives within that time, the automation follows No Answer.
4. Optionally enable **Call back if no answer** and use **Add Attempt** to set each later attempt's delay. This retry applies when there is no answer or the line is busy, not to an answered call or voicemail.
5. Review the fixed outputs for a placed call, a connected call, no answer and voicemail. Enable **Analyze call outcome** to add custom outcomes with **Add Outcome**. Describe the condition for each outcome; unmatched conversations use Outcome Unclear.
6. Optionally enable **Fill variables from call** and use **Add Variable** to specify the facts to extract, such as enrollment budget or preferred start date. These values can be used in later steps.
7. Click **Save** and connect the outputs needed by your workflow.

AI analysis and variable extraction are billed as AI tokens. For your account's own voice agents, additional settings can override the agent's form, booking pages, selling settings and voicemail behavior for this call. Attached forms and selling settings add their corresponding outputs. **Test This Call**, when available, places a real call; it is not a preview or a way to save the node.

### Send Meta Conversion

Sends a conversion through an existing Meta Conversions app.

1. Select the required **Meta Conversions App**. The Event field becomes available after an app is selected.
2. Select an **Event** configured on that app, or select the custom-event option and enter the custom event name.
3. Use **Add Parameter** for values that need to be supplied or overridden, then choose the parameter key and enter its value. Available keys include value, currency, content\_name, content\_category, content\_type, content\_ids, num\_items, order\_id, predicted\_ltv and search\_string.
4. For an order-related configured event, value and currency can be taken from the order in the automation. If there is no order in context, supply the required values in the parameters.
5. Click **Save**. The button remains unavailable until an app and a configured event or nonblank custom event name are selected.

Saving this step does not send a conversion. Conversion delivery occurs when an active automation reaches the action.

### Send Chat Channel Status

Shows a temporary activity indicator, such as Typing or Uploading Photo, in the conversation already supplied by the automation. It does not send message text or create a new conversation.

1. Choose the **Chat Action Type**.
2. Check the support table in the settings: AXL's available status types differ by channel. The form lists supported indicators for Telegram; Facebook and Instagram support Typing in this integration, while the listed Viber, WhatsApp and Line integrations do not support these statuses.
3. Click **Save** and connect the following action. The status is short-lived; the editor's help describes a five-second indicator.

### Delete Task

Deletes the task supplied by an earlier event or action in this automation. There is no task selector or configuration form: the card shows **No Configuration Needed**. Connect it only on a path that has task context. Without a task in that context, the step fails; it does not delete every task belonging to the contact.

---

# Conditions in Automations

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-in-the-scenario

> Configure AND/OR conditions, connect matching and non-matching branches, and choose filters available in the automation context.

The **Condition** step splits an automation into two branches: contacts who match the conditions go one way, the others go the other way. For example, send the next lesson only to those who completed the previous one, or remind only those whose order is still unpaid.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Condition Step Settings

Contact Conditions

Automation Conditions

Example: Setting Up a Condition Step

## Condition Step Settings

Open **Settings → Automations**, select the automation, and open its **Automation** tab. For a course, product, deal or other feature automation, open the relevant item and its Automation tab instead.

In the automation editor, find "Condition" in the list of steps and drag it into your automation. Then set it up: click the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the step and choose "Configure Step." You can also double-click the step.

![Condition step on the automation canvas with its gear menu open: Configure Step, Copy Step and Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6659b73361fdd3c1ff185cc896b2d839fcbb124c59b347e981cef353e11aaf11.png)

A settings panel opens. Click "Add 'AND' Condition Group" to create a group. Then, next to "Add 'OR' Condition," open the "Select a filter" list and choose a condition.
"AND" and "OR" are logical operators that control how conditions combine. Conditions in the same group are joined by OR, and separate groups are joined by AND.

- AND condition group: every group must be met at the same time. For example, in the rule "A contact must complete course A AND course B to receive a certificate," the contact has to complete both courses to qualify.
- OR condition: meeting at least one of the listed criteria is enough. For example, in the rule "A contact can receive a certificate if they complete course A OR course B," the contact can pick either course, and finishing one is enough.

    AND groups make the requirements stricter, while OR conditions give contacts more freedom of choice.

![Condition step settings with the filter list open under Add OR Condition, starting with the contact filters.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ee133146c45784ecfa29096ee826f87ee14edf190eed8de17d569bc6f9f7282c.png)

The **Condition** step offers every contact condition from "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)", plus the automation conditions below. Each condition checks the one contact of this run at the moment the step runs.

Connect the previous step to **Condition** before choosing context-dependent filters. For example, order filters need an order-producing event or action earlier in the connected chain. Form Data, Automation Start Data and Course Score require their particular preceding event, as described below.

After saving the condition, connect its successful result to the action for matching contacts and its failed result to the alternative action. Configuring a filter alone does not choose the next action; the connections do.

## Contact Conditions

All contact conditions, with their settings, are described in "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)": contact data, orders and payments, education, webinars, email, deals, the affiliate program, gamification, forms and quizzes, and apps.

**Important:**

- Some conditions have a **From scenario** option instead of a fixed item: in a webinar automation, for example, the condition then checks the webinar that started the run.
- A condition about history, such as **Product Purchase**, looks at all of the contact's records, not only this run. To check the order of this run, use **Order Paid** from the "Order" group below.

The groups below, from "Date & Time Filters" to "Cohort", exist only in the **Condition** step. Several of them read the data of the current run, so they need the right step before them: an order trigger or **Create Order** for the order conditions, **Form Submitted** for form data, and so on.

## Date & Time Filters

### Current Date

Use this condition to run the next step in the automation based on the current date. You set a date, a time, and a time zone, so you can time your automations precisely and make them more flexible.

Settings:

1. Current Date:

    - Equals. Checks whether the current date matches the exact date you set. If it does, the next step runs. For example, if you set March 15, 2023, the step runs only on that date.
    - Does not equal. Checks whether the current date differs from the date you set. If it does, the next step runs. For example, if you set March 15, 2023, the step runs on any day except March 15, 2023.
    - More than. Checks whether the current date is later than the date you set. If it is, the next step runs. For example, if you set March 15, 2023, the step runs starting March 16, 2023.
    - Less than. Checks whether the current date is earlier than the date you set. If it is, the next step runs. For example, if you set March 15, 2023, the step runs on any date before March 15, 2023.
2. Date and time. Choose the exact date and time the condition checks against.
3. Time zone. Choose a time zone so dates and times are handled correctly in different regions. This makes sure the step runs at the right time for the zone you set.

![Current Date filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d37d93f88f9c3160370278c4c5c40943645b176027ac132f5bd54f3af55521e8.png)

### Current Time

Use this condition to run the next step in the automation at the time you choose on the days of the week you pick.

Settings:

1. Current Time. Sets a time range. If the current time falls within the range, the next step runs.
2. Time zone. Needed to determine the time correctly. It makes sure the step runs at the right time for the region you set.
3. Days of the week. Choose the specific days of the week on which the step can run.

![Current Time filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b99648a72d01f8d26a341b46d52a5e51a5d62f684b0c95a6b5c012ceb8e7a6f9.png)

## Automation Filters

### Chatbot Channel Type

Use this condition to build automations with several branches based on the channel contacts use to talk to your chatbot. It helps you tell contacts apart when their interests or preferences depend on the channel.
This condition is available only in chatbot automations.

Settings:

1. Chatbot Channel Type:

    - Contains. If you select this condition and choose, for example, "Telegram," you get a list of contacts who interacted with the bot through Telegram.
    - Does not contain. If you select this condition and choose, for example, "Telegram," contacts who interacted with the bot through that channel are excluded.
2. Chat channel. Choose specific channels, such as "Telegram," "WhatsApp," or "Facebook." When you select a channel, the final list shows the contacts associated with it.

![Chatbot Channel Type filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/70bf637fbeb7c4c93fd6a54366355317f567f6fc1d575e62145e433200db804e.png)

### Email Link

Use this condition to sort contacts by how they interacted with a link in an email. It's available only when the previous step in the automation is "Email Clicked."

Settings:

1. Email Link:

    - Contains. Finds contacts whose actions involve links containing a specific word or phrase. Useful for finding contacts who interact with specific content.
    - Does not contain. Finds contacts who didn't interact with links containing a specific word or phrase. Useful for analyzing a lack of interest in specific content.
    - Equals. Finds contacts who interacted with one specific link (for example, by its full URL). This lets you track interaction with a particular item precisely.
    - Does not equal. Finds contacts who didn't interact with the specified link. This can help you identify contacts who skipped a specific offer or piece of content.
2. Value field. Enter the value to filter by. The step applies it with the condition you picked.

![Email Link filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b958f8e7e25bcc31f985ebd107971ae9fbd11517c90b272dcc5bbb28cecb91c8.png)

### Webhook Data

Use this condition to act on information your automation received through a webhook.
A webhook lets one application send data to another in real time when an event happens.
This condition is available only when one of the earlier steps in the automation is "Webhook."

Settings:

1. Key. The key to filter by. It can be "user\_id," "event\_type," or any other identifier passed in the webhook.
2. Condition:

    - Equals. Finds contacts whose value for the key exactly matches the value you enter. For example, if the key "user\_id" equals "123," only data for the contact with ID 123 appears.
    - Does not equal. Finds contacts whose value for the key doesn't match the value you enter. For example, if you enter "123," the list includes everyone except the contact with ID 123.
    - Contains. Finds contacts whose value for the key includes the text you enter. For example, for a key like "event\_type" that contains the word "signup," all registration-related events are selected.
    - Does not contain. The opposite: excludes contacts whose value for the key contains the text you enter. For example, if you enter "signup," the list includes everyone except those with registration-related events.
    - Is set. Finds contacts whose specified key has any value, whatever it is.
    - Is not set. Finds contacts whose specified key has no value or is empty.
3. Value. The value to filter by.

![Webhook Data filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1cc20878b2660cffa2d3749d93c30a67d44f92177f4fd7e99cefdfbb4e5b3154.png)

### Automation Start Data

Use this condition to build automations with several branches based on the data the automation started with. You can check information about the contact, their actions, their preferences, or the context in which they interact with the platform, and then decide how the automation continues.
In the "Key" field, enter the key that points to a specific piece of data, such as "product.id," to identify a product or module. Then set a condition for that key, for example "product.id" equals a specific value. Depending on whether the condition is met, the automation can follow different branches: show different materials, suggest additional tasks, or send different messages.
This condition is available only when the previous step is "Automation Started."
An example of an automation that uses this condition is shown below.

Settings:

1. Key. The key to filter by. It can be "user\_id," "event\_type," or any other identifier.
2. Condition:

    - Equals. Finds contacts whose value for the key exactly matches the value you enter. For example, if the key "user\_id" equals "123," only data for the contact with ID 123 appears.
    - Does not equal. Finds contacts whose value for the key doesn't match the value you enter. For example, if you enter "123," the list includes everyone except the contact with ID 123.
    - Contains. Finds contacts whose value for the key includes the text you enter. For example, for a key like "event\_type" that contains the word "signup," all registration-related events are selected.
    - Does not contain. The opposite: excludes contacts whose value for the key contains the text you enter. For example, if you enter "signup," the list includes everyone except those with registration events.
    - Is set. Finds contacts whose specified key has any value, whatever it is.
    - Is not set. Finds contacts whose specified key has no value or is empty.
3. Value. The value to filter by.

![Automation Start Data filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/341ec9a9342bfd7a16a626b44cc55d388cc02f730ca221e4ad451e882bee2481.png)

### Form Data

Use this condition to check the values contacts entered in a form. The automation can then react to that data and decide how to continue based on those values.
When a contact fills out and submits a form, the value of each form field (such as text fields, switches, and checkboxes) is saved. In this condition, you pick specific fields from the form and set a condition for their values.
This condition is available only when the previous step is "Form Submitted."

Settings:

1. Form field name. Select a specific field from the form you're working with.
2. Condition:

    - Equals. Filters by exact match. If you select this condition and enter a value, only contacts with that value in the selected field appear.
    - Does not equal. Excludes contacts whose data in the selected field matches the value. In other words, everyone except the specified contacts appears.
    - Contains. Shows contacts whose selected field contains the value you enter (a partial match).
    - Does not contain. Works the opposite way from Contains. Shows all contacts whose selected field doesn't contain the value you enter.
    - Less than. Selects contacts whose value in the selected field is less than the value you set.
    - More than. Works like the previous condition, but filters for contacts with values greater than the one you set.
3. Value. The value to filter by.

![Form Data filter set to the form field job_title equals Team lead, with the matching summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/33b63d3559d9e72176ec068dac0b9731554959a1342f584d11b37ac07d3c258b.png)

## Course

### Course Duration

Use this condition to find contacts who completed a course in a specific length of time, in days, hours, or minutes.
This condition is available only when the previous step is "Course Completed."

Settings:

1. Condition:

    - Equals. Shows only contacts whose course duration equals the value you set.
    - Does not equal. Excludes contacts whose course duration matches the value you set.
    - Less than. Filters contacts whose course took less time than the value you set.
    - More than. Shows contacts whose course duration is greater than the value you set.
2. Value field. Enter the number to filter by.
3. Unit. Select the time unit: days, hours, or minutes.

![Course Duration filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c0e579ce8cee636795d7d428fb28c65c0c0e31a74cfc5d3cd27d72b51fc7e4a8.png)

### Course Score

Use this condition to find contacts who earned a certain number of points on completing a course. Setting a range lets you filter contacts by their scores more precisely.
This condition is available only when the previous step is "Course Completed."

Settings:

1. Range. These fields set the range of points contacts earned in the course.
From. Sets the lower boundary of the score range. Contacts who scored less than this value don't appear.
2. To. Sets the upper boundary of the score range. Contacts who scored more than this value don't appear either.
3. Inclusive. If you select this checkbox, the boundary values (both From and To) are included. Contacts whose score exactly matches a boundary appear in the result.

![Course Score filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/654052b1bb2b495b32739e3ec9680f9bceec4961ac5817932f2d8d5fc0ee4b39.png)

## Order

### Order Paid

Use this condition to track contacts who paid for training or access to content. It's useful for managing finances and seeing how many contacts are actually in paid programs.

This condition is available only when there's an order step earlier in the automation.

Settings:

1. Order Paid:

    - Yes. Shows only contacts whose orders were paid. This lets you assess the volume of paid services and monitor finances.
    - No. Shows contacts who didn't pay. This can help you identify potential customers, or contacts who are interested but didn't finish paying. You may want to step in, for example by sending a reminder or offering help.

![Order Paid filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fa7497fb714b95f0eb22bf23fc8716256c71fcef56b6d7c0771ba89ca2353d26.png)

### Product

Use this condition to find a group of contacts connected to products in the system. It helps you analyze and segment contacts based on whether their orders include a product.
This condition is available only when there's an order step earlier in the automation.

Settings:

1. Product:

    - Yes. Shows all contacts who have a specific product in their orders. Useful for analyzing customers who already showed interest in a particular product, or for targeted marketing.
    - No. Shows contacts who don't have the specified product in their orders. This can help you identify potential customers who may be interested in the product but haven't bought it yet.
2. Product. If you choose specific products, the step shows contacts who do or don't have those products in their orders. This lets you target your audience more precisely in marketing campaigns or notifications.

![Product filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ac6242a82b02cc290c69855c0a20450df6323190141937150abae6b8ebee4c87.png)

### Payment Amount

Use this condition to analyze contacts by their payments. Each condition builds a list of contacts based on payment amounts, which supports decisions about marketing and promotions.
This condition is available only when there's an order step earlier in the automation.

Settings:

1. Condition:

    - More than. Shows contacts who paid more than the number you set. This can help you identify customers with high purchasing power.
    - Less than. Finds contacts whose payment is less than a certain value. Useful for identifying customers who may need motivation to spend more.
    - Is equal to. Shows contacts who paid exactly the amount you set. Helpful for identifying groups of contacts who made identical purchases.
    - Is not equal to. Finds contacts whose payment doesn't match the amount you set. Useful for analyzing unusual situations or finding customers who buy under special conditions.
2. Value field. Enter the number to filter by.

![Payment Amount filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0387c784f0c6ef695ef8ed20bb859717cd5392a2f57b15b4a86e54a60dcaf67d.png)

### Order Amount

Use this condition to find contacts whose order amounts are greater than, less than, equal to, or not equal to the value you select.
This condition is available only when there's an order step earlier in the automation.

Settings:

1. Condition:

    - More than. Shows customers whose orders total more than the value you set. This helps you identify more active and financially capable customers.
    - Less than. Shows contacts whose orders total less than the value you set. Important for working with customers who may be less engaged.
    - Is equal to. Shows contacts whose order total matches the value you set. Useful for analyzing specific customer segments.
    - Is not equal to. Finds contacts who placed orders for amounts different from the one you set. This can reveal contacts with non-standard buying habits.
2. Value field. Enter the number to filter by.

![Order Amount filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5f80cca66986204e8eb0c9fd9978edf8fa14b3f817e75ec44d94ac6c0bc2a89b.png)

## Cohort

### Current Cohort Date

Use this condition to track and manage participants in cohorts. It's available only in cohort automations.

Settings:

1. Current Cohort Date:

    - Yes. The step considers only contacts who are currently enrolled in the course or are active participants in the current cohort. Instructors and administrators can quickly see who is studying right now.
    - No. Shows contacts who aren't currently enrolled in the course. These could be contacts who finished their training or haven't started yet.
2. Cohort Date. Select the cohort date to show participants for.

![Current Cohort Date filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d2a50e828bb8f9f622eed4452e45d449de4d14fccac4eee5969d8c87db9723e9.png)

## Example: Setting Up a Condition Step

Choose a condition from the list, for example "Course Completed." Then a "Yes"/"No" selector appears. Select "Yes" to match contacts who completed the course. If you select "No," the step matches contacts who haven't completed it. Next, select a course from your account's course list and click "Save."
Then you can choose the next step in the automation, for example "Send Email." The email goes only to contacts who completed the selected course.

This is a simple example of a step with a single condition. You can make it more complex by adding more "OR" conditions and "AND" groups.

For the course-completion example, connect the matching output to **Send Email**. Connect the non-matching output to a different action if incomplete contacts need a reminder. A contact should follow the branch for their result, rather than both messages.

![Condition step settings: Course Completed set to Yes for Northstar Academy - Leadership Certificate, with the summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a1aa2576982b54a4577803f5343e839808a30fd390be45f6139d1a593f6ac34a.png)

---

# Variables in Automations

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/variables-in-the-scenario

> Insert variables into automation actions and learn which contact, order, webinar, course, form and certificate data is available.

A variable is a placeholder that AXL automatically replaces with the data you choose. It can be the contact's name, email, account name, order number, webinar date, and so on. For example, add the variable "Contact first name" to the text of an email, and AXL replaces it with the recipient's name when it sends the email.

In a step's settings, you can add variables to the subject, subtitle, and body of an email. You can add variables to these actions: "Send Email", "Webhook", "Send Message (Chat/Email)", "Add Note", "Request Data", and "Notification".

To insert a variable, open the step's settings and click the variables button next to the field: **Add Variables** in messages and the email subject, **Insert variable** in the email body toolbar, **Variables** in **Update Contact Attribute**, **Add Template Variables** in **Add Note**. Click a variable in the list to insert it, for example `#Contact.FirstName#`. The placeholder stays in the text while you edit; AXL puts the value in when the step runs.

**Important:**

- Insert variables from the list rather than typing them: a typo leaves the placeholder as plain text in the message.
- If the data is missing, the variable is replaced with nothing. A contact without a first name gets "Hello, !" from `Hello, #Contact.FirstName#!`, so write texts that still read well without the value.
- The list shows only the groups that make sense in this automation and after the steps connected before this one. For example, **Order** appears after an order trigger or a **Create Order** step. Connect the steps first, then open the list.

Each variable group has its own list of available variables:

1. Contact Details

2. Account Details

3. Chat

4. Order

5. Course Details

6. Webinar

7. Functions

8. Form Data

9. Deals

10. Certificate

11. Global Variables

## Contact Details Variables

The "Contact Details" list is always available. Select the variables you need and click a name to add it to the text.
The "Contact Details" list contains variables about the contact: email, first name, last name, phone number, birthday, custom attributes, and so on.

![Add Variables panel with the search field and the Contact Details variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c9d40f9f1e6f5eabce6ab2fe58bf276e57605eb02d0383744263df3bae2bcc86.png)

## Account Details Variables

The "Account Details" list contains variables about your account: the account name and a personal link to the Membership Portal.

![Add Variables panel listing contact and account values, including the invitation, unsubscribe and personal account links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6ed27774ec78a935debf5b82b6022a3b41b140cddc6be2419dc722d3e55d3ef7.png)

## Chat Variables

The "Chat" list contains variables related to messengers: chat name, chat type (Telegram, Viber, and so on), user ID in the chat channel, and chat nickname.
If you don't specify channel\_id, AXL uses the automation's chat channel, if there is one.

![Add Variables panel with the Chat group: chat name, type, user ID and nickname placeholders that take a channel ID.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/11f534763a7356098de07bbf1592fa9fae090dcd9faa09e2cc360098bdfc2267.png)

## Order Variables

The "Order" variables appear in the list when you create a product automation and use triggers such as "Product Order Created" or "Product Purchased".

![Order variables in the picker after a Create Order step: order ID, number, status, dates, amounts and payment link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ffdb4dea10f8aa138cf94d859116b34f89dc2f0e223c37a07c7621a2c8ff209d.png)

If you're creating a different type of automation (not a product automation), add the "Create Order" action in an earlier step. The variables for the user's order then appear in the list: number, status, order date, UTM parameters, order amount, payment link, and others.

![End of the Order group in a global automation, followed by Functions, Chat, Automation Data and Global Variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f6bcbef41d7beec64ffce65f78165611be2e993d54b46d808201d9095d3cbf68.png)

## Course Details Variables

If you're creating a course automation and an earlier step uses the "Course Started" or "Course Completed" trigger, the course details appear in the list of variables.
The "Course Details" list contains variables about the course the user can access: the course name and the course ID.

![Course Details variables (#Course.Id#, #Course.Name#) in the picker opened from a course automation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f254b4206127eea07873f5980b41b71455d7f4f3b955f9598132a68c303069c3.png)

## Webinar Variables

If you're creating a webinar automation, or an earlier step uses the "Register for Webinar" action, the webinar details appear in the list of variables.

The "Webinar" list contains variables about the webinar the user is registered for: the webinar name, date, and time, a personal sign-in link, the time until the webinar starts, and others.

![Webinar variables in the picker: name, links, date, time, time zone, time to start, chat messages and minutes attended.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a97cc9c2d63692a8fe39f2e193fa82b9b428aeb4fe863efd94df97383a11f45d.png)

## Function Variables

The "Functions" list is always available, for example when you configure a "Webhook" action.
The list contains these variables: New 36-character GUID, New 22-character GUID, UTC date, and Unix timestamp.

![Functions group in the picker: new 36- and 22-character GUIDs, UTC date and Unix timestamp.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/11f534763a7356098de07bbf1592fa9fae090dcd9faa09e2cc360098bdfc2267.png)

## Form Data Variables

If an earlier step uses the "Form Submitted" trigger, the form data appears in the list of variables.
The list contains a variable for each form field, named after that field.

![Form Data variables in the picker after a Form Submitted trigger: a field-name placeholder and the form page URL variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/11f534763a7356098de07bbf1592fa9fae090dcd9faa09e2cc360098bdfc2267.png)

## Deal Variables

If you're creating a deal automation, or an earlier step is a Deals action such as "Deals: Create or Update Deal", variables related to deals and pipelines appear in the list: deal amount, date created, pipeline stage, and pipeline.

![Deals variables in the picker opened from a pipeline automation: amount, dates, stage, pipeline, ID, number, owner and participants.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/644dc06030dad96ac433f01e109cfedbc8e0f397912983803579ffbe64b902a2.png)

## Certificate Variables

If you're creating a certificate automation, or an earlier step uses the "Issue Certificate" action, variables related to certificates appear in the list: the certificate number and the certificate download link.

![Certificate variables in the picker: #Cert.Number# and #Cert.Link#.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64bd34dc6be775002ad40196077d56d67d747f2313b5844219ea33edd26f73f7.png)

## Global Variables

Global variables are values you create once and reuse across the platform. They are always available and can store data that you need in different automations, modules, lessons, or assignments.
To learn how to create and edit global variables, read "[Account Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/account-settings)".

![Global Variables group at the end of the picker with #Global.support_email#.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f6bcbef41d7beec64ffce65f78165611be2e993d54b46d808201d9095d3cbf68.png)

## Check the substituted value

Save the action after inserting variables. Run the intended path for a test contact with the required data, and inspect the resulting message or note. For an order, webinar or certificate variable, verify that the earlier connected event or action supplies that specific object; a visible placeholder is not a check that the value will be available in every branch.

---

# SMS Broadcast Integration via Webhook

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/integration-with-sms-mailing-services-via-webhook

> Set up SMS broadcasts through Twilio by connecting its API to an AXL automation with the Webhook action.

Twilio is a platform for sending SMS messages. To send SMS broadcasts and notifications, you can connect Twilio to AXL with the "Webhook" action in an automation.

To connect Twilio, you need to:

Register with Twilio

Encode Your Twilio Credentials

Set Up the "Webhook" Step

## Register with Twilio

Open [Twilio’s signup page](https://www.twilio.com/try-twilio) and follow its current registration and verification prompts. Review the current trial availability and account terms before creating the account.

![Earlier Twilio signup page with blank name, email and password fields, terms checkbox and trial button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/72b2539cd0e6af79facdaa10ab4f9b3c26b0c71aad84f5972842b718a121b947.png)
Reference image of an earlier Twilio signup page. Twilio controls this screen; its fields, trial offer and verification requirements may differ. Follow the current prompts on Twilio’s website.

Complete the verification steps shown in your Twilio Console. Trial restrictions and account review depend on the account; follow the current prompts rather than assuming a fixed activation time.

In Twilio Console, obtain your Account SID and an SMS-capable sender. Create an API key and keep its secret private. Trial accounts also require a permitted test recipient.

Use the trial setup or phone-number setup offered in your Console; confirm the sender can send SMS to the destination you intend to test.

## Encode Your Twilio Credentials

The **Authorization** header uses HTTP Basic authentication: encode your `API Key SID:API Key Secret` pair as Base64 on your own computer. Do not enter a live key into an online encoder. Keep the Account SID separately for the request URL.

On Windows, open PowerShell and run these lines. Enter the API Key SID at the first prompt and its secret at the second; the secret prompt hides what you type:

```
$twilioKeySid = Read-Host 'Twilio API Key SID'
$twilioKeySecret = Read-Host 'Twilio API Key Secret' -AsSecureString
$twilioCredential = [System.Net.NetworkCredential]::new($twilioKeySid, $twilioKeySecret)
[Convert]::ToBase64String([Text.Encoding]::UTF8.GetBytes($twilioCredential.UserName + ':' + $twilioCredential.Password))
Remove-Variable twilioKeySid, twilioKeySecret, twilioCredential
```

Copy the single Base64 output line. In AXL, enter `Basic`, one space, and that value in the header. The output is reversible and remains a credential: do not put it in screenshots or shared documents. See [Twilio’s authentication instructions](https://www.twilio.com/docs/usage/requests-to-twilio) for the supported credential types.

Copy the locally encoded value into the AXL Authorization header in the next step. Do not include the unencoded or encoded credential in a screenshot.

## Set Up the "Webhook" Step

Open **Settings → Automations** and select the automation that will send the SMS. Keep it inactive while you configure and verify the request. For an automation started manually or through its API, use the **Automation Started** event. Add the **Webhook** action from **Integrations & Analytics** and connect the appropriate preceding step to it. On the Webhook card, click the gear icon and choose **Configure Step**.

![Webhook step card with the gear menu open and Configure Step, Copy Step and Delete Step commands.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cb09e94bcaf3c7cf2120421bd98874d6756d2f1ecb005a75fc2345ab3b689b7b.png)
On the Webhook card, open the gear menu and choose Configure Step. This unconfigured example shows the command; connect your intended preceding step as described above.

A window opens. Fill in the fields as described below.

![Webhook settings with POST and x-www-form-urlencoded selected, empty URL and headers, and Add controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/579ad81d4e80cea21c01c306b2637f6bea40f9fe5d1ae07c846fbe2960973c3a.png)
Select POST and x-www-form-urlencoded, then enter the request URL, header and body values described below.

1. Method. In the "Method" field, select POST from the list.
2. URL. In the "URL" field, enter https://api.twilio.com/2010-04-01/Accounts/YOUR\_ACCOUNT\_SID/Messages.json (in this URL, replace YOUR\_ACCOUNT\_SID with the Account SID you got from Twilio when you signed up).
3. Headers. In the "Key" field, enter Authorization. In the "Value" field, enter Basic YOUR\_ENCODED\_STRING (replace YOUR\_ENCODED\_STRING with the string you got when you encoded your credentials in step 2).
4. Request Body. In the "Request Body" field, select x-www-form-urlencoded from the list.
Then click "Add" three times to add three rows. Enter the data in each row:

    - Key: Body. Value: the text of the SMS you want to send.
    - Key: From. Value: the phone number the SMS is sent from.
    - Key: To. Value: the phone number the SMS is sent to. Use variables.
5. Test Request. This sends the configured request to Twilio and can create a real SMS. Use only a permitted test recipient and review the response.
6. Show Variables. Click "Show Variables" to open a list of variables on the right, then select the ones you need.
A variable is a placeholder that is replaced automatically with the data you selected, such as the contact's name, email, account name, or order number. For example, add the "Contact First Name" variable, and the message shows the recipient's first name. If the automation has a "Create Order" action in an earlier step, the order data also appears in the variable list.

![Unsaved Webhook example with POST, example.com URL, form-encoded Body, From and To fields, and Show Variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f703a2794cade1d75a9898eff54213931c2e0a0f240bb0457056a56fa048a963.png)
Illustrative, unsaved form: example.com and the phone numbers are placeholders; the Authorization header is omitted. For a working Twilio request, use its API URL, your private credentials, an SMS-capable sender and an allowed recipient as described above.

When the configuration is correct, click **Save**. Keep the automation inactive until you have checked the response and actual message delivery with an allowed test recipient.

## Verify the request and the delivered message

1. Use the Account SID in the request URL. Set the **Authorization** header to `Basic` followed by one space and the locally encoded API-key credentials.
2. Set **Body**, **From**, and **To** in the form-encoded body. Use the intended SMS-capable sender and a recipient you control; check trial restrictions in Twilio before testing.
3. Run **Test Request** once and inspect the response. An accepted request is not proof that the phone received the message.
4. Check the message status in Twilio and the recipient’s device. Correct any delivery error before activating the automation, then save the Webhook step.

For current setup requirements, see [Twilio’s SMS quickstart](https://www.twilio.com/docs/messaging/quickstart) and [authentication guidance](https://www.twilio.com/docs/api/errors/57019).

---

# Run an Automation via the API

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/calling-the-scenario-via-the-api

> Configure an automation and API key, send contact data using POST or GET, and check the resulting run in the contact card.

Use the API to start an AXL automation from another application, such as your website, CRM, payment service or a script. The request tells AXL which automation to run and for which contact. AXL finds or creates the contact, saves the contact details you send, and runs the automation's steps for that contact: for example, it sends a welcome email and grants access to a course.

The endpoint runs a standalone automation created under **Settings → Automations**. Automations that belong to a course, product, pipeline, chatbot or webinar cannot be started this way. Use **POST** whenever your integration supports it; **GET** is available for tools that can only open a URL.

## Create an Automation

Go to **Settings → Automations** and click **Create Automation**. Enter a title and a description, then click **Create**.

![New Automation panel with the title Northstar Academy — Enrollment via API, a description and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c511024967ec808e49246584fa5a0e980984930d8f27a0d0bf0e02bc30d0a85d.png)

The automation opens on the **Automation** tab. It already contains the **Automation Started** trigger: this is the step the API request fires. Do not add a second copy of it.

![New automation on the Automation tab with the Automation Started trigger, the Inactive toggle and the How to Run via API link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/60b0094058d8396e900af2ee9033c460aa21ef9ae155f0a5486ee7afcc49453c.png)

Click the info icon next to **How to Run via API**. The window shows the request format and this automation's ID in `scenarioId`. Copy the ID: every request needs it.

![How to Run via API help showing this automation's ID in scenarioId.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e929d229e1d00b43990d33e57c91d87c5ee07a39df000eed708db2feb4da6230.png)

## Set Up the Automation Steps

Add the actions that should happen for the contact, configure each one, and connect them to **Automation Started** by drawing a line from the trigger to the first action. In the example below, AXL sends a welcome email and grants access to the Leadership Certificate course.

When the steps are ready, turn on **Active**. A request for an inactive automation is rejected with the `scenarioDisabled` error. For the list of actions and their settings, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".

![Automation Started connected to Send Email (contact's email, Northstar template) and Grant Product Access (Leadership Certificate, no end date).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/522d6b9f8ec32452270ecf765e0d297ad246f46605d509783a0d4c5a2869587c.png)

## Create an API Key

Go to **Settings → API Keys** and click **Create API Key**.

![API Keys list with the Northstar Enrollment Integration key, its edit and delete buttons and Create API Key.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/313cc66d875f524f356077f3e86a808e83cb164bb822fa9278678aae94d764f7.png)

1. In **New API Key**, enter a title that names the integration, for example **Northstar Enrollment Integration**, and click **Create**.
2. Open the key by its title. Turn on the **Run Automations** permission and click **Save**. Without this permission every request returns `accessDenied`.
3. Copy the key with the copy icon beside it and store it in your integration's secret settings.

**Important:** the key works like a password for your account. Keep it on your server or in the integration's secret storage. Do not put it in website code that runs in the visitor's browser, in shared documents or in screenshots.

## Request Reference

| Item | Value |
| --- | --- |
| URL | `https://app.axl.tech/api/v1/scenario/run` |
| Method | `POST` (recommended) or `GET` |
| Authorization header | `Authorization: Bearer YOUR_API_KEY`: the word `Bearer`, one space, then the key |
| Body format (POST) | JSON, with the header `Content-Type: application/json` |

### Body parameters

| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| `scenarioId` | string | Yes | The automation ID from **How to Run via API**. |
| `contactId` | string | One of the two | The ID of an existing contact. If the contact does not exist, the request fails with `studentNotFound`. |
| `contactData.email` | string | One of the two | The contact's email. If there is no `contactId`, AXL looks for a contact with this email and creates a new one if none exists. |
| `contactData` | object | No | Contact details to save on the contact: see the next table. Fields you leave out stay unchanged. |
| `data` | object | No | Values for this run only, such as an order number or amount. They are not saved on the contact. Conditions in the automation can read them (see Pass values to the run). |

### Contact fields in `contactData`

| Field | Format and behavior |
| --- | --- |
| `email` | A valid email address; an invalid one returns `invalidParameter`. |
| `firstName`, `lastName`, `middleName` | Text. |
| `phone` | Text; use the international format, for example `+12025550184`. |
| `country`, `city` | Text. |
| `timezoneId` | Time zone ID, for example `America/New_York`. An unknown ID returns `unknownTimezone`. |
| `birthday` | Date in `YYYY-MM-DD` format, for example `1990-04-15`. |
| `gender` | `male`, `female` or `other`. |
| `comment` | Replaces the contact's comment. |
| `commentAppend` | Adds text to the contact's existing comment. |
| `tags` | Array of tag names, for example `["webinar-lead"]`. Tags are added; the contact's existing tags stay. |
| `groups` | Array of group names. The contact is added to these groups. |
| `utmSource`, `utmMedium`, `utmCampaign`, `utmTerm`, `utmContent` | UTM tags of the visit that led to the request. |
| Custom field key | Any other key is treated as a custom contact field, for example `"enrollment_source": "Fall webinar"`. The field must already exist in AXL; an unknown key returns `leadAttributeNotFound` with the key in `target`. |

To find a custom field's key, open any contact card in **CRM → Contacts**, click **Manage Custom Attributes** and open the field. To create a field, click **Create Field** and fill in **Title**, **Type** and **Key**. The key may contain Latin letters, numbers and the symbols `-`, `_` and `.`, without spaces.

![New Field form beside Custom Attributes: Title Enrollment source, Type Text, Key enrollment_source and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/56dd977a70e69f399f41d00944a0f40812b880e5134d9dff3c99c733694cada2.png)

### Pass values to the run

Use `data` for values that matter to this run but should not be stored on the contact, such as an order number or a payment amount. Nested objects are allowed. A **Condition** step can check them with the dynamic data filter, using a dotted path to the value: `"data": {"order": {"amount": 149}}` is read as `order.amount`. Send `data` in a POST request.

### Response

AXL answers with HTTP status 200 and a JSON body. Always check `success`: errors also arrive with status 200.

```
{
  "success": true,
  "errors": [],
  "body": "_3PKP8LF6kGA_mPUvH9LtA"
}
```

`body` is the ID of the contact the automation runs for: the existing contact or the one just created. Save it if your system needs to address the same contact later. A successful response means the run has been queued; the automation's steps then run in the background, usually within seconds.

An error response has `success: false` and the reason in `errors[].type` (shortened example):

```
{
  "success": false,
  "errors": [
    { "type": "scenarioDisabled", "target": null }
  ]
}
```

### Errors

| `type` | Cause and fix |
| --- | --- |
| `accessDenied` | The API key does not have the **Run Automations** permission. Turn it on in **Settings → API Keys**. |
| `isRequired` | A required parameter is missing: `target` is `ScenarioId`, or `ContactId` when neither `contactId` nor `contactData.email` was sent. |
| `invalidParameter` | The email is not a valid address (`target`: `Email`) or a custom field entry is malformed (`target`: `Attributes`). |
| `unknownTimezone` | `timezoneId` is not a known time zone ID. |
| `scenarioNotFound` | No standalone automation with this `scenarioId` exists in the account. Copy the ID again from **How to Run via API**. |
| `scenarioDisabled` | The automation is inactive. Turn on **Active**. |
| `studentNotFound` | No contact with this `contactId` exists in the account. |
| `leadAttributeNotFound` | A custom field key in `contactData` does not exist; the unknown keys are listed in `target`. |

## Run an Automation with POST

Each example runs the automation for Olivia Bennett, saves her name, phone, a tag and a custom field, and passes an order amount to the run. Replace `YOUR_API_KEY` and `YOUR_AUTOMATION_ID` with your values. The email and phone are fictional; use your own test contact.

**Important:** every successful request starts the automation for real. Its steps may send emails or messages and grant access, so test with your own contact first.

### curl

```
curl -X POST "https://app.axl.tech/api/v1/scenario/run" \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer YOUR_API_KEY" \
  -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
  -d '{
    "scenarioId": "YOUR_AUTOMATION_ID",
    "contactData": {
      "email": "olivia.bennett@example.com",
      "firstName": "Olivia",
      "lastName": "Bennett",
      "phone": "+12025550184",
      "tags": ["webinar-lead"],
      "enrollment_source": "Fall webinar"
    },
    "data": {
      "order": { "amount": 149 }
    }
  }'
```

### JavaScript (Node.js 18+)

```
const response = await fetch('https://app.axl.tech/api/v1/scenario/run', {
  method: 'POST',
  headers: {
    'Authorization': `Bearer ${process.env.AXL_API_KEY}`,
    'Content-Type': 'application/json',
  },
  body: JSON.stringify({
    scenarioId: 'YOUR_AUTOMATION_ID',
    contactData: {
      email: 'olivia.bennett@example.com',
      firstName: 'Olivia',
      lastName: 'Bennett',
      phone: '+12025550184',
      tags: ['webinar-lead'],
      enrollment_source: 'Fall webinar',
    },
    data: { order: { amount: 149 } },
  }),
});

const result = await response.json();
if (!result.success) {
  throw new Error(`AXL error: ${result.errors.map(e => e.type).join(', ')}`);
}
console.log('Contact ID:', result.body);
```

### Python

```
import os
import requests

response = requests.post(
    "https://app.axl.tech/api/v1/scenario/run",
    headers={"Authorization": f"Bearer {os.environ['AXL_API_KEY']}"},
    json={
        "scenarioId": "YOUR_AUTOMATION_ID",
        "contactData": {
            "email": "olivia.bennett@example.com",
            "firstName": "Olivia",
            "lastName": "Bennett",
            "phone": "+12025550184",
            "tags": ["webinar-lead"],
            "enrollment_source": "Fall webinar",
        },
        "data": {"order": {"amount": 149}},
    },
    timeout=30,
)
result = response.json()
if not result["success"]:
    raise RuntimeError(f"AXL error: {result['errors']}")
print("Contact ID:", result["body"])
```

The JavaScript and Python examples read the key from the `AXL_API_KEY` environment variable, so the key never appears in the code. For an existing contact whose ID you know, send `"contactId": "CONTACT_ID"` instead of `contactData.email`; the other contact fields are optional.

## Run an Automation with GET

Use GET only when your tool can open a URL but cannot send a POST request with a body. All parameters go into the query string: contact fields get the `contactData.` prefix, including custom field keys.

| Query parameter | Description |
| --- | --- |
| `scenarioId` | The automation ID. Required. |
| `contactId` | An existing contact ID, or use `contactData.email` instead. |
| `contactData.email`, `contactData.firstName`, `contactData.phone`, … | Contact fields from the table above, one parameter per field. |
| `contactData.<key>` | A custom field, for example `contactData.enrollment_source=Fall%20webinar`. |
| `admin_access_token` | The API key without `Bearer`. Use it only if the tool cannot send the `Authorization` header. |

With the Authorization header:

```
curl -G "https://app.axl.tech/api/v1/scenario/run" \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer YOUR_API_KEY" \
  --data-urlencode "scenarioId=YOUR_AUTOMATION_ID" \
  --data-urlencode "contactData.email=olivia.bennett@example.com" \
  --data-urlencode "contactData.firstName=Olivia" \
  --data-urlencode "contactData.phone=+12025550184"
```

When the tool can only open a URL:

```
https://app.axl.tech/api/v1/scenario/run?admin_access_token=YOUR_API_KEY&scenarioId=YOUR_AUTOMATION_ID&contactData.email=olivia.bennett%40example.com&contactData.firstName=Olivia&contactData.phone=%2B12025550184
```

Encode the values in the URL: `%40` stands for `@`, `%2B` for `+` and `%20` for a space. Without encoding, the `+` in a phone number turns into a space.

**Important:** a URL with `admin_access_token` contains your key and starts the automation every time it is opened. Servers, proxies and browsers can record URLs in their logs, so never publish such a URL on a website or in a shared document. Prefer the Authorization header whenever the tool supports it.

## Check the Result in AXL

1. Check `success` in the response. On success, `body` contains the contact ID.
2. Open **CRM → Contacts** and find the contact by the email you sent.
3. Open the contact's **Automations** tab and find the run of your automation.
4. Open **History** to see which steps ran, and check their results separately: the email in the contact's email history, the course in **Access & Products**.

---

# Contacts

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/contacts

> Add, import, filter, and bulk-edit contacts in AXL CRM.

Contacts is the list of people in your account. It includes people who registered on their own, contacts an admin created, and contacts an admin uploaded to AXL CRM.

Go to CRM → Contacts to see your customers and site visitors.

Use the "Add Contact" button at the top of the page to add contacts manually.

Use the "Import Contacts" button to upload customer data from your computer to your account's CRM.

Click a section to go to its description:

How to Add a Contact

How to Import Contacts

Contact List

Search and Filters

Bulk Actions for Contacts

Merging Contacts

## How to Add a Contact

Click "Add Contact" and fill in the fields in the panel that opens:

1. **Email**. Enter the contact's email address.
2. **First Name**. Enter the contact's first name.
3. **Last Name**. Enter the contact's last name.

![Add Contact compact form with a demo email, First Name and Last Name, Show Full Form, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/164c48b1a88f91465f437584fae21368457e0c04af825d126a1b280a008d8158.png)

You can also add more details about the contact. Click "Show Full Form":

1. **Middle Name**. Enter the contact's middle name.
2. **Phone Number**. Enter the number in international format. Select a country if needed.
3. **Birthday**. Enter the contact's date of birth.
4. **Gender**. Select a gender from the list.
5. **Tags**. Select existing tags or type a new one.

![Expanded Add Contact form with Middle Name, Phone Number, Birthday, Gender, Tags and Cancel/Create footer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dd032378d92bfbd1d83ce68ac11f9205a0b9632767d7f3496c21dc4d1f2b2798.png)

Click **Create** to save the contact. Find the new row in **CRM → Contacts**, then click the contact’s name to review their card.

## How to Import Contacts

Importing means moving a list of contacts (your customer base) into your account's CRM on the AXL platform. Upload the list from your device (computer, laptop, or tablet) as a single TXT, CSV, or XLSX file. This is the fastest way to bring a large number of contacts into your account's CRM.

For details on importing, see "[Importing Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/importing-contacts)".

Added and imported contacts appear in the contact list. When you create a contact manually, an email address that is already in use is rejected. Find the existing contact before creating another record; use the merging instructions below when you already have duplicate records.

![CRM Contacts list with demonstration contacts sorted by name, Add Contact and Import Contacts buttons, search, Lead Priority and filter controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f859f9286a92c0e6ce0a148fec48d97953a8ed1f29af1c2cc6c0e60b065dff89.png)

## Contact List

The list shows key information about each contact. To choose which columns appear, click the "Manage Columns" button (the eye icon) above the list.

A window opens where you choose which columns appear in the contact list. Add or remove columns to set up the list the way you want.

Check the boxes next to the columns you want to show in the contact list. To return to the original view, click "Reset to Default".
The left side lists every available column:

1. **Email**. Shows the contact's email address.
2. **Phone**. Shows the contact's phone number.
3. **Comment**. Shows the comment saved for the contact.
4. **Location**. Shows the contact's location and time zone.
5. **Groups**. Shows the groups the contact belongs to.
6. **Tags**. Shows the tags attached to the contact.
7. **First UTM Parameters**. Shows the contact's first UTM parameters.
8. **Latest UTM Parameters**. Shows the contact's most recent UTM parameters.
9. **Gender**. Shows the contact's gender.
10. **Owners**. Shows the admin in your account who is responsible for the contact.
11. **Membership Portal**. Shows whether the contact is registered in your Membership Portal.
12. **Last Seen**. Shows the date and time the contact was last online.
13. **Date Added**. Shows the date the contact was added.
14. **Courses**. Shows the courses the contact is currently taking.
15. **Total Paid**. Shows the total amount of the contact's payments.
16. **Affiliate**. Shows the affiliate the contact is assigned to in the affiliate program.

The right side lists the columns you've selected. To change their order, drag a column up or down. When you're done, click **Apply** to save the selected columns and their order.

![Manage Columns upper available fields, selected order, Reset to Default, Select All, Apply and Cancel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/baa7ec251826f1b2035229332084aa4e7d829d4290ea345551a0354dca6e6cc5.png)![Manage Columns scrolled to the lower standard fields: Owners, Membership Portal, Last Seen, Date Added, Courses, Total Paid and Affiliate.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/db0f5fc2c7fdb11f94f50d79cb22674028a74412308af61a07d36aa102756d94.png)

If the columns are wider than your screen, scroll the list sideways to see all of them.
To do this, hold down the Shift key and turn the mouse wheel, or use the scroll bar at the bottom of the list.

## Search and Filters

Use the search box and the filters at the top of the page to find the contact you need quickly.

Click the "Show advanced filter" button (the funnel icon) and set your filter conditions. For details on advanced filters, see "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

![Filter Conditions drawer with Add OR Condition picker open, initial contact-filter choices, Cancel, Create Filter and Apply Filter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/926e7226ad2b89acf66ae29274d5e79c4073f47f38edaa96221517ba9ba62e85.png)

## Bulk Actions for Contacts

Use filters and search to select the contacts you need, then run an action on all of them at once. For details on filtering, see "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

Select the contacts and click "Bulk Actions".

A list of actions opens. The action you choose applies to every selected contact.

**Important:** bulk actions work like the same change made by hand on each contact. **Add Tags** and **Add Groups** start your **Contact Tags Added** and **Added to Group** automations for every selected contact, and **Run Automation** starts the chosen automation for each of them. Check the selection and the active automations before applying an action to a large list.

![Bulk Actions menu for selected contacts Aria Sullivan and Henry Mitchell, showing the complete main action list and Affiliate Program, Certificate and Gamification groups.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/54d8d85f4ecbac77d04fa1a9ed2bfa98390e948cf8ba51892da7282f741bb94d.png)
Select contacts before opening Bulk Actions. Expand Affiliate Program, Certificate or Gamification for the grouped options described below. Available actions depend on account features and permissions; Telegram Groups/Channels requires the Telegram integration.

Here are the main actions:

1. **Add Note**. Adds a note to the contact card.
2. **Add Task**. Adds a task for all selected contacts. For details on creating CRM tasks, see "[Tasks](https://docs.axl.tech/tasks)".
3. **Add Tags**. Adds tags to the contact cards.
4. **Remove Tags**. Removes the selected tags from the contact cards.
5. **Add Groups**. Adds the selected contacts to one or more contact groups. Click "Manage Groups" if you need to create a group first.
6. **Remove Groups**. Removes the selected contacts from the contact group.
7. **Add Owner**. Adds an owner to the selected contacts or replaces the current one.
8. **Remove Owner**. Removes the owner from the selected contacts.
9. **Add to Mailing List**. Adds the selected contacts to a mailing list. For details on creating mailing lists, see "[Mailing Lists](https://docs.axl.tech/mailing-lists)".
10. **Remove from Mailing List**. Removes the selected contacts from the mailing list.
11. **Run Automation**. Starts an automation for the selected contacts. For details on automation settings, see "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)".
12. **Register for Webinar**. Registers the selected contacts for a webinar. For details on webinar settings, see "[Webinars](https://docs.axl.tech/webinars)".
13. **Grant Product Access**. Gives the selected contacts access to a course, product, cohort, or library for a set period. For details on creating products, see "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".
14. **Revoke Product Access**. Removes access to the course, product, cohort, or library.
15. **Export Contacts**. Exports all selected contacts to an XLSX or CSV file.
16. **Merge Contacts**. Combines duplicate contacts into a chosen target. You choose the profile values to keep; related records transfer in the background. For details, see "[Merging Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/merging-contacts)".
17. **Telegram Groups/Channels**. Adds contacts to or removes them from a Telegram group or channel. For details on Telegram group settings, see "[Telegram Groups/Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels)".

    - **Add Contacts to Telegram Group/Channel**. Adds contacts to the Telegram group linked to a specific course or program.
    - **Remove Contacts from Telegram Group/Channel**. Removes contacts from the Telegram group.
18. **Suspend Access**. Temporarily blocks the selected contacts' access to certain content or features.
19. **Pause Subscription Renewal**. Creates a pause period for the selected products. In the form, select **Products**, then choose **Duration** (months, days, and hours) or **Custom date** for the pause end. Review the selected contacts and products before clicking **Confirm**. Afterward, check the affected product access and renewal date in the contact card. For product subscription settings, see [Subscription](https://docs.axl.tech/subscription).
20. **Add Bonus Transaction**. Creates a transaction that adds to or deducts from the contact's bonus account. The bonus account holds bonus credits, which appear in the contact's personal account in your account's currency. Contacts can use them to buy products or get certain perks or services. Bonus credits can't be withdrawn. You can add or deduct bonuses for many contacts at once. To do this, choose the transaction type in the settings: deposit or deduction.
21. **Affiliate Program → Change Affiliate**. Replaces the contact's affiliate or removes it. To remove the affiliate, leave the "Affiliate" field empty. For details on the affiliate program, see "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)".
22. **Certificate → Issue Certificate**. Issues certificates to the selected contacts. For details on certificates, see "[Certificates](https://docs.axl.tech/certificates)".
23. **Gamification**. For details on achievements, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)".

    - **Add Achievement**. Awards an achievement to the selected contacts, for example for reaching a goal, finishing a task, or completing a learning stage. An achievement can award the number of points configured for it, including zero. Points also show how well a contact is doing in their studies.
    - **Add Transaction**. Adds or deducts gamification points for the selected contacts. Choose the transaction type and amount, review the selected contacts, then click **Confirm**. For transaction settings, see [Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification).
    - **Reset Achievements**. Removes achievements from the contacts' list of achievements.
24. **Delete Contacts**. Deletes all selected contacts from the CRM.

## Merging Contacts

If you have duplicate contacts, you can select up to 5 of them and merge them into one. The target keeps the profile values you select, such as name, phone, email and date of birth. Related purchases, course records, payments, chatbot activity and site visits transfer in the background. Some system history remains associated with the original contacts.
To merge, open a contact card, click "Actions", and select "Merge with Another Contact". For details, see "[Merging Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/merging-contacts)".

This action can't be undone!

![Contact Actions menu with Merge with Another Contact, alongside Invite, Do Not Call, Run Automation, Ban Contact and Delete Contact.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4a03847259b1af37a34f79f6e5e7d3befdd63342e063777bb6a450f881ad8d4.png)

---

# Merging Contacts

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/merging-contacts

> Review duplicate contacts, choose the profile values to keep, and merge them into one target record.

Merging joins the duplicate contacts of one person into a single contact, so their orders, payments, course records and history are in one place.

**Merging cannot be undone.** Confirm that the selected records belong to the same person. The target record remains; the other selected records are removed after merging.

One person can end up with several contacts in your CRM, each with different data and history. This can happen when people sign up with different email addresses, or mistype their email when registering for a webinar or submitting a form on your site. Later, when they buy a course, they may enter the correct email. The result: one person has several contacts in your CRM, each with its own history of actions.

On the AXL platform, you can merge duplicate records into one target contact. You choose which profile values to keep. Related records, such as orders, payments and course records, transfer to the target in the background.

Click a section to jump to its description:

How to Merge Contacts

Adding Contacts

Choosing the Target Contact

Choosing Fields to Merge

Result

## How to Merge Contacts

If you have duplicate contacts, select the records that belong to the same person and review the values to keep before confirming the merge.
Go to **CRM → Contacts**, select the relevant rows, then choose **Bulk Actions → Merge Contacts**.

![CRM Contacts with two selected rows and the Bulk Actions menu showing Merge Contacts.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/54d8d85f4ecbac77d04fa1a9ed2bfa98390e948cf8ba51892da7282f741bb94d.png)
Select the relevant records, then open Bulk Actions → Merge Contacts.

To find candidates for review, use **Has Possible Duplicates**. A match means the records may be duplicates; check their details before deciding to merge them.

On **CRM → Contacts**, open the filter conditions with the funnel button beside the filter selector.

In **Filter Conditions**, choose **Has Possible Duplicates** in a condition selector, set it to **Yes**, then click **Apply Filter**.

![Filter Conditions with Has Possible Duplicates set to Yes and Apply Filter available.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8fb793c39763e49973773027fd85475d5a412e924df30fb6c6925ac22d910d37.png)
Set Has Possible Duplicates to Yes, then apply the filter.

Review the matching contacts. Select only records that belong to the same person, then choose **Bulk Actions → Merge Contacts**.

You can also start a merge from the CRM contact card. Click the contact's name to open the card, then click "Actions" and choose "Merge with Another Contact".

![Olivia Bennett contact card with the Actions menu open and Merge with Another Contact available.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4a03847259b1af37a34f79f6e5e7d3befdd63342e063777bb6a450f881ad8d4.png)
You can also open the comparison from a contact card’s Actions menu.

## Adding Contacts

When you start from a contact card, use the empty **Contact 2** selector to choose another record. When you start from the contacts list, the selected records are already added. The example records below illustrate the controls; merge records only after confirming they belong to the same person.

To include another record, click **Add Contact** in the Result column and choose the contact in the new selector. You can compare and merge up to five contacts.

![Merge with Another Contact window with Olivia Bennett and Henry Mitchell, field choices, Select All Fields, Go to Contact, and a Result column.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8184c72918543a436bfa2b24a2de8b433dc17c3feaa2d81f074b226429a16ffa.png)
Review the source columns and Result before confirming a merge.

When the comparison has more than two columns, a trash icon appears beside each contact selector. Use it to remove an unwanted column from this comparison; it does not delete the contact from CRM. With two columns, change a selector or cancel and start again if you selected the wrong record.

![Merge comparison with an empty Contact 3 selector and remove icons beside all three contact columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3bc9e4dc5f98c79c4250d030e86ddd20433fba180f659e7ced7759d98543f938.png)
Add Contact opens another selector. Remove an unwanted column with its trash icon.

To view a contact's data or make changes, click "Go to Contact". The CRM contact card opens in a new tab.

## Choosing the Target Contact

Next, choose the target contact by selecting the radio button next to it. This record remains and receives the profile values you select in the form. The other selected contacts are marked deleted.
Related records, such as purchases, course records, payments and chatbot activity, transfer to the target in the background.

![Merge comparison with Contact 2 selected as the target, Henry’s name selected, Olivia’s email unchecked and only Henry’s email in Result.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e7918d073d35bf60f230fe02849bb902d42e3c365fed8da170ad4228ff0bea5.png)
The target and field selections are separate choices. The Result column reflects the selected values.

## Choosing Fields to Merge

Use radio buttons to choose one value for a field such as First Name or Last Name. Use checkboxes for values that can be combined, such as email addresses and phone numbers. **Select All Fields** below a contact selector selects that contact’s values; review the Result column afterwards.

Select the email and phone checkboxes for the values you want to keep. You can retain several email addresses and phone numbers. One address and one number are primary; broadcasts and notifications use the primary email address.

After merging, open **Contact Profile** to review the retained contact details. Use the radio button beside an email address or phone number to make it primary, then save the profile if you changed it.

![Contact Profile with two email addresses, two phone numbers and radio buttons for selecting the primary values.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c79213b38476f43bfa7c95c452f3e434e2746c64d01a4f825531de1ad75db418.png)
In Contact Profile, use the radio buttons to choose the primary email address and phone number.

**Auto-Select** chooses profile values with priority given to the current target contact. It does not restore email or phone checkboxes that you cleared manually, so check those selections and the Result column separately.

## Result

The "Result" column shows what the contact will look like after the merge. Check that the data in the final column is correct. When you're done with the settings, click "Merge", or click "Merge & Open" to merge and open the resulting contact.

Please note: this action can't be undone.

**Note:** The selected profile values are saved first. Related records and history transfer in the background, which can take time. The target's History is not a copy of every original timeline: system events such as contact creation, profile updates, registration, tag and group changes, and deletion remain associated with the original contacts.

Open the resulting contact and check its primary email and phone, retained fields, and access. Related history transfers in the background, so allow that transfer to finish before treating a temporarily missing history item as lost.

---

# Importing Contacts

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/importing-contacts

> Import contacts into your CRM from a TXT, CSV or XLSX file: choose the data source, map the fields and validate.

Import a contact list into **CRM → Contacts** from a **TXT**, **CSV**, or **XLSX** file. The import has three stages: select the data source, map its columns to contact fields, and validate the result before starting.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Data Source

Map Fields

Validation

## Data Source

On the CRM → Contacts page, click "Import Contacts" and fill in the fields in the window that opens. First, choose the data source: File or Text.

![Current Import Contacts File source with the 25 MB upload area, Download Sample File, Session Name, Cancel and Next.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0122e8f974dbfb5baaefd1ae2adb63ae236e69db80dee4ebe687b59b1a89db1e.png)
Choose File to attach a TXT, CSV or XLSX file. Next becomes available after a valid source is supplied.

Choose **File** to upload one TXT, CSV, or XLSX file up to **25 MB**. You can also download the import example file from this step.

For pasted data, choose **Text**, paste the contact rows into the text area, enter a session name, and continue to field mapping. The mapping and validation stages below apply to both data sources.

For **File**, click the upload area or drag in your file. For **Text**, paste the rows into **Copy and Paste Text**.

Once the source is ready, enter a clear **Session Name** so you can find the imported contacts later. Click **Next**. The example below uses pasted text.

![Import Contacts Text source containing two fictional records with a header row and the Northstar Fall Enrollment session name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/05981198c1129cfb92b607762e9d537cc5f60747fb849918db60b22374358e48.png)
The Text example contains two rows with First Name, Email, an empty Last Name, Tags and Groups. Both source types continue through the same mapping and validation steps.

## Map Fields

Match each source column to the correct contact field. Check every assignment, even when your first row contains familiar field names: the initial choices may not match the headers. In this example, map the five columns to **First Name**, **Email**, **Last Name**, **Tags** and **Groups**. Choose **Don't Use** for a column you do not want to import.

Mapped fields can replace existing contact data. For separately mapped **First Name**, **Middle Name**, **Last Name** and **Birthday** columns, an empty imported value clears that field. Mapped custom attributes also replace their stored values. Email and phone fields have separate identity and validation rules; do not assume that an empty cell clears every kind of contact field.

Check empty mapped cells before continuing, and leave columns you do not intend to update unmapped. For list and multiple-choice custom attributes, use the existing option names exactly: an unmatched name can leave the imported selection empty and clear a stored selection. Review the mapping and validation results before starting the import.

Groups and tags aren't removed when the value is empty. Imported groups and tags are added to the contact card.

In the example below, the **Last Name** column is empty. If an imported row matches an existing contact, that mapped empty value clears the contact's last name. The **Leadership** tag and **Fall Enrollment** group are added to the contact card.

![Import mapping with First Name, Email, empty Last Name, Tags and Groups assigned correctly, First row is a header checked, Back and Next.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f7900d45ea876fd81a8a14164fd9020a27ec90406181e11a753f352777b18c2a.png)
Check every assignment manually. This example maps the blank Last Name column as well as the Leadership tag and Fall Enrollment group.

If the data is split incorrectly, click **change it** and select the separator: comma, tab, space, vertical bar or semicolon. Selecting a separator rebuilds the field assignments, so check and correct them again before continuing.

![Import Contacts mapping with the full separator menu: comma, tab, space, vertical bar and semicolon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/518599e80aaa576e41adbf32ff7c8cd1a7a7b4072d1a705b26cb43c1f7d9896a.png)
Choose the separator used by your source, then check the field assignments again. Selecting a separator rebuilds the mapping.

If the first row of your file contains column names, select "First row is a header". Then click "Next".

**How rows are matched to existing contacts:** by email; a row without an email is matched by phone. A matching contact is updated with the mapped fields. If the matching contact was deleted, the import restores it. Otherwise a new contact is created.

## Validation

**Important:** every new contact created by the import starts your active general automations with the **Contact Created** trigger, for example a welcome email. Before importing a large list, turn such automations off or add a condition to them. Tags and groups added by the import do not start **Contact Tags Added** or **Added to Group**.

Review **Total Rows**, **Rows to Import** and **Mapped Columns to Import**. If there are errors or an unexpected field, click **Back** and correct the source or mapping. Review **Import despite errors in secondary fields** before proceeding. Validation only checks the prepared data; **Start Import** begins the import. Click it only after this review, or choose **Cancel** to leave without importing.

![Import Contacts Validation with two total rows, two rows to import, five correctly mapped columns, Cancel, Back and Start Import.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a86e169ec67ef4ff1e33be355b4041d5460a854dd941e8541559cac9d1b3155a.png)
Two rows passed validation with First Name, Email, Last Name, Tags and Groups mapped. This is the review screen before Start Import; the example was cancelled here.

After the import finishes, refresh **CRM → Contacts**. Find several imported contacts and open their cards to check the mapped fields, tags, and groups.

![CRM Contacts list with fictional example.test contacts sorted by name, Add Contact and Import Contacts, search and filter controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f859f9286a92c0e6ce0a148fec48d97953a8ed1f29af1c2cc6c0e60b065dff89.png)
Use the Contacts list and contact cards to verify an import after it finishes. This existing demonstration list illustrates that screen; it is not the result of the two-row validation example above.

---

# Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/contact-card

> See contact details, actions, subscriptions, and tabs in a CRM contact card.

In Contacts, you can manage a contact's details (personal information), grant or remove access to courses in your Membership Portal, assign an owner, add tasks, see learning history, and more.

Go to CRM → Contacts and click a contact's name to open the contact card.

![CRM Contacts list searched for example.test and sorted by name, with fictional Northstar contacts as name links, lead-priority badges, Add Contact, Import Contacts, search and filter controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a62080ca91e6812ac890f463b885f8bcf04031ae25a7c846b49127b0fed88d34.png)

## Contact Card

The card shows the contact's details (name and contact information), course access, and activity in your Membership Portal.

![Olivia Bennett contact card with header, navigation tabs, profile, Owners, Membership Portal Account, Messaging Apps, Access and Products, a deal, an active task and lead-priority History.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1aa76831ae5527956517b7e987c92bc57d4570465732388ef1a8987187de2e47.png)
General Information combines the contact profile and related panels. Olivia has a deal, an active task and lead-priority history; Owners and Access & Products show their empty states. The header and toolbar show the summary information, and the tabs open each detailed section.

## Contact actions

The contact's name and the "Actions" button are in the upper left corner. Click "Actions" to see the options available for this contact. The menu depends on your permissions, the contact's portal registration, and the account's connected services:

1. **Send Chat Message**. Opens the chat window when chat is initialized, the contact has a chat identity and you have permission to chat with contacts. You can message the contact and use available calling tools.
2. **Send Email**. Opens the email composer addressed to the contact's email address when an outgoing email account is available.
3. **Sign In to Portal as This User**. Available for a registered portal user; opens the Membership Portal signed in as this contact.
4. **Change Password**. Available for a registered portal user with profile-edit permission; sets a new password the contact uses to sign in to the Membership Portal.
5. **Telegram Groups/Channels**. Appears when the account has the Telegram integration. Adding or removing the contact from a Telegram group or channel requires permission to manage applications. For details on Telegram group settings, see "[Telegram Groups/Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels)".
6. **Run Automation**. Starts the selected automation for the contact. For details on automation settings, see "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)".
7. **Ban Contact**. Blocks the contact. A banned contact won't receive broadcasts, can't sign in to the Membership Portal or join webinars, can't submit forms or quizzes, and can't buy products.
8. **Merge with Another Contact**. Combines duplicate contacts into a chosen target. You choose the profile values to keep; related records transfer in the background. For details, see "[Merging Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/merging-contacts)".
9. **Delete Contact**. Deletes the contact card.
10. **Invite**. Sends a portal invitation when the contact has an email address but is not registered in the Membership Portal.
11. **Do Not Call / Allow Calls**. Changes whether the platform may call this contact. The menu shows the action that changes the current setting.
12. **Comment permissions**. For registered portal users, admins with course-comment management permission can prohibit or allow comments through the corresponding action.

![Olivia Bennett Actions menu with Invite, Do Not Call, Run Automation, Ban Contact, Merge with Another Contact and Delete Contact.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96414ccf33eb01c1bac9f55db0ca55b348bfc2e055eeb8d02666c64d61bce250.png)
Available actions for this unregistered contact. Other options appear when their requirements are met.

## Activity notifications

You can subscribe to notifications about a contact's activity. Click "Subscriptions" to choose which ones:

1. **Assignment Answer**. Get a notification every time the contact submits an answer to a course assignment.
2. **Assignment Comment**. Get a notification every time the contact comments on a course assignment.
3. **New Order**. Check the box to get a notification every time the contact places an order.
4. **Order Payment**. Get a notification every time the contact pays for an order, whatever the amount.

![Subscriptions menu with unchecked Assignment Answer, Assignment Comment, New Order and Order Payment options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/92ca7ab6d56c58381502b42e6e72a2d6b8da3879ec9b4e07336ad6e839fff91c.png)
Select the activity notifications you want to receive. This example has none selected.

## Contact summary

The header and the toolbar below the tabs show:

1. **Date Created**. The exact date and time the contact was created.
2. **Source**. How the contact was created: manually, a website form, a chatbot, and others. Click the source to see more details (creation date, website, page, visit, form data, and so on).
3. **Bonus Balance**. The bonus account holds bonus credits, which appear in the contact's personal account. The contact can use them to buy products or get certain perks or services. Bonus credits can't be withdrawn. They are deducted automatically at purchase. For each product, you can set the maximum amount a customer can pay with bonuses. For details, see "[Bonus Balance](https://docs.axl.tech/bonus-balance)".
4. **Contact's Local Time**. The contact's local time. Click the info icon to see the contact's location and time zone.

## Restore a deleted contact

You can restore a deleted contact from its card. A deleted contact has a **Deleted** mark at the top. Open **Actions**, choose **Restore Contact**, then review the confirmation dialog. Click **OK** to restore the contact, or **Cancel** to leave it deleted. Wait for the success notification and check that the Deleted mark disappears. This action requires permission to edit CRM contacts.

## Find information in the contact tabs

The contact card has these tabs:

1. **General Information**. See and manage the contact's personal data and course access, assign an owner, add tasks, and more.
2. **Learning**. Lists the contact's course records and learning progress.
3. **Tasks**. Add tasks for the contact and see the list of existing tasks.
4. **Orders**. Shows the contact's orders.
5. **Webinars**. Shows the webinars the contact attended.
6. **Automations**. Shows the automations this contact is part of.
7. **Quizzes/Forms**. Shows all quizzes and forms the contact filled out.
8. **Affiliate Program**. General information and personal analytics for the affiliate program. You can create unique affiliate links for the contact, create transactions, and approve or reject commission withdrawal requests. For details, see "[Affiliate Program in the Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program-in-the-contact-card)".
9. **Gamification**. General information and the history of Gamification transactions. For details, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)".
10. **Certificates**. Shows the certificates issued to the contact.

For a detailed description of each tab, see "[Contact Profile](https://docs.axl.tech/contact-profile)", "[Membership Portal Account](https://docs.axl.tech/membership-portal-account)", "[Learning in the Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/training-in-the-contact-card)", "[Tasks in a Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/tasks-in-a-contact-card)", "[Orders in the Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/orders-in-the-contact-card)", and other articles on the topic.

---

# Contact Profile

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/contact-profile

> Learn about the profile fields and custom attributes on a contact's General Information tab.

The Contact Profile holds a contact's personal data: name, emails, phones, location and more. Here you view and edit those details and add more about the contact.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click the contact’s name, and stay on **General Information**. Use **Contact Profile** to update their details.

The first tab, "General Information", has several sections with details about the contact. This article covers the "Contact Profile" section.
It shows the contact's personal data. You can add more details about the contact or edit what's there.

![Expanded Contact Profile for Olivia Bennett with standard fields, the account custom attributes Shoe size, Social profile link, Ready to buy, Team size, Revenue and Business type, and Manage Custom Attributes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/285549f3019e43309df53a1cec7be95ffc6133b711ff9058e155dfe1ce9c5304.png)
The expanded profile shows standard and custom fields. Custom field names are defined by your account.

## Find a profile field

Click **more** to see all profile fields. After editing profile values, click **Save** at the bottom of the profile form. **Save** and **Cancel** appear when you have unsaved changes and permission to edit the contact. Wait for the success message, then reopen the contact to check the values.

1. **First Name**. The contact's first name.
2. **Last Name**. The contact's last name.
3. **Emails**.
4. **Phones**.
5. **Country**. Click this field and enter the country where the contact is located.
6. **City**. Click this field and add a city.
7. **State**. Enter the contact's state or region.
8. **Gender**.
9. **Birthday**. Select a date from the calendar.
10. **Time Zone**. Select the contact's time zone from the list.
11. **Middle Name**.
12. **Comment**. Add any notes about this contact. You and all other admins in your account can see this comment.
13. **Groups**. Add the contact to a group. Open the Groups field and click "Manage Groups". In the window that opens, click "Add Group" and enter a name for the group. Then click "Close". Now add the group to the contact.
14. **Tags**. Add tags to this contact. Create a new tag or choose from the tags you've already added.
15. **Affiliate**. Shows the affiliate assigned to the contact. Commission depends on the active affiliate offers that match the affiliate, product or category, and purchase type; assigning an affiliate does not make every transaction commissionable. For details on the affiliate program, see "Affiliate Program".
16. **Affiliate Attribution Expires**. The date the affiliate's assignment to the contact ends.
17. **Manage Custom Attributes**. Add your own contact attributes. Click the button and create an attribute.

## Create a custom attribute

A contact attribute is a characteristic or piece of information stored for each contact that can be shown in a list. Attributes add extra details about your contacts, make key information quick to find, and let you sort or filter the contact list by the values you set.

Click "Manage Custom Attributes" to open the window for creating attributes.

To create a new attribute, click "Create Field". In the panel that opens, fill in these fields:

1. **Title**. The name of the attribute.
2. **Type**. Select the type of attribute.

    - **Text**. A short text value, such as a name or nickname.
    - **Long Text**. Longer text or paragraphs, such as a biography or a description of interests.
    - **Date and Time**. A specific date and time, such as the date and time of the last login or the registration date.
    - **Number**. A numeric value, such as an age or the number of completed tasks.
    - **Checkbox**. A yes-or-no value. Use it for statuses such as present or absent, subscribed or unsubscribed.
    - **List**. Select one value from a set of options you define, such as an education level or study group.
    - **Multi-Select**. Select several values from a set of options, such as the languages a contact speaks.
    - **Date**. A date without a time, such as a date of birth or a course start date.
3. **Key**. A unique identifier for the attribute in the system. Use Latin letters, numbers, and the symbols '-', '\_', and '.'. The key can be used in the API and in other parts of the platform.
4. **Restricted Access**. Restricts access to this field. Only admins with access to restricted fields can view and edit it. For example, use it for confidential information such as a passport number or financial data.
5. **Hide from contact card**. Hides the field in the contact profile. The field doesn't appear in the standard view, but you can see it by clicking "more" to expand the full list of fields.

When you're done, click "Create".

![New Field form with Leadership goal, Text type, leadership_goal key, Restricted Access, Hide from contact card, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8552f5d2f74eca53b29f31430720439cf6d93d41a86a88f7656026efaaeba863.png)
Complete the new field settings, then click Create to save the attribute or Cancel to discard the draft.
![Type menu with Text, Long Text, Date and Time, Number, Checkbox, List, Multi-Select and Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7edc43414e6a534d0fedb1900737a9a28a5a3f9701d503196c0eaeba9ac91ef9.png)
Choose the field type before creating the attribute.

## Manage custom attributes

The new attribute appears in the list of custom attributes. The list shows:

1. The move icon. Hold it down and drag the attribute higher or lower in the list.
2. The name of the attribute.
3. The field type.
4. The field key.
5. The "Field is hidden even when filled in" icon.
6. The Edit button.
7. The Delete button.

![Custom Attributes with six existing fields, their types and keys, reorder handles, visibility icons, edit and delete controls, and Create Field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a5c7196645b81622e44458dfdb0264ebf1f69ac1bdbdaf4738cc865a1e935b85.png)
Each row shows the field title, type and key, followed by visibility, edit and delete controls. Titles and keys are defined in your account; use Create Field to add another attribute.

The new attribute also appears in the contact's profile. The expanded profile at the start of this article shows where existing custom fields appear below the standard fields.

## Add email addresses and phone numbers

A contact can have several email addresses and phone numbers. Click "add email" or "add phone" and enter the additional address or number on the new line.

![Contact Profile draft with two email addresses and two phone numbers; radio buttons select the primary address and number.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fe2b2c0ab975aa75d997cfa433370ebb75da544c20df64dc25a750ac5b5a6bbd.png)
Additional email and phone rows with primary selectors. Click Save in the profile form to keep edits, or Cancel to discard them.

**One email address and one phone number are primary.** When there is more than one, select the radio button beside the address or number you want to use, then click **Save** in the profile form. Broadcasts and notifications use the primary email address. Reopen the contact to check that the selected primary address was saved.

---

# Membership Portal Account

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/membership-portal-account

> See whether a contact has signed up for your Membership Portal, send an invitation, and reset the contact's password.

The Membership Portal Account card shows whether a contact has an account in your Membership Portal. From here you invite the contact to sign up and see when they registered, how much they paid and when they were last active.

## Open the Contact’s Portal Account

Go to **CRM → Contacts**, open the contact, and find **Membership Portal Account** on **General Information**.

The "Membership Portal Account" card on the General Information tab shows whether the contact has signed up for your Membership Portal. If the contact hasn't signed up yet, send an invitation: click "Invite" and select "Send Invite Link".

![Membership Portal Account invitation menu showing Copy Invite Link and Send Invite Link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2d5955141416a823c9958153af659d7024c5d30a523154a108666c60cdf5065c.png)

Then click "OK" to confirm. The contact receives a registration link by email. After the contact opens the link and signs up for the Membership Portal, the "Membership Portal Account" card shows:

- Registered. The exact date and time the contact signed up for your Membership Portal using the link.
- Total Paid. How much the contact has paid.
- Last Activity. The exact date and time of the contact's last activity in the Membership Portal.
- Email confirmed. Whether the contact has confirmed their email address.
- Change Password. Lets you change the password the contact uses to sign in to their Membership Portal account.

![Membership Portal Account card for a registered member: registration date, total paid, last activity, email confirmation, and Change Password.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/54c03573206fe70318cd965d9e8e6e9901641cd6c31137b6e6e013a06ad772b9.png)

## Change the Member’s Password

If the contact has lost their password, you can set a new one manually. Click "Change Password". In the "Manage Password" window, enter a new password and select "Require a new password at next sign-in". The next time the contact signs in to the Membership Portal, they'll be taken to a page where they create a new password.

![Manage Password window with a new-password field and Require a new password at next sign-in selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8d154f3750c8b91f007f8b80537488f247eaea7e4a29248b81a62e743c4fdd82.png)

Click "Save".

---

# Contact Tasks

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/contact-tasks

> See a contact's tasks, add a new task, and edit, complete, or delete tasks from the contact card.

The Tasks card on a contact's card shows the tasks planned for this contact, so you see what needs doing next without leaving the card. These are the same tasks as in CRM → Tasks, and you can create a new one here.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click the contact’s name, and open **General Information → Tasks**.

The "Tasks" card on the General Information tab lists the tasks for this contact. These are the same tasks you see under CRM → Tasks.

![Olivia Bennett on General Information with the Tasks card, Show completed selected, two tasks and the Edit, Complete and Delete menu.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2c76b716a97c6b19e8c1fe061a68e917ab96412725d1f7a660c93e1c21779af1.png)
On **General Information**, the **Tasks** card is on the right. **Show completed** is selected, so Olivia's proposal review and completed requirements check are both visible. The open three-dot menu belongs to the active proposal review.

## Show completed tasks

By default, the **Tasks** card shows active tasks only. Select **Show completed** to include tasks with the statuses **Done** and **Can't Be Done** as well. This removes the status restriction; clear the checkbox to return to active tasks.

## Open the full task list

For more detail, open the "Tasks" tab on the contact card. Read more about the "[Tasks](https://docs.axl.tech/tasks)" section in the "[Tasks in the Contact Card](https://docs.axl.tech/tasks-in-a-contact-card)" article.

![Olivia Bennett's Tasks tab with Active and Done rows and the open Actions menu for completing, moving or deleting the active task.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/43d4251e0a7484795c0ba8bdfbf1065dfa06f73069717d20a82dd6723208058d.png)
Open the **Tasks** tab for the full table. This example uses **Period: All** with no Status filter, so both **Active** and **Done** appear. The active row's **Actions** menu is open.

## Create a task

You can add tasks for this contact. Click "Create Task". A window opens. Fill in the fields:

1. **Contact**. Select the contact from the list.
2. **Task**. Write the action to take for this contact.
3. **Add Description**. Click to add a description to the task.
4. **Deal**. Link the task to a deal. The list shows only deals linked to the selected contact.
5. **Assignee**. Choose the team member who will complete this task.
6. **Start**. Enter a start date and time, then choose a duration: **15 Minutes**, **30 Minutes**, **1 Hour**, **2 Hours**, **All Day**, or **Custom**. Custom lets you enter a start and end. Alternatively, click **Select on Calendar**, select a time range with your mouse, then click **Apply**.
7. **Reminder**. Choose when to get a reminder: "5 Minutes Before", "30 Minutes Before", "1 Hour Before", or "No Reminder".
8. **Observers**. Add the admins who should follow this task. They are notified when its status changes.
9. **Files**. Attach files as needed.

![New Task for Olivia Bennett with a cohort kickoff agenda, description, scheduling and notification fields, Files, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/27bdb9ddb130124e2038e4494941ca88c29c1061dfb0e32947ce5cdba7ca32d2.png)
The **New Task** form shows a cohort kickoff example for Olivia. Fill in the task, schedule and any optional fields, then use **Create**.

Click "Create". The task appears in the "Tasks" card. After you create a task, you can manage it. Click the three dots to the right of the task to see a list of actions:

- **Edit**. Click to make changes to the task.
- **Complete**. Click to complete the task.
- **Delete**. Click to delete the task. You'll be asked to confirm.

## Save changes to an existing task

1. Open the task’s three-dot menu and choose **Edit**.
2. Update the task fields.
3. Click **Save**. The edit form uses **Save**; the new-task form uses **Create**.

![Edit Task for Olivia Bennett with the $28,400 proposal review, linked Deal 702, October 19 at 10:30, 15 Minutes, No Reminder and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f6dacf11fc5a310bac19e6c1183a6daeacac7a9267d25f61ce0a1c0b5a4d654.png)
This is an existing task opened in **Edit Task**, so the final button is **Save**. The example links Olivia's $28,400 proposal review to Deal 702 and leaves Assignee and Observers empty. A new task uses **Create**.

---

# Owners

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/responsible

> Assign admins as owners of a contact, set their job titles, and choose which new orders and chats they get automatically.

Owners are the team members responsible for a contact: they handle the contact's tasks, access and personal data. Assign owners so everyone knows who looks after whom; you can add several and divide the work.

## Open the Contact’s Owners

Go to **CRM → Contacts**, open the contact, and find **Owners** on **General Information**.

Owners are the admins of your account who are assigned to a contact and are responsible for them. For example, they complete tasks, add access, make changes to a contact's personal data, and more. You can add several owners and divide the work between them. Read more in the "[Team & Departments](https://docs.axl.tech/team-and-departments)" article.

The "Owners" card on the General Information tab shows the admins assigned to this contact. If no owner is assigned yet, click "Add" and select an admin from the list of admins on your account.

![Contact Profile for Alexandra Morgan Rivera above the Owners panel, which shows No owners yet and an Add button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6d69b14f073338214ac38bc6c7994186fda4ce73bd19ec471c8193124eeec45a.png)
On the contact’s General Information tab, find Owners and click Add. This example shows a contact before an owner is assigned.

## Assign an Owner

An "Add Owner" window opens. Fill in the fields:

- Admin. Select the admin who will own this contact.
- Job Title. Enter this admin's job title.
- Automatically assign new orders. Select this checkbox to automatically assign all future orders from this contact to the owner. Only one team member can have new orders assigned automatically.
- Automatically assign new chats. Select this checkbox to automatically assign all new chats from this contact to the owner.
- **Assign Courses**. If this option is available, select it to choose the courses this owner handles in assignment review. Use the **Assigned courses** selector that appears to choose the relevant courses. This assigns review responsibility; it does not grant the contact course access.

![Add Owner with an empty Admin selector, Job Title, automatic assignment options and Assign Courses.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd074817c99ac9617e66df51b3a5ca17a111e5308087166c1c7e6fe10675a1f5.png)
Choose the Admin and Job Title, review the assignment options, then click Add. This example shows the form before an owner is assigned.

Click "Add". The admin's name and job title appear in the "Owners" card. To remove an owner and assign someone else, click the trash icon on the right and confirm.

---

# Messaging Apps

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/messengers

> Invite a contact to a messaging app and open their conversations from the Messaging Apps card on the General Information tab.

The Messaging Apps card shows which messaging apps a contact uses to talk to you, such as Telegram, WhatsApp or Instagram. From here you open a conversation with the contact or invite them to a new one.

## Open the Contact’s Messaging Apps

Go to **CRM → Contacts**, open the contact, and find the **Messaging Apps** card on **General Information**.

The "Messaging Apps" card on a contact's "General Information" tab lists all the messaging apps this contact has connected: Internal, Telegram, Viber, Facebook, WhatsApp and Instagram. Here you can invite the contact to a new conversation or open an existing conversation with a user on the AXL platform.

![General Information tab of Emma Clark's contact card with the Messaging Apps card listing the Northstar Academy website chat.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3c06808138e2b7fb87ee6f7f21df3998accd8f2b064eac9bebd6d3e0ed7dc50c.png)

## Create a Conversation Invite

To invite a contact to a new conversation and add a messaging app, click "Invite". A small window opens.

![Messaging Apps panel on a contact card with the Internal app and the Invite button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82fe6e92ecdd6ae9a119babe8e4c739fbdb12621ab0e99b846687c788dcc2fa9.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Domain. Select a domain from the list. To learn what a domain is and how to connect one, read "[Domains](https://docs.axl.tech/domains)".
2. Chat Channel. Select a chat channel from the ones connected to your account. To learn how to connect chat channels, read "[Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels)".

![Invite settings under the Invite button with the Domain and Chat Channel selectors.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c300d1d77a37d9faf2875e10d850eb4056a47efa277a371676fa8b0132a8615a.png)

Next, copy the invite link and send it to the contact. The link appears once you've selected a domain and a chat channel. You can send it manually or through an automation, in a regular message or by email.

![Invite settings with the northstar.example.com domain, the Northstar Academy chat channel and the generated invite link with a copy icon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9c7d09b54258f7f72ed29faf6b673a9f5a34c2a15ee440403d06c7613608fd88.png)

When the contact clicks the invite link, they go to the messaging app and start a new conversation. The app then appears in the list on their contact card.
To open a conversation with the contact on the AXL platform, click the messaging app in the list.

![Messaging Apps card with the Northstar Academy app for Emma Clark: click it to open the conversation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2ddc77b152acc2b92c4f2c14260dbdd2585ba764ef78b26439620c991e9e2f62.png)

The conversation opens in the chat window. Type a message at the bottom to reply. The ⋮ menu at the top has more actions: open the contact's CRM card, copy a link to the chat, join the conversation (once you have joined, you can leave it), close the conversation and hide bot messages.

![Conversation with Emma Clark in the chat window with the ⋮ menu open: Open the CRM card, Copy link to chat, Join, Close the conversations and Hide bot messages.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bab09e54e88fa34d73c71bbab1f4afb37428b2b8649e8ff0278b0c50ecaefd44.png)

---

# Access & Products

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/access-and-products

> Give a contact access to courses, products, cohorts, and libraries, and set how long the access lasts.

The Access & Products card shows what a contact can use: the courses and products they have access to. Here you give a contact access to courses, products, cohorts and libraries by hand and set how long the access lasts.

## Open the Contact’s Access Settings

Go to **CRM → Contacts**, open the contact, and stay on **General Information**. Find the **Access & Products** card.

The "Access & Products" card on the General Information tab lists the courses and products this contact has access to. Here you can add access to specific courses, products, cohorts, and libraries, and set how long the access lasts.

## Add Access

To add access, click "Add". A window opens. First, choose what to give access to:

- Course. A course is a set of lessons grouped by topic. Select a course from the courses you've created. Then select a plan. If you don't have any plans, leave this field blank. Read more about courses in the "[Courses](https://docs.axl.tech/courses)" article.
- Product. A product is something you sell to your customers through the AXL platform (a digital product, physical product, service, course, subscription, or cohort). Select a product from the list. Read more about products in the "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)" article.
- Cohort. A cohort is an event (a webinar, a course, and so on) tied to a specific date. Select a cohort and date from the list. For more information about cohorts, see the "[Cohorts](https://docs.axl.tech/cohorts)" article.
- Library. A library holds learning materials that aren't part of your courses, such as a knowledge base, reference material, or a set of articles. Select a library from the list. Then select individual steps in the library, or all items. Read more about libraries in the "[Libraries](https://docs.axl.tech/libraries)" article.

![Add Access Course tab with Northstar Academy Leadership Certificate selected, Plan selector, Lifetime License and Period controls, and Cancel/Add buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bc4c854269c8edbe3f47411440674f242d7e81e024cb4d71a436e935e12e41c5.png)
Unsaved Course example. Choose a plan if one is available, then set the access period.

The following forms show the Product, Cohort, and Library options:

![Add Access Product tab with the Product search open, listing Northstar Leadership products marked Not for Sale.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/39018e210f99b025353729bd033561edb50645fa181b44c21df9b610e92af41e.png)
Search for the product to grant. Products marked Not for Sale appear in the list but cannot be selected.

![Add Access Cohort tab with the required Cohort and Date selector and Cancel/Add buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8da6915c8aaec12fdea365d424f7302edb0841ced658f92ab1235b158e7a6793.png)
Choose an existing cohort date. This capture shows the unselected form.

![Add Access Library tab with Access to all libraries, Library selector, Lifetime License and Period controls, and Cancel/Add buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e192db3a483c9943b98b84925c17c57d3e53889154d1f1e443e8aa49571f238c.png)
Choose a library before selecting its individual steps. This capture shows the unselected form.

Next, fill in the fields for the type you selected: choose the course, product, cohort, or library itself and set how long the contact has access. In the "Period" field, pick the date and time access starts on the calendar. Then pick the date and time access ends, or choose a preset: 1 day, 15 days, 1 month, 3 months, or 6 months.

![Period date and time picker showing start and end values, calendar, time columns, OK, and 1 day, 15 days, 1 month, 3 months and 6 months presets.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ecb3de9aef35b029f3f49488d83e473f2aa5c54b4b788b0e3cab798b52c80689.png)
Set the access boundaries or choose one of the five duration presets.

If you select "Library", choose which steps the contact can access. "All items" is selected by default, which gives access to every step in the library. To limit access, clear it and select one or more steps from the list.

![Access &amp; Products card of Olivia Bennett: the Northstar Leadership Certificate product, active for 30 days 23 hours, and the Leadership Certificate course with a lifetime license, each with a Delete icon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f3738a91fb8a1d63b4c0b695609b8ba33e551001ddf5034c5f4eeeb597632ec4.png)

Click "Add". The new access appears in the "Access & Products" card.

Click the name of an entry to view its details or make changes. To remove access, click the trash icon on the right and confirm.

![Access &amp; Products card on a contact with an active lifetime license to the Northstar Academy · Leadership Certificate course and its delete icon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6c63a856a27bf2c7197d90d93cebf4f60ac491fe20b53622df66a0292ab56d47.png)

---

# Contact Deals

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/contact-deals

> Add a deal to a contact and manage the contact's deals from the Deals card on the General Information tab.

The Deals card on a contact's card shows every deal this contact is part of, so you see their open opportunities while working with them. You can also add a deal for the contact here or edit existing ones.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click a contact’s name, and open **General Information → Deals**.

The "Deals" card on a contact's "General Information" tab lists all the deals this contact is part of. Here you can add a deal or edit existing ones.

![Olivia Bennett's General Information with the complete Deals card: Add Deal, Show closed, Proposal Sent Deal 702, Northstar Academy Fall Enrollment, $28,400, Participants 8 and Unassigned owner.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1aa76831ae5527956517b7e987c92bc57d4570465732388ef1a8987187de2e47.png)
On **General Information**, Olivia's **Deals** card shows open Deal **#702** in **Proposal Sent**, worth **$28,400**. The **8** is the value of this pipeline's custom **Participants** field. The owner is **Unassigned**.

## Create a deal for this contact

To add a deal, click "Add Deal". A window opens.

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. **Pipeline**. Select a pipeline from the list. More fields appear after you choose one.
2. **Pipeline Stage**. Select the stage where you want to add the new deal.
3. **Deal Amount**. Enter the deal amount.
4. **Tags**. Add tags to the deal. Click "Manage Tags" to find or create tags.
5. **Related Contact**. This contact is already added by default.
6. **Owner**. Choose the team member who owns this deal.

Additional custom fields can appear after you select a pipeline. Complete any fields marked as required for the chosen stage. In this example, **Participants** is a pipeline-specific custom field.

![New Deal for Olivia Bennett in Northstar Academy Fall Enrollment, with Proposal Sent, amount 28400, Related Contact, Owner, custom Participants field set to 8, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64e33f3af68defd71918df0e173e5b40a404df991b609b23fe7a4e29432e86ab.png)
Select a pipeline first, then complete the remaining fields. **Participants** is a custom field configured for this example pipeline; your fields and required values can differ. Use **Create** to save a new deal.

Click "Create". The new deal appears in the contact's deal list. For each deal, you see:

1. **The stage name.**
2. **The pipeline name.**
3. **The owner.**
4. **The deal number.**
5. **The deal amount.**
6. **The date the deal was last updated, or its creation date if it has not been updated.**
7. **The number of orders and the number of tasks on the deal.**

## Open the pipeline, deal, or owner

Click the pipeline name to open its board. To learn how to create a pipeline, read "[Deals](https://docs.axl.tech/deals)".

Click the deal number to open the deal details, where you can review or change them. For more on the deal sections, read "[Deal Details](https://docs.axl.tech/deal-details)".

Click the owner's name to open their team profile. This link is available when you have permission to view the team. To learn more about the admins in your account, read "[Team & Departments](https://docs.axl.tech/team-and-departments)".

## Find closed deals

Select "Show closed" to see this contact's closed deals, both won and lost. By default, the list shows open deals only. This switches the list to won and lost deals; it does not add them to the open-deal list. Clear the checkbox to return to open deals.

![Sofia Anderson on General Information with Show closed selected and Won Deal 710 for $21,600 in Northstar Academy Fall Enrollment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e0c9269a43b848609f8875da4e5d38f29879d6eaeee98717d8e575ecc5c0d80e.png)
With **Show closed** selected, Sofia's card shows existing **Won** Deal **#710** for **$21,600**. Clear the checkbox to return to open deals.

---

# Contact History

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/story

> Review recorded activity for a contact, filter the history by category, and add notes with optional files.

Contact History is the timeline of what happened with a contact: notes, emails, course activity, deals, tasks, calls, site visits and more. Use it to catch up on a person before you contact them.

## Open the Contact History

Go to **CRM &gt; Contacts**, open the contact, and find **History** on **General Information**.

The History card brings together recorded activity for this contact, including notes, emails, course activity, deals, tasks and calls. Each entry shows the available event details and its date and time. Depending on the event, it may also show the responsible admin and links to related items.

![Olivia Bennett’s General Information tab with the History card on Main showing saved notes for Olivia Bennett, each with its author Alex Morgan and timestamp.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cd9f8f4fdd87eb4afb1282edde84c0feba1859320eb5efa3a3b95085a6fc223d.png)
The History card is on General Information. Here Main shows a saved note for Olivia Bennett; the author and timestamp appear beside it. Open the image to inspect the card at full size.

## Choose a History Category

Use the tabs above the timeline to narrow the recorded activity:

- **Main** shows a selected set of key events, including notes, course starts and completions, deals, tasks, calls and sent emails. It is a summary, so use another category or All when looking for an event that is not shown here.
- **Sites** shows events classified as site activity, such as recorded page visits and form submissions.
- **Learning** shows learning activity, such as course starts and completions and other recorded study events.
- **CRM** shows CRM activity, including notes and events involving deals and tasks.
- **Calls** shows recorded call events. The details available in an entry depend on the call event.
- **All** removes the category restriction and shows the contact's recorded history across event types.

An empty category means there are no matching entries to display. Changing categories does not create or remove history entries.

## Add a Note

In the History card, enter the information in **Write a note**. To include a related file, click the paperclip and select it on your computer. Check the selected attachments, then click the send control beside the field.

After saving, check the timeline to confirm the note appears for the correct contact with the intended text and attachments. Notes appear in Main, CRM and All. Admins who can access the entry can open its attached files.

You can also use **Add note** at the top of the contact card. Enter the note, use **Upload** for any attachments, then click **Create**. Choose **Cancel** to discard the draft.

![Add note dialog with a draft note about Olivia's training proposal, an Upload control, and Cancel and Create buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3765c1def5de7d1d01a5cd2983957f68efb96f0abfb01f61cbcf26f929944443.png)
The Add note dialog is an alternative to the inline composer. This draft has not been saved; Create submits the note.

## Open Related Items

When an entry contains a linked item name, click the name to inspect that item. Depending on the event and your access, this can open a deal, order, task, course, lesson, site or automation. Use the specific link shown in the entry; not every event or its entire row is clickable.

Review the event description, timestamp and any named admin together to understand what happened. The available links and details vary by event type.

---

# Learning in the Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/training-in-the-contact-card

> Learn what the Learning tab shows about a contact's courses and how to filter it.

The Learning tab on a contact's card shows how one student is doing in your courses: which courses they started, the step they are on, their status, score and last activity.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, select the student's name, and open the contact card's **Learning** tab. Use this view to inspect that student's course progress; use **Access & Products** when you need to grant course access.

The "Learning" tab lists the contact's course records and learning progress. To inspect the contact's access grants, open Access & Products. A course's Users tab shows the corresponding progress for the students in that one course.

![Alexandra Morgan Rivera’s Learning tab with all date, status and course filters and one Northstar course record, showing Activity, Start Date, End Date, Step, In Progress status, Score and Actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d7a01f9aa4508a934b0d1f2109f1e9e1351c8f40428d6ed24a2b33fbc751d5f2.png)
This Learning record is In Progress at Week 1. It has no end date or feedback, so Feedback is disabled and Reset completion is absent.

The list shows this information about each course:

- Course. The name of the course associated with this learning record.
- Activity. The date of the contact's last activity in this course.
- Start Date. The exact date and time the course started.
- End Date. The exact date and time the course ended.
- Step. The step the contact is on now.
- Status. Where the contact is in the course: Not Started, In Progress, or Completed.
- Score. The number of points the contact has earned in the course. A dash is shown when gamification is disabled for the course.
- Actions. Open the course view or history, read available feedback, or reset a completed course. These controls do not grant course access.

In the "Actions" column, you can:

- View. Click the eye icon to open the Membership Portal and see the course from the contact's personal account, as the contact sees it.
- History. Click the history icon to open a window with the contact's detailed history in the course (steps, dates, times, grades, and comments).
- Feedback. Click the message icon to see the feedback the contact left about the course. The icon is disabled when the record has no feedback.
- Reset completion. This button is available if the course is completed. Click the rollback icon to cancel the course completion.

At the top of the "Learning" tab, you can filter the list:

If you do not see the course you expect, clear the date and status filters with **Reset**, then check the contact's course access. An empty filtered list alone does not tell you whether access was granted.

- Start Date Range. Select a course start date.
- End Date Range. Select a course end date.
- Status. Select a status from the list: Not Started, In Progress, or Completed.
- Course. Select a course from the list.
- Reset. Click the button to clear all filters.

---

# Tasks in a Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/tasks-in-a-contact-card

> Learn how to add, filter, and manage tasks on a contact's Tasks tab.

The Tasks tab on a contact's card shows all tasks for this contact with their dates, deals and status, and lets you create new ones, so you can plan the next step with this person.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click the contact’s name, then select the **Tasks** tab. This tab keeps the task list scoped to that contact.

On the "Tasks" tab, you can add tasks for this contact and see the list of existing tasks.

![Olivia Bennett's Tasks tab with Active and Done rows and the open Actions menu for completing, moving or deleting the active task.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/43d4251e0a7484795c0ba8bdfbf1065dfa06f73069717d20a82dd6723208058d.png)
The **Tasks** tab stays scoped to Olivia. With **Period: All** and the Status filter cleared, the table shows both her **Active** proposal review and the **Done** requirements check. The active row's **Actions** menu is open.

## Read and manage the task list

The task list shows these details for each task:

1. **Start**. The date the task is scheduled for and the name of the admin who must complete it.
2. **Task / Description**. What needs to be done, such as a call, an email, or an invitation.
3. **Deal**. The number and stage of the deal the task belongs to. Click the deal number to open the deal details.
4. **Status**. Active, Done, or Can't Be Done.
5. **Actions**. Choose an action from the list: mark the task as complete or can't be done, move it to the next day or next week, or delete it.

## Create a task

To add a task, click "Create Task" under the filters. For more on adding tasks, see "[Tasks](https://docs.axl.tech/tasks)".

![New Task for Olivia Bennett with a cohort kickoff agenda, description, scheduling and notification fields, Files, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/27bdb9ddb130124e2038e4494941ca88c29c1061dfb0e32947ce5cdba7ca32d2.png)
Click **Create Task** to open this form with the current contact selected. Fill in the task and schedule, then click **Create**.

## Find a task

Use the filters at the top to find tasks quickly:

- **Period**. Choose a time period: overdue tasks, tasks for today, upcoming tasks, or all tasks.
- **Search**. Open **Add Filter → Search**, then enter text from the task title, description or comments.
- **Contact**. Set to this contact. You can't change it here.
- **Status**. Shows tasks by status: Active, Done, or Can't Be Done. The task list opens with the Status filter set to Active.
- **Show Unassigned**. Turn on the switch to include tasks that have no assignee.
- **Add Filter**. Click "Add Filter" and select a filter from the list:

    - **Start Date**. Shows tasks that start within the date range you select.
    - **Date Created**. Shows tasks created on the dates you select.
    - **Completion Date**. Shows tasks completed on the dates you select.
    - **Overdue**. Shows overdue tasks.
    - **Assignees**. Select one or more admins from the list.
    - **Advanced Filter**. Build your own combination of conditions to select tasks. A "Filter Conditions" panel opens where you set the conditions for the task list. For details, see "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

![Olivia Bennett's Tasks tab with the Add Filter menu open: Advanced Filter, Assignees, Completion Date, Date Created, Overdue, Search and Start Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e388bf265bf52d891ba9256a62322459f111fc1df64c9050476e48838472fb0d.png)
Use **Add Filter** to add Search, Overdue or another condition; Status already has its own field. To show completed tasks alongside active ones, clear the **Status** filter; **Period: All** alone does not remove it.

## Switch between table and calendar

Two view buttons (a table icon and a calendar icon) are on the right side of the filters. Use them to switch between a table and a calendar.

- **Table**. Tasks appear in a list with one row per task and the details in columns.
- **Calendar**. Tasks appear on a calendar, so you can see them by day, week, or month.

![Olivia Bennett's October 2026 task calendar with a completed task on October 17, an active proposal review on October 19 and Month, Week and Day controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2e102aaa6bfe9b46f8d187c741fbcc24cf29536bc1e58b9b5c74adc512717a5c.png)
The **Calendar** view shows Olivia's tasks by date. This month view includes the completed October 17 requirements check and the October 19 proposal review. Use **Today**, the arrows, or **Month**, **Week** and **Day** to change the dates shown.

To edit an existing task, click its date in the **Start** column, choose **Actions → Edit**, update the fields, and click **Save**. Use **Create** only when adding a new task.

![Edit Task for Olivia Bennett with the $28,400 proposal review, linked Deal 702, October 19 at 10:30, 15 Minutes, No Reminder and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f6dacf11fc5a310bac19e6c1183a6daeacac7a9267d25f61ce0a1c0b5a4d654.png)
This is an existing task opened in **Edit Task**, so the final button is **Save**. The example links Olivia's $28,400 proposal review to Deal 702 and leaves Assignee and Observers empty. A new task uses **Create**.

---

# Orders in the Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/orders-in-the-contact-card

> See a contact's orders, choose table columns, and filter the order list on the Orders tab.

The Orders tab on a contact's card lists everything this contact bought or was asked to pay for, including unpaid and manually added orders, so you can check their purchases and payments in one place.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click the contact’s name, and select **Orders**.

Orders record purchases and payment requests, including unpaid orders and orders added manually. The **Orders** tab shows this contact’s orders using the same table as the "[Orders](https://docs.axl.tech/purchase-orders)" page in the Sales section. The **Linked Contact** filter is fixed to this contact. Other filters narrow this list; open **Sales → Orders** when you need orders from multiple contacts or saved filters.

![Olivia Bennett's Orders tab with Create Order, the fixed Linked Contact filter, two unpaid Northstar orders, Manage Filters, Add Filter and the column-settings button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ef34b5144c559099f31b3601b332e41a2ee780625d3a96ea46112c40dcc2c1c3.png)

## Open an order or its history

The order list shows this information about each order:

1. **Number**. The order's serial number. It also appears in Payments.
2. **Columns**. Columns with order details. You can customize which columns appear and in what order.
3. **Actions**. These buttons are available:
The Edit button. Click to make changes to the order.
The Delete button. Click to delete the order.
The Order History button. Click to view the order history.

Order history opens in a separate window. It shows the exact time, the order status, and the customer's actions.

![Order History of order #1420: license added, order completed, a successful $149 Stripe payment, the product added and the order created.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/546fcd59b88dea0848edaa2d6aef89d581296c29c60863eaa61d4b9322316ed2.png)
Existing order history showing payment and completion events. Scroll within the history to review earlier events.

## Choose the columns and their order

To adjust which columns appear and in what order, click the "Manage columns" button (the eye icon).

The "Manage Columns" window opens. The left side lists every available column.

- **ID**. A unique registration number assigned to the order.
- **Date Created**. The exact date and time the customer created the order on the page.
- **Contact**. The CRM contact linked to the order. Click the contact's name to open the contact's profile in Contacts.
- **Items**. The products and quantities the customer added to the cart or paid for.
- **Payment Date**. The exact date and time the order was paid.
- **Tags**. The order's tags.
- **Owner**. The team member responsible for the order.
- **Source**. The address of the page the order came from, or the name of the admin who added the order manually.
- **Order Total**. The cost of the items the customer has to pay.
- **Paid**. The payment status: not paid, paid, or partially paid. For a partial payment, the amount is shown.
- **Fee**. The fee is calculated automatically when the order is paid.
- **Income**. The paid amount minus processing fees, affiliate commission, bonuses used for payment and other recorded deductions. Income is shown as zero if that calculation is negative.
- **Expires**. The date the order's payment window ends. After this date, the customer can't pay for the order.
- **Status**. The stage the order is currently in. You can edit it from the order card.
- **UTM Parameters**. The order's UTM parameters.
- **Affiliate**. The affiliate contact in the affiliate program.
- **Affiliate Commission**. The commission amount credited to the affiliate.

Check the boxes next to the columns you want to show in the order list. To return to the original view, click "Reset to Default".

The right side lists the columns you've selected. To change their order, drag a column up or down. When you're done, click **Apply** to save the selected columns and their order.

![Manage Columns upper list, selected column order, Reset to Default, Select All, Apply and Cancel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9283d63c79e646632ee205c520640116919d9250f71dca852611f7b0f41bf594.png)![Manage Columns lower list including Status, UTM Parameters, Affiliate and Affiliate Commission, with reorder list and footer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6b8042f07c194516ccb77a1fd6256d2f0d9d022ad071f4802b43cc69c2fcdfc5.png)

## Find an order

Use the filters at the top to find the order you need quickly.

You can filter orders by:

- **Search**. Use this field for a free keyword search.
- **Date Created**. Shows orders created on certain dates. Select a date range.
- **Payment Date**. Shows orders paid on certain dates. Any payment made in the period counts, including a partial payment.
- **Full Payment Date**. Shows only orders that were fully paid on certain dates.
- **Has Payments**. Shows orders with or without payments. Turn the switch on or off to set the filter.
- **Fully Paid**. Shows orders that are fully paid or not fully paid. Turn the switch on or off to set the filter.
- **Owners**. Shows orders assigned to certain team members. Select one or more team members from the list.
- **Products**. Shows orders that include a specific product. Select one or more products from the list.
- **Statuses**. Shows orders that are currently in a certain status. Select the order status from the list.
- **Amount**. Shows orders whose total falls in the amount range you select.
- **Amount Paid**. Shows orders paid for a certain amount. Set the amount range.
- **Renewal**. Shows subscriptions that were renewed or not renewed. Turn the switch on or off to set the filter.
- **Courses**. Shows orders that include certain courses. Select one or more courses from the list.
- **UTM Parameters**. Enter a UTM parameter value to show only the orders from contacts who reached your site through that UTM parameter.
- **Tags**. Shows orders with certain tags.
- **Promo Code**. Shows orders that used the selected promo code.
- **Affiliate**. Shows orders linked to the selected affiliate. You can select one or more affiliates.
- **Affiliate Program**. Shows orders created through the affiliate program.
- **Show Deleted**. Shows orders that were deleted earlier.
- **Custom Fields**. Filter by an order custom field: select the field, choose a condition, and enter a value when that condition requires one. Order fields are separate from contact attributes. For contact attributes, see [Contact Profile](https://docs.axl.tech/contact-profile).
- **Subscription Type**. Shows orders by subscription type: trial period, renewal after trial, full payment, or paid renewal.
- **Advanced Filter**. Build your own combination of conditions to select orders. A "Filter Conditions" panel opens where you set the conditions for the order list. For details, see "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".
- **Card Number**. Enter 4–6 digits in the payment-card search field to narrow orders by payment card details.
- **Created By**. Select one or more admins who created the orders.
- **Product Categories**. Select one or more categories to find orders containing products in those categories.

![Upper order filter menu from Advanced Filter through Full Payment Date, including Card Number and Created By.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a52b4f8f07e3a1cb8671095ffb1421800eca0987f7f93b307cc0042b05de6148.png)![Middle order filter menu from Created By through Promo Code, including Fully Paid, Has Payments, Owners, Payment Date, Product Categories and Products.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/04f83787ae3abdc016a5718703e657c4f44f6c2d1a36f0cfcd790e58368f6044.png)![Lower order filter menu from Payment Date through UTM Parameters, including Renewal, Search, Show Deleted, Statuses, Subscription Type and Tags.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2e9ed4973afb2936220e18e8df7ea0a6bfe3ad1f339c1ca7d33571d1bfdd7d96.png)

## Share the current filters

To share the current order filters, select the conditions you need, click **Manage Filters → Copy Link**, and send the copied link to a team member. Opening it applies the same filter settings. The orders they can see still depend on their access.

![Contact order Manage Filters menu with Clear and Copy Link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a818b4cdf33bee3ed6a2b041fab9bc5da32ba2638a8929cc6da215747194f090.png)

For details on creating and managing orders, see the "[Orders](https://docs.axl.tech/purchase-orders)" article.

---

# Webinars in the Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/webinars-in-the-contact-card

> See which webinars a contact registered for or attended, check attendance, and manage attendee records.

The Webinars tab on a contact's card shows every webinar this contact registered for or attended, how they registered and how long they stayed, so you can see a person's interest in your events.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, select a contact, and open the **Webinars** tab. This view follows one contact across webinars; open a webinar's own **Attendees** tab to manage everyone registered for that event.

The "Webinars" tab shows the webinars this contact registered for or attended.

![Contact card with the Webinars tab highlighted and one webinar registration.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5065855bed92496eabf532251e709744c0e58351fe5f6013e154964a0a605c4e.png)

The table shows the webinars and the contact's details:

1. Webinar. The webinar name and the date and time of the event.
2. Contact. The contact's email address and the first and last name they entered when registering for the webinar.
3. Registration Date. The date and time the attendee registered for the webinar.
4. Attendance. How long this contact was at the webinar, as a length of time and as a percentage.
5. Source. How the attendee registered for the webinar: through a messaging channel or the registration form.
6. Affiliate. The contact of the affiliate from your affiliate program.
7. Actions. The actions you can take for this attendee.

![Contact Webinars table with the Webinar, Contact, Registration Date, Attendance, Source, Affiliate, and Actions columns highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5065855bed92496eabf532251e709744c0e58351fe5f6013e154964a0a605c4e.png)

The "Actions" column has these buttons:

Use the personal webinar link for the selected contact and event. Do not substitute the public registration link when the contact already needs their individual sign-in link.

- Copy Link. Click to show the attendee's link to the webinar, then copy it.
- Webinar Chat Messages. Click to see the messages this attendee sent in the webinar chat. Filters at the top of the window help you find a message quickly. You can also download the messages to your device (computer, laptop, or tablet) as a single CSV or XLSX file, which makes it easy to move a large number of messages.
- **Webinar Attendee Details.** Click the information icon to open Details. General shows the attendee's registration details, role, restrictions, and attendance when available. Chat shows this attendee's messages for the selected webinar. Click Close when you finish.
- Ban. Click to ban this attendee from the webinar. You'll be asked to confirm.
- Delete. Click to remove this attendee's registration from the selected webinar. Check the webinar and contact before confirming; this action is different from hiding a row with a filter.

To restore a removed registration, use the **Deleted** filter, then click the restore icon on that row and confirm. The lock icon changes to an unlock action for a banned attendee. Check the contact and webinar before confirming either action.

![Actions for a webinar registration in the contact card highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5065855bed92496eabf532251e709744c0e58351fe5f6013e154964a0a605c4e.png)

At the top of the "Webinars" tab are search and filter controls. Use them to find webinars and attendees:

- Search. Free keyword search.
- Click "Add Filter" and select a filter from the list:

    - Deleted. Shows deleted attendees.
    - Role. Select a role from the list, such as Guest, Moderator, or Host.

![Search and the Add Filter menu with Deleted and Role in the contact's Webinars tab.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8cc9d622f0087a9b9557786951b6a89dc1b2fe22bbc77aecc85bd2676b8421cb.png)

The "Export Users As…" button is in the upper-right corner of the page. Use it to save webinar data and analyze it outside the platform. The export lists the webinars this contact took part in, in an easy-to-analyze format (XLSX or CSV).

![Export Users As menu with XLSX and CSV in the contact's Webinars tab.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/952d98696d57521e72a7f9a5facd33d82bf1c7519000f1c5aec72d73dfb14d09.png)

---

# Automations in the Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/scenarios-in-the-contact-card

> Open a contact’s automation history, inspect individual runs, and find the controls for stopping or deleting a run.

The Automations tab on a contact's card shows which automations have run for this contact and whether they are still running. Use it to check what an automation did for this person: a run's history lists each of its actions.

## Open a contact’s automation runs

1. Go to **CRM → Contacts**.
2. Click the contact’s name to open their card.
3. Open the **Automations** tab.

The "Automations" tab lists the automations that have run for this contact.

![Contact card with the Automations tab open and two completed automation runs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ada674e77b3efd1de4008a89a5d47ffc94b2397d63bea231b69b79d138237c80.png)

The list shows the following information:

1. Start Date. The exact date and time the automation started.
2. Status. Shows whether the run is in progress, completed or manually stopped.
3. Automation. The name of the automation and where it belongs, such as a course or a site. Click the name to open its settings.
4. Actions. Buttons for working with the automation.

![Contact automation runs table with Start Date, Status, Automation, and Actions columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ada674e77b3efd1de4008a89a5d47ffc94b2397d63bea231b69b79d138237c80.png)

The "Actions" column has these buttons:

Actions apply to the selected contact’s run. Opening the automation name takes you to the automation’s settings; these are different views.

- History. Click to see the history of all actions in the automation.
- Delete. Click to delete this row. You'll be asked to confirm.

![History and Delete icons for a completed contact automation run.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ada674e77b3efd1de4008a89a5d47ffc94b2397d63bea231b69b79d138237c80.png)

At the top of the tab, you can use the filters to find a specific automation.

![Contact and automation selectors above the automation runs table.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ada674e77b3efd1de4008a89a5d47ffc94b2397d63bea231b69b79d138237c80.png)

## Stop a running automation

A running row also has a square stop icon in **Actions**. Click it and confirm the completion prompt to end that run. The control is available only for runs with **Running** status. Stopping or deleting a run requires automation editing permission; without it, the controls are disabled.

Open **History** before deciding what to do. Stopping or deleting a run does not undo the steps that already ran: sent messages, created tasks or notes stay.

**Important:**

- A stopped run sends nothing more: steps waiting on a **Delay** or an answer are not sent.
- A chatbot, or a Telegram group automation, does not start again for a contact while their previous run is still going. If such a run is stuck, for example waiting for an answer the contact will never give, stop it: after that the contact can start it again.
- **Delete** removes the row from the contact's list and from the automation's counters. Use **Stop** for a run that is still going.

---

# Quizzes/Forms in the Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/quizzes-forms-in-the-contact-card

> See the quizzes and forms a contact has submitted, filter them, and preview the answers.

The Quizzes/Forms tab on a contact's card shows every quiz and form this contact submitted, with their answers, so you can see what the person told you.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click the contact’s name, then select **Quizzes/Forms**.

The "Quizzes/Forms" tab lists the quizzes and forms this contact has submitted.

![Olivia Bennett’s Quizzes/Forms tab with the Northstar Executive Program Intake response, Date Submitted and the eye action.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d5efeeec9545d9f4ae22621eea341efbb19759928d4e382489ce8ed146d44682.png)
Open the contact’s Quizzes/Forms tab. The eye in Actions opens the submitted response; the form name opens its settings.

## Open a submitted response

The list shows the following information:

1. **Quiz/Form**. The name of the quiz or form. Click the name to open its settings in the "[Forms & Quizzes](https://docs.axl.tech/forms-and-quizzes)" section.
2. **Date Submitted**. The exact date and time the contact submitted the quiz or form.
3. **Actions**. Click the eye icon in the response row to open **Form Preview** and read the saved answers. The preview does not submit the form again; click **Close** to return to the list.

![Form Preview with Olivia Bennett's saved name, example.com email and team size of 120, with read-only fields, Submit and Close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b8b3c6b50797d47e4bb12b69d1246d57f1776affbfb115f2906d903e4de05499.png)
The eye opens the saved response in **Form Preview**. Read Olivia's answers, then click **Close** to return to her response list. The fields are read-only, so the saved answers cannot be changed here.

## Filter the submissions

At the top of the "Quizzes/Forms" tab, you can use filters for quick search:

- **Contact**. This is preselected with the contact whose card you're viewing.
- **Add Filter**. Click "Add Filter" and select a filter from the list:

    - **Quiz/Form**. Select a specific quiz or form from the list. For example, if a contact submitted several different forms, you can filter the data by one of them.
    - **Response Date**. Select the time range in which the forms were submitted. For example, you can view responses from the last month, quarter or year.

![Olivia Bennett’s Quizzes/Forms tab with Add Filter open to Quiz/Form and Response Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65ebcb8b7348030409d74b74104272831862728c1812004ee960ea9899a08d66.png)
Keep the Contact filter fixed to Olivia, then use Add Filter to narrow the list by Quiz/Form or Response Date.

To read a particular response, find its row by form name and **Date Submitted**, then click the eye icon in **Actions**. Clicking the form name opens its settings instead of the submitted response.

---

# Affiliate Program in the Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program-in-the-contact-card

> Manage a contact's affiliate links, earnings, payout requests, and transactions from the Affiliate Program tab of the contact card.

The Affiliate Program tab on a contact's card is where you work with one affiliate: create their unique affiliate links, add transactions, approve or decline their withdrawal requests and see their personal analytics.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click the affiliate’s name, and select **Affiliate Program**.

**Before you start:** the affiliate program must be turned on under **Sales → Affiliate Program**. If the contact tab shows a disabled-program message, an account admin must enable the program first. Approving or declining requests requires permission to manage the affiliate program.

The contact card has its own "Affiliate Program" tab. On this tab, you can create unique affiliate links for the contact, add transactions, and approve or decline commission withdrawal requests. The tab also shows the affiliate's personal analytics. To learn more about the affiliate program, see "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)."

The "Affiliate Program" tab has four sections:

1. **General Info.** Shows the commission credited so far, plus the affiliate's personal code and links.
2. **Analytics**. Shows the affiliate's personal analytics.
3. **Withdrawal Requests.** Lists all of the affiliate's commission withdrawal requests.
4. **Earnings & Payouts.** Lists all commission credits and payouts for the affiliate.

Each section is described in more detail below.

The contact's bonus balance appears at the top of the contact card. It's shown as bonus credits in your account's currency, and the user also sees it in their Membership Portal profile. Users can spend bonus credits on products, perks, or services. Bonus credits can't be withdrawn.

To learn more about the bonus balance, see "[Bonus Balance](https://docs.axl.tech/bonus-balance)."

## Review the affiliate balance and code

General Info. This section shows the commission credited to the affiliate and the payouts made under the affiliate program. It includes:

1. **Total Credited**. The total commission credited.
2. **Processing.** Commission that is still being processed. If you set a period in the affiliate program settings under "Holding period before commission can be withdrawn," new commission becomes available for withdrawal once that period ends. If you set 0 days, commission is available for withdrawal immediately.
3. **Available to Withdraw.** The commission available for withdrawal today, after subtracting pending payout requests.
4. **Payout Requests**. The commission amount waiting for confirmation by an account admin.
5. **Affiliate Code**. A unique ID issued to the affiliate when they join the program. The code is included in the affiliate link, and commission on sales is credited based on it. Use the copy icon next to the code to copy it.

In the example below, Olivia has $25 credited. The commission is still in the holding period, so it is shown under **Processing** and **Available to Withdraw** is $0.

## Create an affiliate link

1. In **General Info**, paste the website or form address into **Create Link**, for example `https://northstar-academy-help-demo.onaxl.com/`.
2. Check the generated **Final Affiliate Link** below the field. It includes the contact’s affiliate code.
3. Use the copy icon beside the final link, then share that link with the affiliate. Generating the link does not require a separate Save button.

![Olivia Bennett General Info: $25 credited and in Processing, $0 available to withdraw, affiliate code ok3rwd and a generated Northstar affiliate link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9dc97cfe07111f22e3dc05b0e05e0d0c2930b7f08855fd63caef7e2a498721d4.png)
General Info shows Olivia’s $25 commission in Processing. Enter a page address under Create Link, then copy the Final Affiliate Link.

## Review this affiliate’s performance

Analytics. This section shows the affiliate's personal analytics. The report shows affiliate-link activity for the selected dates and filters. It includes:

1. **Link Clicks.** The number of recorded clicks on this affiliate's links. This counts link-click events, not unique people.
2. **Registrations.** The number of users who signed up through the affiliate's links.
3. **Sales (Count).** The total number of sales made through the affiliate's links.
4. **Sales (Amount)**. The total value of sales made through the affiliate's links, in your account's currency.
5. **Total Credited.** The affiliate commission attributed to paid orders in the report. Manual commission entries are shown in General Info and Earnings & Payouts, so these totals can differ.
6. **Chart**. Shows the affiliate program analytics as a graph. Click one of the cards above to see its graph. Use the filter to view stats for specific dates or a time range.

![Affiliate Analytics for Olivia Bennett: date range, the Affiliate selector, the Add Filter menu with Products, Site Pages, UTM and Websites, five metric cards and the Link Clicks chart.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0d8cad396fc2513005019d291611396f280e676acd1127cc3d62b65142c063f0.png)
Select a date range and a metric card to review affiliate-link activity. Add Filter offers Products, Site Pages, UTM, and Websites. The affiliate remains fixed to Olivia.

Use the filter at the top of the section for more detail. Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Websites.** Shows activity on specific websites. Select one or more websites from the list.
- **Site Pages.** Shows activity on specific website pages. Select the pages from the list.
- **Date**. Select a date or a date range to see analytics for that period.
- **Products**. Shows activity related to specific products. Select one or more products from the list.
- **UTM**. Enter a UTM tag value to see only the activity of contacts who clicked a link with that tag.

## Review a withdrawal request

Withdrawal Requests. This section lists all of the affiliate's commission withdrawal requests. You can approve or decline them. The list shows:

1. **Date Created.** The exact date and time the request was created.
2. **Affiliate**. The affiliate's contact. Click the name to open the contact card.
3. **Amount**. The commission amount in the request.
4. **Comment**. The comment on the request.
5. **Status**. The request status: Pending, Approved, or Declined.
6. **Actions**. For pending requests, you have two buttons here:
The check mark icon ("Approve").
The X icon ("Decline").

![Withdrawal Requests for Olivia Bennett: a pending $240.00 request with her comment, the Approve and Decline icons, and the Add Filter menu offering Date Created.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/346bfc1ecd402b186dcedcd6b090bce3b7ab41ca89dc70dea37de122f364a78f.png)
The $240 request is Pending. Use the check mark to review approval or the X to review decline; Add Filter offers Date Created.

1. For a **Pending** request, click the check mark in **Actions** to open **Approve**.
2. Enter a comment if needed. The affiliate will see this comment.
3. Review **Create a withdrawal transaction automatically**, which is checked by default. Leave it checked to record a debit in **Earnings & Payouts** when approving. Clear it if that debit is being handled separately.
4. Click **Approve** to confirm. Check that the request becomes **Approved** and, if selected, the corresponding debit appears in **Earnings & Payouts**.

Approval updates the request and optionally records a debit. It does not send the payout. Arrange the money transfer separately and avoid recording the same debit twice. To leave the request unchanged, dismiss the popover without selecting **Approve**.

![Approve popover for the $240.00 request with a comment the affiliate will see and Create a withdrawal transaction automatically checked.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/731dd27b2bcd8e078304a11441be9d4903bddcbcbf6b021ea00a030012c6cf8c.png)
The approval form shows the comment visible to the affiliate and the checked option to create a withdrawal transaction. Review both before selecting Approve.

1. For a **Pending** request, click the X in **Actions** to open **Decline**.
2. Enter the reason in **Comment**. The affiliate will see it.
3. Click **Decline** to confirm, then check that the request status becomes **Declined**.

To keep the request pending, dismiss the popover without selecting **Decline**.

![Decline popover for the $240.00 request with a comment visible to the affiliate and the Decline button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b2bd96a29e3e74948e288613fcf4a684e11bbd271379c35c18eb5da69c53de78.png)
Enter a clear reason before selecting Decline. This comment will be visible to the affiliate.

Use the filter at the top of the section. Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Date Created.** Filter withdrawal requests by date or date range.

## Review credits and payouts

Earnings & Payouts. This section shows the full history of commission credits and payouts for the affiliate. The list shows:

1. **Date Created.** The exact date and time the transaction was created.
2. **Affiliate**. The affiliate's contact. Click the name to open the contact card.
3. **Contact**. The referral's contact.
4. **Comment**. The comment on the transaction and who created it.
5. **Level**. The affiliate's level in a multi-level program. This column appears only when the multi-level system is on. You can add or change the number of levels on the affiliate program's Settings tab.
6. **Payment Amount.** The amount the referral paid for the product through the affiliate link.
7. **Credit/Debit.** The commission credited to the affiliate. Debits are shown with a minus sign.
8. **Actions**. One button is available here:
The trash can icon ("Delete"). Click it to open **Delete this transaction?**, then choose **OK** to confirm or **Cancel** to leave the transaction unchanged.

![Olivia Bennett Earnings &amp; Payouts with a $25 manual commission credit, the Create Transaction button and the Delete icon.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fa64eaeaa9fac4c64e2254922f59c2cca3167a38ad178634b708946dbe459fac.png)
Earnings & Payouts shows a $25 manual commission credit. Payment Amount is $0 because this entry is not linked to a paid order. Create Transaction and the row’s trash icon are available here.

## Create a manual commission transaction

You can also create transactions manually. To do this, click the "Create Transaction" button.

In the window that opens, fill in these fields:

1. **Affiliate**. Filled in automatically with the affiliate whose card you're creating the transaction from.
2. **Commission**. Enter the commission amount.
3. **Type**. Select the commission type: Credit or Debit.
Credit adds a commission to the affiliate's balance.
Debit takes a commission off the balance.
4. **Comment**. Add a comment to the transaction.
5. **Transfer to Bonus Account.** For a Debit, select this checkbox to deduct commission and credit the same amount to the affiliate's bonus balance. If it is clear, Create records a commission debit only; it does not send money through a bank or payment provider.
To learn more about the bonus balance, see "[Bonus Balance](https://docs.axl.tech/bonus-balance)."

![Unsaved Create Transaction form for Olivia Bennett: Commission 25, Type Debit, a comment and Transfer to Bonus Account cleared.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/503b8e2e79f26ecfa34da4545d2ea6a72a8ce4d4d8ccf343325e4e5547d01a4b.png)
The Debit form keeps Olivia selected and shows Commission, Comment, and Transfer to Bonus Account. With the transfer option clear, Create records a commission debit only.

Click **Create**. Check that the new transaction appears in **Earnings & Payouts** for this affiliate with the intended amount and transaction type.

Use the filter at the top of the section. Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

- **Date Created.** Filter earnings and payouts by date or date range.

---

# Gamification in the Contact Card

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/gamification-in-the-contact-card

> See a contact's points, achievements, and point history in the Gamification tab of the contact card, and reset a user's gamification data.

The Gamification tab on a contact's card shows one student's progress in your points system: their current balance, the points earned over time, their achievements and the history of points earned and spent.

Open **CRM → Contacts**, click the contact’s name, and select **Gamification**.

The contact card has its own "Gamification" tab. 
To learn more, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)."

The "Gamification" tab in the contact card has two sections:

1. **Achievements**. Shows an overview of the points the contact has earned.
2. **Transaction History**. Shows the history of points earned and spent.

Each section is described in detail below.

![Olivia Bennett's Gamification tab with Current Balance 850, Total Earned 1200, the reset button and achievement credits of 450 and 750 points plus a 350-point purchase.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/945b0108564bc8eead311ab8504f1d7c89c4295e95abbbc5215ddd1b4a5b78de.png)
Review the balance, earned total and signed transaction amounts together.

## Review points and achievements

Achievements. This section gives an overview of the user's activity level and achievements in gamification. It shows:

1. **Current Balance**. The number of points the user has now.
2. **Total Earned**. The total number of points the user has earned over time.
3. **Achievements**.
Achievements are special rewards users earn by completing certain tasks or goals while learning. They recognize a user’s progress and can award points. The points store spends the contact’s available points; it does not spend the achievement badges themselves. The list includes the available achievements. Create and customize achievement definitions in the main Gamification settings. To learn how to create and customize achievements, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)." Achievements the user has earned are highlighted in color, and can show an earned date below. The example below shows two earned Northstar achievements worth 450 and 750 points.
4. **Delete Achievements and History**. Use this only when you intend to reset this contact’s gamification progress. It permanently removes the contact’s earned achievements, point transactions, gamification state and related gamification history. The current points balance is affected because its transactions are removed. Click the button, review the confirmation, and confirm only if you intend that reset; cancel to keep the data.

![Two colored earned achievements: Northstar Peer Collaboration for 450 points and Northstar Leadership Reflection for 750 points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3e19462c34506f6dcdfeaafcb2c24281a8bf61eb3fda87433de38ffadf3ba98d.png)
Earned achievements appear in color. Northstar Peer Collaboration also shows its earned date.

## Read the transaction history

Transaction History. This section shows the user's personal history of points earned and spent. It shows:

1. **Date**. The exact date and time of the transaction.
2. **Info**. The transaction source and its related item, such as an achievement, purchase, automation step, course or course item.
Click a linked item name to open its settings; plain-text names are informational. In this example, the purchase links to Northstar Coaching Session.
3. **Points**. The number of points credited or spent.

In the overview above, Olivia earned 450 and 750 points from achievements and spent 350 points on a Northstar Coaching Session. Her **Total Earned** is 1,200 and her **Current Balance** is 850.

## Filter point transactions

Use the filter at the top of the section for more detailed settings. The **Contact** selector is already set to the contact whose card you opened. Click **Add Filter** to choose **Date Created**, **Gamification Product** or **Points**:

- **Date Created**. Select a date or date range to see the history for that period.
- **Points**. Shows transactions within the selected range of points.
- **Gamification Product**. Shows transactions tied to the selected product.
Gamification products are items or bonuses that users can buy with the points they earn for achievements while learning. They can be anything, such as extra lessons, consultations with a teacher, certificates, or e-books. These rewards motivate users to take part in learning and improve their results. To learn how to add and customize products, see "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)."

![Olivia's Transaction History with the Add Filter menu open to Date Created, Gamification Product and Points.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0abc14540aa0dbc0177d267b1b705977c2119f023979f81466e5a38966f87555.png)
Keep the contact selected, then add a date, product or points condition.

---

# Tasks

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/tasks

> Create, filter, and manage CRM tasks for your contacts.

Tasks are planned actions for a contact.

Go to CRM → Tasks to see tasks for all your contacts. Your team creates tasks by hand, and automations create them with the **Add Task** step, for example after a form submission.

Click a section to go to its description:

How to Create a Task

Task Management

## How to Create a Task

Go to CRM → Tasks to see the task list for all contacts. By default, the list shows active tasks assigned to you and tasks with no assignee.

To add a task, click "Create Task" under the filters.

![Tasks list filtered to Olivia Bennett with the active proposal-review task, Create Task, Period, Assignees, Status, Contact and Add Filter controls, linked deal and Actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d189dac222eef6a2abca5e0a20a4ac31d7c87b0a80dcc4ffde3bf390f8995ff9.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in these fields:

1. **Contact**. Select a contact.
2. **Task**. Enter what needs to be done with the contact.
3. **Add Description**. Click to add a description to the task.
4. **Deal**. Link the task to one of the contact's deals. Only deals linked to the selected contact are shown.
5. **Assignee**. Assign the team member who will complete this task.
6. **Start**. Set the start date and time, then choose a duration: 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, All Day, or Custom. Click "Select on Calendar", choose an assignee, drag across the calendar to select a time slot, and then click "Apply".
7. **Reminder**. Choose when to be reminded: 5 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour before the start, or no reminder.
8. **Observers**. Assign admins to follow this task. They get a notification when the task status changes.
9. **Files**. Attach files if needed.

![New Task draft with Contact, Task, Description, Deal, Assignee, Start and duration, Reminder, Observers, Files, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ba4f7c0d4c354227ccf8fa3df8c98a573b77e457a7fa1abbf7a2b85e54272918.png)

Click "Create". The new task appears in the task list.

## Task Management

Created tasks appear in the task list. Use the filters at the top of the page to narrow it down:

1. **Period**. Choose a time period: overdue tasks, tasks for today, upcoming tasks, or all tasks.
2. **Search**. Choose **Add Filter**, then **Search**, and enter text from a task's description or comments.
3. **Assignees**. Shows tasks assigned to certain team members. Select one or more team members, and the list shows only their tasks.
4. **Status**. Shows tasks by status: Active, Done, or Can't Be Done. The task list opens with the Status filter set to Active.
5. **Show Unassigned**. Turn on the switch to include tasks that have no assignee.
6. **Add Filter**. Click "Add Filter" and select a filter from the list:

    - **Start Date**. Shows tasks whose start date falls within the period you select.
    - **Date Created**. Shows tasks created on specific dates. Select a date range.
    - **Completion Date**. Shows tasks completed on specific dates. Select a date range.
    - **Overdue**. Shows overdue tasks. A task is overdue when its deadline has passed.
    - **Contact**. Shows tasks for a specific contact. Select a contact from the list, and the page shows only that contact's tasks.
    - **Advanced Filter**. Build your own combination of conditions to select tasks. A "Filter Conditions" panel opens where you set the conditions for the task list. For details, see "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

![Add Filter menu with Advanced Filter, Completion Date, Contact, Date Created, Overdue, Search and Start Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/051819e18a3740cc96ca5690066ec230b0b259bb187fe1dd7baa825e2cbbf8d0.png)

## Choose a table or calendar view

Two view buttons (a table icon and a calendar icon) are on the right side of the filters. Use them to switch between a table and a calendar.

- **Table**. Tasks appear in a list with one row per task and the details in columns.
- **Calendar**. Tasks appear on a calendar, so you can see them by day, week, or month.

![October 2026 Tasks calendar in Month view with Month, Week and Day controls and the team proposal task on October 19.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e9024ed9d5e8c02352af300f3ae7cad29ffd6060d89ca8e9675d2bba7d56a9fb.png)

The table has these columns:

1. **Start**. The task date and the name of the admin who will do the task or already has.
2. **Contact**. The contact's name. Click it to open the contact card in a new tab.
3. **Task / Description**. What the admin needs to do for the contact.
4. **Deal**. The linked deal and its stage. Click the deal number to open the deal details.
5. **Status**. Active, Done, or Can't Be Done.
6. **Actions**. Mark the task as complete or can't be done, move it to the next day or next week, or delete it.

![Task row Actions menu: Complete, Move to Next Day, Move to Next Week, Can't Be Done and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3d4c57da697ca433c56f41ba50f10728b7ac0afdf0102bdc20e7bc4bd016ccef.png)

## Open and edit task details

Click the date in the "Start" column. A panel opens where you can view the task details and edit the task.

To change the task, choose **Actions → Edit** in its details, update the fields, and click **Save**. Creating a new task uses **Create**; editing an existing one uses **Save**.

1. **Status**. Active, Done, or Can't Be Done.
2. **Date Created**. The date and time the task was created.
3. **Created By**. The team member who created the task.
4. **Contact**. The contact's name. Click it to open the contact card in a new tab.
5. **Assignee**. The admin responsible for the task. If you have access to team settings, click the name to open the admin profile.
6. **Period**. The time frame for completing the task.
7. **Task**. The task title.
8. **Deal**. The deal number and stage.
9. **Complete**. Click to complete the task. If the task is already completed, this button doesn't appear.
10. **Actions**. Choose an action from the list: 

    - **Reschedule**. Click to create another task based on a copy of this one.
    - **Edit**. Click to make changes to this task.
    - **Move to Next Day**. Click to reschedule the task to the next day.
    - **Move to Next Week**. Click to reschedule the task to the next week.
    - **Delete**. Click to delete the task.

![Active Task Details with creation details, Olivia Bennett, an overdue period, the full proposal task description, Deal #702, Complete and Actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/eb050f30574840e06e10a687a84508af467cf843331d6097766673e34c7cb556.png)

## Review a completed task

After a task is completed, the panel shows a "Completed" line with the date and time of completion and a "Report" line with the assignee's comment. The "Actions" button then offers a different set of actions: "Edit Report", "Reopen", "Reschedule", and "Delete".

![Done Task Details for Verify the 8-person cohort requirements with completion time and full report.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/70936d77e0361e5cfcaa62728b77574bd57a946b2a71bd3f91572e62e89e2a1c.png)

---

# Bonus Balance

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/bonus-balance

> How bonus balances work: view and edit a contact's bonus transactions, award bonuses with automations, and let customers pay with bonuses.

A bonus balance is a virtual account that holds the bonus points a user earns for specific actions. Users see their bonus points in their Membership Portal profile.

Users can spend bonus points on perks when they buy products. For example, a user can use points to get a discount on a course or to unlock extra materials and sections. For each product, you can set the maximum amount a customer can pay with bonuses at checkout.

This article covers:

Bonus Balance in the Contact Card

Bonus Balance in the Membership Portal

How to Award Bonus Points with an Automation

Bonus Balance in the Affiliate Program

How to Use Bonuses at Checkout

## Bonus Balance in the Contact Card

Go to "CRM" → "Contacts" and click the contact's name to open the contact card.

![CRM Contacts list searched for example.test and sorted by name, with fictional Northstar contacts as name links, lead-priority badges, Add Contact, Import Contacts, search and filter controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a62080ca91e6812ac890f463b885f8bcf04031ae25a7c846b49127b0fed88d34.png)

The contact's bonus balance appears in the upper-right part of the page.

![Contact card header for Olivia Bennett with Bonus Balance $0.00 next to Date Created and Source, above the contact tabs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8bc2d34ac5468cf4c21a512ed770e67314a72d427c4c3610d1435f1704d638fc.png)

Click the bonus balance amount to see the transaction history.

![Show history tooltip over the Bonus Balance amount in the contact card header.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6566118bf162110c61f1b07116f7f99ef877bb16043bac1a87580f389440851d.png)

A panel opens with the full history of bonus balance transactions, including the date and time of each. You can delete transactions here or create new ones.

![Bonus balance Transaction History for Olivia Bennett: two credits, $25 for passing the Module 1 quiz and a $50 welcome bonus, each with a comment, the admin who created it and a Delete button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/969276c16e751ac891efcb9488d13ef8bd2fcd7c66b8202c03937d8f676f543d.png)

## Add a bonus credit or debit

You can add transactions to a contact's bonus balance from the contact card. To add a credit or a debit, click "Create" in the history panel. In the panel that opens, fill in these fields:

- **Amount**: Enter the amount to credit or debit, in your account's currency.
- **Type**: Select Credit or Debit.

    - **Credit** adds bonus credits to the user's bonus balance.
    - **Debit** removes bonus credits from the user's bonus balance.
- **Expiration**. Set how long the bonuses stay valid. This field appears when the type is Credit.

    - **No Expiration**. The bonuses never expire.
    - **Duration**. The bonuses stay valid for a set time. In the field below, enter the number of days or months.
    - **Date**. The bonuses stay valid until a set date. In the field below, select the date when the credited bonuses expire.
- **Comment**: Add a comment to the transaction.

Click "Create."

![Create Transaction form: Amount 25, Credit, Duration of 3 months, a comment, and Cancel and Create buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b3f6225fecd3a06d75e9acf7352507f5b233b3e4872196adadf00b059fdbb0e0.png)

The bonus balance updates immediately, and the new transaction appears in the history list.

## Bonus Balance in the Membership Portal

Users can see their bonus balance in the Membership Portal. Open the Membership Portal, click the user name in the upper-right corner, and select "Bonus Balance" from the drop-down list.

![Member profile menu with Bonus Balance.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/42e0594b2f5775399fdf43deba70cea5bb6c8ad740b58b6521ce5454eaa2eb63.png)

In the window that opens, the user sees their bonus balance and a list of bonus transactions with the date, amount, and comment of each.

![Membership Portal User Profile, Bonus Balance tab: balance $75 and two bonus transactions with date, comment and amount.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f5ed379eb1f838b1465fc6d8bf86bb5cbba64d11f7da4d38179604bb7851bd88.png)

## How to Award Bonus Points with an Automation

With an automation, you can build a sequence of events and actions that awards bonus points to users automatically when they meet certain conditions.

## Open the automation editor

To create an automation for your account, go to "Settings" → "Automations". Open an existing automation or create a new one.

You can also open an automation from other sections, such as "Sales" → "Products & Services". To learn more about creating automations, see "[Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)."

![Settings → Automations list with Create Automation, search and type filters, and Northstar Academy automations with edit, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f6dbd5801d2d58af4d47864ec7549007e5d0dc9085908cabf7b414ed61d165f.png)

Here's an example of an automation that awards bonus points for buying a product. It credits points to the bonus balance, and the user can spend them on another purchase.

In the automation, select the "Product Purchased" event and drag it into the editor. This step needs no additional settings.

![Product Automation tab with the Events palette open and Product Purchased connected to Bonus Balance: Add Transaction and Send Message.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9eb1c47f4d19bda1d171a65f4676c343c20a86d215d82bc2bd36b6736cb66fe5.png)

## Configure the bonus credit

Open the **Actions** tab, drag **Bonus Balance: Add Transaction** onto the canvas and connect it to **Product Purchased**. Open its settings through the gear icon → **Configure Step**:

- **Amount**: the bonus to credit, in your account's currency.
- **Type**: **Credit**.
- **Expiration**: **No Expiration**, a **Duration** or a **Date**. When it comes, AXL deducts whatever is left of this credit by itself.
- **Comment**: the reason the contact sees in their bonus history.

Click **Save**. Then add **Send Message (Chat/Email)** to tell the contact about the bonus and when it expires.

![Bonus Balance: Add Transaction step settings: Amount 25, Credit, Duration 3 months and the comment Welcome bonus for new members.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/072d6c58b39223c084dfb00240f8fc4e8d4dea91364b6fd0d0c3d4015a802f22.png)

![Configured bonus credit followed by a Send Message step with the welcome text and its gear menu open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/de1c3b799eafa1d1517f43373257da1f14e7060563517ba31392c301f8d93486.png)

## Remind the contact before the bonus expires

Add a **Delay** that ends a few days before the expiration, then a **Condition** with **Bonus Balance** more than 0, and connect a reminder message to its matching output. In the message, `#Contact.BonusAmount#` inserts the contact's current bonus balance.

**Important:**

- Expiration is set on the credit itself. Do not add a debit step to "expire" the bonus: AXL already deducts the unused part, and a second debit would take bonuses the contact earned elsewhere.
- The condition and the variable see the contact's whole bonus balance, not just this credit. If the contact has other bonuses, word the reminder as "your bonus balance" rather than "this bonus".

Check the result on a test contact before turning the automation on. For other bonus actions, see "[Types of Actions in Automations and Their Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)".

![Welcome message followed by a 10-day Delay step with its gear menu open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5d3ab00d532f5cdc041a39be444d38ddccbbdd95c0bd917cdbbfd66f45b040ee.png)

![Condition step settings: Bonus Balance more than 0, summarized as Bonus account amount more than $0.00.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/594f6c39a7d05e39aa34b42e7a68c8fde06f9db00e73f2220ba0c37acc0d93de.png)

![Send Message settings with a reminder that uses #Contact.BonusAmount#, sent through the Northstar Academy chat channel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08858eb953dbdb75220d24bb7f346983ddfdd15152a69ede1399aebbcfaee9d9.png)

![Product automation chain: Product Purchased → bonus credit → welcome message → 10-day Delay → Condition on the bonus balance → reminder.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1ca222f929ed2f562dcbee7a0b5e86115a470c95350708bc07dc66971e12f06a.png)

## Bonus Balance in the Affiliate Program

You can award bonus points to users for bringing in new customers through the affiliate program. For example, give bonus points as a gift for signing up through an affiliate link.
Go to "Sales" → "Affiliate Program". To learn more about the affiliate program settings, see "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)."

![Sales → Affiliate Program → Settings opened from the sidebar: consent, number of levels, attribution, sign-up bonuses and commission settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/91045dff56dac55416d6e9c2885ad50169b5e5aee2b9a4319a7c6fd78a3a6e9c.png)

Open the "Settings" tab. In the "Sign-Up via Affiliate Link" section, check the boxes you need and enter the amount to credit to the bonus account.

With this setting, the affiliate earns bonus points for every new user who signs up through their unique affiliate link. It works whenever a new contact (referral) is created, for example when they submit a form on a website, sign up in a chatbot, or register for a webinar.

- **Credit to the affiliate's bonus account**. Check the box to credit bonus points to the affiliate who referred the new user. Enter the number of points.
- **Credit to the contact's (referral's) bonus account**. Check the box to credit bonus points to the new user (the referral). Enter the number of points.

If you check both boxes, both the affiliate and the new contact (referral) receive bonus points for the sign-up, for example, 50 bonus dollars each. Users can spend this amount from their bonus account when buying products.

![Affiliate Program Settings with the Sign-Up via Affiliate Link bonus options for the affiliate and the referred contact.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/91045dff56dac55416d6e9c2885ad50169b5e5aee2b9a4319a7c6fd78a3a6e9c.png)

## Transfer affiliate commission to bonuses

In the affiliate program settings, you can let affiliates transfer their commission to their bonus account. To do this, go to the "Commission Accrual & Payouts" section and check the box "Allow transferring commission to the bonus account."

![Affiliate Program Settings with Allow transferring commission to the bonus account checked.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/91045dff56dac55416d6e9c2885ad50169b5e5aee2b9a4319a7c6fd78a3a6e9c.png)

Then the affiliate can move their accumulated commission to the bonus account from their Membership Portal profile. Open the Membership Portal, go to the "Affiliate Program" tab, and click "Transfer to Bonus Account."

![Member Earnings &amp; Payouts with Transfer to Bonus Account, Withdraw, and the balance cards.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/67a0fb7367e784e9149f753bf703e56f2dbccf4ac19fa405bcee1bc5f11a6bdb.png)

In the window that opens, enter the amount to transfer. A hint below the field shows the maximum amount you can transfer. Then click "Transfer to Bonus Account" and confirm. An account admin doesn't need to approve the transfer. The amount shows up in the user's bonus account right away, and the user can use it to pay for products.

![Transfer to Bonus Account dialog with the amount field and the maximum available amount.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/354ef53e3e650174e24a0dc83c11fe002459119da8263e2de31bc018bce553e5.png)

## How to Use Bonuses at Checkout

Users can spend bonus points on products, perks, or services. Bonuses are deducted from the bonus balance automatically at checkout. For each product, you can set the maximum amount a customer can pay with bonuses.
Go to "Sales" → "Products & Services". Open an existing product or create a new one. To learn more about creating products, see "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)."

![Products &amp; Services list with Add Product and the Leadership Membership - Monthly and Leadership Certificate — Core Course products.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/41dfd42a72d23330803b45d397115c607c636f50952b8a45f6ed7ac2b713da06.png)

In the product settings, open the "General Settings" tab.
Turn on the "Pay with Bonuses" switch so users can pay for part or all of the product with points from their bonus balance.
Under "Maximum Amount," choose "Percentage" to cap bonus payment at a share of the product's price, or "Fixed Amount" to set a maximum amount.
Then enter the value below. For Percentage, enter the share of the price that can be paid with bonuses. For Fixed Amount, enter the maximum amount to deduct from the bonus balance toward the payment.

![Product settings with Pay with Bonuses on, Maximum Amount as a Percentage, and 20 entered.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6da716527f69f0b42fe5ee1b948158649e2ff60d48f99ba54cf2e2c56f8fe4c5.png)

Save your changes. From now on, bonus points are deducted from the user's bonus balance automatically when they pay for the product.

---

# Filtering and Search Conditions

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms

> Filter CRM contacts with AND/OR conditions, apply the result, and save personal or shared filters for reuse.

Conditions select contacts by what you know about them: tags, groups, purchases, courses, webinars, emails, deals and more. You can combine them, for example contacts who completed a course and have a phone number. This article is the full list of conditions.

The same conditions work in three places:

- **CRM → Contacts**: the advanced filter of the contact list, described below.
- The **Condition** step of an automation: see "[Conditions in Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-in-the-scenario)". It also has conditions of its own, such as the order or form of the current run.
- Dynamic mailing lists: see "[Conditions for Mailing](https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-for-mailing)".

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Advanced Filters

How to Use Search Conditions

Creating a Filter

Filter Conditions

Additional Contact Conditions

## Advanced Filters

Go to "CRM" → "Contacts". Click the filter icon (funnel) in the upper right corner of the contact list. Its tooltip reads "Show advanced filter."

![CRM contacts toolbar with Lead Priority, Search, the saved-filter list and the advanced-filter funnel button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3ffd480d9736aa2af59f6bab16aac29790547478715833b680884f90a56c21d5.png)

A "Filter Conditions" panel opens. To add a condition, open the "Select a filter" list next to "Add 'OR' Condition" and pick a filter. To start another group of conditions, click "Add 'AND' Condition Group."
"AND" and "OR" are the logical operations that control how conditions combine.

- AND condition groups: a contact must meet every group at the same time. For example, take the rule "A contact must complete course A AND course B to receive a certificate." The contact has to complete both courses to reach the goal.
- OR conditions inside a group: meeting at least one of them is enough. For instance, "A contact can receive a certificate if they complete course A OR course B." Here the contact can choose either course, and completing one is enough to earn the certificate.

    "AND" conditions are stricter, while "OR" conditions give you more freedom of choice.

![Filter Conditions panel with the filter list open under Add OR Condition, starting with the contact filters.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/78a6610144843a14afa001fa9860f786f115ef42820ba3e285635e40c2b51a35.png)

Below are the conditions you can use in a filter.

Example: add **Course Completed** for Leadership Foundations and another **Course Completed** condition for Team Communication in the same OR group. Add a second AND group with **Contact Attribute → Phone → Specified**. The result must have a phone number and have completed at least one of those two courses. Click **Apply Filter** and inspect the contact list before using a bulk action.

## How to Use Search Conditions

Choose a filter from the "Select a filter" list. For example, choose "Course Completed." A condition row appears with the filter name, followed by a choice of "completed" or "did not complete." Choose "completed." (If you choose "did not complete," the list shows contacts who haven't completed the course.) Then select a course from your courses on the AXL platform and click "Apply Filter." Your contact list now shows only the contacts who completed the course you specified.

![Filter Conditions with Course Completed set to Yes for Northstar Academy - Leadership Certificate, Found 1 contact, and the Create Filter and Apply Filter buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dab8b953f13c60f513b03d91dc1f05f4632b78028641e4390c6b779c20a81523.png)

You can set several conditions at once. For example, require that a contact completed the course and/or that their contact attribute contains a phone number.

## Creating a Filter

When you've chosen your conditions, you can save them as a filter you can reuse. A saved filter can be available only to you or to all team members in your account.

After you select the conditions, click "Create Filter."

![Filter Conditions for completed Leadership Certificate with the Create Filter button at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dab8b953f13c60f513b03d91dc1f05f4632b78028641e4390c6b779c20a81523.png)

Two more fields appear in the "Filter Conditions" panel:

1. Title. Enter a name for the new filter so it's easy to find.
2. Type. Choose the filter type. You can choose the type only when you create a filter. There are two types:

    - Personal. Only you can use a personal filter.
    - Shared. Every team member in your account can use a shared filter.

Click "Save and Apply Filter."

![Save fields in Filter Conditions: Title Leadership Certificate graduates, Type Personal, the course condition and Save and Apply Filter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1ae11d62b0069533d817c5eb7e4fffa74ece9b303bae9d3c26db67d01dd3376e.png)

Your new filter appears in the list of saved filters.

![CRM contacts filtered by the saved Leadership Certificate graduates filter, showing one matching contact.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9c7b19e41139b68ae983b9d86624a5553c5dc8ffb0f926f2abe3815b1daada9c.png)

Instead of setting up conditions again, you can choose a saved filter from the saved-filter list above your contacts. To manage your saved filters, click "Manage Filters" at the bottom of that list.

![Saved-filter list open above the contacts with Leadership Certificate graduates, Confirmed email and the Manage Filters link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4eb59e67183b2b9b26c931095c7a0b5afa848207978560f0d2257b3620ff2eef.png)

The "Advanced Filters" window opens. Here you can copy, edit, and delete your saved filters, and create new ones.

![Advanced Filters panel listing the Leadership Certificate graduates and Confirmed email filters with copy, edit and delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/69799eb6f5021d01218aef594edd97a308cf22c3a04938934f8118ce47941c0a.png)

## Filter Conditions

## Contact Filters

### Blocked

Use this condition to separate blocked contacts from active ones, so it's easier to review them and take action.

Filter conditions:

1. Blocked:
Yes. Lists contacts who are currently blocked. Their access to the platform may have been suspended for reasons such as rule violations, unpaid fees, low activity, or other administrative measures. From this list you can decide whether to unblock a contact, take additional steps (such as a conversation or consultation), or let them continue learning.
No. Lists contacts who aren't blocked and can keep learning. Admins can use it to quickly find active participants who can work with courses, receive assignments, join discussions, and so on. It also helps with general monitoring and analysis of contact status on the platform.

![Blocked filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5089058c92f4155c96b026d4a2e83ab23d7ae26962f2be8366ecbc3e332c703c.png)

### Contact Attribute

Use this condition to find contacts by a specific attribute. It lets you build exactly the audience you need for personalized learning, tailored communication, special promotions, and more.

Filter conditions:

1. Attribute. The contact field you want to filter on, such as email, name, city, or gender. The attribute you pick determines which information is filtered.
2. Condition Options:

    - Specified. Finds contacts whose chosen attribute has any value (for example, contacts who have an email address). If you choose "email specified," the list shows every contact with an email address.
    - Not specified. Finds contacts whose chosen attribute is empty (for example, no email). If you choose "city not specified," you get every contact without a city.
    - Contains. Finds contacts whose attribute contains the value you enter. For example, "name contains Anna" returns every contact whose name includes "Anna" (such as "Anna," "Hannah," or "Mary Anna").
    - Does not contain. Finds contacts whose attribute doesn't contain the value. For example, "city does not contain York" returns every contact whose city doesn't include "York."
    - Equals. Finds contacts whose attribute exactly matches the value. For example, "city equals New York" returns only contacts whose city is "New York."
    - Does not equal. Finds contacts whose attribute differs from the value. For example, "name does not equal John" returns every contact whose name isn't "John."
3. Value Field. Enter the value to filter by. The filter applies it with the condition you selected.

![Contact Attribute filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2b180f52fc237d85efdfa09858991d137b2b7b1459aa6b6aa3cfbe14eac560a3.png)

### Date Added to Contact List

Use this condition to sort or limit your contact list by the time contacts were added to the system. Each option helps you narrow your selection for more targeted work and analysis.

Filter conditions:

1. Condition:

    - Any date. No date limit. All contacts appear, whenever they were added, so you can see the complete list.
    - Before. Shows contacts added before the date you specify. Useful for analyzing or selecting older contacts up to a certain point in time.
    - After. Shows contacts added after the date you specify. Convenient for analyzing your newest contacts or running promotions aimed at new contacts.
    - Between. Lets you set the start and end of the period when contacts were added, so you can select a group added on specific dates.
    - Today. Shows contacts added today. Convenient for tracking recent additions.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts added yesterday. Useful for tracking additions while the previous day's data is still relevant.
    - This week. Shows contacts added from the start of the current week through today, so you can track activity over the week.
    - Last week. Shows contacts added during the previous week. It helps you see how your contact count grew or shrank compared with the period before.
    - This month. Shows contacts added since the beginning of the current month. Convenient for monthly analysis and planning.
    - Last month. Shows contacts added in the previous month, so you can analyze monthly trends and results.
2. Date or period selection. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Date Added to Contact List filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/44839307358c2052375bca0439025e98f5cb527c57ca0cde547bd85dc117035f.png)

### Date Added to Group

This condition finds contacts who were added to a group on specific dates. Choose a group from the list, then set the condition ("more than," "less than," or "between") and the date.

Filter conditions:

1. Group. Select the group to filter by.
2. Condition:

    - More than. Selects contacts who were added to the group after the date and time you specify. Useful for analyzing new members and keeping up with the latest changes.
    - Less than. Selects contacts who were added to the group before the date and time you specify. Useful for finding contacts who joined the group a long time ago.
    - Between. Selects contacts who were added to the group within a time interval. Convenient for analyzing changes and activity over a period, for example, a report on group additions in December.
3. Date or period selection. Choose specific dates and times.

![Date Added to Group filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/30831a250ba4b4cd1793c0eee290978a6d1d6999700ec910349f55afecd04a90.png)

### Email Confirmed

This condition shows whether contacts have confirmed their email addresses. Use it to manage your contact base, send notifications, or analyze contact activity.

Filter conditions:

1. Email Confirmed:

    - Confirmed. Lists contacts whose email addresses are confirmed.
    - Not confirmed. Lists contacts who haven't confirmed their email addresses. They may need a reminder or help with the confirmation process.

![Email Confirmed filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6f04210610c9f0a4200267b8510a301db155d24e912edadd6bcea4daf20ca2a9.png)

### First UTM Parameter

Use this condition to analyze UTM parameters, which track traffic sources and the effectiveness of ad campaigns. Knowing the different conditions helps you segment contacts and their behavior. Enter the value of the first UTM parameter to select only the contacts who came to your website through a link with that parameter.
UTM parameters are special parameters added to URLs to track the effectiveness of marketing campaigns. They collect information about where visitors came from and how they interact with your content.

Filter conditions:

1. First UTM Parameter:

    - utm\_source - traffic source; shows where the contact comes from (for example, Google, Facebook, or email).
    - utm\_medium - marketing medium (channel); shows the type of traffic (for example, CPC, email, or banner).
    - utm\_campaign - name of the ad campaign; tracks a specific campaign or promotion.
    - utm\_term - keyword or phrase; mostly used in paid search advertising to track the keywords people used to find the ad.
    - utm\_content - content; tells similar links or content elements in one campaign apart, so you can see which performed better (for example, different versions of the same ad or banner).
2. Condition:

    - Equals. Selects contacts whose value for the chosen UTM parameter exactly matches your text. Example: if you choose "utm\_campaign" and enter "python\_course," you get every contact whose first "utm\_campaign" equals "python\_course."
    - Does not equal. Excludes contacts whose value for the chosen UTM parameter matches your text. Example: if you choose "utm\_medium" and enter "email," you get contacts whose first "utm\_medium" isn't "email."
    - Contains. Finds contacts whose UTM parameter contains your text as part of the value. Example: if you choose "utm\_campaign" and enter "sale," you get contacts whose first "utm\_campaign" contains "sale" (such as "summer\_sale" or "holiday\_sale").
    - Does not contain. Excludes contacts whose chosen UTM parameter contains your text. Example: if you choose "utm\_content" and enter "banner," contacts whose value contains "banner" are left out.
    - Specified. Selects contacts who have a first UTM parameter value (not empty). Example: if you choose "utm\_term," the filter shows every contact with a value for "utm\_term."
    - Not specified. Selects contacts who have no first UTM parameter value (empty). Example: if you choose "utm\_campaign," you get contacts with no value for that parameter.
3. Value Field. Enter the value to filter by. The filter applies it with the condition you selected.

![First UTM Parameter filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/de80268405a3082428b2b1ee38c58186fa4b229efd2a8e926b8c21df9056482d.png)

### Has a Membership Portal Account

This condition lists contacts who have registered on the platform and have an account in your Membership Portal. Course access is a separate condition; use Has Access to check access to a specific course.

Filter conditions:

1. Membership Portal account:

    - Registered. Lists contacts registered in the Membership Portal. Admins can use it to manage these contacts, check their status, and assign courses or update information. For example, to send notifications only to portal members, use this filter to select just those recipients.
    - Not registered. Lists contacts who don't have a Membership Portal account. It can help you find potential new members. For instance, use it for ad campaigns or to analyze the audience that hasn't joined your Membership Portal yet.

![Has a Membership Portal Account filter row, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/69f977e1d6f5136ba8781ebe4f25e28681c9cdad930dbf4ddfd90c1179c14be2.png)

### In Group

This condition finds contacts by the groups they belong to. Use it to deliver content or notifications, set access to materials, and analyze activity in specific groups. It makes managing the learning process and communicating with contacts much easier.

Filter conditions:

1. In group:

    - Yes. Lists contacts who belong to one or more of the selected groups. For example, send notifications or give access to materials only to members of a specific group.
    - No. Lists contacts who don't belong to any of the selected groups. Useful when you want to reach contacts outside certain groups, such as new contacts or those who haven't completed a particular level of training.
2. Select a group from the list. Choose the group to filter by. This gives you more precise control over content access by group.

![In Group filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ccb5be116efe926dc8d9c948550ac7d95eb08ca588677abdaa489cdaef976a7c.png)

### Has Tag

This condition finds contacts who have a tag. Tags help you pick out new customers or customers in specific situations. The condition checks that a contact has any of the selected tags, or none of them.

Filter conditions:

1. Has a tag:

    - Yes. Shows only contacts who have at least one of the selected tags. For example, if you select the tag "Beginner," you get the contacts marked with that tag.
    - No. Shows only contacts who have none of the selected tags. Use it to exclude contacts marked with specific tags. For example, if you select the tag "Experienced," you get the contacts who don't have that tag.
2. Tag. Select one or several tags for more precise filtering. Click "Manage Tags" to find or create tags.

![Has Tag filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a3dacadf67e680de25df824926e09fb43001f29775073b3cbe4d98191b918c68.png)

### Last UTM Parameter

Enter the last UTM parameter value (at the time of the last conversion) to select only the contacts who came to your site through a link with that parameter. UTM parameters are special parameters added to URLs to track the effectiveness of marketing campaigns. They collect information about where visitors came from and how they interact with your content.

Filter conditions:

1. Last UTM Parameter:

    - utm\_source - traffic source; shows where the contact comes from (for example, Google, Facebook, or email).
    - utm\_medium - marketing medium (channel); shows the type of traffic (for example, CPC, email, or banner).
    - utm\_campaign - name of the ad campaign; tracks a specific campaign or promotion.
    - utm\_term - keyword or phrase; mostly used in paid search advertising to track the keywords people used to find the ad.
    - utm\_content - content; tells similar links or content elements in one campaign apart, so you can see which performed better (for example, different versions of the same ad or banner).
2. Condition:

    - Equals. Selects contacts whose value for the chosen UTM parameter exactly matches your text. Example: if you choose "utm\_campaign" and enter "python\_course," you get every contact whose last "utm\_campaign" equals "python\_course."
    - Does not equal. Excludes contacts whose value for the chosen UTM parameter matches your text. Example: if you choose "utm\_medium" and enter "email," the list includes contacts whose last "utm\_medium" isn't "email."
    - Contains. Finds contacts whose UTM parameter includes your text as part of the value. Example: if you choose "utm\_campaign" and enter "sale," contacts whose last "utm\_campaign" contains "sale" (such as "summer\_sale" or "holiday\_sale") are included.
    - Does not contain. Excludes contacts whose chosen UTM parameter contains your text. Example: if you choose "utm\_content" and enter "banner," contacts whose value contains "banner" are left out.
    - Specified. Selects contacts who have a last UTM parameter value (not empty). For example, if you choose "utm\_term," the filter shows every contact with a value for "utm\_term."
    - Not specified. Selects contacts who have no last UTM parameter value (empty). For example, if you choose "utm\_campaign," it shows contacts with no value for that parameter.
3. Value Field. Enter the value to filter by. The filter applies it with the condition you selected.

![Last UTM Parameter filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e9f5ad0793945278f73180f25c58b069e74e2777449f5bd561e0c2590f0b878e.png)

### Last Activity Date

This condition separates contacts by their activity on the AXL learning platform and applies only to registered contacts. Use it to group contacts who haven't been active since a certain date and take action (for example, send them an email). You can also use it to find contacts who visit your Membership Portal often and reward them (send an email, add a product as a bonus, and so on).

Filter conditions:

1. Condition:

    - Before. Lists contacts whose last activity was before the date you choose. Helps you reach inactive contacts or review activity history.
    - After. Lists contacts who were active after the date you choose. Helps you find active contacts who interacted with the platform since then.
    - Between. Lists contacts whose last activity falls between the start and end dates you set.
    - Any date, Today, Yesterday, This week, Last week, This month, Last month. These options need no date. Pick one to filter by that period.
2. Date or period selection. Select specific dates and times for very precise results. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

Relative date options are also available: **More than … days ago**, **Less than … days ago**, **Exactly … days ago**, and their future-date equivalents. Enter a whole number of days from 1 to 36,500. These use calendar days in the account’s time zone, so a saved condition can stay relative as time passes.

### Last Seen

This condition finds contacts by the time of their last visit. Use it to analyze activity, spot abandoned accounts, or find active participants.

Filter conditions:

1. Last seen:

    - Equals. Selects contacts who were online at exactly the time you specify. This compares the recorded last-seen time; it does not require a sign-in and sign-out at the same moment.
    - Doesn't equal. Selects contacts who were online at any time except the one you specify. Helps you exclude contacts who were active at exactly that moment.
    - More than. Lists contacts who last visited the platform after the date and time you specify. Use it to find active contacts or check recent activity.
    - Less than. Lists contacts who last visited the platform before the date and time you specify. Helps you identify less active contacts or abandoned accounts.
2. Select date and time. Choose a specific date and time to get very precise data about your contacts.

![Last Seen filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5c769240de24c014444f877917ea2089fe50ddf555aa33aef22b73fe90b8120f.png)

### Chatbot Started

This condition finds contacts who started, or didn't start, a specific chatbot during the dates you set. It shows which contacts actively engage with the chatbot on the platform and which don't use it at all, so you can judge how well the chatbot works and improve it.

Filter conditions:

1. Chatbot started:

    - Yes. Finds contacts who interacted with the chatbot. Useful when you need to know who accessed it.
    - No. Finds contacts who haven't started the chatbot. Useful for analyzing a lack of engagement or planning next steps for these contacts.
2. Chatbot. Select a specific chatbot from the list of available ones. This lets you filter contacts by the chatbot they interacted with.
3. Date:

    - Any date. Includes contacts who started the chatbot at any time.
    - Before. Includes contacts who started the chatbot before the date you choose.
    - After. Includes contacts who started the chatbot after the date you choose.
    - Between. Lets you set a start and end date. Includes contacts who started the chatbot within that period.
    - Today. Includes contacts who started the chatbot today.
    - Yesterday. Includes contacts who started the chatbot yesterday.
    - This week. Includes contacts who started the chatbot this week.
    - Last week. Includes contacts who started the chatbot last week.
    - This month. Includes contacts who started the chatbot this month.
    - Last month. Includes contacts who started the chatbot last month.
4. Date or period selection. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Chatbot Started filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/42e995d557126252255c2d2a64cd67fbdf9e6c7608b1e44218666b2654169810.png)

### Online Status

This condition sorts contacts by their current status on the platform.

Filter conditions:

1. Online status:

    - Online. The contact is active on the platform right now: signed in, taking part in a session, viewing materials, or chatting with others. Use it to see active contacts, for example, to give extra materials to contacts who are online at the moment.
    - Offline. The contact isn't active on the platform at the moment. They may be offline, have ended a session, or haven't signed in yet. Useful, for example, to review contacts who aren't in current sessions and analyze their activity.

![Online Status filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76f71c49de614e13505163dc0a9b56398e09f429289494a12b778d34cf71a839.png)

### Phone Call

This condition lets you sort and analyze phone call data. It finds contacts who received a call on specific dates and of a specific duration (in seconds). Use it to analyze calls, spot trends, and make decisions based on the data.

Filter conditions:

1. Phone call:

    - Yes. Lists contacts who had phone calls.
    - No. Lists contacts who had no calls.
2. Duration (Seconds). Set a range for call duration by entering a minimum and a maximum number of seconds. Use it to find calls of a certain length, such as short, long, or average conversations.
3. Start Date:

    - Any date. Includes all calls, regardless of their date.
    - Before. Includes calls made before the date you choose.
    - After. Includes calls made after the date you choose.
    - Between. Lets you set a start and end date. Includes calls made within that period.
    - Today. Includes all calls made today.
    - Yesterday. Includes all calls made yesterday.
    - This week. Includes calls made from Monday to Sunday of the current week.
    - Last week. Includes calls made from Monday to Sunday of the previous week.
    - This month. Includes all calls made in the current month.
    - Last month. Includes calls made in the previous month.
4. Select date or period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Phone Call filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/55ecd7d4301356ada7cbab55ab19b2423f2ab709fea9dd95bbb4ec13ce696626.png)

### Owner

This condition finds contacts by who is responsible for them.

Filter conditions:

1. Owner:

    - Assigned. Finds contacts who have an owner assigned (for example, a teacher or tutor).
    - Not assigned. Finds contacts who don't have an owner yet. Useful for spotting contacts that need attention and assigning owners so they get proper control and support.
2. Select owner. Choose a specific team member. The list shows the contacts assigned to the teacher or tutor you selected.
3. Select position. Filter by the owner's position. The system shows all contacts whose owner holds that position. This is handy for managing the learning process and dividing duties by role.

![Owner filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a0d51da6199c28cc4fcaa90a149c5d57e587f9127557d161020d3394765f560b.png)

### Membership Portal Registration Date

This condition separates contacts by the date they registered on the platform. It helps you analyze activity and tell new contacts from long-time ones.

Filter conditions:

1. Condition:

    - Is. Finds contacts whose registration date is the selected date; it does not require the same time of day. Useful for analyzing specific promotions or events.
    - Is not. Finds contacts with a registration date on a different day from the selected date. Contacts without a registration date are not included.
    - Before. Highlights contacts who registered before the date and time you specify.
    - After. Finds contacts who registered after the date and time you specify.
    - Period. Sets a date range in which contacts registered.
2. Date or period selection. Choose the date and time to use with the other conditions. This makes it easy to set up a precise query.

**Relative registration dates.** In the **Condition** list, choose one of the six options below. The **Days** field replaces the fixed-date picker; enter a whole number from **1 to 36,500**. Here, *N* means the number you enter.

| Condition | Which registration dates match |
| --- | --- |
| **More than … days ago** | Dates before the start of the calendar day N days ago. |
| **Less than … days ago** | Dates within the last N calendar days, including today up to the current time. |
| **Exactly … days ago** | Any time during the calendar day N days ago. |
| **In more than … days** | Dates after the calendar day N days from today. |
| **In less than … days** | Dates from the current time up to the start of the calendar day N days from today. |
| **In exactly … days** | Any time during the calendar day N days from today. |

Relative conditions use calendar days in the account’s time zone and are recalculated when the filter is evaluated. For example, choose **Exactly … days ago** and enter **7** to find contacts whose registration date falls on the whole calendar day seven days before today; you do not need to update a fixed date each day.

Enter the day count before using the filter: an empty or invalid value matches no contacts. Contacts without a registration date also do not match a relative registration-date condition. The future options compare the stored registration date; they do not predict or schedule a future registration.

![Membership Portal Registration Date filter row, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ec382abb8b8b6db0bd5223e16595d674597039853f3d554008846635b2165afd.png)

### Subscribed to Chat Channel

Use this condition to manage access and communication with contacts who take part in specific channels. It helps you organize groups of contacts and improve communication based on their chat subscriptions. It lists contacts who are subscribed to the selected chat channel, or who aren't subscribed to any chat channel.

Filter conditions:

1. Subscribed to chat channel:

    - Subscribed. Selects contacts who are subscribed to at least one of the available chat channels. These contacts are active in chats and can receive messages, announcements, and other information about courses or events.
    - Not subscribed. Selects contacts who aren't subscribed to any chat channel. These contacts may be inactive or miss your communications, so they might need extra attention.
2. Select a chat channel. Choose a specific channel (for example, Telegram or WhatsApp) that contacts are subscribed to. If you select "Telegram," you get the contacts subscribed to that channel. This is useful for targeted communication with contacts who prefer a particular messenger.

![Subscribed to Chat Channel filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fdd36e311ac8690b2fc9826f0e3a9140a6ced018befb31ac4dd9b0dd499f3906.png)

### Date Tag Added

This condition builds a list of contacts based on when a specific tag was assigned. It's useful for data analysis and contact segmentation, for example, for broadcasts, notifications, or other marketing activities.

Filter conditions:

1. Tag. Select a tag that was previously assigned to contacts to focus on a particular group, such as a category or topic. Click "Manage Tags" to find or create tags.
2. Condition:

    - After. The tag was added later than the time you specify. You get the contacts who received this tag after a certain date.
    - Before. The tag was added earlier than the time you specify. You see contacts who received this tag before a certain date, which helps when analyzing old records or managing interaction history.
    - Period. Sets a date range during which the tag was added.
3. Date or period selection. Choose specific dates and times. This gives you very precise data about contacts who received the tag at a certain point in time.

![Date Tag Added filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f4ca620b1ad1ac99f43939b82f10e5f462bc3656148370ce6efbd3bb9546c459.png)

### Watched Video

This condition analyzes data about contacts who watched videos. Each option narrows your search and gives you more precise information about how contacts interact with video materials.

Filter conditions:

1. Video. Select a specific video to get information about. This is useful when the platform has many videos and you need to analyze interactions with just one or a few of them.
2. Duration:

    - More than. Selects contacts who watched the video for longer than a specified time. For example, "more than 10 seconds" shows contacts who not only opened the video but also watched it for at least 11 seconds.
    - Less than. Finds contacts who watched the video for less than a specified time. Relevant if you're interested in brief or superficial interaction with the video.
3. Seconds. Enter the number of seconds.
4. Date:

    - Any date. Includes all data for all time.
    - Before. Selects contacts who interacted with the video before the date you choose.
    - After. Shows contacts who started interacting with the video after the date you choose.
    - Between. Sets a date range for the analysis, such as January 1 to January 31.
    - Today. Lists contacts who watched the video on the day of the request.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts who interacted with the video the day before.
    - This week. Shows contacts who watched the video from Monday to Sunday of the current week.
    - Last week. Lists contacts who interacted with the video during the past week.
    - This month. Shows contacts who watched the video since the first day of the current month.
    - Last month. Shows contacts who interacted with the video last month.
5. Select date or period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Watched Video filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7bcd483b7e5a58c50445bf2296a5c6044cf5aa7c0ab338477a9ca86a22809c5a.png)

## Orders & Payments

### Total Paid

This condition filters contacts by the total amount of their payments.

Filter conditions:

1. Total paid:

    - Equals. Lists contacts whose total payments exactly match the value. For example, "Total paid equals $150" lists contacts who spent exactly $150.
    - Doesn't equal. Excludes contacts with a specific payment total. For example, "Total paid doesn't equal $100" lists contacts whose total spending isn't $100.
    - More than. Lists contacts whose payment total exceeds the value. For example, "Total paid more than $300" lists contacts who spent more than $300.
    - Less than. Lists contacts whose payment total is below the value. For example, "Total paid less than $50" lists contacts who spent less than $50.
    - Between. Lists contacts whose payment totals fall within a range. For example, "Total paid between $50 and $200" lists contacts who spent from $50 to $200, inclusive.
2. Value field. Enter the exact amount to filter by.

![Total Paid filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0df46997cb8afa74bc0061a6960bb2ec4ab25d6666f4ecb89f7f5d05f6b809f3.png)

### Has Order

This condition finds contacts who have a specific order. Use the different criteria to sort and search.

Filter conditions:

1. Has order:

    - Yes. Shows contacts who have orders in the system.
    - No. Shows contacts without orders (for example, potential customers who haven't placed an order yet).
2. Add Filter:

    - Search. Enter words or phrases to find orders that contain them in course titles, tags, or other text fields.
    - Creation Date. Filters orders by the date they were created. Useful for seeing orders placed in a specific period (for example, the last month).
    - Payment Date. Filters orders by the date they were paid. Useful for analyzing the gap between creating and paying an order. Any payment for an order within the period is shown, including partial payments.
    - Date of Full Payment. Filters orders that were fully paid within the period you specify.
    - Has Payments. Shows orders that have any payments (partial or full).
    - Fully Paid. Shows only orders that are fully paid and have no outstanding balance.
    - Related Contact. Finds orders linked to a specific contact. Select one or more contacts from your CRM contact list.
    - Owner. Filters orders by the manager or team member who handles the order. Select one or more team members from the list.
    - Products. Filters orders by the products they contain. Choose one or more products from the list.
    - Statuses. Shows orders that currently have a specific status (for example, "Processing," "Completed," or "Canceled").
    - Amount. Filters orders by the order amount. Useful for finding orders in a certain price range.
    - Order payment amount. Filters orders by the total of all payments made on the order. Set the amount range you need.
    - Renewal. Highlights subscriptions that were or weren't renewed. Move the slider to the active or inactive position to set what you need.
    - Courses. Highlights orders that include a specific course. Choose one or more courses from the list.
    - UTM parameters. Filters orders by the UTM parameters used to track ad sources and campaigns. You can select only the orders whose related contacts arrived through a specific UTM link to your website.
    - Tags. Finds orders by the tags applied to them, for more detailed classification.
    - Promo code. Filters orders where specific promo codes were applied.
    - Affiliate. Highlights orders linked to a specific affiliate in the affiliate program. You can select one or more affiliates.
    - Affiliate program. Highlights orders created within the affiliate program.
    - Show deleted. Shows orders that were deleted from the system (useful for analyzing deleted records).
    - Additional fields. Sorts orders that have additional fields. You can select one or more additional fields.
    - Subscription mode. Highlights orders with a trial subscription period, a renewal after the trial period, full payment, or a renewal of a non-trial period.

![Has Order filter with the Add Filter menu open, listing order fields such as Affiliate, Amount, Amount Paid and Date Created.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c5df9b75d33f703c09491ac72bd8708a7a1e8f7209fe1f0b492985302c81a128.png)

### Number of Payments

This condition filters contacts by how many payments they've made.

Filter conditions:

1. Number of payments:

    - Equals. Lists contacts whose number of payments exactly matches the value. For example, "Number of payments equals 5" lists contacts who made 5 payments.
    - Doesn't equal. Excludes contacts with a specific number of payments. For example, "Number of payments doesn't equal 3" lists contacts who made any number of payments except 3.
    - More than. Lists contacts whose number of payments exceeds the value. For example, "Number of payments more than 2" lists contacts who made 3 or more payments.
    - Less than. Lists contacts who made fewer payments than the value. For example, "Number of payments less than 4" lists contacts who made 0, 1, 2, or 3 payments.
    - Between. Lists contacts whose number of payments falls within a range. For example, "Number of payments between 1 and 5" lists contacts who made from 1 to 5 payments, inclusive.
2. Value field. Enter the exact number to filter by.

![Number of Payments filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cab37e968595e8abb77bfd0086af4509f854feda9c2bb1c8943de4af911ccac4.png)

### Product Purchase

This condition selects and tracks product purchases, including courses and training materials.

Filter conditions:

1. Product purchase:

    - Yes. Shows contacts who have already purchased a product. The system filters all records and shows only contacts who actually bought a product.
    - No. Shows contacts who haven't made any purchases. Useful for analyzing your target audience or working with potential customers.
2. Product or category:

    - Product. Lets you select one or more specific products from the list.
    - Category. Lets you select one or more product categories. Useful when you want to include several products from the same category at once. For example, you can find contacts who bought a product from the "Online Courses" category.
3. Products. Select the specific product you want data about. If you chose to filter by category above, this field lists categories instead.
4. Quantity:

    - Equals. Shows records where the quantity of purchased products exactly matches the value.
    - Does not equal. Shows all records except those where the quantity of purchases matches the value.
    - More than. Shows records where the quantity of purchases exceeds the value. Useful for analyzing active customers.
    - Less than. The opposite: shows records where the quantity of purchases is below the value.
5. Value field. Enter the exact quantity to filter by.
6. Purchase date:

    - Any date. Shows all records, regardless of the purchase date.
    - Before. Shows purchases made before the date you choose.
    - After. Shows purchases made after the date you choose.
    - Between. Lets you choose a date range and shows records within that period.
    - Today. Shows only purchases made today.
    - Yesterday. Shows all purchases made yesterday.
    - This week. Shows purchases made this week.
    - Last week. Shows purchases made in the previous week.
    - This month. Shows all purchases made this month.
    - Last month. Shows all purchases made in the past month.
7. Select date or period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Product Purchase filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/190107ea0876cd115ac2d0e1002d736ae9d989bcede10d85e744d6b973a58384.png)

## Education

### Access Start

Use **Access Start** to find contacts with an access start date that matches the period and content you select. It checks the date on the access record; it does not show whether the contact has begun studying or whether that access is currently active.

Filter conditions:

1. Access Start:

    - **Yes**. Finds contacts with at least one matching access record whose start date meets the selected period. Both the content scope and date must match the same access record.
    - **No**. Finds contacts with no access record matching both that content scope and start date. It can include contacts with no access to the selected content, or with access whose date falls outside the period. It does not by itself mean that access has not started.
2. Date Range Selection:

    - Date Range. Lets you specify the dates when access started. The system shows contacts whose access to the materials started within that time frame.
    - Today. Shows contacts whose access to the materials was activated today.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts who gained access the day before.
    - Tomorrow. Shows contacts who will be granted access tomorrow.
    - **Before Current Date**. Matches an access start date earlier than the current moment.
    - **After Current Date**. Matches an access start date at or after the current moment.
    - Last Week. Lists contacts who gained access last week.
    - This Week. Shows contacts who will gain access to the materials this week.
    - Next Week. Shows contacts whose access will open next week.
    - Last Month. Shows contacts who gained access in the previous month.
    - This Month. Shows contacts whose access opens this month.
    - Next Month. Lists contacts who will gain access to the materials next month.
    - **More than … days ago**. Before the calendar day N days ago. That whole boundary day is excluded.
    - **Less than … days ago**. From the start of the last N calendar days through now. For example, 3 includes today and the previous two calendar days, up to the current time.
    - **Exactly … days ago**. The whole calendar day N days ago. Enter 0 for today.
    - **In more than … days**. After the whole calendar day N days from today. That boundary day is excluded.
    - **In less than … days**. From now up to the start of the calendar day N days from today.
    - **In exactly … days**. The whole calendar day N days from today. Enter 0 for today.

    For these six relative options, enter the number of days. They use calendar days in the account time zone, not rolling 24-hour intervals. Use a whole number from 0 to 36,500. For either Less than option, entering 0 matches no contacts. Leave no required day count blank.
3. Date Selection. This field is available when you select the date range option. Choose specific dates and times.
4. Material Type Selection:

    - Course. Filters contacts by their access to specific courses.
    - Library. Shows contacts with access to library materials.
    - Cohort. Contacts enrolled in specific cohorts.
    - Product. Contacts with access to a specific product or set of products.
    - **All Courses**. Checks access granted as an all-courses license or by an all-courses product item. It does not combine separate licenses for individual courses.
    - **All Libraries**. Checks access granted as an all-libraries license or by an all-libraries product item. It does not combine separate licenses for individual libraries.
5. **Specific item**. Select the courses, libraries, cohorts or products to check. Selecting an item narrows the matching access records; it does not exclude a contact merely because they also have access to other items.
6. **Course Plan**. When exactly one course is selected, optionally narrow the filter to its plans. For a single cohort, you can similarly narrow it to the cohort dates shown in the form.

![Access Start filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/104ad625e43c975c4a3f9ee6c439c31af8ff94ebb7cadeaa327f80ef37c96dbd.png)

### Course Completed

This condition identifies contacts who have completed a course on the AXL platform.

Filter conditions:

1. Course Completed:

    - Completed. Shows only contacts who have completed the course. Useful for analyzing how well people finish courses and for reports on completed programs.
    - Did not complete. Shows contacts who haven't completed the course yet. This can help you find those who need extra support or motivation to finish.
2. Select a specific course. Filters contacts by a specific course, which makes it easy to analyze results and progress in a particular subject or field of study.
3. Completion Date:

    - Any date. Shows completions with no date restriction.
    - Before. Filters contacts who completed the course before a certain date.
    - After. Filters contacts who completed the course after a specified date.
    - Between. Lets you set a date range and selects contacts who completed the course in that period.
    - Today. Shows only contacts who completed the course today.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts who completed the course yesterday.
    - This week. Selects contacts who completed the course this week.
    - Last week. Selects contacts who completed the course last week.
    - This month. Selects contacts who completed the course this month.
    - Last month. Selects contacts who completed the course last month.
4. Select a date or period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Course Completed filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/711987838f7ceecf3730ebaeb3ab9feb758fbca23d5f45432d02352ac588a0c6.png)

### Course Started

This condition finds all contacts who have started a training course in the Membership Portal. For example, you can select contacts who haven't started a specific course and take action, such as sending them an email.

Filter conditions:

1. Course Started:

    - Yes. Shows only contacts who have begun studying the course.
    - No. Shows contacts who haven't started the course yet. This can help you find those who need extra support or motivation to start learning.
2. Select Specific Course. Filters contacts by a specific course, which makes it easy to analyze results and progress in a particular subject or field of study.
3. Start Date:

    - Any date. Shows starts with no date restriction.
    - Before. Filters contacts who started the course before a specific date.
    - After. Similarly, filters contacts who started the course after a specified date.
    - Between. Lets you set a date range and selects contacts who started the course in that period.
    - Today. Shows only contacts who started the course today.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts who started the course yesterday.
    - This week. Selects contacts who started the course this week.
    - Last week. Selects contacts who started the course last week.
    - This month. Selects contacts who started the course this month.
    - Last month. Selects contacts who started the course last month.
4. Select Date or Period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Course Started filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/304834462005589ea2c9dc8ea12116256619736839ca151b452d61d323c7ea64.png)

### Course Step Completed

This condition finds contacts who have completed a specific step in a course in the Membership Portal on the AXL platform.

Filter conditions:

1. Course Step Completed:

    - Completed. Shows contacts who have completed a specific step in the course. This helps you see who is moving through the course content.
    - Did not complete. Shows contacts who haven't completed the step. Useful for finding those who need support.
2. Select a specific course. Filters steps by a specific course.
3. Select a course step. Lets you choose a specific step in that course for analysis. Useful for monitoring how people complete individual course elements.
4. Completion Date:

    - Any date. Shows completions with no date restriction.
    - Before. Filters steps completed before the selected date.
    - After. Filters steps completed after a specific date.
    - Between. Lets you select a date range.
    - Today. Shows steps completed today.
    - Yesterday. Shows steps completed yesterday.
    - This week. Shows steps completed this week.
    - Last week. Shows steps completed last week.
    - This month. Shows steps completed this month.
    - Last month. Shows steps completed last month.
5. Select a date or period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Course Step Completed filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f0b144d387e6b7410038ed4176f085f3d46fe4adaa8edcad848858ba2e2013e7.png)

### Course Step Started

This condition finds contacts who have started a specific step in a course. For example, they began watching a particular video, and now you can email them a checklist related to the lesson topic.

Filter conditions:

1. Course Step Started:

    - Yes. Shows contacts who have begun studying a specific step in the course. This helps you see who is moving through the course content.
    - No. Shows contacts who haven't started the step. Useful for finding those who may need support.
2. Select Specific Course. Filters steps by a specific course.
3. Select Course Step. Lets you choose a specific step in that course for analysis. Helpful for monitoring how people complete individual course elements.
4. Start Date:

    - Any date. Shows starts with no date restriction.
    - Before. Filters steps started before the selected date.
    - After. Filters steps started after a specific date.
    - Between. Lets you select a date range.
    - Today. Shows steps started today.
    - Yesterday. Shows steps started yesterday.
    - This week. Shows steps started this week.
    - Last week. Shows steps started last week.
    - This month. Shows steps started this month.
    - Last month. Shows steps started last month.
5. Select Date or Period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Course Step Started filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ff736fadad2eb6f0f4c00562e82c192866b9f5ff007e0936e8b32d9c03b87010.png)

### Access End

Use **Access End** to find contacts with an access end date that matches the period and content you select. Use it for expiry reminders or to find access that ended in a particular period.

Filter conditions:

1. Access End:

    - **Yes**. Finds contacts with at least one matching access record whose end date meets the selected period. Both the content scope and date must match the same access record.
    - **No**. Finds contacts with no access record matching both that content scope and end date. It can include contacts with no access to the selected content, or with access whose date falls outside the period. It does not by itself mean that access is still valid.
2. Date Range:

    - Date Range. Lets you set a specific time period. For example, access expires from October 1 to October 10. You get all contacts whose access expires during that period.
    - Today. Lists contacts whose access expires today.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts whose access expired the day before.
    - Tomorrow. Shows contacts whose access will expire tomorrow.
    - **Before Current Date**. Matches an access end date earlier than the current moment.
    - **After Current Date**. Matches an access end date at or after the current moment.
    - Last Week. Shows contacts whose access expired last week.
    - This Week. Lists contacts whose access expires this week.
    - Next Week. Shows contacts whose access will expire next week.
    - Last Month. Shows contacts whose access ended last month.
    - This Month. Lists contacts whose access expires this month.
    - Next Month. Shows contacts whose access expires next month.
    - **More than … days ago**. Before the calendar day N days ago. That whole boundary day is excluded.
    - **Less than … days ago**. From the start of the last N calendar days through now. For example, 3 includes today and the previous two calendar days, up to the current time.
    - **Exactly … days ago**. The whole calendar day N days ago. Enter 0 for today.
    - **In more than … days**. After the whole calendar day N days from today. That boundary day is excluded.
    - **In less than … days**. From now up to the start of the calendar day N days from today.
    - **In exactly … days**. The whole calendar day N days from today. Enter 0 for today.

    For these six relative options, enter the number of days. They use calendar days in the account time zone, not rolling 24-hour intervals. Use a whole number from 0 to 36,500. For either Less than option, entering 0 matches no contacts. Leave no required day count blank.
3. Select date and time. Choose a specific date and time to get very precise data.
4. Material Type Selection:

    - Course. Shows only courses.
    - Library. Shows materials from educational libraries.
    - Cohort. Shows cohorts tied to a specific date, aimed at bringing event participants together.
    - Product. Includes various products that may relate to educational content (for example, a subscription or a service).
    - **All Courses**. Checks access granted as an all-courses license or by an all-courses product item. It does not combine separate licenses for individual courses.
    - **All Libraries**. Checks access granted as an all-libraries license or by an all-libraries product item. It does not combine separate licenses for individual libraries.
5. **Specific item**. Select the courses, libraries, cohorts or products to check. Selecting an item narrows the matching access records; it does not exclude a contact merely because they also have access to other items.
6. **Course Plan**. When exactly one course is selected, optionally narrow the filter to its plans. For a single cohort, you can similarly narrow it to the cohort dates shown in the form.

![Access End filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/13b2cdadb4a830170b7e3e650ccdf8380b6ae09ac2ba0b827af065a7311af71c.png)

### Has Access

This condition finds contacts who have access to certain platform materials.

Filter conditions:

1. Has access:

    - Yes. Shows only contacts who have access to the materials.
    - No. Shows contacts who don't have access to the materials. Helps you see which contacts lack access to learning materials.
2. Material Type Selection:

    - Course. Shows only courses.
    - Library. Shows available libraries with resources (for example, articles or books).
    - Cohort. Shows cohorts tied to a specific date, aimed at bringing event participants together.
    - Product. Includes various products that may relate to educational content (for example, a subscription or a service).
    - All Courses. Shows all available courses, regardless of their access status.
    - All Libraries. Shows all libraries, regardless of their access status.
3. Specific Material Selection. Lets you filter contacts by access to specific platform materials.
4. Active Access. Select this checkbox to find contacts with active access to materials. Active access means that, right now, the contact has access to the platform's learning materials.
5. Auto-renewal is on. Filters contacts whose subscription renews automatically. This means the contact has turned on automatic charging and renews the subscription when the paid period ends. It appears when the material type is Product and counts only products with the "Subscription" type.

![Has Access filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ac883a010daa508e6734ad987442191ac485f032374c75166843cbbbbcd354ab.png)

### Assignment Answers

This condition sorts and displays contacts based on their activity and interaction with course assignments.

Filter conditions:

1. Assignment answers:

    - Equals. Shows contacts who match the filter conditions you set. This helps the instructor see who is actively taking part in learning.
    - Does not equal. Excludes contacts who match the filter conditions. Useful for finding contacts who aren't taking part in assignments.
2. Select specific course. Filters by a specific course. If you select a course, only contacts registered for it and matching your other conditions appear in the list.
3. Select course step. Lets you pick a lesson from the selected course. Useful for analyzing how contacts handle specific assignments in a particular lesson. If you select a lesson, only contacts who answered assignments from that lesson appear.
4. Status:

    - Approved. Shows contacts whose assignment answers have been reviewed and approved by the instructor.
    - In progress. Shows contacts who have submitted assignments but haven't yet received a final grade or approval. Useful for monitoring contact progress.
5. Answer Date:

    - Any date. The list includes answers regardless of their dates.
    - Before. Sets the upper limit for the date. Shows answers submitted before it.
    - After. Sets the lower limit for the date. Shows only contacts who answered after it.
    - Between. Lets you set a time interval. Shows answers submitted within it.
    - Today. Shows answers submitted today only.
    - Yesterday. Shows answers submitted yesterday only.
    - This week. The list includes answers from this week.
    - Last week. The list includes answers from last week.
    - This month. Filters answers from this month.
    - Last month. Filters answers from last month.
6. Select date or period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Assignment Answers filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7022504c389845ef84ddc9c53e582301385321ddf8a9a45395d8631b5da0e7c8.png)

## Webinars

### Webinar Attendance

Use **Webinar Attendance** to find contacts who were present at a particular part of a webinar's timeline. For example, a range from minute 15 to minute 30 finds contacts recorded as present at any minute in that interval. It does not require attendance throughout the whole interval and does not show when a contact first joined.

1. **Webinar type**. Choose **Webinar** or **Automated Webinar**.
2. **Webinar**. Select one or more webinars, or leave **Any** to keep the broader scope.
3. **Period**. Choose **less than**, **more than** or **range**. For this timeline condition, less than checks for a recorded presence minute at or before your value; more than checks at or after it; range checks between From and To, including both boundaries.
4. **Minutes**. Enter the position on the webinar timeline. A value of 15 means minute 15 after the webinar starts; it does not mean 15 minutes of total attendance.
5. **Automated Webinar date**. For automated webinars, optionally narrow the run dates using the additional date condition. Keep Any when the date should not restrict the match.
6. **Specify UTM parameters**. Enable this only when you also want to narrow the selected webinar records by their UTM values, then choose the required values.

For total time attended, use the separate Webinar Attendance (Duration) condition.

![Webinar Attendance filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c5108ab99c1c1ba9690fc4ba8aa9929fa4763953e38d6aa85bc2dca1bd50c8c8.png)

### Webinar Registration

Use this condition to find and list contacts who registered for webinars, and to analyze their activity.

Filter conditions:

1. Webinar registration:

    - Yes. Shows all contacts who registered for the webinar. You can use this list of interested participants for further actions, such as sending reminders or additional information.
    - No. Finds contacts who didn't register for the webinar. Useful for finding potential attendees to send invitations or reminders to.
2. Type:

    - Webinar. Shows contacts who registered for regular live webinars. This can help you analyze how interesting your live events are.
    - Automated Webinar. Highlights contacts who registered for pre-recorded webinars. This can be important for assessing interest in automated content.
3. Select a specific webinar from the list. Select a webinar and see only the contacts who registered for it. This simplifies event management and personalized communication with participants.
4. Registration Date:

    - Any date. All contacts who registered for the webinar, across the entire period.
    - Before. Contacts who registered before the specified date.
    - After. Contacts who registered after the specified date.
    - Between. Contacts who registered within the time frame you specify.
    - Today/Yesterday/This week/Last week/This month/Last month. Quickly find contacts for specific periods and analyze changes over time (for example, registration activity across different weeks or months).
5. Choose a date or period. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Webinar Registration filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d6349541d54a6aa6ae0b061efc1dcd6325c5860a25b714552cbe5256b81923b7.png)

### Webinar Attendance (Duration)

Use this filter to analyze how long contacts stayed in a webinar. For example, if you choose "Webinar Attendance (Duration) more than 15 minutes," you get a list of contacts who were in the webinar for more than 15 minutes. This helps you identify the most interested contacts and assess their engagement with the webinar content.

Filter conditions:

1. Webinar type:

    - Webinar. Tells regular webinars apart from automated ones. A webinar is a live event with a host.
    - Automated Webinar. A recorded webinar that is broadcast automatically.
2. Select a specific webinar from the list. Focus on one webinar and assess attendance time for that webinar only. This helps you see which participants were interested in a particular event.
3. Condition:

    - More than. Sets a minimum attendance time. For example, "more than" selects contacts who attended the webinar for longer than the time you specify.
    - Less than. Selects contacts who didn't stay as long as the time you specify.
4. Minutes. Enter the number of minutes. This is the time a contact must spend in the webinar to be included in the selection.

![Webinar Attendance (Duration) filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3742928cdf71c83d0d7174e3dd5d7d6a053dab5e0aca8e7e4b814ff94babec94.png)

## Email

### Opened Broadcast

This condition finds contacts who viewed emails from the selected broadcast.

Filter conditions:

1. Opened the broadcast:

    - Opened. Lists contacts who opened and viewed a specific broadcast. This may mean the broadcast content interested the recipient.
    - Didn't open. Lists contacts who haven't opened or viewed the broadcast. This can help you identify an audience that isn't responding to communication and needs extra attention.
2. Broadcast selection. Specify which broadcast to filter by. This is useful for analyzing reactions to specific offers.

![Opened Broadcast filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ef8da01038bc1514e6c9f5a98820f88251bcbb602c6bf30dc7a250ce2dfb5a2d.png)

### Clicked Broadcast Link

This filter finds contacts based on how they interact with broadcasts. It helps you build more targeted marketing strategies and offers.

Filter conditions:

1. Clicked a link in the broadcast:

    - Clicked. Lists contacts who clicked a link in the specified broadcast. This may show that the contact is interested in the content or offer, so you can identify potentially interested contacts for further communication or offers.
    - Didn't click. Lists contacts who didn't click a link in the specified broadcast. Use it to work with contacts who showed no interest and need extra engagement or follow-up reminders.
2. Select broadcast. Specify which broadcast to filter by. This is useful for analyzing reactions to specific events, such as webinars, promotions, or various offers.

![Clicked Broadcast Link filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a946868479edf3bcdc3ef90b819a4347b5709c4721d3549cf02d16135559a77e.png)

### Last Email Click Date

This condition builds a list of contacts based on when they last clicked a link in an email sent to them.

Filter conditions:

1. Date of last email click:

    - Any date. Selects contacts who clicked an email at any time. Useful for broad analysis and for assessing overall contact activity.
    - Before. Sets an upper time limit. You get contacts who clicked a link in an email before the date and time you specify. Helpful for analyzing how contacts interacted with earlier messages.
    - After. Sets a lower time limit. You get contacts who clicked a link in an email after the date you specify. Helps you find active contacts over a specific period.
    - Between. Lets you select a date range in which the last click happened. Useful for analyzing activity during certain time frames, such as promotional campaigns.
    - Today. Highlights contacts who clicked an email today. Important for understanding current engagement.
    - Yesterday. Highlights contacts who clicked an email the day before. Helps you assess the effectiveness of emails sent the previous day.
    - This week. Selects contacts who clicked an email from the beginning of the current week to now. Useful for operational analytics.
    - Last week. Selects contacts who interacted with emails last week. Helps you evaluate weekly activity and plan future campaigns.
    - This month. Highlights contacts who clicked an email since the beginning of the current month. Convenient for analyzing monthly activity.
    - Last month. Highlights contacts who clicked an email last month. Helps you analyze how earlier campaigns performed.
2. Select date and time. Choose a specific date and time to get very precise data about your contacts.
3. Include those who didn't click. Adds contacts who have never clicked an email to the list. Helpful for analyzing your entire contact base, including contacts who showed no interest.

![Last Email Click Date filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1bf7992018e55487e4c52cb77801b39d7492211fc523c49af43c6d41b2523143.png)

### In Mailing List

This condition segments contacts by their subscription to mailing lists, for example, to send webinar invitations.

Filter conditions:

1. In the mailing list:

    - Included. Shows contacts who are in a specific mailing list. This helps you identify the target audience for business communication and send targeted offers and promotions.
    - Not included. Shows contacts who aren't in the mailing list. This can help you segment your audience to avoid information overload and find those who need convincing to subscribe.
2. Select mailing list. Choose a specific list to target your audience more precisely for different broadcasts. For example, you can create separate offers for different contact groups based on their interests or activity.

![In Mailing List filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3b4e68aaf46403a0d3ba47d7e19111985938ca6d229a7da66959dd95e05cb73b.png)

Subscribed to Email Broadcasts

This filter helps you understand which contacts are willing to receive information and which need extra attention to engage. It makes it easier to plan future promotional offers.

Filter conditions:

1. Subscribed to email broadcasts:

    - Yes. Lists contacts who are subscribed to email broadcasts. Useful for seeing who is ready to receive information and updates about new courses or events.
    - No. Lists contacts who aren't subscribed to email broadcasts. This can help you find potential contacts you need to convince to subscribe to hear about new opportunities.

![Subscribed to Email Broadcasts filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f7327661030ede5ec009f8955bd4c011b6127180d5e4e6c5efa3e1d237a845f3.png)

### Last Email Open Date

This condition builds a list of contacts based on when they last opened an email. It helps you set up marketing campaigns that focus on engagement levels.

Filter conditions:

1. Date of last email open:

    - Any date. Selects all contacts regardless of when they opened an email. Useful when you want to work with the largest possible audience, with no time limits.
    - Before. Lists contacts who opened an email before the date and time you specify. Helps you analyze how well broadcasts worked up to that point.
    - After. Lists contacts who opened an email after the date you specify. Useful for finding recently active contacts.
    - Between. Lets you set a date range in which contacts opened an email. Ideal for analyzing activity over a certain time to see trends or reactions to specific campaigns.
    - Today. Selects contacts who opened an email today. Extremely useful for quick feedback on recent broadcasts or for analyzing current activity.
    - Yesterday. Selects contacts who opened an email the day before. A good way to monitor the response to messages and promotions you sent the previous day.
    - This week. Selects contacts who opened an email during the current week. Helps you assess open rates over a wider time frame than one day while still staying current.
    - Last week. Selects contacts who opened an email during the week before the current one. Useful for analyzing short-term changes in contact behavior.
    - This month. Selects contacts who opened an email during the current month. Helps you see how your broadcasts perform over a longer period than a week.
    - Last month. Selects contacts who opened an email last month. Useful for comparing results with the current month and analyzing activity on a larger scale.
2. Select date and time. Choose a specific date and time to get very precise data about your contacts.
3. Include those who didn't open. Adds contacts who have never opened an email. Useful for understanding overall engagement and working with inactive contacts.

![Last Email Open Date filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3eb69c8827abb6a792ae47ef6120f1c9bb855f2e000e70319d4d79ea3c6b3f7c.png)

## Deal

### Has Deal

This condition adds or excludes contacts related to the selected deal. You can also filter contacts by the date a deal was created, or select a period.

Filter conditions:

1. Has deal:

    - Yes. Lists contacts who have at least one deal.
    - No. Shows contacts who have no active deals.
2. Pipeline selection. Filters contacts by a specific pipeline. For example, if you choose the "Marketing Seminar" pipeline, the list includes only contacts associated with it.
3. Stage selection. Shortlists contacts by the current stage of their deals. For example, if you select the "Application" stage, the list includes contacts whose deals are at that stage.
4. **Tags.** Select deal tags to match contacts whose deals have those tags. These are the pipeline’s deal tags, not the tags on the contact profile.
5. Created Date:

    - Any date. Returns all contacts, regardless of the deal creation date.
    - Before. Sets an upper limit for the deal creation date.
    - After. Sets a lower limit for the deal creation date.
    - Between. Specifies a time range during which the deal was created.
    - Today/Yesterday/This week/Last week/This month/Last month. Filters only contacts whose deals were created on that day or in that period.
6. Date or period selection. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

After selecting a pipeline, you can also add filters for its custom deal fields. Select **Specify UTM parameters** to filter by the deal’s campaign, source, medium, content or term values.

![Has Deal filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5d2ec42db370666cd83070388fef374dcd6d7074e67c3e93fdd5e204e4244126.png)

## Affiliate Program

### Is an Affiliate

Use this condition to distinguish contacts who have an affiliate-program membership from those who do not.

1. **Yes**. Select contacts who have an affiliate membership, then use **Active** to choose its status.
2. **No**. Select contacts who have no affiliate membership. The Active checkbox does not narrow this choice.
3. **Active selected**. With Yes, select memberships marked active.
4. **Active cleared**. With Yes, select memberships marked inactive.

Active is the membership's enabled status. It does not measure referral-link clicks, referred purchases or commissions. Use the relevant affiliate statistics when you need to assess performance.

![Is an Affiliate filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5f749a2991feb033ae337bacc1dd7b85c5647113630f33608b70314fba605a0c.png)

### Affiliate

This condition finds contacts who were invited through the affiliate program. Select the affiliate whose invitation link the new contacts used to register and make purchases. You can also find contacts who have no affiliate.

Filter conditions:

1. Affiliate:

    - Specified. Selects contacts who registered through an affiliate link. These contacts have information about the affiliate who brought them to the platform. You get all contacts invited through the links of certain affiliates, which is useful for analyzing affiliate effectiveness, tracking their activity, or assessing the profit they bring.
    - Not specified. Selects contacts who registered on their own, outside the affiliate program. They aren't connected to any affiliate. This helps you see how many contacts came to the platform by themselves, without affiliates.
2. Select a specific affiliate. Choose a specific affiliate from the list to see all contacts who registered through their link. This is useful for a deeper analysis of an affiliate's interactions with contacts and for assessing their contribution to your overall affiliate marketing strategy.

![Affiliate filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1298700ffa450e69fd367997362df8a408c4c873311d945f2399d1daf358648e.png)

## Other

### Bonus Balance

This condition finds contacts who have a certain amount in their bonus balance. The amount is in the account's currency.

Filter conditions:

1. Bonus Balance:

    - Equals. Lists contacts whose bonus balance equals the number you enter. Use it to find contacts with an exact amount.
    - Does not equal. Lists contacts whose bonus balance doesn't equal the number you enter, for example, not equal to 150. Useful when you need to exclude a specific group of contacts.
    - Less than. Lists contacts whose bonus balance is below the number you enter, for example, less than 150. Helps you find contacts who haven't reached a certain bonus threshold.
    - More than. Lists contacts whose bonus balance is above the number you enter. Useful for offering special promotions or bonuses only to more active contacts.
    - Between. Lists contacts whose bonus balance falls within the range you set. This lets you target contacts with specific scores more precisely, for example, for special offers.
2. Numeric value field. Enter the value to filter by.

![Bonus Balance filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4bda9aeda01981d5ba6d8b1cea1b20d7eca6f9309e6772d16b285394864b37a8.png)

### Imported in Session

This condition adds or excludes contacts that were imported into AXL manually. You can select only the imported contacts or, conversely, exclude them from your search.

Filter conditions:

1. Imported in session:

    - Was. Lists contacts who were imported into the system in a specific session. This can help you analyze how well a particular import worked and track contacts who came from a specific campaign.
    - Wasn't. Lists contacts who weren't imported in this session. Important for finding contacts who registered or were added in other ways, not through an import.
2. Import Session Selection. Filters contacts imported as part of a specific campaign or period. Useful for analyzing the results of specific marketing promotions or events.

![Imported in Session filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a20dff2749907f7b37bbe5a79cb1ecfef778bdfb3e2bdab40a089cfcffb63359.png)

### Has Possible Duplicates

This condition selects all contacts that have possible duplicates in your CRM contact database. With this filter, you can tidy up your contact database regularly. Apply the filter to your contacts, click "Similar contacts found," and merge them. For more information about merging contacts, read the article "Merging Contacts."

Filter conditions:

1. Has Possible Duplicates:

    - Yes. Lists contacts who have possible duplicate entries. Useful for analytics and for understanding the duplicate problem so you can fix it.
    - No. Lists contacts without duplicates. Important for working with a clean database and keeping communication errors to a minimum.

![Has Possible Duplicates filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f421fa9134315dfdf89468a71a28dd726cd6922a9be9a136151f8e488b1458c8.png)

### Embedded Form Submission

This filter lists contacts based on how they interacted with embedded forms placed on your website or in widgets. It covers forms embedded through the content editor.

Filter conditions:

1. Embedded form submission:

    - Yes. Lists contacts who actually submitted embedded forms. This can include applications, registrations, and other kinds of interaction.
    - No. Lists contacts who didn't submit embedded forms. Useful for analyzing contacts who started interacting but didn't finish the process.
2. Source:

    - Any. Includes contacts from all sources (website and widget).
    - Website. Limits the list to contacts who interacted with forms on the website.
    - Widget. Limits the list to contacts who interacted with forms in widgets.
3. Date:

    - Any date. Gets data for the entire period.
    - Before. Filters contacts who interacted with forms before a specific date.
    - After. Filters contacts who interacted with forms after a specific date.
    - Between. Sets a date range for filtering.
    - Today. Lists contacts who submitted forms today.
    - Yesterday. Lists contacts who submitted forms the day before.
    - This week. Lists contacts who submitted forms since the beginning of the current week.
    - Last week. Lists contacts who submitted forms last week.
    - This month. Lists contacts who submitted forms since the beginning of the current month.
    - Last month. Lists contacts who submitted forms last month.
4. Date or period selection. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Embedded Form Submission filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2a36644e95995ef437a04b0eb4dec48ca32e23cabd622d9646c890f47b39df46.png)

## Gamification

### Has Achievement

This condition helps you find specific groups of contacts based on their achievements and activity on the platform. It lets you select contacts who have particular achievements in the "Gamification" section. For more details about this section, read the article "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)."

Filter conditions:

1. Has achievement:

    - Yes. Filters contacts who have one or more achievements. For example, you can find out how many contacts earned the "First Test," "Marathon Runner," or other kinds of recognition for their effort.
    - No. Selects contacts who have no achievements at all.
2. Achievement. Choose a specific achievement to filter contacts by. For example, if you want to see only contacts who earned the "Level 1 Buyer" achievement.
3. Number:

    - Less than. Selects contacts who have fewer achievements than the value you specify. For example, "less than 5" gives you contacts with 0 to 4 achievements.
    - More than. Similarly, you get contacts whose number of achievements exceeds the value you specify.
    - Equal to. Filters contacts whose number of achievements exactly matches the number you enter.
    - Not equal to. Shows contacts whose number of achievements differs from the value you specify.
4. Numeric value field. Enter the value to filter by.
5. Date:

    - Any date. Lets you see achievements regardless of when they were earned.
    - Before. Filters contacts by achievement date when the achievement was earned before the date you specify.
    - After. Similarly, filters achievements that were earned after the date you specify.
    - Between. Lets you specify a time frame during which achievements were earned.
    - Today. Filters contacts who earned achievements today.
    - Yesterday. Same, but for the previous day.
    - This week. Selects achievements earned during the current week.
    - Last week. Filters achievements from the previous week.
    - This month. Selects achievements from the current month.
    - Last month. Selects achievements from the previous month.
6. Date or period selection. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Has Achievement filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ef4989c10a0818c81c47d09aff2b214127318ddb971eef68cdf2b2eaa90eba76.png)

## Form/Quiz

### Form Answer

This condition segments contacts by their answers in forms. It helps you understand their preferences and judge the quality of the information you collected.

Filter conditions:

1. Form Selection. Choose which form to search for contact answers. For example, you can choose a registration form or a feedback form.
2. Form Field Selection. Choose a specific field in the selected form, such as name, email, question, or any other requested value.
3. Condition:

    - Equals. Selects contacts whose answer in the field exactly matches the value you enter. For example, "Name equals John" finds contacts who entered the name John.
    - Does not equal. Excludes contacts with the specified answer. For example, "Age does not equal 25" excludes everyone who said they are 25.
    - Contains. Finds contacts whose answer partially matches the text you enter. For example, "Comment contains help" finds those who mentioned "help" in their comments.
    - Does not contain. Excludes contacts whose answer contains the text you enter. For example, "Review does not contain negative" excludes answers that contain the text "negative".
    - Specified. Finds contacts who gave an answer in the field. For example, "Email specified" shows all contacts who provided an email.
    - Not specified. Finds contacts who left the field empty. For example, "Phone not specified" shows all contacts who didn't provide a phone number.
4. Value Field. Enter the value to compare with contact answers.

![Form Answer filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bdbd8f2f9f2c8fed29e73a78b3bd95555be47860d5bcd1af2a67a2975f350685.png)

### Form UTM Parameter

This condition segments contacts by the UTM parameters used in forms to track traffic sources and marketing campaign results.

Filter conditions:

1. Form Selection. Choose the form whose data you want to analyze. For example, if your account has several forms, you can pick the one you want to investigate.
2. UTM Parameter Selection. Choose the UTM parameter you're interested in.

    - utm\_source - traffic source; shows where the contact comes from (for example, Google, Facebook, or email).
    - utm\_medium - marketing medium (channel); shows the type of traffic (for example, CPC, email, or banner).
    - utm\_campaign - name of the ad campaign; tracks a specific campaign or promotion.
    - utm\_term - keyword or phrase; mostly used in paid search advertising to track the keywords people used to find the ad.
    - utm\_content - content; tells similar links or content elements in one campaign apart, so you can see which performed better (for example, different versions of the same ad or banner).
3. Condition:

    - Equals. Filters contacts whose value for the UTM parameter exactly matches your value. For example, "utm\_source equals Facebook" finds contacts who came from Facebook.
    - Does not equal. Excludes contacts with the specified value. For example, "utm\_source does not equal Google" shows all contacts except those who came from Google.
    - Contains. Selects contacts whose UTM parameter value includes your text. For example, "utm\_medium contains email" finds contacts who came from email broadcasts.
    - Does not contain. Excludes contacts whose UTM parameter value includes your text. For example, "utm\_source does not contain Instagram" excludes contacts who came from Instagram.
4. Value Field. Enter the value that the selected parameter and condition are compared against.

![Form UTM Parameter filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/93e04235645ed3f9839d8c052346946572b59cc9d17f97ee3998d73b8d6c71fb.png)

### Form/Quiz Submission

This filter selects contacts based on whether they submitted forms or quizzes. Use it to list contacts who did or didn't take certain actions, which helps you analyze contact activity and engagement.

Filter conditions:

1. Form/quiz submission:

    - Submitted. Shows contacts who completed and submitted the form or quiz. Helps you track mandatory assignments and engagement levels.
    - Not submitted. Shows contacts who didn't submit the form or quiz. This can help you find contacts who may be having difficulties or simply aren't taking part in the survey.
2. Form Selection. Choose a specific form or quiz to filter contacts. When you pick one, the list narrows to only the contacts who did or didn't submit that one. Useful for assessing work on a particular task.
3. Date:

    - Any date. Shows all contacts, with no limit on the date the form or quiz was submitted.
    - Before. Selects contacts who submitted the form before a certain date. Useful for analyzing task completion before an important date or event.
    - After. Selects contacts who submitted the form after a certain date. Useful for tracking contact activity within a given period.
    - Between. Set a start and end date to select contacts who submitted during that period.
    - Today. Shows contacts who submitted forms or quizzes today.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts who submitted forms or quizzes the day before.
    - This week/Last week. A weekly selection helps you see how contacts handle assignments over a longer time frame and monitor trends.
    - This month/Last month. Similar, but on a monthly level. Useful for long-term analysis of activity and task completion.
4. Date or period selection. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Form/Quiz Submission filter in the Condition step settings, with the Filtering by the following conditions summary below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1af90b66aae77fb19a4655f53cb378d9906feb155c1ae198fbf7931bb0e71f60.png)

## Apps

### Telegram Groups/Channels. Member of Groups/Channels

This condition lists contacts based on whether they take part in Telegram groups and channels. It highlights contacts who are, or aren't, members of the selected Telegram groups.

Filter conditions:

1. Group/channel membership:

    - Yes. Selects contacts who are members of at least one Telegram group or channel. Useful for finding active participants in communities, who may be more interested in your content or products.
    - No. Selects contacts who aren't members of any Telegram group or channel. This helps you focus on contacts who aren't part of these communities, for example, to engage them later.
2. Choose a specific group. Choose the specific Telegram groups or channels that contacts must belong to. This lets you aim your efforts at a particular audience segment.
3. Date:

    - Any date. Shows all contacts, regardless of the date they joined.
    - Before. Selects contacts who joined before the specified date.
    - After. Shows contacts who became members on or after the specified date.
    - Between. Sets a specific time frame for selecting contacts.
    - Today. Shows contacts who joined groups or channels today.
    - Yesterday. Shows contacts who joined the day before.
    - This week. Filters contacts who joined this week.
    - Last week. Shows contacts who became members last week.
    - This month. Shows contacts who became members this month.
    - Last month. Filters contacts who joined last month.
4. Date or period selection. Available when you select before, after, or between. Choose specific dates and times.

![Telegram group membership condition with group selection and date controls.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UYtqvVBMskKbO3Sn6Eslqg.png)

## Additional Contact Conditions

The following conditions are available in the contact-condition selector. Add a condition, choose its options and check the filter summary before applying or saving it. Conditions within one group use OR; separate AND groups must all match.

### Lead Priority

Filter contacts by their assigned lead-priority tier or numerical score. Use **is** or **is not** with **Hot**, **Warm** or **Cold**. Use **above** or **below** for a strict score threshold, or **between** for an inclusive range from 0 to 100. For example, between 60 and 85 includes both 60 and 85. Use **is set** for scored contacts and **is not set** for contacts without an assigned priority.

![Condition settings with Lead Priority between 60 and 85 and the matching filter summary.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0aa08a284d2ac3c9dbddb9421d5ce2dd6795d1b9a375a67ce5f392b6579121e0.png)
The shared Lead Priority score-range controls, shown here inside an automation Condition. Contact filters and mailing conditions use the same range fields.

### Membership Portal: Active Sessions

Choose **equals**, **does not equal**, **less than**, **more than** or **between**, then enter the session count. This counts the contact's membership-portal sessions that have not been completed. It is not a count of page views or proof that the person is online right now. For example, more than 2 finds contacts with at least three unfinished sessions.

### Has Subscription

1. Choose **Yes** to find contacts with a subscription, or **No** to find contacts without a subscription in the selected product scope.
2. Leave the product selector at **Any**, or choose the relevant subscription products.
3. With Yes, optionally set **Subscription is active**, **Renewal is active** and **Payment method is active** to Any, Yes or No. Any leaves that check unrestricted.

Subscription is active checks the subscription's access dates. Renewal is active checks whether renewal is enabled and within its limits. Payment method is active checks whether a payment method is recorded; it does not guarantee that the next payment will succeed. If several subscriptions are in scope, different subscriptions can satisfy the separate status checks. Choose one product when you need a narrowly scoped match. With No, these three status controls are hidden and are not applied.

### Subscribed to Email Broadcasts

Choose **Yes** for contacts who have not unsubscribed from email broadcasts, or **No** for contacts who have unsubscribed. This is the contact's general email-broadcast subscription status, not membership of a particular mailing list or a guarantee of email delivery.

### Community: Activity

1. Choose **Yes** for matching community activity, or **No** for its absence.
2. Enable **Like**, **Comment** or both. Select at least one activity type.
3. For each enabled type, leave **Space** at Any or select the relevant community space and, when offered, a post.

When Like and Comment are both selected, the contact must satisfy both activity checks; they need not be on the same post. No means there is no matching combination in the selected scope, not that the contact has never used the community.

### Community: Has Posts

1. Choose **Yes** for contacts who have authored a matching post, or **No** for those with no matching post.
2. Leave Space at Any or select the community spaces to check.
3. Optionally set **Number of Likes** and **Number of Comments** to less than or more than a count. Leave Any to ignore that measure.

If both counts are configured, the same post must satisfy both. For example, Yes with more than 10 likes and more than 3 comments selects authors with at least one post meeting both thresholds. No excludes matching posts within this scope; it does not necessarily mean the contact has never posted.

---

# Deals

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/deals

> Create and configure a sales board: stages, required fields, cards, filters, and bulk actions.

A pipeline gives your team one place to track each opportunity, its value, and the next step. Open **CRM → Deals**, then choose a pipeline.

![Northstar Academy · Fall Enrollment board with the New Inquiries, Consultation Booked, Proposal Sent and Enrollment Pending columns; the board scrolls right to Won and Lost.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a862de93fedee621ffc40842f5ceba3093fcfd1df86594ece2e6520ddace70c2.png)
  
Example: Northstar Academy’s fall enrollment pipeline. Twenty-four opportunities total **$430,200**; twenty open deals account for **$359,800**.

## Read the board at a glance

Each column is a stage. Its header shows the number of deals and their total amount. Cards show the related contact, deal amount, deal number, owner, and task counters.

![Olivia Bennett’s $28,400 deal highlighted in the Proposal Sent column, beside Enrollment Pending.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/738d2e3f4b1ffad7f101f4fc9da8bfc471384f131986539831d5900bd4a37dd2.png)
  
**1 · Open a deal.** Click Olivia Bennett to inspect the $28,400 proposal and its next task. Proposal Sent contains five deals worth $115,500.

Drag a card to another stage as the opportunity progresses. Expand **Won** or **Lost** with **Show Deals** to inspect closed opportunities.

> 
> **Deal value is not money received.** A won deal records the sales outcome. Check its orders and payments separately before treating the amount as collected revenue.
> 

## Create a pipeline

A pipeline is the board for a sales process; its stages are the columns. Start by defining the process, then add the stages and fields your team needs.

1. Open **CRM → Deals** and click **Add Pipeline** at the upper right of All Pipelines.
2. In **Name**, enter **Northstar Academy · Corporate Training**. This separate example shows a new process; the populated Fall Enrollment board above remains unchanged.
3. In **Description**, enter “Corporate certification programs · 12–40 seats per team · Q1 2027.”
4. Review **Automatically mark the deal as won once all its orders are paid**. Enable it if payment of all linked orders should determine the won status. Leave **Delete open tasks when the deal closes** off if follow-up tasks should remain.
5. Click **Create and Open** at the bottom to create the pipeline and go straight to its board. **Create** creates it without opening the board; you can open it later from the list.

![Add Pipeline filled with Corporate Training, Q1 2027 description and automatic Won enabled.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c0ffd11ccd43436a75c93abc5577a479bd4970fb5ea0ff585dee4d2b83f043a2.png)
**Define the process.** This form creates a new pipeline; the board’s Settings menu edits an existing one.

The pipeline list shows its name, creation date, number of stages, and number of deals. The action buttons let you **Open** a pipeline, **Copy** it, or **Delete** it. Opening uses the eye icon; copying uses the copy icon.

Deleting a pipeline asks you to enter its name and offers **Delete all deals in this pipeline**. Review that option carefully: removing a pipeline and also deleting its deals are different choices.

## Set up the board and its columns

A new pipeline starts with the closing stages **Won** and **Lost**. Add working stages for the steps before a sales outcome.

![Corporate Training board with Add Stage and the default Won and Lost columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2a2d762c3b384199a19666d9968c4613b3855d07129119c0d6ce76fbbd04be98.jpg)
**2 · Start with a working stage.** After Create and Open, choose **Kanban** under View if you see a table. Click **Add Stage** to add a column before Won and Lost.

### Add and arrange stages

Move the pointer over a column header to reveal its controls. From left to right beside the name, you will see the color button, the four-arrow drag handle, and the **…** menu.

![Proposal Sent column with its color and drag controls and the open menu: Add Column to the Right, Settings, Archive Column.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bbc132278134f4cd21cbb0dfd1a50b0f7ff8e306fe2df218d281e25571586d44.png)
  
**3 · Open the column menu.** Hover over Proposal Sent, then click **…**. Add Column to the Right inserts a stage beside it; Settings opens this stage’s form.

1. Choose **Kanban** under View. On the empty board, click **Add Stage**. A working column appears with an editable **Untitled** name.
2. Type **Discovery** in that header, press **Enter**, then click outside it. The new name remains after reopening the board.
3. For a column beside an existing one, hover over the preceding header and click **… → Add Column to the Right**. Name the new column in its header.
4. To review the name, color, or required fields, open the column’s **… → Settings**. Enter the **Name**, choose the **Color**, and click **Save** at the bottom. The header and colored strip show the result.
5. To reorder columns, hover over the header, hold the four-arrow drag handle between the color button and **…**, and drag the column to its new position.

For the enrollment example, the working sequence is **New Inquiries → Consultation Booked → Proposal Sent → Enrollment Pending**. Each stage should tell the team what has happened and what comes next.

| Example stage | When to use it | Next action |
| --- | --- | --- |
| New Inquiries | A prospective learner or company has expressed interest. | Contact them and understand their training needs. |
| Consultation Booked | A consultation has been arranged. | Confirm the program, team size, and target dates. |
| Proposal Sent | The contact has received a proposal. | Follow up on approval and resolve questions. |
| Enrollment Pending | The contact is ready to proceed, with enrollment steps still outstanding. | Confirm the participant list and order details. |

### Change stage settings and required fields

1. Hover over **Proposal Sent** and click **… → Settings**. The side panel is titled **Stage Settings**.
2. Open **Required Fields** and select **Participants**. If the field is not listed, click **Manage Custom Fields → Add Field** and create it using the field setup steps below, then close the Custom Fields panel to return here.
3. Click **Save** at the bottom of Stage Settings.
4. Reopen the same menu to check that Participants remains selected. In a deal at Proposal Sent, the field is now marked with an asterisk.

![Stage Settings for Proposal Sent, with blue color and Participants selected under Required Fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/793d60737b38af2cb44fdf5d2f28be67002b6b01164f3127730f300958001ab4.png)
  
**4 · Make information required at the right stage.** This saved configuration requires Participants at Proposal Sent. Save is at the bottom of the side panel.

Required fields help capture information at the relevant point in the process. For example, a separate “Cohort start date” field could be required at Enrollment Pending. The custom-field form also has a **Stages** selector for choosing where a field is required.

### Archive a column

Hover over the unused column’s header and open **… → Archive Column**. **The stage and all deals inside it move to the archive.** If some deals should stay active, move them to another stage first.

To find archived content later, open the filters and enable **Show Archived Deals** and, when needed, **Show Archived Stages**.

## Add a deal

Continue on Corporate Training with a separate opportunity: Sophia Martinez’s team is considering 12 certification seats at $3,200 each, for **$38,400**.

1. Click **Add Deal** below the Discovery column, or use **Add Deal** at the upper right of the board.
2. In **New Deal**, check **Pipeline** and **Pipeline Stage**. Opening from Discovery preselects Corporate Training and Discovery.
3. Enter **38400** in **Deal Amount**. Under **Related Contact**, type the contact’s name or email, wait for the result, and select **Sophia Martinez**.
4. Choose an **Owner**, tags, and any required custom-field values for your workflow. Click **Create** at the bottom of the panel.
5. The new card appears in Discovery. Its header shows **1 deal** and **$38,400**. Click **Sophia Martinez** to open the details.

![New Deal with Corporate Training, Discovery, amount 38400 and Sophia Martinez selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/53aad36ffae0cd349d6f51349fbd045403b7f7014922cfdb7e0f3be818491854.png)
**5 · Check the destination before creating.** Pipeline and Pipeline Stage determine where the card will appear. Click **Create** at the bottom of this panel.

![Discovery containing Sophia Martinez deal 713 for 38400 dollars, with Add Deal below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7f8f8ab463bbe0ef048c39fe154a428c42d9caa4f7cee94c2cec9342b9b5eb09.png)
**6 · Check the created card.** The amount and stage total agree. **Add Deal** below the card creates another opportunity in this stage.

| Field | What to enter |
| --- | --- |
| Deal Amount | The opportunity’s value, such as $28,400 for Olivia’s team proposal. |
| Tags | Labels for grouping deals. Use **Manage Tags** to find or create tags. |
| Related Contact | The person associated with the opportunity. Select an existing contact; see [Contacts](https://docs.axl.tech/contacts) if you need to create one first. |
| Owner | The team member responsible for progressing the deal. |
| Custom fields | The additional information configured for this pipeline, including any required fields. |

If you change the pipeline, recheck the stage, tags, and custom fields: they belong to the selected pipeline and are reset when it changes.

To move a deal, hold its card and drag it to the next stage. To edit its details, click the contact’s name on the card. The details window contains the deal’s fields, quick actions, tasks, orders, contact profile, and history.

For a tour of the fields, tasks, orders, profile and history in that window, continue to [Deal Details](https://docs.axl.tech/deal-details#window-layout).

## Edit pipeline settings

Click **Settings** in the upper-right corner of the board and choose **Pipeline Settings**. Here you can update the pipeline name and description and change the option to mark a deal as won once all its orders are paid.

![The Settings menu at the upper right offers Pipeline Settings and Deal Settings. The View switcher below offers Kanban and Table.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/013b81c0ed23796483d6acc4aadb0df14cad80ef726cc38d22ac13a04b5d646a.png)
  
Use **Pipeline Settings** for the board’s name and behavior; use **Deal Settings** for deal fields. The separate View switcher below changes Kanban to Table.

![Northstar Academy pipeline settings with its name, cohort description, automatic Won status enabled, and open-task cleanup disabled.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9411ce625ccd3f713f751fcdcbee3f2fb4c4e3e4767016452a57e28587b64ca6.png)
  
**7 · Configure the pipeline.** The example keeps the November cohort description and automatically marks a deal as won once all its orders are paid. The separate option to delete open tasks is turned off.

**Delete open tasks when the deal closes** controls whether unfinished tasks are removed when a deal closes. Leave it off when your team needs to retain those tasks for follow-up.

Use the stage controls for changes to an individual column. Use **Deal Settings** for the fields that describe deals.

## Configure deal fields and card information

1. On the board, click **Settings** in the upper-right corner, then **Deal Settings**. You can also open **Manage Custom Fields** from Stage Settings.
2. Click **Add Field**.
3. Set **Title** to “Participants” and **Type** to **Number**.
4. Set **Key** to **participants**, the field’s identifier.
5. Enable **Show on the deal card** if the value should be visible directly on the board.
6. If this information is required at particular stages, select them under **Stages**. You can also set the requirement afterwards in Stage Settings, as shown above.
7. Click **Create** at the bottom of the New Field panel. The field list now shows Participants, its Number type, and its key.

![New Field form filled with Participants, Number, participants key, and Show on the deal card enabled.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/776edbb6cfa42a8efa875e3055907c6a9f5224df073e87b885661b2d02a0cc19.png)
  
**8 · Choose what appears on the board.** Keep Show on the deal card selected, then click Create at the bottom of the panel.

The eight field types are **Text, Long Text, Date and Time, Number, Checkbox, List, Multi-Select, and Date**. New fields are available when creating or editing a deal.

### Fill a field and check the board result

1. Close the settings panel and click **Olivia Bennett** on the Proposal Sent card.
2. Under **Deal Info**, enter **8** in Participants.
3. Click the **Save** button that appears below the deal fields.
4. Close the deal window. Olivia’s board card now displays **8** below the deal date. Open the deal again to check the field name and edit its value.

![Olivia Bennett’s $28,400 Proposal Sent card now displays the Participants value 8 above the owner and task counters.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/738d2e3f4b1ffad7f101f4fc9da8bfc471384f131986539831d5900bd4a37dd2.png)
  
**9 · Check the result on the card.** The value 8 represents the eight training seats in Olivia’s proposal. This is the board after saving the field value.

Other useful fields could be “Program” as a List and “Cohort start date” as a Date. Display the information that helps someone decide what to do next without opening every deal.

You can also manage deal custom fields from the deal details window. See [Deal Details](https://docs.axl.tech/deal-details) for that workflow.

## Find deals with search and filters

Use **Search** above the board for a keyword lookup. Open **Advanced Filter** for more conditions; the control may appear as **Filter** after conditions are applied.

1. Click **Advanced Filter** above the board.
2. At the bottom of the filter panel, click **Add Filter → Deal Amount** if the amount fields are not already shown.
3. Enter **20000** in **From**; leave To empty for no upper limit.
4. Under **Tasks**, choose **No Tasks**. The list updates as you change the conditions; this panel has no separate Search or Apply button.
5. Click outside the panel to review the matching deals. Olivia’s deal is excluded because it already has a task; Henry’s $38,000 and Ava’s $22,500 deals match.

![Filter panel with No Tasks selected and Deal Amount From set to 20000.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/047727ec5ea358a18648b518707c08eb26b9e5bbe5a82bd477a184a800462c55.png)
  
**10 · Find opportunities that need a next action.** No Tasks combines with the minimum deal amount. Add Filter exposes additional conditions.

Use **Add Filter** to show a condition that is not already in the panel. Current options also include Date Accepted, Date Updated, and UTM Parameters.

| Filter | How it narrows the results |
| --- | --- |
| Search | Find matching deals, contacts, tags, and other searchable information. |
| Date Created | Choose a period or a preset such as today, this week, last week, this month, or last month. |
| Close Date | Limit results by the date a deal was closed. |
| Owner Assigned | **Yes** shows assigned deals; **No** shows unassigned deals; **Any** includes both. |
| Owners | Select one or more team members responsible for the deals. |
| Related Contact | Show deals associated with a selected contact. |
| Deal Amount | Set a minimum, maximum, or both. |
| Products | Find deals that include a selected product. |
| Tags | Filter by the deal’s labels. |
| Tasks | Choose **Any**, **Has Tasks**, **No Tasks**, or **Overdue**. |
| Orders | Choose **Any**, **Has Orders**, **No Orders**, or **Unpaid**. |
| Show Archived Deals / Stages | Include the archived content you need to inspect. |
| Contact Filter | Use the edit icon, **Set up filters**, to configure contact conditions. The conditions line shows the current selection. |

For example, combine a minimum deal amount of **$20,000** with **No Tasks** to find larger opportunities that need a next action. Use **Overdue** instead to review missed follow-ups.

Combined filters are stored in the page address. Copy the URL to reopen the same filter or share it with a teammate who has access. See [Filters & Search Criteria](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms) for contact-filter conditions.

To reuse a filter through its address, finish setting the conditions, copy the address from your browser, and reopen that address. The conditions return with the page. A teammate still needs access to the account and pipeline.

## Switch views and update deals in bulk

Use the **View** switcher to choose **Kanban** or **Table**. Kanban shows progress by stage; Table gives you rows for reviewing and selecting multiple deals.

1. Apply search or filters to narrow the deals you want to update.
2. Switch to **Table**.
3. Select the relevant rows using their checkboxes.
4. Above the table, check the **Selected** count, then open **Bulk Actions**. Choose **Change Owner**, **Move to Pipeline**, or open the **Tags** submenu for the change you need.
5. Review the selected deals and complete the action.

![Two table rows selected, Henry Mitchell and Ava Collins, with the Bulk Actions menu showing Change Owner, Move to Pipeline, Tags and Delete Deals.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c5db1735e0b4009ff00b015bb6319d44d5fa5d65c0c85a37c72ed5727fb8094a.png)
  
**11 · Check the selection before an action.** Two deals are selected. Opening this menu does not apply a change; choose and complete the intended action.

The menu also contains **Delete Deals**. Use that action only when removing the selected deals is your intended task, and read its confirmation before proceeding.

## Set up pipeline automation

Open the pipeline’s **Automation** tab beside Deals. In the left panel, use **Events**, **Actions**, or **Wait Steps** to find a block; use Search to narrow the choices. There are five deal events: **Deals: Deal Added**, **Deals: Moved to Stage**, **Deals: Note Added**, **Deals: Task Added or Changed** and **Deals: Owner Changed**. A new deal starts both **Deal Added** and **Moved to Stage** for its first stage. For each event and a worked example, see "[Deal Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/deal-scenario)".

![Automation tab and palette with the Active switch, Events, Actions and Wait Steps filters and deal event triggers.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d85cb78a75e190238315a91941a7052c6ae4b5e2b1fa5e632754f0646e7a0c3c.png)
**12 · Open the automation editor.** This is its entry point and event palette. Follow [Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario) for connecting blocks and configuring a complete scenario.

An empty canvas has no trigger and cannot start, even if the **Active** switch is on. Configure and review the scenario before using it for live deals.

Next: [Deal details](https://docs.axl.tech/deal-details) explains tasks, notes, orders, and the contact profile inside a deal.

---

# Deal Details

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/deal-details

> Work with deal fields, tasks, orders, contact information, history, and archived opportunities.

The deal window brings everything about one opportunity together: the amount and stage, the contact, tasks, orders and history. Open it to move the deal forward without switching between sections.

Open **CRM → Deals**, choose a pipeline, and click a contact’s name on a card. In Table view, open the deal by its number. The details window brings together the opportunity, contact, tasks, orders, and history.

## Find your way around the deal window

**Deal Info** is on the left. Quick actions run across the top; **Tasks** and **Orders** are beside the fields. Below them, **Contact Profile** describes the person and **History** shows activity.

![Deal 702 window with Deal Info, quick actions, a proposal review task, Orders, Contact Profile and History with Contact Events selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6bade173cdd3277b3d43f021c699f3c8539997f5d47d59b6c00381df34e0ac20.png)
Overview of Olivia’s $28,400 opportunity. The close button is at the upper left; **Copy deal link** is beside the deal number. The sections below show the controls at a larger scale.

## Review the opportunity

![Deal #702 for Olivia Bennett in Proposal Sent, with a deal amount of 28400.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a41de3b56665a4284d72bead768da9cb635f9e2d6a734cd4a86ed86f6ce1d8dd.png)
  
**1 · Check the deal amount.** Olivia Bennett’s team proposal is worth $28,400 and is currently in Proposal Sent.

**Deal Info** contains the pipeline, stage, related contact, and amount. Expand **more** for additional fields, including the owner and tags.

| Field | What it tells you |
| --- | --- |
| Pipeline and Stage | The sales process and the opportunity’s current position in it. |
| Related Contact | The person associated with this opportunity. |
| Deal Amount | The opportunity’s value. In the example, eight training seats and a workshop total $28,400. |
| Owner | The team member responsible for the deal. |
| Tags | The labels used to organize and filter deals. |

Update the stage as the conversation progresses. After editing a deal field, click **Save** below Deal Info to apply it. Changing the pipeline resets pipeline-specific selections; review them before saving.

Click **Deal Source** to inspect how the deal was created. Depending on its source, this can include its creation time, the referring site, and the page containing the form. Click a linked site or form name to open its settings.

![Deal Source for deal 702 showing Date Created, October 17, 2026 at 1 PM.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/add58bd57e3e15207d4f70987a531af16f770d0efec08547df779b96ba4ed6f4.png)
Click **Deal Source** at the top right of Deal Info. This manually created example shows its creation time; it has no originating website or form. Close this panel with **×** to return to the deal.

Use **Copy deal link** to share a direct link with a teammate who has access. **Other Deals** opens the related contact’s other opportunities when they exist.

## Add custom fields and stage requirements

Inside the deal, click **more** below Deal Info, then **Manage Custom Fields** beneath Owner and Tags. This opens the same pipeline field settings as the board’s Deal Settings.

![Expanded Deal Info with Owner, Tags and Manage Custom Fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5d4ce3202c0b787418ed363f81c1501c31a93b31392009af1a51742bd34b817b.png)
**2 · Reveal the settings link.** The expanded view replaces more with **hide**. Click **Manage Custom Fields** to manage the fields for this pipeline.

On the pipeline board, click **Settings → Deal Settings → Add Field**. You can also open a column’s **… → Settings → Manage Custom Fields → Add Field**. These controls configure the fields available for deals in the pipeline.

1. Click **Add Field** and enter a **Title**.
2. Choose the **Type**: Text, Long Text, Date and Time, Number, Checkbox, List, Multi-Select, or Date. For Participants, choose Number.
3. Set a **Key** to identify the field in the API and other parts of the platform.
4. Enable **Show on the deal card** if the value should appear directly on the board.
5. In **Stages**, select the stages where the field is required, if applicable, then click **Create** at the bottom of the New Field panel.

![Participants custom field configured as Number with Show on the deal card selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/776edbb6cfa42a8efa875e3055907c6a9f5224df073e87b885661b2d02a0cc19.png)
  
**3 · Configure the field.** Participants uses the Number type. Show on the deal card makes its saved value visible on the board.

1. Close the settings panels, then open Olivia Bennett’s deal from the board.
2. In **Deal Info**, enter **8** in **Participants**. Its asterisk shows that it is required at Proposal Sent.
3. Click **Save** directly below the fields. The Save and Cancel buttons disappear after the change is saved.
4. Close the deal window and check its board card. The value **8** appears below the deal date. Reopening the deal preserves the value.

![Deal Info for deal 702 with Participants set to 8 and Save and Cancel below the fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0750deeb41c647636d9b37e2140cef0051d08e1fa223e0afd39da499ef449610.png)
  
**4 · Save the value.** Olivia’s $28,400 proposal covers eight participants. Use Save beneath Deal Info to keep the edit.

![The saved Participants value 8 displayed on Olivia Bennett’s board card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/738d2e3f4b1ffad7f101f4fc9da8bfc471384f131986539831d5900bd4a37dd2.png)
  
**5 · Check the board.** The saved value is visible without opening the deal. See [stage settings](https://docs.axl.tech/deals#stage-settings) to make a field required at a particular stage.

## Add useful context

Use **Add note** to record the customer’s goal, the proposal breakdown, and what is needed to move forward. Keep the next action explicit.

> 
>   
> **Example: Aster Analytics · Team Certification**
> 
>   
> 8 seats × $3,200 = $25,600
> Private onboarding workshop = $2,800
> **Proposal total: $28,400**
> 
>   
> Olivia leads an eight-person analytics team. They requested the November 9 cohort and two live Q&A sessions. Finance approval is due October 22. Next step: confirm the participant list and invoicing details.
> 

The quick actions provide four ways to work with the contact:

- **Add note** records context for the team.
- **Chat** opens the contact’s conversation.
- **Email** starts an email to the contact.
- **Call** starts a call through the available calling service.

Communication actions depend on the contact’s details and your connected services.

![Quick actions and Tasks with Create Task, Show completed, and the task menu open with Edit, Complete and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e9bf6a0f374a1d10302eb272c04de6a831aba7718a35650a8af8e564bd90733.png)
**6 · Find the next action.** Add note is at the top. In Tasks, click **Create Task**; for an existing task, click its **…** menu at the right. Unavailable communication buttons appear grey.

## Schedule the next step

1. In **Tasks**, click **Create Task**. Check that **Contact** is Olivia Bennett and **Deal** is #702. Only opportunities for the selected contact appear in Deal.
2. In **Task**, enter “Review the $28,400 team proposal.” Click **Add Description** and record the agenda: confirm eight participants, the November 9 cohort, $25,600 tuition, the $2,800 workshop and October 22 finance approval.
3. Select the responsible person under **Assignee**. Set **Start** to October 19, 2026 at 10:30, confirm the date/time picker with **OK**, and select **15 Minutes**.
4. Choose **No Reminder** for this example. Review Observers and Files if needed, then click **Create** at the bottom of New Task.
5. Check the task’s title and time in the deal’s Tasks panel. To change it later, click its **… → Edit**, update the fields, and click **Save**. Task Details opens after saving; close it to return to the deal.

![Edit Task with Olivia, a concrete proposal review agenda, linked deal 702, start October 19 at 10:30, 15 Minutes, No Reminder and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a8169a5894e79674ffa75fddff2a4900dbdea316cb40a7372e7633fbe5ae2cea.png)
**7 · Review the full task form.** This is the saved task opened through **… → Edit**, so the final button is **Save**. New Task uses **Create**. The demo leaves Assignee and Observers empty; select your responsible team member for a working task.

| Task field | How to use it |
| --- | --- |
| Contact | Select the person the task concerns. |
| Task / Add Description | Write a clear task title. Use **Add Description** for the agenda, questions, or expected outcome. |
| Deal | Check the linked opportunity. The selector lists deals associated with the selected contact. |
| Assignee | Choose the team member who should do the work. |
| Start | Set the start time and duration. With **Select on Calendar**, select a time range and click **Apply**. |
| Reminder | Choose no reminder, or a reminder 5 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour before the start. |
| Observers | Add team members who need to follow the task. |
| Files | Attach supporting files, such as the proposal to review. |

In this example, the follow-up is scheduled for **October 19, 2026 at 10:30 AM** in the displayed account time zone. Enable **Show completed** when reviewing finished work.

![Olivia Bennett’s proposal card with the task counter showing one task.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/738d2e3f4b1ffad7f101f4fc9da8bfc471384f131986539831d5900bd4a37dd2.png)
  
**8 · Keep the next action visible.** The task counter on Olivia’s card shows one task. Open the deal to inspect its title and scheduled time.

Saved tasks appear with their title, date/time, description and assignee. **Not specified** means no assignee is selected. Click **… → Edit** to change a task, **Complete** when it is finished, or **Delete** to remove it. Enable **Show completed** when reviewing completed work.

## Create and review linked orders

The **Orders** panel lists orders linked to the deal. Click **Create Order** when you are ready to prepare one.

1. In the deal’s **Orders** panel, click **Create Order**.
2. Check **Linked Contact** and **Deal**. In this example they are Olivia Bennett and deal #702. Review Status, Owner and Expiration Date before continuing.
3. Scroll to **Contact Information** and confirm the customer’s name and email. Under **Items**, use **Select a product to add to the order**, then review the selected items, prices and any promo code.
4. Click **Create** only when the order is ready. Use **Cancel** to close the form without creating one.

![New Order with status Created, Olivia Bennett as the linked contact, owner Alex Morgan, deal 702 and Expiration Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5642ea8900928aba398ca4eafcf1c7728798a2eafcb780ea6d26bdd3176edba2.png)
**9 · Check which opportunity the order belongs to.** Linked Contact and Deal are filled from the open deal. Review them before adding products.

![Order comment, Promo Code, product selector, No items, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ad1eb7f04be949e256333becd6d375eea0209a6c71acd7e62f2174d68e272f84.png)
**10 · Add the order items.** The proposal breakdown in Comment does not add products. This example still shows **No items**; choose the actual products before creating the order.

| Order field | What to check |
| --- | --- |
| Status | Select the order’s status. |
| Tags | Add the order labels you need for organization. |
| Linked Contact | Choose the customer associated with the order. |
| Owner | Choose the team member responsible for the order. |
| Affiliate | Review the affiliate associated with the invite link used to create the order. |
| Deal | Check which of the selected contact’s deals the order belongs to. |
| Expiration Date | Set the payment deadline. After that date, the customer cannot pay for the order. |
| Manage Custom Fields | Configure any additional order fields. |
| Contact Information | Check the customer’s first name, last name, email, and phone. |
| Items | Add one or more products and select a promo code where applicable. Review the resulting amount before saving. |

After saving, the order appears in the list with its number, status, creation date, amount, and currency. Click the order number or the **View** eye icon to open its details. Use **Share payment link** to access the link for the customer.

> 
> The deal amount is an opportunity estimate. It does not create an order or confirm a payment. This example has a $28,400 proposal and no order yet.
> 

## Update the contact profile

**Contact Profile** lets you review and update the person’s details. Select **Go to Contact** to open the full profile.

![Olivia Bennett contact profile with Go to Contact, first name, last name and example email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ba7c41392b6976ce1f0be063c2cd2513c424d690283b4bbb3f86035ce7eebfad.png)
**11 · Open the full contact.** Click **Go to Contact** at the upper right of Contact Profile. The **more** control reveals additional contact fields.

Use this section to complete missing names or contact details before reaching out. Deal-specific fields describe the opportunity; contact fields describe the person and remain in the contact’s profile.

## Read deal and contact history

**History** records activity such as deal creation, stage changes, orders, contact updates, tasks, and calls. Entries include the available date/time, team member, and links to related items.

Click a linked task, order, site, automation, or other item to open it. This lets you follow an event back to the work that caused it.

Choose the scope of the history:

- **Deal Events** focuses on activity associated with this opportunity.
- **Contact Events** shows the person’s wider activity, including interactions outside this deal.

Within Contact Events, use the category tabs to narrow the list:

| Tab | What to look for |
| --- | --- |
| Main | Key interactions: form and quiz submissions, webinar registration and attendance, chatbot starts, website-session starts, paid and fulfilled orders, courses started and completed, calls, notes, deals created or won/lost, tasks scheduled or completed, and emails sent. |
| Sites | Website visits recorded for the contact. |
| Learning | Course starts and completions and assignment-related activity. |
| CRM | Tasks, notes, and other CRM interactions. |
| Calls | Call-related activity. |
| All | The full activity list across the available categories. |

To add a note, select the relevant history scope, type in **Write a note…** at the bottom, and click **Send**. The paperclip beside the field attaches a file. A note records context; use a task when the action needs an assignee and scheduled time.

![History with Contact Events selected, category tabs, recent contact events and a finance approval note entered beside Send.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3947b81f01c7eb63142be44e5d5891ddb4f088ba1fc253d0d67fe1a26043fc43.png)
**12 · Choose the history scope, then add context.** Contact Events reveals the category tabs. The example shows the note before Send; the empty area above has no recorded events to display.

## Find and restore an archived deal

To archive a card from the board, open its **⋮** menu at the upper right and choose **Archive Deal**. The current confirmation says **Delete this deal?**; confirming this specific Archive Deal action moves it to the archive. The steps below recover it. Do not confuse this with deleting an entire pipeline.

Here the example is the separate Corporate Training opportunity: **Sophia Martinez, #713, $38,400**.

1. Return to the pipeline and open **Advanced Filter**, or **Filter** if filters are already expanded.
2. Enable **Show Archived Deals**. If the stage is archived too, also enable **Show Archived Stages**. Click outside the filter panel.
3. Find the card with the **Archived** label and click the contact’s name.
4. At the top of the deal window, click **Restore**, then **OK** in **Restore this deal?**.
5. The interface confirms **Deal restored** and the Archived label disappears. Return to the board to continue working with the opportunity.

![Filter with Show Archived Deals on and Show Archived Stages off.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/62a36e97f2d002016d60f9a7fd3bdbcb8564cb5d31b3ec7282d665332c915102.png)
**13 · Include archived deals.** Enable Show Archived Stages as well only when you need to include their columns.

![Deal 713 for Sophia Martinez with the Archived label and Restore next to its number.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/77a266ce95e2cb729bcc683b301e8d15c1d697eb487cb098cbac5d6efa1294c1.jpg)
**14 · Restore the opportunity.** Click Restore beside Archived, then confirm with OK. This action was checked on the separate Corporate Training demo deal.

Back to [Deals](https://docs.axl.tech/deals) for pipelines, stages, filters, and bulk actions.

---

# How to Automate a Deal

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/how-to-automate-a-deal

> Set up automations that create deals, move them through pipeline stages and assign tasks to your team.

The "Automation" tab helps you automate pipeline processes. An automation handles the routine work of dealing with your customers. It reacts to what your team members and customers do in the pipeline and responds with the actions you set up.

This article shows in detail how to set up and automate a pipeline.

Create a Pipeline Automation

Create a Deal When a Form Is Submitted

Create a Deal When an Order Is Created

Create a Deal When a Webinar Ends

## Create a Pipeline Automation

Go to CRM → Deals. Create a new pipeline or select an existing one. To learn how to create a pipeline, read "[Deals](https://docs.axl.tech/deals)".

![CRM → Deals: All Pipelines list with the Northstar Academy pipelines, stage and deal counts, and view, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/89edcfd24d0759d3daf4453815bb305985a6709f8d3291ade7c0b11f0a9e744c.png)

Adjust the pipeline settings and add the stages you need.

![Northstar Academy · Fall Enrollment pipeline in Kanban view with Settings, Add Deal, the Deals and Automation tabs and the stage columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/086ae8ec4825f235dc36bc3480422d43dbcc529109036fc535af650c448e75eb.png)

Next, open the "Automation" tab. On the "Events" tab of the toolbar, select the "Deals: Moved to Stage" event and drag it onto the canvas. The event needs to be configured. Click the "Settings" button, then "Configure Step".

![Pipeline Automation tab with the Events palette and the gear menu of Deals: Moved to Stage open: Configure Step, Copy Step, Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/20974f20fd76b7f94531b45732dbd02e027e6aa3905e7a7f94104f686536dcc8.png)

From the list, select the stage the deal moves into. Click "Confirm".

![Deals: Moved to Stage settings with the stage list open and Proposal Sent selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/05f9a57b61c910f1fbe62d4f16efc824a43e3939e591234c094e02633478ea1f.png)

Next, open the "Actions" tab. Select the "Add Task" action and drag it onto the canvas. Connect the event and the action.
The action needs to be configured too. Click the "Settings" button, then "Configure Step".

![Deals: Moved to Stage (Proposal Sent) connected to a new Add Task step with its gear menu open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2bb4dfb27f2382b1518e708295289d94223eff069100e7ac3db535637b580c70.png)

In the "Step Settings" window, fill in the fields:

- Step Name. Enter a name for the step. You can name steps in an automation however you like.
- Task. Describe what needs to be done when the deal reaches the selected stage.
- Add Description. Click to add a description to the task.
- Deal. Choose "From Automation" to link the deal from the automation to the task, or "Don't Link".
- Start. Set a specific start date, or select "Event date". With "Event date", the start date is the date the automation event was triggered.
- Duration. Set how long the task lasts.
- Assign To. Choose a specific admin, or rotate tasks among several team members. You can also assign the contact's owner by entering the owner's job title.
- Observers. Choose an admin to keep an eye on this task. They'll be notified when the task status changes.
- Files. Attach the files you need to the task.

When you're done, click "Save".

![Add Task settings: task Call to discuss the proposal, linked to the deal, starting on the event date, 30 minutes, assigned to the deal owner, with observers.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2243448088de4c1a659875c235f108e7b567d061226fc430f9f7012318cd4a64.png)

Add as many events and actions as you need to your automation. Now your automation is ready. To activate it, set the switch to "Active".

![Pipeline automation where Deals: Moved to Stage (Proposal Sent) leads to Add Task: Call to discuss the proposal.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fca20e49bba19a8e6de302f96cc5a6ee69a31edf0e7c341829f1100a79bb7951.png)

With this automation, after a deal reaches the "Request" stage, its owner gets a new "Call" task. The task is added to the task list and also appears in the notifications on the toolbar in the team member's account.

![CRM → Tasks list with a task for Olivia Bennett linked to deal #702 in the Proposal Sent stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8a752c3c8679dae1b86edd05cc0a6168690c5b49c388f40d9bc5668fdf20a487.png)

## Create a Deal When a Form Is Submitted

Go to the "Websites" section. Open a website you created earlier or create a new one. To learn how to create a website, read "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
Then, on the "Pages" tab, select one of your pages and click the page name or the "Edit" button to open it.

![Website Pages tab: the website name, its link under the name, and the list of pages with their links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/af842475a0a45bedf30588fe809b9dce82447f1b428d669d274c05a413de8421.png)
Click the page name to open the page in the editor.

On the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to add a form with the fields you need. For example: "Add a short sign-up form below the hero: First name and Email fields and a button labeled "Reserve my seat"". Check the form in the preview, then click "Publish". To learn more, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

![Page editor: a request to add a sign-up form that redirects to a thank-you page, the AI Assistant reply, and the form with First Name, Email Address and Reserve my seat in the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/904e55f76a882cb891d5a9fdc4e9d26c89e210e29b65fee68732439c208653ac.png)
The assistant adds the form to the page draft.

Next, open the "Automation" tab. Select the "Form Submitted" event and drag it onto the canvas.

![Form Automation tab of Northstar Executive Program Intake with Form Completed connected to Send Email and Deals: Create or Update Deal.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/207a29e5dca384048f1b66fac9ffdee71e9b240f6b6ab9b22a7dc18e997e2bef.png)

Next, open the "Actions" tab. Select the "Deals: Create or Update Deal" action and drag it onto the canvas. Connect the event and the action.
The action needs to be configured. Click the "Settings" button, then "Configure Step".

![Form Completed connected to Deals: Create or Update Deal set to the Fall Enrollment pipeline, stage New Inquiries.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0229adac4f779369dec7c966669aa73d38c296ebca56f406c17e36058c39c36f.png)

In the "Step Settings" window, fill in the fields:

- Step Name. Enter a name for the step. You can name steps in an automation however you like.
- Pipeline. Select the pipeline.
- Pipeline Stage. Select the stage where the deal is added after the contact submits the form.
- Deal Amount. Enter the deal amount, or select "Automatic". With "Automatic", the amount is taken from the order added to this deal. If the automation has no order, the amount is 0.
- Contact. Choose the contact shown on the deal card. You can take it from the automation (the data entered in the form) or select a contact manually.
- Assign To. Choose who owns the deal. You can pick one admin or rotate deals among several team members. In that case, deals are assigned to the selected team members in turn. You can also assign the contact's owner by entering the owner's job title.
- Tags to Add. Add tags to the deal. Click "Manage Tags" to find or create tags.
- Select the "Add the order from the automation (if any)" checkbox to add the order from the automation to the deal.

Click "Save".

![Deals: Create or Update Deal settings: pipeline Fall Enrollment, stage New Inquiries, automatic amount, contact from the automation, assigned to Alex Morgan, tags, and Add the order from the automation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/316d942c1f79adfc9019b0ee105cbf8efbb17622077336e88578b632042c08b0.png)

To activate the automation, set the switch to "Active".

![Form automation where Form Completed creates a deal in Northstar Academy · Fall Enrollment at the New Inquiries stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0229adac4f779369dec7c966669aa73d38c296ebca56f406c17e36058c39c36f.png)

Now, when a visitor submits the form on the page, a deal with that visitor's contact is added to the selected stage of the "Request" pipeline.
Then the owner gets a task to work on that deal. The automation that creates a task for a team member is described in step 1 of this article.

## Create a Deal When an Order Is Created

Go to Sales → Products & Services. Create a new product or select an existing one. To learn how to create a product, read "[Products & Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".

![Products &amp; Services list with Add Product and the Leadership Certificate — Core Course product.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/41dfd42a72d23330803b45d397115c607c636f50952b8a45f6ed7ac2b713da06.png)

Next, go to the "Automation" tab. Select the "Product Order Created" event and drag it onto the canvas.

![Product Automation tab with the Events palette and Product Order Created on the canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a3a2c322773cae0bf5bba34d92f2318349527a414e8deab3034e2c8478df935f.png)

Next, open the "Actions" tab. Select the "Deals: Create or Update Deal" action and drag it onto the canvas. Connect the event and the action.
The action needs to be configured. Click the "Settings" button, then "Configure Step".

![Product automation where Product Order Created leads to Deals: Create or Update Deal in Fall Enrollment at Enrollment Pending.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a3a2c322773cae0bf5bba34d92f2318349527a414e8deab3034e2c8478df935f.png)

In the "Step Settings" window, fill in the fields:

- Step Name. Enter a name for the step. You can name steps in an automation however you like.
- Pipeline. Select the pipeline.
- Pipeline Stage. Select the stage where the deal is added after the order is created.
- Deal Amount. Enter the deal amount, or select "Automatic". With "Automatic", the amount is taken from the order added to this deal.
- Contact. Choose the contact shown on the deal card. You can take it from the automation or select a contact manually.
- Assign To. Choose who owns the deal. You can pick one admin or rotate deals among several team members. In that case, deals are assigned to the selected team members in turn. You can also assign the contact's owner by entering the owner's job title.
- Tags to Add. Add tags to the deal. Click "Manage Tags" to find or create tags.
- Select the "Add the order from the automation (if any)" checkbox to add the order from the automation to the deal.

Click "Save".

![Deals: Create or Update Deal settings with Add the order from the automation (if any) checked at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/316d942c1f79adfc9019b0ee105cbf8efbb17622077336e88578b632042c08b0.png)

This way, when someone creates an order with this product, a deal is added automatically to the selected pipeline stage. Then the owners get tasks to work on the deal.

In the pipeline, you can track everything your team does with this order, up to payment. If you selected "Automatically mark the deal as won once all its orders are paid" when you created the pipeline, the deal moves to the won stage automatically after all its orders are paid.

Make sure this product automation is **Active** before using the order-created event. Creating a deal and assigning a task are separate actions: the task requires the pipeline automation from the first section.

## Create a Deal When a Webinar Ends

Go to the "Webinars" section. Create a new webinar or select an existing one. To learn how to create a webinar, read "[Hosting a Webinar](https://docs.axl.tech/hosting-a-webinar)".

![Webinars list filtered to Northstar Academy · Leadership Masterclass with edit, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/61153d9da1003225f6d95eaf36c8e8b81bd068a78702d3d140f25e094b68968f.png)

Next, open the "Automation" tab. Select the "Webinar Ended" event and drag it onto the canvas.

![Webinar Automation tab with the Events palette and Webinar Ended on the canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65594b03adec77a31e8ae72130a46bf3e53b77b9f9f73bea25f232e8fb997741.png)

Next, select "Condition" and drag it onto the canvas. Connect the event and the condition. The condition needs to be configured. Click the "Settings" button, then "Configure Step".

![Webinar Ended connected to two Condition steps on the webinar automation canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65594b03adec77a31e8ae72130a46bf3e53b77b9f9f73bea25f232e8fb997741.png)

The "Condition" step lets you select contacts by certain criteria. From the available conditions, select "Webinar Attendance (Duration)". This condition picks out the contacts who attended the selected webinar for a certain amount of time.

![Condition step settings with the filter list showing Webinar Attendance, Webinar Attendance (Duration) and Webinar Registration.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/07334d44e54bc294350f7758852d9ce1a0377cf725c1af1df7c994799e13b4d6.png)

In the duration field, enter "More than 40 minutes". The condition then picks out the attendees who stayed for more than 40 minutes and are likely interested in your product.

![Condition: Webinar Attendance (Duration) for Northstar Academy · Delegation Workshop more than 40 minutes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e8152770c8910aad1d1c4298ff683ece45eb934436f996e883f7202ab96c66c3.png)

Next, open the "Actions" tab. Select the "Deals: Create or Update Deal" action and drag it onto the canvas. Connect the condition and the action.
The action needs to be configured too. Click the "Settings" button, then "Configure Step".

![Attendance over 40 minutes leads to Deals: Create or Update Deal at the Consultation Booked stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65594b03adec77a31e8ae72130a46bf3e53b77b9f9f73bea25f232e8fb997741.png)

In the "Step Settings" window, fill in the fields:

- Step Name. Enter a name for the step. You can name steps in an automation however you like.
- Pipeline. Select the pipeline.
- Pipeline Stage. Select the stage where the deal is added after the webinar ends.
- Deal Amount. Enter the deal amount, or select "Automatic". With "Automatic", the amount is taken from the order added to this deal. If the automation has no order, the amount is 0.
- Contact. Choose the contact shown on the deal card. You can take it from the automation or select a contact manually.
- Assign To. Choose who owns the deal. You can pick one admin or rotate deals among several team members. In that case, deals are assigned to the selected team members in turn. You can also assign the contact's owner by entering the owner's job title.
- Tags to Add. Add tags to the deal. Click "Manage Tags" to find or create tags.
- Select the "Add the order from the automation (if any)" checkbox to add the order from the automation to the deal.

Click "Save".

![Deals: Create or Update Deal settings with the Fall Enrollment pipeline and the Consultation Booked stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7d7f21d0b54c082d0b47642ace0b4e28bec60de015e13295f027afdcfb068da7.png)

In this automation, everyone who attended the webinar for more than 40 minutes is added to the "Interest" pipeline stage.

You can also add another "Condition" that picks out attendees who stayed for "Less than 40 minutes" and "More than 5 minutes". These attendees are likely to have some interest in your product.

![Condition combining attendance under 40 minutes AND over 5 minutes for the Delegation Workshop.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bb72e0181d47f124366a75c341541e5db540c9069193460abf6f6a5b8f532972.png)

Add an action for this "Condition" that adds these attendees to the "Possible Interest" pipeline stage.

![Deals: Create or Update Deal settings with the Fall Enrollment pipeline and the New Inquiries stage.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d394309768e3f106ff8fc45b828b410a605bd3789b805a41b89feec03a6de83a.png)

So when the webinar ends, all attendees go through the Conditions you set up, and a deal is created for each of them. The deals are sorted into the "Interest" and "Possible Interest" stages. Then the owners get tasks to work on these deals.

The two conditions shown here do not include attendees at exactly 5 or 40 minutes. Decide how those boundary cases should be handled and adjust the conditions or add a separate branch before activating the automation.

![Webinar automation branching on attendance: over 40 minutes to Consultation Booked, 5–40 minutes to New Inquiries.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/65594b03adec77a31e8ae72130a46bf3e53b77b9f9f73bea25f232e8fb997741.png)

---

# Meetings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/meetings

> Set up booking pages for consultations and calls, manage availability, and track bookings and results with Meetings.

The Meetings section helps you organize appointments for consultations, calls, and in-person meetings right inside AXL. It's fully integrated with the platform, so it works seamlessly with your automations and CRM.

Click a section below to jump straight to it:

How to Create a Meeting

Meeting Settings

How Booking Works

Bookings

Analytics

## How to Create a Meeting

Go to the Meetings section and click "Create Meeting".

![Meetings section opened from the sidebar with the My Calendar, Meetings, Bookings and Analytics tabs and the Create Meeting button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2fddbf59ce1ca3b454d8e62084730f7c9c0d640d6165e4bed6692d05f5515edd.png)

You can set the following options for a new meeting:

1. Meeting Name. Enter the name everyone will see.
2. Internal Name. Enter a name that only your team can see. Guests never see it.
3. Page Link. Select a domain, then enter the page path after /m/. Together they form the link to your booking page.
4. Duration. Offer one or several durations (15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, or 180 minutes) so guests can pick the one they prefer.
5. Meeting Format. Choose how the meeting will take place: Phone Call, Google Meet, Zoom Meeting, or Offline Meeting.
6. Meeting Type. Choose One Host, or Group to rotate bookings among several hosts (round robin).
7. Hosts. Select the team member who hosts the meeting. For a Group meeting, select several hosts. The system assigns bookings to them one by one in priority order and skips any host who is busy at that time.

After choosing the meeting details and hosts, click **Save and Continue** to open the meeting settings. Use **Cancel** if you do not want to create it.

![Create New Meeting panel: name Program Advisor Call, internal name, page link on northstar.example.com, 30 minutes, Phone Call, One Host, host Alex Morgan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3d1dae0afeabe766ed3169574d8b109eae3ab14ea79306c8a11bdca1b6fe9a96.png)

## Meeting Settings

Go to the Meetings section and click a meeting's title to open it.

![Meetings tab listing Northstar · advisor intro with its date, host Alex Morgan, 30 minutes, One-on-One type, views, bookings and conversion.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/45645ba77c21bb7ba4dbbfe4ac14152826dfb2fdc389de6f23e96e386bb9559e.png)

The top of the meeting page has the following controls:

1. Published. Controls whether guests can see the meeting. A published meeting can be opened from its booking page link.
2. Share. Opens a window where you can copy a direct link to the meeting or an HTML embed code for third-party websites. You can also add the meeting to a page on your AXL website, a widget, or a course item: open the website or course editor and add the "Meeting" element. Share is available only after you publish the meeting.
3. Duplicate. Creates an exact copy of the meeting, including its automation.

![Meeting header with the Published switch, Share and Duplicate.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b771b10899606be60331d1bf59bc35455015d2e56e4fee36c69c55cf1b41f497.png)

The meeting page has these tabs:

- General
- Schedule
- Form
- Bookings
- Automation

![Meeting General tab with the image picker and the booking-page preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c743c4108d14be63fcc36b05c5a399aa71c7333b83c3354fd4357cea62f5f78b.png)

Here's what each tab does.

On the "General" tab, you can set the following options:

1. Image. Click the thumbnail to upload an image from your device. It's used for the meeting's visual design.
2. Internal Name. Visible only to you and your team. Hidden from guests.
3. Page Link. Shows the URL of the meeting page. You can change it if needed.
4. Meeting Title. The meeting name guests see. Edit it to better fit the event.
5. Subtitle. Add a subtitle to clarify the meeting topic. This field is optional.
6. Description. Enter a detailed description to help guests understand the purpose and content of the meeting.
7. Maximum Guests. Set how many guests can book the same time slot. Once a slot is full, it's no longer available.
8. Duration. Select one or more meeting durations, from 15 minutes to 3 hours.
9. Meeting Format. Choose how the meeting will take place: Google Meet, Zoom, Phone Call, or Offline.
10. Meeting Type. Switch between One-on-One (a single host) and Round Robin (several hosts).
11. Hosts. Change the meeting host.
12. Host Tasks. There's no setting for this. Whenever a booking is linked to a contact, the platform automatically creates a task for the host and notifies them.
13. Preview. A live preview of the booking page appears to the right of the settings, so you can check your changes before guests see them. On a phone, tap the ... menu at the top of the page and choose Preview.
14. Open Booking Page. Click this link in the preview banner to open the live booking page and see what guests see when they sign up. It appears once the meeting is published.

![Meeting General tab: image, internal name, page link, meeting title, subtitle and description beside the booking-page preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2b0f8a669aba2be8592742f0475b592b47a1fdfe29e94ba9b8a2ccd19857f2df.png)

On the "Schedule" tab, you can set the following options:

1. **Available Days and Hours.** Click Edit, then select the days of the week and the time ranges when guests can book.
2. **Time Zone.** Set the time zone used to show available slots and schedule meetings.
3. **Booking Window.** Choose how far ahead guests can book: the next set number of days (1 to 365), or a Time Range with a start date and an end date.
4. Buffer Between Meetings. Adds a break between meetings so they aren't booked back to back.
5. Minimum Notice. Set the minimum time guests must book in advance. Slots that start sooner than this aren't available.
6. Start Time Increments. How often meetings can start. For example, if you're available from 10:00 to 12:00 for 60-minute meetings in 15-minute increments, guests can book at 10:00, 10:15, 10:30, and so on.
7. Preview. A live preview of the booking page appears to the right of the settings, so you can check your changes before guests see them. On a phone, tap the ... menu at the top of the page and choose Preview.
8. Open Booking Page. Click this link in the preview banner to open the live booking page and see what guests see when they sign up. It appears once the meeting is published.

Set the availability time zone before entering your weekly hours. Guests see available times in their own time zone, so check the preview and the public booking page after changing the schedule.

![Meeting Schedule tab: weekly hours Monday to Friday 09:00–18:00, time zone, date exceptions, booking window, buffer, minimum notice and start-time increments, with a time-slot preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/30b39d96dc9df66323eca3f1936db7b31c951464612ef427c2dcd7e8cbcef40e.png)

On the "Form" tab, you can set the following options:

1. **Field Settings.** Customize the field labels, placeholders, and contact attributes as needed.
2. Ask guests to accept the terms. Turn this on to require guests to agree to your terms before they book a meeting.
3. Terms. The rules and requirements text guests agree to when they book (for example, your Privacy Policy or Terms of Service).
4. Confirmation Page Text. Write a custom message that guests see after they book a meeting.
5. Preview. A live preview of the booking page appears to the right of the settings, so you can check your changes before guests see them. On a phone, tap the ... menu at the top of the page and choose Preview.
6. Open Booking Page. Click this link in the preview banner to open the live booking page and see what guests see when they sign up. It appears once the meeting is published.

![Meeting Form tab: email, first name and phone fields, Add Field, terms option and confirmation text beside the booking-form preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4be776837c47d1615efa6178817ebd1dc38769f9eec200ccd96405bd88a816dc.png)

The "Bookings" tab shows every booking made for this meeting:

- You can cancel or reschedule a meeting
- You can mark a meeting as held, or mark the guest as a no-show

![Bookings tab of the Program Advisor Call meeting with three confirmed bookings and the action buttons in each row.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/39b06f20fe749a1e264cb729119471808baf23d02f6233ffaca436d914314f1e.png)

Filter the list by date range or status, or search for a contact in the CRM.

![Bookings tab filters: Search, Date Range, Add Filter, Only Mine and Upcoming.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/39b06f20fe749a1e264cb729119471808baf23d02f6233ffaca436d914314f1e.png)

The Bookings tab shows the following details:

1. Date / Time. The exact date and time of the meeting.
2. Guest. Details of the person who booked the meeting.
3. Admin. The team member hosting the meeting.
4. Duration. The time set aside for the meeting.
5. Format. How the meeting takes place (Google Meet, Zoom, Phone Call, or In Person).
6. External Link. Links to online meetings appear here.
7. Status. The booking status: Confirmed, Completed, No-Show, or Canceled.
8. Date Created. The date and time the booking was created.
9. Booking Details. Opens a full overview, including date and time, status, name, email, phone number, meeting title, admin, format, time zone, and form responses.
10. Actions. Quick buttons to mark a meeting as held or the guest as a no-show, reschedule the meeting, or cancel it.

![Bookings table columns: Date / Time, Guest, Admin, Duration, Format, External Link, Status, Date Created, Booking Details and Actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/39b06f20fe749a1e264cb729119471808baf23d02f6233ffaca436d914314f1e.png)

In the "Automation" tab, you can build a chain of steps that runs when a certain event happens. These triggers are available:

- Meetings: Meeting Created. Runs your steps as soon as a new booking is made.
- Meetings: Meeting Canceled. Runs your steps when a meeting is canceled. You can include the cancellation reason.
- Meetings: Meeting Reminder. Runs a set number of minutes before the meeting starts.

![Meeting Automation tab: Meeting Reminder and Meeting Created each connected to Send Message (Chat/Email).](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/330608c713224a6dd1e42289cd993be1140f87681e7472c2b03086097bfb76db.png)
This is an intermediate setup. The Meeting Created trigger is connected, but the message step still shows Configuration required and needs to be configured.

In the automation editor, all meeting data (link, time, form answers) is grouped under a "Meeting" variable group. To add a variable to an email, message, or webhook, connect the meeting trigger to a Send Email, Send Message (Chat/Email), or Webhook step. In the step settings, click "Add Variables" (in a Webhook step, click "Show Variables").

![Meeting Created message settings with meeting and booking variables in the chat-message body and the Add Template Variables link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2c433c9ab746a6d37491a2897fe49dbbe53a018615d072b11cba31d62e396003.png)

A list of all variables appears, including the variables from the "Meeting" group:

![Add Variables panel filtered to the Meeting and MeetingBooking variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7228ce6f65e391fa9174a3c9bf1a5878a7377ba135351e7ea36e8be696b9a222.png)

## How Booking Works

Booking is automated for both the guest and your team.

- For the guest: the guest opens your public meeting page from the link and chooses an available slot (times are shown in the guest's time zone). They fill out the booking form and receive a confirmation with a link to the meeting.

- For your account: the booking appears in your admin panel right away. The platform creates a Google Meet or Zoom link in the host's connected account or, if the host has none, in the meeting's shared account. It also creates a task for the host. The meeting's automation sends emails and reminders.

![Public booking page for Program Advisor Call: meeting details, an October calendar with Friday, October 23 selected, its time slots and the visitor time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b8c64b777f8237be3b9e6acf97e231b8f7b25b95a8af2612c7b694040d7b70ce.png)

## Bookings

To work with the list of all bookings, open the Meetings section and go to the "Bookings" tab.

The "Bookings" tab shows all booked meetings:

- You can cancel or reschedule a meeting
- You can mark a meeting as held, or mark the guest as a no-show

![All bookings table with the Actions column: mark as held, mark as no-show, reschedule and cancel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3c0aca6916123927e44e92efab23d663fe6a089e55768af97270eb7783c08d5a.png)

You can filter bookings by date range, meeting, host, and status, or search for a contact in the CRM.

![Meetings, Bookings tab filters: Search, Meeting, Host, Date Range, Add Filter, Only Mine and Upcoming.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3d50eb733dc7a35806ec2d391d05c7725261d6bb9bb929ad6129640d92536608.png)

The Bookings tab shows the following details:

1. Date / Time. The exact date and time of the meeting.
2. Meeting. The title of the booked meeting.
3. Guest. Details of the person who booked the meeting.
4. Admin. The team member hosting the meeting.
5. Duration. The time set aside for the meeting.
6. Format. How the meeting takes place (Google Meet, Zoom, Phone Call, or In Person).
7. External Link. Links to online meetings appear here.
8. Status. The booking status: Confirmed, Completed, No-Show, or Canceled.
9. Date Created. The date and time the booking was created.
10. Booking Details. Opens a full overview, including date and time, status, name, email, phone number, meeting title, admin, format, time zone, and form responses.
11. Actions. Quick buttons to mark a meeting as held or the guest as a no-show, reschedule the meeting, or cancel it.

![All bookings table with Date / Time, Meeting, Guest, Admin, Duration, Format, External Link, Status, Date Created, Booking Details and Actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3c0aca6916123927e44e92efab23d663fe6a089e55768af97270eb7783c08d5a.png)

## Analytics

The "Analytics" tab shows how well your meetings and bookings perform. You can track key metrics for a period you choose and filter the data by meeting and UTM tags.

To view statistics, open the Meetings section and go to the "Analytics" tab.

![Meetings Analytics tab with the Meeting and Date filters, Add Filter, and the Booking Page Views, Bookings, Conversion Rate and Average Duration cards.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f9631addec1f99d0130654bc7d9f6cfc680a8c1eb2f45501326c1980fb11bd72.png)

You can apply the following filters:

- Meeting. Select a specific meeting to analyze.
- Date. Set the time period for the report (for example, April 20, 2026 to May 20, 2026).
- UTM. Filter by UTM tags to evaluate traffic sources.

![Meetings Analytics filters: Meeting, Date and Add Filter for UTM tags.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ef97c5a4525634d1b22df275cb174ad5f47f9cd08e36738b5d2fafb16e7c1680.png)

---

# Community

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/community

> Set up a community in your Membership Portal: spaces, feed, members, moderation, automations, badges, and access.

Community is a place for conversation, content, and interaction between your members, built right into AXL.

Its main purpose is to manage how members interact. With a community, you can host discussions, organize content by topic, control who can see and do what, automate actions, and keep members active.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Create a Space or Section

Community Feed

Settings

Members

Moderation

Automation

Badges

Access and Permissions

Publishing Content

Comments and Communication

## Create a Space or Section

A community is made up of spaces. A space is a dedicated area for content and conversation between members. You can group spaces into sections, which make navigation easier and keep related spaces together. There is no limit on the number of spaces or sections. Private spaces show a lock icon. When someone tries to enter a private space, they can be sent to a page where they can buy access.

Go to "Community" and enable it.

![Community page in admin with the Enabled switch in the upper-right corner and the Feed &amp; Spaces, Settings, Members, Moderation, Automation and Community Badges tabs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c45db35dc392c09c74e0a142109dbbed810b9302da491905c2d8b7cbef8b8a98.png)

Open the "Feed & Spaces" tab. Click "Add Space/Section".

![Feed &amp; Spaces tab: the Leadership Circle section with the Questions &amp; Answers and Announcements spaces, and the Add Space/Section button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c45db35dc392c09c74e0a142109dbbed810b9302da491905c2d8b7cbef8b8a98.png)

To create a section, set Type to "Section", enter a title, optionally choose an emoji, and click "Create".

![Complete Create Item drawer with Section selected and Leadership Learning Circle entered, including Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b1c7a219b987a6065423075098ee4aa2a616a9bebc97f12adf44e5d02bd14a4b.png)
Choose Section and enter its title. The example is an unsaved Leadership Learning Circle section.

To create a space, set Type to "Space" and fill in the following fields:

1. Emoji. Choose an emoji for the space, or leave the field blank.
2. Title. Enter a name for your space.
3. Section. Select the section the space belongs to.
4. URL. Enter the URL segment for the space in the field on the right. Once you enter it, the full page URL appears.
5. Access Settings. Choose who has each of the following permissions. For each one, select Everyone or By Filter:

- Who Can View: lets people enter the space.

- Who Can Like: lets people like posts and comments.

- Who Can Comment: lets people write comments.

- Who Can Post: lets people create posts.

![Create Item General settings for the Leadership Practice space, with name, section and URL.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1055c2771c66cd53eb5e19c314fd5ff970d46aaa89c1e5d29aa6db1fb95c983a.png)
The General section of a new Leadership Practice space. Access and payment controls are shown separately below.

Payment Settings:

- Show the space even to people without access: people without access still see the space in the list, but it appears as a closed space with a lock icon.
- Show a link to the payment page: adds a link where people can buy access to a closed space. Enter the link in the "Payment URL" field. Inside the space, people see a "Get Access" button that takes them to the payment page.

Click **Create** to save the new space. It then appears in **Feed & Spaces**. When editing an existing space, click **Save**. Applying a permissions filter updates the form; finish by saving the space itself.

![Create Item window for a space: Emoji, Title Questions &amp; Answers, Section Leadership Circle, URL, Who Can View, Like, Comment and Post, and Payment Settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/eac82cc6d81837d0f2f257b6a1cafc3f1584472dd2697707205bb88110931c5b.png)

## Community Feed

The Community Feed is a stream of posts from across the community. It brings together posts from the spaces a member can access, including text, images, audio, and video. Members can browse posts, comment, and like. The feed gives everyone one place to see new posts and discussions.

You can sort the feed three ways:

- Latest. Posts appear in the order they were created, newest first.
- Most Liked. Posts with the most likes appear first.
- Most Commented. Posts with the most comments appear first.

![Admin community feed with the sort menu open: Latest, Most Liked and Most Commented.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e050c0296f5bb1db53b5e1f95bf5bdb52ccc0e51536bbaa3a8c5064e590077e2.png)

## Settings

Go to "Community" and open the "Settings" tab.

Settings includes the following fields:

1. Terms and Conditions. Use the "Welcome Pop-Up Text" field to customize the text of the pop-up that appears when someone enters the community.
  - Join Button Text. Set the text of the button in the welcome pop-up.
  - Preview Pop-Up. Click to see how the user agreement pop-up looks.
2. Feed. Use "Post Sort Order" to set the default sorting for posts in the feed: by date created, like count, or comment count. Sorting by date shows the most recent posts, sorting by likes shows the most popular posts, and sorting by comments highlights the most discussed topics.
3. Widgets. Turn the sidebar widgets (popular posts and calendar) on or off with "Show popular posts widget" and "Show calendar widget". For the popular posts widget, you can also sort its posts by date created, like count, or comment count.
4. Preview. See exactly how the feed will look to members in their Membership Portal.

After changing these settings, click **Save Changes** in the bar at the bottom. The feed preview and **Preview Pop-Up** let you check the appearance; opening a preview does not save your changes.

![Current Community Settings with a welcome text, Join the Learning Circle button text, Preview Pop Up, and Feed Post Sort Order.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/020b44b6036c8dff1cb96f2119bb447efd6dc1b94c5ac71abe584dfa11223d46.png)
Current welcome-pop-up and feed-order settings. This example was reset without saving.

![Complete Community settings Reset and Save Changes controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/94e8edfde10e1d5a387ce1c288c21bb3f4ac04785c2f5d57bb2eff1bdc9e0f0b.png)
Use Save Changes to persist the settings, or Reset to discard edits.

![Community Settings tab: Welcome Pop-Up Text, Join Button Text, Preview Pop-Up, Post Sort Order, popular posts and calendar widgets, and the live preview on the right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/83df80bffc7563e3ae75a4155df8905be5400c88e81c424c90541a8d01576255.png)

## Members

Go to "Community" and open the "Members" tab.

![Community Members tab with Search, Add Filter and the Name, Role, Badges, Last Activity and Restrictions columns for Olivia Bennett and Alex Morgan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e58e68d65da4d0d10e2b972529108afa51cb064fbd8be0a0ae0f843f355713fb.png)

Next, click "Edit".

![Community Members list with the Edit button in Olivia Bennett's row.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e58e68d65da4d0d10e2b972529108afa51cb064fbd8be0a0ae0f843f355713fb.png)

The window that opens has these fields:

1. Full Name. The member's full name.
2. Contact/Admin. Shows whether the member is a regular contact or an admin.
3. Role. The member's role in the community, such as user or moderator.
4. Badges. View, assign, or remove the member's badges.
5. Date Created. The date and time of the member's first login to the community.
6. Last Activity. The date and time of the member's most recent activity in the community.
7. Restrictions. Restrict specific actions for the member, such as liking, commenting, or posting.

Click **Save** to apply your changes to this member, or **Cancel** to leave without saving them.

![Edit Member window for Olivia Bennett: Full Name, Contact, Role User or Moderator, Badges, Date Created, Last Activity and Restrictions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/29fe18eb817b50f4d7f96993d4eaf3ac57c5ad5bb4d53febc7e5f757d038c4c0.png)

## Moderation

Communities have a built-in moderation system. You can handle reports on posts and comments, review problem content, and decide what to do without leaving the platform. Content goes to moderation when a member reports it and gives a reason.

![Membership Portal community feed with a post menu open: View and Report.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0ac38f61d1bb9633b73ed07a1821e3054b9a72bbc8b2718f52e8c55cb8b297ef.png)

![Report window in the Membership Portal with the required Reason for Reporting field and the Cancel and Submit buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5db0488dda4eef574ea4dd51862d6fa638fc819348247ac0c6059222fe77a2cf.png)

The reported post then appears on the "Moderation" tab, where you can hide the post or ignore the report and keep the post visible.

Review the reported content and the reason before choosing an action. Hiding the content changes what members can see; ignoring the report keeps the content visible.

![Historical Community interface reference: Community Moderation tab with a reported post and Hide post or Ignore and keep actions.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/6sgXGix5fUCxTKtT6uy3cw.png)
Historical interface reference. This illustration has not been refreshed to the current interface.

## Automation

A community automation runs steps when a member joins the community or earns a badge, for example to send a welcome message or add a tag.

These triggers are available in a community automation:

- Community: Member Joined. Starts the automation after a member enters the community.
- Community: Badge Earned. Starts the automation after a member earns a badge. You can set the trigger to fire for any badge or for one specific badge. If you pick a specific badge, you can duplicate the trigger for other individual badges.

![Community Automation tab: Active switch, the Events filter with Community: Badge Earned and Community: Member Joined, and a Badge Earned event for the First Like badge on the canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4e9e094005f4126d41d12e6b09d06fe6cb25e87e7f988eaedbf242942bdd97b3.png)

To learn more about creating automations, see the article "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)".

## Badges

Badges motivate members and reward active participation in the community.
Badges are awarded automatically when the conditions you set are met. Conditions are based on member activity, such as publishing posts, receiving likes, and joining discussions.

To create a badge, go to "Community" and open the "Community Badges" tab.

![Community Badges tab with the First Like badge, its description and the Create Badge button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9ea49560aa843935061376f3f3b3fdaa9c611cf6f338bba67b77d598985a7eb6.png)

Fill in the following fields:

1. Badge Name. Enter a title for the badge.
2. Description. Write a short description of what the badge stands for.
3. Badge Type. Choose an emoji or upload your own image for the badge icon.
4. Triggers:

- Post: Likes Received. A member's post must reach a set number of likes.
- Post: Comments Received. A member's post must reach a set number of comments.
- Comment: Likes Received. A member's comment must reach a set number of likes.
- Comment: Replies Received. A member's comment must get a set number of replies.
- Activity: Likes Given. The total number of likes a member must give to other posts or comments.
- Activity: Comments Posted. The total number of comments a member must write on various posts.
Click **Create** to save the badge and its trigger rules. To change a badge later, open it from the list, make your changes, and click **Save**. Creating the badge defines the reward; members receive it when its conditions are met.

![Complete Create Badge form for Thoughtful Contributor with medal emoji and Activity Comments Posted trigger set to five, including Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/362c1f22e1c87ab3f638a644b05b2cdc17abbc9dda45246cc8134f0c042ba452.png)
An unsaved Thoughtful Contributor badge example, earned after five comments. Choose Create when the badge name, appearance and trigger rules are ready.

## Access and Permissions

You can configure access separately for each space using filters.

You can grant access based on these conditions:

- The member belongs to a specific group.
- The member has been given access explicitly.

Permissions inside a space are set separately and control exactly what a member can do.

Choose the viewing audience first, then review **Who Can Like**, **Who Can Comment**, and **Who Can Post** separately. A payment-page link gives people a way to buy access; it does not itself replace the space's access filter.

![Complete View Access Filter with In Group condition, Yes, Any group, Add OR, Add AND, Cancel and Apply Filter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c711ab6e8ecee3685291bc2bc82dbe115ba7866f29cf899f8405a28541382abd.png)
An In Group condition can match any group or a selected group. Apply Filter returns the condition to the space form; save the space itself to persist it.

You can control these permissions:

- Viewing content
- Leaving likes
- Leaving comments
- Publishing posts

![Complete space Access Settings and Payment Settings with view, like, comment and post permissions, payment link, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c5e9b3b09010543c3f0aeca9ca50b1947774a0e9f3b173e95751991db53c60ef.png)
Choose each permission separately. The example also shows the payment-page link controls; it was canceled without creating a space.

## Publishing Content

Community spaces support several content types, so they work for many kinds of communication.

![Questions &amp; Answers space in the Membership Portal with the Write a Post button and Olivia Bennett's question.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cbc22aef1dcb5f1b9642a636814ab4d725b6c085f0b2dc7f446951192d4c639e.png)

The supported formats include:

- Text
- Audio messages
- Images
- Video

Use spaces for quick updates or for in-depth educational and informational material.

![New Post window in the Membership Portal: Title, Body and the attachment, video, audio and Markdown buttons next to Publish.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e062eac6bd3e19bd64e4b3b5e6d71cad416ddd8eb6228c28d41c449fa5164d10.png)

## Comments and Communication

Communities have a full commenting system that encourages interaction.

Members can leave likes, reply to comments, and join threaded discussions. Threads keep conversations organized, so each topic is discussed right under the post it belongs to.

![Welcome post opened in the Membership Portal with Olivia Bennett's comment and Alex Morgan's threaded reply.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/494ebd9eedd9d17c715ac36452f03c0ac1e31e3320c90f0d6ce67fd706442272.png)

---

# Chat

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/chat-room

> Use the Chat inbox to message customers across all connected channels and manage conversations.

Chat is your team's inbox for conversations with customers and with each other. Each person has one row in the list and one conversation history, even if they write to you through several channels: the internal chat, website chat, a messenger or SMS. For connecting channels, see "[Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels)".

Open **Communications → Chat**. The same inbox also opens as a floating window from the chat icon in the top bar; see "[Conversations](https://docs.axl.tech/dialogues)".

![Full-size Chat with the conversation list, an open conversation with Olivia Bennett, and her profile panel with Contact, Follow-Up and Channels.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dbb84434f9bc1b1ca47718a47c2196e4a01865599fe8264f2f917ca04ae32cdb.png)

Conversation List

Reading and Replying

Conversation Menu

Profile and Follow-Up

Actions for Many Conversations

## Conversation List

The list on the left shows the latest message of each person, its time and the number of unread messages. An exclamation mark marks a high or urgent priority, and a clock icon means the reply deadline has passed.

- **My**: conversations you take part in.
- **New**: support requests nobody has opened yet.
- **Open**: support conversations in progress.
- **Closed**: finished support conversations.
- **AI assistant**: support conversations the AI assistant is answering. The tab appears when the AI assistant is connected to the account.

Team members without support access see only the **My** tab.

Above the tabs:

- The search field finds people by name, phone or message text.
- The funnel inside the search field shows only the internal chat or the channels you tick. Click **Clear** to show all channels again.
- **New conversation** (+) opens a search for people. Find the person and click **Write**.
- **Settings** (gear): **Text size** from 100% to 200%, **Hide bot messages**, and the **Microphone** for voice messages. Click **Save** to apply.
- **Actions** (three dots): actions for many conversations at once, described below.

![Chat list header with search, channel filter, New conversation, Settings and Actions, the My, New, Open, Closed and AI assistant tabs, and two conversations.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4d0cb632c68552782e849011e3fad2e5453e7b92a681aebd77bbfbb76ad1822c.png)

![Chat Settings with Text size from 100% to 200%, Hide bot messages, Microphone selector, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1dce050412576e4f4217120e90581b6b3d8f816e6e3877be3a2603d16958d7b8.png)

## Reading and Replying

Select a person to open the conversation in the center. Messages from all of the person's channels appear in one history in time order.

Type the reply at the bottom. Next to the message field you can attach a file, insert a saved template (**Manage templates**), add an emoji or record a voice message. Voice recording needs microphone access in the browser.

If the person writes to you through more than one channel, the channel icons next to the message field show where the reply goes. Click them to choose one or several channels. A channel that cannot receive a message right now is grayed out; the **i** next to it explains why, for example that the messenger's reply window has closed or the contact has unsubscribed.

When the person has several channels, the funnel in the conversation header shows the history of only the channels you tick.

![Message field with attachment, Type a message, templates, emoji and voice-message buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/60e9dcb70851decf3ddb12b3bb8834b3307c38f16f2d88bff5c3cb20a8e7915d.png)

Right-click a message (on a phone, tap it) to see what you can do with it:

- **Reply** quotes the message in your answer. Double-clicking a message does the same.
- **Copy** copies the message text.
- **Edit** is available for your own text messages if the channel allows editing and its time limit has not passed.
- **Delete** is available for messages from you or your account, such as automation and broadcast messages, if the channel supports deletion. Confirm the deletion in the prompt. The message is then shown as **Message deleted**.

![Message menu with Reply, Copy and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/660ef18f438b966617037acc70f0b75fb3a610b324db5393fd3d8f3d921ec99a.png)

## Conversation Menu

The conversation header shows the person's name and status. Click the name to open the person's CRM card; if the person is not linked to a contact, the click shows the profile panel. The **i** button (**Profile**) shows or hides the profile panel on the right.

The three dots in the header open the conversation menu. Its items depend on your role and on the conversation:

- **Open the CRM card**: when the person is linked to a contact.
- **Copy link to chat**: a link another team member can use to open this person in Chat.
- **Join** or **Leave**: take part in the person's support conversations, or stop.
- **Mark as read**: when there are unread messages.
- **Close the conversations**: closes the person's open support conversations. Available with support access.
- **Hide bot messages** or **Show bot messages**.

![Conversation menu with Open the CRM card, Copy link to chat, Leave, Close the conversations and Hide bot messages.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e745a2f4a585cc70c640671106c6e4a781b844de6d68578a41ebf8b8382e71d3.png)

## Profile and Follow-Up

The profile panel on the right has these sections:

- **Contact**: the email, phone and groups of the linked CRM contact. For a messenger user who is not linked yet, the **Linked CRM contact** section has **Link to a contact**; click it, find the contact and click **Save**. A website visitor also gets a **From the website** section with the page and device.
- **Follow-Up**: your team's working data for this person. **Owners** are the team members responsible for the person; an owner takes part in all of the person's support conversations. Set the **Priority** (Low, Normal, High, Urgent) and a **Reply By** date to keep track of deadlines. **Tags** here are chat tags, separate from CRM tags; type a new name to create one. **Notes** are visible only to your team: write the note and click **Add Note**.
- **Channels**: every channel the person has written through, with the time of the last activity or the **Closed** status.

Some roles cannot change the owners. If a change is refused, Chat shows the reason.

![Profile panel of Olivia Bennett with Contact email, Follow-Up fields Owners, Priority, Reply By, Tags and Notes, and the Internal chat channel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/695a5e943295ffc1dc2d34a806ac9ebf5cd288aa4f7f5f3bd561a96c5c1477c5.png)

## Actions for Many Conversations

The **Actions** button (three dots) above the list runs one action on many conversations:

- **My Conversations**: **Mark as Read**, **Leave Conversations** or **Close Conversations** for the conversations you take part in.
- **All Conversations**: the same actions for every conversation in the account. This group appears only with the permission to manage conversations.

Choose the action and click **Confirm**, or **Cancel** to leave the conversations unchanged. Reload the page to see the changes; a large selection is processed in the background and reported in the notifications.

![Actions menu with My Conversations and All Conversations groups, each with Mark as Read, Leave Conversations and Close Conversations.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/db72be85f87a1abeddba9568c870e06fa8178d4bf3fd5a98d51253fa0eff3e08.png)

## Answer and Finish a Request

1. Open **Communications → Chat** and pick the **New** or **Open** tab, or search for the person.
2. Select the person. Check the profile panel: the linked contact, the owners and the notes of your team.
3. Write the reply. If the person has several channels, check where the reply goes.
4. If you need to come back later, set **Reply By** or add a note.
5. When the request is resolved, open the three-dot menu in the conversation header and choose **Close the conversations**.

---

# Chat Channels

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels

> Connect messaging apps to AXL and manage each channel's settings, users, templates, and automations.

Chat channels connect third-party messaging apps to AXL, so you can talk with potential customers without leaving the platform. Your subscribers can message you in channels such as a Facebook page, a Viber chat, or a Telegram chat. You'll see their messages and reply to them from your AXL account.

Go to Communications → Chat Channels and click "Add Channel."

Click a section to jump to its description:

Creating a Chat Channel

Channel Settings

Channel Users

Importing Chat Users

Exporting Chat Users

Channel Templates

Channel Automations

## Creating a Chat Channel

Choose the messaging service your customers use, then complete that service’s connection form.

Go to Communications → Chat Channels and click "Add Channel."

![Chat Channels list with the Add Channel button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/519ef52256e8fb5441093744ad9ad05e0f1cbd750c9fc41ab4756b47c60151a3.png)

A list of available channels opens:

- Telegram
- Viber
- Facebook
- Wazzup24
- WhatsApp
- Instagram
- Line

![Add Channel dialog with Messaging selected and complete Website Chat, WhatsApp, Telegram, Viber, Line and Wazzup24 choices.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c395553366389361a6fb08875f30b38db7246f06ea3d7b6d8d9ab909002bac6b.png)
Use the category tabs to narrow the channel choices. This example shows Messaging.

Select the channel you want to connect and follow the instructions. Step-by-step guides: [Viber](https://docs.axl.tech/channel-viber), [Telegram](https://docs.axl.tech/channel-telegram), [Facebook](https://docs.axl.tech/channel-facebook), and [WhatsApp](https://docs.axl.tech/channel-whatsapp).

Open the channel you created to see its details and edit its settings.

## Channel Settings

On the "Settings" tab, you can change the following. Color, Exclude from broadcasts, and Default Chatbot Automation are in the "Additional Settings" section. Click its heading to expand it.

1. Title. Edit the name of the chat channel.
2. Color. Add or change the color of the messaging app icon.
3. Exclude from broadcasts. Select the checkbox to keep this channel out of broadcasts.
4. Default Chatbot Automation. Select an automation from the list. It runs when someone opens the bot from a direct link (for example, from a search or a link a friend shared) and doesn't start a specific automation.
5. Token (where required by the selected channel). Change the credential issued by the messaging service. To learn how to get a Telegram token, see "[Telegram Channel](https://docs.axl.tech/channel-telegram)."

![Website Chat channel settings with Settings, Users, and Automations tabs and a live widget preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/45f0e2fbaf9d2f6ce51d1e219f886a1aeea86a43249ca87848f9b97cd4db951e.png)

## Channel Users

The **Users** tab lists everyone who has written to this channel:

- **External ID**: the user's ID in the messaging app. The copy icon copies it.
- **Contact**: the linked CRM contact. Click the name to open the contact card.
- **First Name**, **Last Name** and **Username**: as the user filled them in the messaging app.
- **Phone**: shown only if the user shares it in the app's privacy settings.
- **Last Activity**: when the user last wrote or acted in the channel.
- **Subscribed**: whether the user is still subscribed to the channel.

The chat icon at the end of a row opens a conversation with the user; the trash can deletes the user after a confirmation. The search field above the list finds users by name, username or phone.

![Users tab of the Northstar Academy website chat channel with the search field, Import Chat Users, and one user with External ID, contact, name, last activity, Subscribed Yes, and the chat and delete icons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/921b0922789a59e016c85f800f70bf773fbd373fefabb5a5bce39920eb76a930.png)

The conversation opens in the chat window. On the left is the list of conversations with the **My**, **New**, **Open** and **Closed** tabs; on the right, the messages and the reply field, where you can attach a file, add an emoji or record a voice message.

![Chat window with the conversation list on the left and a conversation with Emma Clark on the right: her question, the reply field, and the attach, emoji and microphone buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9cecfbfae88250011cf997e634458a3b2a0e41f40e8fc88756f8f45dd7bf2bfa.png)

The buttons in the conversation header:

- The **i** icon opens the **Profile**: the linked CRM contact, phone, channels, groups and, for website chat, the page the visitor wrote from. There you can link the conversation to another contact.
- The three dots open the conversation menu: **Open the CRM card**, **Copy link to chat**, **Join** or **Leave**, **Mark as read**, **Close the conversations** and **Hide bot messages**.
- The frame icon opens the full chat page; the cross closes the window.

The gear above the conversation list opens **Settings**: **Text size**, **Microphone** access for voice messages, and **Hide bot messages**. More about working with conversations in "[Conversations](https://docs.axl.tech/dialogues)".

## Importing Chat Users

You can add users to a channel from a TXT, CSV or XLSX file up to 25 MB, or paste them as text. Each user needs the **External ID** the messaging app uses, in that app's format:

- Telegram, Facebook and Instagram: a number.
- Viber: 24 characters.
- WhatsApp, Wazzup24 and Line: any ID.

Other channels, such as Website Chat, do not accept imported users: every row fails validation.

1. On the **Users** tab, click **Import Chat Users**.
2. Choose **File** and upload the file, or **Text** and paste the list. **Download Sample File** shows the expected layout.
3. Enter a **Session Name**: it helps you find the imported data later. Click **Next**.

![Import Chat Users on the Data Source step with File and Text, the upload area for files up to 25 MB, Download Sample File and Session Name.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5d62b8909382e631c43391ed53d31ccf709e680da8c0e39e856667e4b3928d73.png)

4. On the **Map Fields** step, check the field chosen for each column. AXL matches the columns automatically; change any that are wrong. **External ID** is required; names, username, email and phone are optional. If the columns are split wrongly, click **change it** to pick another separator, and untick **First row is a header** if your list has no header row. Click **Next**.

![Map Fields step with the External ID, First Name, Last Name and Email columns matched to the fields of the same name, the separator link and First row is a header.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/52649340c7cd96c7ffb0b6cf6a6b3ce626813bef84e962446d485724501d1a88.png)

5. On the **Validation** step, check **Total Rows**, **Rows to Import** and the list of errors by row. **Import despite errors in secondary fields** is on by default: a row is still imported when the error is in a field other than External ID. Click **Back** to fix the mapping, or **Start Import**.

![Validation step with Total Rows 2, Rows to Import 0, four mapped columns and two errors: Invalid value format in column 1, the External ID, because this website chat channel does not accept imported IDs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4cc6ba42d438bdfba0432adf2c39149d419ba467df7ca7aa609b2d548ab9e601.png)

## Exporting Chat Users

You can export the channel's users to an XLSX or CSV file, for example to move them to another account.

1. Tick the users you want to export. The arrow next to the header checkbox selects everyone on the page or everyone matching the search.
2. Click **Bulk Actions** and choose **Export Users**.
3. Choose the file format and the fields: **External ID**, **First Name**, **Last Name**, **Nickname**, **Email** and **Phone**. Click **Export Users**.

![Export Users dialog with the XLSX and CSV formats, six selected fields and Number of Users to Export: 1.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/005d857d76134b91634697f8e69b5ee92b25d2f6d0ffc26f660658c8793fbaf2.png)

The export runs in the background, and a card in the lower-left corner shows its progress. When the file is ready, choose **Download**, **Download and Close** or **Close**; closing a session removes it from the list.

Finished exports are counted under **Export Sessions** at the top of the page while the **Users** tab is open.

![Channel page header with Export Sessions 1 and the details link, next to the Embed on Site button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e0416efdc525869abafeec4cfa59e226648f581cedd28259236e2698bda628e5.png)

Click **details** to see the list of exports. In a row's **Actions** menu, **Download** downloads the file again.

![Exports panel with one chat user export and its Actions menu: Download, Download and Close, and Close.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f262483349b6f998ae8fe2b7209397a98a52375b828cc6a3bd06fc906e3c08b6.png)

## Channel Templates

Open the "Templates" tab. The WhatsApp channel supports message templates.
You can start conversations and send messages using templates. Check the template’s approval status for WhatsApp and test the message separately in every other delivery channel you use.

![WhatsApp Templates tab.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YeO0-tN2gkuh8YPxA35Fcg.png)

Click "Sync" to import your templates into AXL. Create and approve templates in your WhatsApp account first.

![Sync control for approved WhatsApp templates.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/v-RMBM3qNkWwTYvSG2pW7w.png)

On the "Templates" tab, you can see a list of message templates and details about them:

1. Template Name. The name of the message template.
2. Last Updated. The exact date and time the template was last updated.
3. Template. The text of the message template.
4. Status. Shows whether the template is approved in your WhatsApp account.
5. Actions. These buttons are available here:
The send icon. Click it to see the instructions for sending the template.
The edit icon. Click it to make changes to the template.

![WhatsApp template list and status.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AY9zlwuGhk6V4FSUNnL0iQ.png)

Click the send icon to see the instructions for sending the template.

![Template sending instructions.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/h_dXlECkaEm1YgCCEixNpQ.png)

Click the edit icon to edit the template. You can make changes in the window that opens.

![WhatsApp template editing dialog.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vwkiGOMAWk2KrpTl8UzjQQ.png)

## Channel Automations

On the "Automations" tab, you can set up the channel's automations.

A chat channel automation is a sequence of events and actions inside the chat in your account. It reacts to a new message in the chat and performs response actions. To learn how to create one, see "[Chat Channel Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels-scenario)."

Add the events and actions you need to your automation, configure them, and connect the steps together.
When you finish, turn on the activation switch to activate the automation.

## Save and verify channel changes

1. Open the channel from **Communications → Chat Channels**, then use **Settings** to edit its name, connection details, or additional settings.
2. Click **Save** in the footer when you have changes. Reopen the channel to check the saved values.
3. For a new or reconnected channel, send a message from an authorized test user. On **Users**, find that user and click the chat icon; reply and check delivery in the destination messenger.
4. If you use a default chatbot or channel automation, test its trigger separately. A connected channel does not by itself confirm that the automation is configured and active.

**Add Channel** groups available integrations under **All**, **Social Media**, **Messaging**, and **SMS**. The picker also includes **AXL Phone**, **Website Chat**, **SMSC**, **Twilio**, and **RingCentral**. Choose the required channel type before following its provider-specific connection instructions.

For messenger forms, expand **Additional Settings** to find **Color**, **Default Chatbot Automation**, and **Exclude from broadcasts**.

---

# Viber Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-viber

> Connect a Viber chatbot to your AXL account as a chat channel.

Connect an approved Viber business chatbot to AXL to handle its conversations in Communications → Chat. Obtain the bot’s authentication token before opening the AXL channel form.

First, make sure the Viber app is installed on your smartphone. For detailed installation instructions, see the [Viber Help Center](https://help.viber.com/hc/en-us/articles/8845686952861-Set-up-Rakuten-Viber-on-your-phone).

## Get an approved Viber chatbot

Apply for a chatbot through one of [Rakuten Viber’s verified partners](https://www.forbusiness.viber.com/en/messaging-partners/), or contact the Viber team through its [chatbot application instructions](https://help.viber.com/hc/en-us/articles/15247629658525-Bot-commercial-model). In the partner directory, open **Products** and select **Viber Chatbots**; narrow the country filters if needed.

After Viber qualifies the application, complete the required commercial agreement. Bot maintenance and chatbot-initiated messages are billed under Viber’s [Bot commercial model](https://help.viber.com/hc/en-us/articles/15247629658525-Bot-commercial-model). Check the current terms before proceeding.

![Rakuten Viber Messaging Partners directory with the Products filter open and Viber Chatbots selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ab652dc7c3c8ca881d2d54ad37e7deef27c9f49a90dfc837406cd6d9d14ec964.jpg)
Choose **Viber Chatbots** under **Products** in the [official Viber partner directory](https://www.forbusiness.viber.com/en/messaging-partners/). This public page helps you find an onboarding partner; it does not connect a bot to AXL.

Once the bot is created and you have administrator access, open the Viber app and go to **More → Settings → Bots → Edit Info → Your app key**, as described in the [Viber documentation](https://developers.viber.com/docs/api/rest-bot-api/). Copy the bot’s authentication token. Keep it private; you will paste it into AXL’s **Token** field.

## Connect the bot in AXL

Open **Communications → Chat Channels**, click **Add Channel**, choose the **Messaging** category, then click **Viber**.

![Add Channel dialog with Messaging selected and the Viber tile.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c395553366389361a6fb08875f30b38db7246f06ea3d7b6d8d9ab909002bac6b.png)
Choose Messaging, then Viber. This opens New Channel; it does not authorize or create the bot.

In **Viber — New Channel**, enter the following:

1. **Title**: a recognizable name, such as **Northstar Academy · Viber**.
2. **Token**: the authentication token for your approved Viber bot.
3. Expand **Additional Settings**. Set **Color** for the channel icon. Choose **Default Chatbot Automation** if a bot should run when a user opens the channel without starting a specific automation. Select **Exclude from broadcasts** if this channel should not be used for broadcasts.

The form’s embedded Instructions may still describe the previous self-service bot registration. Use the current Viber application process above to obtain your bot and token.

![Viber channel settings with Northstar Academy title, empty Token, Color, Default Chatbot Automation and Exclude from broadcasts.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b331a38909b8599f7e9e4e6b30b39613f3171ef77b8e5850cdccab5b06e40841.png)
The Viber form with Additional Settings expanded. The Token field is intentionally empty here; the example is not a connected channel. Create is at the bottom of the drawer.

When the token and settings are ready, click **Create** at the bottom of the drawer. Reopen the new channel from **Chat Channels** and check the saved title and settings. If creation reports an error, resolve it before relying on the connection.

## Check the connected Viber bot

1. Complete Viber’s commercial onboarding and obtain the token for the bot you intend to use.
2. Create the AXL channel, then open it from **Communications → Chat Channels** and check the saved title and settings.
3. Send a message to the bot from a test Viber account. Find that conversation in **Communications → Chat**, reply, and check the reply in Viber.

---

# Telegram Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-telegram

> Connect a Telegram bot to your AXL account as a chat channel.

This guide connects a Telegram bot to AXL as a chat channel. Customers message the bot, and your team handles those conversations in AXL. Managing membership in Telegram groups or broadcast channels is a separate Telegram Groups/Channels app workflow.

First, create a bot using Telegram’s official [BotFather](https://t.me/botfather). Choose **Send Message** and open the conversation in your Telegram app. The Telegram images below are retained reference examples; follow the current prompts if your app looks different.

Use a dedicated bot if another service already handles this bot’s messages. Replacing its webhook can disconnect that service; review any AXL warning before continuing.

![BotFather public page with the Send Message button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6461d4740162a7a95339c1bff9f1913a01abecd53b5f1839f5723936048aea31.png)
Reference image of Telegram’s BotFather page. Choose Send Message to open the official bot in your Telegram app; Telegram may change the page’s appearance.

In Telegram, click "Start" to start BotFather.

![Earlier Telegram Desktop conversation with BotFather and the Start control.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bde6e4b1afc5a4f1ff28449e0aa3b6ee4ad5fdcc69a6d5679285cdfc7b3e296e.png)
Reference image from Telegram Desktop: choose Start in the BotFather conversation. Its appearance may differ in your current Telegram app.

The bot menu opens, with all the commands available for the bot. Select the /newbot command.

![Earlier BotFather command list showing the newbot command.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3443b30f6ababea116b23c9383f0248fad7ab4ba937278523405047b6d26b203.png)
Reference image of BotFather’s command list. Send /newbot to start creating a bot; the surrounding menu may differ.

BotFather then asks you to enter a name for your bot.

![Earlier BotFather conversation after a bot display name is entered, showing the username prompt.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2acbc59d1935f814af2d3bf3b6edad9d1fa211ce608155cb7853180eaf84c6c3.png)
Reference conversation: BotFather asks for a display name, then a username. Origami is the historical example’s display name; choose your own recognizable name.

After the display name, BotFather asks for a unique username ending in `bot`. Use 5–32 Latin letters, numbers or underscores. If it is taken, choose another. Telegram documents this command-based flow in its [bot creation guide](https://core.telegram.org/bots/features#creating-a-new-bot); BotFather also offers a Mini App with equivalent functions.

Once BotFather accepts the username, it sends you a message with a link to your bot and a token. You'll use the token to connect the Telegram channel in your AXL account. Copy the token.

In AXL, open **Communications → Chat Channels**, click **Add Channel**, choose **Messaging**, then select **Telegram**.

![Add Channel dialog with Messaging selected and the Telegram tile.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c395553366389361a6fb08875f30b38db7246f06ea3d7b6d8d9ab909002bac6b.png)
In Add Channel, choose Messaging, then Telegram.

In **Telegram — New Channel**, fill in the connection settings:

1. **Title**: a recognizable name, such as **Northstar Academy · Telegram**.
2. **Token**: the private token supplied by BotFather.
3. Expand **Additional Settings**. **Color** sets the channel icon color. **Default Chatbot Automation** selects the automation that runs when a user opens the bot directly without starting a specific automation. Select **Exclude from broadcasts** if this channel should stay out of broadcasts.

![Telegram channel form with BotFather instructions, Northstar Academy title, empty Token, expanded Additional Settings, Color, Default Chatbot Automation, Exclude from broadcasts, Cancel and disabled Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b2e2a135507bff2564c9adcc436da33b559631196d74d8b7840add3e4a2f8b0d.png)
Telegram settings with Additional Settings expanded. This unsaved example has no token, so Create is disabled; it is not a connected bot.

Click "Create." The Telegram channel you created appears in the list of chat channels.

## Test the bot connection

1. After clicking **Create**, confirm that the Telegram channel appears in **Communications → Chat Channels**.
2. Open the bot link from a test Telegram account, start the bot, and send a short message.
3. Open **Communications → Chat** in AXL, find the test conversation, and send a reply. Check the reply in Telegram.

Keep the BotFather token private. Paste it only into the intended connection settings; do not include it in screenshots or customer instructions.

---

# Facebook Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-facebook

> Connect a Facebook page to your AXL account as a chat channel.

Connect the Facebook Page you use for customer messages to AXL. After connecting it, manage its conversations from **Communications → Chat**.

You need a Facebook account with access to the Page you intend to connect. If you do not have an account, register at [facebook.com](https://www.facebook.com/) and follow the provider's instructions.

In AXL, open **Communications → Chat Channels**, click **Add Channel**, select **Social Media**, then choose **Facebook**.

![Add Channel dialog with Social Media selected and the Facebook and Instagram options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f982227d463b11fe32734e70dab89ca80bd21e25f83c5a50ebebcaee7e05bc2d.png)
Open Add Channel, select Social Media, then choose Facebook.

The "New Channel" panel opens. Fill in the fields. Color, Exclude from broadcasts, and Default Chatbot Automation are in the "Additional Settings" section. Click its heading to expand it.

1. Title. Enter a name for your channel.
2. Color. Set the color of the messaging app icon.
3. Exclude from broadcasts. Select the checkbox to keep this channel out of broadcasts.
4. Default Chatbot Automation. Select an automation from the list. It runs when someone opens the bot from a direct link (for example, from a search or a link a friend shared) and doesn't start a specific automation.
5. Click "Grant Access to Group List."

![Facebook New Channel with Northstar Academy title, Grant Access to Group List, expanded Additional Settings, Cancel and disabled Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76d3a500d83ba7eaff0f90e68e6b666bb22c98a672548c23dc2270d39e6daf39.png)
Enter a recognizable Title and review Additional Settings. Grant Access to Group List begins Facebook authorization; this example has not been authorized and Create is disabled.

Click **Grant Access to Group List** to open Facebook authorization. Sign in with the account that manages the intended Page, review the requested permissions and choose the Pages you want AXL to access. After authorization succeeds, a **Page** selector appears in AXL. Select the Page you want to connect.

Check the selected Page before continuing and wait for AXL to finish retrieving its connection details. The current form obtains Page access after selection; there is no separate second group-access step in this form. If Facebook returns no suitable Page, check the account and the access you granted before trying again.

When the required connection details are valid, click **Create**. After creation succeeds, the Facebook channel appears in the chat-channel list. Provider authorization or an enabled Create button alone is not confirmation that the channel was created.

## Verify the connected Page

1. After **Create** succeeds, open the channel from **Communications → Chat Channels** and check the connected Page.
2. Send the Page a message from an account you control, then open **Communications → Chat** and find that conversation.
3. Reply from AXL and check that the reply reaches the sender. Channel creation alone does not verify incoming and outgoing messages.

This Chat Channels connection is for messaging. Publishing and comment permissions are managed through **Marketing → Social Networks**; check the linked connection and its permissions when those features are needed.

## The 23-Hour Reply Window

**Important:** Facebook Messenger lets a page write freely only for a limited time after the contact's last message. AXL allows ordinary messages for 23 hours after it, to stay inside Meta's 24-hour window. After that, a message goes out only with a message tag, chosen in the **Facebook tag** setting of a broadcast or a message step, and only when the message really fits that tag under Meta's rules. Without a tag, the message is refused for such a contact. Once the contact writes again, the window opens again.

---

# WhatsApp Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-whatsapp

> Connect WhatsApp to your AXL account through Meta and manage the channel's settings and message templates.

Connect a WhatsApp Business account to AXL so your team can manage its customer conversations and use approved message templates.

Start in **Communications → Chat Channels → Add Channel → Messaging → WhatsApp**, then choose **Connect with Facebook**. Use a Meta login that can manage the business assets you intend to connect. Complete the account and phone-verification steps Meta requests. For Meta's official information on verifying a company, see the [Meta business verification guide](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2058515294227817?id=180505742745347).

Prepare your account and phone number, then follow the AXL connection steps below. Click a section to jump to it:

Before You Start

Creating a WhatsApp Channel on the AXL Platform

WhatsApp Channel Settings

## Before You Start

Connect from AXL using **Connect with Facebook**. You do not need to create a separate Meta developer app as an AXL channel-setup step.

- Have access to the Meta account that manages the business assets you want to connect.
- Use the intended WhatsApp Business account and phone number, and be ready to complete any verification Meta requests.
- Check the account and number shown when you return to AXL before clicking **Create**.

A phone verification code confirms access to the number. If Meta separately requests company verification or shows a pending review, complete that process and check the resulting status; closing the popup alone does not prove the channel is connected.

## Creating a WhatsApp Channel on the AXL Platform

In AXL, open **Communications → Chat Channels**, click **Add Channel**, choose **Messaging**, then select **WhatsApp**.

![Current Add Channel dialog with Messaging selected and WhatsApp available.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c395553366389361a6fb08875f30b38db7246f06ea3d7b6d8d9ab909002bac6b.png)
Open Add Channel, select Messaging, then choose WhatsApp.

The "New Channel" panel opens. Fill in the fields. Color, Exclude from broadcasts, and Default Chatbot Automation are in the "Additional Settings" section. Click its heading to expand it:

1. Title. Enter a name for your channel.
2. Color. Set the color of the messaging app icon.
3. Exclude from broadcasts. Select the checkbox to keep this channel out of broadcasts.
4. Default Chatbot Automation. Select an automation from the list. It runs when someone opens the bot from a direct link (for example, from a search or a link a friend shared) and doesn't start a specific automation.
5. Connect with Facebook. Complete the channel setup through Facebook.

![WhatsApp New Channel with Northstar Academy title, Connect with Facebook, expanded Additional Settings, checked Exclude from broadcasts, Cancel and disabled Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/44786ba8931d1d8f7ce4ef7a73b3b17529cb3be5327258c38826652eac8ca2d3.png)
Current WhatsApp setup form before authorization. Exclude from broadcasts is selected in this example. Connect with Facebook starts Meta setup; no account or phone number has been connected here.

Click **Connect with Facebook** to open Meta's authorization flow. Sign in, review the business assets and permissions requested for AXL, and follow the prompts shown. Meta can change the order and labels; use the current prompts to complete the choices described below.

Check the Meta account shown before continuing. Use the account that can manage the intended business assets.

Select the business assets you want to share with AXL: choose the appropriate business portfolio.

Next, choose a WhatsApp Business account.

Select an existing phone number or add a new one.

If Meta requests phone-number verification, choose an available method, such as a phone call or text message, that you can receive on the intended number.

Enter the verification code received for the intended phone number when Meta requests it. Keep the code private.

Review the selected business portfolio, WhatsApp Business account, phone number and the access requested for AXL. Confirm only the intended assets and permissions.

Read the result Meta shows. If it reports a pending account or business review, complete the requested steps and check the status. When the provider flow is finished, return to AXL; closing the popup alone does not prove that channel creation succeeded.

Check the result shown by Meta and complete any outstanding account or number-verification steps. A pending review is not a completed connection. Return to AXL and confirm that the intended WhatsApp account and phone number are selected before finishing channel creation.

If AXL asks for a **PIN code**, enter the number’s existing six-digit two-step verification PIN. If no PIN is set, enter the six-digit PIN you want AXL to set during registration. Then click **Create** in AXL. Keep the PIN private; do not include it in screenshots or support examples.

## WhatsApp Channel Settings

Open the channel you created by clicking its name or the edit button.

![Created WhatsApp channel and edit action.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/NtCnUcjc5Ue1WuXB45dT9Q.png)

The channel page shows information about the channel and lets you edit it. For more about the "Settings," "Users," and "Automations" tabs, see "[Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels)."

![WhatsApp channel detail tabs.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/LOtV64xxlk-A5nlNZ2KKNw.png)

Open the "Templates" tab. The WhatsApp channel supports message templates.
You can start conversations and send messages using templates. When sending through WhatsApp, use the intended approved template and check its status before launch. Test other delivery channels separately.

![WhatsApp Templates tab.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/YeO0-tN2gkuh8YPxA35Fcg.png)

Click "Sync" to import your templates into AXL. Create and approve templates in your WhatsApp account first.

![Sync control for WhatsApp templates.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/v-RMBM3qNkWwTYvSG2pW7w.png)

On the "Templates" tab, you can see a list of message templates and details about them:

1. Template Name. The name of the message template.
2. Updated date. The date and time the template was last updated.
3. Template. The text of the message template.
4. Status. Shows whether the template is approved in your WhatsApp account. If there is an error, hover over the red icon next to the status to read it.
5. Actions. These buttons are available here:
The send icon. Click it to see the instructions for sending the template.
The edit icon. Click it to make changes to the template.
The chat icon (**Add to chat templates**). Click it to save the template as a reply template, so it appears under the templates button in Chat.

![Template names, text, status, and actions.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AY9zlwuGhk6V4FSUNnL0iQ.png)

Click the send icon to see the instructions for sending the template.

![Instructions for sending a WhatsApp template.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/h_dXlECkaEm1YgCCEixNpQ.png)

Click the edit icon to edit the template. You can make changes in the window that opens.

![WhatsApp template editing window.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/vwkiGOMAWk2KrpTl8UzjQQ.png)

## Finish the connection and test a template

1. After Meta authorization returns to AXL, check the selected WhatsApp account and outbound phone number. Finish the AXL form with **Create**.
2. Open the saved channel and its **Templates** tab. Click **Sync**, then check the template name, content, and approval status.
3. Use the template’s send icon to open its sending instructions. Test with an authorized recipient before including the channel in a customer automation.
4. Check the incoming message and reply in **Communications → Chat**. Confirm both the channel connection and the selected template’s delivery.

The connection form requires a phone number belonging to a **WhatsApp Business Account** in Meta Business. A personal WhatsApp account does not meet that prerequisite.

## The 23-Hour Reply Window

**Important:** WhatsApp lets a business write freely only for a limited time after the contact's last message. AXL allows ordinary messages for 23 hours after it, to stay inside Meta's 24-hour window. After that, only an approved message template can be sent, from the channel's **Templates** tab or a step that uses a template. An ordinary message, including one from a broadcast or an automation, is refused for such a contact. Once the contact writes again, the window opens again.

---

# Wazzup24 Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-wazzup24

> How to connect a Wazzup24 channel to your account and chat with customers on WhatsApp, Instagram, and Telegram.

Wazzup connects messaging accounts to CRM systems. Connect a supported account in Wazzup, then choose that channel in AXL to handle customer conversations. Available services and authorization methods depend on Wazzup's current offering; see its [connection guides](https://wazzup24.com/help/).

To create a Wazzup24 channel, first create or sign in to your [Wazzup account](https://wazzup24.com/?utm_p=K1tDwr). Follow the sign-up prompts and review the trial offer and terms shown for your account. Set up the messaging account you intend to connect. For WhatsApp, follow Wazzup's current linked-device instructions and keep access to the primary phone.

![Earlier Wazzup registration page with an empty Email field and Register button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1645b847a0be95e00b8b5f8c6be21e6dfeddf4428a5c674c0df85b4bfb95b29f.png)
Reference image of an earlier Wazzup registration page. Follow the current sign-up prompts and trial terms shown by Wazzup.

First, add the channels you'll use to talk with customers. In your Wazzup24 personal account, go to the "Channels" section, click "Add Channel", and select a channel. Follow the authorization method shown for that channel. WhatsApp can offer a QR code or a phone-number linking flow.

![Earlier Wazzup Channels page with Add a channel and messaging-service tiles.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6cae24c4e0f969c46221f9445c78d6f306c39d843b1fc86f0f258037df58c57c.png)
Reference image of Wazzup Channels and the Add a channel choices. Available services and connection methods can change; use the current choices in your account.

To obtain the API key, first connect a channel in Wazzup. Open **Integration with CRM**, select **API**, then **Add**, and copy the key. After the integration is connected, find it in the same section under **More**. See Wazzup's [current API authorization instructions](https://wazzup24.com/help/api-en/authorization/). Keep the key private.

In AXL, open **Communications → Chat Channels**, click **Add Channel**, choose **Messaging**, then select **Wazzup24**.

![Current Add Channel dialog with Messaging selected and Wazzup24 available.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c395553366389361a6fb08875f30b38db7246f06ea3d7b6d8d9ab909002bac6b.png)
In Add Channel, choose Messaging, then Wazzup24.

In **Wazzup24 — New Channel**, fill in the connection settings:

1. **Title**: a recognizable channel name, such as **Northstar Academy · Wazzup**.
2. **API Key**: your private Wazzup key. Entering a value reveals **Allow Access to Channels**. Click it when you are ready to request your channel list, then select the intended channel.
3. Expand **Additional Settings** to see **Color**, **Default Chatbot Automation** and **Exclude from broadcasts**. The current form has Exclude from broadcasts selected by default. Keep the integration's messaging-only limitation in mind even though the chatbot selector is visible.

![Wazzup24 settings with Northstar Academy title, an empty API Key with its channel-selection hint, expanded Additional Settings and disabled Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1f38160eca4aedb4e6de1d4dfec9f43cb34df2f9bd2113165ac7b67a7f304099.png)
Current Wazzup24 form with a deliberately invalid example key to show Allow Access to Channels. No access request was sent and no channel was selected. Create remains disabled; replace the example with your own private key only when connecting your account.

Click "Create". The new Wazzup24 channel appears in the list of chat channels.

## Verify the selected Wazzup channel

1. In Wazzup, confirm that the messaging channel is connected before copying the API key.
2. In the AXL form, click **Allow Access to Channels** and select the intended Wazzup channel. Check its identity before clicking **Create**.
3. Use a test contact to send a message through that messaging account. Find it in **Communications → Chat**, reply from AXL, and check both directions.

The current AXL form warns that UTM parameters and chatbots do not work correctly with this integration and recommends using it for messaging only. Check that limitation before choosing Wazzup24 for a chatbot or attribution workflow.

---

# Instagram Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-instagram

> How to connect an Instagram channel to your AXL account and manage its chats from the Chat Channels page.

Connect Instagram customer conversations to AXL. Choose **Directly via Instagram** for a business or creator account without needing a Facebook Page, or **Via a Facebook Page** for an Instagram account linked to a Page. The steps below cover the Facebook-Page route; the direct route is described afterwards.

Use the Instagram business or creator account you intend to connect. If you need an account, [sign up on the Instagram website](https://www.instagram.com/) and complete its setup. For the Facebook-Page route, make sure the intended professional Instagram account is linked to the Facebook Page you manage.

![Instagram signup form before any personal information is entered.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2ce511c70bb495ac65024cb78bb2829cd1152f53e47a53ad8fd7816c37046606.png)
Historical provider reference; the current Meta layout and prompts may differ. Provider registration reference; use the account type required by the chosen connection route.

In AXL, open **Communications → Chat Channels**, click **Add Channel**, select **Social Media**, then choose **Instagram**.

![Add Channel dialog with Social Media selected and the Facebook and Instagram options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f982227d463b11fe32734e70dab89ca80bd21e25f83c5a50ebebcaee7e05bc2d.png)
Open Add Channel, select Social Media, then choose Instagram.

A side panel opens. Fill in the fields:

- Title. Enter a name for your channel. It's for your use only and makes the channel easier to find.
- Color. Open "Additional Settings" and choose the color of the channel icon.
- Exclude from broadcasts. Check this box to keep the channel out of chat broadcasts.
- Default Chatbot Automation. Select an automation from the list. It runs when someone opens the bot from a direct link (for example, from a search or a link a friend sent) and doesn't start a specific automation.
- Under "How to Connect", select "Via a Facebook Page", then click "Continue with Facebook".

![Instagram New Channel form for Northstar Academy, with Via a Facebook Page selected, Continue with Facebook, expanded Additional Settings, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/05991bb2754d6fa473901a4e5269af10a7f6f68575134ce72294fc415ba28455.png)
Choose the connection route for your account. Here, Via a Facebook Page is selected; the channel has not been connected.

Sign in with the Facebook account that manages the intended Page and linked Instagram account. The provider images below are historical references; follow the current Meta prompts and review the selected account scope before granting access.

Choose the Pages you intend to let AXL access. The reference image selects all current and future Pages; you do not need to copy that broad choice. Review the available scope and select the intended Pages.

![Meta Page access scope screen with all current and future Pages selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3e5a3c727b802ac7290c2202a881f07cbac7609a37aede0b9685464d23c24c83.png)
Historical provider reference; the current Meta layout and prompts may differ. Provider permission reference: this example selects all current and future Pages. Review the scope and choose the Pages you intend to connect.

Choose the Instagram accounts AXL should access. The reference image includes all current and future accounts; review the scope and select the accounts you intend to connect.

![Meta Instagram access scope screen with all current and future accounts selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/17fede712bb0fdd528d916bff897d7a87c945c81439db5c1749f90e50749b3b1.png)
Historical provider reference; the current Meta layout and prompts may differ. Provider permission reference: this example includes current and future Instagram accounts; review the intended scope before continuing.

Review the requested permissions and selected Pages and Instagram accounts. The historical review below includes broad access to current and future accounts; its exact permission list is not a required checklist for every current connection.

![Meta permission review for AXL before Save, showing access to current and future Pages and Instagram accounts.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/be86e32c5bfb462bd223456d35b40642c0c0914684418f86f5d84ce304d57b7f.png)
Historical provider reference; the current Meta layout and prompts may differ. Review the requested permissions and selected account scope before saving the provider consent. This example includes all current and future Pages and Instagram accounts; that broad scope is not required by this guide.

Click "Save" to complete the Facebook permission selection. Return to AXL, choose the page, and finish creating the channel as described in the next step.

![Meta confirmation after provider authorization, with the connected identity hidden.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/106baf3f7c584fb92ff144cee038ca3cbfb4c29a7f5afb63fe94a54f88535bfa.png)
Historical provider reference; the current Meta layout and prompts may differ. Provider authorization confirmation. Return to AXL to select the intended Page and finish creating the channel.

Back in AXL, use the **Page** field to select the Facebook Page linked to your intended Instagram account. AXL lists Pages that have a linked Instagram account. If no suitable Page appears, check the selected Facebook account, the account link and the granted access; use **Check Again** if the form offers it.

Click "Create". The new Instagram channel appears in the list of chat channels.

## Alternative: connect Instagram directly

1. Open **Communications → Chat Channels → Add Channel → Social Media → Instagram**.
2. Enter a recognizable **Title**. Under **How to Connect**, select **Directly via Instagram**, then click **Sign In with Instagram**.
3. Complete Instagram's authorization and return to AXL. Confirm that the form shows **Instagram connected**, review the channel settings and click **Create**.
4. After creation succeeds, send an incoming message from an account you control. Find the conversation in **Communications → Chat**, reply and verify that the sender receives it.

![Instagram New Channel with Northstar Academy title, Directly via Instagram selected, Sign In with Instagram and unchecked Ignore private conversations.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2a8b2470cb81672462ef66eeb5408f573e172e0b5957cd7ede320275db6ab30f.png)
Directly via Instagram shows its own sign-in button and Ignore private conversations option. This example is not connected: authorize the account and check the confirmation before Create, even if that button is already available.

For direct connections, **Ignore private conversations** controls when AXL creates a conversation: the form says it waits until the contact leaves a comment or starts the bot. Review this option for an account that receives both personal and customer messages.

The title and connection route can be selected before authorization. An available Create button does not prove that Instagram has been connected; check the connected-account confirmation before creating the channel.

## The 23-Hour Reply Window

**Important:** Instagram lets an account write freely only for a limited time after the contact's last message. AXL allows ordinary messages for 23 hours after it, to stay inside Meta's 24-hour window. After that and up to 7 days, a message goes out only with a message tag; after 7 days, not at all until the contact writes again. A message outside the window, including one from a broadcast or an automation, is refused for such a contact.

---

# Line Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-line

> How to connect a Line channel to your account so you can chat with customers on Line.

Connect a LINE Official Account to AXL so your team can read and reply to its customer messages in Communications → Chat.

First create a LINE Official Account or open one you manage. Enable the Messaging API in LINE Official Account Manager; this creates the Messaging API channel. Follow [LINE's current setup instructions](https://developers.line.biz/en/docs/messaging-api/getting-started/). The reference images below show earlier Console entry screens; they do not replace the Official Account Manager step.

![Earlier LINE Developers landing page with Log in to Console.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e8b411d4b93b82e08c0eb0a69e4846ee50b0697be5cb17014314c3b02723d91a.png)
Reference image of an earlier LINE Developers landing page. Current Messaging API setup begins in LINE Official Account Manager; use the Console afterwards to configure the resulting channel.

Sign in with the account that manages your LINE Official Account.

![Earlier LINE Developers page showing the Console link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1f5f60eadd1b9a3da8b89ac8fe2bb5b16aaa60d8517adb282d0db22b6dfc140d.png)
Reference image of the Console entry point after sign-in. The page appearance may differ; sign in with the account that manages the intended Official Account.

If LINE asks you to register developer information when enabling the Messaging API, enter your name and email address. Review the LINE Developers Agreement before accepting it and completing registration.

When enabling the Messaging API, select the provider that will manage this Official Account.

If you need a new provider, name it for the organization responsible for the account.
Choose the provider carefully: LINE does not let you move an existing channel to another provider.

Open LINE Developers Console with the same account, select the provider, and open the Messaging API channel created for your Official Account.

Confirm that this is the Messaging API channel for the Official Account you intend to connect. Do not create a LINE Login channel for this integration.

On the "Basic Settings" tab, find "Channel ID" and copy it. You'll need it in the next stage of connecting the channel.

Scroll down the page, find "Channel secret", and copy it. If there is no channel secret, click "Issue".

On the "Messaging API" tab, find "Channel Access Token". If there is no token, click "Issue".

In AXL, open **Communications → Chat Channels**, click **Add Channel**, choose **Messaging**, then select **Line**.

![Current Add Channel dialog with Messaging selected and Line available.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c395553366389361a6fb08875f30b38db7246f06ea3d7b6d8d9ab909002bac6b.png)
In Add Channel, choose Messaging, then Line.

A side panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for your channel. It's for your use only and makes the channel easier to find.
2. Access Token. Enter the Channel Access Token you copied in step 1 of this article.
3. Secret Key. Enter the Channel secret you copied in step 1.
4. Channel ID. Enter the Channel ID you copied in step 1.
5. Color. Open "Additional Settings" and choose the color of the channel icon.
6. Default Chatbot Automation. Select an automation from the list. It runs when someone opens the bot from a direct link (for example, from a search or a link a friend sent) and doesn't start a specific automation.
7. Exclude from broadcasts. Check this box to keep the channel out of chat broadcasts.

![LINE channel settings with Northstar Academy title, empty Access Token, Secret Key and Channel ID, expanded Additional Settings, Cancel and disabled Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8827c86e70bb2f77268b9bb9e6774ef5628bbf7963462cb5563fb5eaf41b3394.png)
Current LINE connection fields and Additional Settings. This unsaved example has empty credentials, so Create is disabled; it does not represent a connected LINE account.

Click "Create". The new Line channel appears in the list of chat channels.

After the channel is connected, return to the LINE Developers Console and open its **Messaging API** tab. Check the webhook settings and enable **Use webhook**. LINE describes the URL, verification and toggle in its [webhook setup guide](https://developers.line.biz/en/docs/messaging-api/building-bot/#set-a-webhook-url). Do not replace an existing integration's endpoint unless you intend to move message handling to AXL.

## Verify message delivery

LINE no longer creates Messaging API channels directly from the Developers Console. Follow [LINE’s current setup instructions](https://developers.line.biz/en/docs/messaging-api/getting-started/) for the Official Account step.

1. After creating the AXL channel and enabling **Use webhook**, send a message from a test LINE user to the Official Account.
2. Open **Communications → Chat**, find the conversation, and reply from AXL.
3. Confirm the reply reaches the test user. If incoming messages do not appear, recheck the selected channel, credentials, and webhook setup before using it for customers.

In the AXL connection form, enter the credentials in **Access Token**, **Secret Key**, and **Channel ID**. The external LINE account setup is a separate step.

## The 7-Day Reply Window

**Important:** AXL sends LINE messages to a contact only within 7 days after the contact's last message. After that, messages to this contact, including broadcasts and automation steps, are refused until the contact writes again.

---

# Chatbots

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/chat-bots

> Learn what chatbots are, how to create one, and how to set up its key phrases, automation, and buttons.

A chatbot is a program that automates communication with users. Chatbots let you talk to customers through text, audio, or video messages on your websites or in messaging apps.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Creating a Chatbot

Chatbot Settings

Chatbot Automation

Buttons

Contact Automations

## Creating a Chatbot

Go to Communications → Chatbots and click "Add Chatbot."

![Chatbots list filtered to Northstar, with the Strategy Lab Welcome bot, Simple type, Add Chatbot and edit/delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1b48c3a173b7566e651578e8a924aa5c4ae72b5f1e5ecbb52c3cbae357f770da.png)
Open the chatbot by its title or pencil icon. Use Add Chatbot to create a separate workflow.

The "New Chatbot" panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for your chatbot.
2. Description. Add a description for the chatbot.
3. Type. Select the chatbot type from the list.

![Complete New Chatbot drawer with Northstar Academy Open Day Guide title, description, Simple type, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/622056881090149d4a9897c19de5c659ac915f1c6785f1a696cbe1d78893f83c.png)
Choose the type while creating the chatbot; it cannot be changed in the existing bot settings. This unsaved example shows the complete form and Create button.

Click **Create** at the bottom of the drawer. The chatbot appears in the list shown above, with its title, type, and edit and delete controls.

## Chatbot Settings

Click the chatbot's title or the edit (pencil) button. The chatbot settings open:

1. Title. Edit the chatbot's name here.
2. Description. Change the chatbot's description.
3. Type. You can't change the type after the chatbot is created.
4. Key Phrases. Add the key phrases that start the chatbot here.

Click **Add Phrase** to enter each key phrase, then click **Save**. A phrase must be sent as a separate message; matching is not case-sensitive. Use **Discard Changes** to cancel edits.

**Important:**

- A key phrase needs at least 3 characters and works in every chat channel of the account, so give each chatbot its own phrase.
- While a person's run of the chatbot is still going, for example waiting on a delay or an answer, sending the phrase again does not restart it. Stop the run on **Contact Automations** if the person needs to start over.

![Northstar chatbot Settings with title, description, disabled Type, an unsaved strategy lab key phrase, Add Phrase, Discard Changes and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/827dfe7549627f8b0235db8787702d791e8df9b1220ace9e556dd829684376bf.png)
Add each startup phrase with Add Phrase. Save applies your changes; Discard Changes restores the saved settings.

## Chatbot Automation

On the "Automation" tab, you build the chatbot's automation. The "Chatbot Started" trigger is added automatically. Add actions to the automation and configure them. For more about configuration, see "[Configurations in an Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/types-of-actions-in-the-scenario-and-their-configurations)."

![Inactive Northstar Strategy Lab chatbot automation with Chatbot Started connected to tags, a welcome message, delays and follow-up emails.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b432b0faa639d4fcf93728131cf52ea56a8e4c98d8fb70b7c07d39254a145438.png)
Connect Chatbot Started to the first action, then connect the following steps. This configured example remains Inactive while being prepared.

## Buttons

You can add buttons to chatbot messages on supported chat channels. Configure the button once in AXL, then check the destination channel’s label, count and delivery limits. Ordinary buttons are supported for WhatsApp through Wazzup24, but not for its other channel types; approved message templates have separate button settings.
A button’s automation action can become unavailable if its automation or waiting step is removed. AXL clears waiting steps older than six months; a one-time button can also finish after its first use. Opening an external link is separate from continuing an automation and can remain available while its destination is accessible.

In the chatbot automation, search for **Send Message** in the action palette. Drag the **Send Message** action under **Chats & Social** onto the canvas, then configure it.

![Inactive chatbot action palette filtered to Send Message, showing the Chats &amp; Social and Email groups.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8dcd6651708ef75c82b954dc3b4540a8d859e1fca29b314b4ea3fa05cf1d2f66.png)
Search for Send Message in the action palette. For chatbot messages, use Send Message under Chats & Social and drag it onto the canvas. This example remains Inactive.

Open the Send Message step's gear menu and click **Configure Step**. The **Step Settings Send Message** panel opens. Enter the **Chat Message**, expand **Buttons**, and click **Add Button**.

![Send Message step settings with Northstar welcome text, Add Template Variables, file upload help, Buttons, General Settings, Test Messages, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5f7f14bea591918fd1e7df7a8c97b99228da88f085debf1aac685066fecd72fc.png)
Write the message here. Expand Buttons below the upload controls to add choices to the message.

In the "Buttons" section of the Send Message step settings, click "Add Button." The button appears in the list of buttons, with these fields:

1. **Button Text**. Enter a short label that remains clear if it is cut off. AXL currently limits ordinary button labels to 64 characters for Telegram, 250 for Viber, and 20 for Facebook, Instagram, WhatsApp and LINE. Text beyond the destination channel’s limit is truncated.
2. Button Type. Select the button type:

    - Regular.
    - Link.
3. **URL**. This field appears when you select **Link**. The AXL field accepts up to 128 characters and supports variables, like the message text. For an ordinary WhatsApp button sent by AXL, clicking the button sends the URL in a separate chat message; the recipient then opens that link. This is the AXL ordinary-button workflow, not a restriction on all WhatsApp template buttons.
4. The trash icon. Click it to delete the button. Deleting a button also removes its connections to other steps.
5. Click **Add Button** to add another button. AXL sends at most 100 ordinary buttons in one Telegram message, 7 in Viber, 3 in Facebook, Instagram or WhatsApp, and 4 in LINE. For channels other than Viber, additional supported buttons are split into message groups. For Viber, AXL keeps only the first seven; a new keyboard replaces the previous keyboard in the chat.
6. Continue if no button is clicked within. If the user doesn't click any button, the automation continues after the set time and runs the next action in the chatbot automation. Select the checkbox and set the time interval. You can set it in days, hours, or minutes.
7. Ignore repeated button clicks. Select the checkbox so the user can click a button only once.

![Send Message Buttons with View workbook as Link, an example.com URL, Ask a mentor as Regular, a 24-hour timeout, Ignore repeated button clicks, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dfc1cc2f31c83c9cc9995d0c0bde13a7b5bf0cc906979ae03541834f8c40ed2f.png)
Use Link for the workbook URL and Regular for a chatbot choice. This example continues after 24 hours if no button is clicked. Click Save to keep the step configuration.

You can send files as a video note (a round video) and as a voice message.

1. Click or drag files to upload. Attach video or audio files.
2. File limits by messaging app. Click it to open a table of limits for each messaging app. Video notes are available for Telegram. Voice messages can be sent in Instagram, Facebook, WhatsApp, and Telegram.
3. In the "General Settings" section, select the "Send files as video and voice messages" checkbox. For a file to be sent as a video note, it must be a square mp4 video (equal width and height) up to 639 px and no longer than 1 minute. For a voice message, the file must be in ogg format and up to 50 MB (for WhatsApp, ogg with the Opus codec, mono, up to 16 MB).

**Check the received media format.** A recording saved from Telegram is not a guarantee that a later automated send will succeed or appear as a voice or video message. The file must meet the destination channel’s format, codec, size and duration requirements. Open **File limits by messaging app**, then send a test to a contact you control before using the file in an automation. If it arrives as an ordinary attachment or fails, check those requirements and adjust the file.

![Messaging App Limits table with Telegram, Viber, VK, Facebook, WhatsApp, Instagram and Line, supported file categories and separate-image thresholds.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3f63687d04800552e59532b279f376cc3d9f72fa35dc60c40fc07a1a5f91d944.png)
The table compares regular files, video messages, voice messages and when an image is sent separately from text. Use each information icon for the relevant file requirements.

## Contact Automations

On **Contact Automations**, track the chatbot's recorded runs. The table shows:

1. **Start Date**. When the automation started.
2. **Status**. A running automation shows **Running**. A completed run shows **Completed** with its completion time. An aborted run shows **Aborted** and the administrator who stopped it.
3. **Contact**. Click the contact's name to open the CRM contact card.
4. **Automation**. Click the automation name to open its settings.
5. **Actions**. The history icon opens the run timeline and step details. A running row also has a stop action; confirm it only when you intend to stop that run. The trash icon deletes the contact's automation after confirmation. Stop and delete require the appropriate editing permission.

An empty table means there are no recorded runs for the current filters. The example below is empty; it does not show a successful test or completed delivery.

At the top of the page, there's a field for searching automations. For a quick search, select a contact from your CRM contact list.

![Current Northstar chatbot Contact Automations tab with contact filter, Start Date, Status, Contact, Automation and Actions columns, and no run rows.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/47fe15f35b219bbba193b56b08f9eab750f046c50368546aa785d15f2d2a42de.png)
Select a contact to narrow the run list. This chatbot has no recorded runs, so no history rows or row actions appear yet.

## Run a Simple chatbot from start to finish

1. Create a **Simple** chatbot for a workflow that starts from a link. Open its settings and copy the startup link for a connected chat channel. Webinar bots use a webinar-triggered workflow instead.
2. On **Automation**, connect **Chatbot Started** to the first action, then connect the remaining actions and button branches. Save each step’s configuration.
3. Activate the automation and open its startup link with a test user. Confirm the first message and each expected follow-up action.
4. Open **Contact Automations** and select the test contact. Use the history action to inspect the run; compare it with the messages visible in Chat.

Set **Type** carefully in **New Chatbot**: the current settings page does not let you change it later. For **Key Phrases**, send the phrase as a separate message; matching is not case-sensitive.

---

# Set Up and Connect a Chatbot

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/setting-up-and-connecting-a-chatbot

> Set up a welcome chatbot that warms up new contacts, connect it to a form, and send people to it from a thank-you page.

A warm-up chatbot talks to people in a messaging app after they leave their details on your website. Below, one is set up end to end: the chatbot and its automation, a form, the form's automation and a thank-you page that sends people to the bot.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Create a Chatbot

Chatbot Automation

Create a Form

Form Automation

Create a Thank-You Page

## Create a Chatbot

Go to "Communications" and open "Chatbots". Click "Add Chatbot".

![Chatbots page with the Add Chatbot button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/465b80791d47a285013c486437547fdab7e808374d136aa63fc063e56ecb2492.png)

In the new chatbot form, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for your chatbot.
2. Description. Add a description for the chatbot.
3. Type. Choose Simple for the startup-link workflow in this article. Webinar bots do not use the same startup links.

![New Chatbot panel with title, description, and type.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b0ec069d6bc17dad6f4ddabc6380f00872dc83d7a37c39cafa9fff2dec69bbf8.png)

Click "Create". The chatbot appears in the list. Open it to see its settings. Under "Use these links to start the bot", copy the link for the chat channel your customers will use. You'll need this link in step 5 of this article.

![Chatbot settings with title, description, type, key phrases, and the bot start-link domain.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ba76db4d57368c55bd75dfeff83ebb250d806ad387d523e8c74392cc1b57fe00.png)

## Chatbot Automation

Open the chatbot's "Automation" tab. It already contains the "Chatbot Started" trigger, which AXL creates automatically when you create a chatbot. Next, select the "Add Tags" action and drag it onto the canvas. Then configure the action: click "Settings" and then "Configure Step".

![Chatbot automation with the Add Tags step after Chatbot Started highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a5fb5e9df98ca508a814287b301810894e7d0afc6bb3e0150637af96c6cc899.png)

In "Step Settings", select the "do not send broadcasts" tag from the list, or create it. This tag identifies contacts still in the warm-up chatbot. Also configure your general broadcast audience to exclude contacts with this tag; the tag’s name alone does not suppress broadcasts.

Click **Confirm** to save the selected tag in this step. Check that the tag now appears on the action card.

![Add Tags settings with the welcome-sequence tag selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e1c68eedefdae17495e5efb463d4afed398522129fd415203d9ba341bd9edc2d.png)

Next, select the "Send Message" action and drag it onto the canvas. Configure it: click "Settings" and then "Configure Step".

![Chatbot automation with the Send Message welcome step highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a5fb5e9df98ca508a814287b301810894e7d0afc6bb3e0150637af96c6cc899.png)

In the step settings, enter the text of the chat message.

You can add variables to the message text. A variable is a placeholder that AXL automatically replaces with the data you choose, such as a contact's name, a personal link to the Membership Portal, or an order number. The placeholders are replaced with real data when the message is sent.

Click "Add Template Variables" and select "Personal link to the account" from the list. When the message is sent, AXL replaces this variable with the contact's personal link to the Membership Portal.

When you finish, click "Save".

![Welcome message with the personal Membership Portal link variable #School.ContactInviteLink#.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64c55805252eb557d423c6f19fc8d6f6101396dedb2614c1e86f0622683fb273.png)

Next, select "Delay" and drag it onto the canvas. A delay adds a pause between a trigger (or action) and the next action.
Use it to send messages after a set number of minutes, hours, or days.

![Chatbot automation with the one-day Delay step highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a5fb5e9df98ca508a814287b301810894e7d0afc6bb3e0150637af96c6cc899.png)

In the step settings, choose a delay type: "Time Period" waits for the length of time you set, and "Date" waits until a date you set. Enter the delay or the date, then click "Save".

![Delay settings with Time Period and Date options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4e65e0686d3b04896ad7a98642401cfbb427d5661f3e3bf02ea146570e7b3b06.png)

Add **Send Email** and open **Configure Step**. Keep **Contact's Email** as the recipient for this welcome sequence.

Choose **Use Template** to select an existing account template, or **No Template** and then **Create Email** to write an email for this step. In the email editor, add the body and open **Settings** to check the sending profile and enter the subject. Finish the new inline email with **Create**; when the step settings return, click their **Save** button to persist the email in the automation.

Repeat with further Delay and Send Email actions. For example, place delays of 1, 3, and 5 days before the three emails. These delays are consecutive pauses, not fixed days after signup.

![Chatbot automation: Add Tags, a welcome message, delays, emails, and Remove Tags.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a5fb5e9df98ca508a814287b301810894e7d0afc6bb3e0150637af96c6cc899.png)

At the end of the chatbot automation, add the "Remove Tags" action and drag it onto the canvas.

![Chatbot automation with the final Remove Tags step highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a5fb5e9df98ca508a814287b301810894e7d0afc6bb3e0150637af96c6cc899.png)

In the settings of **Remove Tags**, select the same tag used at the beginning and click **Confirm** to save the step. The tag is removed when a contact reaches this action during the automation. The contact can then match a general broadcast audience whose filter excludes that tag, provided they meet its other conditions.

![Remove Tags settings with the same welcome-sequence tag selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/556a1a375e5813fcb43869d60458967086a5ba970db81434d1d3f2006d2be2c8.png)

Connect the trigger, delays, and actions in the intended order. Check that every action is configured, the final Remove Tags action uses the opening tag, and the delays and email recipients are correct. Keep the automation **Inactive** while editing. When it is ready for contacts to enter, set the toggle to **Active**.

To connect two cards, drag the output circle on the right of the earlier card to the input circle on the left of the next one. For **Send Message** and **Send Email**, use the green success output for this normal continuation; the red failure output is a separate path. Check the resulting connection line before continuing.

![Inactive Northstar chatbot with a warm-up tag, welcome message, three email steps separated by 1-, 3-, and 5-day delays, and final tag removal.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/58bd4d4e32d20c9acef10b8dd5bb0c100504521a859ef89474f69c79e1954fee.png)
Configured example kept Inactive: the same warm-up tag is added at the start and removed at the end. The three delays are consecutive pauses.

Here is how it works: as soon as someone starts the chatbot automation, they get the "do not send broadcasts" tag. The chatbot sends the welcome messages with the delays you configured. Each Time Period delay starts when the contact reaches that step, so consecutive delays accumulate. After the last message, AXL removes the tag; your audience filter determines whether the contact is now included.

## Create a Form

To set up the form, you need a website on the AXL platform.
Go to "Websites". Open a website you created earlier or create a new one. For details, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
Next, on the "Pages" tab, select one of your pages and click the page name or the "Edit" button to open it.

![Website Pages tab: the website name, its link under the name, and the list of pages with their links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/af842475a0a45bedf30588fe809b9dce82447f1b428d669d274c05a413de8421.png)
Click the page name to open the page in the editor.

On the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to add a registration form. We recommend sending people to a thank-you page with a link to the chatbot after they submit the form, so include the thank-you page link in the same request. For example: "Add a short sign-up form below the hero: First name and Email fields and a button labeled "Reserve my seat". After someone submits it, redirect them to [thank-you page link]". You can also ask for the course name, a course description, and an image. To learn more, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

Step 5 of this article explains how to create a thank-you page with a link to the chatbot.

![Page editor: a request to add a sign-up form that redirects to a thank-you page, the AI Assistant reply, and the form with First Name, Email Address and Reserve my seat in the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/904e55f76a882cb891d5a9fdc4e9d26c89e210e29b65fee68732439c208653ac.png)
The assistant adds the form and the redirect to the page draft.

Check the form in the preview, then click "Publish".

Copy the page link under the page name in the upper-left corner and send it to your contacts. You can send it manually or through any automation, in a regular message or by email.

![Page editor header: page title, its link with a copy icon, and the Page Status switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c5bf77dd4c0532fa62286f9247b1de8247382774b88a8fa32c799f0073ce8e15.png)
The page link is under the page name. Click the copy icon to copy it.

## Form Automation

Open the page's "Automation" tab. Select the "Form Submitted" trigger and drag it onto the canvas.

![Page Automation tab: the step list and a Form Submitted event for any form on the page, connected to a Notification.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ceaa35beae8c1b547dc99bb3b231daf9666bbe70ed8d7e4d09bbd9d27307aa9d.png)
Form Submitted runs when someone submits a form on this page.

Next, open the "Actions" tab. Select the "Grant Product Access" action and drag it onto the canvas. Then configure it: click "Settings" and then "Configure Step".

![Page Automation tab: Grant Product Access found in the step list and placed on the canvas next to the Form Submitted event.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9533e136ca0489e8cb45fff1b35b45fdce4ae62ce98fc3ce52308021562a62df.png)
Drag the action onto the canvas, then open its gear menu and choose Configure Step.

In "Step Settings", choose the product you want to give access to the people who fill out the form, and set how long the access lasts.
When you finish, click "Add".

![Step Settings for Grant Product Access: Product tab, Leadership Certificate selected, start on the event date, duration 3 months, Cancel and Add.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/78b9f0880e648547ac6d8cf643691ec0e9e0cf6eab082ba58d70982b63fb1f0a.png)
Choose the product and how long the access lasts.

Next, connect the trigger and the action. Your website automation is ready. To activate it, set the toggle to "Active".

![Page Automation: Form Submitted connected to Grant Product Access (Leadership Certificate, 3 months) and to a Notification, with the Active switch on.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1481125e061304805e2b1154d8f33f05375c90d054d976b7a5711552e84817c0.png)
Connect the trigger to the action and keep the automation Active.

With this setup, after someone submits the form, they get access to the free lessons in their Membership Portal account. They are also redirected to the thank-you page with a link to the warm-up chatbot. When they click the link, the chatbot automation starts. Step 2 of this article explains how to create the chatbot automation.

## Create a Thank-You Page

After submitting the form, the person sees a thank-you page with a button. Clicking the button opens the chatbot and starts the chatbot automation.

On the website's "Pages" tab, click "New Page". In the window that opens, go to the "Create from Scratch" tab, enter the page title and the page URL, and click "Create and Open". The page editor opens.

![New page window, Create from Scratch tab: Title, Internal Name, Short Description, Page URL, Make Available, Create and Create and Open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f4fe9bd638ae05ac69abe9642230b0176b0f63e0c30b2a6177d3e3dc018beaab.png)
Create from Scratch opens an empty page in the editor.

On the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to build the thank-you page and add a button that opens the chatbot link you copied in step 1 of this article. For example: "Build a short thank-you page: a heading, one sentence asking people to get reminders in our chatbot, and a button "Get reminders in Telegram" that opens [chatbot link]".

![Page editor of the Thank You page: a request for a short thank-you page with a Get reminders in Telegram button, the AI Assistant reply, and the generated page in the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/80b47591a9068144f694c421d3fbe91efcd1367d8f5d30fbbaa6ddf08593064d.png)
The assistant builds the page and links the button to the chatbot.

Click "Publish", make sure the page is available, and copy the link to the thank-you page under the page name. You need this link for step 3 of this article: include it in your form request so the form redirects to this page.

![Thank You page header: page link with a copy icon and the Page Status switch set to Available.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/82c253a74e87600c5c64576c510afdddae028d18c72f53bf7d4ca25bd88b9836.png)
Copy the thank-you page link under the page name.

## Test the form-to-chatbot workflow

1. Before activating, check the audience filter that excludes your warm-up tag. Use the same tag in the opening **Add Tags** action and the final **Remove Tags** action.
2. Check the form’s redirect URL, the thank-you page’s chatbot button, and the chatbot’s first connected action. Confirm that each automation is active.
3. Submit the form with a controlled contact. Verify the product access and thank-you redirect, then follow the chatbot button and start the conversation.
4. Check the initial tag and message. Review the configured delay intervals, then inspect the later messages and final tag removal during the test.
5. Recheck the audience preview before and after tag removal to confirm that the contact is excluded and included as intended.

---

# Buttons in Chatbots

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/buttons-in-chatbots

> Add buttons to chatbot messages, connect each button to its own branch of the automation, and track clicks.

You can add buttons to chatbot messages, automation messages and broadcasts on supported chat channels. Configure the button in AXL, then check the limits for each destination channel below. In an automation, connect a button to the action that should run when it is clicked; link buttons can also continue along a configured branch. Broadcast buttons contain a label and URL rather than an automation branch.

This article shows how to set up and automate buttons in a chatbot. Click a section to jump to its description:

Create a Chatbot

Chatbot Automation

Connect a Chatbot to a Website

Chatbot Run History

Chatbot Conversations

## Create a Chatbot

Go to "Communications" and open "Chatbots". Click "Add Chatbot".

![Chatbots list with the Northstar Academy Strategy Lab Welcome bot, Add Chatbot, search, and edit and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7d1af8306836fd8459747b99e9ea5fb8c6fc0bdd2a6a72017314afd7fb2b4c08.png)
Open Communications → Chatbots, then click Add Chatbot.

A side panel opens. Fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for your chatbot.
2. Description. Add a description for the chatbot.
3. Type. Select Simple for the launch-link workflow in this article. Webinar bots are started by a webinar and do not show the same startup links.

![Unsaved New Chatbot example with a Northstar Academy title, description and Simple type.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5dee5770c0f0c6ccfaa2080836cf0e731c2548e4e6d38054b586b2f368e1c689.png)
Enter the title and description, then select Simple for this startup-link workflow. Click Create at the bottom of the drawer to create your own bot.

Click "Create". The chatbot appears in the list. Open it to see its settings. Under "Use these links to start the bot", copy the link for the chat channel your customers will use. You'll need this link in step 3 of this article.

![Chatbot settings with key phrases and the bot start-link domain.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ba76db4d57368c55bd75dfeff83ebb250d806ad387d523e8c74392cc1b57fe00.png)

## Chatbot Automation

Open the chatbot's "Automation" tab. It already contains the "Chatbot Started" trigger, which AXL creates automatically when you create a chatbot.

Next, select the "Send Message" action and drag it onto the canvas. Then configure it: click "Settings" and then "Configure Step".

![Send Message step menu with Configure Step, Copy Step, and Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7b56038eab5e6bf26c7311d677d8582727b2f02c615d4936e7c7f83cffe73cec.png)

In the step settings, enter the message text.

Now, when someone starts the chatbot, they receive this welcome message.

![Send Message step settings containing the Northstar Academy welcome message, template variable, message options, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9409e6eef9c45147dc028965d48e75898394b1167747d8c9d4e03dfdc137f4de.png)
Enter the welcome message under Chat Message. Click Save to keep the step configuration.

Next, add another "Send Message" action and configure it.

![Automation canvas of Northstar Academy · Week 1 check-in with the gear menu of the Week 1 question Send Message step open: Configure Step, Copy Step and Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ae23c1a6526776ca0584e4d911ccfc53c65a2a306289d82ff0238013dd838148.png)

In the settings of the second message, enter the text. Then expand the "Buttons" section and click "Add Button".

A button's automation action can become unavailable if its automation or waiting step is removed. AXL clears waiting steps older than six months; a one-time button can also finish after its first use. Opening a link is separate from continuing an automation and can remain available while its destination is accessible. AXL sends at most 100 ordinary buttons in one Telegram message, 7 in Viber, 3 in Facebook, Instagram or WhatsApp, and 4 in LINE. For channels other than Viber, additional supported buttons are split into message groups. For Viber, AXL keeps only the first seven; a new keyboard replaces the previous keyboard in the chat. In Wazzup24, ordinary buttons are supported for the WhatsApp channel, not its other channel types. Approved message templates have their own button settings.

![Buttons section with Add Button in the Send Message settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/56828ab987c1fd33d2919c893afe206f3f121bdd5c589ef44485891c539db41e.png)

Each button you add appears in the list of buttons. For each button, you can set:

1. **Button Text**. Enter a short label that remains clear if it is cut off. AXL currently limits ordinary button labels to 64 characters for Telegram, 250 for Viber, and 20 for Facebook, Instagram, WhatsApp and LINE. Text beyond the channel limit is truncated.
2. Button Type. Choose the button type:

    - Regular.
    - Link.
3. **URL**. This field appears when you choose the **Link** button type. The AXL field accepts up to 128 characters and supports variables, like the message text. For an ordinary WhatsApp button sent by AXL, clicking the button sends the URL in a separate chat message; the recipient then opens that link. This describes the AXL ordinary-button workflow, not all WhatsApp template buttons.
4. Trash icon. Click it to delete the button. You'll be asked to confirm, because deleting a button also removes its connections to other steps.
5. Click "Add Button" to add another button.
6. Continue if no button is clicked within. If the user doesn't click any button, the automation continues after the time you set, and the next action runs. Check the box and set the time. You can choose days, hours, or minutes.
7. Ignore repeated button clicks. Check the box to let each person click the button only once.

![Button settings with text, Regular or Link type, URL, and the no-click and repeated-click options.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5a3b7b14ac0df0d94e82ea85c3325e5fa8350c957f2c8c1934c0a5d0abfdfa1f.png)

You can send files as a round video message or a voice message.

1. Click or drag files to upload. Attach video or audio files.
2. File limits by messaging app. Click it to open a table of file limits for each messaging app. Round video messages are available in Telegram. Voice messages can be sent in Instagram, Facebook, WhatsApp, and Telegram.
3. Check the box "Send files as video and voice messages". For a video to be sent as a round video message, it must be a square MP4 file (equal width and height) up to 639 px and no longer than 1 minute. For a voice message in Telegram, the file must be in OGG format and up to 50 MB. For WhatsApp, the file must be OGG with the Opus codec (mono) and up to 16 MB.

**Check the received media format.** A recording saved from Telegram is not a guarantee that a later automated send will succeed or appear as a voice or video message. The file must meet the destination channel’s format, codec, size and duration requirements. Open **File limits by messaging app**, then send a test to a contact you control before using the file in an automation. If it arrives as an ordinary attachment or fails, check those requirements and adjust the file.

![Messaging App Limits table with Telegram, Viber, VK, Facebook, WhatsApp, Instagram and Line, supported file categories and separate-image thresholds.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c717881cb733866eca6f2774138c83d0233fa1aa137ff4f1da742884b3e848b3.png)
Compare regular files, video messages, voice messages and the threshold for sending an image separately from text. Information icons explain the corresponding file requirements.

Click "Save". The buttons now appear in the "Send Message" step on the canvas. Next, you can attach a specific chain of actions to each button. When someone clicks a button, they follow that button's own branch of the automation.

![Chatbot automation: a Send Message step with Leadership Certificate and Team workshops buttons and a No click for 24 hours output, each connected to its own Send Message step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c613a1a260b4fde04fa5d450292367b15fdce4de8b82da35ca262f81bde5eb79.png)

If you checked "Continue if no button is clicked within" in the "Send Message" step and set a time, the next action in the automation runs once that time passes without a button click.

![Continue if no button is clicked within a set time, highlighted in the button settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5a3b7b14ac0df0d94e82ea85c3325e5fa8350c957f2c8c1934c0a5d0abfdfa1f.png)

The "Send Message" step now shows another output you can connect to its own chain of actions.

This way, you can build a different sequence of follow-up actions for each choice the user can make at this stage of the automation.

![The No click for 24 hours output of the Send Message step connected to a follow-up message.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c613a1a260b4fde04fa5d450292367b15fdce4de8b82da35ca262f81bde5eb79.png)

To send another message no matter what the user does, start a new chain from the top of the step. For example, send a link to buy a course the next day, after the second message.

![Chatbot automation: the top output of the Send Message step connected to a 1-day Delay and a Send Message step with an Enroll now link button, next to the button branches.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6eb0d31785737b2e8843ec10d5928cc9ad5996e5447bc234ac61e0ed346642e3.png)

Select the "Delay" action and drag it onto the canvas. In the step settings, set the delay to 1 day.

![Delay step settings: Time Period, 1 day, 0 hours, minutes and seconds, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3918fa31d086d4a5b45739bc430de0a081becdaba708fdb59d50b85755a177b8.png)

Next, select the "Send Message" action and drag it onto the canvas. In the step settings, add a button and set the button type to "Link". In the "URL" field, paste a link to buy the course. To learn how to create a purchase link, see the article "[Products and Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".

![Send Message step settings: message text and an Enroll now button of type Link with the course page URL.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0a00137ba62ed811ec938bd2d5641e0786880f88de69ae8088b242cbcd3b8b40.png)

Use **Branch History** to inspect the button clicks AXL recorded for the connected branch. A link button does not make its destination private or prevent recipients from copying or sharing the URL. Configure access at the destination if the linked page or resource should be restricted.

When you finish the automation, set the toggle to "Active".

![Chatbot automation with the Active switch at the top of the step palette.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1a5fb5e9df98ca508a814287b301810894e7d0afc6bb3e0150637af96c6cc899.png)

## Connect a Chatbot to a Website

To add a button that starts the chatbot on a website page, first set up your website on the AXL platform.

Go to "Websites". Open a website you created earlier or create a new one. For details, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
Next, on the "Pages" tab, select one of your pages and click the page name or the "Edit" button to open it.

![Website Pages tab: the website name, its link under the name, and the list of pages with their links.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/af842475a0a45bedf30588fe809b9dce82447f1b428d669d274c05a413de8421.png)
Click the page name to open the page in the editor.

On the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to add a button and paste the chatbot link you copied in step 1 of this article into your request. For example: "Add a button "Get Bonus" that opens [chatbot link]". Check the button in the preview, then click "Publish". To learn more, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

![Page editor of the Thank You page: a request for a short thank-you page with a Get reminders in Telegram button, the AI Assistant reply, and the generated page in the preview.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/80b47591a9068144f694c421d3fbe91efcd1367d8f5d30fbbaa6ddf08593064d.png)
Paste the chatbot link into the request. The assistant adds the button and links it to the chatbot.

Now, when someone clicks the "Get Bonus" button on the website page, the chatbot starts and runs the automation you created in step 2 of this article.

## Chatbot Run History

To see the history of chatbot runs, go back to the chatbot automation. The upper-right corner of each trigger and action shows how many times it ran. For message steps, the number is the count of messages sent.

![Automation canvas: the Week 1 question Send Message step shows its run counter, 2, with the Number of runs tooltip; the Going well button counter shows 1.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bd8a72381977fc660330fc633519e360e45f7d005fdc26fb4236b9665649808b.png)

Click the "Number of runs" icon to open the "Step History" window. It shows the date and time each message was sent and who received it. Click a name to open the contact's CRM card.

![Step History of the Send Message (Chat/Email) step: two runs on October 21, 2026, each for Olivia Bennett, with a link to her contact card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dd2c7c7a1bd57b375b2445926404c3d0a635a075f5c01a004c97447a1ff121ca.png)

Each button also shows a counter of how many times it was clicked.

![Automation canvas: the Going well button of the Week 1 question step shows its counter, 1, with the Trigger count tooltip; I need help shows 0.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/754acaafa0e88afe7e2d62afcd13f1c5d789eac5cd1ef5d6e31d6ec451b22ad5.png)

Hover over the counter to see "Trigger count", then click it to open the "Branch History" window. It shows the date and time of each click and who clicked the button. Click a name to open the contact's CRM card.

![Branch History of the Going well button: two clicks by Olivia Bennett on October 21, 2026, with links to her contact card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/20e9bf46228293f8477e8a0e06e4f5b2cf9119b667ab6c1d940b97ee08fd3648.png)

## Chatbot Conversations

In the left menu, go to "Communications" and open "Chat".

![Floating Chat window opened from the top-bar chat icon, with the conversation list and a conversation with chatbot messages and answer buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c2aaa36ed35d0dba900edaa7f035a07c4c5306f0350a32dad9e784fb507534e5.png)

Here you can see all the messages the chatbot automation exchanged with each contact.

![Full-size Chat with a conversation where the bot asked a question with Going well and I need help buttons and the contact answered with a button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dbb84434f9bc1b1ca47718a47c2196e4a01865599fe8264f2f917ca04ae32cdb.png)

## Test each button branch

1. Save the **Send Message** step after adding its buttons. On the canvas, connect each button output to the action that should follow that choice.
2. If you enabled **Continue if no button is clicked within**, connect the timeout output as well. A button branch and the timeout branch represent different outcomes.
3. Open the chatbot’s startup link with a test user. Click each choice in a separate run and verify the expected next message or action.
4. Test a link button in the actual destination messenger. Check its destination and the recorded click in **Branch History**.
5. Run a no-click test and a repeated-click test if those settings are enabled. Review **Step History** and the conversation to confirm which actions ran.

---

# VKontakte Channel

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/channel-vkontakte

> Connect a VKontakte group to your AXL account as a chat channel.

VKontakte is a social network founded in 2006. It lets users create a profile, add friends, exchange messages, post photos and videos, browse a news feed, join groups and communities that share their interests, and much more.

To create a VKontakte channel, you need a VKontakte account. If you don't have one, register at [vk.com](https://vk.com/) and follow the instructions on the site.

1

Return to your AXL account. Go to Communications → Chat Channels, click "Add Channel," and select "VK" in the list of channels.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/StBKVD_LqkaG7FuHzmrptw.png)

The "New Channel" panel opens. Fill in the fields. Color, Exclude from broadcasts, and Default Chatbot Automation are in the "Additional Settings" section. Click its heading to expand it.

1. Title. Enter a name for your channel.
2. Color. Set the color of the messaging app icon.
3. Exclude from broadcasts. Select the checkbox to keep this channel out of broadcasts.
4. Default Chatbot Automation. Select an automation from the list. It runs when someone opens the bot from a direct link (for example, from a search or a link a friend shared) and doesn't start a specific automation.
5. Click "Grant Access to Group List."

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1U137seki0OVkLLfgFsXWw.png)

2

VKontakte asks you to authorize. After you do, you return to AXL and the "New Channel" panel opens again. In the "Group" field, select the VKontakte group you want to connect to your account.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XoJwsxw_qkasml5Al59CtQ.png)

3

The group you selected appears in the "Group" field. Click "Grant Group Access."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/EtLz0iao8Ee8I5gNi_rhiQ.png)

4

VKontakte asks for permission to access this group. Click "Allow."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/MGwphr7RGk2fghwE46S3pQ.png)

5

Click "Create." The VK channel you created appears in the list of chat channels.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/pgyL8kUR80Gep_KX6Vvycw.png)

6

Next, change the settings of your VKontakte group and add a group chat.
To do this, open the group on VKontakte and click "Manage" to go to the group settings.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/e44V_8FCak2r3ETbDZA_ag.png)

In the group settings, select the "Chats" section. In the list of chats, click "Create chat."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/kDZiwjL330-O7pB1Ybh6LQ.png)

In the window that opens, click "Create Chat" to create a group chat.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/lmaQmahKNECugWbZExjsQA.png)

Next, in the group settings, select the "Messages" section, then "Bot Settings."
Turn on bot capabilities. Select the "Add Start button" and "Allow adding community to chats" checkboxes, then click "Save."
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VaTh70S74UyjEAPaRalzWQ.png)

---

# Telephony

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/telephony

> What AXL Telephony is for, how to turn it on, what each tab does and in which order to set it up.

Telephony gives your account its own phone numbers. Your team calls customers and takes their calls right in the browser, sends and receives texts, and an AI voice agent can answer calls or call a list of contacts for you. Calls can be recorded, transcribed and summarized by AI, and every call is saved on the contact's card, so the whole team sees the conversation history.

Everything is under **Communications → Telephony**. The section is available to team members with the Telephony permission.

## Turn Telephony On

If **Telephony** is missing from the menu, open **Account Features** at the bottom of the menu and turn on **Calls**.

![Account Features page with the Calls feature switch among the other account features.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/76180c966012082c9815e6eafa5488729d66bab4ec9798dd2ed8b1dc7656303f.png)

## What Each Tab Is For

- **Numbers**: the phone numbers of your account, each number's settings and the people who work it. See "[Phone Numbers](https://docs.axl.tech/phone-numbers)" and "[Incoming Calls](https://docs.axl.tech/incoming-calls)".
- **Call Settings**: the countries your account can call and the list of call outcomes. See "[Call Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/call-settings)".
- **SMS Registration**: the business registration carriers require before your numbers can send texts. See "[SMS and SMS Registration](https://docs.axl.tech/telephony-sms)".
- **Analytics** and **History**: call statistics and the list of every call with its recording, transcript and cost. See "[Call Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-analytics)".
- **Call Campaigns**: an AI voice agent calls a list of contacts for you. See "[Call Campaigns](https://docs.axl.tech/call-campaigns)".
- **Integrations**: connecting a telephony provider you already use instead of AXL numbers. See below.

![Telephony page on the Numbers tab with the Telephony Costs card and two number cards with Calls, SMS and MMS switches.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b3b7029682823e113e7f207b13f1aafc017fb2cf9c5b6057822a461990e28c3d.png)

## Set It Up Step by Step

1. Connect a number: **Add Number** on the **Numbers** tab. See "[Phone Numbers](https://docs.axl.tech/phone-numbers)".
2. Decide who answers calls to it: your team, a phone you forward to, or an AI voice agent. See "[Incoming Calls](https://docs.axl.tech/incoming-calls)".
3. Add the team members who work the number and make calls from the browser. See "[Calls in the Browser](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-in-the-browser)".
4. If you want an AI to answer or make calls, create a voice agent. See "[AI Voice Agents](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-voice-agents)".
5. To send texts, complete SMS registration. See "[SMS and SMS Registration](https://docs.axl.tech/telephony-sms)".
6. To call a list of contacts with the AI agent, create a call campaign. See "[Call Campaigns](https://docs.axl.tech/call-campaigns)".

## What It Costs

The **Telephony Costs** card on the **Numbers** tab shows what you spent this month, the monthly fee for your numbers, how many numbers you have, and how much money is available for telephony.

- Numbers, calls and texts are paid from your account balance. Bonuses and the credit limit can't be used for telephony, so keep real money on the balance or turn on auto-recharge in **Settings → Billing**.
- Recording transcription, call summaries and AI voice agent minutes are billed as AI usage.
- The exact prices for your account are in **Call & SMS Rates** on the **Numbers** tab. See "[Phone Numbers](https://docs.axl.tech/phone-numbers)".

## Your Own Telephony Provider

If your team already works with Zadarma, OnlinePBX, Novofon, Mango Office, RingCentral, Kcell or Twilio, you can connect that account instead of buying AXL numbers. Open the **Integrations** tab, click **Add Integration**, choose the provider and enter the keys from its account. The integration then has its own tab with its settings: whether to save and transcribe recordings, extensions for your team members and, for some providers, the provider balance. Calls through such an integration are billed by the provider, not by AXL. For an example, see "[Connecting IP Telephony from Zadarma](https://docs.axl.tech/connecting-ip-telephony-from-zadarma)".

![Telephony page with the Numbers, Call Settings, SMS Registration, Analytics, History, Call Campaigns and Integrations tabs, and Add Integration.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d4ca9a02ba1fe8c23cdd74e4ff4a7853f8e96e3604a6e71e9db6836c27721e4c.png)

---

# Phone Numbers

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/phone-numbers

> Connect a phone number, choose between local and toll-free, set up recording, outgoing calls and the team that works the number, and check rates.

A phone number is what your customers call and what your calls and texts come from. You can connect as many numbers as you need, for example one per department or per country, and give each its own team and its own way of handling incoming calls. Numbers are on the **Numbers** tab of **Communications → Telephony**.

## Connect a Number

1. On the **Numbers** tab, click **Add Number**.
2. Choose the **Country** and the **Number Type**. Optionally, enter digits or letters the number should contain. Click **Search**.
3. The window says whether the carrier needs documents for this country and type. With **No Documents**, the number works right after purchase.

![Connect a Number dialog with Country United States, Number Type Toll-Free, the No Documents note, and the Local and Toll-Free cards explaining what each type is for.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/96de280c430b390997dfee49b9dbc71b51e4acdaf2c380269ce36497514d5753.png)

4. The results show what each number supports (calls, SMS, MMS) and its monthly and one-time price. Click **Connect** next to the number you want.

![Number search results with the Calls, SMS and MMS capabilities, a monthly and a one-time price, and a Connect button for each number.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f5f753bfff3ed2f7d5bef6ad194eb725aac24684b64f18ae9e521b948475fc1.png)

Where the carrier needs documents, AXL asks for them after you pick the number, and the number shows **Under review by the carrier** until it is approved. Its rent starts once the number is activated.

## Local or Toll-Free

The available types depend on the country. In the US and Canada:

- **Local**: best for sales and one-to-one texting. People recognize the area code and answer more often, and a text from a local number reads like a message from a person. It costs less to rent, but texting is slow, about one message per second, so it doesn't suit broadcasts. Turning on SMS for a local number needs a paid registration. See "[SMS and SMS Registration](https://docs.axl.tech/telephony-sms)".
- **Toll-Free**: best for broadcasts and automations. After a free verification it sends about 20 texts per second with no daily limit, so a broadcast to 10,000 contacts goes out in about eight minutes. Calls work like on any other number, though people answer them a little less often.

## The Number Card

Each number on the **Numbers** tab has a card with its status, the monthly price and the date of the next charge, and switches for **Calls**, **SMS** and **MMS**. Turning SMS on starts the SMS registration. Below the switches, the card shows who works the number. **No One Assigned** means no team member can take its calls yet. **Settings** opens everything else.

![Two number cards: one with the No One Assigned warning and one assigned to Alex Morgan, each with its price, next charge date, Calls, SMS and MMS switches and Settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b3b7029682823e113e7f207b13f1aafc017fb2cf9c5b6057822a461990e28c3d.png)

## Number Settings

Click **Settings** on the number card:

- **Name**: an optional name to tell your numbers apart.
- **Call Recording & Analysis**: **Record and transcribe calls, and create an AI summary** is on by default. The transcript and summary appear on the call card. Transcription and analysis are billed as AI usage.
- **Who Hears the Recording Notice**: **Everyone (Recommended)** or **Never**. Check what the law requires where you and your customers are.
- **Incoming Calls**: ring the team, forward to a phone number, or let an AI agent answer. See "[Incoming Calls](https://docs.axl.tech/incoming-calls)".
- **Outgoing Calls**: **All Countries**, **Only the selected countries** or **All countries except the selected**. A number can only narrow the account-wide list in "[Call Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/call-settings)".
- **Use for outgoing calls when it is cheaper**: makes this a substitute number. See below.
- **Who Uses This Number**: the team members who work the number. **Calls** lets them take and make calls on it, **SMS** gives them its shared text inbox, and **Default** makes it the number their calls go out from. Each person has only one default number. **Add Team Member** adds a colleague; the trash can removes one.

![Outgoing Calls set to All Countries, the Use for outgoing calls when it is cheaper switch, and Who Uses This Number with a team member who has Calls permission and Add Team Member.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d5722d002aba65e0ca5c01c8bb4330a30b1a9e58fcd9954ed6aaf5b53c541f9f.png)

Click **Save** to apply the changes. **Release** at the bottom gives the number up; you are asked to confirm.

## Substitute Numbers

The price of a call depends on the country of the number it is made from, and the difference can be several times. A substitute number lets AXL pick the cheaper number for each call by itself.

1. Connect a number in the country you call often.
2. Open its **Settings**, turn on **Use for outgoing calls when it is cheaper** and click **Save**. The card shows **Substitute number**.

From then on, calls by any team member and by AI agents go out from this number whenever it is cheaper for the destination. Nobody needs to be assigned to it.

**Important:**

- AXL switches only when it saves at least 20% and at least half a cent per minute, so customers don't see an unfamiliar number for a tiny saving.
- The substitute must support calls, and its allowed countries must include the destination.
- When a customer calls the substitute number back, the call rings the team member who last called them from it. Other calls to it follow the number's own incoming-call settings.

The **Calls can be cheaper** card on the **Numbers** tab estimates the saving from your recent calls and suggests a number to turn on or buy.

## Call and SMS Rates

Click **Call & SMS Rates** at the top of the Telephony page. In **From**, choose one of your numbers or a country where you are thinking of buying one; in **To**, pick one or several countries to compare.

- The prices already include the AXL fee: this is exactly what your account pays.
- Calls are billed per minute. Texts are billed per segment: 160 Latin characters, or 70 with Cyrillic or emoji.
- Transcription and AI summaries are billed separately, as AI usage.

![Call & SMS Rates dialog with a From number, the United States as the destination, and per-minute call, per-segment SMS and monthly number rental prices.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c445ca9613d7ab2666843f0e9da2d7855a2e540eb5721d26c1f6fe94b5eb3e4a.png)

---

# Incoming Calls

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/incoming-calls

> Choose what happens when someone calls your number: ring the team, forward to a phone, or let an AI voice agent answer, with hold and fallbacks.

Every number decides for itself what happens when someone calls it. Calls can ring your team in the browser, go to a cell phone or landline, or be answered by an AI voice agent, for example at night or when everyone is busy. Open **Communications → Telephony**, click **Settings** on the number card and choose one option under **Incoming Calls**.

## Ring the Team

The call rings everyone who has **Calls** permission on this number. Everyone free to take a call is rung at once; colleagues already on a call are rung only when nobody else is free. Two options make sure the caller is not left hanging:

- **If everyone is busy, callers wait on hold**: the caller hears a short message and music, and the first colleague who becomes free gets the call. Set **Wait no longer than** in seconds. When the wait runs out, the AI agent answers if one is set; otherwise the call ends as missed.
- **If nobody answers, an AI agent picks up**: your team's phones ring first for the time set in **The team rings for**, and then the caller goes to the voice agent you choose instead of hearing silence. Tick **If the agent can't answer either, let the caller leave a message** to take a voicemail in that case.

![Ring the Team selected with callers waiting on hold for up to 120 seconds, an AI agent picking up after the team rings, the Northstar Front Desk voice agent, and the voicemail option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c447dd9ce6bb23f929e31d83c84bd2231e4bc7e46f66730d933283c9692e60e4.png)

## Forward to a Phone Number

Calls go to the cell phone or landline you enter in **Forward to**. Your team can still make outgoing calls from the number and share its texts.

## AI Agent Answers

A voice agent answers every call, talks with the caller and saves the transcript to the call history. Choose the agent in the list; agents are created in **Settings → AI Agents**. See "[AI Voice Agents](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-voice-agents)".

Under **If the Agent Can't Answer**, choose what happens when the agent can't take a call: the account reached its AI limit or ran out of balance, the agent is switched off, or the voice service is down. The call is then transferred instead of getting a busy signal:

- **Ring This Number's Team**.
- **Ring chosen colleagues**: pick them in the list.
- **Nobody — the caller hears busy**.

Either way, you get an email about the missed call.

![AI Agent Answers selected with the Northstar Front Desk voice agent and the fallback set to Ring This Number’s Team.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/be9fb8cc9f0a7a625d6c2b523f94da91da09ac1738065908eb70f1f51e674892.png)

Click **Save** in the number settings to apply the choice.

## Where Calls Show Up

Team members hear incoming calls in the phone window in the browser. See "[Calls in the Browser](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-in-the-browser)". Every call, including calls the AI agent handled, is listed on the **History** tab with its recording, transcript and summary. See "[Call Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-analytics)".

---

# Calls in the Browser

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/calls-in-the-browser

> Make and take calls in AXL: the phone window, caller ID, a second call on hold, call outcomes and notes, sound settings and your own call list.

Your team calls customers and takes their calls right in AXL, without a desk phone. During a call, the phone window shows who you are talking to: the contact, their deals, local time and notes, so you never have to look things up. After the call, AXL saves the outcome, your note, the recording and an AI summary on the contact's card.

To use the phone, a team member must be added to a number with **Calls** permission. See "[Phone Numbers](https://docs.axl.tech/phone-numbers)".

## The Phone Window

Click the phone icon in the top bar. A green dot on it means the phone is on: incoming calls ring even if the window is closed.

![Phone window with the caller ID number, the Name or number field and the keypad.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/df13b53bf4be061f04e44c545d11eb054c4532627ba313664d7ee2f4f1dba651.png)

- **Caller ID**: the number your call goes out from, normally your default number. When a substitute number is cheaper for the destination, the window says so.
- **Name or number**: type a contact's name or a phone number, or use the keypad, then press the call button. You can also call from the contact card.
- The clock icon opens **My calls**: your calls on your numbers with their status (missed, no answer, busy, voicemail and so on), a date filter, and buttons to call back or write a text.
- The gear opens **Sound settings**: choose the microphone and speaker, check the microphone level and play a test sound.

## During a Call

The **Contact** pane shows the contact's name, deals, local time, email and notes. If the number isn't in your CRM yet, **Add contact** creates the contact. The buttons at the bottom mute the microphone, open the keypad and end the call.

If a second call comes in while you are talking, the window shows **Second call**: **Hold and answer** puts the current caller on hold and connects the new one, and **Swap** switches between them. When you finish one call, you go back to the one on hold.

## After the Call

When the call ends, the window shows **Call ended**:

- **Call summary**: AXL transcribes the recording and writes a short summary while you watch. If the recording is too short or unclear, the summary says so.
- **How did it go?**: pick the outcome, for example Agreed or Not interested. The list comes from "[Call Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/call-settings)". Outcomes with a suggested follow-up offer to create a task, and the **Call back later** button creates a task to call back in an hour.
- **Notes**: a comment saved with the call.

Click **Save**, or **Skip** to close without an outcome. **Open call** opens the call card with the recording, transcript, summary and cost. Every call also appears on the **History** tab. See "[Call Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-analytics)".

## Incoming Calls

An incoming call shows the caller and the **Answer** and **Decline** buttons. Whether it rings you depends on the number's incoming-call settings. See "[Incoming Calls](https://docs.axl.tech/incoming-calls)".

---

# AI Voice Agents

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/ai-voice-agents

> Create a voice agent that answers calls to your numbers and calls your contacts: greeting, instructions, voice, meetings, forms, selling and testing.

A voice agent is an AI that talks on the phone for you. It answers calls to your numbers in the voice you choose and follows your instructions. It recognizes callers who are already your contacts, can book them a meeting, fill in a form during the conversation and even sell a product, and it saves the transcript and summary to the call card. The same agent can call your contacts in a call campaign or from an automation.

Voice agents are in **Settings → AI Agents**, together with chat agents and AI tutors.

## Create a Voice Agent

1. Open **Settings → AI Agents** and click **Create Agent**.
2. Choose **Voice Agent**.

![What should this agent do? dialog with Chat Agent, AI Tutor and Voice Agent.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/510dbed265fd8109294707cdd73ced6d984964fa7511a199736ad666bbc51137.png)

The agent is created switched off, so it doesn't answer anyone before it is ready. The switch at the top of its page turns it on. While it is off, calls to numbers routed to it ring your team instead.

![Voice agent page Northstar Front Desk with the Disabled switch, General Settings, and the Try It card saying no numbers are routed to this agent yet.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ea002ac4c271bb3d727c8be209f6f4f550e9eda300affddacd617b79b9a30fa3.png)

## Who the Agent Is

- **Name** and **Description**: for you, to tell agents apart.
- **Agent Introduces Itself As**: the name the agent uses on the call and the name shown in the call history.
- **Greeting**: spoken word for word the moment the call connects, before the AI is involved, so the caller never waits in silence. Leave it empty to let the caller speak first. Contact tags work here.
- **Instructions**: who the agent is, what it must find out and how it should end the call. Keep it short: this is spoken, not read. Contact tags such as #Contact.FirstName# are filled in on each call. **Edit with AI** rewrites the instructions from your request.

You don't need to describe how to talk on the phone. AXL adds its base rules to every agent: short spoken answers, confirming what was heard before acting on it, asking again when something is unclear, never inventing facts, staying on the purpose of the call and ending with a summary. Write only who the agent is and what it must achieve.

![General Settings of the Northstar Front Desk agent: name, description, introduces itself as Skylar, the greeting and the instructions with Edit with AI.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8ad80199fe24e6e97f8d3882d6a8510177a8959e69954ace69f6d18e4c6300c1.png)

## What the Agent Can Do

- **Meetings the Agent Can Book**: booking pages the agent may check and book for the caller during the call. Attach several to cover several people.
- **Form the Agent Fills Out**: a form whose questions the agent asks during every call, in conversation, and saves the answers.
- **Selling on Calls**: **Let the agent sell products** lets the agent create an order during the call and send the payment link. A call campaign or an automation step can have its own selling settings, which then apply instead. The settings are the same as in "[Call Campaigns](https://docs.axl.tech/call-campaigns)".

## Voice and Behavior

- **Voice**: click **Change**, listen to the previews and pick a voice. English voices are available for now.
- **Speech Rate**: from 0.7× to 1.3×.
- **Model**: **Fast** answers in about a third of a second and suits scripted calls; **Optimal** follows long instructions better at about half a second more per answer.
- **Max Call Length (min)** and **Hang Up After Silence (sec)**: when the agent ends the call.
- **The caller can interrupt the agent** and **Interruption Sensitivity**: with **Low**, the agent keeps talking through short noises and needs a few clear words to stop, which suits noisy lines; with **High**, it yields the moment the caller starts speaking.
- **Write a summary after each call**: the transcript is always kept; the summary is paid in AI credits, like call transcription on your numbers.

![Voice agent settings: meetings, form, Selling on Calls, the default voice with Change, speech rate, Fast model, maximum call length 15 minutes, hang up after 30 seconds of silence, interruptions with Normal sensitivity, the summary switch and the billing note.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0999e2aa232995873e12875c1435af9119d98f1f85f1586c0ced05207186e5bb.png)

Click **Save Changes** at the bottom of the page.

**Important:** calls are billed per minute: AI agent minutes plus your number's regular call minutes.

## Send Calls to the Agent

An agent answers calls only on numbers routed to it. Open **Communications → Telephony**, click **Settings** on the number, choose **AI Agent Answers** under **Incoming Calls** and pick the agent. You can also keep **Ring the Team** and let the agent pick up when nobody answers. See "[Incoming Calls](https://docs.axl.tech/incoming-calls)".

## Try It

The **Try It** card on the agent's page has two modes:

- **I Call the Agent**: lists the numbers routed to the agent. Call one of them from your phone; the agent picks up, and the card shows the conversation live.
- **Agent Calls Me**: enter your phone number and the agent calls you from one of your numbers. This is a real call: its minutes and the agent's credits are billed as usual.

Test calls land in the call history with their transcript.

## Other Ways to Use the Agent

- Call a list of contacts: "[Call Campaigns](https://docs.axl.tech/call-campaigns)".
- Call a contact from an automation: "[AI Calls](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-calls)".

---

# Call Campaigns

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/call-campaigns

> Let an AI voice agent call a list of contacts: who to call, the script, calling hours, retries, outcomes, selling on the call and launching.

A call campaign lets an AI voice agent call a list of contacts for you, a few at a time and only during calling hours. Use it for a survey after a visit, a reminder about an unpaid order, an invitation to a webinar, or to reconnect with customers who haven't contacted you in a while. The agent has the conversations, records the outcome of each call, and an automation acts on the outcomes.

You need a voice agent first. See "[AI Voice Agents](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-voice-agents)".

## Create a Campaign

Open **Communications → Telephony**, the **Call Campaigns** tab, and click **New Call Campaign**.

![Call Campaigns tab with its explanation and the New Call Campaign button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2adfbf5e52e8349abb16632b9b64186419c16099dd024354410ff4569522c3ed.png)

- **Name**: so you can find the campaign later.
- **Voice Agent**: the agent that makes the calls.
- **Opening Line**: spoken word for word as soon as someone answers, instead of the agent's usual greeting. Say who is calling, from which company, and ask whether it's a good time to talk. Contact tags such as #Contact.FirstName# are filled in. Leave it empty to use the agent's greeting.
- **Campaign Instructions**: why the agent is calling, what to ask or offer and how to end the conversation. They are added on top of the agent's own instructions on every call of the campaign.

![New call campaign with a name, the voice agent, an opening line and campaign instructions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4216061a9c4fa49c0ef415de82f619074dc2c59fcc337a34c4d468ea7666f032.png)

Calls go out from the number routed to the selected agent. If no number is routed to it, the account's first number with calls is used.

## Who to Call

Build the audience with CRM contact filters, including OR conditions and AND condition groups. Click **Count Contacts** to see how many contacts can be called and the estimated cost. The list is fixed when the campaign starts.

![Who to Call filter with a date condition, Count Contacts and the number of callable contacts with an estimate.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8caf7aaf4f8fdaeb2411e107ce0c98d4dcfafc4fafbb4a3e9eb4cbaebf0814fe.png)

## Pace and Calling Hours

- **Concurrent Calls**: how many calls run at once.
- **Limit Calling Hours**: the hours when contacts may be called. The hours are in the local time of the person being called, worked out from the phone number and the contact card, or the account time zone if neither tells. US and Canadian numbers are never called before 8:00 AM or after 9:00 PM their time.
- **Scheduled Start (Optional)**: start the campaign automatically at a set date and time instead of right away.

![Pace and Calling Hours with ten concurrent calls, a 09:00–20:00 window and an optional scheduled start.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/47fa2a995bee2e27d4eafd956251ec35e29c7fbb93ceaf7a970f320174e9ee19.png)

## If No One Answers

Turn on **Call Again** to retry unanswered calls, and set the interval for each attempt. **Add Retry** adds an attempt; the trash can removes one. Under **If an answering machine picks up**, choose **Hang up without a message (recommended)** or **Leave a message**.

![If No One Answers with retries after 15 minutes and 2 hours, and the answering-machine choice.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e6dab87b420ed52e4de2a8a028bd708bb49d8192d6cd2e91d4a7d9af43ac75e3.png)

## Call Outcomes

Turn on **Read the transcript and determine the outcome (uses AI credits)** to have AI decide the outcome of each call. Click **Add Outcome** to describe your own outcomes. **Fill variables from the call** extracts information from the conversation, such as a budget, for use in the automation, a contact field or an email; **Save answers to the contact card as a note** keeps them on the contact.

When you save the campaign, AXL creates an automation with a branch for each outcome. Click **Open Automation** to decide what happens next, for example create a deal for everyone who is ready to enroll.

![Call outcomes with a Ready to enroll outcome, a budget variable and the option to save answers as a contact note.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/050d6983103ccf2d0fe8a85d390c00ef498c6e42e9bd1d68ac9c67695a209b36.png)

## Forms and Meetings

**Form the Agent Fills Out**: a form whose questions the agent asks during the call. **Meetings the Agent Can Book**: the booking pages the agent may use; if none is chosen, the agent's own pages are used.

![Additional settings with the form the agent fills out and the meetings the agent can book.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ae2e294d0d4c5c4080c6c86199ad6ad22bc3f0bd50431687e58c018077125070.png)

## Selling on Calls

Turn on **Let the agent sell products** to let the agent create an order during the conversation, and choose **Selected Products** or **All Products Available for Sale**.

**Send the payment link right away** sends the link during the call. AXL tries the channels you choose in the order you set and uses the first one that can reach the person: your SMS number can reach anyone by phone number (with an approved SMS registration), while Telegram, WhatsApp and other chat channels work only if the person has messaged you before. Write the message with the tags #Contact.FirstName#, #Order.Number#, #Order.Content# and #Order.PaymentLink#. You can also turn on **Also send an email if the contact has an email address**.

If no channel and no email is chosen, the agent still creates the order and tells the customer that a team member will send the payment link.

![Selling on Calls with a selected product, a chat channel and the payment-link message, and the email option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b23f81c1d1adbe4ed81f13d2cac605b0a77445b948686568f52a3cba451da051.png)

## Test and Launch

Click **Test Call** to hear how the agent handles the conversation. Then click **Save** to keep the campaign as a draft, or **Save and Start** to launch it.

![Bottom of the campaign form with Cancel, Test Call, Save and Save and Start.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/48cc0b0e38e8e9d958cd28ed69f4a50b6b18900ee116a0c1f99ed22aea5e4287.png)

The campaign list shows the progress and how many calls were answered. Every call appears on the **History** tab with its transcript. See "[Call Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-analytics)".

---

# SMS and SMS Registration

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/telephony-sms

> Turn on texting for your numbers: why carriers require registration, what it costs, how long it takes, and who on the team can text.

Your AXL numbers can send and receive texts, so you can message customers from the same number they call. Before a number can text, mobile carriers require a registration of your business. Without it, messages are rejected or silently filtered, which is worse than a rejection. Calls don't need any registration.

## Which Registration You Need

- US and Canadian local numbers need a paid business registration (10DLC).
- US and Canadian toll-free numbers get a free verification instead.
- Numbers in any other country need only a short form about who is sending.

A business is registered once. Adding another number to an existing registration is free, with no new application and no second monthly fee.

## What It Costs

For a US or Canadian local number:

- $13.00 now for registering your business with the carriers, plus $39.00 for the first three months of registration.
- After that, $13.00 a month while SMS stays on. Switch it off and the monthly charge stops.
- **Extended Business Check**, $52.00 one-time (recommended): a standard registration is approved but kept slow, about one text per second and about 2,000 texts a day. The extended check is an independent review of your business that gives it a trust score: the higher it is, the faster you can send and the more texts per day.

The charges are taken from the real money on your balance; bonuses and the credit limit can't be used. A review usually takes a few business days, and calls on the number keep working throughout.

## Turn On SMS

1. On the **Numbers** tab, turn on the **SMS** switch on the number card.
2. If your account is already registered, choose the registration to add the number to. Otherwise, or to register a separate brand, read the charges, tick **I understand these charges** and click **Continue**.
3. Fill in the form about your business and how you text customers. **Fill with AI** drafts the descriptions from a few answers; check them before sending.

The **SMS Registration** tab shows each registration with its status, the numbers it covers and what it costs. If the form is incomplete, the tab says how many fields are left; carriers reject incomplete forms. Numbers that can text but aren't covered by any registration are listed under **Numbers Without SMS**.

## Texting

Team members with **SMS** permission on a number share one inbox for it. Texts appear in **Communications → Chat** like other conversations, and you can write from the phone window. Texts are billed per segment: 160 Latin characters, or 70 with Cyrillic or emoji.

**MMS** (picture messages) works once SMS is approved: it uses the same registration. Turn it on with the **MMS** switch on the number card.

To send texts to many contacts at once, use a toll-free number. See "[Phone Numbers](https://docs.axl.tech/phone-numbers)".

---

# Call Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/call-settings

> Limit the countries your account can call and set up the call outcomes your team and the AI use after each call.

The **Call Settings** tab of **Communications → Telephony** holds the rules that apply to every number in your account: which countries can be called, and the list of outcomes a call can end with. Outcomes keep your call history comparable: everyone marks calls the same way, and the AI uses the same list when it analyzes calls.

## Countries You Can Call

Choose **All Countries**, **Only Selected Countries** or **All Countries Except Selected**, then click **Save**. The rule applies to every number, for both team calls and AI calls. A number's own outgoing rule can only narrow this list. Calls to a blocked country don't connect, and the caller hears a short message.

## Call Outcomes

The outcomes are what a team member picks right after a call, for example Agreed or Not interested. Rename them however you like, add new ones with **Add** or delete them with the trash can.

- **Counts As**: **Good**, **Neutral** or **Bad**, for analytics.
- **Suggest Follow-Up**: after a call with this outcome, the phone window offers to create a task, for example to call back.

![Call Settings tab with Countries You Can Call set to All Countries and six call outcomes with Counts As and Suggest Follow-Up.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ce242750608aeefabae1aa6e55da3d78e5912df1e7deed22669a780f1e11b878.png)

See also "[Calls in the Browser](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-in-the-browser)" and "[Telephony](https://docs.axl.tech/telephony)".

---

# Call Analytics

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/calls-analytics

> Track team call performance on the Analytics tab and review every call on the History tab in Communications → Telephony.

Call analytics shows how your team works on the phone: how many calls were made and taken, how long they lasted and how many led to sales. The History tab lists every call with its recording, transcript and cost, so you can check any conversation.

You'll find call analytics in "Communications" → "Telephony", on the "Analytics" and "History" tabs.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Analytics

History

## Analytics

Open "Communications" in the left menu and select "Telephony". Call analytics is split into two tabs on this page:

- Analytics (page address: /telephony/analytics). Summary figures for each team member over the selected period: the number of inbound and outbound calls, their duration, sales, and conversion. Use this data to spot bottlenecks and improve how the team works with customers.
- History (page address: /telephony/history). A list of individual calls: who called whom, when, how long the call lasted, its status, cost, and recording.

Both tabs are available to admins who have the "Call Analytics & History" permission.

![Telephony Analytics with Call Connected and This Month filters and nine summary metrics: three inbound calls, three outbound calls, six calls in total and 22 minutes of conversation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8eb9adaa9227538964cbcb5564571e858428f2b557c605470358a36ceb9c9b2f.png)
The active filters apply to all nine summary metrics. This example contains six connected calls with an average duration of 3 minutes 40 seconds.

The filter at the top of the "Analytics" tab helps you find the data you need without scrolling through everything. All dates use your account's time zone.

These filter conditions are available:

- Date Created. Includes a call when its start or end falls within the selected period, using your account's time zone. By default, the tab opens with "This week". You can also choose "Today", "Yesterday", "Last week", "This month", or "Last month", or set specific dates. To see stats for a single day, choose "Today" or "Yesterday", or a period that starts and ends on that day.
- Admin. Shows stats for the selected team members only.
- Call Connected. A call counts as connected if it lasted more than 10 seconds. This condition is added to the filter by default.
When the toggle is on, the analytics counts only calls longer than 10 seconds, so you can focus on real conversations with customers.
When the toggle is off, it counts only calls of 10 seconds or less: missed, failed, and very short calls.
To count all calls regardless of duration, remove this condition from the filter.
- Duration (Seconds). Limits calls by duration, from and to the number of seconds you enter.

Note: the analytics counts only calls that a team member took part in. Calls handled entirely by an AI agent aren't included, but they appear on the "History" tab.

For an all-calls report, remove **Call Connected** entirely. Turning it off selects the short-call group; it does not mean “ignore this filter.” Check the active filter chips before comparing totals.

Click Add Filter to choose another condition. Conditions already in use are omitted from this menu. To see all available choices, remove the active conditions with their × buttons first.

![Telephony Analytics tab with Add Filter open beside the active Call Connected and Date Created conditions, showing the remaining Admin and Duration (Seconds) choices.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8922079877731dee62f182fc90517d08ac5ecad7c5a623eaa7c4415f9aa5509d.png)
Remove the active conditions with their × buttons to show all available choices in Add Filter. Select a condition to add it to the report.

The "Manage Filters" menu helps you analyze call data more precisely and share your view with others.

Choose filter conditions to narrow down the calls you see. The menu also includes "Clear" to reset the current filter. Check the conditions that remain afterward. For an unfiltered report, remove each condition with its × button. Filters can't be saved on this tab.
You can copy a unique link to your filter settings and send it to other team members, so they open the same filter and see the same selection of calls.
Sharing filters this way helps the team find the data it needs faster.

Click the "Manage Filters" button, then click "Copy Link." The link to the filter is copied to your clipboard.

![Manage Filters menu with Clear and Copy Link beside the active Call Connected and This Month conditions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6a01cb6817deaded8dc1cd6620f359a653292c627208bc03cc21826931809382.png)
Use Copy Link to copy the current filter view. Clear resets the filter; check the conditions afterward.

Your filter settings are also saved in the page address. You can copy the address and send it to your colleagues. When a colleague opens the link, the "Analytics" tab opens with your filter applied.

Below the filter, you'll see overall call figures:

1. Inbound. The number of inbound calls, meaning calls from customers to your team. This metric shows customer interest in your services and helps you spot peak periods.
2. Outbound. The number of outbound calls team members made to prospects or existing customers.
3. Total Calls. The total number of calls, inbound and outbound. This metric shows the team's workload.
4. Inbound Duration. The total duration of inbound calls.
5. Outbound Duration. The total duration of outbound calls.
6. Duration. The total duration of all calls, inbound and outbound.
7. Avg. Duration. The average duration of one call: the total duration divided by the number of calls.
8. Total Sales. The sum of payments attributed to the inbound and outbound calls included in this report. AXL looks for the contact's latest qualifying call whose start or end falls in the 24 hours before the payment's recorded date and time. The call must last more than 10 seconds and have an answered, in-progress, completed, or waiting-for-completion status. The payment is attributed to that call. A later payment is not automatically credited to every earlier call.
9. Conversion %. The number of calls with a positive attributed payment amount, divided by the total number of calls included in the report, multiplied by 100. Each call is counted once in this percentage even if several payments are attributed to it. Your date, admin, connection, and duration filters affect which calls are included.

Next is the "Team Call Stats" chart.
Use this chart to analyze how effective your team members are at selling or advising customers over the phone. It shows how their calls affect overall business results and where you can improve.

Use the switch above the chart to choose which metric it shows:

- Total Calls. The total number of calls handled by team members over a certain period.
- Duration. The total duration of calls over the selected period. Together with the call count, it shows how much time the team spends on the phone.
- Total Sales. Payments attributed to each team member's calls in the selected report, using the same attribution rule as the Total Sales figure above.

![Team Call Stats chart split evenly between three inbound and three outbound calls, with Total Calls, Duration and Total Sales switches; the Calls by Team Member row shows 22 minutes for Alex Morgan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/52e31b173085d3f89cfabdafe6e366ab0340f4de7aee676a4d51ac094bfefa4b.png)
The chart and table summarize the same calls. Switch the chart between Total Calls, Duration and Total Sales, then compare each team member in the table.

Below the chart is the "Calls by Team Member" table.
This table gives detailed customer-interaction figures for each team member, so you can see how effectively each one is working and where to improve.

## History

Use the "History" tab to review and track calls. It lists inbound and outbound calls with these columns:

1. From. Who made the call: a team member, a contact, an AI agent, or a phone number.
2. To. Who received the call.
3. Duration. How long the call lasted. The call status, such as Missed, appears below it.
4. Cost. What the call cost. For calls on AXL numbers, hover over the amount to see the breakdown.
5. Date. The date and time of the call.
6. Source. How the call started: an incoming call, the web phone, an automation, a manual call, a call campaign, or bulk calling.
7. Integration Type. The telephony integration the call went through.
8. Actions. Click "Details" to open the call details: the recording (you can play and download it), the transcript and AI summary of the conversation if they're enabled, the call result, and the cost breakdown. You can also open the call details by clicking the row.

![Telephony History showing six completed calls between Alex Morgan, Olivia Bennett and Aria Sullivan, with all eight columns and a Details button on every row.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/01cce226789d83194ab522bfa77c329262e56a812b70fe7c4dff0419b30bcc1b.png)
The history lists individual calls with their participants, duration, date, source and integration type. Open Details for the information available for a particular call.

At the top of the page, you'll find a search bar and a filter:

- Search. Search calls by keyword.
- Click "Add Filter" and select a condition from the list:

    - Date. Filters calls by the start and end date and time.
    - Incoming Call. Shows only incoming calls.
    - Duration. Filters calls by a specific duration.
    - Admin. Filters calls made by a specific team member.
    - Contact. Filters calls with specific contacts from your CRM.

![Telephony History tab with Add Filter open beside Search, showing Admin, Contact, Date, Duration, and Incoming Call.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d56533116d777613c44934156e0a8043a1b9c7679e6349a8a639de941be31e4b.png)
Click Add Filter on the History tab to choose a condition. Search is a separate field above the call list.

---

# AI Calls

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/ai-calls

> Use AI Calls to have a voice AI agent call your contacts from an automation, qualify leads, and save the results to the contact record.

AI Calls let you call contacts automatically with a voice AI agent. Add an AI Call to an AXL automation, and the agent handles the conversation. The automation then determines the call outcome, extracts the data you need from the transcript, and continues along the matching branch.

For example, an AI agent can qualify a new lead by asking about the company’s number of employees, industry, and revenue. After the call, AXL can save the answers to the contact record and determine whether the customer is ready to buy.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Adding an AI Call to an Automation

AI Call Step Settings

Running the Automation

## Adding an AI Call to an Automation

Go to Settings → Automations. Create a new automation or open an existing one. To learn more about creating and using automations, see the Automations section.

In AXL, an automation is a sequence of triggers and actions that runs automatically once it’s triggered.

Add the AI Call action to the automation and connect it to the previous step. Then open the settings of the new step.

![Automation palette on the Actions tab with AI Call found by search, and the AI Call step connected to Automation Started on the canvas.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a5aebed8ae78d16dbd2f37ae47bc8b1b2b8994cfcb074e860bff9a9682f2caf0.png)

## AI Call Step Settings

The following fields are available in the step settings:

1. Step Name. Enter a name for the step. The name is used only within the automation and helps you tell one AI Call from another.
2. Voice Agent. Select one of your voice agents from Settings → AI Agents.
3. **Outbound Number.** Select the number the agent calls from, or leave the automatic choice to use a number routed to that agent.
4. Wait for Call to End (Minutes). If AXL gets no response within this time, the automation continues through the No Answer branch.
5. **Call back if there is no answer.** Turn this on to retry unanswered or busy calls, and set the delay before each additional attempt. Voicemail also triggers these retries; after the last attempt, the call follows the Voicemail branch. Calls answered by a person are not redialed by this setting.
6. **Analyze call outcome.** Turn this on to have AI read an answered call’s transcript and choose a matching outcome. This uses paid AI credits when there is a transcript to analyze and a configured outcome to evaluate. The provider’s answered, unanswered, voicemail and failed statuses work without this transcript analysis; that does not make the call itself free. Calling charges are separate. Add custom outcomes such as **Ready to Buy** with the condition “The customer confirmed that they want to purchase or asked how to pay,” or **Not Ready to Buy** with a condition describing a declined purchase. Connect each outcome to its next action.
7. Call Branches. In addition to custom outcomes, the step can include technical call branches:

    - Call Connected: The person answered and talked with the agent. This branch runs for every answered call, alongside the outcome branch. Connect anything here that should happen regardless of the outcome, such as saving call variables.

    - Call Placed: Runs the moment the call is placed, while the step waits for the call to end. Use this branch for actions that should run in parallel, such as letting the contact know a call is coming.

    **No Answer.** Nobody answered, the line was busy, or the wait time expired. If retries are configured, this branch runs after they are exhausted. The provider status does not require paid transcript analysis.

    **Voicemail.** The call reached an answering machine. This branch runs after any configured retries. The provider status does not require paid transcript analysis.
8. **Outcome Unclear.** With call analysis on, the person was reached but the conversation matched none of your outcomes.
9. **Fill variables from the call.** AI reads an answered call’s transcript and extracts the facts you specify, such as budget or preferred appointment time. Give each variable a key and a description. Each extracted value becomes a `{CallVar.key}` tag that later actions can save to a contact field or insert into an email. Extraction uses paid AI credits. If outcome analysis and extraction are both enabled, they share one transcript-analysis request.
10. **Form the Agent Fills Out.** A form whose questions the agent asks during the call, in conversation. Questions the contact card already answers are not asked. After the call, the answers are saved to the form on the contact card, and the step also leaves through **Form filled in** or **Form not filled in**, beside the outcome. Leave it empty to use the agent's own form, if it has one.
11. **Meetings the Agent Can Book.** Booking pages the agent may check and book for the contact during the call. If none are chosen, the agent's own booking pages apply.
12. **Selling on Calls.** **Let the agent sell products** sets what the agent may sell on this call and how the payment link reaches the person once the order exists. It replaces the agent's own selling settings for this step, and the step also leaves through **Order created** when an order was made.
13. **Testing.** To check a voice agent before you activate the automation, place a test call from the agent's page (Settings → AI Agents). After you change the step, save it to apply your changes.

**If an answering machine picks up** lets you choose to hang up or leave a message. If you choose **Leave a message**, enter the message and review the notice in the form. When retries are enabled, the message is left only on the last attempt.

![AI Call step settings: step name Qualify the lead, the Northstar Front Desk voice agent, the outbound number, a 30-minute wait and a second attempt after 30 minutes.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/79d61ecc1df9a161d9e13ac1843a1436e3cc9450bfd529b069daa271b1f84f04.png)

![Analyze call outcome turned on, the Call Connected, Call Placed, No Answer and Voicemail branches, a custom Ready to buy outcome with its condition, Add Outcome and Outcome Unclear.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bc87e3060044b7b1b8d6551f9c02d7fa904bf11528432e6f689f1f53a02f5a0b.png)

![Fill variables from the call with a team_size variable and its CallVar tag, Form the Agent Fills Out, Meetings the Agent Can Book and Selling on Calls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f7391757795301aa80c0ecd7f719d8b0c7d88bebdaf8cb5cc15496997eca2d7f.png)

## Running the Automation

Connect all the required actions and set the automation to Active. When the automation runs for a contact, the AI Call action automatically calls the phone number on that contact’s record.

**Important:** with an AXL voice agent, the call is not placed when the contact is marked **Do Not Call** in their card, when the account's telephony balance is used up, or when the AI spending limit for agents is reached. Check these before testing, and make sure you have the contacts' consent to be called.

After the call ends, the automation:

1. determines the technical call result;
2. analyzes the conversation if call analysis is on;
3. extracts the variables you configured;
4. selects the matching branch;
5. runs the actions connected to that branch.

![Automation with Automation Started, the Qualify the lead AI Call step and its branches, and an Add Task step connected to the Ready to buy branch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f459461b2b4798901480eedbed894404a71a7c8dfbd012d1a0a4d11cf40eefd.png)

As a result, AI Calls work as a complete step in CRM automation, from the first customer interaction to lead qualification and saving the results of the conversation.

## Check the call flow before activation

1. Choose the voice agent and outbound number in the **AI Call** step. Give the step a name that describes its purpose, such as “Confirm consultation requirements”.
2. Set the wait time and any retry intervals, then connect each outcome you use. Keep the **Call Placed** branch distinct from the branches that run after the conversation.
3. If you extract call variables, connect the actions that save or use those values after the call. Defining a variable alone does not explain where the information will be used.
4. Place a test call from the voice agent’s page to a phone number you control; it is a real call, not a preview. Review the conversation, then save the step.
5. Activate the automation only after checking the trigger and every connected outcome. Review the resulting call and contact information after your controlled test.

---

# Connecting IP Telephony from Zadarma

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/connecting-ip-telephony-from-zadarma

> Connect your Zadarma IP telephony to AXL: get your API key and secret key from Zadarma, then add the integration under Telephony.

Connect an existing Zadarma virtual PBX to AXL to use its telephony integration. You need a configured Zadarma account, its API key and secret key, and permission to manage call settings in AXL.

This article covers obtaining the credentials and adding the integration. Configure the PBX and its extension lines in Zadarma before connecting it to AXL.

## Set Up Zadarma

Sign in to your [Zadarma account](https://my.zadarma.com/), or register one if needed. Create and configure your virtual PBX, including its extension lines and incoming-call routing. Follow the [official Zadarma CRM integration guide](https://zadarma.com/en/support/instructions/crm-zadarma/) for the provider prerequisites.

In your Zadarma account, open **Settings → Integrations and API** and locate the API-key section.

![Historical Zadarma Settings menu with Integrations and API highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/688ac1b4dfa81858d8905c88223347a70d21114bae75ad9c233a6eb1ff5ef03a.png)
Historical Zadarma interface reference. Menu appearance may differ in your account; the official guide identifies **Settings → Integrations and API**.

Generate API credentials if your account does not already have them, then copy the **Key** and **Secret**. An account with existing credentials may show **Change keys**; you do not need to replace working credentials merely to copy them. See [Zadarma API documentation](https://zadarma.com/en/support/api/) for current authorization requirements and limits.

![Historical Zadarma Keys and API panel with concealed Key and Secret values and the Change keys control.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/27595f51c6404d9c059008e47c064b9b95990c0b59719ac55c32c316675c50e7.png)
Historical provider reference showing an account with existing keys. Credentials were already concealed in the original image. The request limits printed in this older screenshot are historical; use the current API documentation for limits.

Follow any confirmation instructions shown by Zadarma, including email confirmation if requested. Keep the key and secret private: enter them only in the intended integration settings, and do not include them in screenshots or public messages.

## Connect Zadarma to AXL

In AXL, go to **Communications → Telephony** and open **Integrations**. Click **Add Integration**.

![Current AXL Telephony Integrations tab for Northstar Academy, showing Add Integration and an empty integrations list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/84f2edf8abf85f2f5a8805d0690d86dbcacd9b3cbc003c481d9636130167945e.png)
Current AXL entry point. This example account has no connected external telephony provider.

Complete the **Add Integration** form:

1. **Integration Type**: choose **Zadarma**.
2. **Key**: paste the API key from Zadarma.
3. **Secret Key**: paste its matching secret.

Both credential fields are required when creating the integration.

![Complete current Add Integration form with Zadarma selected, empty required Key and Secret Key fields, and Cancel and Add buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/13c2d0001bbe579d84437e1c13433d26aba256b84c66bcf3bff6eeedec036e1e.png)
Current blank Zadarma form. No credentials have been entered, and the integration has not been submitted in this example.

Review the credentials, then click **Add** when you are ready to connect. AXL checks the provider credentials and configures the Zadarma call-notification URL. The integration appears in the list only after these steps succeed.

If AXL reports an error, check the key and secret, the PBX setup, and whether the same Zadarma account is already connected to another AXL account. Correct the cause before retrying. Adding credentials alone does not demonstrate that an extension can make or receive calls; finish the provider and extension configuration before using the integration.

After calls are available in AXL, use the **Analytics** and **History** tabs under Telephony to review call volume, duration, outcomes and related sales metrics. Read [Calls Analytics](https://docs.axl.tech/calls-analytics) for report filters and metric definitions.

---

# Email Section

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/mail-section

> A quick tour of the Email section: sent emails, suppression list, mailing lists, broadcasts, email templates, and email settings.

In the Email section, you manage your outgoing emails and broadcasts.

The side menu has four items: **Sent Emails**, **Broadcasts**, **Mailing Lists** and **Email Settings**. The **Email & Broadcasts** page also has tabs for **Deliverability**, **Suppression List** and **Email Templates**.

Here's a quick look at each tab. Click a section below to jump to its description:

Sent Emails

Suppression List

Mailing Lists

Broadcasts

Email Templates

Email Settings

## Sent Emails

This tab lists outgoing email records from broadcasts and other automatic or manual messages, including queued, sent, failed and suppressed attempts. For each record, you can see:

Each row shows the subject, the recipient, opens, clicks, attributed sales, the sending status (Queued, Sent, Failed or Suppressed) and the date. Sent means the message left AXL, not that it reached the inbox.

For every column and the message details, see "[Sent Emails](https://docs.axl.tech/sent)".

## Deliverability

Click the **Deliverability** tab and choose **7 days**, **30 days** or **90 days**. Review the sending and delivery totals, bounces, spam complaints and engagement, then check **Why letters bounced** and **By recipients’ mail service** for a pattern. Daily charts appear when enough data is available. Read the page’s notice if statistics are not collected or there are too few messages to show rates.

## Suppression List

Use the suppression list to block addresses from ordinary account mailings. You can add an address manually. Essential account-access messages and test emails are exceptions. To learn how to add addresses, see the article "[Suppression List](https://docs.axl.tech/stop-list)".

![Suppression List with search, Add Email, an address with the Requested opt-out reason, creation date and edit/delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dc13156ebc66913b1da800656cb77dbd492c9109a0e2fa669652d19c8d0f943b.png)
The list shows excluded addresses and their reasons. When the reason is Other, the comment appears in the Reason column.

## Mailing Lists

On **Mailing Lists**, create and manage recipient groups for broadcasts. Use a **Dynamic** list to evaluate its conditions when sending, or a **Static** list to keep the contacts selected when the list is created or updated. See [Mailing Lists](https://docs.axl.tech/mailing-lists) for the setup and refresh controls.

This tab shows your existing mailing lists:

1. Title. Opens the Edit Mailing List window, just like the Edit button. Here you can change the sending conditions.
2. Description. A description of the mailing list.
3. Date Created. The date the mailing list was created.
4. Type. Dynamic or Static.
5. Actions. Each row has three buttons:
6. Edit button. Lets you make changes to the mailing list.
7. Copy button. Creates a copy of the mailing list.
8. Delete button. Deletes the mailing list.

![Northstar mailing lists with Dynamic and Static types, descriptions, creation dates and edit/copy/delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8dd7770d844b044274568af1ffd44bc42316a6d1235fb9be6fb0d5ef0946849b.png)
Choose a list by title to review its settings, or use Create Mailing List to add another recipient group.

To learn more about the conditions for sending emails, see the article "[Conditions for Broadcasts](https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-for-mailing)".

## Broadcasts

A broadcast sends an email, a chat message, or both to a group of contacts. Choose a saved mailing list or define a contact filter in the broadcast form. Open **Broadcasts** to create one or inspect existing campaigns.

The table shows each broadcast's schedule, status and progress, its sending results by channel, and opens, clicks, unsubscribes and sales. For every column and the statuses, see "[Broadcasts](https://docs.axl.tech/broadcast)".

![Northstar Broadcasts table with email sending results, progress, opens, clicks, unsubscribes, sales, schedule and Sent statuses.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4cd70a71bbb39d5e7fc7a749a36f4a47ed3c74eb89c73781ededa11663ee6de.png)
Use this table for campaign-level results. Sent means processing is complete; review errors and individual email records when investigating delivery.

After a broadcast goes out, you can review the results: opens, clicks, and unsubscribes. Use this data to improve your next broadcasts. For details on how to create and edit a broadcast, see the article "[Broadcasts](https://docs.axl.tech/broadcast)".

## Email Templates

An email template is a ready-made email you can send to contacts. You can create templates and use them in different broadcasts, which helps you create broadcasts quickly. You can edit a template or create a new broadcast based on it. To learn how to create and edit templates, see the article "[Email Templates](https://docs.axl.tech/email-templates)".

![Email Templates filtered to Northstar, with Create Template, table/card controls, one reusable template and its management actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8050c4c7e452cce28b1d41a084f1c994fec8963aa0943d84e80a28e70bb6307a.png)
Prepare reusable email content here. A template that has not been used can have zero engagement counters and no last-sent date.

## Email Settings

On the Email Settings page, you set up how your emails are sent and received. It has three tabs.

Sending Profiles are the services that send your emails.

**System Templates** are built-in notification templates. Open one to view it; **Customize Template** starts the flow for your account’s replacement.

Incoming Email is where you set up incoming email.

For more details, see the "[Email Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/mail-settings)" article.

![Email Settings with Sending Profiles, System Templates and Incoming Email tabs, and Northstar Academy Updates marked Built-in and Primary.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0abd457d692ab2f6faa9b2ea9f03e68a936092240a76f42909f18b57d265bef9.png)
Open the appropriate tab to manage sending profiles, notification templates or incoming email addresses.

## Choose where to start

1. To set up a sender or mailbox, open **Email Settings**. Sending profiles control outgoing mail; incoming addresses control the built-in mailbox.
2. To prepare reusable content, open **Email Templates**. Save and test a template before using it in a broadcast.
3. To define recipients, create a **Mailing List**, or use the contact-filter audience option directly in the broadcast form.
4. To send or schedule the message, open **Broadcasts** and configure the audience, content, and time.
5. After sending, use broadcast statistics for the campaign and **Sent Emails** for an individual message. Open its subject to inspect the recipient, status, and content.

---

# Sent Emails

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/sent

> Inspect outgoing email records, sending statuses, opens, clicks, sales and recorded delivery events.

**Sent Emails** lists outgoing email records generated automatically or manually, including queued, sent, failed and suppressed attempts. A row does not by itself mean that the email was delivered.

Go to "Email" → "Sent Emails".

The table shows the following for each email:

1. Subject. The subject line of the email.
2. Contact. The email address of the contact the email was or will be sent to.
3. **Admin**. The recipient team member’s email address, linked to their team profile, when the message is addressed to a team member. This column is empty for messages addressed only to contacts.
4. Opens. The number of times the email was opened.
5. Clicks. The number of clicks on links in the email.
6. **Sales**. The number of sales or the revenue attributed to the email. Use it to assess the email’s contribution to sales; revenue alone does not measure profit.
7. **Status**. The sending status: Queued, Sent, Failed, or Suppressed. Use Delivery History in the message details to check recorded delivery events; Sent alone does not confirm arrival in the recipient’s inbox.
8. **Date**. The sent timestamp, when recorded. It is empty for a message that has no sent timestamp.

![Sent Emails filtered to two Northstar broadcasts, with six recipient records, engagement counters, Sent and Failed statuses, and dates.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/84fb34061ad95ef0c3e1352325c5065a749dd41ee7a90b99d4800f00891492ce.png)
Use Add Filter to narrow the list, for example by Broadcast. Click a subject to inspect that email’s sending result and content.

Click an email's subject to open the "View Email" panel, which shows more details:

1. **Date Sent**. The sent timestamp, shown only when one is recorded.
2. **From**. The sender address stored for this email.
3. **To**. The recipient address stored for this email.
4. Contact. The contact's name and email address.
5. **Status**. The sending status: Queued, Sent, Failed, or Suppressed. For failed or suppressed messages outside the mailbox, a Resend button is available. It is not offered for inbound mail or messages sent manually from the mailbox. Check the failure or suppression reason before retrying; clicking Resend initiates another send.
6. **Template**. Shown when the record is linked to a reusable email template. Click its subject to open that template.
7. **Broadcast**. Shown when the email belongs to a broadcast. Click its title to open that broadcast.
8. Stats. The number of opens and clicks.
9. **Delivery History**. Recorded provider events appear here automatically. An empty history means no events are available for this message.
10. **Subject**. The subject stored with the email record.
11. **Body**. The stored email content. Check it alongside the status; content is also available for unsuccessful attempts.

![View Email for Sofia’s Northstar workbook message, with sender, recipient, Sent status, Broadcast, stats, empty Delivery History, subject and full body.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cef270cdf1876cb2c5390bfd79e4208575d4a3d0527c6ef6f15a4f7532c33cdf.png)
The Broadcast link identifies the campaign. Delivery History is already visible; this example has no recorded provider events.

## Inspect one email before resending

1. Open **Email → Sent Emails** and locate the intended recipient and subject.
2. Click the subject to open **View Email**. Check the sender, recipient, available timestamp, status and stored body.
3. For a failed or suppressed email, investigate the displayed state and the recipient’s suppression entry before retrying. Correct the reason for the failure first.
4. If a resend is appropriate and available, use **Resend**, then check the new sending result rather than assuming the retry succeeded.

A sent status and an open are different events. Use the message’s opens and clicks to inspect recorded engagement; do not treat “Sent” as proof that the recipient read it.

In **View Email**, check the **Delivery History** section for recorded delivery events. An empty history means no events are available for this message; continue investigating its sending status.

![Failed Northstar email with sender, recipient, contact, failure-information icon, Resend, Broadcast and Stats.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/de8b9100a68386cf5223bfd03f7fedd20fdf1dab1b7130c0fe16c8dfb1a5687b.png)
Inspect the failure information and correct its cause before using Resend. Resend attempts another send; check the result afterward.

---

# Mailing Lists

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/mailing-lists

> Learn what a mailing list is and how to create and manage one.

A mailing list is a group of contacts you send broadcasts to, selected by conditions you set.

On the "Mailing Lists" tab, you create and manage your mailing lists. Each list defines who receives a particular email, so you can filter your contacts and send different emails to different groups.

For example, you can create a list of contacts who completed a specific course in your Membership Portal. Or you can find the contacts who haven't signed in to your Membership Portal for a long time and remind them to keep learning. There are many conditions to choose from. For details on each filter and search condition, see the article "[Conditions for mailing](https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-for-mailing)".

Conditions let you build any contact filter. You can add specific contacts to a list, and you can also exclude contacts by certain parameters.

For example, a Last Activity Date condition earlier than a chosen date identifies inactive contacts. To exclude that audience, configure the filter’s exclusion logic rather than treating a matching condition as an exclusion. Click "View" to inspect the actual contacts before saving.

## How to Create a Mailing List

Go to "Email" → "Mailing Lists".

![Mailing Lists with Northstar Academy Static and Dynamic lists, Create Mailing List, all table columns, and edit, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/694623e8eba14cfe4f7f59d2069f0bd0c3f932df1a6cf1fcc1d586a85611ebc5.png)
Create a list here, then use the actions on its row to edit, copy or delete it. Static and Dynamic lists appear together.

Click "Create Mailing List" and fill in the form:

1. Type: static or dynamic. 

    - Static lists are filled in manually. To add contacts to a static list, select them on the CRM page and use the "Add to Mailing List" bulk action.
    - Dynamic lists add contacts automatically, based on the conditions you set.
2. Title. Enter a name for this mailing list.
3. Description. Add a description for this mailing list.
4. Conditions (dynamic lists only). Select conditions from the list. After you select a condition, set its options. For details on each condition, see the article "[Conditions for mailing](https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-for-mailing)".
5. View. Click "View" next to the number of contacts found to see the matching contacts in a separate window.

![New Mailing List form with Dynamic selected, a Northstar Academy program updates title, Subscribed to Email Broadcasts set to Yes, 43 matching contacts, View, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c340d8054045937c9990e4c8133d0a7e1b7def20e4d3418c4f3c3355fef1d710.png)
Dynamic list example: Subscribed to Email Broadcasts is Yes. Click View to inspect matching contacts before clicking Create; the count updates as your contacts change.

As you add conditions, the list filters your contacts and shows you the results. When you are done, click "Create".

Your mailing list is ready. A dynamic list updates automatically: any contact who meets your conditions in the future is added to it.

## Managing Mailing Lists

On the "Mailing Lists" tab, you can see the lists you have created and manage them.

The list overview above shows both list types and the actions at the right of each row.

1. Title. For example, "Northstar Academy — Newsletter subscribers."
2. Description. A short note about the list. For example: "Contacts subscribed to email updates about Northstar Academy programs."
3. Date Created. The exact date and time the list was created.
4. Type. Dynamic (contacts are selected from your CRM automatically, based on conditions) or static (contacts are added manually).
5. Actions:

    - Edit button. Click to edit the list. You can change the title, description, and conditions.
    - Copy button. Click to create a copy of the list.
    - Delete button. Click to delete the list.

## Check who is actually on the list

1. Choose the list type when creating it. Use a **Dynamic** list for filter-based membership or a **Static** list for contacts you select yourself; the type is not editable on an existing list.
2. For a dynamic list, add the conditions and click **View** to inspect the matching contacts. Check an expected member and an expected exclusion before clicking **Create**.
3. For a static list, save the list, open CRM, select the intended contacts, and use **Add to Mailing List** from bulk actions. Reopen the list to check its members.
4. When editing an existing list, click **Save**. Select the saved list in a broadcast when you are ready to send; creating or editing the list itself does not send messages.

---

# Broadcasts

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/broadcast

> Create, schedule, and manage broadcasts that send emails and chat messages to your contacts.

A broadcast is a message you send to a group of contacts at once, by email, chat, or both.

Click a section below to jump to it:

How to Create a Broadcast

Managing Broadcasts

## How to Create a Broadcast

Go to **Email → Broadcasts** and click **Create Broadcast**. The Broadcasts table below shows the entry button and management controls.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Choose a name that tells you at a glance what this broadcast is about.
2. Description. Add a description so you can quickly see what this broadcast is about.
3. Audience Source. Choose "Mailing List" to select a saved list, or "Contact Filter" to define the audience in this broadcast. For a saved list, select it or click "Create Mailing List". For more on creating a mailing list, see the article "[Mailing Lists](https://docs.axl.tech/mailing-lists)".
4. When to Send. Select "Send Now" to send the broadcast as soon as you click "Create", or "Send Later" to send it at a time you choose. If you select "Send Later", set the date and time in the field and click "OK".
5. Chat Message. Turn on the switch to send the broadcast through chat channels. It goes to contacts who are subscribed to the selected chat channels. The settings for this block are described below.
6. Email. Turn on the switch to send the broadcast by email. The settings for this block are described below.

![New Broadcast with a Northstar mailing-list audience, Send Later, date and time, and the account time zone.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/29ad3e5c4f5d56c7d76c7fb684a41fc4239af92932d650e3badea6bc77f05249.png)
An unsaved scheduling example. Review the audience, date, time and displayed account time zone before creating the broadcast.

Chat Message. Turn on the "Chat Message" switch to send the broadcast through chat channels. It goes to contacts who are subscribed to the selected chat channels.

1. Chat Message. In the field, write the text of the message that recipients will see.

    - Insert Break. Use this to choose where the message splits into parts. If a message is longer than the maximum number of characters allowed per message, it is split automatically. But the automatic split is not always ideal. For example, it can cut a sentence or paragraph in two. With "Insert Break", you decide exactly where the split happens, so the text keeps its logical structure.
    - Add Template Variables. Insert variables into the message text. When the message is sent, each variable is replaced with the matching data, such as the recipient's name, a date, or other personal details. Variables make your messages more personal. They are especially useful for broadcasts, where each message must address a specific person or include unique data.

    - How to format messages. Click this control to open a table showing which chat channels support each kind of formatting (bold, italic, underline, strikethrough, link, spoiler, code).
2. Click or drag files to upload. You can attach files to the broadcast. Click the area to choose files from your device (computer or laptop), or drag them in.

    - File limits by messaging app. Click this control to open a table of parameters and limits for each messaging app. Video messages (round videos) can be sent in Telegram. Voice messages can be sent in Telegram, Facebook, WhatsApp, and Instagram.
3. **Buttons**. Add a label and URL for each button in a chat broadcast. Button support and delivery layout depend on the selected channel. AXL sends at most 100 ordinary buttons in one Telegram message, 7 in Viber, 3 in Facebook, Instagram or WhatsApp, and 4 in LINE. For channels other than Viber, additional supported buttons are split into message groups. For Viber, AXL keeps only the first seven; a new keyboard replaces the previous keyboard in the chat. In Wazzup24, ordinary buttons are supported for WhatsApp, not its other channel types. Message templates use their own button settings. Click **Add Button** to open the fields:

    - **Button Text**. Enter a short label that remains clear if it is cut off. AXL currently limits ordinary button labels to 64 characters for Telegram, 250 for Viber, and 20 for Facebook, Instagram, WhatsApp and LINE. Text beyond the channel limit is truncated.
    - **URL**. Enter the destination link. The AXL field accepts up to 128 characters and supports variables, like the message text. For an ordinary WhatsApp button sent by AXL, clicking the button sends the URL in a separate chat message; the recipient then opens that link.
    - **Add Button**. Click to add another button, then enter its label and URL. Use the channel limits above when planning how the buttons will appear; adding a fourth button does not mean that all four will appear together in every messenger.
4. General Settings.

    - **Link Preview**. Requests a preview of a linked page where the selected messenger supports it. The preview may include the page title, an image and a description.
    - **Send files as video and voice messages**. Enable this to request round-video or voice-message delivery for supported media and channels. It does not turn a photo into a video. AXL can convert supported audio for some voice-message channels, but conversion and delivery can still fail. For a Telegram round video, use a square MP4 no longer than one minute. AXL’s Telegram voice route uses OGG/Opus and a 50 MB limit; other channels have their own requirements. Check **File limits by messaging app** for the destination, then test the received media with a contact you control. Saving a recording from Telegram does not guarantee its format or successful delivery in a later broadcast.
    - Delete the message if there's no response within. The message is deleted if the user does not click a button or reply within the time you set. This works in Telegram and Internal Chat.
5. **Advanced Channel Settings**. This section appears when your account has an active Facebook or Telegram channel available for broadcasts. It contains the settings for those channel types:

    - **Facebook tag**. Choose a tag only when the message qualifies for that category under Meta's current messaging rules. A tag is not general permission to send marketing messages outside the allowed messaging window. The AXL selector lists `ACCOUNT_UPDATE` (account updates), `CONFIRMED_EVENT_UPDATE` (registered-event updates), `CUSTOMER_FEEDBACK` (feedback requests) and `POST_PURCHASE_UPDATE` (order updates). Check current availability and eligibility with Meta before using a tag; the presence of an option in AXL does not guarantee that Meta accepts it for your account or message.
    - **Enable protected content (Telegram)**. Enables Telegram's protection against forwarding and saving the sent message. It does not change who may receive the message or grant access to your content.
6. **Test Messages**. Select a chat channel and a user, then click **Send Test Message** to send the test. Choosing the channel and user alone does not send anything. The channel and user are remembered for the next test.

    - Chat Channel. Select a chat channel from the list.
    - Chat User. Select a user from the list.
    - Send Test Message. Click to send a test message to the selected user in the selected chat channel.
7. **Delivery Channels**. The system tries the selected chat channels in the order listed. If no chat message is sent, AXL attempts email only when email content is enabled and configured and the contact is eligible to receive it. Enabling the option to send email regardless of the chat result also attempts email after a successful chat send. Email delivery is not guaranteed. For channel settings, see [Chat Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-channels).

![Broadcast Chat Message with a first-name variable, formatting and file controls, and a workbook link button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0f99a89b8a996b6f3df7ed7aadb556bce74ef521262129c9480aa95f1f0faf5a.png)
Write the message and add the button label and destination URL. This example links to the Strategy Lab workbook.

![Broadcast General Settings, expanded Test Messages with Send Test Message, and Internal selected under Delivery Channels.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5bb8654529e167adfa1d76c3417a505b1679e5819284a6fef568ce4edcc17ef9.png)
Review general options and channel order. Email fallback requires enabled, configured email content and an eligible recipient; the channel help text alone does not enable it.

You can add variables to the message text.
A template variable is a value that is replaced automatically with the data you choose. It can be the contact's first name, email, the account name, a personal link to the Membership Portal, and so on. When the message is sent, each variable is replaced with that recipient's data. For example, add the variable "Contact first name", and each recipient sees their own first name. Or select the variable "Personal link to the account" so the contact can follow the link to their personal account in the Membership Portal.

Click "Add Template Variables". A list opens on the right. Select the variables you need from the list, and they are added to the message text.

![Add Variables drawer with a search field and Contact ID, email, first name, last name and phone variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/32da3602f8b5977831d07340ebd34b7a524196be6cf9e70a9ba8fc72093ed1e4.png)
Choose a variable to insert it at the message cursor. Its value is resolved for each recipient when sending.

**Email**. Turn on the Email switch, then choose how to prepare the content:

1. **Use Template**. Select a saved **Email Template**. **Edit Email** opens that reusable template, so saving edits changes the template itself. **Create Template** creates a separate account template. See [Email Templates](https://docs.axl.tech/email-templates).
2. **No Template**. Click **Create Email**. The chooser opens first: select **From Built-In Template** or **From Account Templates** and choose a design to edit for this broadcast. **Create with AI** is another option; AI generation uses credits. Selecting an existing design here starts a separate inline copy.
3. In the email editor, open **Settings**. Choose the **Email Profile**, enter the **Subject**, and add a **Preheader** for the inbox preview. The sending profile can be built-in or custom; see [Email Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/mail-settings).
4. Edit the **Body** in **Design** or **Code**. Click **View Plain Text Version** to open **Text** and review or edit the plain-text version.
5. To check the email at a real address, use **Send Test Email**, enter an address you control and explicitly send the test. Opening the editor or choosing a recipient is not a test send.
6. For a new inline email, click **Create** in the editor footer to return its content to the broadcast form. This does not create or send the broadcast. **Save as Account Template** is separate: use it if you also want a reusable template. For an existing account template, use **Save**.

After returning, review the email preview and **Send the email whether or not the chat message is delivered**. This option controls whether email is also attempted after a successful chat send.

![Broadcast Email enabled with Use Template, the Northstar Fall Strategy Lab template, email preview, Email Check and the send-regardless checkbox.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0fed8e16cc1c7feb20c8e91c87f0b545862d40b169e80a88cc4d5f8645a7075c.png)
Use Template selects saved content. Review the preview and the option controlling whether email is also sent after successful chat delivery.

![Create Email Template chooser with Create with AI, From Built-In Template and From Account Templates, showing a Northstar template card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cb5933f87f6b4a3cc8e63803a7c2ddb8467fb4bf0ca6d0e56e18bbeabf8af17a.png)
After No Template → Create Email, choose a starting design. The selected design becomes the inline email for this broadcast.

![Inline Northstar email editor on the Settings tab with Email Profile, Subject, Preheader, View Plain Text Version, the full email design, Check and Improve, Send Test Email, Save as Account Template and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/389371109b813810c26cb56bf55d0d633643dc44bf7a2dbd78bd0c85bcf0cf5f.png)
Set the sender and content, then use the editor’s Create button to return to the broadcast form. The broadcast’s own Create button is a separate final action.

When the audience, content and timing are ready, click **Create** in the broadcast drawer. With **Send Now**, this starts sending; with **Send Later**, it schedules the broadcast. Return to **Broadcasts** to check its status and progress.

## Managing Broadcasts

After you create a broadcast, you can manage it: edit, copy, or delete it. Go to "Email" → "Broadcasts". The table shows the following:

1. Date Created. The exact date and time the broadcast was created. The team member who created it is shown too.
2. **Title**. Opens the broadcast, like the Edit button. Audience, content and schedule can be changed only while its state allows editing; sent, sending and preparing broadcasts lock those settings. Title and description remain editable unless the broadcast was deleted.
3. **Sending Stats**. Each email or chat icon shows the sent count and its percentage of processed attempts. Hover to see channel counts and errors. The tooltip’s “Delivered” count is the sending result, not proof that an email reached the recipient’s inbox.
4. Progress. How far along the sending is, as a percentage.
5. **Opens**. Unique email opens and the open rate: unique opens divided by sent emails.
6. **Clicks**. The sum of unique email-link clicks and unique chat-button clicks, with a rate based on sent emails plus sent chat messages. The two channel counters are added; this is not a deduplicated count of people across channels.
7. Unsubscribes. How many people unsubscribed after receiving this email, with the unsubscribe rate as a percentage.
8. Scheduled. The send date and time, or "Immediately" for broadcasts set to send now.
9. **Status**. The current state: Scheduled, Preparing, Sending, Paused, Sent, Stopped, Stopped by Content Check, or Error. Sent means processing is complete; inspect Sending Stats for per-channel errors and individual email details for delivery events.
10. Actions:

    - Statistics button. Click to see the broadcast's statistics. It is available for sent and stopped broadcasts.
    - Edit button. Click to edit the broadcast.
    - Copy button. Click to create a copy of this broadcast.
    - Delete button. Click to delete this broadcast.
    - History button. Click to see the broadcast's history.

![Northstar broadcasts with sending counts, progress, opens, clicks, unsubscribes, sales, schedule and status, plus search, Show deleted and Create Broadcast.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4cd70a71bbb39d5e7fc7a749a36f4a47ed3c74eb89c73781ededa11663ee6de.png)
Review sending results and errors even when the status is Sent. Use the search field and Show deleted above the same table to find a broadcast.

A search bar at the top of the page helps you find the right broadcast quickly.
Select the "Show deleted" checkbox to see broadcasts you deleted earlier.

## Choose and verify the audience

1. In the broadcast form, choose **Audience Source**. Use **Mailing List** for a saved list, or **Contact Filter** to define the audience directly in this broadcast.
2. For a contact filter, add the required conditions and review the matching-contact count and preview. Check exclusions as well as inclusions before continuing. The audience is calculated when sending starts, so contacts who match the conditions by then receive the broadcast too. Email is not sent to contacts without an email address, contacts who unsubscribed from email broadcasts or blocked contacts, whatever the conditions say.
3. Configure email, chat, or both, then send a test to an address or chat user you control. Check the rendered message, variables, links, and channel-specific buttons.
4. Review **When to Send**. With **Send Now**, clicking **Create** starts the send; use **Send Later** if you need a scheduled delivery.
5. After creation, return to the broadcast list and check the schedule, status, and progress. Open its statistics after sending to inspect channel results.

If you turn on both **Chat Message** and **Email**, review **Send the email whether or not the chat message is delivered**. Enable it when the recipient should get both; otherwise review the selected channel order and the email fallback described beside **Delivery Channels**. When using **Send Later**, check the displayed account time zone as well as the date and time.

---

# Email Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/mail-settings

> Set up sending profiles and SMTP, edit system email templates, and manage incoming email addresses for your account.

Email Settings control how your account sends email to your customers. Here you manage the mail server your emails go through. AXL has a built-in mail server that sends your outgoing email by default, but you can connect your own server instead.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Sending Profiles

Built-In Sending Profile

Custom Sending Profile

System Templates

Incoming Email

## Sending Profiles

Go to "Email" → "Email Settings". The "Sending Profiles" tab opens first.

This tab lists your sending profiles. A sending profile is the mail server your emails go through to reach your customers. By default, AXL uses its built-in mail server.

![Sending Profiles with Northstar Academy Updates, Built-in type, zero emails, Primary, edit/delete and Create Email Profile.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0abd457d692ab2f6faa9b2ea9f03e68a936092240a76f42909f18b57d265bef9.png)
Open a profile by its name or edit icon. Create Email Profile opens a new form; the Primary badge identifies the default profile.

AXL has two types of sending profiles: built-in and custom. They differ in how they connect over SMTP.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the standard protocol for sending email.

An SMTP connection does two things:

1. It checks that the settings are correct and authorizes the computer that is trying to send the email.
2. It delivers the outgoing message to the specified address and confirms that the message was sent. If delivery is not possible, the server returns an error to the sender.

## Built-In Sending Profile

The built-in AXL sending profile is set up by default when you create an account. It comes with a ready-made sending domain, such as @s37.accelmail.io, where the number is your account's number on the AXL platform. You choose the prefix (the part of the email address before the @ sign) yourself. It can be your account name, your name, or a generic "no\_reply" address, which is simply an address name; use Reply-To Email to choose where customer replies should go.

In the Sending Profiles list above, click the profile's name or edit icon.

The "Edit Profile" panel opens, where you can set up the built-in AXL profile:

1. Type. The type of SMTP connection. For this profile, it is "Built-in".
2. Title. Enter a name for this profile.
3. Description. You can add a description for this profile.
4. Sender Email. Enter a prefix for your account's email address. Your emails to customers are sent from this address. It can be your account name or your name. To change the mail domain, choose one from the dropdown, or click "Manage Email Domains" to add or edit domains.
5. Sender Name. Enter your name or your account name. Customers see it as the sender's name on the incoming email.
6. Reply-To Email. Enter the email address that receives your customers' replies.
7. Primary. Check this box if this is your primary sending profile. You can have only one primary profile.
8. Additional Text. You can enter extra text in this field. It is added automatically to all outgoing emails. For example, you can add links to your social networks or your account details.
9. Add Unsubscribe Link. Click this button to add an unsubscribe link to the additional text, so it appears in your outgoing emails.

![Built-in Edit Profile with Northstar Academy sender details, Reply-To, Primary, Additional Text, unsubscribe link control, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4aa5235418c31787c58ee327689363ee699c3294ca00706a76d6fb5e47142011.png)
Built-in profile settings. Enter the sender details and optional footer text, then use Save when ready to apply them.

Click **Save** to apply your changes. To create another built-in profile, click **Create Email Profile**, fill in the same fields, then click **Create**. Creating a profile sends a test email to the email address of the administrator performing the action before saving. Editing the sender, email domain, SMTP settings, profile type or **Primary** setting also triggers this test. If AXL reports a test error, check the settings and resolve the error before trying again.

## Custom Sending Profile

A custom sending profile connects a third-party mail server to AXL for sending your outgoing email. Use a mail server that permits the intended sending volume and provides compatible SMTP settings. To create a custom profile, you need to enter the server's settings.

Click **Create Email Profile** in the Sending Profiles list.

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Type. Select "Custom".
2. Title. Enter a name for the profile.
3. Description. Add a description for this profile.
4. SMTP Server. Enter your mail server's SMTP address.
5. SMTP Port. Enter the port number.
6. Require SSL. Check this box if your mail server requires SSL.
7. Username. Enter the SMTP username supplied by your mail provider; it may be an email address.
8. Password. Enter the SMTP credential required by your mail provider. This may be an app-specific password rather than the password used to sign in to webmail.

![Custom New Profile with title, description and the connection section: SMTP server, port 465, Require SSL, username and an empty password field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4c8fcce2d54bc1682aa6ca05035157d4316f04c91c123bbc76d6e14fca408a08.png)
Enter the SMTP settings supplied by your mail provider. The example address and port do not establish a working connection.

In the same panel, fill in the remaining fields:

1. Sender Email. Enter the email address to send from.
2. Sender Name. Recipients see this name as the sender.
3. Reply-To Email. This address can be different from the address you send from, or you can use the same address for sending and receiving.
4. Primary. Check this box to make this your primary profile. System notifications are sent through the primary profile by default. You can have only one primary profile.
5. Additional Text. You can enter extra text in this field. It is added automatically to all outgoing emails. For example, you can add links to your social networks or your account details.
6. Add Unsubscribe Link. Click this button to add an unsubscribe link to the additional text, so it appears in your outgoing emails.

![Custom profile sender and Reply-To fields, Primary unchecked, Northstar footer text, Add Unsubscribe Link, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/300ab33160609a79c907cdf7188cfacba4f0b6be5b293f44e843d236e9a2804b.png)
Continue down the same form to set the sender, replies and footer. Creating the profile performs the test described below.

Click **Create** for a new profile, or **Save** when editing an existing profile. Creating a profile, or changing its sender, email domain, SMTP settings, type or **Primary** setting, sends a test email to your administrator email address before the save completes. Check for a test error and the received message; an unsaved form has not tested the connection.

Built-in and custom profiles appear together in the Sending Profiles list shown above. The list shows:

1. Name. The profile's name. Click it to edit the profile.
2. Type. The profile type: Built-in or Custom.
3. Total Emails Sent. The number of emails sent through this profile.
4. Actions. Here you can see which profile is the primary one. You can also use:
- the "Edit" button. Click to change the profile settings.
- the "Delete" button. Click to delete the profile.

## System Templates

System templates are the email templates AXL uses for notifications after actions such as a booking, registration or online payment. The current **System Templates** tab includes:

- **Meeting Start Reminder**, **Meeting Confirmation** and **Meeting Registration**.
- **Certificate Issued**.
- **Subscription Renewal Payment Failed** and **Subscription Renewal Payment Succeeded**.
- **Upcoming Webinar Reminder**, **Webinar Start Reminder** and **Webinar Registration**.
- **Order Payment**: the payment confirmation sent after an order is paid.
- **User Password Reset**: sent when a user requests a password reset.
- **Sign-Up Invitation**: includes the Membership Portal link when an administrator invites someone.
- **Registration Confirmation**: asks the user to confirm registration after signing up.

Choose the notification type in the list to view or customize its message.

![System Templates tab with thirteen notification types, Create Template, open/click statistics columns and Last Sent.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4780a9daacf6de5ca6ef5dcac2d1fd9579d951542b307227fc0e67862c0d5f08.png)
Click a notification type to open its template. Built-in rows show dashes for open and click statistics.

To customize an existing system notification, click its entry in the **Type** column. A built-in template opens in view-only mode. Click **Customize Template**, then confirm the replacement only when you are ready to customize that notification. The ordinary **Create Template** button opens the separate custom-template creation flow; it does not add a new system notification type.

![Read-only Meeting Confirmation template showing booking variables, Cancel and Customize Template.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/63ea9977b120cea8618548febcb11934c7f9ac09b05da7f52872f017a5f7881a.png)
A built-in notification opens for viewing. Customize Template begins the replacement flow; template variables are filled when the notification is generated.

After you confirm **Customize Template**, AXL creates your account’s customized version and opens the editor:

1. Open **Settings** to edit **Subject** and **Preheader**.
2. Edit the message in **Design**, or use **Code** for HTML. Keep the variables and links needed by this notification.
3. Click **View Plain Text Version** to open **Text** mode and check the text-only content.
4. Use **Preview** to check the layout. **Send Test Email** opens a separate recipient dialog; its Send action actually sends an email.
5. Click **Save**, then reopen the same notification type to check your changes.

Sending-profile and email-type choices available for ordinary custom templates are not editable in the same way for system overrides. For a separate reusable email with its own profile and name, use the [Email Templates](https://docs.axl.tech/email-templates) workflow.

The list of system templates shows these details for each template:

1. **Type**: the system notification represented by the row.
2. **Opens / Unique**: total and unique opens, where tracked.
3. **Open Rate**: unique opens as a percentage of sent emails.
4. **Clicks / Unique**: total and unique link clicks, where tracked.
5. **Click Rate**: unique clicks as a percentage of unique opens.
6. **Last Sent**: the last send date and time.

Built-in template rows show dashes instead of open/click statistics. A customized row may show tracking values; a dash does not prove that delivery failed.

The System Templates list above shows these columns together.

To edit a template you have already customized, open the same entry in the **Type** column:

1. **Settings**: update the subject and preheader.
2. **Design**: edit the body, variables, images, links and formatting. Use **Code** if you need to edit the HTML.
3. **View Plain Text Version**: switch to **Text** to review or edit the plain-text body.
4. **Preview**: inspect the layout before saving.
5. **Send Test Email**: open the separate test-recipient dialog when you are ready to send a test.

Click **Save** and reopen the template to confirm the result. To return a customized system template to its built-in version, use **Reset** and confirm the reset; this replaces the customized content.

## Incoming Email

This tab shows your incoming email settings.

![Incoming Email tab before adding an address, with Add Email and Email, Admins, Sender Name, Date Created and Actions columns.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/079cc01b31c39a2a9748766fb26626898075e91fd826b417467fa8a44ddbebd3.png)
Open Incoming Email and click Add Email to configure an address. The list is empty until an address is added.

The Incoming Email table shown above is empty until an address is added. For each saved address, it shows:

1. Email. The email address.
2. Admins. Team members who can use this address.
3. Sender Name. The name shown as the sender of emails from this address.
4. Date Created. The date the address was created.
5. Actions:
- the "Edit" button. Click to change the address settings.
- the "Delete" button. Click to delete the address.

Click "Add Email" and fill in the fields in the window that opens:

1. Email. Enter the email prefix and select the domain.
2. Sender Name. Enter the sender's name.
3. Catch-All. Check this box to forward all emails sent to mailboxes that are not listed here to this address.
4. Team members who can use this address. Select team members from the list.

![Complete Add Email drawer with admissions prefix, Northstar Academy Admissions sender, Catch-All, team access selector, Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/caf8737baff59e095b758672d6826dd9fc91fb38b2efd412908900a2e7edab02.png)
Enter the prefix and sender name, choose the appropriate Catch-All setting, and select the team members who should have access. This unsaved example has not selected team members or created an address.

Click **Create** at the bottom of the drawer (or **Save** when editing an address). The address then appears in the Incoming Email list.

## Verify a sending profile before using it

1. Open **Email → Email Settings → Sending Profiles**. Create a profile or open the existing one you intend to use.
2. Check the sender address, sender name, and **Reply-To Email**. For a custom profile, copy the SMTP server, port, security, and credentials from your provider’s settings.
3. Click **Create** for a new profile or **Save** for an existing one. Reopen it from the profile list to check the saved values.
4. Select this profile in a test email template, send to a mailbox you control, and inspect the received sender and reply address. Send a reply to confirm it reaches the intended mailbox.

Mark a profile **Primary** only when you want it to be the default used by system notifications. Incoming mailbox addresses and the team members allowed to use them are configured separately on **Incoming Email**.

---

# Mailing List Conditions

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/conditions-for-mailing

> Build a dynamic mailing list with AND/OR conditions, preview matching contacts, and use the complete condition reference.

A dynamic mailing list is built from conditions: for example, customers who bought a product, or students who were active in your Membership Portal in the last 3 days. You then send broadcasts to the list. This article shows how to set up the conditions of a list; the conditions themselves are described in "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

Select a section below to jump to its description:

Creating a Mailing List

Example of a Filter Condition

How a Dynamic List Works

## Creating a Mailing List

Go to "Email" → "Mailing Lists".

![Email &amp; Broadcasts page on the Mailing Lists tab, opened from Email → Mailing Lists in the sidebar.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/142eb3160318888bcc9d4f3982ee554afeee66398847c1f877e308d6543afcb9.png)

Click the "Create Mailing List" button, or click the "Edit" icon next to an existing list.

![Mailing Lists table with a static and a dynamic Northstar Academy list, the Create Mailing List button and edit, copy and delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b141315c7f4aff3ef7c0d92d8101bf4e01f8ea7ad33d04629c3e8f1e065adf10.png)

A panel opens: "New Mailing List" when you create a list, or "Edit Mailing List" when you edit one. Set "Type" to "Dynamic" (the default for a new list), then enter a title and, if you like, a description. The conditions appear below. To add one, open the "Select a filter" dropdown next to "Add 'OR' Condition" and choose a condition from the list. To start another group, click "Add 'AND' Condition Group".
The "AND" and "OR" conditions are logical operations that decide how conditions are grouped. Conditions inside one group are joined by OR, and separate groups are joined by AND.

- AND condition group: All the criteria must be met at the same time. For example, take the condition "A student must complete course A AND course B to receive a certificate." The student has to complete both courses to reach the goal.
- OR condition: Meeting at least one of the criteria is enough. For example, "A student can receive a certificate if they complete course A OR course B." The student can pick either course, and completing it is enough to get the certificate.

    "AND" conditions are stricter, while "OR" conditions give more freedom of choice.

![New Mailing List panel: Dynamic type, title and description filled in, the filter list open and contact counts below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/888f461ca4f05922c7c3d4a2223dba8f413b13dd6f2023c626c76f954e807beb.png)

A mailing list can use every contact condition: see the full list with their settings in "[Filtering and Search Terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".

For example, to match contacts who completed either Leadership Foundations or Team Communication *and* have a phone number, put the two **Course Completed** conditions in one OR group. Add a second AND group containing **Contact Attribute → Phone → Specified**. Use **View** to check the matched contacts before saving the list.

## Example of a Filter Condition

Pick a condition from the list, for example, "Course Completed". A "Yes" or "No" option appears. Choose "Yes". If you choose "No", the list shows contacts who have not completed the course. Next, select a course from the courses in your account. If you click "View", the matching contacts open in a separate panel.

Click "Create" (or "Save" if you are editing an existing list). Your mailing list now has a ready-made targeted audience: the contacts who completed the course you chose. You can send a broadcast to these contacts or export the list.

This is a simple example with a single condition. You can build more complex lists by adding more conditions.

![New dynamic mailing list with Course Completed set to Yes for Northstar Academy - Leadership Certificate, Found 1 contact with a View link, and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e20d67c14595e17d9ccae8c1e8c6ef25066b83b00bad50a8d3d98ee3f16fc61c.png)

## How a Dynamic List Works

- A dynamic list keeps only its conditions. The contacts are selected again when a broadcast to the list starts, so everyone who matches at that moment receives it, including contacts who appeared after you created the list.
- An email broadcast skips contacts without an email address, contacts who unsubscribed from email broadcasts and blocked contacts, whatever the conditions say.
- To check who matches now, click **View** under the conditions before you save the list.

---

# Suppression List

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/stop-list

> Manage email addresses excluded from ordinary account mailings and record why each address is on the suppression list.

Use the suppression list to block an email address from ordinary mailings sent through your account. Add addresses that should no longer receive those emails.

Go to Email → Sent Emails. Then click the "Suppression List" tab at the top of the page.

The list does not block essential account-access messages, such as password resets and confirmation codes. Test emails also bypass this check, so a successful test send does not prove an address will receive a regular mailing.

![Suppression List with olivia.bennett@example.com, Requested opt-out in the Reason column, Date Created, Add Email, search and edit/delete actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/68d74fdd01e580c718b5627d73c52891c8cf68cd2818fb52927fd94c9ffdbec4.png)
The saved address appears in the list. For Other, the Reason column displays your comment; open the address to inspect or edit its saved details.

Click Add Email. In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Email address.
2. The reason for adding the address to the suppression list.
3. A comment about this address.

![Add Email to Suppression List with fictional olivia.bennett@example.com, Other selected as the Reason and Requested opt-out as Comment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/10f1c1b4242d4da4c2387290103bc7f441c63784dfa8fe362364e41ad218b26b.png)
For a manual exclusion, choose the reason that applies and add a concise comment. This example uses Other and Requested opt-out.

After you add an address, it appears in the suppression list. For every address, you can see:

The saved-list example above shows the address and its management actions.

1. The email address.
2. The reason the address was added to the suppression list.
3. Date Created. The date the address was added to the list.
4. Actions. Here you can manage the address: edit it or remove it from the suppression list.

## Add and verify a suppression entry

1. Open **Email → Sent Emails → Suppression List** and click **Add Email**.
2. Enter the exact email address, choose the reason that describes the situation, and add a comment so other team members understand why it is suppressed.
3. Click **Add**. Find the address in the list and reopen it to confirm the saved reason and comment.
4. Use **Save** when editing an existing entry. Remove an entry only after checking why it was added and whether the address should receive messages again.

The **Reason** choices are **Complaint**, **Hard Bounce**, and **Other**. Use the reason that matches the actual issue, and explain manual exclusions in **Comment**.

---

# Email Editor

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/email-editor

> Create and edit emails in the AXL Email Editor with the AI Assistant or manually, then preview, check, and test them before you send.

In the AXL Email Editor, you can create and edit email content and design, work with HTML code, and use the AI Assistant. You can edit an email with natural-language prompts or make changes manually in the editor. Using the AI Assistant is a paid feature.

This article covers the main features of the Email Editor.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

How to Open the Editor

Editing an Email with AI

Editing an Email Manually

Working with HTML Code

Previewing an Email

Checking an Email

Sending a Test Email

Email Type

AI Assistant Pricing

## How to Open the Editor

Go to the Email section, open the Email Templates tab, and select the template you want to edit, or create a new template. The Email Editor opens.
Here, you can edit the email content and design manually or use the AI Assistant.

![Email Templates filtered to Northstar Academy, with all statistics columns, Create Template, Search and edit, copy and delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4ad0f434c7e96f53ab6a9c19eab23f8f54bcc8a0ee1f1842a3a4a77811779eec.png)
Open the intended template by its name or edit icon. Create Template opens the separate creation choices.

## Editing an Email with AI

Open the AI Assistant chat and describe the changes you want to make to the email. You can write your request in plain language.

For example:

- “Make the email copy shorter.”
- “Change the button color to black.”
- “Make the text green.”
- “Add a section describing the product.”
- “Change the email design.”
- “Rewrite the email for webinar attendees.”

You can include several changes in a single request. For example: “Change the font, make the button black, and make the text green.”
The AI Assistant will apply the requested changes to the email. Once the request is complete, review the result. If you need to make additional changes, send another request or edit the email manually.

![AI Assistant in the Email Editor: a request to make the button black, the heading green, and the intro shorter, the assistant summary of the changes, and the updated Northstar Academy email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e96af79636fc9cd1236f1093183bb8830f33d5ac32da2720d908f4775474955b.png)
One request can combine several changes. The AI Assistant lists what it changed, and the updated email appears in the editor.

## Editing an Email Manually

You can make small changes directly in the editor without using the AI Assistant. You can edit the text and individual email elements manually.

For example, you can:

- edit the text;
- change formatting;
- add or edit a link;
- change the settings of individual elements;
- adjust the design.

Manual editing is useful for making small changes after working with the AI Assistant. For example, you can use AI to change the structure and design of the entire email, then manually update a specific phrase or link.

![Complete Northstar Academy template Settings and Design editor, with Transactional selected, sending profile, name, subject, preheader, plain-text control, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6faa70c46c47ae3367d3ea9d257c83a15c71ef0540324a26fb580f7e9f67b654.png)
Use Design for visual editing and Settings for the sender and message fields. The current example is a transactional enrollment confirmation.

## Working with HTML Code

Choose "Code" to work with the email’s HTML. Use "Design" for visual editing or "Text" for the text editing mode.

Use this mode if you need to edit the markup manually or make more precise adjustments to the email.

After making changes, save the email and check how it looks.

![Email Editor Code view displaying the Northstar Academy enrollment HTML, with Chat, Settings, Preview, Design and Text tabs, Check and Improve, Send Test Email, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/70a8d3abcafd4f9f62b1f9efc1104a02acb50435baba7256d9ae1bee8f56d9de.png)
Code exposes the email HTML. Return to Design or Preview to inspect changes; long lines can be scrolled within the code editor.

## Previewing an Email

Before using an email in a campaign, click "Preview". Select "Mobile", "Tablet", or "Desktop" to inspect the layout. Use "Light mode inbox: email as designed" and "Dark mode inbox (approximate)" to compare the simulations. The dark preview is approximate; check a received test email in the email clients your audience uses.

Check the following:

- email copy;
- element placement;
- images;
- design;
- links;
- buttons.

If you find an issue, return to the editor and make the necessary changes manually or with the AI Assistant.

![Email Preview with the mobile device selected, showing the inbox line and the complete Northstar Academy enrollment email, tuition summary, button, and footer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/367c597cc471378dece179cded046b2a53e2e5a242aa284c55383e849b19eefe.png)
Mobile preview: check the complete email, including the summary, button, and footer.

## Checking an Email

Click **Check and Improve** at the bottom of the editor shown above. Opening it starts a check of the current email. Read the findings and recommendations, including any sender-setting issues. The findings depend on the email and sending profile.

Apply a recommended change only after reviewing it, or make the correction manually. Run the check again after corrections.

The check helps identify potential issues before sending. Passing it does not guarantee inbox placement: sender reputation, domain settings, recipient engagement and the receiving provider also affect delivery.

## Sending a Test Email

Click **Send Test Email** at the bottom of the editor. A separate **Recipient Email** dialog opens. Enter a mailbox you control, then click **Send** to send the test. Use **Cancel** or the close control to leave without sending.

Open the test email and check how it appears in your email client, whether the links work correctly, and whether the main elements are displayed properly.

If you need to make changes, return to the editor, update the email, and run the check again.

![Send Test Email dialog with Recipient Email set to the illustrative learner@example.com, Cancel and Send.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd7a7e7bca8f5a338b8c375cdc0b848a98033ce201e2f593c8a4a88518bb43ff.png)
Enter a mailbox you control, then use Send when ready. The example address illustrates the field; this screenshot does not represent a sent or received email.

## Email Type

Open **Settings** in the editor shown above, then select **Marketing** or **Transactional** in **Email Type**. The panel also contains Email Profile, Name, Subject, Preheader and View Plain Text Version.

A transactional email is sent in response to an action the recipient took, such as a booking or order confirmation, access details or a receipt.

Transactional emails:

- do not include an Unsubscribe link;
- do not add AXL’s own click-tracking redirects;
- can be sent to recipients even if they previously unsubscribed from marketing emails.

Your sending provider may still apply its own tracking settings. The Transactional type does not force provider-side tracking off.

Transactional emails are not intended for advertising or marketing campaigns.

A marketing email is intended for email campaigns, promotional offers, announcements, and other marketing communications. These emails include an unsubscribe link and collect click-through statistics.

Correctly separating transactional and marketing emails helps email providers identify the nature of the messages more accurately and may help improve deliverability.

Important: Select the email type based on the email’s actual purpose. Do not use the Transactional type for marketing messages.

## AI Assistant Pricing

The cost of using the AI Assistant is calculated based on actual AI usage. Charges are deducted from your account balance. Manual email editing does not incur AI usage charges.

AXL measures AI usage in credits, also called AXL tokens. The amount charged depends on your plan’s included credits and pricing. Open **Settings → Billing → AI Functions** to check usage in credits and the amount spent.

![AI Functions showing monthly limits for Team Members, Calls, AI Agents and Automation, plus spending, credits and expanded Usage Breakdown.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d61fac85bc55cc201f020c101dcd6dd556d85baf561a55c6fd07ec8d2865c3e9.png)
Open Billing → AI Functions to review period spend, credits and usage. Manually started editor AI requests use the Team Members category; the displayed amounts are example account values.

AI use started manually in the editor counts toward the **Team Members** limit. To check the amount currently set for your account, open **Settings → Billing → AI Functions → Limits by Category**. The account owner can change an editable limit; an empty amount means no limit for that category. **Calls**, **AI Agents**, and **Automation** have separate limits. Each limit resets at the start of the billing period.
The number of tokens used depends on the scope and complexity of the task. For example, making a small change to an email usually takes fewer resources than creating or substantially redesigning an entire email.

## Finish an email before using it in a broadcast

1. Open the intended email template. Check its sending profile, subject, preheader, and **Email Type** before changing the body.
2. Edit the content manually, in HTML, or with the AI Assistant. Review the result after each substantial change, especially personalized variables and button destinations.
3. Click **Preview** and check **Desktop**, **Tablet**, and **Mobile**. Compare the light inbox view and the approximate dark inbox view. Then run **Check and Improve** and review the suggestions before applying them.
4. Send a test to a mailbox you control. Open the received message and check images, line breaks, links, and the unsubscribe behavior appropriate to its email type.
5. Click **Save** before selecting the email for a broadcast. A preview checks the editor output; the received test checks how the email client displays it.

---

# Email Templates

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/email-templates

> Learn what an email template is, how to create one with AI or from a built-in or account template, and how to edit it.

An email template is a ready-made email you can send to contacts.

You can create templates and use them in different broadcasts. Templates help you create broadcasts quickly: you just use the ready-made text. It's easy to edit the text and create a new broadcast based on it.

You can edit existing templates and create new ones on the Email Templates tab.

Go to the "Email" section and select the Broadcasts tab. Then click the "Email Templates" tab at the top of the page.

![Email Templates filtered to Northstar Academy, with all statistics columns, Create Template, Search and edit, copy and delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4ad0f434c7e96f53ab6a9c19eab23f8f54bcc8a0ee1f1842a3a4a77811779eec.png)
Use Search to find a template, then open its name or edit icon. The example has no sent emails, so its delivery and engagement counts are zero.

The Email Templates list above shows existing templates and these statistics:

1. Subject. The name of the template and the subject line of the email.
2. Total Sent. The number of emails sent.
3. Opens / Unique. How many times the email was opened and how many unique recipients opened it. The number of opens can be higher if a recipient opened the email more than once.
4. Open Rate. Unique opens as a percentage of the total number of emails sent.
5. Clicks / Unique. The number of clicks on links in the email, including repeat clicks, and the number of unique clicks.
6. Click Rate. Unique clicks as a percentage of unique opens.
7. **Sales**. The number of attributed purchases and their total amount, displayed as count / revenue. If both totals are zero or missing, the column shows a dash.
8. Last Sent. The date and time the template was last sent.
9. Actions. These buttons are available:

    - The "Edit" button. Click it to make changes to the template.
    - The "Copy" button. Click it to copy the template.
    - The "Delete" button. Click it to delete the template.

To edit an existing template, click its name in **Email Templates** (or its subject if it has no name). Open **Settings** in the editor to review these fields:

1. **Email Profile**. Select the sending profile for the email. Read more in the [Email Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/mail-settings) article.
2. **Name**. Give the template a recognizable name so you can find it in the template list.
3. **Email Type**. Choose **Marketing** for campaigns and promotional messages, or **Transactional** for messages about an action the recipient took, such as an order confirmation. Do not use Transactional for advertising.
4. **Subject**. Enter the subject line recipients will see.
5. **Preheader**. Enter a short summary that appears after the sender and subject in the inbox.
6. **View Plain Text Version**. Click this control to switch to **Text** and review or edit the text-only version.

To edit the email body visually, select **Design**. Select **Code** to edit its HTML. Use **Preview** to inspect the layout before sending.

To check a received copy, click **Send Test Email** at the bottom of the editor. Enter a mailbox you control in the separate window, then click **Send**. Open the received email and check its text, images, buttons and links.

![Complete Northstar Academy template Settings and Design editor, with Transactional selected, sending profile, name, subject, preheader, plain-text control, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6faa70c46c47ae3367d3ea9d257c83a15c71ef0540324a26fb580f7e9f67b654.png)
This enrollment-confirmation example uses Transactional. Review the profile, message fields and body together; use Marketing for promotional messages.

Click **Save**. The editor closes and the template list refreshes. Reopen the template to check that your changes were saved.

To create a template, click **Create Template** in the Email Templates list.

There are three ways to create a template:

1. Create with AI. Chat with the AI Assistant and create a template using text commands. Each request is billed separately, and the cost depends on the request.
2. From Built-In Template. Create a template from one of the platform's ready-made designs. After you create it, you can edit it and customize it to suit your needs.
3. From Account Templates. Create a template from an existing template in your account. You can edit and customize it to suit your needs.

![Create with AI tab showing four prompt suggestions, an empty instruction box, disabled Send, usage-billed notice, and the built-in and account template tabs.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/37c65763f20345d2cb7a0e54e100ba85f2783be0d1362f7f87955876f80c4292.png)
Choose a creation route. In Create with AI, describe the topic, goal and audience; sending the request starts the billed AI workflow.

**Create with AI.** Choose a suggestion to place a starter prompt in the instruction box, or write your own topic, goal and audience. Edit the prompt as needed. When ready, click **Send** to create the template and begin the AI request. AI usage is billed to your account.

After the AI request completes, review the generated body, subject and preheader in the editor. Check facts, dates, offers, variables and destination links; correct anything that does not match your intended message. The Settings and Design view above shows where to review and edit a template. Use **Preview**, check the plain-text version, then save and reopen it. A generated draft still needs your review before sending.

**From Built-In Template.** Choose a ready-made design, or **Blank** for an empty starting point. Selecting a card creates a template and opens its editor. Replace the example text, links and variables, then review its settings and save your changes.

![From Built-In Template library with nine complete design cards, including Blank, Welcome, Promo, Newsletter, event emails, Product Launch, Order Confirmation and Password Reset.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/13b708facfef6dab18a568cfdcafb77bf0c02ded92cd648c4bf904d6290848fc.png)
Choose a built-in design as a starting point. The first nine cards are shown here; scroll for the remaining designs. Selecting a card creates a template and opens its editor.

**From Account Templates.** Use **Search templates** to find an existing template. Selecting its card creates a new template from that content and opens the editor. Customize the copy and review its inherited fields and links before saving. Use **Load More** when the library has additional results.

![From Account Templates with Search templates filtered to Northstar and the existing Fall Strategy Lab template card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1f1bda975008fef8de181a18ee86f0db121caf52ddd26215fe724c8021d8afd8.png)
Search your account templates and select the one to copy. Review the new template’s inherited text, profile and links before using it.

Use **Search** in the Email Templates list to find an existing template quickly. The account-template picker has its own **Search templates** field, shown above.

## Create a reusable template and check it

1. Open **Email Templates** and click **Create Template**. Choose **Create with AI**, **From Built-In Template**, or **From Account Templates**.
2. Open **Settings**, give the template a recognizable name, then set its sending profile, subject, and preheader. Review all inherited text and links when starting from another template.
3. Edit the body and send a test to your own mailbox. Check the received email before using the template for recipients.
4. Click **Save**, return to the template list, and reopen the template to verify the saved content.

Creating a template prepares reusable content. To send it to an audience, select it in a broadcast and configure that broadcast’s recipients and sending time.

---

# Email Client and Incoming Email Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/email-client-and-incoming-mail-settings

> How to set up incoming email addresses and use the built-in email client to send, receive, and manage messages.

The email client lets you work with different mailboxes on the AXL platform. It has all the standard email functions: you can receive and send emails, sort messages, and store them.

You can assign a separate mailbox to each team member or set up several email addresses for one team member. This gives you a kind of corporate email, where you receive replies from contacts.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Mailbox

Incoming Email Settings

Using the Email Client

## Mailbox

Click the envelope icon in the top bar to open your Mailbox. Here you'll see the messages sent to your email address. Before you can use the email client, you need to set up incoming email.

## Incoming Email Settings

Go to "Email" → "Email Settings". Then open the "Incoming Email" tab and click "Add Email".

![Email Settings Incoming Email tab with the Add Email button highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/1c10ab1fde75479ad3853de55ea590946a14d3f54a8a91936fa5591c1bafa7c0.png)

In the "Add Email" window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Email. Enter the email prefix and select the domain.
2. Sender Name. Enter the sender's name.
3. Catch-All. Select this box to forward all emails sent to addresses that aren't listed here to this address.
4. Team members who can use this address. Select team members from the list.

![Add Email panel with the address prefix and domain, sender name, Catch-All, and team members who can use the address.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/23704b089afc38485b1c6168759acebebed060e46a3e4a1dd10b3896543c5fac.png)

To select a domain, click the domain field and choose a domain you've already set up. If you haven't created a domain yet, click "Manage Email Domains".

![Email domain selector with Manage Email Domains.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/880a4ae7d89f313f23c0e965d2d13a70a940c8dedde5ed8eeed2fac466e27b38.png)

A window opens where you can edit a domain or add a new email domain. Click "Add Email Domain", enter the domain name, and click "Create". To learn how to create and configure an email domain, see the article "[Domains](https://docs.axl.tech/domains)".

![Add Domain panel with the Domain field filled in and the Create button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3c7bbad320838acd247972115b252fc2453b78b7330ca2b19a4d3ecedfce12ee.png)

After you add an email, it appears in the incoming email list. You can add a separate email address for each team member.
The list shows:

1. Email. The email address.
2. Admins. The team members who can use this address.
3. Sender Name. The sender's name.
4. Date Created. The exact date and time the email was added.
5. Actions:
The "Edit" button. Click it to open and edit the email.
The "Delete" button. Click it to delete the email.

![Incoming Email tab with hello@s276.accelmail.io, its admins Alex Morgan and Jordan Lee, the sender name, date created, Edit and Delete.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f98127921a0f2baffe4ad0c6a5dc0ceb42f5634848578b8435d6fbf1f69ea783.png)

## Using the Email Client

Click the envelope icon in the top bar. Once you've set up incoming email, you can use your Mailbox here.

To send a new email, click "Compose". In the New Message window that opens, enter the recipient, subject, and message text. You can also attach a file. Then click "Send".

![New message window with From, To, Subject, the message text, an attached PDF and Send.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fabaa04b35c0557719ee6f57781155248abf1c5fe6d9e1c0ba12ef8da5d522b9.png)

A search bar and advanced filters are at the top of the page. Use them to find a message quickly. Click "Advanced Filters" to open more search options.

![Search mail field with Advanced Filters open: From, To, Subject, Date, Has attachments, Reset Filters and Search.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aa341f538a7f38098f931c122dec13024dc84f905af7bc9efbfce209929f4bbe.png)

The mailbox filter is at the top left. If a team member has several mailboxes set up, you can filter emails by incoming email address.

![Mailbox filter in the upper-left corner open with the incoming address hello@s276.accelmail.io.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/aca40f6b3954f7fb4da0af07ba03570751b60a4d12969365d83a5b489494dd61.png)

These commands are available in the email list:

1. Select. Click the Select icon and pick which emails to select: all emails on the current page, read, unread, important, or non-important emails. Then use the buttons that appear to work with the selected emails: delete, mark as unread, and mark as important.
2. Refresh. Click the icon to reload the page and load new messages and changes.
3. View. Change the layout of the page: No Split or Vertical Split.

![Email list toolbar with the Select checkbox and menu arrow, Refresh, page counter and the view switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/627c0ced01336f1f46169df8ce228d7cbc4fa6b00eb8ff6ca3ce25a0d48bb679.png)

With Vertical Split, you can read an email without opening it. Select an email, and its text appears in the pane on the right.
These commands are available for each email:

1. Mark as important. Click the button to add the email to Important.
2. Reply. Click the button to send a reply.
3. Forward. Click the button to forward the email to another recipient.
4. Delete. Click the button to delete the email.
5. Print. Click to print the email.
6. Mark as Unread. Open the More menu and click this option to mark the email as unread.

![Vertical Split mailbox with message actions.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/NA942aSOLEW2xZDkAf0j3Q.png)

## Check the new mailbox

1. In **Email → Email Settings → Incoming Email**, click **Add Email**, enter the address, and select **Team members who can use this address**. Click **Create** after reviewing the form. Confirm the email domain is configured before testing.
2. Open the envelope icon from one of those team members’ accounts and select the intended incoming address in the mailbox filter.
3. Send a message to that address from a mailbox you control. Check that it arrives in the AXL email client.
4. Open the message, click **Reply**, and send a response to your test mailbox. Check the sender address, subject, message body, and any attachment.

Enable **Catch-All** only for the address that should receive messages sent to otherwise unlisted addresses on the domain. It does not replace the team-member access selection.

If the mail client says **You don’t have any linked email addresses**, follow its link to **Incoming Email** and have an administrator assign the address to you. The address must be configured and you must be selected as someone who can use it before the client can show that mailbox.

---

# Telegram Groups/Channels App

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels

> Connect the Telegram Groups/Channels app to approve join requests, ban members, and manage who can access your private Telegram groups and channels.

The Telegram Groups/Channels app lets you manage who can access your private Telegram groups and channels. You can automatically approve requests to join a group, or ban group members in Telegram.

Click a section below to jump to its description:

Telegram Groups/Channels App

Creating a Telegram Bot

Connecting Telegram to AXL

Creating a Telegram Group

Creating a Telegram Channel

Creating an Invitation Link for a Group or Channel

Managing Group and Channel Users

## Telegram Groups/Channels App

Go to Settings → Apps. The "All Apps" tab lists every app you can connect to your account.

![All Apps tab in AXL Settings.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/y1iGYO4NukCQ81MFbG80IQ.png)

To connect the Telegram Groups/Channels app, you first need to create a new bot. If you use an existing bot, its current settings will stop working, so we recommend creating a new one.

## Creating a Telegram Bot

You create a new Telegram bot with another bot called BotFather. Follow this [link](https://t.me/botfather), click "Send Message", and open the app in Telegram Desktop.

![BotFather link opening Telegram.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qusvs-nsjka-bpRBHXs15g.png)

In Telegram, start the bot by clicking /start.

![Start command in BotFather.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ZM89iD8Z_k-yfTy_CK7Vwg.png)

The bot menu opens and lists all available commands. Select the /newbot command.

![BotFather newbot command.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eciYvt1b8E-1pUSyq3PBiA.png)

BotFather then asks you to enter a name for your bot.

![BotFather request for a bot name.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wnysobqQPES7BL8sUAbGXg.png)

If BotFather accepts the name, it asks for a username for your bot. The username must be unique and end in "bot". If the username you chose is already taken, try a different one.

Once BotFather accepts the username, it sends you a message with a link to your bot and a token. Copy this token. You'll need it in step 3 of this article, when you connect the app.

## Connecting Telegram to AXL

Return to AXL and go to Settings → Apps. On the "All Apps" tab, click "Connect" on the Telegram Groups/Channels card.

![Telegram Groups/Channels app card with Connect.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/oIoO0rcRtUyGMBDzojrckw.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter the name of your bot.
2. Token. Paste the token you copied from BotFather in step 2 of this article.

Click "Connect".

![App connection form with title and token.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/7MMrQ8-V1UetWOLqbZhoIw.png)

The connected Telegram Groups/Channels app appears on the "Connected" tab. To continue setup, click "Manage".

![Connected Telegram app card with Manage.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/XiHO4DZjd06pYhPzDZ3m0A.png)

To delete the app, click "Delete" on its card.

![Delete action on a connected app.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/x05LwT0A00m2gLs9QaWrgQ.png)

To see deleted apps, check the "Show deleted" box. You can restore a deleted app.

![Show deleted control for apps.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/sJAAvolUqUCP0S02yoleAQ.png)

## Creating a Telegram Group

One bot can manage several groups and channels, so you can add as many as you need. To add one, click "Add Group/Channel".

![Add Group/Channel in the Telegram app.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/a_abDYZ4LUG53FYgrRnQjw.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Name. Enter a name for the group.
2. Remove previously added members (when they send a message). Select this option if your group or channel already has members who aren't part of it in AXL. Once it's on, the bot removes those members as soon as they try to send a message in the chat.

Click "Next" and follow the instructions.

![New group name and existing-member removal setting.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/sR3wA7e4V0yeQgRwxuqpwg.png)

For this section, create a Telegram group for the bot to manage. Channel setup is covered in the next section. Open Telegram and click the menu button.

In the menu, select "Create Group". Enter a group name, add members, and click "Create".

Now add the bot to the group. Open the bot, click "Add Group", and select your new group from the list.

![Adding the bot to a Telegram group.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/nmNjsh7jjEO17aa7bh2RxA.png)

Open the group. In the group settings, select "Manage Group".

![Manage Group in Telegram.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yZOveSOA1kGM0kFnqbe0Zw.png)

Be sure to update the group settings. In the "Permissions" section, turn off the options that let members add other users to the group and edit the group.

![Group permissions for adding members and editing the group.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qwiVvuVRY0exk9pDh6kb2A.png)

Go to the "Administrators" section and make the bot an administrator with the "Stay anonymous" permission. You can remove this permission after the group is connected.

![Bot administrator permissions in a Telegram group.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Oc5RkYqKWkydF4SmtzS65w.png)

When you're done, go back to AXL and copy the code from the "Add Group" window. Then send a message with that code to the Telegram group from your own account.

Once the group connects, its status changes to "Connected". Click "Save".

![Connected group state and Save control.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/cNmcJqs9JkiAvsUH3KpClw.png)

The group now appears in the app's list of groups and channels.

![Connected group in the AXL app list.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/LysThsBuJU6hCqkrD7poIA.png)

## Creating a Telegram Channel

The bot can manage multiple channels, and you can add as many as you need. To add one, click "Add Group/Channel".

![Add Group/Channel for a Telegram channel.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/a_abDYZ4LUG53FYgrRnQjw.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Name. Enter a name for the channel.
2. Remove previously added members (when they send a message). This option controls how the bot treats members of the group or channel. Select it if your group or channel already has members who aren't part of it in AXL. Once it's on, the bot removes those members as soon as they try to send a message in the chat.

Click "Next" and follow the instructions.

![New channel name and existing-member removal setting.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/sR3wA7e4V0yeQgRwxuqpwg.png)

Open Telegram. To create a channel, click "Menu".

In the menu, select "New Channel". Enter a channel name, choose the channel type (public or private), add members, and click "Create".

![New Telegram channel name and visibility settings.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/mZ6QrXNpqE-qv9_0kHfIyg.png)

Next, add the bot to the channel. In the channel settings, select "Manage Channel".

![Manage Channel in Telegram.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/GWSaOlU66kOaVlmKCnXO8g.png)

Go to the "Administrators" section and make the bot an administrator.

![Bot added as a channel administrator.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/0XNmCT2RnEmCjHXL0TSePg.png)

When you're done, return to AXL and copy the code from the "Add Group" window.

Send a message with the code to the Telegram channel.

Once the channel connects, its status changes to "Connected". Click "Save".
The channel now appears in the app's list of groups and channels.

![Connected channel in the AXL app.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/wxIaIhL4_kW2vFs-PSXc4A.png)

## Creating an Invitation Link for a Group or Channel

Open Telegram and go to your group or channel. In its settings, select "Manage Group" or "Manage Channel".

![Manage Group or Manage Channel entry in Telegram.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yZOveSOA1kGM0kFnqbe0Zw.png)

Go to the "Invite Links" section.

![Invite Links settings in Telegram.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/KnQQjnUTrE2XfBoXPAJQQg.png)

Click "Create a New Link".

To create an invite link that requires approval, turn on the "Request admin approval" switch. Enter a name for the link and click "Create".

![Invitation link with Request admin approval enabled.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/n3TA52NfiU2frlgJXcA5Gw.png)

Copy the link and send it to the people you want to invite to the group or channel. You can send it manually or with any script, in a regular message or by email.

## Managing Group and Channel Users

Each group or channel has these actions:

1. All Users. Click to open the list of all users in the group or channel.
2. Pending Users. Click to open the list of users who are waiting to be added to the group or channel.
3. Manage Automation. Click to open and set up the automation for the group or channel. An automation is a predefined sequence of actions that run automatically in response to certain events, such as sending messages to a group or channel. These actions can include interacting with users, sharing information, running surveys, sending notifications and training materials, and more. For details on setting up automations, read "[Automations Overview](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)".
4. Manage group. Click to open the group or channel settings.
5. Delete (trash icon). Click to delete the group or channel.

![AXL group and channel management actions.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/RCx5nvL15kCqhe6BhI-lnA.png)

Click "All Users" to open the "Manage Users" window with the full list of users in the group. Here you can add users who followed the invitation link and are waiting to be added to the group.

![Manage Users list for a Telegram group.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/AD_PMkbtjkqxQxjTe4gtUA.png)

A search bar and a filter button are at the top of the "Manage Users" window. Use them to find the user you need quickly.

Click the filter button (funnel icon) and set a filter condition:

- Status. Shows users who currently have a certain status (Approved, Banned, Pending, Removed, and so on). Select a status from the list.
- Date Created. Shows users who were created on certain dates. Select a date range.

![Telegram user filters for status and creation date.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/G3wvOTi6eUCeuT-NFHvvTA.png)

If an anonymous participant (one who isn't linked to a CRM contact) applies to join the group, they appear in the group's user list marked "Not linked to a contact". You can then link the user to a CRM contact by hand and either add them to the group or reject their request. Click the "Edit user" button (pencil icon).

![Telegram member marked Not linked to a contact.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/iX9OKc5LCU-4dYBeYztz2g.png)

In the window that opens, select a contact from your CRM and click "Save". This links the Telegram account to that CRM contact.

![CRM contact selection for a Telegram member.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/dlPHsGXYqE2sEa8a9BdOEg.png)

Users who have asked to join the group but haven't been approved yet appear in the "Pending Users" list. If the system can't find or recognize a user's Telegram account, that user also lands in "Pending Users" and waits for approval, so check this list regularly.

![Pending Users in Telegram group management.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/UVo05gFwXE-9V_i5soJBFw.png)

Click "Pending Users" to open the "Manage Users" window filtered to pending users. You can do the following:

1. Accept user. Click to add the user to the group.
2. Decline user. Click to reject the request to join the group.
3. Remove (trash icon). Click to delete the user's request.

![Pending member accept, decline, and remove actions.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yeKZT9cAYECySahHKn1c0w.png)

You can also add a user from their CRM contact card. Go to Contacts, select the contact, and open their card. Click "Actions" under the contact's name at the top, then select "Telegram Groups/Channels" and choose "Add to Group/Channel" or "Remove from Group/Channel".

![Telegram Groups/Channels actions on a CRM contact.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/mOG_5PFcvEC7u1trDW7PqA.png)

To add or remove many users at once, go to the contact list in the CRM. Select contacts with the filters you need, then click "Bulk Actions".

![Selected CRM contacts and Bulk Actions.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/yFJI3j4UrE21_jBThUBzZQ.png)

In the list of bulk actions, open "Telegram Groups/Channels" and choose "Add Contacts to Telegram Group/Channel" or "Remove Contacts from Telegram Group/Channel".

![Bulk actions for adding or removing Telegram group members.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/S4MsSBmQ0kywSoBN5WiEXA.png)

To learn how to automate adding users to a group, read "[How to Automate Telegram Groups/Channels](https://docs.axl.tech/how-to-automate-the-work-of-the-telegram-groups-channels)".

## Check membership access after setup

1. In the connected Telegram Groups/Channels app, open **All Users** for the intended group. Use **Pending Users** to review requests that still need approval.
2. For a user marked **Not linked to a contact**, use the pencil icon, select the correct CRM contact, and save the link.
3. Approve or decline the request from the pending list. Verify membership in Telegram as well as the user’s state in AXL.
4. For automated access, follow the separate automation guide and check both a qualifying contact and a contact who should not receive access.

Adding permission in AXL and the person actually joining Telegram are separate parts of the flow. Share the invitation link that requires admin approval, then check the resulting join request.

The current setup entry is **Settings → Apps → All Apps → Telegram Groups/Channels → Connect**. This opens a form with **Title** and **Token**; the **Connect** button inside that form completes the connection. Use a dedicated bot when another service already handles an existing bot’s messages.

---

# How to Automate Telegram Groups/Channels

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/how-to-automate-the-work-of-the-telegram-groups-channels

> Set up a chatbot, a product automation, a payment form, and a thank-you page so buyers join your Telegram group or channel automatically.

After you connect and set up the Telegram Groups/Channels app, you can automate it. For how to connect the app, read "[Telegram Groups/Channels App](https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels)".

Automations let you automate your work with Telegram groups and channels. An automation handles your interactions with your account's customers: it reacts to what customers and team members do and responds with the actions you set up.

This article explains step by step how to set up and automate the Telegram Groups/Channels app.
Click a section below to jump to its description:

Creating a Chatbot

Creating a Product

Creating a Website

Creating a Payment Form

Creating a Thank You Page

## Creating a Chatbot

Telegram groups recognize a Telegram user if their Telegram account is already linked to a contact in your AXL CRM. Users who aren't linked to a CRM contact are treated as anonymous, and you have to approve their requests to join the Telegram group manually.
That's why we recommend letting people join the group through a chatbot. The chatbot makes sure that a buyer first goes through the chatbot automation, which means they connect to the bot first and can then join the Telegram group without any manual approval. Once the contact is correctly linked and the automation is configured, AXL can approve the qualifying user’s join request. Test the full path before opening it to buyers.

Go to Communications → Chatbots. Create a new chatbot or select an existing one. For details on creating a chatbot, read "[Chatbots](https://docs.axl.tech/chat-bots)".

![Chatbots list with the Add Chatbot button and three Northstar Academy chatbots.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8a57305685b570acbd436ce6a921a20a1339143380979e066d56e171d094f000.png)

Open the chatbot's "Automation" tab. It already contains the default "Chatbot Started" trigger, which AXL creates automatically with every chatbot. Next, select the "Condition" step and drag it onto the canvas. The condition needs to be configured: click "Settings", then "Configure Step".

![Condition step on the chatbot canvas with its menu open: Configure Step, Copy Step, Delete Step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/896902eade17ccf2d2cf348b304b4c6099af84b03a63c9cd37d9b0140cb5b7d6.png)

In "Step Settings", select the "Product Purchase" condition and choose the product. Click "Save". This condition picks out the users who have bought the selected product.

![Condition step settings: Product Purchase with the Leadership Certificate — Core Course product selected.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a9dc7b47a1099d0c282c756f7e977a83b0ea27c1998e2ff695b5fa513d839f0f.png)

Next, select the "Apps: Add to Telegram Group/Channel" step and drag it onto the canvas. This step also needs to be configured: click "Settings", then "Configure Step".

![Apps: Add to Telegram Group/Channel step connected to the condition, with its Configure Step menu open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/35c35cd8d8a10d371bd2ccdd44269bbab84ed7765b204ef551f858e2a9e386a7.png)

In "Step Settings", select a Telegram group or channel from the list. Click "Confirm".

![Telegram group or channel selection in the access action.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/eeaOZP6hP06h9RaL1GImJg.png)

Next, select the "Send Message" step and drag it onto the canvas. Configure this step too.

![Send Message step after the Telegram access step, with its Configure Step menu open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fd922460360c3bb5a5f98215cf3968060e78759d7d81cb4a54e745facb41f2b3.png)

In "Step Settings", enter the text of the message that the chatbot will send to the user who bought the product. In the message text, insert an invitation link to the Telegram group. To learn how to create an invitation link, see step 6 of the article "[Telegram Groups/Channels App](https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels)".

![Send Message step settings: step name Welcome + group invite link and a chat message with the Telegram group invitation link.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9389b685020232d2305a3ace58fb80bc3e2d283a6cc3d5483d472d3a73cabc69.png)

Add another "Send Message" step and drag it onto the canvas. This message goes to users who haven't bought the product.

In the step settings, enter the text of the message that the chatbot sends to the user.

![Send Message step settings for contacts without the purchase: step name No purchase found and the message text.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3a0c87fe6d9de1680dda9a341bd12c4e8532a36fde3d2276b59ce9c09ba4c220.png)

Connect **Chatbot Started** to the **Product Purchase** condition. Connect the purchased branch to **Apps: Add to Telegram Group/Channel**, then connect that action to the **Send Message** step containing the invitation link. Connect the other condition branch to the separate **Send Message** step for users who have not bought the product. Check both paths before turning on the activation switch.

From now on, as soon as a user pays for the product and starts the chatbot, they appear in the Telegram group's list as waiting to join. When they ask to join by clicking the invitation link, the system approves them automatically right away.

If someone gets the chatbot link without buying the product (for example, a friend who bought it shares the link), the chatbot sends a message asking them to contact support to resolve the issue.

Open the "Settings" tab and copy the chatbot link. You'll need it in steps 2 and 5 of this article.

![Chatbot startup link in Settings.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/ibnKNk7-lEyDX0s-Rwgzlw.png)

## Creating a Product

Next, create a product automation that emails the user a link to the chatbot.

Go to Sales → Products & Services. Create a new product or select an existing one. For details on creating a product, read "[Products and Services](https://docs.axl.tech/products-and-offers)".

![Products &amp; Services list with the Add Product button and the Leadership Certificate — Core Course product.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2a3a78594ae11b00f84232bc7c289d6091f13df8421e232775ddd236d2d11c70.png)

Next, open the "Automation" tab. Select the "Product Purchased" trigger and drag it onto the canvas.

![Product automation canvas: the Product Purchased trigger connected to a Send Email step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3c8a3a6eb2feb70d30a6cf8419e7c8f6d8bade7e1e566f0fa72c6ed412b45957.png)

Next, open the "Actions" tab. Select the "Send Email" step and drag it onto the canvas. Connect the trigger to the step. Then configure the step: click "Settings", then "Configure Step".

![Send Email step connected to Product Purchased, with its Configure Step menu open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f62db99acd3045de54117ff5120026603dbb025c55a9e63d120101cfa303f8a4.png)

In the Send Email step settings, enter a step name and keep **Contact's Email** as the recipients. Choose **No Template** and click **Create Email**. Pick a ready layout on the **From Built-In Template** tab, or describe the email on the **Create with AI** tab. In the email editor, write the text and add a button with the chatbot link you copied in step 1 of this article.

On the **Settings** tab of the email editor, fill in the **Subject**. You can add variables to the subject, preheader and text. A variable is a placeholder that AXL replaces with real data when it sends the email, such as the contact's name, email address, account name, or order number. For example, add **#Contact.FirstName#**, and each email will show the recipient's first name. Click **Add Variables** next to a field, or the variables button on the editor toolbar.

When you're done, click **Create**, then **Save** in the step settings.

![Email editor: Settings tab with the subject and preheader containing variables, and an email with a Join the Telegram group button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a01f03336283fa03a7ab7bd637e23052abd5e07ce4af6e73cb7dc486f1095787.png)

Your product automation is ready. To activate it, turn on the switch.

From now on, after a user buys the product, they receive an email with a link to the chatbot. When they click the link, the chatbot automation described in step 1 of this article starts.

![Active product automation: Product Purchased connected to the Telegram community invite email step.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f592b988d70186cd06ca72eaca814b958bee43020c09da829ebfb892e14cdd2f.png)

## Creating a Website

To set up a form for selling your product, create a website in AXL.

Go to Sites. Open an existing site or create a new one. For details on creating a website, read "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
Then, on the "Pages" tab, select a page and click its name or "Edit" to open it.

The steps below use the legacy page editor. When you create a new page for them, select **Create in the legacy editor (v1)**.

![Pages tab of the website with the Checkout: Leadership Certificate page highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/db9da428c9679b4c26d2fbbfdd104f6461b9ceafcf9135491d5b2e9fcd5350e6.png)

## Creating a Payment Form

In the page editor, select a "Blank Section" and click "Add Element". Drag the "Payment Form" element onto the page.

![Add Element panel of the legacy page editor with the Payment Form group open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f1ca4ef595aefb5eb8e4e4f4211189784252b4be23378b86009082d03b8db2f9.png)

Select the whole payment form to open its settings. The settings panel opens on the right.

![Selected payment form with its settings panel: Products, Mode, Upsell and Thank You Page.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/85089a592785cc41eef3f30f8802a64976b7dc343e119d7669b6cbb0973d403b.png)

In the element settings, add your products. If you add several products, they must all use the same currency.

![Payment form settings with the Leadership Certificate — Core Course product added.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b5883b86f8252bb1ff483864db8182c9be4ad8a719f39c7f248089cdc5dbdca6.png)

Next, select the **Pay Now** button in the form and choose a payment method in its **Payment Method** list. To offer several payment methods, add more payment buttons in the "Components" section: each payment button is tied to its own payment gateway. To learn how to set up a payment method, read "[Payment Gateways](https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings)".

![Payment Button settings with the Payment Method list open: Stripe, Cash, NMI, Paypal, Revolut, Bank Transfer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/dbbf5e0e9ca72edb80ec98e85923be6caf192d7b1f67017f33b07ceac3100192.png)

We also recommend adding the chatbot link to your thank-you page. To show a thank-you page after a successful payment, turn on the "Thank You Page" switch and enter the page address in the "URL" field.

Step 5 of this article explains how to create a thank-you page with a chatbot link.

![Payment form settings with the Thank You Page switch on and the thank-you page address in the URL field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5b804b2de430eeac9ed7c9fb7abc289ad13fe9e1346edbc512bf84fba0701017.png)

The main payment form settings are done. When you finish, click "Save".

In the upper-left corner of the page, copy the payment form link and send it to your users. You can send it manually or with any automation, in a regular message or by email.

![Saved payment page with its link and copy icon under the page title.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6e8ed1ee03875a7053c42fd9e99d048019f82b352a7bc95904aa87fd610d2886.png)

## Creating a Thank You Page

After a successful payment, the user sees a thank-you page with a button. The button takes them to the chatbot and starts the automation for joining the Telegram group.

Create another page on the site, also in the legacy editor (v1). Click its name or "Edit" to open it.

![Pages tab of the website with the Welcome: Leadership Certificate thank-you page highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/db9da428c9679b4c26d2fbbfdd104f6461b9ceafcf9135491d5b2e9fcd5350e6.png)

In the editor for the thank-you page, select a "Blank Section" and click "Add Element". From the list, select "Text" and "Button" and drag them onto the page.

![Thank-you page in the legacy editor with a Text element and a Join group button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e93fa3301c3e2d9b9da0e49a5f4278eade4ff4e6be946db2979eae828f48135b.png)

Select the whole button to open its settings. The settings panel opens on the right. Open the "Interaction" tab, click "Add Click Action", choose "Open Link", and paste the chatbot link you copied in step 1 of this article into the "Link" field.

![Button settings, Interaction tab: the Open Link action with the chatbot link in the Link field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d6a0c5e62d8ff8f6b8372ab781320c6a5a7a8cf6d1de613b7c1d77fa71938ece.png)

Click "Save" and copy the link to the thank-you page. You need it for the payment form in the previous step: paste it into the "URL" field in the payment form settings.

![Saved thank-you page with its link and copy icon under the page title.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e93fa3301c3e2d9b9da0e49a5f4278eade4ff4e6be946db2979eae828f48135b.png)

Here's how it works. The user fills out the form and pays for the product, then lands on the thank-you page with the chatbot link. They also get the chatbot link by email after payment.

When the user clicks the chatbot link, the automation starts. If they paid for the course, the chatbot sends them the Telegram group link, and when they follow it, they're added to the Telegram group automatically.
If they haven't paid for the course, the chatbot sends a message asking them to contact support to resolve the issue.
If they open the chatbot link on another device and the system doesn't recognize their purchase, you can link them to their CRM contact manually and approve their request to join the group.
If they got the chatbot link from someone else who paid for the product, they won't be added to the Telegram group.

For more about setting up the Telegram Groups/Channels app, read "[Telegram Groups/Channels App](https://docs.axl.tech/application-telegram-groups-channels)".

## Verify the full purchase-to-membership path

1. Use the same product in the chatbot’s **Product Purchase** condition, the product automation, and the payment form. Use a **Simple** chatbot so it provides the startup link used by the email and thank-you page.
2. Connect the purchased branch to **Apps: Add to Telegram Group/Channel** and then the invitation message. Connect the other branch to the message for contacts without the purchase.
3. Check that both automations are active and that the email and thank-you button contain the intended chatbot link.
4. With controlled test contacts, check the qualifying and non-qualifying paths. For the qualifying contact, inspect the email, thank-you page, chatbot response, join request, and resulting Telegram membership.
5. If the Telegram account is not linked to the purchasing CRM contact, resolve the contact link before approving the request. A shared chatbot link alone must not grant access.

---

# Meta Conversions App

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/application-meta-conversions

> Connect the Meta Conversions app to send website events to Meta through the Conversions API and measure the results of your ads.

Connect Meta Conversions to send selected events from your AXL websites to Meta. This guide covers the business portfolio, pixel, access token, AXL connection, and event switches.

Choose the events that match the actions you want to measure, such as form submissions or paid orders. Review the event settings after connecting the app.

The Conversions API connects your marketing data (such as website events, app events, chat events with your business, and offline conversions) from your server, website platform, mobile app, or CRM to Meta's systems.

To connect the app, follow the instructions in this article. Click a section to jump to its description:

Create a Business Portfolio in Meta Business Suite and Business Manager

How to Set Up and Install a Meta Pixel

Getting a Meta Access Token

Connecting to AXL

App Settings

## Create a Business Portfolio in Meta Business Suite and Business Manager

**You need a personal Facebook account**. You'll use it to sign in to Meta Business Suite or Business Manager, where you create your business portfolio. 
A business portfolio brings your Facebook Pages, Instagram accounts, ad accounts, product catalogs, and other business assets together, so you can manage them in one place with tools like Meta Business Suite and Business Manager.

To create a business portfolio, go to [business.facebook.com](https://www.facebook.com/micro_site/url/?click_from_context_menu=true&amp;country=RU&amp;destination=https%3A%2F%2Fbusiness.facebook.com%2F&amp;event_type=click&amp;last_nav_impression_id=0GvNpfZL5JREE331n&amp;max_percent_page_viewed=29&amp;max_viewport_height_px=598&amp;max_viewport_width_px=1230&amp;orig_request_uri=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.facebook.com%2Fbusiness%2Fhelp%2F1710077379203657%3Fid%3D180505742745347&amp;primary_cmsid=1710077379203657&amp;primary_content_locale=ru_RU&amp;region=emea&amp;scrolled=true&amp;session_id=1M0DiCQuzs6lGSY2V&amp;site=fb4b&amp;extra_data[view_type]=v3_initial_view&amp;extra_data[site_section]=help&amp;extra_data[placement]=%2Fbusiness%2Fhelp%2F1710077379203657) in a desktop browser. You'll also use this address to sign in to Meta Business Suite or Business Manager.

**Sign in to your personal Facebook account**. If you don't have one, click "Create account" to sign up.

![Facebook login form requesting an email address or phone number and password.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qInlB0VbakWaPNgRpDpiKQ.png)

If you already have access to Meta Business Suite and Business Manager, you can also open the dropdown menu at the top of the left navigation bar and click "Create a business portfolio".

![Meta Business Suite account menu with Create a business portfolio highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/MSz-PpEZdUKTXbdt_f_hHg.png)

Enter your business details.

- **Business portfolio name**. Use the public name of your business or organization, because it's visible across Meta. It can't contain special characters.
- Your name.
- **Business email**. Meta uses this email to contact you about your business. Your customers can't see it.

Click "Create" to create your portfolio. You'll get an email asking you to confirm your business email address.

![Create a business portfolio form with business name, contact name, and business email fields.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/1HpvVngpgEuAaldrtwQ4xw.png)

After you create your business portfolio, you can add business assets such as Pages, ad accounts, datasets, and Instagram accounts.

## How to Set Up and Install a Meta Pixel

Setting up a pixel takes two steps:

1. Create your pixel and add the pixel base code to your website. You can use a partner integration if one is available to you, or add the code to your website manually.
2. Set up events on your website to measure the actions you care about, like purchases. You can use a partner integration or the point-and-click event setup tool, or add the code manually.

There are several ways to set up your pixel and events, and Meta guides you through the available options during setup. If you choose to set up your pixel or events manually, you may need a developer's help to add the code to your website.
If you use your pixel to share events with Meta, we also recommend using the Conversions API. It works with your Meta Pixel to improve the performance and measurement of your Meta ad campaigns.

Before you begin: you need a website for your business. To learn how to create a website in AXL, read "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".
If you plan to set up the pixel manually with code, you or your developer must be able to update your website's code.

Set up the Meta Pixel and events on your website. 
Go to Meta [Events Manager](https://www.facebook.com/micro_site/url/?click_creative_path[0]=link&amp;ums_creative_detail=advertiser-help-center&amp;click_from_context_menu=true&amp;country=RU&amp;destination=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.facebook.com%2Fbusiness%2Furl%2F%3Fhref%3Dhttps%253A%252F%252Fwww.facebook.com%252Fevents_manager2%252F%26cmsid%3D233201859272333%26creative%3Dlink%26creative_detail%3Dadvertiser-help-center%26create_type%26destination_cms_id%26orig_http_referrer%26search_session_id&amp;event_type=click&amp;last_nav_impression_id=0FNqwhAGNbNYw1jcF&amp;max_percent_page_viewed=27&amp;max_viewport_height_px=598&amp;max_viewport_width_px=1230&amp;orig_request_uri=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.facebook.com%2Fbusiness%2Fhelp%2F952192354843755%3Fid%3D1205376682832142&amp;primary_cmsid=952192354843755&amp;primary_content_locale=ru_RU&amp;region=emea&amp;scrolled=true&amp;session_id=1M0DiCQuzs6lGSY2V&amp;site=fb4b&amp;extra_data[view_type]=v3_initial_view&amp;extra_data[site_section]=help&amp;extra_data[placement]=%2Fbusiness%2Fhelp%2F952192354843755&amp;extra_data[creative_detail]=advertiser-help-center) and click "Connect data sources".

![Meta Events Manager sidebar with Connect Data Sources highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/qNtUIXeCX0qdkg21P-lbzQ.png)

Select "Web" and click "Connect".

![Connect a new data source dialog with Web selected among the available source types.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/rPVLy9IpWE6YR7-L_5jNnA.png)

Enter a name for your pixel and click "Create pixel". This creates a new ID that you can view in Events Manager. Note: events from your Meta Pixel are shared to a dataset, which groups events from different sources. Your new dataset ID is the same as your new pixel ID.

![Create a new dataset dialog with the required dataset name field.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/kLdkKWMG2kOk_GGKFZDyXw.png)

Your next steps depend on whether you have a website.

- If you have a website, enter its URL and click "Check" to see easy partner integration options.

    - If a partner integration is available, it appears on the screen. Click "Next" and follow the onscreen instructions to set up your pixel and events through your partner's website.
    - If no partner integration is available, click "Next".
- If you don't have a website, check the box next to "I don't have a website" and click "Continue".

![Meta Add your website dialog with a website URL field and an option for not having a website.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/0-eGFlgIi0GWJ6R5b8QdTQ.png)

Choose how you want to connect your data with Meta: "Get guidance" (recommended) or "Do it yourself".

- Select "Get guidance" if you'd like setup recommendations. If you choose this option, you can skip the rest of the instructions in this article and follow the onscreen instructions in Events Manager instead.
- Select "Do it yourself" if you already know how you want to connect your data and don't want setup recommendations. If you choose this option, follow the rest of the instructions in this article.

![Meta setup dialog offering guided setup or Do it yourself.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/-MnZJUQeEUSv9VnrOeEW8w.png)

Select "Conversions API and Meta Pixel" or "Meta Pixel only" as your setup option, then click "Next".

- If you select Conversions API and Meta Pixel, choose how you want to set up the Conversions API and pixel: "Set up with partner integration", "Set up with Conversions API Gateway", or "Set up manually". If you're not sure which to choose, you can compare Conversions API setup options by cost and complexity.

    - If you select "Set up with partner integration", choose your partner and follow the onscreen instructions to set up the pixel, Conversions API, and events.
    - If you select "Set up with Conversions API Gateway", follow the onscreen instructions to set up the pixel, Conversions API Gateway, and events.
    - If you select "Set up manually", follow the onscreen instructions to generate personalized instructions for setting up the pixel, Conversions API, and events. On the last screen, you can either set up the Conversions API yourself using the personalized instructions or send them to a developer. If you need help generating the instructions, you can learn how to set up the Conversions API using personalized instructions.
- If you select Meta Pixel only, choose how you want to set up your pixel code: "Install code manually" or "Check for partner". If a developer will set up your pixel for you, click "Email instructions" instead.

![Conversions API setup choices for a partner, manual setup, or Conversions API Gateway.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Onmd_7JNo0mVcJPqRbl6pQ.png)

**Copy the Meta Pixel ID**. You'll need it to connect the app in step 4 of this article.

![Meta Data Sources page with a marketing dataset and its ID location highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/0MMyMFynn0uO_3VIta-yJA.png)

## Getting a Meta Access Token

To get an access token, go to Events Manager and select the pixel you want to connect. Open the "Settings" tab, find the "Conversions API" section, and click the "Generate access token" link under manual setup. Then follow the instructions in the pop-up window.

![Dataset Settings tab with Conversions API and Generate access token highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/8iHmvROKA0KrkVXGRjaxpQ.png)

**Copy the token and save it somewhere safe**. You'll need it in the next step to connect the app.

![Conversions API settings showing the generated-token area with the token blurred.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/q2y29v6MqEa42eDb6aJLLw.png)

## Connecting to AXL

Now return to AXL and go to Settings → Apps. The "All Apps" tab lists every app you can connect to your account.

![Settings → Apps → All Apps catalog with the Meta Conversions cards and their Connect buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ddca8ce64b1aca09edc85fe3bafe9425eee08712cb8e492d6b991efefd3c3d45.png)

On the Meta Conversions card, click "Connect".

![Meta Conversions card in the app catalog with Connect, beside the Telegram Groups/Channels app.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/238eb2780c7c89209659f2b2325ed5ba9a1aa4fd841ddee433f3394c5fd5ba35.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for the app so it's easy to find. This title is just for you.
2. Pixel ID. Enter the pixel ID you copied from Meta Events Manager in step 2.
3. Token. Paste the token you copied in step 3 of this article.
4. Websites. Select websites from the list.
5. Form/Quiz Submitted and Registered for Webinar. Turn these switches on to send a Lead event to Meta when someone submits a form or quiz on your site or registers for a webinar.
6. Order Created, Order Paid, and Added to Cart. Turn these switches on to send InitiateCheckout, Purchase, and AddToCart events to Meta when an order is created or paid or a product is added to the cart.
7. Page Viewed. Turn this switch on to send a PageView event to Meta each time someone views a page on your site.

Click "Connect".

![Meta Conversions connection form: title Northstar Meta Pixel, Pixel ID, Token, the Northstar website and conversion events such as Lead and Purchase turned on.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/abc7a32991519515633cb9dcc1279f35c8c9c8477457a875b917678853982cd6.png)

The connected Meta Conversions app appears on the "Connected" tab.

![Apps, Connected tab: the Northstar Pixel Meta Conversions connection with Manage and Delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19a2155e85c238bbbd205a97b7c6fec3fe03d6e67a9f4e080cef20075528c3bf.png)

To delete the app, click "Delete" on its card.

![Connected Northstar Pixel card with the Delete button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19a2155e85c238bbbd205a97b7c6fec3fe03d6e67a9f4e080cef20075528c3bf.png)

To see deleted apps, check the "Show deleted" box. You can restore a deleted app.

## App Settings

To continue setting up the app, click "Manage".

![Connected Northstar Pixel card with the Manage button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19a2155e85c238bbbd205a97b7c6fec3fe03d6e67a9f4e080cef20075528c3bf.png)

On the page that opens, you can change the app's settings in the Settings card.

![Northstar Pixel settings: Title, Pixel ID, masked Token, the selected website and Additional Event Parameters with Lead (Form/Quiz Submitted) turned on.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8352b6e727a7919ea6edba0cda0214007219d892d9ed3f2072914cbda7171f60.png)

---

# Google Analytics App

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/application-google-analytics

> Connect the Google Analytics app to track website traffic and conversions from your AXL account in a Google Analytics data stream.

Google Analytics is a tool for tracking and analyzing how users behave on your website or app. It collects data on traffic, traffic sources, conversions, time on page, and other key metrics, so you can see how users interact with your site, which pages are the most popular, and which ones need work.

Connecting Google Analytics lets you track how well your content performs. You can fine-tune your digital strategy, optimize your campaigns, and grow your online presence. It also helps you improve your content, make the experience better for users, and increase audience engagement.

To connect the app, follow the instructions in this article. Click a section to jump to its description:

Creating a Data Stream in Google Analytics

Connecting to AXL

App Settings

## Creating a Data Stream in Google Analytics

Before you begin, sign up on the official Google Analytics website by following this [link](https://developers.google.com/analytics).

![Google Analytics information page with a Go to Analytics button.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Y7UU63dzpUqV-2iDbh45Uw.png)

In the upper-left corner of the page, open the menu and select "Admin".

![Google Analytics navigation with Admin highlighted at the bottom of the menu.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/W7VOiJ97Okmw7ep3gwiiLA.png)

In Google Analytics **Admin**, open **Data collection and modification → Data streams**.

![Google Analytics Admin page with Data streams selected under Data collection and modification.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Fp7XLGUg_EOk0gtfCZbGxA.png)

Click **Add stream** and choose **Web** for your AXL website.

![Add stream menu in Google Analytics with the Web option visible.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/oEjiQXe-mEabxk59pmjimw.png)

Enter the URL of your main site, for example "example.com", and a name for the stream, such as "My Resource (Web Stream)".
Below, you can turn enhanced measurement on or off. It automatically collects page views and other events. After you create the data stream, you can turn off individual enhanced measurement events you don't need, so we recommend leaving it on for now.
Click "Create Stream".

![Set up data stream form with Website URL, Stream name, and Enhanced measurement settings.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/CW8KI0TA8EWJM2fJd40BPA.png)

Click the name of the new stream to open its settings.

![Google Analytics Data streams list with a created web stream ready to open.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/X-BdyEMNaU-iE7HLZXDJJw.png)

Copy the "Measurement ID" for the stream. You'll need it to connect the app in step 2 of this article.

![Google Analytics Web stream details with the Measurement ID copy control highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/joaJeUfEc0WgHVGLaN2c6Q.png)

Next, open the "Measurement Protocol API secrets" tab.

![Web stream details with Measurement Protocol API secrets highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/773VKjJVV0Wp1tkOEsFl1g.png)

Create an API secret.

![Measurement Protocol API secrets page with the Create button highlighted above an empty list.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/2whOvL6M6EuFDMMbCdb-ng.png)

**Copy the secret value**. You'll need it in step 2 of this article.

![Created Measurement Protocol API secret with its value blurred and copy icon highlighted.](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/NsmKVISdUEqSGUg2oqI3qg.png)

## Connecting to AXL

Now open AXL and go to Settings → Apps. The "All Apps" tab lists every app you can connect to your account.

![Settings → Apps → All Apps catalog with the Google Analytics card and its Connect button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ddca8ce64b1aca09edc85fe3bafe9425eee08712cb8e492d6b991efefd3c3d45.png)

On the "Google Analytics" card, click "Connect".

![Google Analytics card in the app catalog with Connect.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cc838c4decbb19f825dfaad6c097db90eada0da33d5eb7b9b2075c487d6cbbfd.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for the app so it's easy to find. This title is just for you.
2. Token. Paste the "Secret API Key value" you copied from Google Analytics in step 1 of this article.
3. Measurement ID. Paste the "Measurement ID" you copied in step 1 of this article.
4. Websites. Select one or more websites from the list. To learn more about creating a website in AXL, read "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".

Click "Connect".

![Google Analytics connection form: title Northstar GA4, Token, Measurement ID, the Northstar website and event settings such as generate_lead and purchase.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/784469191e19a62a00a27f347a0182b598bbb5bba6ee37c8574ca8a127e4adc3.png)

The Google Analytics app appears on the "Connected" tab.

![Apps, Connected tab: the Northstar Analytics Google Analytics connection with Manage and Delete buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19a2155e85c238bbbd205a97b7c6fec3fe03d6e67a9f4e080cef20075528c3bf.png)

To delete the app, click "Delete" on its card.

![Connected Northstar Analytics card with the Delete button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19a2155e85c238bbbd205a97b7c6fec3fe03d6e67a9f4e080cef20075528c3bf.png)

To see deleted apps, check the "Show deleted" box. You can restore a deleted app.

## App Settings

To continue setting up the app, click "Manage".

![Connected Northstar Analytics card with the Manage button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/19a2155e85c238bbbd205a97b7c6fec3fe03d6e67a9f4e080cef20075528c3bf.png)

On the page that opens, you can change the app's settings in the Settings card.

Review **Event configurations** before saving. The built-in mappings cover form/quiz submissions (`generate_lead`), webinar registration (`sign_up`), order creation (`begin_checkout`), paid orders (`purchase`), additions to the cart (`add_to_cart`), and site page views (`page_view`). Expand **Advanced parameters** for the event you need to customize; **Auto-filled fields** explains the values AXL supplies.

![Northstar Analytics settings: Title, masked Token, Measurement ID, the selected website and Event Settings with generate_lead, sign_up and begin_checkout turned on.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/25b901891fef44cc3d5f8f61ee0196070209839870c302ee50953874cf85fda8.png)

---

# Zoom App

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/zoom-application

> Connect Zoom to AXL so booked meetings get Zoom links automatically, and learn how to disconnect the app.

The AXL Zoom integration automatically creates Zoom meeting links for your scheduled events and bookings. This guide walks you through adding the app, using its features, and removing the integration if you no longer need it.

Prerequisite: A Zoom account.

## Adding the App

Follow these steps to connect your Zoom account to AXL:

1. Sign in to your AXL admin account.
2. In the left-hand navigation menu, scroll down, click Settings, and then select Apps.
3. On the Apps page, open **All Apps**, find the **Zoom** card and click **Connect**. In the panel that opens, click **Authorize**.
4. You'll be redirected to the Zoom sign-in page. Sign in to your Zoom account.
5. Review the permissions AXL requests and click Allow (or Authorize) to grant access.
6. Once you authorize, you'll be redirected back to AXL automatically.
7. You'll be asked to enter a Title for this connection (for example, "John's Zoom Account"). Enter the title and click Connect.

![Zoom app card with Connect and the Zoom setup panel with Authorize.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/94ba980bef2359bc05eedae2b11a26060703eeafd30074fd4e49398e33600e10.png)
The first connection screen: open Zoom from All Apps, then click Authorize to start authorization in your Zoom account.

Your Zoom account is now linked to AXL!

## Usage

Feature: Automatically Schedule Zoom Meetings for Bookings

Use case: When clients book a time slot on your AXL booking page, AXL creates a matching Zoom meeting through the assigned host's connection or the page's shared connection and adds the joining details to the booking.

Prerequisites: Connect a shared Zoom account using **Adding the App** above, or make sure each host has connected their own Zoom account in **Meetings → My Calendar → My Connections**.

You must also have a meeting created in AXL.

How to use:

1. Open **Meetings** in the left-hand menu, then select the **Meetings** tab. If you are a host, the page may initially open on **My Calendar**.
2. Click the title of the meeting you want to configure (for example, “Enrollment Consultation”), then open its **General** tab.
3. Scroll down to **Meeting Format**.
4. Select **Zoom**.
5. **Integration** appears. Choose **Shared Page Account**, then select the Zoom connection you added earlier. If you see **No Zoom integrations connected**, use **Connect Zoom** and complete the connection steps above before selecting the account. Alternatively, choose **Hosts' Own Accounts** if every assigned host has their own Zoom connection.
6. Click **Save Changes** at the bottom of the page. Use **Reset** to discard unsaved changes.

![Meeting Format set to Zoom, with Shared Page Account and Hosts' Own Accounts options and the empty Zoom connection panel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/64f177ffbc271c43292befddb7b793bbb524e0c9929659d2a1dc186738fc544d.png)
In General, choose Zoom under Meeting Format, then choose how hosts connect. This setup example has no shared Zoom connection yet; Connect Zoom opens the connection setup. The changes shown here have not been saved.

**Which Zoom account is used?** A host's own Zoom connection takes priority, even when a shared page account is selected. The shared account is the fallback for hosts without their own connection. With **Hosts' Own Accounts**, each host must connect Zoom from **Meetings → My Calendar → My Connections**; bookings for a host without a working connection will not get a Zoom joining link.

**Check the result**: After a booking is created with a working Zoom connection, open its details in AXL and check the online meeting link. Look for the meeting in the assigned host's own Zoom account if they have connected one; otherwise, check the selected shared account. If the link is missing, check the host's connection, the page's selected account and their authorization before relying on the booking page.

## Removing the App

If you no longer want to use the Zoom integration, you can disconnect it and remove the app.
### Step A: Remove the App from AXL

1. Sign in to your AXL account.
2. Go to Settings → Apps.
3. On the Connected tab, find your Zoom app and click Delete.
4. Confirm the deletion.

### Step B: Remove the App from Your Zoom Account (Complete Deauthorization)

1. Sign in to the Zoom App Marketplace with the account that added AXL.
2. Click **My Library** in the bottom-left corner and find AXL.
3. In the app’s **Actions** column, open the **More** menu and choose **Remove**.
4. Confirm with **Remove** in the **Remove App** window. If your Zoom organization controls the app, ask its administrator to remove the authorization.

### Implications of Deauthorization & Data Removal

**Meetings and authorization**: Removing an AXL connection and revoking the app in Zoom are separate steps. Use both steps above when you want to disconnect the integration completely. Check other meeting pages or account connections that use the same Zoom account before revoking it. Removing the connection does not cancel meetings already created in Zoom; review those meetings in Zoom separately. New bookings need an available authorized host or shared account to generate Zoom links.

**Stored integration data**: Removing a connection is not confirmation that all related account data has been deleted. Contact AXL support if you need deletion of stored integration data. For Zoom’s current removal steps, see [Adding and removing Marketplace Apps for personal use](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb&amp;sysparm_article=KB0062865).

---

# Account Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/account-settings

> Update your account's name, language, time zone, currency, and storage settings, and set up global variables.

Use **Account Settings** to set your account’s name, language, time zone, currency, and shared variables. Account settings apply across your account; your own display preferences are managed in **My Profile**.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Account Settings

General

Global Variables

## Account Settings

You can open "Account Settings" in two places: click your account name at the top of the page and select "Account Settings", or go to "Settings" → "Account Settings" in the left menu.

![Account Settings for Northstar Academy with General and Global Variables tabs, account name, description, language, time zone, currency, country, Account Features and Orders.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8e1e36bd71f2a0f258c71a4696d71c6090623c3c3a4f16945602fd25c2d5474d.png)

Here you can change your account's general information. The page has two tabs: "General" and "Global Variables". Let's look at each one.

## General

The "General" tab contains the following settings:

1. Account Name. Enter the name of your account.
2. Account Description. Add a description of your account. Your account's customers will see this description.
3. Account Language. Select the account language from the list. AXL uses it as the default language for emails and notifications.
4. Time Zone. Select your time zone from the list.
5. What currency will you accept payments in? Select your account's currency from the list.
6. Country. Select your country from the list.
7. Account Features. Click "Manage Features" to open the Account Features page, where you choose which features to turn on for your account. Only admins with all permissions see this section.
8. Orders. Check "Enable deduction" to add a percentage for taxes or other costs of selling products, then enter the rate (from 0 to 100). AXL factors this rate into the analytics for all products. It also helps you assess the profitability of each product and of your business as a whole.
9. **Data Storage and Deletion.** This section shows storage used by videos, images, other files, and audio, plus the total. Use **All**, **Admins**, or **Members** to choose whose uploads are counted, and **Refresh** to update the figures. The section also provides **Delete Old User Files** and **Clean Up Unused AI Images** for managing stored files.

![Data Storage and Deletion with All, Admins and Members filters, Refresh, storage totals, Delete Old User Files and Clean Up Unused AI Images.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/06defb4ece5207decb67b870798f64ce529f85a6341d9eda2177d073c9388397.png)
The lower part of General shows storage totals and the two cleanup actions.

After you change the general settings, click "Save" at the bottom of the page.

## Global Variables

On the "Global Variables" tab, you can add and manage your variables.

A variable is a placeholder that AXL automatically replaces with the data you chose. It can be text, a name, an email address, your account name, an order number, and so on.

You can use global variables in course step content, on website pages, in widgets, in quizzes, and in webinar descriptions. To use one, insert {Global.key} into the website page, course step content, webinar description, widget, or email.

![Global Variables tab with the variable usage hint and Add button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a6d422063614fb59eec1622983b5e968d6e2054bc31b4109a9e56a16001c9067.png)

Click "Add". The following fields appear:

1. Key. The key can contain Latin letters, numbers, and symbols. Enter it as one line with no spaces.
2. Value. Enter the value of the variable. AXL replaces the key with this text.

Click "Save".

![Unsaved global-variable example with key web, value Northstar Academy Leadership Workshop, copy control, Add, Reset and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4bb12bac47074ff93b044eb46e7e559dc1b07f39c108d24bbe58c75c8d8d8490.png)
Unsaved example showing the key, value and copy control. Save stores the variable; Reset discards the draft.

Copy the variable key and use it to replace the word "key" in {Global.key}. Example: {Global.web}.

Next, open the place where you want to use the variable and insert {Global.key} in its code.
Here's an example with a webinar description: open the webinar settings, then click the Code "&lt;&gt;" icon in the description field.

![Northstar Academy Leadership Masterclass webinar General settings with Title, Internal Name, Description editor and its Code angle-bracket button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3428822f6726cb64f170ab899bc2a797b14b2cd77a0b63339819d62fddde84e8.png)
Webinar General settings. Open the Code (&lt;&gt;) control in Description to insert a global variable.

In the code window that opens, paste {Global.key} into the field and save your changes.

Now the webinar description shows the variable's value in place of the key.

When you change a global variable, the text updates automatically everywhere you've used it.

---

# Team & Departments

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/team-and-departments

> Invite team members, set their permissions and roles, and organize them into departments.

Admins are additional users (team members) on your account. If you need help running your project, you can add admins.

When you add an admin, you choose what they can access in your account. For example, you can give one admin access only to "Courses & Materials" and another only to "Chat with Users and Guests".

Click a section to jump to its description:

How to Add an Admin

General

Permissions

How to Choose Permissions

System Roles

Role Management

Departments

## How to Add an Admin

Go to "Settings" → "Team & Departments". At first you see one user: you. To add more admins, click "Create Invite".

![Settings > Team &amp; Departments of Northstar Academy: the Team tab lists Jordan Lee (Program Coordinator, Admissions) and Alex Morgan (Academy Director), with the Create Invite button at the top right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f86e9d5cea0b51972c4fa9ceefcf65e7c3244afc8d8fcc9d80e8b5d4aa002ac2.png)

**A panel opens**. Fill in the fields:

1. Email. Enter the email address of the person you want to invite to your account.
2. Job Title. Enter the invited person's job title.
3. Roles. Optionally pick one or more roles. Each role comes with a ready-made set of permissions.
4. Permissions. Optionally check the sections the new admin can access. You can also set permissions later in the admin's profile.

Click "Create".

![New Invitation panel: Email taylor.reed@example.com, Job Title Course Curator, the Roles selector and the Permissions list, with Cancel and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9e3b9c885ff542a39ba38540c1832b0de3e5c93300cd87f08d5c701355158fff.png)

The person receives an email at the address you entered. The email contains a link to your account on AXL and lets them create their own login and password. They follow the link and sign up on AXL.

Note: if the admin already has an AXL account, they receive an email invitation to join your account. They don't need to activate a new account.

After you invite a team member, they're added to the list on the "Team" tab automatically. The list shows:

1. Full Name. The admin's name.
2. Email. The team member's email address.
3. Confirmed. Shows whether the admin has confirmed their email. Click "Get Link" to get an email confirmation link.
4. Job Title. The team member's job title.
5. Departments. The departments the team member belongs to. For more about departments, see the "Departments" section below.
6. Phone. The team member's phone number.
7. Created. The date and time the invitation was created.
8. Last Activity. The date and time of the team member's last activity.
9. Actions:
The "Edit" button (pencil icon). Click to open the team member's profile.
The "Delete" button (trash icon). Click to delete this admin.

![Team list columns: Full Name, Email, Confirmed, Job Title, Departments, Phone, Created, Last Activity and Actions, with rows for Jordan Lee and Alex Morgan.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7bb7ed2f6687edf7d91903eb52d7d1a9774ba9add162384509d42d96db941ed2.png)

To edit a team member's personal details and set their permissions, click their name or the "Edit" button.

![Team list: the team member's name link and the Edit and Delete buttons in the Actions column.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7bb7ed2f6687edf7d91903eb52d7d1a9774ba9add162384509d42d96db941ed2.png)

The search bar and filters at the top of the section help you quickly find the right team member or department.

- Search. Search by keyword.
- Show Without Department. Shows team members who don't belong to any department.
- Departments. Shows team members from the departments you select, so you can see who works in a particular area or group.

![Team tab filters: the Search field, the Show Without Department switch and the Add Filter menu with the Departments filter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d893ee49a820329df95750fbba3b0a0c96904fe248c9535cf080d1b65b496a0a.png)

## General

This tab matches your own "My Profile" page. You can change the admin's email, phone number, job title, first name, and last name. You can also add their birthday and gender, and change the password for their account.

For editable details, click **Save** after making changes. A confirmed team member’s personal profile fields may be read-only when another admin views them.

![General tab of Jordan Lee's profile: email, phone number, job title Program Coordinator, first and last name, birthday, password, gender, avatar, Display Time Zone and Transfer Ownership.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5dd3b9c075a9e89e3415e6a2271b1dfc62b7aae50db9a35c2861b0f1ef4d5776.png)

In the "Display Time Zone" section, you can choose which time zone a team member sees dates in. Each admin can pick the one they want. Select "Local (Computer Time)" or "Account". The selected time zone and its current date and time appear below.

![Display Time Zone in a team member's profile: Local (Computer Time) or Account, with the time zone America/New York and the current time below.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5dd3b9c075a9e89e3415e6a2271b1dfc62b7aae50db9a35c2861b0f1ef4d5776.png)

From a team member's profile, you can hand off their current work to another admin. To do this, click "Transfer Ownership".

![The Transfer Ownership button at the bottom of a team member's General tab.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5dd3b9c075a9e89e3415e6a2271b1dfc62b7aae50db9a35c2861b0f1ef4d5776.png)

A panel opens with the deals, tasks, contacts, and orders you can transfer. Check the boxes next to the items you want to move, select the new owner from the list, and click "Transfer Ownership".

![Transfer Ownership panel: Transfer deals, tasks, contacts and orders checkboxes with item counts, the New Owner field, Cancel and Transfer Ownership.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/77032939ccf81787f95ea162bf7b4ecbb931e1c33ecbdcdc0ab3e52d8d43145f.png)

## Permissions

By default, a new admin has all permissions turned off in your account. Add the permissions each new admin needs.

Click the expand icon to see the subsections.

![Permissions tab of Jordan Lee: the Roles field with Manage Roles, and the list of permission sections from All Permissions to Telephony.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f619b135543e59acc5e65c9d657ce457813476d98aadccad87598cc879cf91c7.png)

Check the box next to a section to give the admin access to it. To select an entire section at once, check "Select All".

![Courses &amp; Materials expanded in the Permissions list, with the Select All tooltip over the checkbox on the right.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3213c45109aee3eaf09f9375b7f8e076eb8a9dd815e098c78a52111293c0710c.png)

## How to Choose Permissions

Choose permissions based on the work each admin will do, so every admin gets a different set. For example, an admin who reviews written assignments may not need access to the "Email" section if another team member handles that.
Here are the permissions you can give an admin on your account.

All Permissions. Gives the admin every permission, so they have full access to your account and can view and edit all of its data.

Courses & Materials. Gives the admin access to all courses and materials in your account. To limit what the admin can do in this section, click the arrow and select sub-items:

1. **Courses**. Lets the admin manage your account's courses.
2. **Libraries**. Lets the admin manage libraries.
3. **Categories**. Lets the admin manage categories.
4. **Cohorts**. Lets the admin manage cohorts.
5. **Packages**. Lets the admin manage packages.
6. **View Assignment Review**. Lets the admin review written assignments and edit assignments.
7. **Certificates**. Lets the admin manage certificates.
8. **Event Calendar**. Lets the admin manage the event calendar.

You can give an admin access to courses, libraries, a specific category of materials, packages, or cohorts. You can also define exactly what the admin can do in each section: create, delete, view, and more.

![Courses &amp; Materials permissions expanded: Courses, Libraries, Categories, Cohorts, Packages, View Assignment Review, Certificates and Event Calendar with their sub-items.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0f67f3410e78340acb9c8e8d6205db8e723b049649c5d413c62af2c4d878d25a.png)

Account Settings. Lets the admin view and edit general account settings, user profiles, payment gateways, the team, and API keys.

![Account Settings permissions expanded: View Team and its team-member rights, View General Settings, Payment Gateways, Apps, AI Agents, Manage Tags, Manage API Keys and Global Variables.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8f16652b9d92e40795188a191cf7526c198ebb397eb627656e8ae47eeae4b842.png)

Sales. Lets the admin view and edit your account's products and services, orders, and payments.

![Sales permissions expanded: Sales Analytics, View and Manage Products &amp; Services, Orders and Payments, and Export Orders &amp; Payments.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7b90297357a612c36234aa5f59b449d6e355eef8ecdf4d9c6ff3725a527fc69c.png)

CRM. Gives access to the contact list, which holds the personal data of your account's users. The admin also gets access to information about orders placed by customers and can manage contact tasks.

![CRM permissions expanded: Contact List with create, delete, assigned-users-only, import and export and contact-view rights, plus Access to Restricted Fields, Manage Others' Tasks, Manage Filters and Deals.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c2347357c9f4c5d54e6460be51e6bc228dcb9a729ab341ea063a145897da9531.png)

Community. Lets the admin view and manage the community.

Email. Lets the admin send broadcasts and set up email.

![Email permissions expanded: Send Broadcasts and Email Settings.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/862e3dec14f92f4f2e62b7b6bc9dcc7f76062599a36b1e0008cd869aad845353.png)

Sites & Webinars. Lets the admin view and edit websites and manage widgets and webinars.

![Sites &amp; Webinars permissions expanded: Sites with Manage Sites and Website Analytics, Webinars, Widgets with Manage Widgets, and Quizzes with Manage Quizzes and Export Quiz Answers.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/2f06b8987744d83d67ec75a2cc70b59daf66c6b0ec21eaee8c39295aa8d12a6e.png)

Automations. Lets the admin view and edit automations. Read more in "[Automations](https://docs.axl.tech/scenario)".

![Automations permissions expanded: Edit Automations and Run Automations.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b098f9fe133ac4e1d6123da1ef932a4763e566356e007bef357a2ca219f7a7d2.png)

Communications. Lets the admin chat with your account's users and guests and manage chat channels and chatbots.

![Communications permissions expanded: Chat with Users and Guests, Manage Chatbots, Manage Chat Channels, Manage Chats and Manage Templates.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e51f365478fbf6840bad6035d8fa0c6393540ca55ab4ba1803986f5e1e4857d6.png)

Affiliate Program. Lets the admin set up and manage the affiliate program. Read more in "[Affiliate Program](https://docs.axl.tech/affiliate-program)".

Gamification. Lets the admin manage the "Gamification" section. Read more in "[Gamification](https://docs.axl.tech/gamification)".

Manage Plan & Billing. Lets the admin manage your AXL plan and billing.

Import & Export Settings. Lets the admin configure the "Import & Export Settings" section.

Use File Manager. Gives access to the "Files" section. Read more in "[Files](https://docs.axl.tech/file-manager)".

The list also has separate sections for **Videos**, **Dashboards**, **Community**, **Meetings**, **Social Media**, **Advertising**, and **Telephony**. Each one gives access to the matching section of your account; click the arrow next to it to choose sub-items.

![Affiliate Program with Manage Affiliate Program, Gamification with Manage Gamification and Manage Transactions, then Manage Plan &amp; Billing, Import &amp; Export Settings, Videos and Use File Manager.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b9bedd71eb273fe05f30378d6cc0f851de63104117f66d23a4bfe6829b32a8f8.png)

After you set an admin's permissions, click "Save".

You can change your admins' permissions at any time, remove admins from your account, or add new ones.

## System Roles

A system role describes an admin's job function in your account. You can assign a role to each admin. To do this, click the arrow in the "Roles" field and select a role from the list.

![Roles field open in the Permissions tab: Main admin, Site editor, Head of sales, Course curator, Course editor and Sales staff.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3e5638a2a171b57a1010d0a432c095e32fde51e9759b512b0a700d9b5ef3149a.png)

Each role comes with a ready-made set of permissions. For example, the Course editor role has permissions for the "Courses & Materials" section. You can choose a role from the list, or create a new role and define its permissions.

![Permissions tab with the Course editor role selected: Courses &amp; Materials is checked, and Discard Changes and Save appear at the bottom.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d9616f1c015a52de9d29f879073546d49305ed37c139e34fbc9aa7ff101a1823.png)

## Role Management

To see the permissions for each role and make changes, click "Manage Roles".

![The Manage Roles link above the Roles field in the Permissions tab.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7ce718d401525b9dfe9f7c98f58856d9ae33f0530f1644bfad69909db1948142.png)

A panel opens with the permissions for each role. The default system roles are:

- Sales staff. Access to CRM, limited to their own contacts: contact profile, access and product management, history, learning information, and linked contacts only.
- Course editor. Access to the Courses & Materials section.
- Site editor. Access to the Sites section.
- Main admin. Full access to all sections of your account.
- Course curator. Access to assignment review and to CRM for their own contacts.
- Head of sales. Access to the CRM section.

![Manage Roles panel: System Roles Main admin, Site editor, Head of sales, Course curator, Course editor and Sales staff with descriptions, an empty Custom Roles list and the Create Role button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/54b72c1569f97564013dd4ed38174ad8c14f5b8a8554bce006a561bfd00c9358.png)

You can't change system roles, but you can create a new role with the permissions you need. Click "Create Role" and fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for the role.
2. Description. Add a description of the role.
3. Based on Roles. Select one or more system roles to base this role on.
4. Permissions. Select the permissions from the list.

![Create Role panel: Title Admissions coordinator, a description, Based on Roles Head of sales, the Permissions list, Cancel and Save.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/418ad3c18eb7171093a6625279fcdfa9a1bd5ed0ca3d522427f8ca7a6a61b770.png)

After entering the custom role’s title, description, base roles, and permissions, click **Save**.

Your new role appears in the "Custom Roles" list. You can edit or delete custom roles.

## Departments

Open the "Departments" tab to create and manage your team's departments.
Departments help you structure your team into specialized groups, such as content, technical support, and marketing.

Click "Create Department".

![Departments tab with the Create Department button and the Admissions department in the list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/695d00f132f981c0621dd6142adc9a4277b3a5c2fb1e0fb9f27d37023f0fa446.png)

**The new department appears in the list**. Each department shows:

1. Title. The department's name. Click the edit icon to change the name.
2. Number of members. How many team members work in the department. It shows you the size of each department and helps with resource planning and staffing.
3. The "Add to Department" button. Adds team members to the department.
4. The "Delete" button. Deletes the department.

![A department row: the Admissions title with its edit icon, the member count, Add to Department and the Delete button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/695d00f132f981c0621dd6142adc9a4277b3a5c2fb1e0fb9f27d37023f0fa446.png)

Click "Add to Department". In the window that opens, fill in the details:

1. Team Member. Select the team member from the list.
2. Member Role. Select "Department Member" or "Department Manager". The role sets the member's level of responsibility and authority in the team, so the functions available to them may change with the role you choose.
3. Job Title. Enter the job title for the member you're adding. It should reflect their duties in the department. Make it clear and easy to understand, because it shapes the department's internal organization and structure.

Click "Add".

![Add to Department window for Admissions: Team Member Jordan Lee, Member Role Department Manager, Job Title Head of Admissions, Cancel and Add.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c77a6dd464092d1fd06d886e44c0c591053b6c5cc60e809924ffe9ec142024d2.png)

The new member appears in the department's list.

![Admissions department with one member: Jordan Lee, Head of Admissions, marked as Department Manager.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/551eb19523ef4ff69ea96936a73123c5603f64876807b41618c179d94c0b3759.png)

The search bar and filter at the top of the section help you quickly find the right department or team member.

- Search. Search by keyword.
- Team Member. Select a team member from the list to quickly find and review information about the people who work in a particular department.

![Departments tab filters: the Search field and the Add Filter menu with the Team Member filter.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/023c89fa8d086c53faafa443a7729e5425a8fdc139c7db09a96d1f5c97c0d493.png)

---

# Payment Gateways

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/payment-settings

> Connect payment gateways such as Stripe and PayPal so customers can pay on your website, and manage the gateways you've added.

Payment gateways are the ways visitors to your web pages can pay on AXL. Connect at least one so that guests see a payment button in the shopping cart on your site.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Adding a Payment Gateway

How to Connect a Payment Gateway

List of Payment Gateways

## Adding a Payment Gateway

Go to "Settings" → "Payment Gateways". Click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the list of providers opens right away.

![Payment Settings with Add Payment Gateway and six example rows: Stripe, Cash, NMI, PayPal, Revolut Pay and Bank Transfer, each with a drag handle, currency, Show on Website mark, payment total, and edit and delete controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a4230e08d5a151f5518cbce5d36f2e6d1eaf1566d0a69106322b81d8646f5e27.png)
Open Settings → Payment Gateways to add a gateway or review existing methods. Each row shows the method’s currency, website visibility and payment total. Drag rows by the handle to change the order of payment methods at checkout.

The list of available payment gateways opens:

- **Stripe**
- **PayPal**
- **Cash**
- **Bank Transfer**
- **Fondy**
- **Square**
- **Smart Glocal**
- **BitPay**
- **ECPay**
- **Mercado Pago**
- **Midtrans**
- **CyberSource**
- **WayForPay**
- **Mobbex**

![Add Payment Gateway dialog with provider tiles including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Cash and Bank Transfer, and a More button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/29d6ab1b06d2e8210a50ba369df7360a0b189a5608f16cc8bf25d46ccc10d08d.png)
Choose a provider tile. Click More to see additional providers available to your account.

You can connect any of these gateways, or several at once. The list also includes Revolut Pay, Affirm, NMI, BePaid, ProntoPaga, Cashfree, Redsys, and dLocal Go, and some providers sit under "More". Gateways for Russia, such as Robokassa and YooKassa, appear only when your account language is Russian or you've already connected them.

## How to Connect a Payment Gateway

Click "Add Payment Gateway" and select a gateway from the list. A panel opens. Fill in the fields.
All payment gateways have similar settings:

1. **Title**. Enter a name for the payment gateway. It's for your own use and makes the gateway easier to find.
2. **Description**. Visitors to your pages see this description of the payment method.
3. **Payment Button Text**. This text appears on the payment button on your web page (site).
4. **Show on Website**. Check the box to make this payment method available on your website.
5. **Save card details for future payments where supported**. Enable this for a supported saved-payment flow, such as subscription renewal. The option does not itself save a card or make every later order a one-click payment; checkout must first complete the gateway's payment-method setup.
6. **Currency**. Choose one of the gateway's available currencies. For online checkout, leave the field at **Account Currency** to use the order's currency. If the currencies differ, AXL converts the payment-request amount when it prepares checkout. It uses available exchange-rate data and may fall back to the latest saved rate; checkout cannot prepare the converted payment if no rate is available. Check the displayed amount and currency before payment. This setting does not set the provider's settlement currency or conversion rate.
7. **Integration Settings** (not available for Cash; Bank Transfer has no additional settings). These settings differ by gateway. For Stripe, you enter two keys: a publishable key and a secret key. For PayPal, you enter a Client ID and a secret key. For Robokassa, you enter the shop ID and passwords. For YooKassa, you enter detailed information (shop ID, secret key, tax system, payment subject, and payment mode). You get these connection details from the gateway when you set up your account with it. For help filling in the "Integration Settings" fields, see "[PayPal Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/paypal-settings)", "[Stripe Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings)", and others.
8. **Show pop-up window.** Opens the payment form in a pop-up window for customers instead of redirecting them to the gateway's payment page. This option is in the Integration Settings of gateways that support it, such as Stripe and PayPal.

![Stripe New Payment Gateway for Northstar Academy with general settings, empty publishable-key and secret-key fields, and Create and Cancel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9b62addf83c3be0aff28c10871192f271f1b66548d01abba9e7e59dc415e0780.png)
Stripe is shown as an example of the common gateway settings. The keys are empty and card saving is off; this is an unsaved setup form.

Click **Create** to add the gateway. To change an existing gateway later, open it with **Edit**, update the fields, and click **Save**. Check its currency and **Show on Website** value in the gateway list.

Payment information from every gateway appears in the "Orders" and "Payments" sections. If a customer pays in cash, you need to change the order's payment details manually in "Orders".

## List of Payment Gateways

After you add payment gateways, they appear in the list on the "Payment Gateways" page, as shown in the current gateway table above. The list shows:

1. **Icon**. The first column shows the payment gateway's logo.
2. **Type**. The type of payment gateway.
3. **Title**. The name you entered when you created this gateway.
4. **Currency**. The currency your customers pay in when they choose this gateway.
5. **Show on Website**. Shows whether the gateway appears on your website.
6. **Payments**. The total amount paid through this gateway, or "No payments yet".
7. **Edit button**. Click to edit the payment gateway.
8. **Delete button**. Click to delete this payment gateway. AXL asks you to confirm.

For details on each payment gateway, see its article: "[Stripe Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings)", "[PayPal Settings](https://docs.axl.tech/paypal-settings)", and others.

---

# Stripe Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/stripe-settings

> Create a Stripe account, copy your API keys, and connect Stripe to AXL to accept card payments.

Stripe is a US technology company that builds tools for accepting and processing online payments.

You can find detailed instructions for getting started with Stripe on its website using this [link](https://support.stripe.com/topics/getting-started), or follow the steps below.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Sign Up for Stripe

Getting API Keys

Integration with AXL

## Sign Up for Stripe

Open the official [Stripe registration page](https://dashboard.stripe.com/register) and complete the details requested for your account:

1. **Email**. Use the address you want to associate with your Stripe account.
2. **Full name**. Enter your name when requested.
3. **Password**. Create the password requested by Stripe.
4. Review the terms, privacy information and any consent choices shown in the current registration form.

Complete the email-verification and account-setup prompts Stripe gives you. A new account can use a sandbox for testing; before accepting real payments, complete [Stripe's business verification and activation steps](https://docs.stripe.com/get-started/account/set-up) in the Dashboard. Creating an AXL gateway does not activate your Stripe account.

## Getting API Keys

Sign in to the Stripe Dashboard and select the account or sandbox you intend to connect. Open its [**API keys** page](https://dashboard.stripe.com/apikeys). Copy the **Publishable key** and **Secret key** from that same environment into the matching AXL fields. Test keys begin with `pk_test_` and `sk_test_`; live keys begin with `pk_live_` and `sk_live_`. Start with test keys for a test checkout.

If the required secret key is not available to you, follow Stripe's [API-key access and reveal instructions](https://docs.stripe.com/keys). Some live secret keys can only be viewed when created. Keep the key private.

## Integration with AXL

Return to AXL and go to "Settings" → "Payment Gateways". Click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the list of providers opens right away. Select "Stripe" from the list. Fill in the fields in the panel that opens:

1. Title. Enter a name for the payment gateway.
2. Description. Add a description of your payment method. Your customers see this description.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Check the box if this will be your primary payment method.
5. Show on Website. Check the box to make this payment method available on your website.
6. Save card details for future payments where supported. Enable this for AXL subscription-renewal or upsell checkout flows that need to reuse a supported card. AXL requests reusable payment details during those flows; successful setup and any cardholder authentication are still required. When testing these flows, keep this setting enabled and use matching Stripe test keys with [Stripe test payment details](https://docs.stripe.com/testing). A later payment may still require customer authentication.
7. Currency. Choose the currency your customers will pay in. If you sell in several markets, you can choose a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept euros through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
8. Publishable Key. Enter the key you copied from the Stripe website.
9. Secret Key. Enter the key you copied from the Stripe website.
10. Show pop-up window. Check the box to open the payment in a pop-up window when a customer pays for an order, instead of redirecting them to a separate payment page.

![Stripe New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title, empty Publishable Key and Secret Key fields, and Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f8f4f00c7a5d6c0888f0e338df8e66a1dbd8934c808f2fc4ee6fb230a3d2ee79.png)
AXL setup example with credential fields left empty. Enter the matching Stripe publishable and secret keys for the environment you intend to use, then click Create.

After you fill out the form, click "Create". Stripe now appears in your list of payment gateways.

The AXL Stripe form does not have a separate **Test Mode** checkbox: the key pair determines the environment. Keep the secret key private, and do not paste a webhook signing secret into the **Secret Key** field.

---

# PayPal Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/paypal-settings

> Create a PayPal account, get your Client ID and secret key, and connect PayPal to AXL to accept payments.

Connect PayPal to AXL so customers can use it when paying for an order. Prepare your Business account, obtain the app credentials for the correct environment, then add the payment gateway in AXL.

## 1. Prepare a PayPal Business Account

Use a **PayPal Business account** for live payments. Creating a Personal account first is not required.

1. Use an existing Business account or follow PayPal's business sign-up flow for your country. Enter the login email address and create a password when prompted. If you already have a Personal account, follow PayPal's [account-upgrade instructions](https://www.paypal.com/us/cshelp/article/how-do-i-upgrade-or-downgrade-my-paypal-account-help339) or create a separate Business account.
2. If PayPal asks for phone verification, enter a number you control and complete the code verification shown.
3. Provide the requested identity, address, business and account-representative information. Review the account currency and agreements before continuing. The fields and verification requirements depend on your country and business type.
4. Complete the verification and resolve any account restrictions PayPal shows before accepting live payments. Finishing the registration forms does not by itself confirm that live payment acceptance is enabled.

If teammates need access to the PayPal account, configure their authorized access separately. Team access is not required to obtain the app credentials for AXL.

## 2. Get the App Credentials

1. Open the [PayPal Developer Dashboard](https://developer.paypal.com/dashboard/applications/) and select **Apps & Credentials**.
2. Choose **Sandbox** for testing. For live payments, select **Live** in the [PayPal Developer Dashboard](https://developer.paypal.com/dashboard/applications/live) and use your verified Business account.
3. Open the REST API app for the chosen environment. If you need a new app for your own business, click **Create App**, enter an **App Name**, and choose **Merchant**. In Sandbox, select the sandbox Business account that will act as the seller. Click **Create App** to open the app details. See [PayPal's REST credential guide](https://www.paypal.com/us/cshelp/article/how-do-i-create-paypal-rest-api-credentials-ts1949) for these fields.
4. Copy the app's **Client ID** and **Secret** into AXL's **Client ID** and **Secret Key** fields. Keep the Secret private; your account password and an API access token are not substitutes.

Use matching credentials and **Test Mode** settings in AXL. Switching Test Mode does not convert Sandbox credentials into Live credentials.

## 3. Connect PayPal to AXL

1. In AXL, open **Settings → Payment Gateways**.
2. Click **Add Payment Gateway**. If the gateway list is empty, the provider chooser opens immediately.
3. Select **PayPal**. Complete the **New Payment Gateway** panel using the settings below.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with the PayPal provider card and other available payment gateways.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
Select PayPal in Add Payment Gateway to open its settings panel.

1. Title. Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description. Add a description of the payment method that your customers see.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Check the box if you want to make this the primary payment method.
5. Show on Website. Check the box to make this payment method appear on your website.
6. Save card details for future payments where supported. Enable this for AXL subscription or upsell flows that need to reuse a PayPal payment method. For this integration, AXL asks PayPal to save the buyer's PayPal wallet after successful approval and payment. Your PayPal app must have vaulting enabled, and live use depends on PayPal approval. Keep this option enabled when testing that flow with matching sandbox credentials and follow [PayPal's sandbox vault setup](https://developer.paypal.com/api/save-with-purchase/save-payment-methods/).
7. Currency. Choose the currency your customers will pay in. If you sell in several markets, you can choose a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept euros through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
8. Client ID. Copy your PayPal app's unique Client ID and paste it into this field.
9. Secret Key. Copy your secret key and paste it into this field.
10. Test Mode. Select this checkbox with the Sandbox app's Client ID and Secret. For live payments, replace both with the matching Live app values and clear Test Mode. Changing the checkbox does not convert credentials between environments.
11. Show pop-up window. Check the box to open the payment in a pop-up window when a customer pays for an order, instead of redirecting them to a separate payment page.

![PayPal New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and Client ID, Secret Key, Test Mode and Show pop-up window, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b9e859aa227d693e0ecafc98b4f43699fa31c629bbc0d990ba37136daf229aac.png)
Unsaved PayPal setup example with credential fields left empty. Enter the credentials described above, review the settings, then click Create.

After you fill out the form, click "Create". PayPal now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# Cash Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/settings-cash

> Add the Cash payment gateway so customers can pay in cash, then record each cash payment on the order in AXL.

You can accept cash payments for purchases on your website. This article shows you how to add the Cash payment gateway to your AXL account.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Add the Cash Payment Gateway

Create an Order

Record the Payment

Order Status

## Add the Cash Payment Gateway

Go to Settings → Payment Gateways. Click "Add Payment Gateway" and select "Cash". In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description. Enter a description for this payment gateway. Visitors to your website and your customers will see it.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Check the box to make Cash your main payment method.
5. Show on Website. Check the box to show this payment method on your website.
6. **Currency**. Select one of the available currencies for this gateway. When you record a **Cash** payment in **New Payment**, enter **Amount** and **Fee** in the order's currency. The manual payment form records the values you enter; it does not convert them using the gateway's Currency setting.

![New Cash Payment Gateway form with instructions, a Northstar Academy title, description, payment-button text, Show on Website, Currency and Cancel/Create controls; this example has not been saved.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/04615f630591c7b3decda09caf548f90ceeffaa965ff018db161ff305b325878.png)
Set the customer-facing name, instructions and payment button before selecting Create. The example shown is an unsaved form.

Click "Create". The Cash payment gateway now appears in your list of payment gateways.

## Create an Order

When a customer pays in cash, AXL doesn't receive the payment automatically. You need to record the payment on the order yourself. First, create the order: go to Sales → Orders and click "Create Order".

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Status. Select an order status from the list.
2. Tags. Select tags for the order from the list.
3. Linked Contact. Select the customer from the list. If the contact isn't in the list, click "Create Contact" at the bottom of the list to add them.
4. Owner. Select the admin who owns the order.
5. Affiliate. Select the affiliate who earns the commission on this order through the affiliate program.
6. Deal. Select the deal that goes with this order. The list shows each deal's number and stage.
7. Expiration Date. After this date, the customer can no longer pay for the order.
8. Manage Custom Fields. Click to create custom fields for the order.
9. Contact Information. Enter the customer's contact information: first name, last name, email address, and phone number.
10. Items. Select one or more products to add to the order. You can also apply a promo code to the order.

![New Order panel: status, tags, Olivia Bennett as linked contact, owner, affiliate, deal, expiration date, contact information and the Leadership Certificate item totalling $149.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3ed75ae7f058289f6650dd623094e9518343a3119f18970af85438c996c24fa1.png)

Click "Create".

## Record the Payment

In **Sales → Orders**, open the order you created by selecting its number or the pencil (**Edit**) icon. Check the customer, items and amount due before recording money received.

![Sales → Orders list with Olivia Bennett's unpaid orders #1421 and #1420; the order number opens the order for editing.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c868150dbabe0a00a49215fb949d287717cd7deaaa7d22b30c0ad377c04ab859.png)

**The order details open**. In the Order Payments section, click "Create" and enter the payment details.

In **New Payment**, select your **Cash** gateway and keep **Status** set to **Succeeded** for money received. Enter **Amount**, **Fee** if applicable, and **Payment Date**, then click **Create**. Check the new entry in **Order Payments** and the updated paid amount.

![Complete initial New Payment form with Payment Gateway, Succeeded status, Amount, Fee, Payment Date and Cancel/Create buttons; no payment has been recorded.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4acfedd3390bc72a5235f4d6220babede05c877368bde281751a1da85c68978d.png)
Choose your gateway, enter the amount actually received and check the payment date before creating the record. The form shown is its initial unsaved state.

## Order Status

After you record a successful cash payment, AXL recalculates the paid amount. When successful payments cover the full order total, including any shipping charge, the order status changes to Paid. A payment you record manually does not complete the order by itself: click "Complete" at the top of the order page to complete it and grant access to the products in the order.

Check the payment entry, the remaining **Amount Due** and the products under **Items**. Changing the order's **Status** by itself does not record a payment. Record only cash you have received.

![Purchase order #1422 after a $49 cash payment: status Paid, Amount Paid $49.00 and the Complete button at the top.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9c368af0c117e70b4cc9c31e528d39a9897d513f998734ca3d5a80ea8fa71148.png)

---

# Bank Transfer Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/settings-cashless-payment

> Add the Bank Transfer payment gateway so customers can pay by bank transfer, then mark the order as paid once the money arrives.

A bank transfer, also called a cashless payment, is a payment made without cash. The money moves between bank accounts instead.

With a bank transfer, the customer sends the required amount from their bank account to your account, based on a payment order.

You can accept bank transfers in your AXL account.

This article shows you how to add the Bank Transfer payment gateway and start accepting these payments.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Add the Bank Transfer Payment Gateway

Create an Order

Record the Payment

Product Access

## Add the Bank Transfer Payment Gateway

Go to Settings → Payment Gateways. Click "Add Payment Gateway" and select "Bank Transfer".

![Current Add Payment Gateway chooser with the Bank Transfer card, other available providers and More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
Select Bank Transfer in Add Payment Gateway to open its settings form.

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description. Add a description for this payment method. Visitors to your website and your customers will see it.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Check the box to make Bank Transfer your main payment method.
5. Show on Website. Check the box to show this payment method on your website.
6. **Currency**. Select one of the available currencies for this gateway. When you record a **Bank Transfer** payment in **New Payment**, enter **Amount** and **Fee** in the order's currency. The manual payment form records the values you enter; it does not convert them using the gateway's Currency setting.

![New Bank Transfer Payment Gateway form with instructions, a Northstar Academy title, description, payment-button text, Show on Website, Currency, Integration Settings and Cancel/Create controls; this example has not been saved.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/14f073630ab037d7b80b6d817a033660f599993dd81aa12c602af69f7b831b78.png)
Set the customer-facing name, instructions and payment button before selecting Create. The example shown is an unsaved form.

Click "Create". The Bank Transfer payment gateway now appears in your list of payment gateways.

## Create an Order

When a customer pays by bank transfer, AXL doesn't receive the payment automatically. You need to record the payment on the order yourself. First, create the order: go to Sales → Orders and click "Create Order".

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Status. Select an order status from the list.
2. Tags. Select tags for the order from the list.
3. Linked Contact. Select the customer from the list. If the contact isn't in the list, click "Create Contact" at the bottom of the list to add them.
4. Owner. Select the admin who owns the order.
5. Affiliate. Select the affiliate who earns the commission on this order through the affiliate program.
6. Deal. Select the deal that goes with this order. The list shows each deal's number and stage.
7. Expiration Date. After this date, the customer can no longer pay for the order.
8. Manage Custom Fields. Click to create custom fields for the order.
9. Contact Information. Enter the customer's contact information: first name, last name, email address, and phone number.
10. Items. Select one or more products to add to the order. You can also apply a promo code to the order.

![New Order panel: status, tags, Olivia Bennett as linked contact, owner, affiliate, deal, expiration date, contact information and the Leadership Certificate item totalling $149.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3ed75ae7f058289f6650dd623094e9518343a3119f18970af85438c996c24fa1.png)

Click "Create".

## Record the Payment

In **Sales → Orders**, open the order you created by selecting its number or the pencil (**Edit**) icon. Check the customer, items and amount due before recording money received.

![Sales → Orders list with Olivia Bennett's unpaid orders #1421 and #1420; the order number opens the order for editing.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c868150dbabe0a00a49215fb949d287717cd7deaaa7d22b30c0ad377c04ab859.png)

**The order details open**. In the Order Payments section, click "Create" and enter the payment details.

In **New Payment**, select your **Bank Transfer** gateway and **Succeeded** for a transfer you have received. Enter **Amount**, **Fee** if applicable, and **Payment Date**, then click **Create**. Confirm the entry and the updated paid amount in the order.

![Complete initial New Payment form with Payment Gateway, Succeeded status, Amount, Fee, Payment Date and Cancel/Create buttons; no payment has been recorded.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4acfedd3390bc72a5235f4d6220babede05c877368bde281751a1da85c68978d.png)
Choose your gateway, enter the amount actually received and check the payment date before creating the record. The form shown is its initial unsaved state.

## Product Access

After you record a successful bank transfer, AXL recalculates the paid amount. When successful payments cover the full order total, including any shipping charge, the order status changes to Paid. A payment you record manually does not complete the order by itself: click "Complete" at the top of the order page to complete it and grant access to the products in the order.

Check the payment entry, the remaining **Amount Due** and the products under **Items**. Changing the order's **Status** by itself does not record a payment. Send the invoice or transfer instructions to the customer and record the payment only after the money reaches your account. The order's Payment Link can be shared for checkout; opening it is not confirmation that the transfer was received.

![Purchase order #1423 for Ethan Parker with status Paid: Leadership Certificate for $149, a Succeeded manual Bank Transfer payment of $149.00 under Order Payments, and the payment entry in Order History.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f694ddd5798c750dead66c9812500028b490ef6cf6c3a27c74c4b8a5e9946007.png)

For more on accepting bank transfers, see the article "[Accepting Payments by Bank Transfer](https://docs.axl.tech/accepting-payments-by-bank-transfer)".

---

# Accepting Payments by Bank Transfer

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/accepting-payments-by-bank-transfer

> Set up a payment page, form, and automation so customers can pay by bank transfer, then mark the order as paid when the money arrives.

A bank transfer lets customers pay straight into your bank account instead of by card. Below is the whole setup step by step: a page with a form, an automation, the bank transfer payment link, and updating the order once the money arrives.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Create a Website Page

Create a Form

Create an Automation

Get Your Bank Transfer Payment Link

Update the Order After Payment

## Create a Website Page

Go to "Sites" and open your website. To learn how to create a website, see the article "[Sites](https://docs.axl.tech/sites)".

![Sites list with the Northstar Academy Executive Programs website card highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b943f0fe20cc0bc1fe23b73cad6f444734c6770c31ae01518cc978c25d60f210.png)

To create a new page, click the "Page" button, or drag it to where you want the page to go.

![Website Pages tab with the New Page button highlighted above the page list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/acd201ed4d6a1aba371ec1dc4c8c1122a4b66cb632631f4021f0ee5bafba8e6d.png)

In the window that opens, go to the "Create from Scratch" tab, then enter the page title and the page URL. Click "Create and Open". The page editor opens.

![New page dialog on Create from Scratch with the title, internal name, page URL, and Create and Open.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/398e96fc880312f6a2de4a48497971bd6796e1cde1dbd95830b733c060422eaf.png)

## Create a Form

In the page editor, on the "Design" tab, ask the AI Assistant in the chat to add a form with the fields you need and a button labeled "Pay by Bank Transfer". You can ask for the course name, a short course description, and an image in the same request. For example: "Add a form with First name and Email fields and a "Pay by Bank Transfer" button, with the course name "Leadership Certificate — Core Course" and a one-line description above the fields". If the page already has a form, ask the assistant to change it instead. To learn more, see the article "[AI Page Editor](https://docs.axl.tech/ai-page-editor)".

![Page editor: a request to rename the form button to Pay by Bank Transfer and add the course name, the AI Assistant reply, and the updated form with Leadership Certificate, Core Course, First Name, Email Address and Pay by Bank Transfer.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/eedf0dc41a900575d10d399699cbdf0a449ba56987d5ee40f8ea2470394f3d54.png)
The assistant updates the form in the draft. Check the button text and the fields in the preview.

Check the form in the preview. The editor saves your changes as a draft; click "Publish" when the page is ready.

Go back to "Sites" and open the website you created. In the upper-right corner, switch the "Enabled" toggle on to make the page available to visitors.

![Website page list with the Website Status switch highlighted in the upper-right corner.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/acd201ed4d6a1aba371ec1dc4c8c1122a4b66cb632631f4021f0ee5bafba8e6d.png)

## Create an Automation

To email the customer payment instructions after they click "Pay by Bank Transfer", and to create a task for a team member to call the customer and issue an invoice, set up an automation for the form.
Open the "Automation" tab. Under "Events", select "Form Submitted" and drag it onto the workspace. Then switch to "Actions" and drag "Add Task", "Create Order", and "Send Email" onto the workspace. Next, connect the event to the actions.
To learn more about automations for websites, see the article "[Site Automation](https://docs.axl.tech/site-scenario)".

![Page Automation tab with Form Submitted connected to Add Task, Create Order, and Send Email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8fda58053df09177ce2917ee5fa89585a97c184e9a8edaf47725987361000cda.png)

The "Add Task", "Create Order", and "Send Email" steps need to be configured. Click the gear icon on a step, then click "Configure Step".

![Add Task step menu with Configure Step highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e0b181a5f795f7317a2f2206cbe807e016448bfa80f102acef462187ba95b97c.png)

The "Add Task" step settings open. In the "What to Do" field, describe the task for a team member: call the customer to issue an invoice for payment. Then enter the due date and choose who will do the task. Click "Save".

![Add Task step settings with the task text, start, duration, reminder, and assignee.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/60c738d58a043f50afd883be7e2b9388e63c226a57ba01048b978bf31296a66d.png)

On the "Send Email" step, click the gear icon, then click "Configure Step". The "Send Email" step settings open. Choose who receives the email, then pick an email template with "Use Template", or choose "No Template" and click "Create Email" to write a new one. Click "Edit Email" to open the email editor. In the editor, open "Settings" to choose the email profile and set the subject, then write the body: explain to the customer how to pay by bank transfer.

![Send Email step settings: Recipients, No Template or Use Template, the Northstar Fall Strategy Lab template with a preview, Edit Email, Create Template and Email Check.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ee7152400cee4736420737ded37d5b66b498de9b54bf385304d636b066edc084.png)
Pick a template or create an email, then click Edit Email to open the editor.

You can also add variables. A variable is a placeholder that AXL automatically replaces with the data you choose, such as the contact’s name, email address, account name, or order number. Place the cursor in the text, click "Insert variable" in the editor toolbar, and choose a variable from the list or find it with the search box. For example, #Contact.FirstName# is replaced with the recipient’s first name when the email is sent.

![Email editor toolbar with Insert variable open: a search box and Contact Details variables such as #Contact.ID#, #Contact.Email# and #Contact.FirstName#.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8d0a2037f94299b11915f3f94243914ac2b8d4121c9d0808e92d09d3909759b0.png)
Insert variable lists the variables available in this step. Use the search box to find one.

On the "Create Order" step, click the gear icon, then click "Configure Step". The "Create Order" step settings open. Select the product to add to the order. Click "Save".

![Create Order step settings with expiration, tags, promo code, and the Leadership Certificate product.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/58503a076dfa1422f5cb51b232f968d51ea685e16fac8ba07a5aa8f760e7ba9b.png)

When the automation is set up, switch the "Active" toggle on.

![Active page automation: Form Submitted connected to the invoice task, order creation, and email.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5765bc6479483fc1248c8aba95bd5d23d36b25e5fe99410c800e1967ed1f3d45.png)

## Get Your Bank Transfer Payment Link

Open the website page and copy the page link under the page name in the upper-left corner. You can use this link to your course sales form in broadcasts to your contacts.

![Page editor header: page title, its link with a copy icon, and the Page Status switch.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c5bf77dd4c0532fa62286f9247b1de8247382774b88a8fa32c799f0073ce8e15.png)
The page link is under the page name. Click the copy icon to copy it.

## Update the Order After Payment

When someone submits the form, the automation runs and creates an order automatically. After you receive the customer's bank transfer, you need to update the order status manually. Go to "Sales" → "Orders". The order created by the automation appears in the list. Click the order number to open it.

![Orders list with an order number highlighted for opening its details.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0bd8ec611deca3aed48388cbf5dde3019171a8dd58a0f250bf817812e7962907.png)

After confirming that the transfer has arrived, open the order and find **Order Payments**. Click **Create** to record the payment.

**A window for creating a payment opens**. Select your Bank Transfer payment gateway from the list, then enter the amount the customer paid and the payment date.

Keep the payment status set to **Succeeded** for money you have received. Enter the **Fee**, if applicable, and click **Create**. Check that the payment appears in **Order Payments** and that the paid amount matches your bank record before completing the order.

![New Payment window for a bank transfer: Payment Gateway Bank Transfer, Status Succeeded, Amount 49.00, Fee 0.00 and Payment Date.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cc2840ddbf02b8161328a2a5a916f54ccb4ae5c59d02ae72ddf4e15ac20e8f1d.png)

Click "Complete" in the upper-left corner of the order card. The customer then gets access to the course.

---

# Fondy Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/fondy-settings

> Connect Fondy to AXL: create a Fondy merchant, copy your Merchant ID and Payment Key, and add Fondy as a payment gateway.

Fondy processes online payments. Before connecting it, confirm that Fondy can onboard your business in its country and support the currencies you need. See the [current Fondy requirements and FAQ](https://fondy.io/gb/faq/).

Click a section below to jump to it:

Create a Fondy Account

Connect Fondy to AXL

## Create a Fondy Account

You need a Fondy payment-gateway merchant account. Start from the [official Fondy registration page](https://fondy.io/gb/registration/) and choose the **Gateway** account option. Fondy also offers Flow business accounts, which are a separate product.

The provider screenshots below are older interface references. Use the current merchant portal if its menus differ.

![Historical Fondy registration form with an empty E-mail field and a Google sign-up option.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/e952e0c39374353dd101d6478ca5ce47443ba88cac918941419f01b937cf2b94.png)
Older Fondy registration reference in English. The E-mail field is empty; this is not a newly created merchant account. Follow the current registration flow for the Gateway product.

In the merchant portal, open your merchant settings and add a merchant. The older layout below labels this route **Merchant Settings → Add Merchant**.

![Historical Fondy Merchant Settings page with Add Merchant highlighted and a source test-merchant card.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/393d9cedab04311d230bb4e0f08f5649f10fdc8a5c11710eba48ac7549f202c6.png)
Older Fondy merchant-list reference in English. **Add Merchant** starts merchant setup. The test-merchant label belongs to the source example, not your business or the AXL example account.

Enter the company details Fondy requests. These can include the country, company type and name, registration number, registered address, website and phone number. Required fields vary by country and company type. Review the applicable terms and continue through the provider’s form.

Complete Fondy’s merchant verification and provide the requested documentation and an operational website. Follow the status and any outstanding requests in your merchant portal. Contact Fondy support if you need help with activation; contacting support is not described here as a mandatory step for every account. The [Fondy FAQ](https://fondy.io/gb/faq/) explains its current requirements and support options.

The older layout below shows merchant status under **Financial**.

![Historical Fondy Merchant Settings Financial tab showing Pending status and company and bank-detail sections with values concealed in the source.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/704366a805b96dbf1739d5d3ca0b204729d7b6f68b3fca03aa444a4e75e8a731.png)
Older Fondy Financial-tab reference from the source’s 2021 example. **Pending** is that example’s status, not your current activation status. The original concealment of company and bank details is preserved.

Find the merchant ID and payment key for the merchant you will use with AXL. In the older portal layout, these are under **Technical**. If the layout has changed, follow the [current Fondy Gateway documentation](https://docs.fondy.io/). Keep the payment key private and copy credentials from the intended merchant environment.

## Connect Fondy to AXL

Next, connect the payment gateway to AXL so your customers can pay you through the payment forms in your account.

In AXL, go to "Settings" → "Payment Gateways" and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the list of gateways opens right away.

If **Fondy** is not visible in the provider list, click **More** to reveal the additional gateways.

![Current AXL payment-gateway chooser with the initial provider list and the More button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
In **Settings → Payment Gateways**, choose **Add Payment Gateway**. This is the first provider list; click **More** to reveal additional providers, including Fondy.

After expanding the provider list with **More**, select **Fondy**. Complete the form:

1. Title. Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description. Add a description of this payment gateway. Customers see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Select the checkbox if this is the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website. Select the checkbox to offer this payment method on your website.
6. Currency. Choose the currency your customers pay in. If you sell in several countries, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in dollars through one gateway and accept euros through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
7. Merchant ID. Enter the merchant ID you copied from Fondy. Step 1 above explains how to get it.
8. Payment Key. Enter the payment key you copied from Fondy. Step 1 above explains how to get it.

![Fondy New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and empty Merchant ID and Payment Key fields.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/7798ca0d7a240292fb8c5d9affa697cb2e52416a304aea1035e87327d7a69fd5.png)
AXL setup example with Merchant ID and Payment Key left empty. Enter the credentials from your Fondy merchant, then use Create at the bottom of the panel.

After entering the required values, click **Create** to save the gateway. It then appears in the gateway list. Saving these settings does not by itself confirm merchant activation or a successful payment.

---

# Square Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/squareup-settings

> Connect Square to AXL: create a Square application, copy your Application ID, Location ID, and Access Token, and add Square as a payment gateway.

Connect Square to AXL to accept payments for your products and services. This guide explains how to create or open a Square application, find the Application ID, Access Token, and Location ID for the same environment, and enter them in an AXL payment gateway.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Create a Square Account

Connect Square to AXL

## Create a Square Account

You need a Square account and an application. Follow the [current Square account and application guide](https://developer.squareup.com/docs/get-started/create-account-and-application). If you already have both, sign in and open the existing application for this integration.

For a new account, provide the personal, country, business and application details Square requests. Review its terms and complete the sign-up prompts. Registration can create your first application. If you need a separate application later, use the Applications page described below.

The Square screenshots below are older interface references in English. They illustrate the relevant controls; they are not new authenticated dashboard captures.

After you register, sign in to the [Square Developer Console](https://developer.squareup.com/apps) and open **Applications**. This is where you create or open the application whose credentials AXL will use. The earlier dashboard below shows an **App integrations** entry; use the current Developer Console path if your dashboard differs.

![Historical Square dashboard with Settings expanded and App integrations highlighted.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/c970c38a8e1b6ed7aa8a4b98542194399a59890710a51b2b54d3eca06fc91285.png)
Older Square dashboard reference from the source’s April 2023 example. The former **Settings → App integrations** route is shown for context. Use the current [Developer Console](https://developer.squareup.com/docs/devtools/developer-dashboard) route described above. The source business name and empty metrics are not the Northstar Academy setup.

Create a new application from **Applications**, or open an existing application for this integration. The earlier interface below labels the creation control **New Application**.

![Historical Square Developer My Applications page with New Application and a Testing Credentials application card showing an application identifier.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/58027939d0456981b197ced7e68e93163c865dedb93302e2656fdba801ee1480.png)
Older Applications reference. **New Application** starts creation in this layout. The visible identifier and Testing Credentials name belong to the source example; use your own application. An Application ID is distinct from the private Access Token.

Enter a name for your application and click "Create Application".

![Historical Square Developer New Application form with the source name Test Application, Back and Create Application.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/ccc9635d4dc2826b3d8de5f2362e88676abad075e9ac25ecf9f4b4e306a7f22f.png)
Older complete application-name form. **Test Application** is the source’s illustrative name. Choose a name that identifies your own integration and follow the current creation prompts.

Open the application's **Credentials** page and select **Sandbox** for testing. Copy the **Sandbox Application ID** and **Sandbox Access Token**. Production credentials are separate. The Access Token is confidential; the **Application Secret** used for OAuth is a different value and is not the Access Token required by this AXL form.

![Historical Square Credentials page with Sandbox selected, Sandbox Application ID concealed and Sandbox Access token masked in the source.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5119b868ddd3db832bcdcf15d987601507b2080dea98c9fb3a830bfde156af07.png)
Older **Sandbox** credentials reference. Both required rows are visible, but the source hides their values. Do not replace a token merely because the old screenshot shows **Replace token**. Use the matching credentials for your own application and environment.

Find the **Location ID** on the application’s **Locations** page in the Square Developer Console. Copy the Application ID, Access Token, and Location ID from the same environment. Keep **Sandbox** credentials for tests; use **Production** credentials for live payments.

Before taking live payments, complete Square's [account activation](https://developer.squareup.com/docs/get-started/create-account-and-application) and use the production set for the same seller and location. A sandbox test does not activate the seller account.

![Historical Square Locations page with Sandbox selected, the Production option visible, a Default Test Account location and a concealed Location ID.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9caa9b673f03260eff5b6dabfc3925863d617c2e1fdc567aaf4884bc707bc5c8.png)
Older Locations reference. Despite the arrow pointing toward **Production**, the selected environment in this source image is **Sandbox**. The default test location and address are examples; do not combine its Location ID with production credentials.

## Connect Square to AXL

Next, connect the payment gateway to AXL so your customers can pay you through the payment forms in your account.

In AXL, go to "Settings" → "Payment Gateways" and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the list of gateways opens right away.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with provider cards, including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Mercado Pago and BitPay, plus More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
After Add Payment Gateway, select Square from the provider cards.

Select "Square" from the list. In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description. Add a description of this payment gateway. Customers see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Select the checkbox if this is the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website. Select the checkbox to offer this payment method on your website.
6. Save card details for future payments where supported. Enable this for AXL subscription or upsell flows that need to reuse a supported card. After a successful Square payment, AXL attempts to save a card on file for that customer; a completed payment alone does not guarantee that card saving succeeded. Keep this option enabled when testing card saving, use matching sandbox credentials, and follow [Square's Sandbox card-on-file scenarios](https://developer.squareup.com/docs/devtools/sandbox/testing).
7. Currency. Select the currency you want to accept payments in. If you sell in several countries, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in dollars through one gateway and accept euros through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
8. Application ID. Enter the Application ID you copied from Square.
9. Location ID. Enter the Location ID you copied from Square.
10. Access Token. Enter the Access Token you copied from Square.
11. Test Mode. Select this checkbox when all three values—Application ID, Location ID, and Access Token—come from Sandbox. For live payments, use the matching production values and clear Test Mode after Square activation.
12. Show pop-up window. Select the checkbox to open the payment in a pop-up window when a customer pays for an order, instead of sending them to a separate page.

![Square New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and general settings, Save card details and Currency.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/905b0305bbdd2794a8ed864db3b09174830ce9f66895b6f24f6d548789acd9a9.png)
Unsaved Square setup example. Review the general settings, then scroll to Integration Settings shown below.

![Square Integration Settings with Application ID, Location ID, Access Token, Test Mode and Show pop-up window, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d9957e9e4f63897c25491b632b63e9cc4256085c7617775d5aaf95716066aec6.png)
Scroll down in the same Square panel to complete Integration Settings. The credential fields are intentionally empty in this unsaved example; Create is at the bottom.

When the required fields are complete, click **Create** to save the gateway. Square then appears in the gateway list. Saving the form alone does not confirm Square activation, a successful payment or successful card saving.

---

# Smart Glocal Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/smart-glocal-settings

> Connect Smart Glocal to AXL: get your project name and keys from your Smart Glocal manager and add it as a payment gateway.

Use **Smart Glocal** to accept payments through AXL. Set up a project with Smart Glocal and obtain the required keys, then enter them in the AXL payment gateway form.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Create a Smart Glocal Account

Connect Smart Glocal to AXL

## Create a Smart Glocal Account

Apply through the [official Smart Glocal website](https://smart-glocal.com/), then coordinate the connection with your Smart Glocal account manager. Follow the provider's [Quick start](https://developer.smart-glocal.com/docs/before) for project onboarding and testing.

Get your **project identifier** from Smart Glocal. The two public keys have different owners: your technical team prepares your RSA key pair and gives **your public key** to Smart Glocal; Smart Glocal provides **its public key** for your integration. Keep your private key confidential.

For AXL, enter **your private key** in **Private Key** and **Smart Glocal's public key** in **Public Key (Issued by Smart Glocal)**. Do not put your own public key into the second field. The provider's [key and signature instructions](https://developer.smart-glocal.com/docs/reference/format) explain this exchange. Complete the provider's project, request-origin and webhook setup requirements with the team responsible for your AXL connection before going live.

## Connect Smart Glocal to AXL

Next, connect the payment gateway to AXL so your customers can pay you through the payment forms in your account.

In AXL, go to "Settings" → "Payment Gateways" and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the list of gateways opens right away.

If **Smart Glocal** is not visible in the provider list, click **More** to reveal the additional gateways.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with provider cards, including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Mercado Pago and BitPay, plus More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
After Add Payment Gateway, click More to find Smart Glocal. Then select its provider card.

Click "More", then select "Smart Glocal". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description. Add a description of this payment gateway. Customers see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Select the checkbox if this is the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website. Select the checkbox to offer this payment method on your website.
6. Save card details for future payments where supported. Enable this for AXL subscription or upsell flows that need to reuse a supported card. The Smart Glocal payment widget asks for the buyer's consent to recurring payments, and a successful first payment is needed to obtain reusable payment details. When testing this flow, keep the option enabled and use the matching [Smart Glocal test environment and test card details](https://developer.smart-glocal.com/docs/reference/testing).
7. Currency. Select the currency you want to accept payments in. If you sell in several countries, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in dollars through one gateway and accept euros through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
8. Project. Enter the project identifier issued by Smart Glocal for this integration.
9. Private Key. Enter the private RSA key prepared for your project. Its matching public key must be registered with Smart Glocal. Keep the private key confidential.
10. Public Key (Issued by Smart Glocal). Enter Smart Glocal's public key for the environment you are using, not the public key from your own key pair.
11. Test Mode. Select this for the Smart Glocal test environment and use its matching public key. Use test data there. Before switching to live payments, complete the provider's activation requirements and replace the provider public key with the live-environment key.

![Smart Glocal New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and general settings and the empty Project field.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a3f2631347fcdaafa3a4bcf322dceea1693e62a870ab35cf9e2c7b54159824bc.png)
Unsaved Smart Glocal setup example. Review the general settings, then scroll to Integration Settings shown below.

![Smart Glocal Integration Settings with Project, Private Key, Public Key (Issued by Smart Glocal) and Test Mode, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/542055176b24aef2100485ca5624c1ddb896c78a663d0004fd43b02620a76faf.png)
Scroll down in the same Smart Glocal panel to complete Integration Settings. The credential fields are intentionally empty in this unsaved example; Create is at the bottom.

When you've filled in the form, click "Create". Smart Glocal now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# BitPay Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/bitpay-settings

> Connect BitPay to AXL: create a BitPay API token and add BitPay as a payment gateway to accept cryptocurrency payments.

**BitPay lets you accept cryptocurrency payments**. The cryptocurrencies and wallets available to a buyer depend on BitPay’s current checkout support. Check BitPay’s current wallet and payment documentation rather than relying on an old operating-system list.

All buyers have to do is choose cryptocurrency as the payment method on your website and pay the bill from their wallet. This article shows you how to enable BitPay payments in your account.

Click a section below to jump to it:

Create a BitPay Account

Connect BitPay to AXL

## Create a BitPay Account

To accept customer payments, apply for a **BitPay merchant account** through the [official BitPay website](https://bitpay.com/) or its [merchant sign-up page](https://bitpay.com/dashboard/signup). Choose the business/merchant flow rather than registering only for personal wallet use.

Provide the business and account information requested, confirm your email, and complete the merchant dashboard's verification and settlement steps. Registration alone does not establish approval to accept live payments. Follow BitPay's [merchant application guide](https://support.bitpay.com/hc/en-us/articles/203010446-How-do-I-apply-for-a-merchant-account) for the requirements shown for your business.

If you also need the separate **BitPay Wallet**, use the official **Get the Wallet** download for your operating system. This wallet step does not create the merchant API token used by AXL; obtain that token from the merchant dashboard below.

Open **API Tokens** in the merchant dashboard for the environment you will use: [test tokens](https://test.bitpay.com/dashboard/merchant/api-tokens) for testing or [production tokens](https://bitpay.com/dashboard/merchant/api-tokens) for live payments. Click **Add New Token**, enter a recognizable label such as **Northstar Academy — AXL**, leave **Require Authentication** unchecked for this token-based integration, and click **Add Token**. Copy the resulting token into AXL's **Token** field and keep it private.

![Historical BitPay Manage API Tokens screen with Payment Tools, Add New Token and a Point-of-Sale token card; the source image conceals the token and user details.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/cc6a31dde915d05b64a29d3c8d3e5bc6e62ebaa0b86360ef8330d6d19d9b9821.png)
Older BitPay interface reference in English. Payment Tools opens token management; Add New Token creates the token described above. The 2019 example and Test Account label belong to the source image, not your account. Use your own merchant environment and token. See the current [BitPay token setup instructions](https://developer.bitpay.com/docs/whmcs); this is a reference image, not a new dashboard capture.

## Connect BitPay to AXL

Next, connect the payment gateway to AXL so your customers can pay you through the payment forms in your account.

In AXL, go to "Settings" → "Payment Gateways" and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the list of gateways opens right away.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with provider cards, including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Mercado Pago and BitPay, plus More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
After Add Payment Gateway, select BitPay from the provider cards.

Select "BitPay" from the list. In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title. Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description. Add a description of this payment gateway. Customers see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text. Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method. Select the checkbox if this is the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website. Select the checkbox to offer this payment method on your website.
6. Currency. Select the currency you want to accept payments in. If you sell in several countries, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in dollars through one gateway and accept euros through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
7. Token. Enter the token you copied from BitPay.
8. Test Mode. Select this checkbox with a token from your BitPay test merchant account. For live payments, use your approved production merchant account's token and clear Test Mode. The checkbox selects the environment; it does not convert a token between environments.

![BitPay New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and Token and Test Mode, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b61eaed613f776c5b2348e8f1e9f832c35ecf310a8d11cd253dcfe4899094fe7.png)
Unsaved BitPay setup example with credential fields left empty. Enter the credentials described above, review the settings, then click Create.

When you've filled in the form, click "Create". BitPay now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# ECPay Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/ecpay-settings

> Connect ECPay to your AXL account to accept online payments in Taiwan.

Use **ECPay** to accept payments in Taiwan through AXL. This guide explains how to obtain your Merchant ID, HashKey and HashIV, then add the payment gateway to your account.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Create an ECPay Account

Connect ECPay to AXL

## Create an ECPay Account

To get started, create an ECPay account. Go to the [official ECPay website](https://www.ecpay.com.tw) and click "Register".

Follow the on-screen instructions to finish registration.

Sign in to the [ECPay merchant dashboard](https://vendor.ecpay.com.tw/Frame/Index). Open **System Settings (系統設定) → System Integration Settings (系統介接設定) → Integration Information (介接資訊)**. Copy **MerchantID**, **HashKey**, and **HashIV** for the payment service you are connecting, and enter all three in the matching AXL fields.

Keep the two encryption keys private. For tests, use the matching merchant ID and keys from ECPay's [Embedded Checkout 2.0 test information](https://developers.ecpay.com.tw/9163/). Before accepting real payments, replace the whole test set with your merchant's production values and complete the provider's required service activation. Do not mix keys from another ECPay service or environment.

## Connect ECPay to AXL

Next, connect ECPay to AXL. To let your customers pay for your products and services, you need to add the payment gateway to your account.

In AXL, go to Settings → Payment Gateways and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the page shows the list of gateways right away.

If **ECPay** is not visible in the provider list, click **More** to reveal the additional gateways.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with provider cards, including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Mercado Pago and BitPay, plus More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
After Add Payment Gateway, click More to find ECPay. Then select its provider card.

Click "More" if you don't see ECPay, then select "ECPay". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title: Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description: Add a description of this payment method. Customers will see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text: Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method: Select this checkbox if this should be the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website: Select this checkbox to make this payment method available on your website.
6. Currency: Select the currency you plan to accept payments in. If you sell in several markets, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept a different currency through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
7. Merchant ID: Enter the MerchantID you copied from the ECPay website.
8. HashKey: Enter the HashKey you copied from the ECPay website.
9. HashIV: Enter the HashIV you copied from the ECPay website.
10. Test Mode: Select this checkbox with ECPay's matching payment test MerchantID, HashKey, and HashIV. For live payments, enter the corresponding production values and clear Test Mode. This setting selects the test or production checkout environment.

![ECPay New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and Merchant ID, HashKey, HashIV and Test Mode, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/de48a67eed8f2f40ea46460f4a2be9b957704e22fc347f5c4278428004652d5d.png)
Unsaved ECPay setup example with credential fields left empty. Enter the credentials described above, review the settings, then click Create.

When you've filled in the form, click "Create". ECPay now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# Mercado Pago (AR) Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/mercadopago-ar-settings

> Connect Mercado Pago (Argentina) to your AXL account with your Public Key and Access Token.

Connect Mercado Pago to AXL using the Public Key and Access Token for your payment application. This guide explains where to find the credentials for the selected environment and how to configure the AXL payment gateway.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Create a Mercado Pago Account

Connect Mercado Pago to AXL

## Create a Mercado Pago Account

To get started, create a Mercado Pago account. Go to the [official Mercado Pago website](https://www.mercadopago.com.ar/) and click "Create your Account".

Follow the on-screen instructions to finish registration.

![Historical Mercado Pago credentials page in Portuguese with Modo Sandbox and Modo Produção sections and Public key and Access token labels; source credential values are concealed.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/0ce3bbe28eff22f7d33052982bf92c9ae9ab4f0b07c6d58f2bf595363253db19.png)
Older Mercado Pago interface reference in Portuguese. Modo Sandbox means the test environment; Modo Produção means production. Public key and Access token map to AXL Public Key and Access Token. The current [Your integrations credential instructions](https://www.mercadopago.com.ar/developers/en/docs/your-integrations/credentials) use a different menu, described below. Do not renew credentials just because the old screenshot shows that control.

In Mercado Pago Developers, open **Your integrations** and select the application for this payment integration. Open **Testing → Test credentials** for testing, or **Production → Production credentials** for live payments. Follow the provider's [credential instructions](https://www.mercadopago.com.ar/developers/en/docs/split-payments/additional-content/your-integrations/credentials) and complete any activation steps shown for your application.

**Copy the Public Key and Access Token for the same application and environment**. These map to AXL's **Public Key** and **Access Token** fields. The Access Token is private; **Client ID** and **Client Secret** are different credentials and are not substitutes for these AXL fields.

Start with the test credentials required by your integration and its test-account instructions. Switch to activated production credentials only when you intend to receive real payments.

**Earlier dashboard reference:** [Your Business → Settings → Credentials](https://www.mercadopago.com.ar/settings/account/credentials). Use the current application-specific path above when the dashboard shows **Your integrations**.

## Connect Mercado Pago to AXL

Next, connect Mercado Pago to AXL.
In AXL, go to Settings → Payment Gateways and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the page shows the list of gateways right away.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with provider cards, including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Mercado Pago and BitPay, plus More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
After Add Payment Gateway, select Mercado Pago from the provider cards.

Select "Mercado Pago". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title: Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description: Add a description of this payment method. Customers will see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text: Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method: Select this checkbox if this should be the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website: Select this checkbox to make this payment method available on your website.
6. Currency: Select the currency you plan to accept payments in. If you sell in several markets, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept a different currency through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
7. Public Key: Enter the Public Key you copied from the Mercado Pago website in step 1.
8. Access Token: Enter the Access Token you copied from the Mercado Pago website.
9. Show pop-up window: Select this checkbox to open the payment form in a pop-up window at checkout instead of redirecting customers to a separate payment page.

![Mercado Pago New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and Public Key, Access Token and Show pop-up window, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d60f24916219d8c3f53696bc2ed29fce78abc712e3c496ee67ced011af9d343e.png)
Unsaved Mercado Pago setup example. Enter the Public Key and Access Token described above, review Show pop-up window and the general settings, then click Create. Both credential fields are empty here.

When you've filled in the form, click "Create". Mercado Pago now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# CyberSource Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/cybersource-settings

> Connect CyberSource to your AXL account with your Organization ID, Key, and Secret Key.

CyberSource provides payment processing, payment-gateway and fraud-management services. This article explains the merchant credentials used by the current AXL CyberSource form.

**Compatibility notice:** the current AXL connector uses HTTP Signature authentication. CyberSource requires merchants using this method to migrate to JWT messaging by **March 2027**. Before relying on a new setup or that deadline, check with AXL support that your connector supports the provider’s required authentication. The form below does not offer a JWT or certificate switch. See [CyberSource’s migration notice](https://developer.cybersource.com/docs/cybs/en-us/platform/developer/all/rest/rest-getting-started/restgs-http-message-intro.html).

Click a section to jump to its description:

Create a CyberSource Account

Connect CyberSource to AXL

## Create a CyberSource Account

First obtain a CyberSource merchant account for the environment you need. For testing, follow the [official sandbox registration instructions](https://developer.cybersource.com/docs/cybs/en-us/platform/developer/all/rest/rest-getting-started/restgs-jwt-shared-secret-intro/restgs-shared-secret-register.html), complete the email setup and identity verification, then sign in to the Test Business Center. A sandbox account cannot process live payments.

For live payments, follow the [CyberSource production onboarding instructions](https://developer.cybersource.com/docs/cybs/en-us/platform/developer/all/rest/rest-getting-started/restgs-jwt-shared-secret-intro/restgs-go-live-shared-secret-intro.html) and activate the merchant for your processor. The older screenshots below are interface references, not proof of a new registration or a working connection.

![Historical CyberSource sign-in card with empty Organization ID, Username and Password fields, an Organization ID required message, Log in and Test login.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/6eab0b28a9cf2939eef93e1fe16bb48ee0bcd6c366fd35dc2f81c740d1ce0b77.png)
Older CyberSource login reference from the source’s 2022 interface. It shows sign-in fields, not an account-registration form. Choose the correct Test or Production Business Center for your account.

Find the **Merchant ID** of the transacting merchant in Business Center. It identifies the merchant whose credentials you will use. The AXL field is labeled **Organization ID** and stores this merchant ID; do not substitute your username or an unrelated account ID.

![Historical CyberSource dashboard header with separate Account ID and Merchant ID labels; both values are concealed in the source.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/69fb0ce248ae1b12a898029c83bb0ed3a1c94212c92a6162284a824c57fc8077.png)
Older header reference showing the distinction between **Account ID** and **Merchant ID**. The source conceals both values. Use your own transacting merchant ID.

In the appropriate Business Center environment, open **Payment Configuration → Key Management**. Follow the [current shared-secret key guide](https://developer.cybersource.com/docs/cybs/en-us/platform/developer/all/rest/rest-getting-started/restgs-sdk-intro/restgs-sdk-key-intro/restgs-sdk-key-shared-secret-intro.html) if the layout differs from the reference images.

![Historical CyberSource dashboard with Payment Configuration expanded and Key Management indicated in the navigation.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/26b45306c2572f828f99cdfdba864548b6f8db1625b5d35534370d0f0a43ff88.png)
Older CyberSource navigation reference in English. **Key Management** is under **Payment Configuration**. The dashboard’s empty key summary is incidental to this menu example.

On the Key Management page, choose **Generate key**.

![Historical CyberSource Key Management header and search filters with Generate key highlighted and a test-server banner; account identifiers are concealed.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/103faf10abff4adf527018e1feaec2e6f6e2f5ad7c51c11df76af419e6799a03.png)
Older Key Management reference. The banner says the source account is on the **test server**. Create and copy credentials in the same environment you will select in AXL.

Under REST APIs, choose **REST – Shared Secret**, then **Generate key**. In the current workflow, review the key details and confirm generation on the following page. Follow the provider’s current prompts; the older screenshot does not show that extra review page.

![Historical CyberSource complete Create Key form with REST Shared Secret selected and Generate key and Cancel buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5ffb60bd78b8e282780535927d55372541069842e3aad7a52bccc16ffc1e37ae.png)
Older key-type selection reference. Choose **REST – Shared Secret** for the key pair described here. Other key types shown in the source are not interchangeable with the fields in this AXL form.

Copy the **Key** value (the key ID) and **Shared Secret** value. In AXL, these map to **Key** and **Secret Key**, respectively. Download the key file if needed and store it and the credentials securely. Do not share the secret in screenshots or public documents.

![Historical CyberSource Key Generation form with Key and Shared Secret values concealed in the source, copy icons, Download key, Generate another key and Cancel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/5490ff63481066987c0f967761646ca8eed28a63679aa03bef13312a505e2e53.png)
Older generated-key reference. **Key** is the key ID; **Shared Secret** maps to AXL’s Secret Key. All original credential concealment is preserved. This is not evidence that a key was generated during this documentation update.

## Connect CyberSource to AXL

Next, connect CyberSource to AXL. To let your customers pay for your products and services, you need to add the payment gateway to your account.

In AXL, go to Settings → Payment Gateways and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the page shows the list of gateways right away.

If **CyberSource** is not visible in the provider list, click **More** to reveal the additional gateways.

![Current AXL payment-gateway chooser with its initial provider list and More button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
Open **Settings → Payment Gateways → Add Payment Gateway**. Click **More** to reveal additional providers, including CyberSource.

Click "More" if you don't see CyberSource, then select "CyberSource". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title: Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description: Add a description of this payment method. Customers will see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text: Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method: Select this checkbox if this should be the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website: Select this checkbox to make this payment method available on your website.
6. Currency: Select the currency you plan to accept payments in. If you sell in several markets, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept a different currency through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
7. Organization ID: Enter the Merchant ID you copied from the CyberSource website.
8. Key: Enter the Key you copied from the CyberSource website.
9. Secret Key: Enter the Shared Secret Key you copied from the CyberSource website.
10. Test Mode: Select this checkbox when using credentials from the Test Business Center. Leave it off only for your activated production merchant and production key pair. Changing the checkbox does not convert credentials between environments.

![CyberSource New Payment Gateway with general settings, empty Organization ID, Key and Secret Key fields, Test Mode, and Cancel and Create buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b9842dcc3f36a2e5fdb446e78cd097c28586d8bb159e79b2f49d46305a9696ab.png)
Current unsaved CyberSource form. Enter your own merchant credentials, then use Create when the configuration is ready.

When the required fields are complete and the environment matches your credentials, click **Create** to save the gateway. It appears in the gateway list. Saving the form alone does not verify merchant activation, credential validity or a successful payment.

---

# Mobbex Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/mobbex-settings

> Connect Mobbex to your AXL account with an API Key and Access Token to accept online payments.

Connect Mobbex to AXL using an application authorized for your merchant account. This guide explains how to obtain the application’s API Key and the merchant’s Access Token, then enter them in an AXL payment gateway.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Open the Mobbex Console

Create Your Development Credentials

Connect Mobbex to AXL

## Open the Mobbex Console

Depending on your account type, you can sign in to the [Fresa](https://fresapagos.com/console/) or [Mobbex](https://mobbex.com/console/) console. From there you can manage your account and link an app to integrate payments.

## Create Your Development Credentials

Use an application authorized for your merchant. Follow Mobbex's [official credential guide](https://ayuda.mobbex.com/credenciales-para-integracion-a-traves-de-api):

1. In the Mobbex console, open the settings gear and **Portal de Desarrolladores**, or open the [Developers Portal](https://mobbex.com/devportal/).
2. For a new application, click **+**, enter **Name**, **Description** and **Application URL**, then click **Create (Crear)**. Otherwise, use your existing application. Click **Manage (Gestionar)**.
3. Inside the application, click **+ &gt; Request Access (Solicitar Acceso)**. Search for your merchant by **CUIT** without hyphens or slashes, or by legal business name. Click **Search (Buscar)** and select the merchant.
4. Return to the Mobbex console. Open **APP/E-Commerce &gt; Manage (Administrar)**, locate the application's access request and click **Authorize (Autorizar)**. Skip the request and authorization steps if this application already has access to your merchant.
5. Return to the [Developers Portal](https://mobbex.com/devportal/) and click **Manage** for the same application. Confirm the merchant is active, then open **View Credentials (Ver credenciales)**. Copy the **API Key** and **Access Token** into the matching AXL fields. Keep both values private.

## Connect Mobbex to AXL

Next, connect Mobbex to AXL.
In AXL, go to Settings → Payment Gateways and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the page shows the list of gateways right away.

If **Mobbex** is not visible in the provider list, click **More** to reveal the additional gateways.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with provider cards, including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Mercado Pago and BitPay, plus More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
After Add Payment Gateway, click More to find Mobbex. Then select its provider card.

Click "More" if you don't see Mobbex, then select "Mobbex". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title: Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description: Add a description of this payment method. Customers will see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text: Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method: Select this checkbox if this should be the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website: Select this checkbox to make this payment method available on your website.
6. Currency: Select the currency you plan to accept payments in. If you sell in several markets, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept a different currency through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
7. API Key: Enter the API Key you copied from the Mobbex website in step 2.
8. Access Token: Enter the Access Token you copied from the Mobbex website.
9. Test Mode: Select this checkbox to run test payments without real money.
10. Show pop-up window: Select this checkbox to open the payment form in a pop-up window at checkout instead of redirecting customers to a separate payment page.

![Mobbex New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and API Key, Access Token, Test Mode and Show pop-up window, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/13f7587eefd763e229aebfd8542bfaca0eb110e9d46b96ca684221d1fd068ca1.png)
Unsaved Mobbex setup example with credential fields left empty. Enter the credentials described above, review the settings, then click Create.

When you've filled in the form, click "Create". Mobbex now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# WayForPay Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/wayforpay-settings

> Connect WayForPay to your AXL account to accept card and online payments.

Connect a WayForPay shop to AXL to accept online payments. You will use that shop’s merchant identifier and secret key when adding the payment gateway.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Create a WayForPay Account

Connect WayForPay to AXL

## Create a WayForPay Account

If you do not have a merchant account, follow [WayForPay’s registration instructions](https://help.wayforpay.com/view/1737798). Registration uses your mobile number and a one-time verification code, then guides you through creating a shop.

If you already have a WayForPay account, sign in to it instead.

In your WayForPay account, open **Shop Settings** and select the shop you want to connect, or choose **Create shop** if you still need one. Provide the website or social-page address, contact email and business activity requested by the shop form. Follow the shop’s **Activation** requirements before accepting live customer payments; [WayForPay’s activation guide](https://help.wayforpay.com/view/1737806) explains the required details, documents and agreement.

![WayForPay documentation example of the Registration form with Site, Email, Activity, a terms checkbox and Create shop.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/f26135c275129bf284507fa60be728acbee8bd57189c0832334dc2824d01d540.png)
WayForPay’s registration illustration, in Ukrainian: enter the site, email and activity, review the terms, then choose Create shop. [Source: WayForPay help](https://help.wayforpay.com/view/1737798).

In your WayForPay account, open **Shop Settings**, select your shop, then find **Merchant details**. Follow the [official Merchant details guide](https://help.wayforpay.com/view/3342958) to locate **Merchant Login** and **Merchant Secret Key**. Copy **Merchant Login** into AXL’s **Account ID** field and **Merchant Secret Key** into **Secret Key**. Both values must belong to the same shop. AXL does not ask for **Merchant Password**.

![WayForPay documentation example of shop settings with activation steps and the Merchant details card containing hidden secret-key and password controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/3df8fa9fe11b1792a5469880936612024c8dc4a0a566624023d3c58fe27d357c.png)
WayForPay’s shop-settings illustration, in Ukrainian. Find Реквізити мерчанта (Merchant details) for the secret-key control. [Source: WayForPay help](https://help.wayforpay.com/view/1737868).

![WayForPay Merchant details documentation example showing Merchant Login and hidden Merchant Secret Key and Merchant Password controls.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/00e53651e9503b246a8f09878d737ca6957470be0c1a53b912563f79e8f2eb2f.png)
WayForPay’s Merchant details reference, in Ukrainian, labels the two integration values Merchant Login and Merchant Secret Key. [Source: WayForPay help](https://help.wayforpay.com/view/3342958).

## Connect WayForPay to AXL

Next, connect WayForPay to AXL.
In AXL, go to Settings → Payment Gateways and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the page shows the list of gateways right away.

If **WayForPay** is not visible in the provider list, click **More** to reveal the additional gateways.

![Add Payment Gateway picker with its More button for revealing additional providers.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
Open Add Payment Gateway, click More, then choose WayForPay.

Click "More" if you don't see WayForPay, then select "WayForPay". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title: Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description: Add a description of this payment method. Customers will see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text: Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method: Select this checkbox if this should be the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website: Select this checkbox to make this payment method available on your website.
6. Save card details for future payments where supported. Enable this for AXL subscription or upsell flows that need to reuse a supported card. AXL then uses a payment flow that requests reusable payment details for later charges. The first payment must succeed and provide a reusable payment method; a successful one-time payment alone does not verify that later charges are ready. Use [WayForPay's test merchant instructions](https://wiki.wayforpay.com/en/view/852472) when testing the integration, and check card reuse as a separate scenario.
7. Currency: Select the currency you plan to accept payments in. If you sell in several markets, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept a different currency through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
8. Account ID: Enter the Merchant Login you copied from the WayForPay website in step 1.
9. Secret Key: Enter the Merchant Secret Key you copied from the WayForPay website.
10. Show pop-up window: Select this checkbox to open the payment form in a pop-up window at checkout instead of redirecting customers to a separate payment page.

![New WayForPay payment gateway with general settings, Account ID, Secret Key, pop-up option and Cancel and Create buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fb1cd79cfb1c1891ef43e32cab626401837625a28ad744b218dd88b265eb9aa9.png)
WayForPay setup before connecting: the example title is filled in, while Account ID and Secret Key are empty. Review Save card details for future payments where supported and the other settings before clicking Create.

When you've filled in the form, click "Create". WayForPay now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# Midtrans Settings

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/midtrans-settings

> Connect Midtrans to your AXL account with your Client Key and Server Key to accept payments in Indonesia.

Connect Midtrans to AXL to accept payments for your products and services. This guide explains how to select the Midtrans environment, find its Client Key and Server Key, and enter them in an AXL payment gateway.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Create a Midtrans Account

Connect Midtrans to AXL

## Create a Midtrans Account

To get started, create a Midtrans account. Go to the [official Midtrans website](https://midtrans.com/) and register.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete registration.

Sign in to the Midtrans Merchant Administration Portal (MAP). Select the **Sandbox** or **Production** environment you intend to connect, then open **Settings → Access Keys**. Midtrans gives each environment a different **Client Key** and **Server Key**. See the official [account and access-key guide](https://docs.midtrans.com/docs/midtrans-account).

![Historical Midtrans Settings and Access Keys page showing Merchant ID, Client Key and Server Key labels; account, environment and credential values are concealed in the source image.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9466d16656197db7b996500ba653d05709103297f64a8c4e3780527fc38f8bee.png)
Older Midtrans interface reference in English. The Client Key and Server Key rows map to the matching AXL fields. The source image hides the selected environment, so choose Sandbox or Production in your own account and copy both keys from that same environment. Follow the current [Midtrans access-key guide](https://docs.midtrans.com/docs/midtrans-account); this is not a new dashboard capture.

**Copy the Client Key and Server Key from the same merchant and environment**. Enter them into the matching AXL fields. Keep the Server Key confidential.

## Connect Midtrans to AXL

Next, connect Midtrans to AXL. To let your customers pay for your products and services, you need to add the payment gateway to your account.

In AXL, go to Settings → Payment Gateways and click "Add Payment Gateway". If you haven't added a gateway yet, the page shows the list of gateways right away.

If **Midtrans** is not visible in the provider list, click **More** to reveal the additional gateways.

![Add Payment Gateway chooser with provider cards, including Stripe, PayPal, Square, Mercado Pago and BitPay, plus More.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/fc508a97ad2fe066d4de2845fe7e3c0160330a6e12475804c081dfaf3a8ff65e.png)
After Add Payment Gateway, click More to find Midtrans. Then select its provider card.

Click "More" if you don't see Midtrans, then select "Midtrans". In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Title: Enter a name for this payment gateway.
2. Description: Add a description of this payment method. Customers will see it on your website.
3. Payment Button Text: Enter the text for the payment button on your website.
4. Primary Payment Method: Select this checkbox if this should be the main payment method in your account.
5. Show on Website: Select this checkbox to make this payment method available on your website.
6. Currency: Select the currency you plan to accept payments in. If you sell in several markets, you can set a different currency for each payment gateway. For example, you can sell courses in US dollars through one gateway and accept a different currency through another. Choose one of the currencies supported by this gateway; the form shows the available options.
7. Client Key: Enter the Client Key you copied from the Midtrans website in step 1.
8. Server Key: Enter the Server Key you copied from the Midtrans website.
9. Test Mode: Select this checkbox when using the Sandbox Client Key and Server Key. For live payments, use the Production keys and clear Test Mode after completing Midtrans activation. Changing the checkbox does not convert a Sandbox key into a Production key.

![Midtrans New Payment Gateway with a Northstar Academy title and Client Key, Server Key and Test Mode, empty credentials and Cancel/Create.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/bd8171fecdbc9dbd182795d4762d4bcc96057fe31f5c0a6c49f477a83622cabe.png)
Unsaved Midtrans setup example with credential fields left empty. Enter the credentials described above, review the settings, then click Create.

When you've filled in the form, click "Create". Midtrans now appears in your list of payment gateways.

---

# Domains

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/domains

> Learn what a domain is, then connect your own domain or subdomain to your AXL website and set up a domain for sending email.

Connect a Domain You Own · Manage Website, Email, and Membership Addresses

A domain is a unique name that identifies a website on the internet. It's the address people use to find and visit your site. A domain has two parts: the name (for example, "example") and the domain extension, also called the top-level domain (for example, ".com", ".org", or ".net"). Together they form the full address, such as "example.com".

A domain helps you build your brand, stand out from competitors, and create a unique online identity. A good domain name makes your business more memorable and builds trust. Having your own domain also makes your website or business look more professional than a free hosting address.

You can connect a domain you already own to AXL and use it to sell from your account.

## Connect a Domain You Own

Open **Settings → Domains**. Website addresses and email domains appear in one list. Click **Connect Your Own** to use a domain you already own. The domain stays registered with your registrar; this action is different from **Transfer a Domain** or **Buy a Domain**.

![Settings, Domains list filtered to example.com, which is connected at the DNS provider and used for the Northstar Academy Executive Programs site.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/b89f1ca89370cf0979ccc82c297606188e19df103d42ae35ce95413c83bc442c.png)
Settings → Domains lists every domain in the account with its status, DNS location, and what it is used for. Connect Your Own is at the top right.

1. Enter your domain, such as `example.com`, or a subdomain, such as `courses.example.com`. Click **Next**.
2. On **Connection Method**, choose **Move DNS to AXL** or **Keep DNS with your provider and add records manually**. With AXL DNS, you verify ownership and change the nameservers at your registrar. With your existing provider, you add the records AXL shows you at that provider. Review the DNS hosting terms displayed in the form before choosing AXL DNS.
3. Under **Use This Domain For**, turn on the uses you need. For a website, enable **Open a site on this domain** and choose the site. You can make the address the site's main domain and redirect its `www` address to it. Enable **Send email from this domain** for email. For the membership portal, enable **Open the membership area on a subdomain** and enter a prefix such as `learn`.
4. Check the selected site and addresses, then click **Connect**. Continue with the instructions for your chosen DNS method below. A domain being listed in AXL does not, by itself, mean that its website, email, and HTTPS certificate are ready.

![Connection Method for northstar-learning.example with manual DNS selected and website, email, and membership-area uses enabled for Northstar Academy.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/a1f6ef771f46cd653f3773cf15005593492f06e5ce8fed467098027ba15d8bde.png)
Choose where DNS will be managed and what the domain will be used for. This example shows the form before Connect is submitted.

### Keep DNS with Your Provider

After connecting, use the **Records** step or open the domain from the list and select **DNS Records**. AXL shows the records required for the website, email, and membership addresses you selected. If the domain is not in use yet, open **Usage** and link the intended service first.

1. Open the DNS settings at the provider that currently manages your domain's DNS. Use the record type, host, and value shown for *your* address in AXL; do not copy values from an article screenshot.
2. Add or update each required record. The DNS check distinguishes missing records from values that need replacement or merging. If an A record has several values, enter every value, each on its own line in that record set, or in separate records with the same host if that is how your provider works.
3. Return to AXL and use **Check Again** in the DNS check. Read the individual results and their check time. An unsuccessful check can still show an earlier result; it is not confirmation that the new records are correct.
4. Open **Overview** and check the website, email, and certificate states separately. DNS propagation and certificate issuance take time. Once the website's certificate is issued, open your HTTPS address and confirm that the intended site loads.

![DNS Records tab for example.com with the website address northstar.example.com, one missing A record, its host and value, and the Check Again and Copy Instructions buttons.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9d01f47848e35c4dfc5df7945a320693259ee1248818af91d0fc5b965116ae91.png)
DNS Records shows each record your DNS provider still needs. After adding it, click Check Again; Copy Instructions copies the list for whoever manages your DNS.

For email, follow the records shown for your sending domain, including SPF, DKIM, and any tracking or bounce records. Optional records are marked separately. If you need incoming email, also follow the displayed MX instructions. Then use **Usage → Email → Sending Profiles** to choose the domain in a sending profile.

### Move DNS to AXL

Follow the **Ownership** step to add the displayed TXT record at your current DNS provider. Use the name and value from your own domain card, then check the record in AXL. After verification, follow **Nameservers**: review the copied records and replace the nameservers at your registrar with the AXL nameservers shown for your domain. Use **Check Now** to check the change. Keep following the domain's status until delegation and the required services are ready.

For an existing connected domain, the **Nameservers** tab shows where DNS is managed and, when available, offers **Move DNS Management to AXL**. Moving DNS and transferring the domain's registration are different operations. If registration remains elsewhere, renewals and registrant details are still managed at that registrar.

### Add Website, Email, and Membership Addresses

Open the domain in **Settings → Domains** and select **Usage**.

- **Main website:** in **Addresses**, choose the site, review the main-domain and `www` redirect options, and use the button to open that site on this domain. Its label can include the selected site and resulting address.
- **Website subdomain:** under **Addresses**, click **Add Address**. Enter a prefix such as `courses`, select the site, and click the resulting address button. **Cancel** closes the form without adding it.
- **Email subdomain:** under **Email**, click **Add Address**. Enter a prefix such as `mail`, check the resulting address, and submit it. Its DNS records then appear with the address. On AXL DNS they are managed by AXL; with your own DNS provider, add the displayed records there.
- **Membership portal:** under **Membership Area**, enter the subdomain prefix and use the button showing the resulting address. If DNS stays with your provider, add the displayed A-record values for that host.

![Usage tab for example.com: Addresses with northstar.example.com linked to the Northstar Academy Executive Programs site and marked Not Verified, its missing A record, then the site selector, main-domain and www redirect options, Open Site on This Domain, and Add Address.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/94d6fb9115af550a8d7c3b2371b04c447e40c2f8fe155b18cbfbacf5f19cc1c4.png)
In Usage, Addresses lists each linked address with its status and DNS check. Below it, choose a site, set the main-domain and www options, or click Add Address for a subdomain.

After adding an address, check its status in **Usage** and **Overview**. Check email verification and website HTTPS separately. The **History** tab records domain-related events.

![Overview tab for example.com: a Waiting for DNS Records notice, What's Working with the Northstar site address pending, Registration at another registrar, and DNS at the domain's own provider.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/9d24691f4e03facbb73bd29a849ab3f9c76feeb4d3daaa2e6b2337105e8decd2.png)
Overview summarizes what already works on the domain and what still needs DNS records.

---

# API Keys

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/api-keys

> Learn what an API key is, how to create one in AXL, and how to set its access rights.

An API (Application Programming Interface) is a set of rules that lets one program use the features of another. It defines how different software components work with each other.

An API key is a unique identifier that authenticates requests to your account. API keys let you connect third-party programs to your websites or exchange data between services.

You can create your own API keys in AXL and use them in your projects.

## How to Create an API Key

Go to Settings → API Keys. Click "Create API Key".

![API Keys page with Create API Key, Title and Date Created columns, and an empty No data list.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/daae6e4709a0ae4cb0b4004215351a49a3bf03fe0fd35d1d5b2dc45f58672056.png)
Open Settings → API Keys and click Create API Key. This example shows the list before a key has been created.

In the **New API Key** panel, enter an internal **Title** that identifies the integration, such as *Northstar Academy Reporting*, then click **Create** at the bottom of the panel.

After you click **Create**, AXL opens the key’s edit panel. To return to it later, click the key’s title or the pencil (**Edit**) icon in the list.

In the **Key** field, click the copy icon to copy the complete value beginning with `Bearer`. Use that complete value as the `Authorization` header in the integration that connects to AXL. Keep it out of public website code and screenshots.

Select the permissions this integration needs in the permissions tree, then click **Save**. Reopen the key to check the saved permissions before using it.

There's no limit to the number of API keys you can create for your account.

---

# Billing

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/billing

> Manage your AXL plan, balance, usage, transactions, and payment methods on the Billing page.

Use **Settings → Billing** to review your AXL plan, account balance, usage charges, payment methods, and transaction history.

Click a section to jump to its description:

Billing

Billing Information

Usage Summary

Transaction History

Payment Methods

## Billing

Go to Settings → Billing. Here you'll find details about your plan, your current balance, and your full transaction history.

## Billing Information

The Billing Information card shows:

- Current Balance. The amount available in your account. Click "Add Funds" to top it up.
- Plan. Your current plan. Click the plan name to see the details of your plan.
- Auto-Recharge. Set up automatic top-ups for your account. You need a payment method on file. Click "Enable", then set the recharge options in the Auto-Recharge Settings window.

![Billing Information showing balance and bonus, disabled Auto-Recharge with Enable, the current plan and minimum payment.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/05c1a131c36217964d41a8c123ad46d8ce610121e3dab802adb752717429f709.png)

To pay for your plan, click **Add Funds**, enter the amount, and follow the on-screen instructions. In the flow shown below, the payment continues on the payment provider’s side, and the notice explains that the card is saved for future top-ups. Other billing configurations may offer payment-method choices in this window.

![Add Funds modal with current balance, amount, promo-code link, Add Funds button, provider-payment and saved-card notice, and Cancel.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/4f79b2cd53083281e5ec7fb45a2a3fe99f83f54e6a687164e56d9c3b5f0ce80a.png)

## Usage Summary

The Usage Summary card shows how much of each metered feature you've used. If your usage goes over your plan's limits, it also shows the extra charge. For a full breakdown, click "Details".

![Usage Summary for October 2026 showing metered categories, counts and amounts, Calls and Numbers, AI Features, Total Spend and Details.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/668f11bb11b1e9dd9c626fe043dac4eabc75cb6dc6c120ae9d0128b84b8ddffc.png)

## Transaction History

The Transaction History card lists your recent transactions. For each one it shows the status (the stage of payment processing), the date created, the payment method, and the amount. You can sort the list by status, date, or amount.

![Transaction History showing three existing successful manual entries, dates, payment method, amounts and row actions.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/56812750cee29b10ae8c640fbf8f9c80c50c64102162d2d0320173250a05420d.png)

## Payment Methods

The Payment Methods card shows the payment methods linked to your account. If it shows **Add Card**, clicking it opens the secure card-setup flow. Follow the instructions there to link your card.

![Payment Methods card with no saved methods and the Add Card button.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/08b0ea76250866a9530d3e3efbb27f2a67911207aa18b11e91a1934c2a30f6f8.png)

Some billing configurations instead show **Add payment method**. That button opens a local information dialog. In that dialog, click **Add New Card** and follow the on-screen instructions. Review any verification-charge explanation before continuing.

Once your card is confirmed, you can use it for auto-recharge.

## Review Usage and Spending

In **Usage Summary**, choose the billing month to review the usage counts and charges by category. The card shows **Total Spend** and a **Details** button.

**AI Functions** separates monthly limits for **Team Members**, **Calls**, **AI Agents**, and **Automation**. The page explains that an empty amount leaves that category unlimited and that limits reset at the start of the billing period. **Usage Breakdown** shows where AI spending went.

The **Calls & Numbers** card groups telephony spending into calls, SMS, numbers, and approvals.

![AI Functions showing monthly limits for Team Members, Calls, AI Agents and Automation, plus spending, credits and expanded Usage Breakdown.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/d61fac85bc55cc201f020c101dcd6dd556d85baf561a55c6fd07ec8d2865c3e9.png)
Review category limits and the expanded spending breakdown. The values shown belong to this account and billing period.

![Calls and Numbers spending card itemizing calls, SMS, number rental and purchase, and approval charges.](https://cdn.app.axl.tech/kb/8a785dd0ce9dd18471a32650b3982da8310bfa6d3cc5278ae0fe462b50100f75.png)
Calls and Numbers separates the current month’s telephony charges by category.

---

# Import & Export

URL: https://docs.axl.tech/sharing-settings

> Share website pages between AXL accounts: export materials from one account and import them into another.

In "Import & Export", you can share materials from your account with other AXL accounts. Prepare materials for export, then import them into another account. Website pages are imported in full, including images and settings (except automations).

Click a section below to jump to it:
Open Import & ExportExport MaterialsImport Materials

Open Import & Export

Go to "Settings" → "Import & Export". You can do two things here: export materials and import materials.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/G8Jj6YOW-kmLWJBNc-eGxg.png)

Export Materials

Exporting packages website pages from your account so another account can import them.

Click "Export Materials".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/X_tuReX5ZU2VU77N831svA.png)

In the panel that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Name. Enter a name for the export. People who import it will see this name.
2. Description. Add a description for this export. People who import it will see this description.
3. Access Type. Choose who can access the materials. There are two options:

    - Public. Anyone with the export link can import the materials.
    - Limited to Contacts. Only the contacts you select can import the materials. AXL checks the email address of the AXL admin who is importing. If it matches a contact in your account, import access is granted.
Use the "Contact Filter" to choose which contacts can import the materials. Click "Edit Filter" and set the filter conditions. To learn how to build a contact filter, see the article "[Filtering and search terms](https://docs.axl.tech/filtering-and-search-terms)".
4. Prevent re-exporting materials. Select the checkbox to stop people who import your materials from exporting them again.
5. Materials. Add the materials to export. Click "Add Material" and select website pages from the list.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/h4ELYULN5ESIQebtIhFJ4g.png)

Click "Create". Your export then appears in the list on the "Exports" tab. The list shows:

1. Name. The name and ID of the export. Click "Share" to copy the export link, then send the link to the recipient.
2. Date Created. The exact date and time the export was created.
3. Last Updated. The exact date and time of the last update to the export.
4. Access Type. Whether the export is public or limited to contacts.
5. Actions:
The "Share" icon. Click it to copy the export link.
The "View import history" icon. Click it to see when your materials were imported into other accounts.
The "Edit export" icon. Click it to change the export's settings.
The "Delete" icon. Click it and confirm to delete the export.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/6eJu6rDHB02R-QXnp2b6AQ.png)

Click the "View import history" icon. A window opens with the complete list of times your materials were imported into other accounts. It shows:

1. Export ID. The name and description of the export.
2. Status. The status of the import: Queued, In Progress, Completed, or Error.
3. Email. The email address of the AXL admin who imported the materials.
4. Account. The name of the account that imported the materials.
5. Import Date. The exact date and time of the import.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/WQ5_VUFhUUaO-Fb0UWNQ7w.jpg)

Import Materials

Importing brings website pages from another account into yours.

Click "Import Materials".
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/VNi_4m9El0epMO7QKKWpIg.png)

In the window that opens, fill in the fields:

1. Export ID. Enter the export ID. You can get the ID (or a direct link) from the person who is sharing the materials with you.
2. Email. Enter your email address. If the export is limited to contacts, AXL checks this email to confirm you're allowed to import it.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/C1v3VMADzkSuvjTqs2UWuA.png)

Click "Continue" to show more fields: the name, the description, and the list of materials to import.
Then, in the "Website" field, select the website you want to import the pages into.
![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/EqzsmXMgDEO56g_nQcjBtA.png)

Click "Import Materials". Your import then appears in the list on the "Imports" tab. The list shows:

1. Export ID. The name and description of the export.
2. Status. The status of the import: Queued, In Progress, Completed, or Error.
3. Email. The email address of the AXL admin who imported the materials.
4. Import Date. The exact date and time of the import.
5. Admin. The profile of the AXL admin who imported the materials. Click the admin's name to open their profile.
6. Website. The name of the website the materials were imported into. Click the website name to open it.
7. The "Import Details" icon (an eye). Click it to open a window with more information about the import.

![](https://cdn.accelonline.io/manager/images/Iwi1v2RM4EC5P6CW3g7oig.png)